BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH LỚP 8 THEO CHƯƠNG TRÌNH THÍ ĐIỂM BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP THEO TỪNG UNIT CẢ NĂM by Dạy Kèm Quy Nhơn Official

BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH THEO CHƯƠNG TRÌNH THÍ ĐIỂM

vectorstock.com/7952556

Ths Nguyễn Thanh Tú eBook Collection

DẠY KÈM QUY NHƠN EBOOK PHÁT TRIỂN NỘI DUNG

BÀI TẬP TIẾNG ANH LỚP 8 THEO CHƯƠNG TRÌNH THÍ ĐIỂM BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP THEO TỪNG UNIT CẢ NĂM WITH ANSWER KEY (PHIÊN BẢN DẠY KÈM QUY NHƠN) WORD VERSION | 2021 EDITION ORDER NOW / CHUYỂN GIAO QUA EMAIL TAILIEUCHUANTHAMKHAO@GMAIL.COM Tài liệu chuẩn tham khảo Phát triển kênh bởi Ths Nguyễn Thanh Tú Đơn vị tài trợ / phát hành / chia sẻ học thuật : Nguyen Thanh Tu Group Hỗ trợ trực tuyến Fb www.facebook.com/DayKemQuyNhon Mobi/Zalo 0905779594

UNIT 1: LEISURE ACTIVITIES Hoạt động giải trí

Love She loves training her dog She loves to train her dog Hate He hates eating out He hates to eat out Prefer My mother prefers going jogging My mother prefers to go jogging 2. Verbs + V-ing Những động từ chỉ đi với danh động từ Verbs Verbs + V-ing Adore They adore eating ice-cream Fancy Do you fancy making crafts? Don’t mind I don’t mind cooking Dislike Does he dislike swimming? Detest I detest doing housework

A. VOCABULARY 1. adore (v) /əˈdɔː/: yêu thích, mê thích 2. addicted (adj) /əˈdɪktɪd/: nghiện (thích) cái gì 3. beach game (n) /biːtʃ ɡeɪm/: trò thể thao trên bãi biển 4. bracelet (n) /ˈbreɪslət/: vòng đeo tay 5. communicate (v) /kəˈmjuːnɪkeɪt/: giao tiếp 6. community centre (n) /kəˈmjuːnəti ˈsentə/: trung tâm văn hoá cộng đồng 7. craft (n) /krɑːft/: đồ thủ công 8. craft kit (n) /krɑːft kɪt/: bộ dụng cụ làm thủ công 9. cultural event (n) /ˈkʌltʃərəl ɪˈvent/: sự kiện văn hoá 10. detest (v) /dɪˈtest/: ghét 11. DIY (n) /ˌdiː aɪ ˈwaɪ/: đồ tự làm, tự sửa 12. don’t mind (v) /dəʊnt maɪnd/: không ngại, không ghét lắm 13. hang out (v) /hæŋ aʊt/: đi chơi với bạn bè 14. hooked on (adj)=keen on=fond of=interested in yêu thích cái gì 15. It’s right up my street! (idiom) /ɪts raɪt ʌp maɪ striːt/: Đúng vị của tớ! 16. join (v) /dʒɔɪn/: tham gia 17. leisure (n) /ˈleʒə/: sự thư giãn nghỉ ngơi 18. leisure activity (n) /ˈleʒə ækˈtɪvəti/: hoạt động thư giãn nghỉ ngơi 19. leisure time (n) /ˈleʒə taɪm/: thời gian thư giãn nghỉ ngơi 20. netlingo (n) /netˈlɪŋɡəʊ/: ngôn ngữ dùng để giao tiếp trên mạng 21. people watching (n) /ˈpiːpl wɒtʃɪŋ/: ngắm người qua lại 22. relax (v) /rɪˈlæks/: thư giãn 23. satisfied (adj) /ˈsætɪsfaɪd/: hài lòng 24. socialise (v) /ˈsəʊʃəlaɪz/: giao tiếp để tạo mối quan hệ 25. weird (adj) /wɪəd/: kì cục 26. window shopping (n) /ˈwɪndəʊ ˈʃɒpɪŋ/: đi chơi ngắm đồ bày ở cửa hàng 27. virtual (adj) /ˈvɜːtʃuəl/: ảo (chỉ có ở trên mạng) B. GRAMMAR REVIEW CÁC ĐỘNG TỪ DIỄN ĐẠT SỰ YÊU THÍCH (VERBS OF LIKING) 1. VERBS OF LIKING: Động từ Nghĩa Adore Yêu thích, mê mẩn Love Yêu Like/ enjoy/ fancy Thích Don’t mind Không phiền Dislike/ don’t like Không thích Hate Ghét Detest Căm ghét 2.VERBS OF LIKING + V_ING / TO V: -Khi muốn dùng một động từ chỉ một hàng động khác ở sau động từ chỉ sự thích, ta phải sử dụng danh động từ (V_ing) hoặc động từ nguyên thể co “to” (toV) 1.Verbs + V-ing/ to V Những động từ đi với cả danh động từ và động từ nguyên thể có “to” mà không đổi về nghĩa Verbs Verbs + V-ing Verbs +to V Like I like skateboarding in my free time I like to skateboard in my free time 1

BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN: Bài 1: Hoàn thành những câu sau, sử dụng dạng nguyên thể có (to)(toV) của động từ trong ngoặc: 1.Everyone likes (eat)_________ice cream. 2.Do you prefer (read)books in your freetime? 3.I hate(watch)________horror movies? 4.Many people prefer(go)______travelling on holidays. 5.My father loves(play)__________golf with his friends. 6.I prefer (not stay)__________up too late. 7. What does your sister love(do)_________in her spare time? 8.I used to prefer(hang out)_________with my friends at weekend. 9. I think not many people like(listen)________to her music. 10. Teenagers love (surf)_________the web to while away their freetime. Bài 2: Hoàn thành những câu sau, sử dụng dạng danh động từ (V-ing) của động từ trong ngoặc: 1.My mother dislikes(prepare)_______the meals. 2.Do you enjoy(do)________DIY in your freetime? 3. I detest (have) __________a conversation with John. 4.Do you think Jane prefers(not socialise)___________with other students? 5.I don’t mind(explain)_______the problem again. 6.Ann fancies(listen)___________to songs of her favourite singer. 7.My friend adores(spend)_______time with her cats. 8.I always love(try)________new things when I go travelling. 9.Mr.Smith hates(drive)_________his old car. 10.Anne prefers(not go)_________out too late. Bài 3:Điền dạng thích hợp của động từ trong ngoặc để hoàn thành các câu sau: 1.Did you enjoy(watch)______the comedy last night? 2.Many people prefer(do)______gardening after their retirement. 3.My cat dislikes(sleep)________on the floor. 4.My father doesn’t mind(work)______hard. 5.My cousin doesn’t like(study)_________Math and Chemistry. 6.They dislike(talk)__________with each other. 7.Jim and Jane don’t fancy(go)__________out tomorrow. 8.Did you hate(eat)______vegetables when you was small? 9.she didn’t prefer(tell)________him about her plan. 10.James enjoys(have)_______dinner in a luxury restaurant. 11.I hope my mother will enjoy(spend)_______time with her grandchildren. 2

12.Some people enjoy(take)______a shower in the morning. 13.I think your brother won’t mind(lend)________you a helping hand. 14.My boyfriend dislike(wait)____________. 15.What do you detest(do)__________the most? Bài 4: Dựa vào các từ cho sẵn, viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh: 1.Peter/ prefer/ play/ computer games/ in his free time. __________________________________________________________________________________ 2.You/ hate/ do/ the washing? __________________________________________________________________________________ 3.My father/ enjoy/ play/ sports/ and/ read/ books. __________________________________________________________________________________ 4.The teacher/ not mind/ help/ you/ with difficult exercises. __________________________________________________________________________________ 5.Jane/ not fancy/ read/ science books. __________________________________________________________________________________ 6.Which kind of juice/ you/ dislike/ drink/ the most? __________________________________________________________________________________ 7. Ann/ fancy/ do /DIY/ in her free time. __________________________________________________________________________________ 8. My father/ prefer/ not eat/ out. __________________________________________________________________________________ 9.Mr.Smith/ love/ go/ shopping/ at weekend. __________________________________________________________________________________ 10.Everyone/ adore/ receive/ presents/ on their birthday. __________________________________________________________________________________ BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG NÂNG CAO Bài 5: Đánh dấu(V) trước câu đúng, đánh dấu(X) trước câu sai và sửa lại cho đúng: 1.My sister doesn’t mind to look after my cat. 2.Jim dislikes going to the library because he likes reading books. 3.I prefer to not go out today. 4.I used to like watching cartoons on TV. 5.Does Mrs.Smith enjoy to cook? 6.Mary hates doing the housework and take after her baby sister. 7. In my freetime, I love to do DIY with my sister. 8.Josh detests to socialise with his co-workers. 9.Which movie does he fancy to watch? 10.I prefer hanging out with friends to playing computer games. Bài 6: Điền dạng đúng của các động từ chcho sẵn vào chỗ trống sao cho hợp lý: socialize detest Surf Write rely read Adore Hang out 1.My brother likes__________the Internet looking for new music. 2.I dislike_________too much on other people. I want to be independent. 3.Josh enjoys__________with his classmates after school. 4.My sister and I fancy_______novels when we have free time. 5.He’s very artitic. He enjoys________poems in his free time. 6.James_________talking with his neighbors because he finds them annoying. 7.My uncles loves__________with other people . he has many friends.

8.Ann__________working with children. She’s a teacher. Bài 7: Khoanh tròn vào đáp án đúng: Nowadays, leisure activities are totally different from the past. Many people no longer enjoy(1) ------ in outdoor activities after school. In stead, they(2)__________playing computer games or (3) ________the web in their free time. Some people (4)_______too much on computer and the Internet. For example, they prefer(5)______ messages to having a face-to-face conversation with friends. Even when people (6)________out with their friends, they rarely talk but they use their phones to surf web. However, many people dislike the Internet and the(7)________world. They hate to waste time on the computer and(8)______other activities such as reading, shopping or sporting. 1.A.participate B.to participate C. participating D. participates 2.A.fancy B.don’t mind C.dislike D.hate 3.A.sailing B. surfing C.swimming D.diving 4.A.play B.rely C.addict D.use 5.A.send B.to send C.to sending D. sends 6.A.play B.rely C.meet D.hang 7.A.virtual B.real C.fake D.new 8.A.dislike B.detest C.enjoy D.mind Bài 8: Đọc doạn văn sau và điền (T-true)trước câu đúng với nội dung bài đọc , điền (F-false) trước câu không đúng với nội dung bài đọc: LEISURE ACTIVITIES IN BRITAIN The weekends area a time for many leisure activities in Britain. British people often have to work five days a week from Monday to Friday is the precious time for family and friends. People enjoy various indoor and outdoor activities in Britain. According to the EU’s statistical office, British people spend abot 45% of their free time watching television, 24% of their free time socialising , 22-23% on sport and hobbies, and 10% on other activities. Other popular leisure activities are listening to the radio, listening to pre-recorded music, reading, DIY, garedning, eating out and going to the cinema. The most common leisure activity in the UK is watching television. The average viewing time is 25 hours per person per week. Almost all households have at least one television set. The second most popular activity in Britain is visiting or entertaining friends or relations. Another popular leisure activity is gardening. The British are known as a nation of gardeners. Most people have a garden on their property. Every town in Britain has one or more DIY centers and garden centres. These are like supermarkets for the home and garden. These places are very popular with British home-owners at the weekends. _______1.People enjoy various indoor activities Britain. _______2.British people spend more than half of their free time watching television. _______3.The most common leisure activity in the UK is visiting or entertaining friends or relations. _______4. All house holds have at least one television set. _______5.British people are all gardeners. _______6. All towns in Britain have one or more DIY centers and garden centres. TEST 1 UNIT 1 I. Find the word which has different sound in the part underlined. 1. A. laughed B. washed C. danced D. played 2. A. beds B. dogs C. porters D. books 3. A. pictures B. watches C. buses D. brushes 4. A. homework B. mother C. open D. judo B. eight C. celebrate D. penalty 5. A. leisure 6. A. fun B. sun C. surf D. cut 7. A. bracelet B. cake C. make D. hat 8. A. although B. laugh C. paragraph D. enough B. letter C. princess D. cinema 9. A. comedy 3

10. A. high B. sight C. this D. find B. agreed C. listened D. cleaned 11. A. stopped 12. A. meat B. seat C. great D. mean 13. A. call B. land C. fall D. ball 14. A. rather B. them C. neither D. think II. Choose the words that have the different stress from the others. 1. A. satisfied B. socialize C. volunteer D. exercise 2. A. information B. technology C. community D. activity 3. A. library B. museum C. melody D. favourite 4. A. protection B. addicted C. computer D. goldfish 5. A. skateboard B. sticker C. adore D. leisure III. Choose the best answer. 1. My dad doesn’t mind my mom from work every day. A. pick up B. picked up C. picking up D. picks up 2. Using computers too much may have harmful effects your minds and bodies. A. on B. to C. with D. onto 3. I love the people in my village. They are so and hospitable. A. friendly B. vast C. slow D. inconvenient 4. Among the , the Tay people have the largest population. A. groups B. majorities C. ethnic minorities D. ethnic cultures. 5. People in the countryside live than those in the city. A. happy B. more happily C. happily D. less happy 6. Viet Nam is multicultural country with 54 ethnic groups. A. a B. an C. the D. A and C 7. We to the countryside two months ago. A. go B. have gone C. went D. will go 8. What will you do if you the final examinations? A. will pass B. would pass C. pass D. passed 9. It rained hard. , my father went to work. A. Therefore B. However C. Because D. So 10. Your sister writes poems and stories, she? A. does B. doesn’t C. will D. won’t 11. Laura fell asleep during the lesson she was tired. A. so B. but C. because D. therefore 12. How much do you want? A. bananas B. eggs C. candies D. sugar 13. Tomorrow the director will have a meeting 8:00 am to 10:00 am. A. between B. from C. among D. in 14. We will start our trip 6 o’clock the morning. A. in / in B. at / in C. in / at D. at / at 15. We anything from James since we left school. A. haven’t heard B. heard C. don’t hear D. didn’t hear 16. You have lived in this city since 1998, ? A. haven’t you B. didn’t you C. did you D. have you 17. My students enjoy English very much. A. learn B. learnt C. learning D. to learn IV. Give the correct form of the following verbs. 1. Mai enjoy crafts, especially bracelets. (make) 2. you ever a buffalo? (ride) a long way to school. (go) 3. The children used to 4. They hate their son texting his friends all day. (see) 5. Do you fancy in the park this Sunday? (skateboard) V. Complete the sentences with the verb + -ing. do

play

ski

swim

1. Susan hates boxing but she loves football. 2. I don’t like in the pool at the sports centre. 3. Does she like shopping in the supermarket? 4. Peter loves judo. 5. They enjoy the Olympics on TV. 6. My brother and I really like in the Alps in February. VI. Match a word in column A with its antonym in column B. A B Answer 1. slim a. shy 1. __________ 2. careful b. boring 2. __________ 3. quiet c. short 3. __________ 4. interesting d. hard-working 4. __________ 5. generous e. careless 5. __________ 6. curly f. fat 6. __________ 7. beautiful g. noisy 7. __________ 8. lazy h. selfish 8. __________ 9. tall i. straight 9. __________ 10. confident j. ugly 10. _________ VII. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. People in my country are very warm and . (FRIEND) 2. An is a child whose parents are dead. (ORPHANAGE) 3. L.A Hill is a writer. (HUMOR) 4. I’m sorry for the delay. (EXTREME) 5. She looks more than her sister. (BEAUTY) 6. I am enough to have a lot of friends. (LUCK) 7. They enjoy the summer evenings in the countryside. (PEACE) 8. Those cats look . (LOVE) 9. It was of him to offer to pay for us both. (GENEROUSITY) 10. Role-play is in developing communication skills. (HELP) VIII. Fill in the blanks with suitable prepositions: “in, at, on, after, under, between, beside, out of, above, beneath”. 1. There is a bus station ..................... the end of this road. 2. Keep those medicines ..................... the children’s reach. 3. I lost my keys somewhere ..................... the car and the house. 4. Come ..................... and sit ..................... your sister. 5. D comes ..................... C in the alphabet. 6. The boat sank ..................... the waves. 7. Don’t shelter ..................... the trees when it’s raining. 8. Please put these books ..................... the bookshelf ..................... the desk. IX. Read the passage, and then decide whether the statements that follow are True (T) or False (F). In my opinion, using the computer as your hobby can be harmful to both your health and your social life. Firstly, sitting all day in front of the computer can cause health problems such as eye-tiredness and obesity. Secondly you may get irritated easily. Besides, if you use the computer too much, you will not have time for your family and friends. In short, computers should only be used for a limited time. 1. Using the computer too much can make your eyes tired. 1. ______ 2. Using the computer too much is not good for you. 2. ______ 3. We still can spend a lot of time with our family and friends. 3. ______ 4. According to the writer, we can use the computer for a long time. 4. ______ 5. Computers should only be used for a limited time. 5. ______ X. Read the passage carefully. MY VILLAGE

watch

I live in a village by Mekong River. Every day, like most of my friends, I walk to school. It is three kilometers away. After class, I often help my mother to collect water from the river and feed the chickens. At the weekend, the villagers often gather at the community hall where there is a TV. The adults watch TV, but more often they talk about their farm work and exchange news. The children run around playing games and shouting merrily. Laughter is heard everywhere. My father sometimes takes me to the market town nearby where he sells our home products like vegetables, fruits, eggs... He then buys me an ice cream and lets me take a ride on the electric train in the town square. I love those trips. On starry nights, we children lie on the grass, looking at the sky and daring each other to find the Milky Way. We dream of faraway places. Answer the following questions. 1. Does the boy like riding on the electric train in the town square? ........................................................................................... 2. What do the children do on starry nights? ........................................................................................... 3. Do you like to live in the countryside or in the city? Why? ........................................................................................... XI. Read the following passage and choose the correct answer for each gap. I surf the Internet every day, but I’ve never (1) more than an hour at a time online. I’ve got a laptop and also a smartphone, so I can (2) the Internet anywhere. Today, for three times. instance, I’ve been (3) Mainly I just (4) my friends. I read online magazines and I look (5) information, too. I I’ve never bought anything online because I don’t think also compare prices of things, (6) it’s safe. I’m not an Internet addict, but some of my friends (7) . One friend of mine always looks because he spends all night online. Although he’s got a lot of bad marks for the exams, he (8) hasn’t (9) his habits. In my experience, it’s very useful for people who use the Internet (10) . 1. A. spend B. spending C. spent 2. A. have B. use C. play 3. A. online B. Internet C. computer 4. A. write B. email C. send 5. A. at B. in C. for 6. A. because B. but C. although 7. A. is B. were C. are 8. A. tired B. hard C. happily 9. A. change B. to change C. changed 10. A. sensible B. sensibly C. sensibleness XII. Put the words in the correct order to make meaningful sentences. 1. look / does / she / what / like? => _________________________________________________ 2. is / she / as / Mai / easy-going / not / as. => _________________________________________________ 3. classroom / to / they / the / outside / the / prefer. => _________________________________________________ 4. time / I / most / my / with / spend / of / Hoa => _________________________________________________ 5. in / sun / the / rises / East / the => _________________________________________________ 6. a / received / Lan / letter / yesterday / her / from / friend. => _________________________________________________ 7. not / get / is / she / to / old / married / enough. => _________________________________________________ 8. long / is / a / girl / she / with / nice / hair. => _________________________________________________ 7

TEST 2 (UNIT 1) I.Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. 1. A. leisure B.eight C. celebrate 2. A. fun B. sun C. surf 3. A. bracelet B. cake C. cave 4. A. although B. laugh C. paragraph II. Leisure activities. Do the following tasks. Task 1: Fill in each blank with the verbs below.

D. penalty D. cut D. hat D. enough

play listen to write watch have do 1.read:a newspaper, ................................................................................................................................... 2.go: swimming .......................................................................................................................................... 3. ________ __________ :football, ................................................................................................................................ 4. ________ : a letter, ................................................................................................................................ 5. ________ : the radio, 6. ________ television, ......................................................................................................................... 7.go to:school, ...................................................................................................................................... 8.visit:friends, ....................................................................................................................................... 9. ________ .......................................................................................................................................... : nothing, ___ 10. _______ : a meal, ........................................................................................................................... Task 2: Add theses words/ phrases from the table to Part A. (There may be more than one possibility.) shopping CDs leisure activities something III.

a magazine a video the library a quiz show

the cinema computer games cousins hiking

an e-mail a restaurant a game show swimming

the guitar a shower music an outdoor activity

Complete the sentences with the verb + -ing. do

play

ski

swim

watch

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. IV.

judo. Susan loves They enjoy the Olympics on TV. We really like in the Alps in February. Sam hates boxing but he loves football. I don’t like in the pool at the sports centre. Do you like running in the morning? Complete the conversations with the correct form of the verbs in brackets. Mai: I (1. Not like/ watch) football. I (2. hate/ stand) around and (3. get) cold. Lan: Me, too. I (4. Prefer/ be) indoors. I (5. not mind/ play) football – on my computer! Nick: Ha ha! I know your brother’s really good at football, Mai. (6. he/ like/ play) at the back? Mai: Tuan? No, he (7. prefer/ play) centre forward. He (8. like/ score) goals! Lan: Great pass, Tuan! Mai: Lan, do you like football? Nick: No, but she (9. not mind/ watch) Tuan! V. Read the passage about Phong’s weekend and answer the questions. On Friday’s afternoon, after school, I usually surf the Net or listen to music. In the evening I often go to the cinema with my friends.

On Saturday morning I get up late and have breakfast. Then I play football with my classmates in the park. In the afternoon I watch TV (usually a football match). In the evening I go to my best friend’s place – we sometimes play computer games, or we talk. On Sunday morning I do my homework. Then I listen to music or watch TV. On Sunday evening I surf the Net again, or read a book. 1. Where does Phong often go on Friday evening? ________________________________________________________________________________ 2.When does he play football? ________________________________________________________________________________ 3.What does he watch on Saturday afternoon? ________________________________________________________________________________ 4.What does he do on Sunday morning? ________________________________________________________________________________ 5.When does he surf the Net? ________________________________________________________________________________ VI.Read the passage carefully, and then answer the question below. In the 1970s, skateboarding suddenly became very popular. At first, skateboarders moved slowlyon flat, smooth areas. Then they began to ride quickly. This is called ‘freestyle’ skateboarding. Soon they were skateboarding skillfully up ramps and doing tricks in the air. This is called ‘ramp’ skateboarding. Then they started skateboarding and doing tricks on the street. This was ‘street-style’ skateboarding – a combination of freestyle and ramp. For this, the skateboarders needed protective clothing such as knee and elbow pads and helmets. This allowed them to skateboard safety. Today skateboarding is still a very popular sport, and there are lots of competitions. Note: skateboarding (n) = môntrượtván. 1. When did skateboarding become very popular? ________________________________________________________________________________ 2.What are the three styles of skateboarding? ________________________________________________________________________________ 3.What was ‘street-style’ skateboarding? ________________________________________________________________________________ 4.Why do ‘street-style’ skateboarders need protective clothing? ________________________________________________________________________________ 5.Do you think skateboarding is a very popular sport now? Why or why not? ________________________________________________________________________________ VII.Read the passage about British and American teenagers, and answer the questions. Sport: In the UK, football, rugby, tennis and basketball are the most popular sports for teenagers. In the USA, American football, athletics, basketball and baseball are popular. The Internet and television:Teenagers in both the UK and the USA today watch television less than before but they use the Internet more. They spend over 25 hours a week online. Pocket money and shopping: The average teenager in the UK gets about £7 a week pocket money. In the USA it is about $10. They spend their money on clothes and going out, but magazines, presents and snacks are also important. Friends: The average British and American teenager has seven close friends. He or she has sixteen online friends on social network websites. 1.Which sports do British and American teenagers play in their free time? ________________________________________________________________________________ 2.How long do they spend online? ________________________________________________________________________________ 3.How much pocket money do they get? ________________________________________________________________________________ 4.What do they spend it on? ________________________________________________________________________________ 5.How many online friends do they have?

VIII. Fill the gaps with the words/ phrases in the box to give your opinion about the best leisure activity. More than one word can be suitable for some gaps.

In my opinion In short Finally Second In addition First Besides also , I I choose reading as my favourite leisure activity for a number of reason. (1) read anywhere I can and whenever I am free. (2) , I read many kinds of books, such as: short stories, novels, science books, etc. Books help me to have more knowledge and experience of society, science, and our world. Have you read a book “The Art of Happiness” by the Dalai Lama? It teaches us how , it (4) not only to get over sadness, but also to be always cheerful. (3) reminds us to live because everybody and real happiness only comes when helping other people. (5) that, I read a lot of detective stories, like “The Godfather”, “Sherlock Holmes”, etc. (6) , a number of comic books and magazines for teenagers make me feel relaxedin my free time. (7) , reading makes my mind rich, my life more pleasant, and I learn a lot from it. (8) , reading brings me TEST 3 UNIT 1 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others. 1. a. sound b. out c. found d. enough 2. a. bracelet b. favourite c. craft d. game b. sure c. shopping d. socialise 3. a. leisure 4. a. trick b. kit c. addict d. virtual 5. a. satisfied b. hooked c. bored d. socialised II. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence. 1. How much time do you spend _______ leisure activities? a.on b. in c. for d. with 2. Why don’t you apply for this job? It looks right _______ your street. a.on b. in c.at d. up 3. Many young people don’t _______ walking to school or playing active games? a. prefer b. enjoy c. suggest d. want 4. Daisy is _______ social media. She spends lots of time on Facebook and Instagram. a.tired of b. bored with c. addicted to d. curious about 5. _______ leisure time is free from compulsory activities, it is often referred to as “free time.’ a. Because b. Although c. When d. As long ass 6. On YouTube you can find many videos on _______ all aspects of your English. a. surfing b. working c. taking d. improving 7. Some addicts are teenagers _______ are hooked on computer games. a. which b. who c. what d. whose 8. My sister enjoys _______. She usually walks around the mall, but not buying anything. a. going shopping b. hanging out c. window shopping d. doing DIY 9. You can raise a _______ pet like a Neopet if you aren’t allowed to own a real pet. a. domestic b. virtual c. weird d. beloved 10. “My favourite leisure activity is people watching.” “_______” a. That sounds so weird! b. That’s all right. c. OK. That’s what you’ve chosen. d. Sure. It’s very entertaining. III. Complete the correct answer a, b, c or d. 1. How much time do you spend _______ TV every day? a. watch b. to watch c. watching d. in watching 2. I’d hate _______ the exams, so I’m doing my best. a. failing b. to fail c. fail d. failed 3. I always enjoy _______ to my grandfather. He always tells me great stories. a. to talk b. to talking c. talking d. talk 4. Could you help me _______ the kitchen? It’s a real mess! a. tidy b. tidied c. tidying d. with tidying 5. Steven dislikes _______, so he usually takes a bus to work. a. to drive b. to be driven c. be driven d. driving

6. Jane prefers _______ music than to listen to it. a. playing b. play c. to play d. played 7. Marlene can’t wait _______ to the beach again. a. to go b. going c. for going d. go 8. I really regret _______ this computer – it’suseless. a. buy b. to buy c. buying d. for buying 9. Your child needs _______ some weight. Tell him _______ less junk food and more exercise. a. to lose - eat b. to lose - to eat c. losing - to eat d. losing - eat 10. I would love _______ to your party! Thank you for inviting me. a. come b. coming c. to come d. came IV. Complete the sentences with the correct form (to-infinitive or -ing form) of the verbs in the box. Some verbs can be followed by either a to-infinitive or an -ing form. stay

make

watch

cycle

eat

hang out

travel

get

read

1. My brother loves _____________ live football on TV. 2. Do people in your country like _____________ abroad on vacation? 3. Riding a bike is Lan’s pleasure, but she detests _____________ in the rain. 4. I don’t mind _____________ at home to look after the children. 5. As a child, he hated _____________ books, but now he finds it enjoyable. 6. Minh is in good shape. He enjoys _____________ sport and exercise. 7. She doesn’t like _____________ up early in the morning, especially at the weekend. 8. Emily dislikes _____________ crafts, but she enjoys origami. 9. I fancy _____________ out tonight because I’m too tired to cook. 10. Nancy adores _____________ with her best friend Helen. V. Complete the sentences with the to-infinitive or -ing form of the verbs in brackets. 1. I have enjoyed ___________ (meet) you. Hope ___________ (see) you again soon. 2. My father is not keen on coffee. He prefers ___________ (drink) tea. 3. I am a little busy. Would you mind ___________ (wait) a little longer? 4. Mobile games are great, but I don’t like ___________ (play) them for too long. 5. If I can choose, I prefer ___________ (stay) at home to ___________ (play) sport. 6. Tonight I’d like ___________ (go) out, but I have to do my homework. 7. Sue loves ___________ (make) origami. She can fold some animals, birds and flowers. 8. I detested ___________ (spend) two hours every day travelling to work and back. 9. He started ___________ (surf) the net hours ago. Has he stopped ___________ (surf) yet? 10. I tried hard ___________ (concentrate), but my mind kept ___________ (wander). VI. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets. 1. At present, the social networks ______________ (become) more popular among young generation. 2. I ______________ (not listen) to their new CD yet. Is it any good? 3. When I was a student, I ______________ (not like) doing homework. 4. Facebook ______________ (found) in 2004 by Mark Zuckerberg and Eduardo Saverin. 5. The American ______________ (spend) 34 hours a week watching television. 6. ______________ (you/ ever/ make) origami cranes? 7. I’ve just bought a new CD of folk songs. I ______________ (listen) to it tonight. 8. Do you adore ______________ (lie) in a hot bath? 9. Please try ______________ (arrive) punctually at 8.30. 10. Many teenagers prefer ______________ (watch) TV to ______________ (read) books. VII. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. The Internet is very ______________, it takes up a lot of our time. (addict) 2. I enjoy ______________ with friends and going out at the weekend. (social) 3. Sitting in front of the computer too long can cause ______________. (obese) 4. Are you ______________ about the new Gears Of War games? (excite) 5. She listens to classical music for ______________. (relax) 6. The Internet has changed the English language ______________. (consider) 7. She was ______________ with her job and decided to look for a new one. (satisfy) 8. Face to face ______________ is better than Skype video calls. (communicate)

VIII. Read the passage carefully, then choose the correct answers. The latest addiction to trap thousands of people is the Internet, which has been blamed for broken relationships, job losses, financial ruin, and even suicide. Psychologists now recognize Internet Addiction Syndrome (IAS) as a new illness that could cause serious problems and ruin many lives. IAS is similar to other problems like gambling, smoking and drinking: addicts have dreams about the Internet; they need to use it first thing in the morning; they lie to their parents and partners about how much time they spent online; they wish they could cut down, but are unable to do so. A recent study found that many users spend up to 40 hours a week on the Internet. Some of the addicts are teenagers who are already hooked on computer games and who find it very difficult to resist the games on the Internet. 1. What is the best title of the passage? a. The advantage of the Internet b. Hooked on the Net c. Impact of Internet on teens d. A guide to the Internet 2. According to the writer, internet addiction __________. a. is not the same as gambling b. is not an illness c. can lead to financial problems d. helps people kill time 3. Internet addicts find it hard ___________. a. to use the Internet in the morning b. to lie about the time they spent online c. to spend more time on the Internet d. to spend less time on the Internet 4. The word ‘it’ in paragraph 2 refers to ___________. a. the Internet b. IAS c. dream d. computer 5. Which of the followings is NOT true? a.IAS is recognised as a new illness. b.Internet addiction can cause suicide behaviours. c.Many internet addicts spend more than 40 hours a week online. d.Teenagers who are hooked on computer games can suffer from IAS IX. Write sentences with the cues given. 1. Mai/ usually/ listen/ K-pop music/ free time. 2. when/ I/ be/ a child/ I/ enjoy/ play/ computer games. 3. my father/ spend/ most/ spare time/ look after/ the garden. 4. watching TV/ most/ popular/ leisure activity/ Britain? 5. many teenagers/ addicted/ the Internet/ computer games. 6. she/ get/ hooked/ the medical drama/ after/ watch/ the first episode. 7. most/ my friends/ prefer/ play sports/ to/ surf the net. 8. today’s world/ teenagers/ rely/ technology/ more/ the past UNIIT 2: LIFE IN THE CITY A. VOCABULARY 1 beehive (n) 2 brave (adj) 3 buffalo-drawn cart (n) 4 cattle (n) 5 collect (v) 6 convenient (adj) 7 disturb (v) 8 electrical appliance (n) 9 generous (adj)

/biːhaɪv/: /breɪv/: /ˈbʌfələʊ-drɔːn kɑːt/: /ˈkætl/: /kəˈlekt/: /kənˈviːniənt/: /dɪˈstɜːb/: /ɪˈlektrɪkl əˈplaɪəns/: /ˈdʒenərəs/:

tổ ong can đảm xe trâu kéo gia súc thu gom, lấy thuận tiện làm phiền đồ điện hào phóng 12

10 ger (n) /ger/: lều của dân du mục Mông Cổ 11 Gobi Highlands /ˈgəʊbi ˈhaɪləndz/: Cao nguyên Gobi 12 grassland (n) /ˈɡrɑːslænd/: đồng cỏ 13 harvest time (n) /ˈhɑːvɪst taɪm/: mùa gặt 14 herd (v) /hɜːd/: chăn dắt 15 local (adj, n) /ˈləʊkl/: địa phương, dân địa phương 16 Mongolia (n) /mɒŋˈɡəʊliə/: Mông cổ 17 nomad (n) /ˈnəʊmæd/: dân du mục 18 nomadic (adj) /nəʊˈmædɪk/: thuộc về du mục 19 paddy field (n) /ˈpædi fiːld/: đồng lúa 20 pasture (n) /ˈpɑːstʃə(r)/: đồng cỏ 21 pick (v) /pɪk/: hái (hoa, quả…) 22 racing motorist (n) /ˈreɪsɪŋ məʊtərɪst/: người lái ô tô đua 23 vast (adj) /vɑːst/: rộng lớn, bát ngát B. GRAMMAR REVIEW B. GRAMMAR: I.Ôn tập so sánh hơn với tính từ( comparative forms of adjectives) Ta sử dụng so sánh hơn của tính từ để so sánh giữa người(hoặc vật) này với người(hoặc vật) khác. Trong câu so sánh hơn, tính từ sẽ được chia làm 2 loại là tính từ dài và tính từ ngắn, trong đó: - Tính từ ngắn là tính từ có 1 âm tiết : Ví dụ : tall, high, big……….. - Tính từ dài là tính từ có từ 2 âm tiết trở lên : Ví dụ : expensive, intelligent…….. II. Cấu trúc câu so sánh hơn: Đối với tính từ ngắn Đối với tính từ dài S1 + to be + adj +er + than + S2 Với tính từ ngắn, thêm đuôi “er” vào sau tính từ Với tính từ dài, thêm đuôi “more” vào trước tính từ Ví dụ: Ví dụ: China is bigger than India Gold is more valuable than silver Lan is shorter than Nam Hanh is more beautiful than Hoa My house is bigger than your house Your book is more expensive than my book His pen is newer than my pen Exercise 1 is more difficult than exercise 2 Lưu ý: Để nhấn mạnh ý trong câu so sánh hơn, ta thêm “much” hoặc “far” trước hình thức so sánh Ví dụ: Her boyfriend is much/ far older than her III. Cách sử dụng tính từ trong câu so sánh hơn: 1.Cách thêm đuôi –er vào tính từ ngắn Tính từ kết thúc bởi 1 phụ âm thêm đuôi –er Old-older, near-nearer Tính từ kết thúc bởi 1 nguyên âm “e” thêm đuôi –r Nice-nicer Tính từ kết thúc bởi 1 nguyên âm(ueoai) +1 phụ âm gấp đôi Big-bigger, hot-hotter, fat-fatter phụ âm cuối và thêm đuôi -er Tính từ kết thúc bởi “y” dù có 2 âm tiết vẫn là tính từ ngắn bỏ Happy-happier, “y” và thêm đuôi “ier” Pretty-prettier Lưu ý: Một số tính từ có hai âm tiết kết thúc bằng “et, ow, er, y” thì áp dụng như quy tắc thêm er ở tính từ ngắn Ví dụ: quiet quieter clever cleverer Simple simpler narrow narower 2.Một vài tính từ đặc biệt: Với một số tính từ sau, dạng so sánh hơn của chúng không theo quy tắc trên. Tính từ Dạng so sánh hơn Good Better Bad Worse Far Farther/ further Much/ many More Little Less 13

Old Older/ elder BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN: Bài 1: Cho dạng so sánh hơn của các tính từ trong bảng sau: Tính từ So sánh hơn Tính từ Bad Modern Clever Old Convenient Peaceful Far pretty Fresh Quiet Friendly Smart Generous Soon Good Strong Happy Ugly High Warm Little Wonderful Long Young

So sánh hơn

Bài 2:Khoanh tròn vào đáp án đúng: 1.Living in this small town is (moree peaceful/ peaceful more) than I expected. 2.Nowadays people are (more anxious/ anxious more) about pollution than before. 3.Today you look ( happier/ more happy) than usual. 4.This year I will move to a (bigger/ biggest) city. 5.This experience is (more exciting/ most exciting) than I expected. 6. Who is (more intelligent/ most intelligent) between two of them. 7. This song is (catcher/ more catchy) than that song. 8. The new sofa is (costlier/ more costly) than the old one 9.Our family will move to a (more comfortable/ more comfortable than) place next year. 10. I hope you will get (best/ better) the next time I see you. 11.James has (many/ more) books than Paul. 12.She is (more independent/ most independent) than the last time I saw her. 13. Today my sister (is more quiet/ quieter) than usual. 14.Jane is(more pretty/ prettier) than Ann. 15.The weather is (hotter/ hottest) than yesterday. Bài 3 :Hoàn thành các câu sau với dạng so sánh hơn của tính từ trong ngoặc: 1.Living in the city is________than living in the country(convenient). 2.Mrs.Smith is_________than I thought.(young). 3.Houses in big cities are much_________than those in my hometown(tall). 4.No one in my class is_________than Jim (smart). 5. The senior prom would be_________than any other proms(exciting). 6. I have__________courage than my brother(little). 7. His health condition is getting__________(bad). 8.You are_________than you think(clever). 9.This computer is much_________than mine(expensive) 10.I always dream of a__________house to live in(modern). 11.They are__________than they used to be(skillful). 12.Life in this village is_________than anywhere else.(peaceful). 13.I think people in the countryside are________than city dwellers.(friendly) 14.This year, the prize for the winner is______than last year.(valuable) 15.Which dress is__________for me?(suitable) 16.You should be__________and show your best.(confident). 17.They said that the conference was________than usual(interesting). 18.Jane is so pretty but her sister is even__________(pretty). 14

19.They work hard to have________life(good). 20.John is__________than the rest of the class.(intelligent)

My mother gets up earlier than me. I go to school later than my friends do

Bài 4: Biết câu so sánh hơn dùng từ gợi ý: 0.Bob / strong /Jim. Bob is stronger than Jim. 1.My current job / demanding/ my last one. 2.Today/ Jane/ beautiful/ usual. 3.Yesterday / it/ cold/ taday. 4.Fruits and vegetables / healthy / fast food. 5. Life in the countryside / peaceful/ life in the city. 6.Your sister/ good/ you think. 7.Who / intelligent/ you/ in your class? 8. Ann/ short / you? 9. Last year/ his salary / low/ this year. 10. Bob/ look / strong/ his brother.

2.Một vài trạng từ có dạng từ đặc biệt: Tính từ Well Badly Far Early

Bài 5: Sắp xếp các từ sau thành câu hoan chỉnh: 1.London /think/ is/ than/ more/ I/ New York/ expensive. ____________________________________________________________________________ 2.Important/ is/ Health/ than/ money/ more. ____________________________________________________________________________ 3.in / in/ city/ better/ the / is/ in /than / country/ convenient / than / is. ____________________________________________________________________________ 4.in / health care/ city/ better/ the / is/ in / than / countryside/ the service/ the. ____________________________________________________________________________ 5.living/ is/ than / in /rural/ more/ areas / living/ urban /in / comfortable/ ____________________________________________________________________________ 6.in/ pasture / this/ that/ area / richer / is / area. ____________________________________________________________________________ 7. Peter/ better / Math/ than / at/ is / Tom. ____________________________________________________________________________ 8.crowded/ cities/ often / than / more/ are/ the / countryside. ____________________________________________________________________________ 9.this /cake/ is /that/ more/ one/ delicious/ than? ____________________________________________________________________________ 10.Who/ more/ than / Tom / can /in / intelligent / class/ his? ____________________________________________________________________________ IV. SO SÁNH HƠN VỚI TRẠNG TỪ (COMPARATIVE FORMS OF ADVERBS) Tương tự như với tính từ, trang từ chia thành 2 loại: -.Trạng từ ngắn là những trạng từ có 1 âm tiết. Ví dụ: hard, near, far, right, wrong………… -Trạng từ dài là những từ có từ 2 âm tiết trở lên. Ví dụ: slowly, responsibly, quickly, interestingly, tiredly…… 1.Cấu trúc câu so sánh hơn với trạng từ: Đối với trạng từ ngắn Đối với trạng từ dài S1 +V +adv +er +than+ S2 S1 +V +more / less +adv +than+ S2 Với các trạng từ ngắn, thường là trạng từ chỉ cách -Với trạng từ dài, hầu hết là các trạng từ chỉ cách thức thức có hình thức giống tính từ, ta thêm “er” vào có đuôi “ly” ta thêm “mỏe”(nhiều hơn) hoặc “less”(ít sau trạng từ hơn) vào các trước trang từ -“Less” là từ phản nghĩa của “more” ,được dùng để diễn đạt sự không bằng nhau ở mức độ ít hơn. Ví dụ: Ví dụ: They work harder than I do. My friend did the test more carefuly than I did. She runs faster than he does My father talks more slowly than my mother does.

Trạng từ Badly Conveniently Early Far Fast Fluently Happily Hard Slowly well

Hanh acts less resposibly than anyone

Dạng so sánh hơn Better Worse Farther/ further Earlier

Ví dụ: The little boy ran farther than his friends You’re driving worse today than yesterday. BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN: Bài 6: Cho dạng so sánh hơn của các trạng từ trong bảng sau:

So sánh hơn

Trạng từ Late Smartly responsibly Patiently Generously Cleverly Quickly Suitable Beautifully Strongly

So sánh hơn

3.Tom arrived_________than I expected(early). 4.We will meet ________in the afternoon(late). 5.Mary dances__________than anyone else(gracefully) 6.Could you speak_________?(loud) 7.Jim could do the tast_________Jane(well). 8.We walked_______than other people(slowly). 9.Planes can fly__________than birds(high). 10.I can throw the ball__________than anyone else in my team(far). 11.James drives_______than his wife(carefully). 12.I visit my grandmother_______than my brother.(often) 13.No one can run_______than John(fast). 14.My sister cooks________than I(badly). 15. Everyone in the company is working________than ever before(hard).

5.Everyone in my town is looking for more better crop this year. 6.Jim runs more fastly than his friends. 7.I think a settle life is more better than a nomadic life. 8.Today Jim performs less confident than usual. 9.The heavy rain makes it more difficultly to drive. 10.Their team preformed much more well than our team. Bài 13; Viết lại câu bằng từ đã cho sao cho nghĩa câu không thay đổi theo mẫu: 0.This exercise is easier than that one. That exercise is more difficult than that one. 1.Mr Smith is wealthier than Mr.Brown. Mr Brown___________________________________ 2.My house is smaller than my parent’s house. My parent’s house____________________________ 3.The black dress is more expensive than the red one. The red dress _____________________________ 4.Today it is colder than yesterday. Yesterday______________________________ 5.I don’t think you are taller than me. I don’t think I_________________________________ 6.Is Jim worse at Math than John? Is John______________________________________ 7. Jim looks much younger than his classmates. Jim’s classmates____________________________ 8.Your hair is longer than mine. My hair_________________________ Bài 14: Khoanh tròng vào đáp án đúng: Benefit of living in the countryside. While many people prefer city life, a lot of people want to send their life in a rural area. The countryside are often(1) _________than the city because there are not as many factories and traffic as in big cities. The country folk can be (2) _________and they often live(3) _________than city dwellers. Besides, life in the countryside is(4) _________and peaceful because the crime rate is much(5) _________. The rural areas are(6) _________populated than the urban area but the neighbors are(7) _________and more helpful. Life in the countryside is(8) _________for old people than the energetic youngsters. 1.A.less polluted B.more polluted C.less pollutedly D.more pollutedly 2.A.more healthy B.healthier C.more healthily D.helthily. 3.A.longly B.longer C.shortly D.shorter 4.A.more simple B.simpler C.simply D.more simply 5.A.higher B.highly C.lower D.lowly 6.A.more densely B.more dense C.less D.less dense 7.A.more friendly B.friendlier C.friendly D.less friendly 8.A.more suitable B.more suitbly C.less suitably D.suitably. Bai15: Đọc đoạn văn sau và trả lời câu hỏi: The nomadic life of Mongolian Mongololian people nowadays still maintain their tradition of a nomadic life. About half of mongolian population do not settle down but travel from place to place every season. When you think of Mongolian nomads, you think of animal farmers. Their most valuable possessions are their tents and cattle. Mongolian has severe weather. There are dramatic changed in weather condotions between seasons. That is the reason why Mongolian have to move location throughout the year to the most appropriate spots. In winter, they often move in front of a mountain for shelter. In spring, it’s closer to a river, in summer right next to a river for water supply, and in autumn up a hill to collect hay for winter time. Most nomads move at least four times a year but some might move up to 30 times in a year ,especially if they have a lot of animals that eat through the vaibable food quickly. The number of namads has, however, significantly decreased over last years. More and more of its citizens move to Ulaanbaatar because they want to look for an education and a professional job.Mongolia is in a period of rapid change.

Bài 9:Hoàn thành các Câu sau với dạng so sánh hơn của các trang từ trong ngoặc: 1.I/ play/ tennis/ badly/ Tom. 2.The Australian athlete/run/ slowly/ the Korean athlete. 3.Cats/ walk/ quiet/ dogs. 4.James/ reply/ swiftly/ Peter. 5. The tiger/ hunt/ ferociously/ the wolf. 6.Your idea/ work/ well/ mine. 7.I/ eat/ vegetables/ often/ I used / to. 8.Today/ you/ perform/ badly/ yesterday. Bài 10:Viết lại câu sau cho nghĩa không đổi, sử dụng cấu trúc so sánh hơn “more /less” 0.Ann speaks French more fluently than James. James speaks French less fluently than Ann. 1.Today the sun shines more brightly than yesterday. 2.This cake is more freshlt made than that one. 3.Jim behaves more politely than his younger brother. 4.Teenagers act more violently these days than in the past. 5.The doctor treats his patiently than he should. 6.My sister speaks more quickly than I. 7.Now Mary drives more carefully than she used to. 8.This summer I go to the beach more often than the last summer. BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO Bài 11:Hoàn thành câu, sử dụng dạng so sánh hơn của các tính từ hoặc trạng từ cho sẵn Angrily large Soft Cleverly Warm comfortably hard Rich costly beautifully 1.Her voice is_________than mine. 2.James can sing________than many singer. 3.We can live_________in the countryside than in the city. 4.We hoped we would own a _________apartment. 5.This mordern computer is_________thann that old-fashioned one. 6.My new house is__________designed than my old one. 7.My father reacted_________to my misbehaviors than my mother. 8.John studies__________than anyone else in the class. 9.It is getting_________today so we can go out. 10. People in the city are________than people in the countryside. Bài 12; Gạch chân lỗi sai trong mỗi câu sau và sửa lại cho đúng: 1.Their life has been more comfortably since they moved to the city. 2.She looks more pretty in this white dress. 3.The manager wants us to work more hardly. 4.This week you looks more healthily than last week. 17

1.Is it true that about 50% of Mongolian population still lead a nomadic life? _____________________________________________________________________________ 2.What are the most valuable possessions of Mongolian nomads? _____________________________________________________________________________

Adjective interesting expensive thick friendly fine thin difficult warm wise easy wonderful sunny fat long

3.Why do Mongolian have to move location throughout the year? _____________________________________________________________________________ 4.Where do Mongolian nomads often move to in fall? _____________________________________________________________________________ 5.How often most nomads move their locations? _____________________________________________________________________________ 6.Why more and more Mongolian move to Ulaanbaatar? TEST 1 UNIT 2 I. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others. B. cough C. although D. drought 1. A. neighbor 2. A. entertain B. rain C. air D. strain 3. A. try B. facility C. typhoon D. supply B. ruler C. pollution D. urban 4. A. supermarket 5. A. nature B. migrant C. facility D. away 6. A. traffic B. relative C. tragedy D. jam 7. A. apartment B. offer C. prefer D. another B. pressure C. urban D. supply 8. A. nature 9. A. create B. peaceful C. increase D. easily 10. A. accessible B. pressure C. illness D. success II. Choose the words that have the different stress from the others. 1. A. nomadic B. generous C. colourful D. countryside 2. A. popular B. calculus C. beehive D. disturb 3. A. harvest B. collect C. peaceful D. whisper 4. A. charade B. transport C. expect D. paddy 5. A. opportunity B. inconvenient C. facility D. optimistic III. Write the comparison of these adjectives and adverbs. Tính từ/ Trạng từ So sánh hơn 1. beautifully ................................................... 2. hot ................................................... 3. crazy ................................................... 4. slowly ................................................... 5. much ................................................... 6. little ................................................... 7. badly ................................................... 8. well ................................................... 9. attractively ................................................... 10. big ................................................... IV. Write the comparative and superlative of these adjectives.

Comparative more interesting _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________

Superlative the most interesting _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________

V. Use the adjective in brackets in their correct forms of comparison to complete the sentences. 1. Tea is coffee. (cheap) 2. The new harvest machine is than the old one. (effective) 3. The countryside is the town. (beautiful) 4. A tractor is a buffalo. (powerful) 5. My sister is me. (tall) elephants. (heavy) 6. Blue whales are 7. The Mekong River is the Red River. (long) 8. Do you think English is French in grammar? (easy) 9. My new bed is my old bed. (comfortable) than the book. (interesting) 10. The film about my village town is VI. Choose the best answers of these sentences. 1. Of the four dresses, I like the red one (better/ best). 2. Bill is the (happier/ happiest) person we know. 3. Pat’s cat is (faster/ fastest) than Peter’s. 4. This poster is (colourfuler/ more colourful) than the one in the hall. 5. Does Fred feel (weller/ better) today than he did yesterday? 6. This vegetable soup tastes very (good/ best). 7. Jane is the (less/ least) athletic of all the women. 8. My cat is the (prettier/ prettiest) of the two. 9. This summary is (the better/ the best) of the pair. 10. The colder the weather gets, (sicker/ the sicker) I feel. VII. Complete the sentences with the correct verb form. 1. John adores (play) badminton in the winter 2. My father sometimes goes (hunt) in the forests. He’d like to find some more food for our family. (pick) up a stone and threw it in to the river. 3. The boy 4. He (collect) stamps from many countries since he (be) eight. 5. Which sports do you like (play)? 6. Hoa’s teacher wants her (spend) more time on math. 7. I promise I (try) my best next semester. 8. Sandra needs (improve) her English writing. the word you want (learn) . 9. You should (underline) 19

10. Can you help me (move) this table? grade A in Physics, but last semester he (get) 11. Nam always (get) B. 12. They were proud of (be) so successful. VIII. Fill in each blank with the appropriate form of the word in brackets. 1. There is a of books on the shelf. (collect) 2. It is very for people in remote areas to get to hospitals. (convenience) 3. He is very with his hands. (skill) 4. It is said that water collected from the local streams is to drink. (safe) 5. We want relations with all countries. (friend) 6. I like to eat , so I eat a lot of fruits and vegetables every day. (health) IX. Fill in each blank with the appropriate form of the word in brackets. 1. Iceland is considered the most country in the world. (peace) 2. A lifestyle has its advantages and disadvantages. (nomad) for several years. (collect) 3. My brother has been a stamp 4. It is a/ an place to hold a picnic because it is too far from the road. (convenience) . (safe) 5. Drinking water in some areas may be 6. During my stay in the village, I was with several local farmers. (friend) is very important. (health) 7. Encouraging children to eat and drink 8. Local people in the village often wear their costumer during the festivals. (tradition) 9. Please give to that charity to help the homeless after the flood. (generous) because the bed was really comfortable. (sound) 10. The baby slept very X. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentence. 1. Teenagers enjoy ............... to music and ............... out with friends. A. listen – hang B. to listen – to hang C. listening – hang D. listening – hanging 2. Don’t worry. It is ............... to travel to that village even at night. A. safe B. unsafe C. difficult D. inconvenient 3. Life in a small town is ............... than that in a big city. A. peaceful B. much peaceful C. less peaceful D. much more peaceful 4. The boys often help their parents to ............... water from the village well. A. gather B. collect C. absorb D. give 5. ............... month is the Hoa Ban festival of the Thai people held in? A. When B. Which C. How many D. How often 6. Vietnamese people have many ............... customs and crafts. A. tradition B. traditional C. culture D. cultural 7. It is ....................... in the city than it is in the country. A. noisily B. more noisier C. noisier D. noisy 8. The English test was ....................... than I thought it would be. A. the easier B. more easy C. easiest D. easier 9. English is thought to be ....................... than Math. A. harder B. the more hard C. hardest D. the hardest 10. My house is ....................... hers. A. cheap than B. cheaper C. more cheap than D. cheaper than 11. Her office is ....................... away than mine. A. father B. more far C. farther D. farer 12. Tom is ....................... than David. A. handsome B. the more handsome C. more handsome D. the most handsome 13. He did the test ....................... I did. A. as bad as B. badder than C. more badly than D. worse than 14. A boat is ....................... than a plane. A. slower B. slowest C. more slow D. more slower

15. My new sofa is ....................... than the old one. A. more comfortable B. comfortably C. more comfortabler D. comfortable 16. My sister dances ....................... than me. A. gooder B. weller C. better D. more good 17. This road is ....................... than that road. A. narrower B. narrow C. the most narrow D. more narrower 18. He drives ....................... his brother. A. more careful than B. more carefully C. more carefully than D. as careful as 19. It was ....................... day of the year. A. the colder B. the coldest C. coldest D. colder 20. She is ....................... student in my class. A. most hard-working B. more hard-working C. the most hard-working D. as hard-working XI. Read the following passage and choose the best answer A, B, C or D. Sydney is Australia’s most exciting city. The history of Australia begins here. In 1788 Captain Arthur Philips arrived in Sydney with 11 ships and 1624 passengers from Britain (including 770 prisoners). Today there are about 3.6 million people in Sydney. It is the biggest city in Australia, the busiest port in the South Pacific and one of the most beautiful cities in the world. In Sydney, the buildings are higher, the colors are brighter and the nightlife is more exciting. There are over 20 excellent beaches close to Sydney and its warm climate and cool winter have made it a favorite city for immigrants from overseas. There are two things that make Sydney famous: its beautiful harbor, the Sydney Harbor Bridge, which was built in 1932 and the Sydney Opera House, which was opened in 1973.

1. Where did Captain Arthur Philips arrive in 1788? A. South Pacific B. Sydney Harbor C. Britain D. Sydney 2. Which of the following should be the title of the reading passage? A. Sydney’s Opera House B. The history of Sydney C. Sydneys beaches and harbors D. An introduction of Sydney 3. Which of the following statements is NOT true about Sydney? A. Sydney is not a favorite city for immigrants from overseas. B. Sydney is one of the most beautiful cities in the world. C. Sydney is the most exciting city in Australia. D. Sydney is the biggest port in the South Pacific. 4. How many beaches are there close to Sydney? A. 11 beaches B. over 20 beaches C. nearly 20 beaches D. 770 beaches 5. When was the Sydney Harbor Bridge built? A. 1788 B. 1973 C. 1932 D. 1625 XII. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that best answers the question about the passage. Living in the country is something that people from the city often dream about. However, in reality, it has both advantages and disadvantages. There are certainly many advantages of living in the country. First, you can enjoy peace and quietness. Moreover, people tend to be friendlier. A further advantage is that there is less traffic, so it is safer for young children. However, there are certain disadvantages or drawbacks to life outside the city. First, because there are fewer people, you are likely to have few friends. In addition, entertainment is difficult to find, particularly in the evening. Furthermore, the fact that there are fewer shops and services so it is quite hard to find jobs. As a result, you may have to travel a long way to work, which can be extremely expensive. In conclusion, it can be seen that the country is more suitable for some people than others. On the whole, it is often the best place for those who are retired or who have young children. In contrast, young or single people who have a career are better provided for in the city.

5. This book is the same price at that one. (expensive) That book is .................................................................................................... 6. Your bike is slower than mine. (fast) My bike ..........................................................................................................

1. According to the passage, living in the country has . A. both good and bad points B. only bad points C. only good points D. no disadvantages 2. How many advantages does living in the country have? A. Two B. Four C. Three D. No 3. Living in the country is safer for young children because . A. there are few shops B. there is less traffic C. there are fewer people D. there are few services 4. Which of the following statements is NOT true according to the passage? A. The country is only suitable for retired people. B. It’s hard to find entertainment in the country. C. There are fewer shops and services in the country. D. People in the country tend to be friendlier than people in the city. 5. Having few friends is . A. one of drawbacks to life in the country B. the only disadvantage of living in the country C. one of certain advantages to life outside the city D. one of certain drawbacks to life outside the city XIII. Read the text and choose the suitable words with the correct blank spaces. visitors

stories

mountain

any

riding

with

life

I live in a (1) .......................... village. My parents often tell me (2) .......................... about their life in the past. It’s not much like the village I can see nowadays. Some villagers now live in brick houses instead of earthen ones. Our houses are better equipped (3) .......................... electric fans and TVs. Thanks to the TV, we now know more about (4) .......................... outside our village. We don’t use oil lamps (5) .......................... more. We have electric lights which are much brighter. More villagers are using motorcycles for transport instead of (6) .......................... a horse or walking. We – village children – no longer have to walk a long way and cross a stream to get (7) .......................... school, which is dangerous in the rainy season. Now there’s a new school nearby. We also have more (8) .......................... from the city. They come to experience our way of life. XIV. Read the text and decide whether the following statements are True (T) or False (F). Tokyo is a famous city. There are a few good buildings and impressive temples; there are a few parks worth visiting. Everything has to be small in Tokyo: houses, rooms, shops. Long-side streets consist of tiny houses only, and this often creates a toy-like, with small women tip-toeing along in their kimonos. Tokyo at night is a very different place from Tokyo in daytime. Millions of neon lights are switched on and nowhere in the world is more attractive. A town is not its buildings alone; it is an atmosphere, its pleasure, its sadness, its madness, and above all its people. Tokyo may lack architectural beauty but it has character and excitement; it is alive. I found it a mysterious and lovable city. 1. ________ There are many beautiful buildings in Tokyo. 2. ________ There is nothing to see in the parks in Tokyo. 3. ________ Many small houses found along long road. 4. ________ At night, Tokyo is not as attractive as many other cities. 5. ________ Tokyo has beautiful architecture. 6. ________ The author likes Tokyo. XV. Rewrite each sentence so it has the same meaning. Use a comparative form of the adjective in brackets. 1. Tim is older than Sarah. (young) Sarah .............................................................................................................. 2. Our house is large than yours. (small) Your house is .................................................................................................. 3. Bill is not as tall as David. (short) Bill is .............................................................................................................. 4. Jack’s marks are worse than mine. (good) My marks ....................................................................................................... 23

XVI. Rewrite the sentences of comparison. 1. Her old house is bigger than her new one. −˃ Her new house ............................................................................................ 2. No one in my class is taller than Peter. −˃ Peter ........................................................................................................... 3. The black dress is more expensive than the white one. −˃ The white dress .......................................................................................... 4. According to me, English is easier than Maths. −˃ According to me, Maths ............................................................................. 5. No one in my group is more intelligent than Mary. −˃ Mary........................................................................................................... 6. No river in the world is longer than the Nile. −˃ The Nile ..................................................................................................... 7. Mount Everest is the highest mountain in the world. −˃ No mountain ............................................................................................... 8. This is the first time I have ever met such a pretty girl, −˃ She is.......................................................................................................... 9. He works much. He feels tired. −˃ The more .................................................................................................... 10. This computer works better than that one. −˃ That computer TEST 2 (UNIT 2) I.Fill in the blanks with the correct words or phrases matching with the verbs. Maybe some verbs can be used more than one. grapes dolls strawberry goats a motorbike

food a tent a bike information a notice

buffaloes water fence an ostrich postcards

a camel cattle tea buds blackberry a memorial

data a flag a car sheep a donkey

1.ride: __________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 2. collect: _______________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 3.pick: _________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 4.herd:__________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 5.pick up: _______________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ Note: - ostrich (n) = đàđiểu II. Match a word in column A with its definition in column B, writing the answer in each blank. Answer A B

1. cattle 2. a nomad 3. pasture 4. home-made 5. a paddy field 6. household chores 7. countryside III.

A. food made from milk, such as butter, cheese, etc. B. tasks such as cleaning, washing, ironing … that have to be done regularly at home C. a file planted with rice growing in water D. an area with mountains or hills E. a person moving from a place to another for earning a living all the time F.male and female cows on a farm

1. Tea is coffee. (cheap) than the old one. (effective) 2. The new harvest machine is 3. The countryside is the town. (beautiful) 4. A tractor is a buffalo. (powerful) 5. My sister is me. (tall) 6. Blue whales are elephants. (heavy) 7. The Mekong River is the Red River (long) 8. Do you think English is French in grammar? (easy) 9. My new bed is my old bed. (comfortable) 10. The film about my village town is than the book. (interesting) VII. Complete the sentences, using the comparative form of the adverbs from the correspondent adjectives in the brackets. 1. I like to eat , so I eat a lot of fruits and vegetables every day. (health) 2. It usually rains in Central Viet Nam than in other region. (heavy) than this. (hard) 3. I will have to try a bit 4. The hall was lighted than the corridors. (bright) when we are busy. (quick) 5. Time goes by 6. Our family has lived in the country than in the town since last year. (happy) than the girls. (noisy) 7. The boys were playing the game 8. This task can be completed than that one. (easy) than a buffalo or a horse. (good) 9. A tractor can plough VIII. Complete the sentences, using the comparative form of the adverbs from the correspondent adjectives in the box.

G. the way that you like Fill in each blank in the following passage with ONE suitable word from the box. ride beehive

grassland vast

cattle harvest

loaded convenient

kites dry

1. Several people were flying on the field. 2. Russia is a country with a lot of natural resources. 3. My brother is learning to a horse at the moment. 4. Farmers often leave the rice in the sun to . 5. They the buffalo-drawn cart with hay. 6. Farmers always need extra help with the . 7. Local people are turning into farmland. is a type of box that people use for keeping bees in. 8. A 9. Is it to meet you at the moment? 10. My uncle raises a herd of on his farm. IV. Fill in each blank with the correct adjective from the box. slow inconvenient

vast colourful

quite safe

peaceful hard

nomadic brave

shirt. 16. Nick looks very funny – today he is wearing a 17. It will be very for me to have no bicycle. 18. Last Sunday our class visited a village near our school. 19. The dentist ask me to try to be because it might hurt me a little. area of forest this year. 20. People have cut down trees in a/an 21. On the Gobi Highland we can find several tribes living on raising cattle. 22. The life is usually and quite in the countryside. 23. Is it to drink water from this home village. life in his home village. 24. After he retired, he leads a 25. Many years ago my village was very poor and the living conditions were so V. Complete the sentences, using the comparative form of the adjectives in the box. cheap intelligent 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. essay. 10. VI.

expensive bad

good big

small hard

generous traditional

hot important

An elephant is a mouse. it was yesterday. The weather today is A diamond costs a lot of money. A diamond is a ruby. A lake is an ocean. A person can think logically. A person is an animal. money. Good health is I can buy a bicycle, but not a motorbike. A bicycle is a motorbike. The last question is the others. I think my second essay is the first. There were many mistakes in the first The food ina street market is that in a supermarket. Use the adjective in brackets in their correct forms of comparison to complete the sentences. 25

bad quick

optimistic sound

healthy good

1. A baby can sleep than an adult. 2. People in the country eat than people in the city. than we do nowadays. 3. Our grandparents got dressed 4. Nick speaks English than I do. 5. That old lady donates than her family members. 6. City people seem to apply modern techniques than country people. about the future of young people in the country that local 7. The scientist talked people. 8. The paddy fields in my village were affected by the floods than the next village. IX. Complete the sentences with suitable forms of the adverbs given in the brackets. 1. Nick is a careful write than Phuc. (carefully) Nick writes essays _____________________________________________ . 2.A snail is slower than a scrab. (slowly) A snail moves _________________________________________________ . 3.My father’s explanation about the subject was clearer than my brother’s. (clearly) My father explained the subject ____________________________________ . 4.My cousin is a better singer than I am. (well) My cousin sings _______________________________________________ . 5. Phong is a faster swimmer than Phuc. (fast) Phong swims __________________________________________________ . X.Fill in each blank in the appropriate form of the word in brackets. 1.Iceland is considered the most country in the world. (peace) 2.A lifestyle has its advantages and disadvantages. (nomad) for several years. (collect) 3.My brother has been a stamp 4.It is a/an place to hold a picnic because it is too far from the road. (convenience) . (safe) 5.Drinking water in some areas may be with several local farmers. (friend) 6.During my stay in the village, I was 7.Encouraging children to eat and drink is very important. (health) 26

8.Local people in the village often wear their costumes during the festivals. (tradition) 9.Please give to that charity to help the homeless after the flood. (generous) 10.The baby slept very because the bed was really comfortable. (sound) 12.There is a of books on the shelf. (collect) 13.It is very for people in remote areas to get to hospitals. (convenience) 14.He is very with his hands. (skill) 15. It is said that water collected from the local streams is to drink. (safe) 16. We want relations with all countries. (friend) XI. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that best answers the question about the passage. Living in the country is something that people from the city often dream about. However, in reality, it has both advantagesand disadvantages. There are certainly many advantages to living in the country. First, you can enjoy peace and quietness. Moreover, people tend to be friendlier. A further advantage is that there is less traffic, so it is safer for young children. However, there are certain disadvantages or drawbacks to life outside the city. First, because there are fewer people, you are likely to have few friends. In addition, entertainment is difficult to find, particularly in the evening. Furthermore, the fact that there are fewer shops and services means that it is hard to find jobs. In short, it can be seen the country is more suitable for some people than others. On the whole, it is often the best for those who are retired or who have young children. In contrast, young people who have a career are better provided in the city. 1.According to the passage, living in the country has . A. only good points B. only bad points C. both good and bad points D. no disadvantages 2.How many advantages does living in the county have? A. two B. three C. four D. no 3.Living in the country is safer for young children because . A. there is less traffic B. there are few shops C. there are fewer people D. there are few services 4.Which of the following statements is NOT true according to the passage? A. People in the country tend to be friendlier than people in the city. B. Itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s hard to find entertainment in the country. C. There are fewer shops and services in the country. D.The country is only suitable for retired people. 5.Having few friends is . A. one of drawbacks to life in the country B. the only disadvantage to living in the countryside C. one of certain drawbacks to life outside the city D.one of certain advantages to life outside the city XII. Choose the word or the phrase among A,B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. The country and the city have advantages and (1) . People in the country live in more beautiful surroundings. They enjoy (2) and quietness, and can do their work at their (3) pace because no one is in a (4) . They live in larger, more comfortable houses,and their neighbors are more friendly, and ready to help them (5) they need it. Their life, however, can be (6) and they may be isolated, which is a serious problem (7) they are ill or want to take children to school. The city has all the services that the country lacks, but it (8) has a lot of disadvantages. Cities are often polluted. They not (9) have polluted air but also have noisy streets. Everyone is that people have no time to get to know each other and make always in a hurry and this (10) friends. 1.A. joy B.enjoyment C.happiness D.disadvantages 2.A.quiet B.quietly C.peace D.peaceful 3.A.less B.own C.just D.only 4.A.hurry B.hurried C.hurriedly D.hurrying 27

5.A.When B.which C.what D.that 6.A.bore B.bored C.boring D.bores 7.A. unless B. because C. although D. if 8.A. also B. yet C. already D. so 9.A. never B. ever C. hardly D. only 10.A. aims B. means C. asks D. said XIII. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that best answers the question about the passage. The country is more beautiful than a town and more pleasant to live in. Many people think so, and go to the country for the summer holidays though they cannot live there all the year round. Some have a cottage built in a village so that they can go there whenever they can find the time. English villages are not all alike, but in some ways they are not very different form one another. Almost every village has a church, the round and square tower of which can be seen from many miles around. Surrounding the church is the churchyard, where people are buried. The village green is a wide stretch of grass, the houses or cottages are built round it. Country life is now fairy comfortable and many villages have running water brought through pipes into each house. Most villages are so close to some small towns that people can go there to buy what they canâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t find in the village shops. 1. When do city people often go the country? A.All the weekends. B.All the year round. C.At Christmas D.The summer holidays. 2. What is the advantage of city people when they have a cottage built in the village? A. They can have their houses rented. B. They can go to the country at weekends. C.They can go to the whenever they can find the time. D.All the correct. 3. What is the common feature of English villages? A. They have a church B. They have a church with a tall tower, and a village green. C.They have a village green D.They have running water. 4. What is NOT mentioned in the life of English villages? A.The village green B. The church C.Running water D.The Internet 5.What can villagers do when their villages are close to small towns? A.They can go there to buy whatever they want. B.They can go there to buy cheaper things. C.They can go there to buy what is not found in the village shops. D.They can go there to buy luxury goods. I. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. II. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

TEST 3 UNIT 2 Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others. a. ride b. excite c. ridden d. beehive b. vast c. brave d. farm a. pasture a. cattle b. circular c. country d. collect a. generous b. ger c. grassland d. guess a. worked b. watched c. relaxed d. crowded Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence. I went on a trip to the countryside and had my first experience _______ farm work. a.on b. with c. for d. of We usually spend our holiday in the village _______ our grandparents live. a.what b. where c. which d. when I think country life is so boring and _______ because youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;re not close to shops and services. a. unhealthy b.inconvenient c. comfortable d. peaceful On the farm, uncle Duong showed us how to _______ cucumbers. a. plough b.produce c. pick d. put up Mongolian children start to learn _______ before they can walk. 28

a. horse riding b.riding horse c. ride horse d. horse ridden 6. On the side of the road, a herd boy was herding _______. a. kites b.hay c. cattle d. blackberries 7. Mongolian children learn to ride when they are _______ as three years old. a. as young b.younger c. younger than d. so young 8. Does your new stereo play music _______ than your old one did? a. louder b.more loudly c. loudlier d. more louder 9. Countryside is not polluted _______ you can breathe there fresh air. a. although b.however c. therefore d. as 10. ‘Children in my village often fly their kites in dry rice fields.’ ‘_______’ a. It’s right up my street! b. That’s awesome. c. Exactly what I want. d. How interesting! III. Match the word or phrase with its definition. 1. buffalo drawn cart a. a circular wooden canvas and felt tent 2. harvest time b. land covered with grass where sheep, cows, horses, etc., feed 3. paddy field c. a vehicle with two or four wheels pulled by buffalo 4. cattle d. a structure where bees are kept for producing honey 5. pasture e. cows and bulls that are kept as farm animals 6. ger f. a high mountainous area of a country 7. beehive g. a field in which rice is grown 8. highlands h. the time of year when crops are cut and collected from the fields 9. dairy products i. a member of a community that moves with its animals from place to place 10. nomad j. food made from milk, such as butter and cheese IV. Complete the sentences with the adjectivesfrom the box. generous fresh

peaceful brave

optimistic

exciting

quiet

vast

5. Rural areas are common / commonly known as the countryside or a village. 6. Nomadic children are very brave / bravely to learn to ride a horse at the age of five. 7. The sun is shining bright / brightly through the trees. 8. We all find living in the city very stressful / stressfully. 9. Don’t talk so fast / fastly– I can’t understand what you’re saying. 10. John was a kindly and generous / generously man. VII. Complete the sentences with the comparative form of adverbs in the box. Add ‘than’ where necessary. carefully

envious

1. It’s ____________ to see a kite flying high in the sky. 2. It was very ____________ there; you could just hear the wind moving in the trees. 3. I love the ____________ open spaces and the ____________ air in the countryside. 4. The villagers often find it ____________ to get into town due to the lack of public transport. 5. People in rural areas are more ____________ than their city counterparts. 6. I’m so ____________ of you getting such an exciting holiday. 7. Billy is clearly a ____________ person. He contributed lots of money to charity. 8. It was very ____________ of him to jump into the river to save a drowning child,. 9. Most of Mongolian people are ____________ at riding a horse. 10. Life in the countryside is more ____________ and healthier. V. Put the words in the box in the correct rows. strawberries a tent a bike

grass roses

hay

a donkey a building

buffaloes

a fence grapes

a motorcycle

sheep

cattle cows

flowers

rice straw

a camel

a memorial

lettuces

a poster

ahorse rainwater

stamps

quietly

slowly

healthily

well

badly

quickly

far

fast

1. The teacher spoke ___________ to help us to understand. 2. She answered all the questions __________ the other students and she got a very good mark. 3. The Spanish athlete ran ___________ the other runners, so he won the race. 4. Jim threw the ball ___________ Peter. 5. This street is crowded and narrow. Couldn’t you drive a bit ___________? 6. These days we are eating ___________ ever before. 7. I did ___________ on the test than Mark did. He got an A+ and I just got an A. 8. Machines can help farmers harvest ___________. 9. Does more money make you work ___________? 10. You’re talking so loudly. Could you speak a bit ___________, please? VII. Underline the correct words or phrases. 1. Cattle usually cross over the road. You should drive more careful / more carefully. 2. Life in some parts of the country is boring / more boring than that in other parts. 3. The old usually get up earlier / more early than the young. 4. An ox doesn’t plough weller / better than a buffalo. 5. These 7 thinking habits will help you become more confident / more confidently. 6. Don’t worry. The river is not as deep / deeper as it looks. 7. After a hard working day, you may sleep soundlier / more soundly than usual. 8. My father has been much healthier / more healthy since he stopped smoking. 9. The air in the mountainous zones is more fresh / fresher than that in the cities. 10. I can’t understand. Would you ask him to speak clearlier / more clearly? VIII. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. Some people think that health is _____________ than money. (important) 2. The pollution in our city is much _____________ than it used to be. (bad) 3. My new teacher explained the lessons _____________ than my old teacher. (clear) 4. He doesn’t play volleyball as _____________ as his brother. (good) 5. Get rid of the sorrow! You will do it _____________ next time. (good) 6. Communication is a lot _____________ than it was 50 years ago. (easy) 7. People in rural areas wear _____________ than those in cities. (simple) 8. Robert arrived at the meeting _____________ than Francis. (late) 9. These trousers are too wide. Do you have any that are _____________? (narrow) 10. My mother always gets up _____________ than everybody else in the house. (early) 11. Rene speaks _____________ than the other ESL students in the class. (fluent) 12. Can’t you think of anything _____________ to say? (intelligent) 13. I think his new book is much _____________ than his last one. (boring) 14. Max finished the homework _____________ than anyone else in the class. (fast) 15. He doesn’t look as _____________ as he used to. (happy) IX. Write the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets. 1. We ___________(play) football this afternoon. Do you want to play too? 2. Could you meet me at the airport tomorrow? My flight___________(arrive) at six. 3. Last summer, my friends and I ___________(spend) our holiday on a farm. 4. Nick ___________(not ride) a buffalo drawn cart before. 5. The cattle ___________(graze) on the green pastures right now. 6. Millions of Mongolians ___________(be) semi-nomadic herders for thousands of years.

inconvenient

skillful

hard

goats

♦ride: _________________________________________________________________ ♦ herd: ________________________________________________________________ ♦collect: _______________________________________________________________ ♦pick: _________________________________________________________________ ♦ put up: _______________________________________________________________ VI. Underline the correct form of the word. 1. We’ve all been working very hard / hardly and now we’re tired 2. Our school Internet connection is really slow / slowly. 3. What’s the matter with him? He looks angry / angrily. 4. The children are playing quiet / quietly in the garden. 29

7. My family ___________(live) in a small town for ten years before moving to Boston. 8. Country life ___________(not excite) me at all. It’s so boring. 9. Nick would like ___________(visit) the countryside at the harvest time. 10. I don’t mind ___________(drive) for 1.5 hours on the weekend to get out to the countryside. X. Write the correct form of the word in brackets. 1. People seem to have lost their ___________ in boating on small rivers. (enjoy) 2. More and more ___________are leaving the countryside to city. (farm) 3. A town has a ___________ population than a village does. (large) 4. Sylvia likes the ___________ atmosphere during her stay in the valley. (peace) 5. The firefighters were praised for their ___________ and devotion to duty. (brave) 6. Visually the house is very pleasing, but it’s ___________. (comfort) 7. It is true that the city can provide much ___________. (convenient) 8. Agricultural work is ___________ seen as a male occupation. (tradition) 9. Villages and towns are not as densely ___________ as cities. (populate) 10. The trip was an ___________ experience. We enjoyed it very much! (forget) XI. Match the questions with the answers. 1. Which is better, city life or rural life? a. Yes, there are some. 2. From whom did you learn to make kites? b. At harvest time. 3. Where can you fly a kite in your village? c. My father. 4. Why do you store the hay? d. Its peacefulness. 5. Do you think country people are friendlier? e. Both have pros and cons. 6. When would you like to visit the countryside? f. To feed our cattle. 7. Are there any street markets in your hometown? g. In dry paddy fields. 8. What do you love most about countryside? h. Yes. They’re also happier. XII. Choose the word which best fits each gap. Although the city seems to have a lot of great things, the country can offer as (1)_________ satisfaction as well. The country is a marvelous place to live in. It offers a very relaxing feeling, and it is filled (2)_________ magnificent views and scenery. Rural towns offer more open space than cities and aren’t overcrowded. The country can also maybe help you become a more independent and (3)_________ person. You can buy a small piece of land, plough it and put some (4)_________ in order to grow your own vegetables. This way you (5)_________ your own crops, and eat and live in a very healthy way. (6)_________, being in the countryside makes you more of an outdoor person often enjoying the voices and wild places of nature. Not everyone is (7)_________ to the city life and not everyone has the desire to live permanently in the countryside. It is a matter of perspective and personal point of (8)_________. 1. a. most b. more c. much d. many 2. a. in b. out c. up d. with 3. a. active b. idle c. passive d. quiet 4. a. weeds b. seeds c. breeds d. branches 5. a. collect b. damage c. complete d. rotate 6. a. By contrast b. However c. Therefore d. In addition 7. a. Interested b. bored c. suited d. excited 8. a. care b. view C. contact d. way XIII. Read the text carefully, then choose the correct answers. For 3,000 years, Mongolians have lived in the rural areas, adopting a pastoral way of life, moving in the search of new pastures. They depend largely on their livestock for a living and sustain themselves with what they can get from the land. Today, approximately half of Mongolia’s population is still roaming the vast plains living in the ger and moving their campings several timesa year. Nomadic life thrives in summer and survives in winter. When temperatures are warm, they work hard on their farms to get milk and make airag, consuming meat from their sheeps and goats. Once winter comes, temperatures dip extremely low and they stay indoors and survive on horse meat. With the rise of technology, changes in the Mongolian nomadic lifestyle are almost inevitable. While they still lead their lifestyle as pastoral herders, many use motorbikes to herd cattle and horses. To move their homes, trucks have taken the place of ox carts. Solar panels are also becoming an addition to the ger, giving them access to electricity without being confined to one place. The nomads use solar energy to power television sets and mobile phones.

1. Mongolians regularly move from place to place in order to _________. a.look for food for their family b. find pastures for their livestock c. herd their cattle and horses d. sell their animals and farm products 2. How many Mongolians still live a traditional nomadic life? a.Close to 40 percent b. More than 50 percent c. About 50 percent d. Approximately 60 percent 3. What is a ger? a.A portable, round tent b. A thatched house c. A circular house made of snow d. A wooden hut 4. What is the Mongolian’s main food in winter? a.airag b. goat meat c. sheep meat d. horse meat 5. Today, Mongolian nomads _________. a.don’t lead their lifestyle as herders any more b.use ox carts to move their homes c.use solar energy to power electronic devices d.have the advantage of urban life 6. Which of the followings is NOT true about Mongolian nomads? a.They live in the countryside. b.They live by and for their livestock. c.They work hard in winter when the temperature dip very low. d.They are now taking advantage of technology. XIV.Read the text carefully, then answer the questions. Many people enjoy living in a big city because they think life is more exciting there. However, I come from a small village and in my view, there are lots of benefits. The main reason I prefer village life is because it’s very quiet, so I always feel calm when I’m here. Another reason is that the air is so fresh and clean. We have more green spaces and bigger gardens, too. In addition, I think the people here are friendlier. Personally, I’m interested in wildlife photography, so the countryside is perfect for me. The only downside is transport. I have an early start for a long Journey to school in Faro and the school bus is always stopping to pick up more people. Also, it’s boring sometimes, but I enjoy chatting to my friends. Fortunately, I’m learning to ride a moped. On balance, I disagree that city life is better, as I think my village lifestyle is healthier and more relaxing. In spite of that, some of my friends couldn’t cope with life in the country, so it comes down to personal opinion. 1. Where does the writer come from? ___________________________________________________________________ 2. Does he like living in a big city? ___________________________________________________________________ 3. Why does he prefer village life? ___________________________________________________________________ 4. How does he think about the people in his village? ___________________________________________________________________ 5. According to the writer, what is the disadvantage of living in the village? ___________________________________________________________________ 6. How does he go to school? ___________________________________________________________________ 7. Does he think city life is better than village life? ___________________________________________________________________ 8. What is he interested in? ___________________________________________________________________

UNIT 3: PEOPLES OF VIET NAM A. VOCABULARY 1. ancestor (n) /ˈænsestə(r)/: ông cha, tổ tiên 2. basic (adj) /ˈbeɪsɪk/: cơ bản 3. complicated (adj) /ˈkɒmplɪkeɪtɪd/: tinh vi, phức tạp

4. costume (n) /ˈkɒstjuːm/: trang phục 5. curious (adj) /ˈkjʊəriəs/: tò mò, muốn tìm hiểu 6. custom (n) /ˈkʌstəm/: tập quán, phong tục 7. diverse (adj) /daɪˈvɜːs/: đa dạng 8. diversity (n) /daɪˈvɜːsəti/: sự đa dạng, phong phú 9. ethnic (adj) /ˈeθnɪk/ (thuộc): dân tộc 10. ethnic group (n) /ˈeθnɪk ɡruːp/ (nhóm): dân tộc 11. ethnic minority people (n) /ˈeθnɪk maɪˈnɒrəti ˈpiːpl/: người dân tộc thiểu số 12. gather (v) /ˈɡæðə(r)/: thu thập, hái lượm 13. heritage (n) /ˈherɪtɪdʒ/: di sản 14. hunt (v) /hʌnt/: săn bắt 15. insignificant (adj) /ˌɪnsɪɡˈnɪfɪkənt/: không quan trọng, không ý nghĩa 16. majority (n) /məˈdʒɒrəti/: đa số 17. minority (n) /maɪˈnɒrəti/: thiểu số 18. multicultural (adj) /ˌmʌltiˈkʌltʃərəl/: đa văn hóa 19. recognise (v) /ˈrekəɡnaɪz/: công nhận, xác nhận 20. shawl (n) /ʃɔːl/: khăn quàng 21. speciality (n) /ˌspeʃiˈæləti/: đặc sản 22. stilt house (n) /stɪlt haʊs/ nhà sàn 23. terraced field (n) /ˈterəst fiːld/: ruộng bậc thang 24. tradition (n) /trəˈdɪʃn/: truyền thống 25. unique (adj) /juˈniːk/: độc nhất, độc đáo 26. waterwheel (n) /ˈwɔːtəwiːl/: cối xay nước B. GRAMMAR REVIEW I. ÔN TẬP CÂU HỎI. (QUESTION) Theo quy tắc ngữ pháp, khi là câu hỏi thì chúng ta cần đảo trợ động từ (auxiliray verbs) lên trước chủ ngữ 1. Câu hỏi Yes/No (Yes/No Questions) Câu hỏi dạng Yes/No Questions là dạng câu hỏi đòi hỏi câu trả lời là Yes (có) hoặc No (không). Cấu trúc Ví dụ Trợ động từ (be/ do/ does) + chủ ngữ (S) + Isn’t Lan going to school today? động từ + ….? Hôm nay Lan đi học phải không? Yes, S + trợ động từ / tobe. Yes, she is. (đúng vậy) Hoặc Was Hung sick yesterday? No, S + trợ động từ / tobe + not No, he wasn’t. (không, anh ấy không bệnh) 2. Wh-question Trong tiếng Anh, khi chúng ta cần hỏi rõ ràng và cần có câu trả lời cụ thể, ta dùng câu hỏi với các từ để hỏi. Loại câu hỏi này được gọi là câu hỏi trực tiếp (direct questions) a. Các từ dùng để hỏi trong tiếng Anh Who (Ai) (chức Whom (Ai) (chức What (Cái gì) Whose (Của ai) năng chủ ngữ) năng tân ngữ Where (Ở đâu) Which (cái nào) (để When (Khi nào) Why (Tại sao) hỏi về sự lựa chọn) How (như thế nào) How much (Bao How many (Bao How long (Bao lâu) nhiêu) nhiêu, số lượng) How far(Bao xa) How old (Bao nhiêu How often (Bao nhiêu What time (Mấy tuổi) lần) giờ) Các cấu trúc câu hỏi WH thường gặp • Nguyên tắc đặt câu hỏi - Nếu chưa có trợ động từ thì phải mượn trợ động từ :do/ does/ did - Nếu trợ động từ có sẵn (am/is/are/can /will/shall/would/could) thì đảo chúng ra trước chủ ngữ, không mượn do/does/did nữa. 33

•

Cấu trúc thông thường của loại câu hỏi Wh-questions Từ để hỏi thường được viết ở đầu câu hỏi.Từ để hỏi có thể làm chủ ngữ (subject) hay tân ngữ (object) và bổ ngữ. Dạng Dạng 1: Câu hỏi tân ngữ

Cấu trúc Wh-word + auxiliary + S + V + object? Từ để hỏi + trợ động từ + chủ ngữ + động từ chính + (tân ngữ) Ví dụ: Where do you live? (Anh sống ở đâu?) What are you doing? (Ạnh đang làm gì thế?) Whom do you meet this morning? (Anh gặp lại ai sáng nay?) (Whom là tân ngữ của động từ “meet”) Who are you going with? (Bạn sẽ đi với ai?)

Chú ý Object là danh từ, đại từ đứng sau động từ hoặc giới từ.

Dạng 2: Wh-word + tobe + S + complement? Câu hỏi (Từ để hỏi + động từ tobe + chủ ngữ + bổ ngữ) Ví dụ. bổ ngữ Where is John? (John ở đâu?) Who are you? (Bạn là ai?) Whose is this umbrella? (Cái ô này của ai?) Who is the head of your school? (Hiệu trưởng của trường anh là ai?)

Bổ ngữ là danh từ hoặc tính từ Động từ tobe chia theo chủ ngữ

Động từ chính luôn Dạng 3: Wh-word + V + object? được chia theo ngôi thứ Câu hỏi (Từ để hỏi + động từ chính + tân ngữ) Ví dụ. 3 số ít. chủ ngữ Who lives in London with Daisy? (Ai sống ở London cùng với Daisy vậy?) Who is opening the door? (Ai đang mở cửa đấy?) Who teaches you English? (Ai dạy bạn Tiếng Anh?) Which is better? (Cái/loại nào tốt hơn?) What caused the accident? (Nguyên nhân gì đã gây ra tai nạn?) C.Trường hợp câu hỏi đặc biệt với WHICH Cách dùng

Ví dụ

“Which’ được sử dụng thay thế cho What và Who khi ta muốn hỏi ai đó chính xác về người hay vật trong một số lượng nhất định. Người nghe phải chọn trong giới hạn ấy để trả lời.

Which of you can’t do this exercise? (Em nào (trong số các em) không làm được bài tập này?) Which way to the station, please? (Cho hỏi đường nào đi đến ga ạ?)

B. BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN. Bài 1: Khoanh tròn vào đápán đúng. 1. _________ is your cat? It is two months old. A. How old B. When C. How much 2. ______ did you begin working part-time here? A. How long B. When C. How much 3. ______ people are there in the conference room? A. How B. Howmany C. How much 34

4. ______time will you spend on your new carpet? A. How long B. Howmany C. How much 5. _______do these shoes cost? A. How long B. Howmany C. How much 6. _______do you go to the gym? A. How B. How often C. How long 7. _____ did you get to work yesterday? I took a taxi because my car was broken. A. How B. Why C. When 8. ______were you late for work yesterday? - Because of the traffic jam A. How B. Why C. When 9. _____does this laptop belong to? It belongs to Jim. A. Who B. Whose C. Which 10. ______ bag was stolen yesterday? A. Who B. Whose C. Which 11. ______will you travel to this summer? I haven’t decided yet. A. Where B. What C. Who 12. _____did you sell yesterday? - Bread and cupcakes. A. What B.Who C. Which 13. ______dress did she buy? -The red or the blue one? A. What B.Whose C. Which 14. ______is playing the piano upstairs? A. Who B. Whose C. Whom 15. To ______should I address the letter? A. Who B. Whose C. Whom Bài 2: Điền từ thích hợp để hoàn thành các câu sau. 1. ________have you give up smoking? For about two years. 2. _________place is more densely populated – Ha noi or Ho Chi Minh City? 3. _________broken Jane’s favorite vase? Her brother did it. 4. _________ does Mr. Brown do? He’s a reseacher. 5. _________ethnic groups are there in your country? 6. _________ is your grandmother? She’s ninety years old. 7. _________ does your English teacher look like? She’s young and pretty. 8. _________water should we drink every day? 9. _________did you use to go to school? I used to go on foot. 10. _________is it from here to the nearest police station? 11. ________songs is this singer performing? He is performing Trinh Cong Son’s songs. `12. ________ was Ms Ann born? She was born in a small village. 13. ________did you have for breakfast? - Bread and eggs. 14. ________didn’t you invite Jim to the senior prom? 15. ________do they meet each other? - Almost every day. Bài3. Nối câu hỏi ở cột A với câu trả lời ở cột B sao cho thích hợp. A B 1. How much did you pay for that radio? a. For 6 years 2. How long have you worked as an engineer? b. About 6 kilomiters 3. When did you start your career as a singer? c. It’s near the local park. 4. How far is it from here to Tom’s mansion? d. I prefer tea. 5. Where isthe vet’s located? e. 10 dollars 6. How often do you go travelling? f. It’s mine 7. Which do you prefer: tea or coffee? g. 6 years ago 8. Whose luggage is it? h. Once or twice a year. 1. _____ 2. ____

3. _____ 4. ____

7. ______ 8. ______

Bài4. Điền một từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành những câu hỏi dưới đây 1. _____you like chocolate? 2. When ________ you begin studying here? 2 years ago. 3. Which movie_________ you watch last night? 4. How far __________it from here to the town center? 5. How long ___________Ann and James been friends with each other? 6. What________ you do tomorrow? I will just lie in my bed and read books. 7. Who _________ you pick up yesterday? 8. How old__________ they? 9. How many rooms __________ there in your house? 10. Who___________ sleeping in your room? 11. ___________you found your keys? No, I haven’t found them yet. 12. _________you travel to a mountainous area last summer? 13. How often ___________Ann visit her grandmother? 14. What _________you use to do before your retirement? 15. Where________Jim going to? He is going to the library? Bài5. Dựa vào từ cho sẵn, viết câu hỏi hoàn chỉnh 1. How many/ groups of people/ there/ in your country? ……………………………………………………………………….. 2. How/ your/ party/ last week? ……………………………………………………………………….. 3. How/ you/go/ school/ yesterday? ………………………………………………….. 4. Whose/ cat/ it? …….………………………………………………………………….. 5. Jim/ learn/ Geography/ at the moment? ……………………………………………………………….. 6. You/ ever/ see/ terraced fields? ……………………………………………………………….. 7. What/ kind of animal/ the farmers/ raise/ in your country? ……………………………………………………………….. 8. What time/ the concert/ start? ……………………………………………………………….. 9. How far/ it/ from/ your house/ to the local school? ……………………………………………………………….. 10. You/ come/ my birthday party/ tomorrow? ……………………………………………………………….. 11. Where/ you/go/ last summer? ……………………………………………………………….. 12. How much/ money/ you/spend/on clothes/ last month? ……………………………………………………………….. 13. How/ ethnic people/ dress/ in special occasions? ……………………………………………………………….. 14. Who/ swim/ in the swimming pool/ now? ……………………………………………………………….. 15. How often/ Mr. Smith/ now/ the lawn? II. MẠO TỪ KHÔNG XÁC ĐỊNH : A/ AN A. Lý thuyết 1. A đứng trước một phụ âm hoặc một nguyên âm (a, e, i, o, u) có âm là phụ âm. - a game (một trò chơi); a boat (một chiếc tàu thủy) - a university (một trường đại học); a year (một năm)

5.______ 6. ______ 35

- a European (một người Âu); a one-legged man (một người thọt chân) 2. An đứng trước một nguyên âm hoặc một h câm. - an egg (một quả trứng); an ant (một con kiến) - an honour (một niềm vinh dự); an hour (một giờ đồng hồ) 3. An cũng đứng trước các mẫu tự đặc biệt đọc như một nguyên âm. - an SOS (một tín hiệu cấp cứu); an MSc (một thạc sĩ khoa học), an X-ray (môt tia X) 4.A/An có hình thức giống nhau ở tất cả các giống. - a tiger (một con cọp); a tigress (một con cọp cái) - an uncle (một ông chú); an aunt (một bà dì) B. Ví dụ: 1. Trước một danh từ số ít đếm được. - We need a computer. (Chúng tôi cần một máy vi tính) - He eats an ice-cream. (Anh ta ăn một cây kem) 2. Trước một danh từ làm bổ túc từ (kể cả danh từ chỉ nghề nghiệp) - It was a tempest. (Đó là một trận bão dữ dội) - She’ll be a musician. (Cô ta sẽ là một nhạc sĩ) - Peter is an actor. (Peter là một diễn viên) 3. Trong các thành ngữ chỉ số lượng nhất định - a lot (nhiểu); a couple (một cặp/đôi); a third (một phần ba) - a dozen (một tá); a hundred (một trăm); a quarter (một phần tư) 4. Trong các thành ngữ chỉ giá cả, tốc độ, tỉ lệ ... - 90 kilometres an hour (chín mươi kilomet/giờ) - 4 times a day (bốn lần mỗi ngày) - 2 dollars a litre (hai đô la một lít) (a/an = per (mỗi)) 5. Trong các thành ngữ chỉ sự cảm thán - What a pity! (thật đáng tiếc!) - Such a picturesque hill! (một ngọn đồi thật thơ mộng!) - What a beautiful painting! (một bức tranh tuyệt vời!) 6.a có thể đứng trước Mr/Mrs/Miss + họ - a Mr Smith, a Mrs Smith, a Miss Smith

- King Louis XIV of France (Vua Louis XIV của Pháp) 7. Trong các trường hợp sau đây - Women are always fond of music. (Phụ nữ luôn thích âm nhạc.) - Come by car/ by bus (Đến bằng xe ôtô/ xe buýt) - In spring/ in autumn (Vào mùa xuân/ mùa thu), last night (đêm qua), next year (năm tới), from beginning to end (từ đầu tới cuối), from left to right (từ trái sang phải) - Play golf/ chess/ cards/ football/.............. (chơi gôn/ đánh cờ/ đánh bài) ……………………………………………………………….. BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài6. Điền mạo từ ‘a” hoặc “an” trước những danh từ sau:

III. MẠO TỪ XÁC ĐỊNH : THE The dùng cho cả danh từ đếm được (số ít lẫn số nhiểu) và danh từ không đếm được. The truth (sự thật) The time (thời gian) The bicycle (một chiếc xe đạp) The bicycles (những chiếc xe đạp) • Không dùng mạo từ xác định: 1. Trước tên quốc gia, tên châu lục, tên núi, tên hổ, tên đường. Europe (Châu Âu), South America (Nam Mỹ), France (nước Pháp) 2. Khi danh từ không đếm được hoặc danh từ số nhiều dùng theo nghĩa chung nhất, chứ không chỉ riêng trường hợp nào. - I don’t like French beer. (Tôi chẳng thích bia của Pháp.) - I don’t like Mondays. (Tôi chẳng thích những ngày thứ Hai.) 3. Trước danh từ trừu tượng, trừ phi danh từ đó chỉ một trường hợp cá biệt. - Men fear death. (Con người sợ cái chết.) (But) - The death of the President made his country acephalous. (Cái chết của vị tổng thống đã khiến cho đất nước ông không có người lãnh đạo). 4. Sau sở hữu tính từ hoặc sau danh từ ở sở hữu cách - My friend, chứ không nóiMy the friend - The girl’s mother = the mother of the girl (Mẹ của cô gái) 5. Trước tên gọi các bữa ăn -They invited some friends to dinner. (Họ đã mời vài người bạn đến ăn tối) 6. Trước các tước hiệu - President Roosevelt (Tổng thống Roosevelt) 37

BÀI 7: Điền mạo từ ‘a’, ‘an’ hoặc 0 vào chỗ trống sao cho thích hợp. 1. She asked me for ___ information about the meeting. 2. They will move to ___ mansion next month. 3. I’d like ___ grapefruit and ___ orange juice. 4. ___award was given to Jim yesterday. 5. We read ___ books and play ___ games when we have free time. 6. Jim doesn’t want to borrow ___ money from anyone. 7. My friend and I threw ___ party last week. 8. It was ___ honor to be invited here today. 9. I’ve bought ___ umbrella for my sister. 10. My family often have____ eggs for breakfast. 11. Would you like______cup of tea? 12. My brother doesn’t like ______ cats. 13. Is there __________post office here? 14. I spend _________hours on my DIY project. 15. Mr. Peter used to be ___________famous vet. BÀI 8: Điền mạo từ “a”, “an” hoặc “the” vào chỗ trống sao cho phù hợp. 1. We have __ cat and ____ dog, _____ cat doesn’t get on well with ___ dog. 2. You can see ____ moon clearly in the Mid-Autumn festival. 3. He is ____famous actor. 4. My brother doesn’t like ____ present I gave him. 5. Where is ____ book I lent you last week? 6. My father works as ___ electrician. 7. Have you ever heard about ____ River Thames? 8. I want to travel around _____ world when I grow up. 9. Yesterday my mother had ______terrible headache. 10. Where are ____kids? They are playing outside. 11. Peter is ______most hard-working student I’ve ever known. 12. It is cold because_______heating systems is broken. 13. Did you buy _______pair of shoes yesterday? 14. _____Earth orbits around _______Sun. 15. She took ______hamburger and ____apple, but she didn’t eat ____apple. 16. A boy and a girl is arguing over there, I think I know _____boy. 17. My grandfather sent me _____letter and ____gift but I haven’t received________letter. 18. My mom is _____best mom in _____world. 19. Would you like________glass of water? 20. James offered me ________cup of coffee and _____piece of cake. _____cake is delicious. BÀI 9: Đánh dấu (V) trước câu đúng, đánh dấu (X) trước câu sai và sửa lại cho đúng. 1. There is an big apple in the refrigerator. _____ 2. It took me the hour to finish my homework. _____ 3. I don’t know a full name of my manager. _____ 38

4. They are most beautiful creature on earth. 5. Mary is studying at a university in Hanoi. 6. This is an unique custom of this ethnic group. 7. Did you enjoy a party last night? 8. The sun is shining brightly. 9. No one in my family likes drinking a beer. 10. Peter is a friend of mine.

_____ _____

6. What time/ sun/ often/ rise/ in/ summer? …………………………………………………………………….? 7. You/ like/ cup/ of/ tea? …………………………………………………………………….? 8. Train/ leave/ early/ this morning? …………………………………………………………………….? 9. Who/ play/ guitar/ upstairs? …………………………………………………………………….?

_____ _____ _____ _____ _____

BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO. Bài 10. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân trong những câu trả lời sau. 1. Jim has recently experienced the life of ethnic people in Vietnam. ……………………………………………………………………………..? 2. The ethnic minorities in Vietnam often live in mountainous areas. ……………………………………………………………………………..? 3. Their costumes are colorful and unique. ……………………………………………………………………………..? 4. They often gather together at the communal house in special occasions. ……………………………………………………………………………..? 5. The chief of the community often tell tales of heroes to the people at the communal house ……………………………………………………………………………….? 6. Ethnic people often hold festivals in spring. ………………………………………………………………………………? 7. Life in the mountainous areas is quite difficult because of the extreme weather. ………………………………………………………………………………? 8. In the remote areas, it may take people half a day to travel from their house to the market. ……………………………………………………………………………… 9. Shortage in electricity and fresh water supply makes life in remote areas so difficult. ………………………………………………………………………………? 10. The local authorities try to help the ethnic minorities by teaching them effective farming methods. ………………………………………………………………………………? BÀI 11: Điền mạo từ “a”, “an”, “the” hoặc 0 vào chỗ trống sao cho phù hợp. 1. Farmers in my hometown earn a living by raising ____poultry. 2. Some villagers play _____ flute in special occasions. 3. Do you know there is _____ local folk festival tonight? 4. I like _____colourful costumes of _____ethnic minority people in Vietnam. 5. ______cattle are often raised in the rural areas in my country. 6. When I travel to _____ foreign country, I always want to try _______local specialities first. 7. Have you ever been to _________remote area? 8. Ethnic minority people often gather together at __________communal house 9. In Tay Nguyen, people sometimes ride ______ elephants. 10. _________traditional customs of Vietnam are totally different from________customs of Western countries. Bài 12: Dựa vào những từ cho sẵn, viết câu hoàn chỉnh. 1. When/ bank/ open/ every day? …………………………………………………………………….? 2. You/ have/ bread/ and/ boiled egg/ for/ breakfast? …………………………………………………………………….? 3. Everyone/ enjoy/ concert/ last night? …………………………………………………………………….? 4. When/ you/ start/ working/ as/ officer/ in/ this company? …………………………………………………………………….? 5. How much/ money/ you/ spend/ on/ your/ last/ holiday? …………………………………………………………………….?

10. Who/ tallest/ person/ in/ your/ class? …………………………………………………………………….? Bài 13: Khoanh vào đáp án đúng. Elephants need help The elephant is (1) _______ unique cultural symbol of Tay Nguyen and Dak lak is considered the land of (2) ________ elephants in Vietnam. In the past.Tay Nguyen used to have large (3) __________ of elephants living in the mountains. They helped (4) ______locals and they lived in harmony with people. However, the elephants in Tay Nguyen are in (5) _____ now. In recent years, climate changes have decreased the area of natural forests. Illegal deforestation has also threaten the elephants. Besides, illegal hunting for tusks, bones and tail hair has killed many of (6) __________ animals, (7) ________can we protect the elephants? It is important that both the authorities and the local people joined hands to save the elephants from (8) ______. 1. A. a B. an C. the D. 0 2. A. a B. an C. the D. 0 3. A. shoals B. schools C. herds D. flocks 4. A. a B. an C. the D. 0 5. A. safe B. guard C. danger D. protection 6. A. a B. an C. the D. 0 7. A. How B. What C. Who D. Why 8. A. extinction B. protection C. destruction D. conservation Bài 14: Đọc bài đọc dưới đây và trả lời câu hỏi. NGOC LU BRONZE DRUM Dong Son bronze drums are very famous for its cultural value. They are often used as a musical instrument in festivals and rituals. Of about 200 drums discovered, Ngoc Lu bronze drum is considered the most beautiful drum of the Dong Son culture ever found in Vietnam. It is now preserved at the National Museum of Vietnam History in Hanoi. This drum has a large size and an ancient look with many decorative patterns. These patterns include a multi-ray star (symbolizing the shining sun) and in between the star rays are designs of stylized peacock feathers. Bands of geometrical patterns with small dots surround the star. The band of human figures presents two people pounding rice, some other standing or sitting inside the house, some beating the drum and many others dancing. In between those human patterns are the curved-roof stilted house, bronze drum, bronze bells, weapons, musical instruments and so on. The bands of animal figures include short –bill birds, the long –bill birds and deer. The Ngoc Lu bronze drum is the most typical one in the bronze drum system of Vietnam, and at the same time it symbolizes the brilliant peak of the Dong Son culture. The drum represents the scientific knowledge and the artistic talent and mind of the ancient Viet. 1. What are Dong Son bronze drums famous for? ……………………………………………………………………………… 2. Which bronze drum is considered the most beautiful drum of the Dong Son culture? ………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Where is the Ngoc Lu bronze drum preserved now? ……………………………………………………………………………….. 4. What decorative patterns are in between the star rays? ……………………………………………………………………………….

A. the – the B. a – a C. the – a D. a – the 18. She has read interesting book. A. a B. an C. the D. Ø 19. You’ll get shock if you touch live wire with that screwdriver. A. an – the B. Ø – the C. a – a D. an – the 20. Mr. Smith is old customer and honest man. A. an – the B. the – an C. an – an D. the – the 21. youngest boy has just started going to school. A. A – Ø B. Ø – the C. an – Ø D. The – Ø 22. Do you go to prison to visit him? A. the B. a C. Ø D. an 23. eldest boy is at college. A. a – the B. The – Ø C. Ø – a D. an – x 24. Are you going away next week? - No, week after next. A. an B. a C. the D. Ø 25. Would you like to hear story about English scientist? A. an – the B. the – the C. a – the D. a – an 26. There’ll always be a conflict between old and young. A. the – the B. an – a C. an – the D. the – a 27. There was collision at corner. A. the – a B. an – the C. a – the D. the – the 28. My mother thinks that this is expensive shop. A. the B. an C. a D. Ø 29. Like many women, she loves parties and gifts. A. the – a B. a – the C. a – a D. Ø – Ø week. 30. She works seven days A. a B. the C. an D. Ø IV. Choose the correct answers. 1. Is this aperson / the person you told me about? 2. This is the only cinema/an only cinema in the area. 3. Philip has just bought the Thames barge / a Thames barge. 4. I’m going to the British Museum /British Museum this afternoon. 5. Are you going to church / the church on Sunday? 6. Do you have a milk jug / milk jug? 7. The Prime Minister / Prime Minister will give a speech this afternoon. 8. The computer / Computer has already changed our lives dramatically. 9. I haven’t been to an open-air theatre / open-air theatre before. 10. Here is a thousand pounds / the a thousand pounds I owe you. 11. I was under an impression / under the impression that you had left. 12. I have to go I’m in a hurry/ hurry. 13. I managed to sell the old painting at a profit / at profit. 14. I think I prefer the other restaurant on the whole / on whole. 15. How many hours do you work, on average / on the average, every week? 16. I was in pain / in a pain after I twist my ankle. 17. Jack recovered from his accident and is now out of danger / out of the danger. 18. Excuse me, but you’re in the way / in a way. 19. Sue felt seasick on the cross- channel ferry / a cross- channel ferry. 20. The burglar hit me on my back of the neck / the back of my neck. V. Complete the sentences, using the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. Nga eats more than Tung does because she likes fast food. (healthy) 2. Viet Nam is a country with different peoples, religions and traditions. (cultural) 3. Most of the Central Highlands is . (mountain) 4. The houses of many ethnic groups are used to worship the ancestors. (commune) 5. To become friendlier, you should with your workmates. (socialisation) to soft drinks, but now he seldom drinks them. (addiction) 6. Paul used to be

5. What does the band of animal figures include? ………………………………………………………………………………. 6. What does the Ngoc Lu bronze drum symbolize? ……………………………………………………………………………….. TEST 1 UNIT 3 I. Choose the word whose main stress is placed differently from the others. 1. A. notice B. surface C. contact D. effect 2. A. humid B. airmail C. discuss D. pancake 3. A. area B. comfort C. market D. concern 4. A. customer B. delicious C. grocery D. resident 5. A. organize B. discussion C. restaurant D. neighbor 6. A. frying B. towel C. socket D. include 7. A. chemical B. precaution C. electric D. destruction 8. A. remember B. dangerous C. vegetable D. opposite II. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently the others. B. mall C. stadium D. change 1. A. tasty 2. A. grocery B. month C. comfort D. money 3. A. just B. summer C. much D. ruler 4. A. around B. delicious C. house D. ground 5. A. exhibition B. neighborhood C. hot D. humid III. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences. 1. Children drink milk every day. - It’s good for them. A. must B. ought C. don’t have to D. must not 2. I think Angela to buy that coat, it’s really lovely. A. must B. ought C. should D. have 3. We’ll go swimming today it’s hot. A. so B. because C. so that D. then 4. Let me your bag. A. carry B. to carry C. to carrying D. carrying 5. It’ll take me an hour to do the household . A. work B. chores C. job D. exercises 6. The Gong Festival is held in the Central Highlands. A. year B. which C. annual D. annually 7. does Hoa Ban Festival take place? - In Lai Chau. A. What B. Where C. When D. How 8. It is typical of the cultural life of Thai people. A. some B. a C. the D. Ø 9. do the cattle provide for the nomads? - Dairy products, meat, and clothing,, A. What B. Where C. Why D. How 10. During the festival, they fly many kites in different shapes and sizes. A. colour B. colourless C. colourful D. colouring 11. An old woman was the goats up the mountainside. A. riding B. taking C. herding D. running 12. is the festival celebrated? – Every year. A. When B. How often C. How D. What 13. We are looking for place to spend night. A. the-the B. a-the C. a-a D. the-a 14. Please turn off lights when you leave room. A. the-the B. a-a C. the-a D. a-the 15. We are looking for people with experience. A. the B. a C. an D. Ø 16. Would you pass me salt, please? A. a B. the C. an D. Ø 17. Can you show me way to station? 41

7. Like my aunt, I want to become a professional dog . (train) of her hometown with a lot of paddy fields. (envy) 8. I am 9. The cattle are herded to a new pasture by the . (nomadic) 10. Do villagers today dress as in the past? (tradition) V. Read the following passage and choose the item (A, B, C or D) that best answers each of the questions about it. Hi! My name is John. I live in Liverpool. Liverpool is a large city in the north of England. I live with my parents, my two brothers and my sister. We live in a large house. In our house, there is a big kitchen, a dining room, a large living room, and a toilet. There is also a separate room for our washing machine and freezer. Upstairs there are five bedrooms, two bathrooms, and another toilet. Outside, there is a large garden. There are two garages. 1. Where does John live? A. In England B. In Wales C. In Scotland D. In France 2. How many people are there in John’s family? A. 4 B. 5 C. 6 D. 7 3. How many rooms are there in John’s house? A. 10 B. 11 C. 13 D. 14 4. Dining room is the room in a house where you . A. usually relax in comfortable chairs B. eat meals C. cook food and wash dishes D. wash your body 5. Which of the following is not true? A. John’s family live in a large house. B. John’s house is big but doesn’t have any gardens. C. The kitchen in John’s house is big. D. John’s house has two garages. VI. Choose the word (A, B, C, or D) that best fits each of the blank spaces. Dear Grandma and Grandpa, Hi! How are you? We’re (1) . Well, we finally moved! This is a picture (2) the living room of our new house. It’s really so it’s very sunny. (4) , we don’t have (5) huge. There are lots of (3) yet. We (6) a beautiful couch actually, a sofa bed. We want (7) an ultramodern table to put (8) of it. Please visit soon after we get our new couch. Love, Sharon and Alex 1. A. fine B. good C. well D. all are correct 2. A. on B. with C. about D. of 3. A. rooms B. windows C. couches D. cushions 4. A. Of course B. For example C. Because D. Soon 5. A. much furniture B. many furnitures C. much furnitures D. many furniture 6. A. buy B. buys C. are buying D. bought 7. A. get B. getting C. to get D. to getting 8. A. beside B. behind C. in front D. next TEST 2 (UNIT 3) I.Choose the best answer A, B, C or D tocomplete the sentences. 1. The Gong Festival is held in the Central Highlands. A.year B.yearly C.annual D.annually 2. does Hoa Ban Festival take place? – In Lai Chau. A.What B.Where C.When D.How 3. It is typical of the cultural life of Thai people. A.some B.a C.the D.∅ 4. do the cattle provide for the nomads? – Dairy products, meat and clothing. A.What B.Where C.Why D.How 5. The crops on the weather. A.depend heavy B.depend heavily C.affect heavy D.affect heavily 6. Mai studies Maths a little bit . 43

A.bad B.badly C.good D.smartly 7. During the festival, they fly many kites in different shapes and sizes. A.colour B.colourless C.colourful D.colouring 8. An old woman was the goats up the mountainside. A.riding B.taking C.herding D.running 9. is the festival celebrated? – Every year. A.When B.How often C.How D.What 10. There are no high buildings to block in our village. A.view B.a view C.some view D.the view II. Fill in each blank of the passage with the correct word/phrase from the box. a tour research

ethenic groups cutural heritage

little bridges stilt house

information display area

Vietnam Museum of Ethnology in Ha Noi offers an insight into the 54 different ethnic groups of Viet Nam in an effort to preserve (1) . The museum is full of (2) about traditional Vietnamese ways of life of all the Vietnamese(3) . The display hall shows everyday objects representing each ethnic group, a (4) center, a library and an auditorium. Its indoor exhibition area provides you (5) which includes the Viet, Muong, Tay , Thai, H’Mong, Yao, Khmer, Cham, and Hoa ethnic groups. presents a variety of Vietnamese homes including a Tay(7) and The outdoor (6) a Viet house, each separated by a small stream, and reached (8) .The museum is suitable for children, and all documents and signs are translated into English and French. III. Use the correct form of the words in brackets to finish the sentences. 1. Terraced rice fields in Sa Pa are slopes claimed for cultivation in hilly or areas. (mountain) crop. (agriculture) 2. For the Muong, rice is also the main 3. The Muong call their calendar“sach doi”, which is made from 12 bamboo sticks that represent the 12 months. (tradition) 4. Viet Nam is a country of tremendous with 54 ethnic groups. (diverse) 5. The ethnic minority groups in Viet Nam have been living in co-existence. (peace) IV. Complete the passage with the words given in the box. ethnic home

for at

villages with

dress provide

valleys their

The villages surrounding Sa Pa are (1) to several of Vietnam’s 54 ethnic minority groups, each with their own distinctive (2) , customs and dialects. These tribes can all be the weekend market in Sa Pa town to trade (4) one seen (3) another. Apart from its fascinating (5) diversity, Sa Pa is also famous (6) its trekking. With Vietnam’s highest peak. Mt. Fansipan (3,143m) only 9km away the (7) and mountain (8) the perfect backdrop for some great treks. Some of the (9) now have local stays where you can stay overnight with a family in (10) traditional home. V. Read the passage, and make questions for the underlined words of the following answers. In 2006, the house of a local family in Dong Van District, Ha Giang Province was chosen for the background of the film “ The Story of Pao”. From distance, the house looks beautiful as a painting. Bushes of wild but beautiful flowers in blossom on the right and an old leaning cherry blossom tree at the gate create a romantic scene for the house. The film is about the life of a Hmong girl named Pao. She was raised by her stepmother because her real mother left her when she was little. One day, her stepmother died in an accident, and she began to look for her birth mother. 1. ____________________________________________________________________ ? The house was chosen for the background of the film in 2006. 2. ____________________________________________________________________ ? The house is in Dong Van District, Ha Giang Province. 44

3. ____________________________________________________________________ ? The film is about the life of a Hmong girl named Pao. 4. ____________________________________________________________________ ? She was raised by her stepmother because her real mother left her when she was little. 5. ____________________________________________________________________ ? She began to look for her birth mother when her stepmother died in an accident. VI. Make questions for the underlined words for these answers. 1. ____________________________________________________ ? The Ha Nhi ethnic group hasabout 12,500 inhabitants. 2. ____________________________________________________ ? They live in the provinces of Lai Chau and Lao Cai. 3. ____________________________________________________ ? The Ha Nhi family worship their ancestors. 4. ____________________________________________________ ? They live on rice cultivation of burnt-over land or terraced fields. 5. ____________________________________________________________________ ? They use ploughs and harrows pulled by oxen and buffaloes to work in the fields. 6. ____________________________________________________________________ ? The gardens are often close to their houses. VII.Choose the word or the phrase among A,B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. Communal House (Rong House) The Rong House can only be (1) in villages to the north of the Central Highlands, especially in Gia Lai and Kon Tum provinces. It is a large, imposing, beautifully decorated stilt house built (2) the middle of the village. It is where community activities (3) , meetings, wedding ceremonies, or praying ceremonies. It is also the place for reception of guests. The RongHouse of each ethnic group has its own architectural style, design and decor. Yet there are shared(4) . In the village, it is often (5) house roofed with yellow-dried thatch leaves and having 8 big wood columns. The rafters are decorated with patterns of bright colours, depicting religious scenes, legendary stories about ancient heroes, stylized animals, and other familiar things of the village life. The most distinction of the of the brilliantGod of Sun. The RongHouse is a (7) of the decor of the Rong house is the (6) culture of Central Highlanders, an age-old and stable culture. The bigger the house, the wealthier the village is. It is a (8) of the whole village. 1.A. find B.found C.to find D.finding 2.A. on B.at C.in D.under 3.A. take place B.take on C.happens D.occurs 4.A. designs B.cultures C.customs D.features 5.A. a big B.a bigger C.the biggest D.biggest 6.A.painting B.photo C.image D.portrait 7.A. signal B. symbol C.sign D.scene 8.A. design B. respect C.proud D.pride VIII. Read the passage, and make questions for the underlined words of the following answers. Duong Lam: An ancient Vietnamese village Duong Lam Village is located in Duong Lam Commune at a 45 km distance from Ha Noi. It is the birthplace of two kings in the history of Vietnam, Phung Hung (or Bo Cai Dai Vuong) and Ngo Quyen, who opened up the long-term self-control and independence period of Viet Nam after Bach Dang Victory in the year 938. All houses, gates, village gates and wells are built of laterite creating an architectural complex, a unique village that is typical for villages in the midlands in the North of Vietnam. At present, there are still nearly old 200 houses and many other historical monuments such as Phung Hung Temple, Ngo Quyen Tomb, MongPhu Communal House. Ho Gam Hill at which Phung Hung killed tigers to rescue villagers and the temple at which the diplomat Giang Van Minh is worshiped. 1.Where is Duong Lam Village? __________________________________________________________________________________ 2.Who were the two kings whose birthplace is Duong Lam Village? 45

__________________________________________________________________________________ 3.What is Duong Lam typical for? __________________________________________________________________________________ 4.How many old houses are there in Duong Lam? __________________________________________________________________________________ 5What are the famous historical monuments there? __________________________________________________________________________________ IX.Write full sentences about the Cham ethnic group, using the words and phrases given. 1. ________________________________________________________ The Cham ethnic group/ population/ about 100,00. __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________

2.They/ live/ mostly/ the coast/ between NinhThuan/ BinhThuan Provinces/ or/ the Cambodian border/ around Chau Doc ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ 3.The Cham/ a tradition/ wet rice cultivation. ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________ 4.Handicrafts/ fairly well-developed/ especially silkworm textiles/ handmade pottery wares. __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ 5.Both men/ women/ wear/ long one-piece sarongs/ cloth wrappers. __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ 6.Main colour/ their daily dress/ cotton white. __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ 7.Chief means/ transporting goods/ farm produce/ back-basket. __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ 8.Most important festival/ called Bon Kate/ held/ near the Cham towers/ the tenth month/ the Lunar year. __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ TEST 3 UNIT 3 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others. 1. a. school b. skull c. scenery d. sky b. recommended c. wanted d. hoped 2. a. visited 3. a. important b. boring c. minor d. northern 4. a. community b. custom c. costume d. museum 5. a. ethnic b. gather c. though d. clothing II. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence. 1. The Dao in the Sapa area is famous ________ its â&#x20AC;&#x153;love market.â&#x20AC;? a. for b. in c. with d. to 2. The Thai live ________ farming on their burnt-over land and wet-rice terraced fields. a. in b. on c. out d. up 3. The ________ house is a place where villagers gather for festivals and rituals. 46

a. terraced b. splendid c. communal d. thatched 4. There were lots of interesting folk games, _______ Kenny stayed a little longer to join them. a. but b. because c. however d. so 5. ‘________ dress in red and black costume?’ ‘The Dao’ a. What b. Which c. Who d. When 6. What colour is ________ symbol of good luck for the Hoa? a. a b. an c. d. some 7. ________ in terraced fields is the main economic activity of ethnic people in Sapa. a. Fishing b.Rice cultivation c. Hunting d.Gathering 8. ________ ethnic Khmer live in ________ Mekong Delta of Vietnam. a. The / b.The / a c.A / the d. The / the 9. The Vietnam Museum of Ethnology ________ by the architect Ha Duc Linh, a memberof the Tay ethnic group. a. designed b. has designed c. was designed d. was designing 10. ‘I have just taken an elephant ride in Buon Don.’ ‘________ How interesting!’ a. Certainly. b.Really? c.Terrible. d. Exactly. III. Complete the sentences with the words or phrases from the box. terraced fields unique

costume diverse

stilt houses speciality

heritage site ornaments

ethnic minorities folk dances

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

The Nung mostly live in ____________ though they also live in earthen houses. Five-colour sticky rice is well-known as a ____________ of the north-western region of Vietnam. The goods in the open-air market are ____________. You can find almost everything there. Thai cloth is well-known for being ____________, colourful and strong. Xoe and Sap are ____________ of Thai ethnic minority people. The ____________ of the Nung is not as colorful as that of other ethnic groups. My Son sanctuary has been recognized by UNESCO as a world ____________. Thai women retain their traditional clothes including short vests, long black skirts, scarves, and ____________. 9. Sa Pa is famous for the ____________ located in the mountainous area. 10. ____________ make up between 10 to 15 percent of the population in Vietnam. IV. Complete each sentence with a suitable question word. 1. _____________ ethnic group has larger population, Cho Ro or Chu Ru? – ChoRo. 2. _____________ groups of languages do all ethnic groups speak? – Eightgroups. 3. _____________ is the biggest house in the village? – It’sthe communal house. 4. _____________ arts are displayed in a museum in Da Nang city? – TheCham’s. 5. _____________ do the San Diu mainly live? – InQuang Ninh province. 6. _____________ do the Thai hold ceremonies to worship their ancestors? – Everyyear. 7. _____________ is the village chief of the Phu La? – Theoldest man. 8. _____________ is it from here, to the communal house? – Justabout one kilometre. 9. _____________ is “khan pieu”? – It’s a shawl with colorful embroidery. 10. _____________ do they cook five coloured sticky rice? – Onspecial occasions. V. Change each sentence Into a question using the question words in brackets. 1. The girl with a shawl on her head is a member of the Thai. (who) _________________________________________________________________________ 2. The Khmer have three main festivals in a year. (how many) _________________________________________________________________________ 3. Odu is the smallest ethnic group in Vietnam. (which) _________________________________________________________________________ 4. Ok Om Bok Festival is the biggest festival of Khmer people. (what) _________________________________________________________________________ 5. We can find terraced fields in the northern mountainous regions. (where) _________________________________________________________________________ 6. Bom Bo village is about 200 kilometres from Ho Chi Minh city. (how far) 47

_________________________________________________________________________ 7. They built their houses on stilts to prevent flooding from tides or storms. (why) _________________________________________________________________________ 8. The population of the Tay ethnic group is about 1.7 million. (what) _________________________________________________________________________ 9. The Tay have lived in Vietnam for thousands of years. (how long) _________________________________________________________________________ 10. The M’nong mainly live in Dak Lak province. (where) _________________________________________________________________________ VI. Underline the correct option. This may include a space (–) for zero article. 1. Vietnam is a/an/ the multiethnic country with 54 ethnic groups. 2 The Viet (Kinh) people account for 87% of a / the / – country’s population. 3. Chaul Chnam Thmey is a/ an/ the celebration of New Year by Khmers. 4 Folk singing of the Bru-Van Kieu is popular, particularly cha chap and sim, the / a / an alternating chant between young men and women. 5 Ancestor worship is the / a / – most important religious activity among the Bru-Van Kieu. 6. The La Ha grow the/ – /a cotton but do not weave. 7. The Rong house of the Xo Dang is a / an / the big stilt house with a high roof which looks like a/an/ the axe. 8. The young Co Ho women play an / a / the active role in marriage. 9. The Ba Na are one of the / a / an oldest ethnic minority groups living in a / – / the Central Highlands. 10. The / A / – right of inheritance in Ede families is only for the / – / a daughters. 11. Y Phon lives in the city, but his family still live in a / the /–small village in a / – / the mountains. 12. A / The /– M’Nong live in houses built on the / – /a stilts or level with a/ – /the ground. VII. Complete the sentence with the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. Many ethnic groups managed to live together ___________. (peace) 2. How often is the Gong Festival ___________? (celebrate) 3. The ___________ of people in Vietnam belong to the Kinh people. (major) 4. The ___________ house is the place where village ceremonies and festivals take place. (commune) 5. ___________ is a traditional folk art of the Miao people. (embroider) 6 Five-coloured sticky rice is a traditional ___________ of Tay people. (special) 7. H’mong people live in the northern ___________ region of Vietnam. (mountain) 8. The Tai are known for their ___________ garments and their houses on stilts. (weave) 9. The ___________ you can find in Sapa include the Hmong, Dao, and Tay. (ethnic) 10. Muong people are ___________ more closely related to the Tai people. (culture) VIII. Complete each sentence with an appropriate preposition. 1. Nick is curious ___________ the ethnic minority groups in Vietnam. 2. The Viet account ___________ about 86% of Vietnam’s population. 3. The M’Nong live in houses built ___________ stilts. 4. The Hmong live mostly ___________ the mountainous regions ___________ the north. 5. The M’Nong in Ban Don are well known _______ their elephant hunting and domestication. 6. Many ethnic minority students are studying ___________ boarding schools. 7. The Thai have a population ___________ about one and a half million people. 8. Tay language belongs ___________ the Tay-Thai language group. 9. The communal house is used ___________ village meetings and festivities. 10. The chapi is made ___________ a section of an old bamboo. IX. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in brackets. 1. The first Brau _______________(come) to Vietnam about a century ago. 2. The majority of people in Vietnam _______________(belong) to the Kinh ethnic group. 3. Hoa Ban festival ____________(start) on March 17thand ____________(end) on March 19th. 4. Listen! _______________ those ethnic girls _______________(speak) the Ede language? 5. So far Nick _______________(learn) a lot about the ethnic minorities in Vietnam. 6. We _______________(be) to Buon Me Thuot city twice, but we _______________(never/ visit) Don Village. 7. In the future, the local government _______________(organize) more activities topromote the culture of 48

ethnic groups. 8. These stilt houses _______________(build) over 50 years ago by the Tay people. 9. Tourists to Don Village enjoy __________(ride) elephants around the hamletor to the forest. 10. The elephants help local people _______________(work) in the fields, and carry goodsor construction materials. XI. Read the text carefully, then answer the questions. Vietnam is a multiethnic country with 54 ethnic groups. The Viet (Kinh) people account for 87% of the country’s population and mainly inhabit the Red River delta, the central coastal delta, the Mekong delta and major cities. The other 53 ethnic minority groups, totaling over 8 million people, are scattered over mountain areas spreading from the North to the South. Among ethnic minorities, the most populated are Tay, Thai, Muong, Hoa, Khmer, Nung... with a population of around 1 million each; while the least populated are Brau, Roman, Odu with several hundred people each. The main economic activity of most ethnic peoples is wet rice cultivation. A number of ethnic minorities had mastered some farming techniques. They grew rice plants in swamped paddy fields and carried out irrigation. Others go hunting, fishing, collecting and live a semi-nomadic life. Each group has its own culture that is diverse and special. Beliefs and religions of the Vietnamese ethnic minority groups are also disparate from each other. 1. How many ethnic groups are there in Vietnam? ______________________________________________________________________ 2. Where do the Kinh people mostly live? ______________________________________________________________________ 3. What is the population of the Tay? ______________________________________________________________________ 4. Which ethnic groups have the smallest population? ______________________________________________________________________ 5. What do most ethnic peoples mainly live on? ______________________________________________________________________ 6. Do the ethnic minority groups have the same culture, religion and belief? ______________________________________________________________________ 7. How is the culture of each ethnic group? ______________________________________________________________________ XII. Fill in each gap with a word from the box. including

display

ethnic

which

diversity

viewed

throughout

home

Vietnam Museum of Ethnology in Hanoi offers an insight into the 54 different (1)______ groups of Vietnam in an effort to preserve cultural heritage and promotesocio-cultural (2)_________ within the country. The museum has over 15,000 artefacts (3)________ photographs and othermulti-media such as audiotapes. Its indoor exhibition space can be (4)________ viaa virtual tour (5)________ includes the Viet, Muong, Tho, Chut, Tay, Thai, Ka Dai,H’Mong-Dao, Tang, San Dui, Ngai, Mon-Khmer, Nam-Dao, Cham, Hoa and Khmerethnic groups. There are priceless antiques on (6)_________ alongside everydayobjects such as pipes, baskets and knives. The outdoor area presents a range of traditional (7)________ including a laystilt house and a Viet house. The museum is suitable for children, and all documents and display signs (8)______ have been translated into French and English. II. Read the text carefully, then do the tasks below. The Muong are among the ethnic minority groups that have big populations in Vietnam. The Muong share an estimate of 1.3 million people from their six sub-groups, such as Mol, Mual, Moi, Moi Bi, Au Ta and Ao Ta. They are largely concentrated in the provinces of Hoa Binh and Thanh Hoa particularly in mountainous districts. Theirlanguage belongs to the Viet-Muong group and they hold many ceremonies year round. The Muong have practiced farming for a long time and wet rice is their main food staple. Most of their family’s other income is generated through the exploitation of forest products including mushrooms, dried fungus, ammonium, and sticklac. The men are known for basketry as women are skilled in silk spinning and loom weaving. 49

The Muong have diverse folk arts including folk songs and poems, sorcerer’s worshiping songs, tales, proverbs, lullabies, and riddle songs. The gong is the most popular musical instrument along with the flute, the two-string violin, the drum, and the panpipe. A. Decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F). 1. The Muong is one of the largest ethnic minorities in Vietnam. 2. The Muong are also called Mol, Mual, Moi, Mol Bi, Au Ta and Ao Ta. 3. The Muong don’t have their own language, so they speak Vietnamese. 4. The Muong live mainly on forest products, such as mushrooms and dried fungus. 5. Muong women are very good at making baskets and loom weaving. 6. The Muong have a rich treasure of folk arts. B. Answer the questions. 1. What is the population of the Muong? ___________________________________________________________________ 2. Where do the Muong mostly live? ___________________________________________________________________ 3. What is the main food product of the Muong? ___________________________________________________________________ 4. What are musical instruments of the Muong? ___________________________________________________________________ XIII. Reorder the words to make sentences. 1. country/ with/ Vietnam/ 54/ is/ multiethnic/ a/ groups/ ethnic. ______________________________________________________________________ 2. minorities/ make/ population/ Ethnic/ up/ 15 percent/ of/ the/ of/ about/ Vietnam 3 ______________________________________________________________________ 3. Most/ live/ of/ ethnic/ in/ minorities/ the/ the/ areas/ in/ north/ the/ mountainous. ______________________________________________________________________ 4. Vietnam/ Tay/ second/ the/ largest/ are/ the/ ethnic/ in/ group. ______________________________________________________________________ 5. are/ The/ known/ Nung/ including/ music and poetry/ for/ folk-art/ richness/ traditions/ their/ of. ______________________________________________________________________ 6. people/ a/ The/ Dao/ language/ speak/ Hmong-Dao/ of/ language system. ______________________________________________________________________ 7. not/ as/ The/ Nung/ costume/ is/ colourful/ of/ the/ as/ that/ of/ ethnic/ other/ groups. ______________________________________________________________________ 8, The/ Ede/ built/ on/ live/ in/ stilts/ in/ wooden/ villages/ longhouses/ as/ buon/ known. __________________________________________________________ TEST YOURSELF 1 I. Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others. 1.A. harmful B. slowly C. cloudy D.unique 2.A. worship B. belong C. enjoy D. behave 3.A. alternate B. entertain C. symbolize D. cultivate 4.A. heritage B. museum C. decorate D. blackberry 5.A. minorities B. populated C. activity D. experience II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D tocomplete the sentences. 6.Yoga help us learn to co-ordinate breathing and movement. A.what B.when C.why D.how 7.Teenagers enjoy to music and out with friends. A.listen - hang B.to listen – to hang C.listening - hang D.listening - hanging should children do yoga too? 8. A. Why B.When C.What D.How 9.Don’t worry. It is to travel to that village even at night. A.safe B.unsafe C.difficult D.inconvenient 10.Life in a small town is than that in a big city. A.peaceful B.much peaceful C.less peaceful D.much more peaceful 50

11.The boys often help their parents to water from the village well. A.gather B.collect C.give D.find 12.In the Central Highlands, the biggest and tallest house in the village is the house. A.communication B.community C.communal D.commune 13.The Viet people have many customs and crafts. A.tradition B.traditional C.culture D.customary 14. month is the Hoa Ban Festival of the Thai people held in? A.When B.Which C.How many D.How often 15The on display in Da Nang Museum of Cham Sculpture are very interesting. A.items B.goods C.products D.shows III.Fill in each blank with the appropriate form of the word in brackets. 1. Some regions in Central Highlands in Viet Nam are not . (populate) about the life in the countryside in Viet Nam. (optimistic) 2. He spoke 3. All of us can realize the atmosphere in the countryside life. (peace) have lived here all their lives. (village) 4. Some of the 5. Having to wait for ten minutes was a minor . (convenient) IV. Complete each blank in the following passage with the correct word/phrase from the box. use stream

design tribe

colors takes

slope image

Cat Cat Village is located on the Muong Hoa Valley, this is the village of the Hmong hill (1) It is not far from Sa Pa Town, about 3 km and it (2) you 45 minutes to walk here. The village is on the (3) of the hill and easy walking, rice and corn are grown here. Visiting Cat Cat Village, we can have a chance to visit a big waterfall on the (4) and the old Hydro-electric Power Station built by the French here. We can also see the (5) of young women sitting by looms with colourful pieces of brocade decorated with designs of flowers and birds. When these pieces of brocade are finished, they are dyed and embroidered with beautiful(6) . It is interesting that Hmong women (7) plants and leaves to dye these brocade fabrics. And then they roll a round and smooth section of wood durable. covered with wax on fabrics to polish them, making their (8) V. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank in the following passage. My village is about 50 kilometers from the city center. It is very(1) place where people (2) flowers and vegetables only. It is very famous for its pretty roses and picturesque scenes. The air is quite fresh, however the smell of the roses make people (3) cool. In spring, my village looks (4) a carpet with plenty of colors. Tourists come to visit it so often. Nowadays, with electricity, it doesn’t take the villagers much time (5) the roses. 1.A. beauty B. beautiful C. beautify D. beautifully 2.A. plant B. plants C. grow up D. grows up 3.A. feel B. feeling C. felt D. to feel 4.A. as B. like C. alike D.same 5.A. water B. watering C. to water D. watered VI. Choose the word or the phrase among A,B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. I live in a small village called Northville. There are about 2000 people here. I love the village (1) it is very quite and life is slow and easy. The village is always clean, people look (2) it with great care. The air is always clean, too. People are much more friendly here than in a city because everyone (3) the others, and if someone has a problem, there are always people who can help. There are only a few things that I don’t like about Northville. One thing is that we have not got many things to do in the evening; we haven’t got (4) cinemas and theaters. The other thing is that , and everyone knows what everyone is doing. But I still prefer village people always talk about (5) life in a big city. 1.A.so B.although C.because D.but 2.A.for B.at C.up D.after 3.A.knows B.know C.is knowing D.knew 51

4.A.little B.some C.any D.few 5.A.others B.other C.another D.one another VII. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that best answers the question about the passage. The thing I liked most when I was small was the change of seasons. Spring, summer, autumn and winter - I could see them all come and go and each one was completely different. Now in the city, you can buy summer flowers in winter and eat the some vegetables all the year round. Whereas, in the country, I could only eat things at certain times of the year, for example, strawberries in June and turnips in winter. I lived my childhood with the seasons. We also made most of our food and would never eat frozen or tinned food. Everything was fresh, so it must be better than the type of food I am taking now in the city. City people may thing people in the country miss a lot of things about modern life. In fact, in my opinion they miss a lot more than people in the country, they miss real life. 1.What did the winter like most about living in the country? A.Flowers in spring. B. Leaves in autumn. C.The wild animals and plants. D. The change of seasons. 2.What does the word “them” in line 2 refer to? A.Four seasons B.Winter and autumn C.Countryside D.Plants 3.In the countryside which season can we buy strawberries? A. Spring B. Summer C.Autumn D.Winter 4.Why did the writer never eat tinned food when living in the countryside? A. Because it was frozen. B. Because it was contaminated C.Because it was very fat D.Because it wasn’t very fresh 5.Which of the following sentences is NOT true? A.People in the city can grow vegetables all year round. B. In the countryside turnips are grown in winter. C.The winter often eat frozen and tinned food now. D.Many city people think they live better than those in the country. VIII. Filling the gaps with the words/phrases in the box to give your opinion about the best leisure activity. More than one word can be suitable for some gaps. In addition In my opinion

also Besides

As I have noted I think

My favourite leisure activity is listening to music. (1) , listening to music is not only helps me relax but also provides me with musical knowledge. I (2) like the time that I can live lazily in bed, put on the small earphone with my iPod and enjoy any favourite songs of many kinds of music: pop music, hip-hop, rock or jazz… I like pop music very much because I think it is gentle and suitable for teenagers. I listen to rock music when Iam sad and after that I feel cheerful and happy. (3) music from other countries is also good for teenagers to understand other cultures. (4) that, the lyrics are easy to understand and interesting. (5) , it can improve my English and listening skills. (6) , music is an important part of life and it helps me love my life more. TEST YOURSELF 1 I. Choose the word that has underlined part pronounced differently from the rest. b. cart c. craft d.paddy 1. a. vast 2. a. scarf b. school c. science d. scare b. satisfied c. hooked d. relaxed 3. a. terraced 4. a. ethnic b. unique c. basic d. diverse 5. a. sure b. soundly c. simple d. stilt II. Choose the word that has different stress pattern. 1. a. generous b. nomadic c. interesting d. comfortable 2. a. community b. identify c. expensive d. socialize 3. a. colourful b. buffalo c. blackberry d. convenient 4. a. active b. commune c. diverse d. heritage 5. a. leisure b. minority c. exciting d. traditional 52

III. Choose the answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence. 1. We are all hook ________ making star lanterns. a. in b. off c. on d. to 2. Their family have moved to the city ________ 2001. a. horn b.for c.in d. since 3. The Kinh have the largest number of people, ________ for 86% of the population. a. holding b.taking c. accounting d. numbering 4. I’m tired of ________ inthe city. It’s too busy, noisy and dirty. a. live b.to live c.to be lived d. living 5. ________ drop that mobile phone and do your homework? a. Why don’t you b. How about c. Would you mind d. When did you 6. The Hmong of Sa Pa are called Black Hmong ________ their mainly black clothing. a. because of b.in spite of c.in order to d. according to 7. People in rural areas live ________ than those in cities. a. simplier b.more simply c. more simple d. simpler 8. The highlands of northern Vietnam are home to the 1.5 million-strong Tay, ________ minority group. a. Vietnam’s largest b. the Vietnam’s largest c. a Vietnam’s largest d. the largest Vietnam 9. ________ is the Nung’s clothing? ~ Indigo. a. What b.Which group c. What colour d. Whose 10 ‘I find it hard to build a toy car.’ ‘But ________’ a. my pleasure b. it’s my fault. c. it sounds great! d. it’s right up your street! IV. Supply the correct tense or form of the verbs in brackets. 1. ______________ (you/ ever/ take) a trip to the countryside? It’s really interesting! 2. For many nomads, their cattle ______________ (provide) meat, milk, and hides fortheir own use. 3. When I was a kid, I ______________ (spend) hours gleaning rice from paddy fields. 4. Sa Pa’s love market ______________ (be) an unique aspect in the culture of the Mong and Dao ethnic groups for a long time. 5. Where is Jeanny? ~ She ______________ (practise) the piano in the music room. 6. ______________ (your family/ move) to the city in 2008? 7. Basketry, pottery and indigo cloth _____________ (produce) by the Rhade for theirown use. 8. I’ve got the tickets. Next week we ______________ (visit) Hanoi. 9. Do you fancy ______________ (come) on a day trip to my uncle’s form next Saturday? 10. Nomadic children learn ______________ (herd) the cattle when they are small. V. Write the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. His ______________ to the Internet is taking over his life. (addict) 2. Who lives more happily, ______________ or city dwellers? (nomadic) 3. Children in rural areas often travel to school ______________ than those in big cities. (far) 4. Red River Delta is an agriculturally rich area and densely ______________. (populate) 5. Dao and San Chay have ______________ practised shifting cultivation. (tradition) 6. The Internet has already changed the way people ______________. (social) 7. Thai women are very skilled ______________ and produce beautiful embroidery. (weave) 8. Groups of boys and young girls perform traditional love songs in ______________ that can last all night. (festival) VII.Read the passage and do the tasks below The Hmong, or Meo, who number about 800,000, are found in villages known as giao throughout the highlands of northern Vietnam. The Hmong migrated to Vietnam from the southern China at the beginning of the 19th century. The Hmong minority group has been subdivided into branches classified by women’s costume, dialect and customs. For example, the Hmong of Sa Pa are called Black Hmong because of their predominantly black clothing. The most colourful sub-group are the Flower Hmong, found in large numbers around Bac Ha in Lao Cai province, who wear bright-coloured clothes with embroidery. Corn is the main staple of Hmong people, but rice is often grown on terraces watered with the aid of 53

irrigation. Hemp is grown to be woven into textiles, and cotton is also cultivated in some villages. As skilled artisans, the Hmong produce a variety of items, including handwoven indigo-dyed cloth, paper, silver jewellry, leather goods, baskets and embroidery. The Hmong have no written language. Their legends, songs, folklore and proverbs have been passed down from one generation to the next through the spoken word. A. Decide if the statements are true (T) or false (F). 1. The Hmong in Vietnam have a population of 8 million people. 2. They immigrated from China approximately 300 years ago. 3. Black Hmong women wear black clothing. 4. Rice is the most important crop of Hmong people. 5. Hemp is cultivated for textile fiber. 6. The Hmong don’t have their own language. B. Answer the questions. 1. What Is the other name of the Hmong? ______________________________________________________________________ 2. When did the Hmong come to Vietnam? ______________________________________________________________________ 3. Why are the Hmong of Sa Pa called Black Hmong? ______________________________________________________________________ 4. Where do the Hmong grow rice? ______________________________________________________________________ 5. What are the products of the Hmong people? ______________________________________________________________________ 6. How have their legends, songs, folklore and proverbs been passed down? ______________________________________________________________________ VIII. Write the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first one. 1. Flying a kite in the countryside is very exciting. It’s ______________________________________________________________________ 2. I have done voluntary work for three years. I started __________________________________________________________________ 3. It took me two hours to walk to her village. I spent ___________________________________________________________________ 4. Millions of tourists visit the Museum of Ethnology every year. The Museum of Ethnology ___________________________________________________ 5. Jane makes crafts better than her sister. Jane’s sister doesn’t _________________________________________________________ 6. Let’s go to my uncle’s farm at the weekend. Amy suggested ____________________________________________________________ UNIT 4: CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS A. VOCABULARY 1. accept (v) /əkˈsept/: chấp nhận, nhận 2. break with (v) /breɪk wɪð/: không theo 3. cockwise (adv) / kɒkwaɪz/: theo chiều kim đồng hồ 4. compliment (n) /ˈkɒmplɪmənt/: lời khen 5. course (n) /kɔːs/: món ăn 6. cutlery (n) /ˈkʌtləri/: bộ đồ ăn (gồm thìa, dĩa, dao) 7. filmstrip (n) /ˈfɪlmstrɪp/: đoạn phim 8. host (n) /həʊst/: chủ nhà (nam) 9. hostess (n) /ˈhəʊstəs/: chủ nhà (nữ) 10. generation (n) /ˌdʒenəˈreɪʃn/: thế hệ 11. offspring (n) /ˈɒfsprɪŋ/: con cái 12. oblige (v) /əˈblaɪdʒ/: bắt buộc 13. palm (n) /pɑːm/: lòng bàn tay 14. pass down (v) /pɑːs daʊn/: truyền cho 54

15. prong (n) /prɒŋ/: đầu dĩa (phần có răng) 16. reflect (v) /rɪˈflekt/: phản ánh 17. sharp (adv) /ʃɑːp/: chính xác, đúng 18. sense of belonging (n) /sens əv bɪˈlɒŋɪŋ/: cảm giác thân thuộc 19. social (adj) /ˈsəʊʃl/: thuộc về xã hội 20. spot on (adj, informal) /spɒt ɒn/: chính xác 21. spray (v) /spreɪ/: xịt 22. spread (v) /spred/: lan truyền 23. table manners (n, plural) /ˈteɪbl ˈmænə (r)/: quy tắc ăn uống trong bàn ăn, phép tắc ăn uống 24. tip (n, v) /tɪp/: tiền boa, boa 25. unity (n) /ˈjuːnəti/: sự thống nhất, đoàn kết 26. upwards (adv) /ˈʌpwədz/: hướng lên trên 27. You’re kidding! (idiom) /jʊə kɪdɪŋ/: Bạn nói đùa thế thôi! I.

2. Which dress/ I/ wear/ today? ………………………………………………………………………… 3. The teacher/ think/ Jim/ study/ harder. ………………………………………………………………………… 4. The boys/ not/ climb up/ the wall. ………………………………………………………………………… 5. I/ watch TV/ go out/ with/ friends/ now? ………………………………………………………………………... 6. If/ Jim/ be/ sick, he/ stay/ home. ………………………………………………………………………… 7. How much/ water/ we/ drink/ everyday? ………………………………………………………………………… 8. What/ I/ not/ do/ at/ Chinese restaurant? …………………………………………………………………………. 9. You/ inform/ your parents/ before/ you/ go. ………………………………………………………………………….. 10. Josh/ not/ devote/ all/ his free time/ to/ playing/ games. ……………………………………………………………………………

B. GRAMMAR REVIEW ÔN TẬP SHOULD (NÊN) VÀ SHOULDN’T (KHÔNG NÊN) DÙNG ĐỂ ĐƯA RA LỜI KHUYÊN. Should là động từ khiếm khuyết, do đó nó không cần chia theo các ngôi và luôn cần môt động từ nguyên thể không có “to” đi đằng sau. Thể Thể khẳng định + thể phủ định Thể nghi vấn Chức năng Dùng để diễn tả lời khuyên, hay ý nghĩ Dùng để hỏi ý kiến hay yêu điều gì đúng, nên làm hoặc không nên cầu một lời khuyên. làm. Cấu trúc S + should/ shouldn’t + V + (các thành Should + S + V + (các thành phần khác phần khác)? Yes, S + should No, S + shouldn’t Ví dụ We should brush our teeth twice a day. Should we buy a new car? (Chúng ta nên đánh răng hai lần một (Chúng ta có nên mua một ngày) chiếc ô tô mới không?) We shouldn’t waste water. Yes, we should. (Chúng ta không nên lãng phí nước) (Có, chúng ta nên mua.) BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài 1: Hoàn thành những câu sau với động từ khuyết thiếu “should” hoặc “shouldn’t”. 1. You ________stay up too late because it’s not good for your health. 2. No one ________ be late for school tomorrow because we will have an exam. 3. I think there _________ a garbage dump in front of the restaurant. 4. You ___________ go for a check-up regularly. 5. I think you _________ be more tactful. 6. __________you have any questions, please write me an email. 7. What ____________ I do to learn better? 8. My father thinks that I __________be so into computer games. 9. The candidates_________ be here before 10am, or they will be disqualified. 10. You _______learn about some cultural features of the country you are going to visit. 11. Mary ___________take any pills befor seeing the doctor. 12. __________James apply for the job at this company? Yes, he should. 13. How much time __________ I spend on this task? 14. Old people _______work too hard. They need an abundance of time to relax. 15. Parents_________ let their children expose to smartphones at an early age.

Bài 3: Chuyển những câu sau thành câu đưa ra lời khuyên với “should” hoặc “shouldn’t”. Ex: They wear formal clothes when attending the conference. They should wear formal clothes when attending the conference. 1. Parents instill in their children a respect for their country’s tradition and culture. ………………………………………………………………………….............. 2. Everyone goes home for a family reunion regularly. ………………………………………………………………………………….. 3. You travel more to broaden your horizon. ………………………………………………………………………………….. 4. What does Jim do to study better? …………………………………………………………………………………… 5. We don’t go to on our vacation because it’s very far from our location. …………………………………………………………………………………. 6. They are never rude to other people. ………………………………………………………………………………….. 7. You pay more attention to what your parents say. …………………………………………………………………………………. 8. Whenever you go, you pay close attention to the manner and etiquettes there. ………………………………………………………………………………… II.

Động từ khuyết thiếu “Must”, “Have to” Trong tiếng Anh, must và have to đều mang nghĩa là “phải”, dùng để diễn tả sự cưỡng bách, bắt buộc. Tuy nhiên, sự khác biệt về cách dùng của 2 động từ khuyết thiếu này được thể hiện ở dưới bảng sau. Phân biệt Must và Have to Thể khẳng định must + V have/ has to + V Mang ý nghĩa của sự bắt buộc đến từ người Mang ý nghĩa sự bắt buộc đến từ hoàn cảnh nói(mang tính chủ quan) bên ngoài, do luật lệ, quy tắc hay người khác quyết định (mang tính khách quan) Ví dụ : Ví dụ : I must finish the exercise I have to finish this exercise. (Tôi phải hoàn thành bài tập) (Tôi phải hoàn thành bài tập) (Situation: I’m going to have a party.) (Situation: Tomorrow is the deadline.)

Bài 2: Dựa vào những từ cho sẵn, viết câu hoàn chỉnh với “should” hoặc “shouldn’t”. 1. You/ go/ to/ see/ doctor/ regularly. ………………………………………………………………………… 55

15. You really ___________ stop driving so fast or you’ll have an accident!

Câu này có thể được nói trong tình huống Câu này có thể được nói trong tình huống, người nói sắp có một bữa tiệc, nên cần phải ngày mai là hạn cuối cùng để hoàn thành hoàn thành bài tập để đi dự tiệc. bài tập nên người nói phải hoàn thành bài tập.

Bài 6: Điền động từ khuyết thiếu “mustn’t” hoặc “don’t have to“ vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành các câu sau. 1. You _______________pick me up tomorrow. I will take a taxi. 2. Look at that sign! You ___________ walk on the grass. 3. You __________ blame anyone for your mistakes. You need to be responsible for yourself. 4. You __________ be absent from class tomorrow because the teacher will check your attendance. 5. I ____________ prepare dinner because we will eat out tonight. 6. You _________ leave any rubbish here. It is forbidden. 7. You __________ let anyone know that. It is a big secret. 8. You __________ come early tomorrow because the event will start late. 9. You __________ park your car here. There is a”No parking sign” 10. We don’t have much money left. We _____________ waste anymore. 11. They __________ forget their homework at home. 12. I ____________ do the housework because I have a maid do it for me. 13. They ____________ break the rule that way. It is unacceptable. 14. I ____________ use the computer after 11pm because my mother doesn’t allow me to. 15. You __________ buy that book. I will lend you mine. Bài7. Đánh dấu (V) trước câu đúng, đánh dấu (x) trước câu sai và sửa lại cho đúng 1. It’s raining outside. Tim has to take his umbrella. ___ ……………………………………………………… 2. I can give you a hand. So you mustn’t do it alone. ___ ……………………………………………………….. 3. They mustn’t be hurry because the film starts late. ___ ……………………………………………………….. 4. You must stop at the red light. ___ ………………………………………………………. 5. Tomorrow is Monday but I mustn’t go to work. ___ ……………………………………………………… 6. I am short-sighted so I must wear glasses. ___ ………………………………………………………… 7. You mustn’t smoke here. There are a lot of children around you. ___ ……………………………………………………………………… 8. Everyone have to bey the school’s rules. ____ …………………………………….................. 9. It is warm today so we mustn’t wear thick coat. ____ …………………………………………………. 10. My father will buy me a bike so I don’t have to walk to school any more. ___ ……………………………………………………………………………….

Thể phủ định mustn’t + V Diễn tả ý cấm đoán Ví dụ:

don’t/doesn’t + V Diễn tả ý không cần thiết phải làm gì Ví dụ:

You must not eat that. (Bạn không được phép ăn cái đó) (Situation: It’s already stale)

You don’t have to eat that. (Bạn không cần phải ăn thứ đó) (Situation: I can see you dislike that.)

Câu có thể được nói trong tình huống thức Câu này có thể được nói trong tình huống ăn đã thiu rồi, cho nên người nói cấm đoán người nói thấy người kia không thích ăn người nghe không được ăn món đó. món đó, do vậy không bắt buộc người đó phải ăn. BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài 4: Điền động từ khuyết thiếu “must” hoặc ‘mustn’t” vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành các câu sau. 1. I __________do the laundry every2 days 2. You __________ stay out too late. 3. You ___________ break the class’s rule 4. My mother doesn’t want me to arrive home late, so I __________ leave now. 5. Those boys ___________ finish their homework before going out. 6. Jim ___________ finish his essay today because he’s very busy tomorrow. 7. Passengers___________ use phones on the plane. 8. You __________ be late for school tomorrow. 9. Children _______________ be accompanied by an adult when visiting this dangerous place. 10. I ____________ be home before dinner. 11. Students_________ talk during the exam. 12. You ____________ cheat in a test. 13. There _____________ be someone upstairs. I can hear the noise. 14. We _____________ give up on what we are doing. 15. You __________ let strangers enter the house while I’m not in. Bài 5: Hoàn thành các câu sau bằng động từ khuyết thiếu “must“hoặc “have to” và động từ trong ngoặc. 1. I _________learn Japanese. I need itmy job. 2. I _________learn Japanese. I love it. 3. I _________ wake up early tomorrow.I want to watch the sunrise. 4. I ________ wake up early tomorrow. I have a meeting early in the morning 5. I ________ wear a black dress because I want to look good. 6. I _______wear a black dress because that is the requirement of my company. 7. I __________ go home now because it’s too late. 8. I __________ go home now because I have a lot to do. 9. I _________go to see my friend because I miss her. 10. I _________ go to see my classmate because we work on the same project. 11. You ________ wear a tie in the company. It‘s one of their rules. 12. I ___________ go abroad next week. My boss wants me to sign a contract with our foreign customers. 13. I __________ work harder. I want to be successful. 14. This room is mess, I _____________ find time to clean it!

BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO. Bài 8: Hoàn thành các câu sau bằng động từ khuyêt thiếu “should” hoặc “shouldn’t” và những động từ cho sẵn. talk discuss be be try break wear thank 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 57

You _________your host for taking care of you when you stayed. You _________ with your mouth full. Our teacher always reminds that we ____________ punctual. You __________ the local specialities when you visit a foreign place. It is a tough question. I think we_________ and work out a solution together. This year, _________ we ________ with tradition and go travelling on Tet holiday? Tourists___________ short clothes when they visit such places as temple or mausoleum. 58

8. I am going to travel by plane next week. My mother says that my luggage __________ so heavy. Bài 9: Dựa vào thông tin cho sẵn trong bảng, viết câu với động từ khuyết thiếu “should” hoặc “shouldn’t” để diễn tả những điều nên/ không nên làm gì khi sống ở Nhật Bản. Do’s Don’ts 1. Be on time 2. Pass food from one pair of chopsticks to the other. 3. Bring your Business Card 4. Brings outside food into restaurants 5. Say “ itadikimasu” before eating 6. Use the phone in trains and elevators ,especially if you’re being treated 7. Make loud gulping noises when 8. Drink or eat while walking drinking 9. Cover your mouth with your other 10. Use your chopsticks to point at hand when using toothpick. somebody.

Bài12. Đọc đoạn văn dưới đây và điền T(True) trước câu có nội dung đúng với nội dung bài đọc, điền F(False) trước câu có nội dung sai với nội dung bài đọc. Traditional Vietnamese customs and habits have been formed time to time for thousands of years. This creates a long – lasting culture. Despite the domination of Chinese and other powers, Vietnamese people still remains their unique cultural identity. In the course of development, customs and habits are indipensable spiritual field in Vietnamese culture. It is the original cultural values of the country strongly that define the identity and the long-lastingness of culture in Vietnam. In the entire history of Vietnam, Vietnamese culture is the combination of native culture, cultural exchange with China, Asian region and western countries. However, with a firm native culture, Vietnamese people keep their culture away from being assimilation, and “Vietnamizing” those cultural features instead. Vietnam culture is characterized by a series of unique customs and habits such as worshiping ancestors, chewing betel, and other customs in traditional ceremonies like funeral ceremony, long –life ceremony, etc. These customs and habits are associated with community of villages. Vietnam is a country of festivals, especially in spring. There are several famous festivals featuring Vietnamese culture like Tet Nguyen Dan, Tet Nguyen Tieu, Tet Han Thuc, Tet Doan Ngo, Mid-Autumn Festival, etc. Yet, customs and habits of Vietnamese people vary from region to region, and ethnic group to ethnic group. 1. Vietnam has a long –lasting culture. ______ 2. Due to the invasions of Chinese and other powers, Vietnamese people hardly remain their unique cultural identity. _______ 3. Vietnamese culture is the combination of many cultural components. ____ 4. Vietnamese people build their traditions partly by “Vietnamizing “foreign traditions. _________ 5. Vietnamese customs and habits are related to community of villages. _____ 6. In Vietnam, festivals are mostly held in spring. 7. In Vietnam, customs and habits of people are quite the same throughout the country.

When you are in Japan . 1. ………………………………………………………………………………. 2. ………………………………………………………………………………. 3. ………………………………………………………………………………. 4. ……………………………………………………………………………….. 5. ……………………………………………………………………………….. 6. ……………………………………………………………………………….. 7. ……………………………………………………………………………….. 8. ……………………………………………………………………………….. 9. ……………………………………………………………………………….. 10. ………………………………………………………………………………. Bài 10: Hoàn thành các câu dưới đây với thể khẳng định hoặc phủ định của “must, have to, has to" 1. Students___________ look at their notes while they are taking the exam. 2. My mother has a terrible headache so she __________ stop working today. 3. There is an accident and the traffic is blocked. We _________ to stay here for a while. 4. You ____________ do that, Marry, I’ll do it later. 5. He __________ wait in line like anyone else 6. You __________ light a naked flame near the gas station. 7. While operating a motor vehicle, you ___________ drink and drive. 8. You __________ skip classes too often or you will not pass the final exam. 9. They _________ work hard and earn a lot of money. They want to move to a larger apartment. 10. Mr. Smith ____________ drive to work because his company is near his house. Bài 11: Khoanh tròn vào đáp án đúng VIETNAMESE CELEBRATION FOR LONGEVITY CUSTOM In Vietnam, People count each passing year in a person’s life with increasing esteem and respect from their family and neighborhood. Formerly, at the age of 40 one was (1) ________ for being an old man or woman. According to village customs, a man of 50 is to be honored as an old man.Old men stop working and are no longer village officials. (2) _________, they are still invited to festivals and to sears in the communal house. In the festival, they are seated honor ably on the red-bordered (3) ___________. Showing (4) _______ and esteem for the elderly is a (5) ___________that remains today. Nowadays, when grandfathers or parents reach the ages of 70, 80, 90, their children and grandchildren origanize ceremonies for (6) ___________which are generally held on birthdays or during the spring days during Tet. 1. A. honor B. honored C. consider D. considered 2. A. Moreover B. But C. Although D. However 3. A. curtains B. mats C. sofas D. carpets 4. A. respects B. respect C. respective D. respectful 5. A. tradition B. culture C. custom D. lifestyle 6. A. longevity B. length C. age D. life 59

TEST 1 UNIT 4 I. Choose the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. B. touch C. down D. account 1. A. sound 2. A. design B. preserve C. basic D. physical 3. A. occupation B. occasion C. shake D. miraculous 4. A. concerned B. received C. attached D. concealed 5. A. teacher B. clear C. reason D. mean 6. A. letter B. twelve C. person D. sentence 7. A. included B. received C. remembered D. annoyed 8. A. enough B. young C. country D. mountain 9. A. speech B. March C. machine D. children 10. A. face B. commercial C. center D. city II. Choose the words that have the different stress from the others. 1. A. resident B. cutlery C. ancestor D. permission 2. A. generation B. presentation C. necessity D. obligation 3. A. respect B. mention C. expert D. worship 4. A. pagoda B. complement C. society D. tradition 5. A. custom B. explain C. chopstick D. manner III. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences. 1. The wai is the traditional of people in Thailand. A. greeting B. hello C. goodbye D. greetings 2. When two Maori people meet, they each other’s noses. A. take B. feel C. touch D. kiss 3. Do you know the way to welcome people in Tibet? A. custom B. customer C. customary D. tradition 4. The xoe dance is a spiritual of Thai ethnic people. A. customs B. tradition C. habit D. dance 60

5. In Viet Nam you shouldn’t use only the first name to people older than you. A. address B. talk C. say D. speak 6. We are going to prepare sticky rice served with grilled chicken for the celebration. A. five-coloured B. five-colours C. five-colour D. five colours 7. A tradition is something special that is through the generations. A. passed B. passed to C. passed down D. passed out 8. According to the in England, we have to use a knife and folk at dinner. A. table ways B. table manners C. behaviours D. differences 9. We have to our shoes when we go inside a pagoda. A. put on B. give off C. turn off D. take off 10. In Australia, you shouldn’t on a person’s accent. A. dislike B. criticize C. hate D. IV. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D. 1. My parents usually ............................. work very early. A. go to B. going to C. went D. to go 2. There is a computer ............................. the middle ............................. the room. A. in / of B. in / in C. on / of D. on / in 3. Nam has to leave to tidy his room every day. A. should B. must C. ought to D. need to 4. Nga ............................. have a holiday in Da Lat next summer. A. is going B. will to C. are going to D. is going to 5. Lan isn’t ............................. to go to school today. A. enough well B. enough good C. well enough D. good enough 6. Boys and girls, you’ll have to do this experiment ............................. this afternoon. A. youself B. yourselves C. yourself D. youselves 7. We must put all the small objects such as beads out ............................. children’s reach. A. of B. in C. on D. to 8. You are too thin. You ............................. eat much more meat. A. ought B. ought not C. ought to D. ought not to 9. I and my pen friend ............................. Ho Chi Minh’s Mausoleum last Sunday. A. visit B. visited C. visits D. visiting 10. Let us ............................. to the school’s library next Monday. A. going B. to go C. to going D. go 11. Peter doesn’t talk much in public. He’s rather ............................. A. kind B. sociable C. humorous D. reserved 12. You must not let children play in the street because it is ............................. A. suitable B. dangerous C. safe D. careful 13. He’ll come ............................. to pick you ............................. A. over / up B. over / on C. in / up D. on / in 14. The sun always ............................. in the East and ............................. in the West. A. rise/ set B. rises/ set C. rises/ sets D. has risen/ set 15. He spends most of his time ............................. charity work. A. to do B. did C. doing D. with doing V. Complete the sentences with a form of “have to” or “should”. Make the verbs negative when necessary. come with me if you don’t want to. I’ll go on my own. 1. You 2. If you need some help with your homework, you go to the library. 3. If you have a ticket, you queue. You can go straight in. 4. You tell lies. It’s wrong. take it easy. 5. Nick works too much. I think he 6. Your hair’s too long. I think you get it cut. 7. Your clothes are dirty. You wash them. 8. I’m going to bed. I get up early tomorrow. 9. I’d like to meet your best friend. You invite him/ her round. tell my parents where I am, then they don’t worry. 10. I

VI. Rewrite the sentences using “should/ shouldn’t”. 1. Don’t touch this switch. This switch .......................................................................................... 2. It isn’t a good idea for you to put so much salt in the soup. You shouldn’t ...................................................................................... 3. It isn’t a good idea for you to drink so much alcohol. You shouldn’t ...................................................................................... 4. Don’t trip over the step into the kitchen. You shouldn’t ...................................................................................... 5. You can’t park here because it’s a restricted area. You shouldn’t ...................................................................................... 6. Why didn’t they tell me about these changes earlier? I should have been ............................................................................... 7. Don’t lean against the newly-painted wall. You shouldn’t ...................................................................................... 8. Don’t smoke too many cigarettes. You shouldn’t ...................................................................................... 9. Children are advised to go to bed early. Children should ................................................................................... 10. You had better not to stay up late. You shouldn’t ...................................................................................... VII. Read the passage about introducing Vietnamese customs to foreigners, and then choose the best answer A, B, C or D. The Vietnamese are known to be polite, hospitable and sensitive. They have a casual and friendly (1) . They regard friendship as being very important throughout one’s life. They are always open to visits to their family. from friends. Drop-in visits are welcome. The Vietnamese are very (2) When they (3) you a gift, the Vietnamese will usually speak lightly about it. Even though it is an expensive gift, they may pretend it is of no great monetary value. (4) 4,000 years of civilization, the Vietnamese are proud people who like to recite to a myth that they are descendants of an angel and a dragon. If you happen to be in their homes at meal time, the Vietnamese will probably (5) you to sit down and share whatever food is (6) . Let them know that you enjoy their food is one way in successfully (7) a better relationship with them. When they invite you to their homes for a meal, celebration, or special occasion, some (8) usually food, fruits, chocolate or liquors - should be offered to the host’s family. 1. A. tradition B. feature C. culture D. manner 2. A. closed B. closing C. close D. being closed 3. A. offer B. carry C. send D. sell 4. A. Of B. With C. At D. In 5. A. take B. require C. speak D. invite 6. A. good B. present C. available D. delicious 7. A. setting B. building C. taking D. being 8. A. gifts B. invitations C. offers D. situations VIII. Read the passage and answer the questions below David wants to buy a Christmas present for a very special person, his mother. David’s father gives him $5.00 pocket money a week and David puts $2.00 a week into his bank account. After three months David takes $20.00 out of his bank account and goes to the shopping mall. He looks and looks for a perfect gift. Suddenly he sees a beautiful brooch in the shape of his favourite pet. He says to himself, “My mother loves jewelry, and the brooch costs only $17.00.” He buys the brooch and takes it home. He wraps the present in Christmas paper and places it under the tree. He is very excited and he is looking forward to Christmas morning to see the joy on his mother’s face. But when his mother opens the present she screams with fright because she sees a spider. 1. Who does David get his money from? ............................................................................................................. 2. What does David want to buy his Mother?

A. goodbye B. hello C. greeting D.greetings 2. When two Maori people meet, they each other's noses. A. touch B. feel C. take D. kiss 3. Do you know the way to welcome people in Tibet? A. custom B. customer C. customary D. tradition 4. The xoe dance is a spiritual of Thai ethnic people. A. customs B. tradition C. habit D. dance 5. In Viet Nam you shouldn't use only the first name to people older than you. A. speak B. talk C. say D. address 6. We are going to prepare sticky rice served with grilled chicken for the celebration. A. five colours B. five-colours C. five-colour D. five-coloured 7.A tradition is something special that is through the generations. A. passed B. passed to C. passed down D. passed out 8.According to the in England, we have to use a knife and fork at dinner A. table ways B. table manners C. behaviours D. differences 9.We have to our shoes when we go inside a pagoda. A. take off B. give off C. turn off D. put on 10. In Australia, you shouldn't on a person's accent. A. comment B. criticize C. hate D. dislike II.Give advice “should” or “shouldn’t”, using the cues about table manners in Japan. 1. Don’t drink at a dinner party until everyone is served. ______________________________________________________________________________ 2.Raise your drink and say “kampai!” (cheers) before you drink. ______________________________________________________________________________ Use a small wet cloth at most Japanese restaurants to wash your hands before eating. ______________________________________________________________________________ 4.Don’t use it as a napkin or to touch any part of your face. ______________________________________________________________________________ 5.Use chopsticks during the meal. ______________________________________________________________________________ 6.Don’t tip in any situation in Japan. ______________________________________________________________________________ III. Complete the sentences with a form of "have to” or "should". Make the verbs negative when necessary. 31. Your hair's too long. I think you get it cut. 32. Your clothes are dirty. You wash them. 33. I'm going to bed. I get up early tomorrow. invite him/her round. 34. I'd like to meet your best friend. You 35. I tell my parents where I am, then they don't worry. 36. You come with me if you don't want to. I'll go on my own. 37. If you need some help with your homework, you go to the library. queue. You can go straight in. 38. If you have a ticket, you 39. You tell lies. It's wrong. 40. Nick works too much. I think he take it easy

............................................................................................................. 3. How much money does David take to the mall? ............................................................................................................. 4. What does David buy his mother? ............................................................................................................. 5. What does David do with the present when he takes it home? ............................................................................................................. 6. Why does David’s mother scream? ............................................................................................................. 7. Why does David buy a spider brooch? ............................................................................................................. 8. Where does David put the present on Christmas Eve? ............................................................................................................. IX. Rewrite and complete the sentences using “should”. Ex: If I were you, I’d go to the doctor’s. I think you should go to the doctor’s. 1. It’s a good idea to wear a warm coat. You ...................................................................................................... 2. My advice is to leave early. I think you ............................................................................................ 3. It’s a good idea to take more exercise. You ...................................................................................................... 4. In my opinion, it’s a good idea for you to read a lot. I think .................................................................................................. 5. It’s a good idea to do that. You ...................................................................................................... 6. My advice is for you to ride a bike. I think .................................................................................................. 7. If I were you, I would buy a dog. I think .................................................................................................. X. Find and correct the mistakes of these sentences 1. He don’t go to the class today. ................................................................................................................... 2. I didn’t went to the cinema last night. ................................................................................................................... 3. Mr Brown doesn’t lives in a big city. He lives in the countryside. ................................................................................................................... 4. My sister hasn’t breakfast very often. ................................................................................................................... 5. Phuc isn’t enough strong to lift the bag. ................................................................................................................... 6. They have a full of flowers garden. ................................................................................................................... 7. They no from Greece. ................................................................................................................... 8. This coffee is too heavy for drink. ................................................................................................................... 9. Our new car is greens. ................................................................................................................... 10. Mr and Mrs John is on holiday. I. 1.

IV. Complete the sentences, using “have to” and the verbs from the box in the correct form either positive or negative. open talk stop take decide get up send explain 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

TEST 2 UNIT 4 Choose the best answer A, B, Cor D to complete the sentences. The wai is the traditional of people in Thailand. 63

We I We She You

early at the weekends. (negative) which job I want before the end of the week. (positive) the bus into the city center. We can walk. (negative) the shop at 9 o’clock every morning. (positive) quietly in the library. (positive) 64

6. You the letter to him by post. I will see him tomorrow and I can give it to him then. (negative) 7. You it to me. I understand the problem. (negative) 8. We talking when the lesson starts. (positive) V. Complete the tips about Vietnamese table manners by filling in each blank with “should” or “shouldn’t”. 1. When having a meal, you pass all dishes using both hands. 2. You place your chopsticks on the designated chopsticks holder when taking a break to drink or to speak. 3. You stick your chopsticks vertically in the middle of the rice bowl. 4. You eat directly from the serving dish. 5. You try every dish that is served before obtaining more of your favourite ones. 6. You consume only meat, as it is the most expensive ingredient of the meal. finish the food put on your plate because this shows respect for the 7. You cook and is not wasteful. 8. You refuse any food offerings despite being full. 9. You inform the host that you are full prior to being offered another dish. place your chopsticks on top of your rice bowl. 10. When you finish a meal, you VI. What kinds of behaviour are acceptable in Viet Nam? Fill in the blanks with “You should” or “You shouldn’t”. 1. _________ introduce yourself to newcomers in your class. 2. __________ arrive on time when you’re invited to someone’s house. 3. __________ blow your nose in public. 4. __________ chew gum while talking to someone. 5. __________ call a teacher by his or her first name. 6. __________ stand up when the teacher enters the classroom. 7. __________ place the chopsticks on your bowl when you finish the meal. 8. __________ visit the classmates without calling first. VII.Read the information about customs in some countries, and then give the answers to the questions. Different Customs Canada and the US: Don’t arrive early if you’re invited to someone’s home. Indonesia: Never point to anything with your foot. Korea: Don’t pass something to an older person or superior with only one hand. Muslim countries: Don’t eat with your left hand. Samoa: Don’t eat while you’re walking in the public. Thailand: Never touch anyone except a child on the head. 1.In which country is foot considered a dirty part of the body? ________________________________________________________________________________ 2.In which country should we pay attention to eating in public? ________________________________________________________________________________ 3.In which country/ countries should we eat with the right hand? ________________________________________________________________________________ 4.In which country/ countries shouldn’t we arriving early at the party? _____________________________________________________________________________________ 5.In which country/countries should you show high respect to older people or superiors? _____________________________________________________________________________________ VIII.Read the passage and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). In Japan, take off your shoes at the entrance to all homes, and most businesses and hotels. Usually a rack will be provided to store your shoes, and pair of guest slippers will be put nearby; many Japanese bring a pair of indoor slippers just in case, though.

Never wear slippers when you need to step onto a tatami mat (used in most Japanese homes and hotels), and be careful to remove the toilet slippers waiting for you in the bathroom. It is extremely bad form, for example, to reenter the main room of a house wearing slippers that have been running across a dirty area. Unlike in western cultures, the Japanese bath is used after you have washed and rinsed and feel like soaking in extra-hot water for 10, 20, 30 minutes. If you happen to be invited into a Japanese household, you will be given the honor of using the bath first, usually before dinner. Be extra careful so as not to dirty the water in any way because of its importance. 1.Only take off your shoes when you enter a Japanese house. 2.Be careful with your slippers when you come back to the main room. 3.You mustn’t wear slippers stepping onto a tatami mat. 4.The Japanese bath is also used for washing and rinsing. 5.The bath plays an important part in the Japanese life. IX. Read the passage about family traditions in Viet Nam, and do the tasks that follow. Marriage and family are very important in Viet Nam. In the countryside, parents often arrange marriages; divorce remains uncommon, though is more frequent in cities. In traditional Vietnamese families, roles are rigid. The man of the house is primarily responsible for the family’s economic well being. Older children help to look after younger siblings Discipline is viewed as a parental duty. The woman of the house looks after her parents, husband and children. In rural areas,women also do much agricultural work. Vietnamese women live by the "four virtues”: hard work, beauty, refined specch and excellent conduct. The Vietnamese attach great importance to two traditional family obligations: to care for their parents in their old age and to worship them after death. In each Vietnamese family, there is at least one altar on which there are the pictures of their ancestors. Family members worship their ancestors because they think parents after death will go to live in another world and this altar is the place where the ancestors' souls live in. As a result, every day Vietnamese people lay flowers or sometimes fruits on the altar for the belief that those ancestors will enjoy them. Task 1: Match a word in column A with its definition in column B, writing the answer in each blank. Ans wer A B 1. sibling (n) A. the part of a person that is believed to continue exist after 2. virtue (n) the body is dead 3. worship (v) B. to pray to or to show respect for someone like a god 4. altar (n) C.behaviour which shows high moral standards 5. soul (n) D. the table used in ceremonies in a church, temple or family E. a brother or a sister Task 2: Read the passage again, and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). T F 6.In traditional Vietnamese families, the man has to support the family. 7.Children have to share housework with their parents. 8.Women in the countryside only looks after their families. 9.Children have to take care of their parents in their old age and to worship them after death. 10.Every day Vietnamese people lay flowers or sometimes fruits on the altar because they believe those ancestors will cat the offerings. X.Read the passage and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). Culturally, in Thailand there are many practicesand beliefs that are very different to those from other countries. The Royal Family of Thailand is held in very high respect. Making impolite remarks about any of the royal family is against the law. The traditional greeting is with two hands prayer-like palms together known as a “wai”. If a local gives a“wai” to you, to be polite, it is nice to "wai” back. A “wai”, however, isalways appreciated. Thai culture places certain spiritual importance to certain parts of the body. You should not point your feet at people, touch people with your feet, propyour feet up on seats or tables or step over people sitting on the ground. The head, in contrast, has a much higher importance. Avoid touching people on the head as this is considered very rule.You should also avoid sittingon pillows meant for head rests. In some 66

rural area, food is often served while seated on the ground. Stepping over food on the ground is another extremely rule gesture and will surely embarrass your Thai host. Throughout all of Thailand, if you notice a pile of shoes at or near an entrance to a home, shop or guesthouse, you should remove your shoes before entry; it is considered rude not to do so. T F 1.All people in Thailand respect the Royal Family highly. 2.A local person gives a “wai” to you, and you respond by saying “hello” if you are a foreigner. 3.The feet may be considered to be the dirtiest part of the body. 4.Never touch people on the head because the head is considered to rest on the pillow. 5.Remember to remove you shoes before entering a building. Xl.Fill in each blank of the passage with the correct word from the box. activities festival

presentation enjoyment

water-throwing heat

tradition wishes

__________________________________________________________________________________ 2. Ten centuries ago/xoe/performed/ the occasion/ the establishment/ the hamlets and villages/ or during the festivals/ the Thai ethnic people. __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ 3.Now/ it/ develop/ into 36 dances/ and/ become/ the symbol/ solidarity/ among the ethnic groups/ the northwest __________________________________________________________________________________ 4.The xoedance/ performed/ the boys and girls/ the hamlets. __________________________________________________________________________________

celebrations fortune

Thai New Year (Songkran Festival) The traditional Thai New Year is celebrated in April each year. Thailand adopted this (1) with the belief that the sun re-entered. Aries and finished its orbit round the earth on April 13. In Thailand, this (2) is celebrated for three days from April 13 to April 15. Before the (3) , people will clean their houses in thehope of casting away any bad luck of the old year, so that good (4) will enter their new lives instead. Food and sweets will be prepared in advance for merit making and for treating guests. The Songkran celebrations will begin with food (5) to the monks who will walk along the streets in the early morning to receive food and other offerings. One of the most popular (6) for young people is to convey their best (7) to their elders by pouring water onto them or their palms. After this, it is time for children and young people to have full (8) with water-throwing, dancing and folk games. Do not expect to escape the (9) activities, these take place on every street in Thailand. They can be a welcome break to the(10) of the dry season, but if you wish to stay dry it is best to stay indoors! XII.Read the passage about introducing Vietnamese customs to foreigners, and then choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank in the following passage. The Vietnamese are known to be polite, hospitable and sensitive. They have a casual and friendly (1) .They regard friendship as being very important throughout one’s life. They are always open to visits from friends. Drop-in visits are welcome. The Vietnamese are very (2) to their family. Even they (3) you a gift, the Vietnamese will usually speak lightly about it. Even though it is an expensive gift,they may pretend it is of no great monetary value. (4) 4,000 years of civilization, the Vietnamese are proud people who like to recite to a myth that they are descendants of an angel and a dragon . If you happen to be in their homes at meal time, the Vietnamese will probably (5) you to sit down and share whatever food is (6) . Let them know that youenjoy their food is one way in successfully (7) a better relationship with them. When theyinvite you to their homes for a meal, celebration, or special occasion, some (8) usually food, fruits, chocolate or liquors - should be offered to the host's family. 55.A. manner B.feature C.culture D.tradition 56.A.closed B.closing C.close D.being closed 57.A.sell B.carry C.send D.offer 58.A.Of B.With C.At D.In 59.A.take B.require C.speak D.invite 60.A.available B.present C.good D.delicious 61.A.setting B.building C.taking D.being 62.A.offers B.invitations C.gifts D.situations XIII. Make sentences about the xoe dance, using the words and phrases given. You can add some words and make changes. 1. The xoe dance/ already/ considered/ a cultural and folklore activity/ Thai ethnic people/ Hoa Binh Province. 67

5.They/ hold hands/ form/ a circle/ and/ dance together. __________________________________________________________________________________ 6.Musical instruments/ the dance/ include/ lutes/ drums/ two-chord fiddles/ gongs/ and cymbals. __________________________________________________________________________________ 7.For the Thai natives/ they/ not need/ learn the xoe dance/ because/ they/ dance automatically/ when they grow up. __________________________________________________________________________________ 8. Without xoe dance/ Thai boys and girls/ not become/ lovely couples. __________________________________________________________________________________ TEST 3 UNIT 4 Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others. a. wrap b. worship c. wear d. wife b. tradition c. gift d. knife a. chopstick a. obligation b. occasion c. expression d. celebration a. mat b. tray c. place d. table a. cutlery b. custom c. compliment d. circle Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence. There’s a tradition of having parties _________ Christmas. a. on b.in c. at d. for 2. Generally, rice is served _________ fish, meat, soup and vegetable. a. to b.as c. in c. with 3. You _________ speak when the teacher is speaking. a. needn’t b. can’t c. don’t have to d. mustn’t 4. Christmas Eve is the day _________ people in some countries exchange their presents. a. that b. which c. when d. what 5. Japanese have developed the custom of eating meals sitting on tatami _______, not on chairs a. towels b,prongs c. trays d. mats 6. You have to _________ your hat when going inside the main worship area of the temple. a. take off b.puton c. break with d.getout 7. You _________ place your chopsticks on your rice bowl when finished with a meal. Don’t rest them on the table. a. shouldn’t b. don’t have to c. should d. mustn’t 8. He _________ a long family tradition of serving the military. a. followed b.obliged c. reflected d. agreed 9. In the UK, families often celebrate Christmas together, _________ they can watch each other open their presents! a.though b.but c. because d. so 10. ‘We don’t sweep the floor on the first day of Tet.’ ‘_________ Why?’

I. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. II. 1.

a. What a bad day! b. You’re kidding! c. You’re right. d. Spot on! III. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences. 1. You look really tired. You _________ take a few days off and have a holiday. a. should b. must c. have to d. can 2. In Vietnam, you _________ take a deep bow as you do in Japan. a. mustn’t b. don’t have to c. should d. shouldn’t 3. Sorry, but my train is at 6.00. I _________ leave now. a. shouldn’t b.ought to c.mustn’t d. have to 4. You _________ look’ at other students’ work. It’s against the rules. a. shouldn’t b.don’t have to c. mustn’t d. can’t 5. The airline only allows two piecesof luggage. You _________ pack too much! a. shouldn’t b. mustn’t c. don’t have to d. couldn’t 6. John can’t come because he _________ work tomorrow. a. should b.can c.must d. has to 7. I know they enjoy their work, but they ______ work at the weekends.It’s not goodfor them. a. shouldn’t b.don’t have to c. mustn’t d. have to 8. Elderly people _________ be treated with great respect a. shouldn’t b. should c.aren’t obliged to d. mustn’t 9. He _________ use chopsticks for spring roll. It is finger food. a. must b.has to c.doesn’t have to d. should 10. Everyone _________ wear a helmet when riding a motorbike. It’s mandatory according to traffic law. a.isn’t allowed to b. must c. can d. shouldn’t IV. Match the word or phrase with its definition. 1. custom a. the feeling of being comfortable and happy in a particular place or with a particular group of people 2. tradition b. the knives, forks, and spoons that you use for eating food 3. sharp c. an accepted way of behaving or of doing things 4. table manners d. exactly right 5. cutlery e. all the people who were born at about the same time 6. prong f. a belief, custom or way of doing something that has existed for a long time 7. generation g. the socially acceptable way to eat your food, especially when eating a meal with others 8. sense of belonging h. each of the two or more long pointed parts of a fork 9. host i. at a particular time exactly 10. spot on j. a person who invites guests to a meal, a party, etc. V. Complete the sentences with the correct form or tense of the verbs in the box. respect

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

wrap

worship

pass

take

reflect

reunite

break

She ___________ the present in red paper and tied it with yellow ribbon. All students should ___________ their teachers. The culture of xoe dancing ___________. Thai people’s lifestyle and culture. We decided ___________ with tradition and go away for Tet holidays. In my family the tradition that has been ___________ down is eating together every Sunday. Almost every Vietnamese household sets an altar ___________ their ancestors. It is considered very impolite not _________ off your shoes before entering a house in Japan. Lots of people come back ___________ their families during Tet holiday

VII. Complete the sentences with should or shouldn’t. 1. In Japan, you __________ point at people or things because it’s considered rude. 2. When invited to a Vietnamese home, you __________ bring gifts wrapped inbrightly coloured paper. 3. You __________ stand up chopsticks in your food between mouthfuls or when finished – it resembles incense sticks that are burned in memory of the dead. 4. You __________ sweep your house on the first three days of the new year becauseall your money and success will be swept out too. 5. You __________ smile and say “thank you” when receiving a gift. 69

6. When travelling on public transport, you __________ avoid loud phone conversations. 7. When visiting Thailand, you _____________ mention the King and do anything that’sdisrespectful. 8. You __________ take your shoes off when entering homes or temples. 9. You __________ use both hands when giving and receiving things. 10. When dining in Thailand, you __________ eat with your fork, but do use it topush food onto your spoon. VIII. Complete the sentences with the correct form of have to and the verbs in brackets. 1. When visiting a temple, tourists ___________ (follow) some important customs. 2. The secretary ___________ (answer) all the phone calls at work. 3. I ___________ (go) to work tomorrow. There’s a holiday. 4. ___________ we ___________ (buy) another ticket to see this part of the castle? 5. Everyone ___________ (recycle) as much as possible. 6. Susan ___________ (come) to the town with us if she doesn’t want to. 7. In our country, children ___________ (wear) a uniform at school. 8. ___________ he ___________ (do) his work tonight? Can he do it tomorrow? 9. You ___________ (put) a stamp on this letter. It says FREEPOST on it. 10. We ___________ (stop) talking when the lesson starts. 11. ___________ all the students ___________ (take) the final test? 12. She ___________ (take) an umbrella. I’m sure it isn’t going to rain. 13. I ___________ (leave) the party early last night – I wasn’t very well. 14. It was a lovely holiday. We ___________ (do) anything. 15. The children are happy because they ___________ (do) any homework today. IX. Underline the correct form. 1. Children must / have to start school when they are five. 2. In many countries, you should / must wear a seat belt in the car - it’s the law. 3. I know you like sugar but you shouldn’t / don’t have to eat quite so much - it’s bad for you. 4. I’m not working tomorrow, so I mustn’t / don’t have to get up early. 5. The manager suggested that we have to / should try to find another hotel. 6. Kids should / have to wear a life vest. That’s bur regulation. 7. You mustn’t / don’t have to smoke in here; smoking isn’t allowed in the airport. 8. You must / should hand in your homework on Tuesday or your mark will be zero. 9. You have to / don’t have to dress up for the party. Wear whatever you feel comfortable in. 10. You should / have to ask the teacher to help you if you don’t understand the lesson. X. Complete each sentence with a suitable preposition. 1. Today we’re going to learn _________ customs and traditions. 2. The tradition has been passed _________ from father to son for generations. 3. They still follow the custom _________ pinning moneyto the bride’s dress. 4. Vietnamese women often wear ao dai _________ special occasions. 5. We decided to break _________ tradition and have fish for Thanksgiving dinner. 6. They take their shoes _________ when entering the house to avoid getting the floor dirty. 7. According to tradition, we have fireworks _________ New Year’s Eve. 8. It is the custom in that country _________ women to marry young. 9. We often talk about our day at school or work _________ the dinner table. 10. Gifts should be wrapped _________ colourful paper. XI. Supply the correct tense and form of the verbs in brackets. 1. Last week, we ____________(have) dinner with a French family. 2. I hate eating with spoon because it____________(cause) trouble when I eat fish. 3. In the past, ao dai ____________(wear) by both men and women. 4. The speaker ____________(give) a presentation on Vietnamese customs and traditions right now. 5. She ____________(travel) to six countries since she ____________(start) the job. 6. Our family __________(have) dinner together every Saturday night. It’s our family tradition. 7. I hope I ____________(have) a chance to visit your country soon. 8. When in Japan, you should avoid ____________(eat) on the go. 9. I think you should ____________(go) to the doctor. You look terrible. 10. The Japanese tend ____________(use) their mobile phones discreetly when in public. 70

XII. Write the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. _____________ when dining, South Koreans use cushions to sit on the floor and eat from a low table. (tradition) 2. The wai is the traditional form of _____________ in Thailand. (greet) 3. They weren’t _____________ to live with their parents after the wedding. (obligation) 4. It is considered _____________ to address an elder with his or her given name. (polite) 5. Is that woman the _____________ of the party? (host) 6. The children in our family are always _____________ to their elders. (respect) 7. Custom _____________ from tradition in some aspects such as scale and time. (different) 8. Don’t use your personal chopsticks to get food from the _____________ dish. (serve) 9. Many families have three _____________, which create unique cultural features. (generate) 10. We have lots of customs and it can get a bit _____________ for visitors. (confuse) XIV. Read the text carefully, then answer the questions. BRITISH STRANGE FOOD HABITS Perhaps you know about some of the food that British people eat, but do you know about their strange food habits? People from different parts of the UK and from different classes call their meals by different names. They call the midday meal, lunch or dinner and the evening meal, dinner, supper or tea. Tea is also sandwiches, cakes and tea (the drink) at four or five o’clock. What do the British eat when they want something quick and easy? Baked beans, of course! You must warm them in a pan and eat them on toast. Cheddar cheese is so popular in Britain that people run after it down a hill! This is a very strange English sport. You can see it once a year in Coopers Hill. There are four races, three for men and one for women. At the start of the race someone drops a big, round cheese down a very, very steep hill. About 15 racers run and jump after it. The first person to get to the bottom of the hill gets the cheese. There is another strange race that the British have. It is a special Pancake Day race. Only women can run in the race. They must run with a pancake in a frying pan and throw it in the air three times. After the race, many English families eat pancakes with lemon juice and sugar. Be careful if you have Christmas dinner with a British family – some of their Christmas customs are risky! Be very careful! Eat the Christmas pudding slowly if you don’t want to eat a coin! When they are making their delicious dessert, British people put a coin in the mixture. The person who finds the coin in their pudding will be rich and happy. 1. What do the British call the evening meal? ___________________________________________________________________ 2. What do the British have with baked beans? ___________________________________________________________________ 3. How often is the Cheddar cheese sport event held? ___________________________________________________________________ 4. What is the prize if you win the Cheddar cheese race? ___________________________________________________________________ 5. Who can take part in a pancake race? ___________________________________________________________________ 6. Why is it dangerous to eat Christmas pudding? ___________________________________________________________________ XV. Read the passage carefully and choose the correct answers. GIFT-GIVING CUSTOMS IN VIETNAM Gift giving is important in Vietnam because of the significance of interpersonal relationships in Vietnamese culture. First and foremost, do not encourage corruption. There is a clear cut between gift-giving and bribery. Nevertheless, it is common in Vietnam for exchanging small gifts on certain occasions such as anniversary, Tet holiday... to express your respect, love, appreciation or gratitude. Gift-giving customs depend on the context. If it is a private gift for one Vietnamese partner you should give the gift at a private occasion. If you have a gift for the whole officeor company, you should give it after the business meeting with the whole office’s employee. Do not wrap a gift in the black paper because this colour is unlucky and associated with funerals in Vietnam. Gifts that symbolize cutting such as scissors, knives and other sharp objects should be avoided 71

because they mean the cutting of the relationship. Vietnamese may or may not open these gifts when they are received; leave the option to them. You will also receive gifts and should defer to your host as to whether youshould open it when received or not. Regardless of when it is opened or what it is, profuse thanks are always appropriate. 1. According to the passage, why is gift giving important in Vietnam? a.Because it helps to establish a friendship. b.Because it’s common in Vietnamese culture. c.Because it’s the best way to build up a stable relationship. d.Because personal relationships play a vital role in Vietnamese culture. 2. Which of the followings should not be a reason for gift giving? a. Toshowappreciation b. To bribesomebody c. To express gratitude d. To show affection 3. Whengiving a gift, you should ______________. a. wrap it in black or white paper b. give it in the business meeting c.never give sharp objects, such as knives or scissors d.avoid giving it at a private occasion 4. When receiving a gift, you should ______________. a. always say “thank you? b. try to find what is it c. open it in front of the giver d. ask your host to open it 5. Whichofthe following is NOT true about gift giving customs in Vietnam? a.Gift giving is a good way of strengthening relationships. b.Gifts for your partners should be given at private occasions. c.You should avoid giving anything sharp. d.It is considered rude not to open the gift in front of the giver. XVI.Rewrite the sentence using the word in brackets. 1. It’s impolite of them to wear hats in the pagoda. (shouldn’t) _________________________________________________________________________ 2. If I were you, I’d ask them about their customs. (should) _________________________________________________________________________ 3. Is it necessary for me to tip in a coffee shop? (have to) _________________________________________________________________________ 4. It’s not mandatory for staff to wear vests in their company. (need) _________________________________________________________________________ 5. It’s good for us to keep our traditional customs. (should) _________________________________________________________________________ 6. It’s really important to remove your shoes when entering a temple. (must) _________________________________________________________________________ 7. Photography is not allowed at some sacred places. (mustn’t) _________________________________________________________________________ 8. It’s Saturday tomorrow, so it’s not necessary for Jane to get up early. (have to) UNIT 5: FESTIVALS IN VIET NAM A. VOCABULARY 1. anniversary (n) /ˌænɪˈvɜːsəri/: ngày kỉ niệm 2. archway (n) /ˈɑːtʃweɪ/: mái vòm 3. carnival (n) /ˈkɑːnɪvl/: lễ hội (hóa trang) 4. ceremony (n) /ˈserəməni/: nghi lễ 5. clasp (v) /klɑːsp/: bắt tay 6. commemorate (v) /kəˈmeməreɪt/: kỉ niệm 7. command (n) /kəˈmɑːnd/: hiệu lệnh 8. companion (n) /kəmˈpæniən/: bạn đồng hành 9. defeat (v) /dɪˈfiːt/: đánh bại 10. emperor (n) /ˈempərə(r)/: đế chế 72

11. float (v) /fləʊt/: thả trôi nổi 12. gong (n) /ɡɒŋ/: cồng (nhạc cụ dân tộc) 13. rice flake (n) /raɪs fleɪk/: cốm 14. incense (n) /ˈɪnsens/: hương, nhang 15. invader (n) /ɪnˈveɪdə(r)/: kẻ xâm lược 16. joyful (adj) /ˈdʒɔɪfl /: vui vẻ 17. lantern (n) /ˈlæntən/: đèn trời, đèn thả sông 18. offering (n) /ˈɒfərɪŋ/: lễ vật 19. procession (n) /prəˈseʃn/: đám rước 20. preserve (v) /prɪˈzɜːv/: bảo tồn 21. ritual (n) /ˈrɪtʃuəl/: nghi thức (trong lễ hội, tôn giáo) 22. royal court music /ˈrɔɪəl kɔːt ˈmjuːzɪk/: nhã nhạc cung đình 23. regret (v) /rɪˈɡret/: hối hận 24. scenery (n) /ˈsiːnəri/: cảnh quan 25. worship (v) /ˈwɜːʃɪp/: tôn thờ, thờ cúng ai B. GRAMMAR REVIEW ÔN TẬP CÂU ĐƠN (SIMPLE SENTENCES) Câu đơn là câu chỉ có 1 mệnh đề chính, gồm có 1 chủ ngữ và 1 động từ. Định nghĩa Hoặc câu có thể có chủ ngữ là 2 danh từ nối bằng ‘and’ hoặc có 2 động từ nối bằng ‘and’ nhưng vẫn là 1 câu đơn. I went to the supermarker yesterday. (Tôi đã đi đến siêu thị ngày hôm Ví dụ qua.) Mary and Tom are playing tenis.(Mary và Tom đang chơi tenis.) My broather ate a sandwich and drank beer. (Anh trai tôi đã ăn sandwich và uống bia.) II. ÔN TẬP CÂU GHÉP (COMPOUND SENTENCES) 1.Định nghĩa và cấu trúc câu ghép -Là câu có 2 hay nhiều mệnh đề độc lập về ý nghĩa. Định nghĩa -Được kết nối với nhau bởi một liên từ kết hợp hay còn gọi là lien từ đẳng lập như: and,or,but,so… Mệnh đề 1 + (,) + liên từ + mệnh đề 2. Cấu trúc Ví dụ: You should eat less fast or you can put on weight. (Bạn nên ăn ít đồ ăn nhanh hơn hoặc bạn có thể tang cân đấy.) I wasn’t very hungry, but I ate a lot. (Tớ không đói lắm, nhưng tớ đã ăn rất nhiều.) My mother does exercise every day, so she looks very young and fit. (Mẹ tớ tập thể dục hang ngày, vì vậy mà trông mẹ rất trẻ và khoẻ.) Chúng ta cần phải sử dụng dấu “,” trước lien từ so, con với các lien từ Lưu ý and/or/but thì có thể có dấu phẩy hoặc không. 2. Các liên từ kết hợp thường gặp Liên từ Ví dụ And(và): dùng để bổ sung thêm thông tin (The Japanese eat a lot of fish, and they eat a lot of tofu too.( Người Nhật ăn rất nhiều cá, và họ cũng ăn rất nhiều đậu phụ nữa.) Or(hoặc): dung khi có sự lựa chọn You can take this medicine, or you can drink hot ginger tea. (Con có thể uống thuốc này hoặc con có thể uống trà gừng nóng.) But (nhưng): dung dể nói 2 mệnh đề mag ý She doesn’t eat much, but she’s still fat. (Cô nghĩa trái ngược, đối lập nhau. ấy không ăn nhiều, những cô ấy vẫn béo.) So (nên/vì vậy mà/vậy nên): dung để nói về một My mother eats healthily, so she is very kết quả của sự việc được nhắc đến trước đó. strong. (Mẹ tớ ăn uống rất lành mạnh, nên bà ấy rất khoẻ.)

III CÂU PHỨC (COMPLEX SENTENCES) 1.Định nghĩa -Câu phức là câu bao gồm một mệnh đề độc lập (independent clause) và ít nhất 1 mệnh Định đề phụ thuộc (dependent clause) liên kết với nhau.Hai mệnh đề thường được nối với njau nghĩa bởi dấu phẩy hoặc các liên từ phụ thuộc (Subordinating Conjuntions). Ví dụ

He always takes time to play with his daughter even though he is extremely busy. Mệnh đề độc lập Mệnh đề phụ thuộc (Anh ấy luôn dành thời gian để chơi với con gái mặc dù anh ấy rất bận rộn.) Even thoughhe is busy,he always takes time to play with his daughter. Mệnh đề phụ thuộc Mệnh đề độc lập (Mặc dù anh ấy bận rộn,nhưng anh ấy vẫn dành thời gian để chơi với con gái.) You should think about money saving from now if you want to study abroad. Mệnh đề độc lập Mệnh đề phụ thuộc (Bạn nên nghĩ về việc tiết kiệm tiền từ bây giờ nếu bạn muốn đi du học.) If you want to study abroad, you should think about money saving from now. Mệnh đề phụ thuộc Mệnh đề độc lập (Nếu bạn muốn đi du học,bạn nên nghĩ về việc tiết kiệm tiền từ bây giờ.) -Mệnh đề đi liền với liên từ trong câu phức chính là mệnh đề phụ thuộc (dependent Lưu ý clause). -Nếu mệnh đề phụ thuộc(dependent clause) nằm phía trược mệnh đề độc lập (independent clause) thì giữa hai mệnh đề phải có dấu phẩy còn lại thì không. 2. Một số lien từ phụ thuộc thường gặp After Although As As if As long as In oder to (sau khi) (mặc dù) (bởi vì/khi) (như thế là) (miễn là) (cốt để mà) Before Even if Because As though As much as So that (trước khi) (mặc dù) (bởi vì) (như thế là) (cốt để mà) Once Even though Whereas If As soon as Unless (một khi) (mặc dù) (trong khi đó) (nếu) (ngay khi) (trừ phi) Since Though While In case When Until (kể từ khi/bởi (mặc dù) (trong khi đó) (phòng khi) (khi) (cho đến khi) vì) ■ BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài 1: Điền S (Simple) trước những câu đơn, điền C (compound) trước những câu ghép và CC (Complex) trước những câu phức. ______ 1. My bike is broken, so I have to walk to school. ______2. My mother bought me a new pair of shoes and made me a cake on my birthday. _____ 3. I didn’t expect Jim to come to the meeting yesterday. _____ 4. Peter had an accident last week but now he is fine. _____ 5. When I came home, my sister was watching TV. _____ 6. If you want to succeed in life, you have to work harder. _____ 7. My sister fancies rock music and she always wants to go to a rock concert. _____ 8. My grandfather and my grandmother fist met each other when they were very young. _____ 9. I didn’t know his address until Mary told me. _____ 10. Although she tried her best, she didn’t get the job. _____ 11. In spring, there are various festival throughout country. _____ 12. Jame never eats junk food because it’s bad for his healthy. _____ 13. There are several parks around the city. _____ 14. You may have a sore throat if you drink cold water. _____ 15. They are going to hold a party to celebrate their wedding anniversary. Bài 2: Khoanh tròn vào liên từ thích hợp để hoàn thành những câu ghép dưới đây.(and,or,but,so) 1. My father is an engineer,_____ he often has to work away from home. 73

A.and B. or C.but D.so 2.This year the Mid-Autumn Festival falls on the next Sunday,_____ I can go home and reunite with my family. A.and B. or C.but D.so 3.I have never joined in a carnival,_____ I am very curious about it. A.and B. or C.but D.so 4.My mother is occupied in her job,_____ she tries to make time for me. A.and B. or C.but D.so 5.Do you wwant to join us_____ do you want to leave now? A.and B. or C.but D.so 6.I loves cats,_____ my mother doesn’t allow me to have one. A.and B.or C.but D.so 7.Mary wants to go abroad,_____ she saves money from now. A.and B.or C.but D.so 8.They used to be friends,_____ now they are not. A.and B.or C.but D.so 9.This event is help to commemorate the national heroes,_____ it teacher children to respect and be grateful to the heroes. A.and B.or C.but D.so 10.You can take a seat,_____ you can go around and take a look.It’s up to you. A.and B.or C.but D.so Bài 3: Điền một liên từ thích hợp để hoàn thành những câu ghép sau. 1. My father wants me to become a doctor,_____ I want to become a designer. 2. It is a challenging task ____ it takes me a lot of time to do it. 3. Should I stay in and watch TV ____ should I hang out with friends today? 4. There are many festival in Vietnam_____ many of them are held in the spring. 5. Did you stay at home last night_____ did you go out with your friends? 6. I broke my glasses yesterday,_____ I didn’t see things clearly. 7. My brother doesn’t socialize much, ____ he has very few friends. 8. A new camera is all I want now,_____ I don’t have enough money. 9. Mary looks small and thin,_____ she owns great strength. 10.I have many things to do tonight,_____ I reject my friend’s invitation to her party. 11. My computer is brand new,_____ I en counter some problems when I use it. 12. This is a complex problem,_____ we need to work together to find the solution. 13. Peter doesn’t feel today,____ he is absent from school. 14. They thought they won the match,_____ it turned out that they were losers. 15. My siblings and I don’t share many similarities,_____ we are in harmony with each other. Bài 4: Nối hai câu đơn sau thành câu ghép. 1. My best friend is studying abroad. It is impossible for us to meet each other now. 2. They are going to build a new bridge across this rive. Traveling will be much more convenient. 3. It has been ages since our last encounter. I still remember him clearly. 4. I went down with flu last week. I had to postpone my work. 5. I think the festival will be full of fun. Many people will enjoy it. 6. Students can choose to carry out a project on environmental issues. They can conduct research on the topic of renewable energy. 7. My mother started a business trip last week. She hasn’t returned home yet. 8. My brother has grown up into an adult. He still enjoys playing with Lego. Bài 5: Khoanh tròn vào liên từ thích hợp để hoàn thành những câu phức dưới đây. 1. It will be a great fortune (if/unless) I can join upcoming carnival. 2. I will lend you my book (as long as/as soon as) you promise to keep it clean. 3. I will call you (as long as/as soon as) I arrive there. 4. (When/While) I came, Jim was having dinner. 5. Catherine was shocked (when/until) she found out the truth. 6. They have worked at this company (when/since) they graduated.

7. At 8 pm last night, I was doing my homework (when/while) my sister was playing with her toys. 8. (Before/After) I had eaten my breakfast, I went to school by bus. 9. (Although/Despite) Mary looks thinner than me, she is much stronger than me. 10. They didn’t come to the party (since/as soon as) they were too busy. 11. You should bring your raincoat (unless/in case) it rains. 12.I didn’t realize her new hair (when/until) she told me. 13.I won’t accept this job (even if/if) the offer me high salary. 14.My father will buy me a book (even though/as long as) I pass the exam. 15.I like her (when/even though) she’s annoying sometimes. Bài 6: Nối những mệnh đề ở cột A với cột B để tạo thành một câu ghép hoàn chỉnh. A B 1.They won’t let you in a.he failed to persuade her. 2.They were having a small talk b.once I have enough money to buy one. 3.Even though he tried his best, c.until I pointed it out for him. 4.Jame didn’t realize his fault d.unless you have the invitation letter. 5.Although Sarah can sing very well , e.when I came in the room. 6.Today Peter doesn’t attend class f.when you visit temples or pagodas. 7.I will move to a bigger apartment g.as he is suffering from a headache. 8.You shouldn’t wear short skirts h.she rarely performs in front of people. 1-_____ 2-_____ 3-_____ 4-_____ 5-_____ 6-_____ 7-_____ 8-_____ Bài 7: Điền những liên từ cho sẵn vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành những câu phức dưới đây. whereas unless x2 since before x2 if x2 even though while 1.______ Jame is my friend, I can’t accept his arrogance. 2. My brother is a bookworm, ____ I don’t like reading books. 3. At midnight, my parents were sleeping_ ____ I was cramming for exams. 4._____ you have any questions, you ask me after the lesson. 5. We won’t go camping_____ the weather is fine. 6. You shouldn’t skip classes_____ you really have to. 7. What did you do_____ you went to bed last night? 8. In some cultures, you have to pray_____ you eat. 9. We are very familiar with this areas_____ we moved here 15 years ago. 10._____ you travel from the North to the South of Vietnam, you will experience many interesting customs. Bài 8: Viết lại hai câu đơn thành một câu phức. 1. Dog is my favorite animal. They are good companions of people. 2. I don’t like jazz . A friend of mine is a fan of it. 3. They were stuck in the traffic for hours. They managed to get there on time. 4. I came to the party. Everyone was leaving. 5. This time Jane works very hard . She doesn’t want to fail the exam again. 6. I seldom do exercises. I doing exercises is good for health. 7. My computer is old-fashioned. It functions very smoothly. 8. I didn’t know her real name. People always called her by her nickname. ■ BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO Bài 9: Đánh dấu [V] trước câu đúng.Đánh dấu [X] trước câu trả lời sai và sửa lại cho đúng. _____ 1.I love th Mid-Auturn festival. Since there are a variety of interesting activities during the festival. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____ 2.While the Mid-Autumn festival is also called “Children’s festival” in Vietnam, it is ẹnjoyed by people of all ages. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____ 3.On this special occasion, family members often reunite and celebrate the festival.

_____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____ 4.Many people choose to go out and enjoy the exciting atmosphere, however others want to stay in and have time with their family. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____ 5.The festival is help on the 15th day of the 8th month of the lunar calendar when the full moon. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____ 6.Moon cakes are very important as if making and sharing moon cakes is the hallmark tradition of this festival. ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ _____ 7.In Chinese culture, a round shape symbolizes completeness and reunion so the eating of round moon cakes among family members signifies the unity of families. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ _____ 8.Unless you visit Vietnam in autumn, you should join in this special festival. ___________________________________________________________ Bài 10: Dựa vào những từ cho sẵn, viết câu ghép hoàn chỉnh với các liên từ “and,so,but”. 1.I/visit/my neighbors/yesterday/no one/be/home. ___________________________________________________________ 2.They/recently/buy/new/house/they/throw/party/tomorrow. ___________________________________________________________ 3.You/face/a lot of/difficulties/in thefuture/career/you/should/never/give/up. ___________________________________________________________ 4.You/like/cup/of/coffee/you/like/glass/of/water? ___________________________________________________________ 5.Mr.Smith/seem/nice/man/he/be/selfish. ___________________________________________________________ 6.Mr.Brown/be/dedicated/teacher/many people/respect/him. ___________________________________________________________ 7.My students/be/hard-working/and/well-behaved/I not/have to/worry/much/about/them. ___________________________________________________________ 8.Ann/want/lose/weight/she/go/the gym/regularly. ___________________________________________________________ 9.The new radio/cost/me/a lot of/money/its/quality/br/poor. ___________________________________________________________ 10.This movie/be/praised/by/critics/I/not/realy/like/it. ___________________________________________________________ Bài 11: Điền liên từ thích hợp vào ô trống để hoàn thành những câu sau: 1.They haven’t eaten anything since the morning_____ they were too busy to eat. 2.James is very excited now_____ he is going abroad next month. 3. _____ it may be very challenging for you to do it, you can give it a try. 4.I was going home yesterday_____ I came across my old friend. 5. _____ you offtenan apology to Jane, she won’t forgive you. 6_____ Mr.Smith doesn’t like traditional folk songs, he rarely listen to them. 7.Will you hang out with your friends_____ will you reunite with your family on the Mid-Autumn festival? 8. _____ you want to visit a foreign country, you have to apply for a visa first. 9.Tony has lived in Vietnam for 2years, _____ he doesn’t know much about the countries festival. 10.Normally our family prefers staying at home and having dinner together on weekends, _____ this week we want to do something else. TEST 1 UNIT 5 77

I. Find the word which has different sound in the part underlined. B. question C. action D. education 1. A. mention 2. A. populated B. loaded C. harvested D. lived 3. A. community B. computer C. museum D. customs 4. A. minority B. ethnic C. tradition D. religion 5. A. festival B. man C. fat D. grand 6. A. upset B. custom C. museum D. unsuitable 7. A. saint B. tailor C. explain D. said 8. A. beach B. catch C. church D. Christmas II. Choose the words that have the different stress from the others. 1. A. incense B. ritual C. preserve D. fortune 2. A. scenery B. invader C. childhood D. archway 3. A. historian B. speciality C. oriental D. preparation 4. A. belonging B. fisherman C. procession D. performance 5. A. commemorate B. companion C. reunion D. ceremony III. Choose the best answer. 1. You should a custom or tradition. A. finds B. found C. finding D. find 2. A custom is something that has become an things. A. to be accept B. to accept C. accepting D. accepted 3. In the UK, there are lots of customs for table manners. For example, we fork at dinner. A. have to B. are having C. has to D. having to 4. In Viet Nam, you name to address people older than you. A. should B. must C. shouldn’t D. have to 5. At the Mid-Autumn Festival, kids can sing, dance, and enjoy moon-cakes. it very much. A. However B. Moreover C. Because D. Therefore 6. In 2010, Ha Noi anniversary. A. celebrated B. commemorated C. worshipped D. remembered 7. Tet is an occasion for family A. visitings B. meeting C. reunions D. seeings 8. many Vietnamese villages prepare for a new festival season. A. While B. When C. Nevertheless D. However 9. This is the first time she A. will see B. sees C. has seen D. saw 10. Would you mind dictionary? A. if B. when C. that D. Ø 11. Would you mind A. to close B. closing C. about closing D. closed 12. Welcome A. at B. to C. in D. for 13. Accommodation in London A. is B. are C. has D. have 14. The road very rough. A. goes B. going C. to go D. gone 15. Do you mind minute?

information about way

doing

use a knife and use only the first , every child likes 1000th

its

in Viet Nam. spring

comes,

rice paddies. I borrowed your the window? Springfield! very expensive. down to the sea is here for just a 78

A. to wait B. waiting C. about waiting D. waited 16. It was late, so we decided a taxi home. A. take B. to take C. taking D. took 17. The council should be able to help families who have no accommodation. A. a place to live B. a place to watch sport matches C. a place to buy meal and eat it D. a place to work 18. Presents in colored paper and put under the Christmas tree. A. are wrapped B. are wrap C. are wraped D. are wrapping 19. Tom likes . He spends lots of hours watching the birds. A. bird-watching B. bird-watch C. watch-bird D. watching-bird 20. Sally is quite keen the idea. A. in B. on C. of D. for 21. Could you talk ? A. more quiet B. quieter C. quietlier D. more quietly 22. I thanked my classmate helping me with my homework. A. for B. about C. of D. Ø 23. Anita is fond playing the piano. A. in B. on C. of D. for 24. The fire is made matches or lighters. It is made in the traditional way. A. with B. without C. of D. by 25. Ten countries participated in the discussions. A. took part in B. held C. went to D. arranged festival was held 26. The in the communal house yard. A. rice-cook B. rice-cooker C. rice-cooking D. rice-cooked 27. I that I didn’t know what to do. A. said B. told C. asked D. suggested IV.Give the correct form of the following verbs 1. My mother always tells me that I have to home by 9 p.m. (be) 2. When I came, the whole family dinner around a big dinning table. (have) things 3. Children should from adults with both hands. (take) 4. In Australia, you mustn’t on a person’s accent. (comment) (live) in the 5. Laura lives in a big city. If she country, she (have) a dog. 6. I (learn) Italian for the past three years. (not / buy) 7. If I were you, I that book. 8. What the children (see) in the zoo yesterday? (play) in a 9. They prefer swimming pool all day. 10. The doctor will be ready in ten minutes. Take a seat while you . (wait) V. Choose the option that best fits each of the blank spaces.

Tet is a national and (1) festival in their past activities and Vietnam. It is an occasion for every Vietnamese to be reunited to think (2) hope for good luck (3) the year to come. Before Tet all houses are white washed and (4) with yellow apricot flowers and colorful lanterns. Everybody is looking (5) to a more favorable life. (6) the New Year’s Eve, children are smartly dressed. They are hoping to (7) money put in small red envelopes as they are wishing longevity to their grandparents and parents. Wrong doings (8) be absolutely avoided on these days. 1. A. traditional B. modern C. music D. summer 2. A. to B. about C. after D. for 3. A. in B. at C. on D. when 4. A. decorate B. decorates C. decorating D. decorated 5. A. at B. for C. after D. forward 6. A. In B. At C. On D. When 7. A. receive B. buy C. sell D. make 8. A. ought B. need C. should D. have VI. Read and complete the passage with words in the box.

Tet is the biggest festival in Vietnam. To (1) ......................... Tet, Vietnamese people make many tasty (2) ......................... foods. The most important food includes Chung cakes, sausages, boiled chicken, (3) ......................... rolls, and sticky rice. Chung cake is made of sticky rice, pork, green beans, and other spices, wrapped in green leaves; (4) ......................... this cake needs a lot of preparation. This cake can be (5) ......................... for a long time, even though the weather is often humid during Tet. Other significant foods that cannot be missed to worship the ancestors are sausages, spring rolls, and sticky rice. (6) ......................... sausages are difficult to make, people often buy them from famous suppliers. (7) ........................., sticky rice and spring rolls are easier to prepare and must be (8) ......................... immediately after they are cooked, so they are often made at home. VII. Read the passage and answer these questions below. TET holiday is celebrated on the first day of the Lunar New Year in Viet Nam. Some weeks before the New Year, the Vietnamese clean their houses and paint the walls. New clothes are bought for the occasion. One or two days before the festival, people make Bank Chung, which is the traditional cake, and kinds of jam. On the New Year’s Eve, the whole family gets together for a reunion dinner. Every member of the family should be present during the dinner in which many different kinds of dishes are served. On the New Year morning, the young member of the family pays their respects to the elders. And the children receive lucky money wrapped in red tiny envelops. Then people go to visit their neighbors, friends and relatives. 1. Is TET holiday celebrated on the second day of the Lunar New Year in Viet Nam? ............................................................................................................. 2. What do the Vietnamese often do some weeks before the New Year? ............................................................................................................. 3. Who do people often visit on TET holiday? ............................................................................................................. 4. How many kinds of dishes are served in the reunion dinner? ............................................................................................................. VIII. Choose the option that best fits each of the blank spaces. Harvest Festival is (1) October. It is a but it is also a part very ancient (2) of the Christian tradition. It (3) new crops and food. Children often bring fruit, vegetables and cereals into school. Schools usually give the food to hospitals or to old people. (4) the past, people

spring

kept

celebrate

traditional

Because

Therefore

served

However

sometimes (5) traditional dolls out of corn. 1. A. in B. at C. on D. from 2. A. thing B. festival C. vacation D. holiday 3. A. gives B. supplies C. celebrates D. holds 4. A. In B. At C. On D. Since 5. A. make B. are making C. making D. made IX. Read the following passage and choose the best answers to each of the questions below. Hi! I’m Dean. I’m from England. My favorite time of the year is Christmas, which is on 25th December. That’s when Christians celebrate the birth of Christ. In the middle of December we send a lot of cards to our friends and family, here and abroad. Then we get a big tree and decorate it with lights and other things. On Christmas Day, we give each other presents. We have one enormous meal with turkey, and after that, we have Christmas pudding. 1. When is Christmas held? A. On 25 December B. In the middle of December C. In the middle of the year D. no information 2. Christmas is held because Christians want to . A. have a good time B. celebrate the birth of Christ C. visit their friends and family D. decorate big trees 3. What does the word ‘decorate’ in line 4 mean? A. make something look nicer B. paint something C. make something look worse D. buy something 4. On Christmas Day, people . A. give each other presents B. have an enormous meal with turkey C. have Christmas pudding D. all answers are correct 5. Which of the following is not true? A. Dean is English. B. At Christmas, people get big trees and decorate it. C. Dean prefers Halloween to Christmas. D. In the middle of December, people send a lot of Christmas cards to their friends and family. X. Identify a mistake in each sentence and correct it. 1. In Australia, you mustn’t to comment on a person’s accent. ............................................................................................................. 2. In my family, children has to get permission before leaving the dining table. ............................................................................................................. 3. When I came, the whole family is having dinner around a big dining table. ............................................................................................................. 4. Lang Lieu couldn’t buy any special food while he was very poor. ............................................................................................................. XI. Combine each pair of sentences to make one sentence, using the words given in brackets. 1. Lang Lieu couldn’t buy any special food. He was very poor. (because) ............................................................................................................. 2. During Tet, Vietnamese people buy all kinds of sweets. They make Chung cakes as well. (so) ............................................................................................................. 3. The Hung King Temple Festival was a local festival. It has become a public holiday in Viet Nam since 2007. (however) ............................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................. 4. At the Mid-Autumn Festival, kids can sing, dance, and enjoy mooncakes. Every child likes it very much. (therefore) ............................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................. 5. The water is highly polluted. We cannot swim in this part of the river. (because) ............................................................................................................. 6. Mr. Minh is admired. He dedicates all his life to protecting environment. (since)

............................................................................................................. TEST 2 (UNIT 5) I.Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others. 1.A.concentration B.composition C.consideration D.conversation 2.A.coordination B.depression C.donation D.erection 3.A.foundation B.location C.organization D.performance 4.A.attention B.recognition C.contribution D.animation 5.A.consumption B.explosion C.technician D.mathematician 6.A.magician B. historian C.musician D.vegetarian 7.A.librarian B.physician C.Brazilian D.Indonesia 8.A.civilian B.grammarian C.politician D.Shakespearian II.Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others. 1.A. malnutrition B. prohibition C. recommendation D. superstitious 2.A. application B. congratulation C. recreation D. education 3.A.exhaustion B.maintenance C.opinion D.pollution 4.A.reduction B.competition C.objection D.appearance 5.A.comparison B.organization C.communication D.socialization IIIChoose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences. 6. different regions and religions have a variety in marital arrangements, the arranged marriage is a traditional feature of every community. A.Because B.Although C.While D.When 7.The Vietnamese are influenced by Buddhist theology and Confucian philosophy, they believe in fate in marriage.. A.and B.but C.so D.yet 8.Always take your shoes off before you enter a temple in India, you will be considered impolite. A.otherwise B.therefore C. however D.moreover 9."GiaoThua" is the most sacred time of the year; ,the first houseguest to offer the first greeting is very important. A.moreover B.nevertheless C.so D.therefore

10.The five-fruit tray on the altar symbolizes the gratitude of the Vietnamese to their ancestors; ,it demonstrates their hope for a life of plenty. A.and B.moreover C.therefore D.however 11. The Hung King Temple Festival from the 8th to the 11th day of the third lunar month in PhuTho. A.takes B.takes part C.takes place D.takes turn Buddha at 12. During the Buddhist Festival, visitors join the procession and make offerings to the pagoda. A.think about B.consider C.worship D.believe 13.I think the Kate Festival is a really joyful festival which many activities. A.contains B.holds C.features D.includes in 14.In Viet Nam, the we mostly use is chopsticks. A.cut B.cutting C.cutlery D.cutlet your promise to the children. 15.You shouldn't A.break B.cut C.keep D.save IV. _______________________________________________________________________________ Fill in the blanks with the correct verbs from the box. Maybe some questions can have more than one answer. honour perform commemorate celebrate worship symbolizes pray hold 1. On New Year's Eve, in front of the altar, people New Year.

for health and luck in the

2. Mid-Autumn Festival is held on 15th day of the eighth lunar month to the biggest full moon in the year. 3. To express their gratitude, villagers from Le Mat village built a temple to the man who saved the princess and made their region wealthy as well as adding catching snakes to their career. 4. To the event when An Duong Vuong started moving into the citadel, residents of 12hamlets belonging to Co Loa held Co Loa CitadelFestival within a10-day period. 5. â&#x20AC;&#x153;CheTroiNuocâ&#x20AC;?, a special dessert consisting of a sweet soup with round balls made from rice and sugar sauce, reunion. 6. Ba Na villagers the Village Land Praying Ceremony in preparation for the new crop or before moving to new land. 7. During theTrung Sisters Temple Festival, villagers folk games and artistic events, such as dragon and lion dancing, cheo singing, wrestling competition, swinging, etc. 8. Taking place onthe third lunar month in Truong Yen Commune, NinhBinh Province, Hoa Lu Festival is celebrated to the Kings DinhTien Hoang and Le Dai Hanh. V. Fill in each blank with one suitable subordinate from the box. and while

but because

so although

when moreover

International Kite Festival in Vung Tau Vung Tau has become a familiar tourist destination to many people (1) it has its own beautiful beaches and mountains. (2) , Vung Tau even has more tooffer. International Kite Festival in Vung Tau, first held in 2009, is the biggest Kite Festival in Viet Nam. (3) the festival is till new, it has attracted kite artisans all around the world such as France, Australia, the UK, US, Cambodia, Malaysia, the Philippines, etc. The festival may take place in various tourist sites, (4) the events are in the same order.(5) you come to Vung Tau during the first days of summer, you can enjoy the colourful sky with kites from skillful hands of artisans around the world. (6) kites from other countries are in different styles, Viet Nam showed up kites of Hue Royal styles in shape of a phoenix or a dragon. In 2009, the clubs from Hue had traditional (7) most diversified kites.(8) they were awarded special prizes. VI.Choose the word or phrase among A, B, Cor D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. Kate Festival Kate Festival is (1) by the Cham people for 3 days at the beginning of October. This event is held in a large space in the threeChampa Tower (Po Nagar,Po KlongGarai and Po Rome). The main purpose of their heroes like Po KlongGarai and Po Rome. (3) , the festival isthe the festival is to (2) chance for the local people to relax, to meet and wish one another (4) in the future. This is one of the biggest and most important events of the Cham people in Vietnam. (5) , it is a good opportunity for the visitors to explore the (6) in the Cham culture, from architecture to costumes, instruments and traditional songs that are used to praise their kings in the past. The Kate festival in each tower starts at the same time, and the day after, villagers and families begin to hold theirown rites. During the rites, the people (7) their ancestors and gods with the help of a shaman,and then pray (8) health and prosperity. The actual festival (9) after the rites.It is a combination of traditional music and dance, including some activities (10) performances of Ginang Drum and Saranai Flute or the traditional dance of Cham girls. 1.A.organize B.organized C.hold D.being held 2.A.commemorate B.see C.watch D.love 3.A.However B.Nevertheless C.Therefore D.Moreover 4.A.lucky B.happy C.fortune D.dream 5.A.However B.Therefore C.Because D.Although 6.A.beautiful B.beautifully C.charm D.charming 7.A.call B.ask C.shout D.speak 8.A. to B. about C. of D. for 9.A. take place B. take places C. take part D. take the place 83

10.A.such B.so C.like D.like as VII. Read the passage about CholChnamThmay Festival, and do the tasks that follow. CholChnamThmay Festival This holiday is the New Year festival in ancient calendar of Khmer people. Held in mid-April, the festival occurs in 3 days (4 days for the leap year). People prepare new clothes, food and drinks for whole festival days. They also repair, clean and decorate their house. Everyone is excited to care for holiday. At night of New Year's Eve, every family prepares a lavish meal, burns incense and candles to welcome the new god, farewell the old god. On the altar, they present 5 flower branches, 5 candles, 5 incense, 5 cereal seeds and fruit crops. They pray for health and luck in the New Year. On the first New Year - CholSangkranChmay, major activities are bathing, dressing nice, bringing sacrifice gifts to the temple in good time which has been selected. On Wonbof day - the second day, they make rice offerings and cover the sand mountain. People cook rice and bring it to the temple in the morning and the afternoon. On LomSak day - the third day, they do Buddha bathing and monk-bathing ceremony. In the morning. people bring breakfast to monks and listen to the sermon. At noon, they burn the lamps, offer sacrifice gifts and bring fragrant water to bathe Buddha statues. After the ceremony at the temple, the monks go to the grave to pray for the souls of those who died. Task 1: Match a word in column A with its definition in column B, writing the answer in each blank. A B Answer 1. lavish (adj) A. to speak to a god to give thanks or to ask for something 2. farewell (v) B. a speech on a religious matter 3. monk (n) C. large in amount or number 4. sermon (n) D. having a pleasant smell 5. fragrant (adj) E. say goodbye 6. pray (v) F. a man who has decided to live a religious life in a community Task 2: Read the passage again, and then answer the following questions. 7.What is the festival? ________________________________________________________________________________ 8. When is it held? And how long does it last? ________________________________________________________________________________ 9.What do people prepare to celebrate the festival? ________________________________________________________________________________ 10.How do Khmer people prepare the altar at night of New Year's Eve? ________________________________________________________________________________ 11.What do people do on the first New Year Day? ________________________________________________________________________________ 12.When do people cook rice and bring it to the temple? ________________________________________________________________________________ 13.When do they do Buddha bathing and monk-bathing ceremony? ________________________________________________________________________________ 14.What do the monks do after doing Buddha bathing and monk-bathing ceremony? VIII.. Complete each blank in the following passage about Vu Lan Festival with the correct linking word from the box. Some words may be used more than once. (There may be more than one possibility). and moreover

because therefore

when if

then first

Vu Lan Festival Vu Lan Festival takes place on 15th day of the seventh lunar month. It is also called "Xatoivongnhanâ&#x20AC;? festival (1) this is the day for the death's souls. Many people believe that on that day, (2) the gate of the hell opens, souls of the dead can come back to their home (3) gather with their family. (4) , Vietnamese people consider that it is also the occasion for family gatherings as well as expressing love (5) gratitude to ancestors and parents. (6) ,Vu Lan Festival is known as Mother's Day in Viet Nam. 84

(7) ,in the morning of that day, a lavish tray with various delicious dishes is set on the altar, and the householder will burn incense and invite ancestor to come back home and celebrate the festival with family. (8) at night the Vietnamese hold a ceremony of releasing lighted lanterns on the river, (9) Vietnamese people believe by doing that, their wishes for parents will come true. Pagoda are crowded during the festival day (10) Buddhists gather for the monkâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s lecture. Each Buddhist has a flower (usually rose) in front of their chest: red flower (11) their parents are living and white flower (12) their parents are dead. IX. Read the passage about Mid-Autumn Festival, and do the tasks that follow. Mid-Autumn Festival Mid-Autumn Festival is held on 15th day of the eighth lunar month to celebrate biggest full moon in the year. In Viet Nam, this festival is for children (1) children are center of all activities on that day. the festival is coming, the adults and the parents prepare many different foods -moon (2) cakes, candies, biscuits, jellies, and fruit. (3) , the children are given many nice lanterns star they can light the lanterns during the lanterns, flower lanterns and diverse funny masks, (4) Mid-Autumn night. (5) the autumn is the time of the beginning of the new school year, the adults and parents give gifts to the children. The festival takes place (6) people have had good crops. (7) , it is also the congratulation for the full harvest. Nowadays, (8) some of the traditional toys have been replaced by modern toys, the meaning of the festival has been kept and developed. It is certain that Mid-Autumn Festival is a good example of the traditional culture of the Vietnamese Task 1: Complete each blank in the passage with the correct linking word. (There may be more than one possibility.) Task 2: Read the passage again, and then answer the following questions. 9. When is Mid-Autumn Festival held? What is it for? ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 10. What do the adults and the parents do to prepare for the festival? ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 11. What are children given besides moon cakes? ________________________________________________________________________________ 12. What can children do with their lanterns? ________________________________________________________________________________ 13. Why is Mid-Autumn Festival also considered the congratulation for the full harvest? ________________________________________________________________________________ 14. What is the importance of this festival? X.Connect each pair of sentences, using the conjunction or conjunctive adverb given in brackets. 1.The establishment of the club of Xoan singing in PhuTho has brought new energy and strength. Villagers in these communes give great contribution to the development of the clubs. (while) ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 2.Valentine Day is not very popular in Viet Nam. People in big cities send gifts on that day. (yet) ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 3.Flower buds and blossoms are the symbols for new beginning. These two distinctive flowers are widely sold and purchased during Tet. (because) ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 4.Homes are often cleaned and decorated before New Year's Eve. The kitchen needs to be cleaned before the 23rd night of the last month. (and) ________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________ 5.Street vendors rush into the city center with peach trees on their bicycles. The streets look like moving pink forests. (when) ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ XI.Connect each pair of sentences, using the conjunction or conjunctive adverb given in brackets. 1. On New Yearâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; Eve, the Vietnamese put fruits on the altar. They also arrange watermelons, and traditional cakes such aschung cakes. (and) ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 2. Many people go to pagodas or churches on New Year's Day to pray for the coming year. Many others remain in their home in front of the altar to welcome the ancestors through prayer.(while) ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 3. ________________________________________________________________________________ Peo ple from Western countries do not follow ancestor worship. Ancestor worship is considered a type of religious practices in some Asian countries. (although) ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 4. ________________________________________________________________________________ Xoa n singing is still in the memory of folk artists in PhuThoProvince. They always try their best to hand down offspring the old style of singing in the activities of the clubs.(because) ________________________________________________________________________________

XII. Make sentences about King Hung Temple Festival, using the words and phrases given. You can add some words and make changes. King Hung Temple Festival 1. King Hung Temple Festival/ take place/ yearly/ King Hung Temple/ the 8th/ 11th day/ the third lunar month. ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 2. During the festival/ Vietnamese people/ go/ King Hung Temple/NghiaLinh Mountain, PhuTho Province/ take part/ this festival. ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 3. The festival/ feature/ many folk games/ bamboo swings/ rice cooking competitions/ lion dance/ human chess/ water puppet performance/ wrestling/ crossbow shooting, etc. ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 4. the 10th day/ a national ceremony/ held/ participation/ about 40 villages. ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 5. Governmental leaders/ will lead/ procession/ up/ Upper Temple. ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 6. There a ceremony/ offering incense/ five-fruit trays/ and specialties/chung cakes/day cakes/ which/ two traditional foods/ Vietnam. ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________ XIII. Make sentences about the Giong Festival, using the words and phrases given. You can add some words and make changes. l. The Giong Festival/ held/ the 6th/ the 12th/ the 4th lunar month/ several venues around Ha Noi. ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 2. The festival/ commemorate/ Saint Giong/ who/ defeat/ the An. ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 3.It/ also/ an opportunity/ hope for abundant harvests/ happy lives/ and express patriotism. ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 4.During/ festival/ villagers/ the statue bathing/ processionsbamboo flowers/ Soc Temple. ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 5. The festival/ provided/ many entertaining activities/ including/ folk games/ traditional singing performances. ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 6. The festival/ recognized/ UNESCO/ as an intangible cultural heritage/ mankind. ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ TEST 3 UNIT 5 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others. b. invader c. nation d. race 1. a. lantern 2. a. carnival b. command c. ceremony d. encourage 3. a. tradition b. question c. procession d. preservation 4. a. performed b. worshipped c. prayed d. offered b. crowd c. found d. court 5. a. sound II. Choose the word whose main stress pattern is placed differently. 1. a. confusion b. magician c. important d. otherwise 2. a. performance b. nevertheless c. however d. procession 3. a. preserve b. fortune c. ritual d. lantern 4. a. reunion b. bamboo c. festival d. display 5. a. participate b. politician c. communicate d. commemorate III. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence. 1. Tet is a best time for Vietnamese people paying respects _______ their ancestors. a. for b.to c.with d. on 2. Tran Temple Festival is held _______ the 15th day of the first lunar month. a. in b. for c. at d. on 3. Ghe Ngo Race is a religious ritual of the Khmer to _______ the Snake God Nagar. a. commemorate b. preserve c.command d. process 4. _______ Vietnam has been influenced by Buddhism for thousands of years, there areplenty of Buddhist pilgrimage sites. A.When b. Although c. If d. As 5. Originally, Tet was celebrated by farmers to thank the gods for the arrival of Spring. ______, through the years, Tet has turned into the official Vietnamese New Year. a. Otherwise b. Therefore c. However d. Moreover 6. _______ do you visit Huong Pagoda? - Every year. On the 5th day of the first lunar month. a. When b. How often c. How long d. What day 7. On the 13th day of the first lunar month, the visitors come to Lim Hill to watch _______ of “quan ho”. a. performances b. features c. ceremonies d. processions 8. Perfume Pagoda is famous not only for its scenic landscape _______. a. or also for its sacredness b. and for its sacredness as well 87

c. but also for its sacredness d. and yet for its sacredness 9. _______ graduate a semester early, I took three extra classes. a. Although I was determined to b. Because I was determined to c. If I was determined to d. While I was determined to 10. ‘I was wondering if you’d like to go to Da Lat Flower Festival’ ‘_______ When does it take place?’ a. Not bad! b. Are you sure? c. For what? d. Sure, I’d love to! IV. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences. 1. Mid-Autumn Festival not only recalls the family love, _________ is also a festival for both children and adults in Vietnam. a. and b. but c. yet d.therefore 2. Tran Temple Festival lasts from the 15th-20th of lunar August. _________, visitors all over the country eagerly go on a pilgrimage far prior to the day. a. Nevertheless b. Otherwise c. Therefore d. Moreover 3. _________ the main worship event is taking place at Hung Temple, 100 lanterns are released into the sky. a. Because b. Even though c. While d. If 4. Lim Festival is among the most impressive festivals, ceremonies _________ singing events. a. or b. but c. yet d. and 5. The navigation of the boat, called ghe ngo, requires great skills _________ it can easily be flipped. a. therefore b. because c.when d. although 6. _________ you consider yourself a culture enthusiast, Hue Arts Festival is a must. a. If b. Though c. Because d. As 7. The festival only lasted for three days; _________ they spent nearly a month preparing for it. a. when b. moreover c. otherwise d. however 8. In Quang Ninh, you can go to Yen Tu Mountain to attend the Yen Tu Festival, _________ you can visit Ha Long Bay. a. so b.yet c.or d.otherwise 9. _________ there are loads of festivals in Vietnam, Tet or Tet Nguyen Dan is the most important one. a. Since b.Although c.When d. As long as 10. Festival visitors can take part in cultural activities, such as visiting art galleries, historical places and parks. _________, they can taste exotic food and dishes. a. Moreover b.Therefore c.However d.Otherwise V. Complete the sentences with the correct form or tense of the verbs from the box. worship

preserve

cheer

offer

pray

commemorate

perform

float

1. Quan ho singing is _____________ in traditional festivals in Bac Ninh. 2. On Tet holiday, Vietnamese people _____________ their ancestors a five-fruit tray. 3. I enjoy going to Huong Pagoda and _____________ Buddha. 4. The book will be published in October to ________ the 100th anniversary ofMorris’s death. 5. The crowds are shouting and _____________ to encourage their teams. 6. We should _____________ our tradition and culture for future generations. 7. Lotus lanterns are _____________ on the small river in the old town. 8. On the first day of the New Year, we visit the temples ____________ for goodfortune and health. VI. State whether the following sentences are simple, complex or compound. 1. The Elephant Racing Festival is the biggest cultural festival in Tay Nguyen. 2. You can either choose to ride in a cable car up to the pagoda or walk up. 3. We first learned to sing quan ho when we were between 15 and 17. 4. The oarsmen are encouraged by the sounds of drums and the cheering crowds while they are racing. 5. Maya doesn’t follow the procession, but she supports the dancing team. 6. Hundreds of thousands of people gather on the two banks of the river to watch the Ngo junk race. 7. Ngo junk race is a community sports which enhance unity among Khmer people from villages. 8. Even though many people come to Buon Don to ride the elephants, a lot of them fail to witness the Elephant Racing Festival. 88

9. Tet is the most important festival in Vietnam; therefore, most Vietnamese return home for Tet. 10. They played together as a team very well; however, they didn’t win the race. 11. After taking a boat to the mountain, we can take a cable car up. 12. It was an exciting festival, so I felt very lucky to participate in it. 13. Last year, I went to Huong Pagoda with my family and friends. VII. Complete each sentence with and, but, so, or, moreover, however, therefore, or otherwise. 1. You must do your homework; ____________, you might get a bad grade. 2. He’s seventy-two, ____________ he still swims, runs and plays football regularly. 3. John studied hard for the math exam; ____________ he got an A+. 4. Do you want a cup of tea, ____________ would you prefer coffee? 5. Smoking gives you bad breath. ____________, it is harmful to your health. 6. There are many learning English websites; ____________, some of them are not free. 7. I like to read, ____________ my grammar is always on-point. 8. I hope you are feeling better ____________ will be back at college soon. 9. Engineering is an interesting career. ____________, you have to be good at maths. 10. To be a doctor you have to study biology, ____________ chemistry is also important. Vll. Complete each sentence with an appropriate word. The first letter of each word is given. 1. At Tet, Vietnamese people usually d___________ their homes with yellow apricotblossoms or peach blossoms. 2. Vietnamese believe that the colour of red and yellow will bring good f ____________. 3. We have the custom of lighting the candles and burning i____________ before prayingin front of the altar. 4. His grandmother’s funeral was a private c____________ attended only by the family. 5. Streets lead to Huong pagoda are very c____________ during its festival time. 6. On the first day of Tet, Vietnamese people often visit a pagoda to p____________ forgood luck and happiness. 7. Buddhist o____________ include fruit, flowers, incense and candles. 8. The Giong Festival is held to commemorate Saint Giong who d__________ theAn invaders. VIII. Supply the correct tense or form of the verbs in brackets. 1. Hung King Temple Festival ____________(become) one of the greatest nationalfestivals in Viet Nam for a long time. 2. The Saint Giong Festival ____________(hold) many years ago but it officially ____________(become) a national festival in the 11th century. 3. While children ____________(wait) for the moon to rise, they sing, dance andlisten to the story of Hang Nga and Cuoi. 4. The local authority ___________(arrange) a meeting on promotion of the festivallast Friday. 5. Our school ____________(take) part in the festival since 2008. 6. While we ____________(play) some folk games at the festival, it started to rain heavily. 7. Each year, thousands of tourists ____________(come) to visit Lim Festival and enjoythat Intangible Cultural Heritage. 8. Traditionally, Quan ho songs ___________(perform) by both men and womenon the boats and in the Lim Pagoda. 9. Duong recommended Peter ____________(attend) the Hue Festival. 10. Before Tet, women are very busy ____________(prepare) traditional foods. IX. Complete each sentence with an appropriate preposition. 1. The Lim Festival takes place every year _________ the 13th day of the first lunar month. 2. Elephant Race Festival is held _________ Don Village, Dak Lak Province. 3. Fishermen pray _________ the good fortune at Whale Festival. 4. _________ the Mid-Autumn Festival, children carry beautiful lanterns. 5. They decorate their homes _________kumquat trees and peach branches. 6. The Hung King Temple Festival has become a public holiday _________ 2007. 7. The Buddhist Festival lasts _________ three months from the first to the third lunar month. 8. Foreigners are always keen ________ watching Vietnamese families prepare ________ Tet. 9. At the Kate festival, Cham people take part _________ a procession to the nearby temple.

10. The Lunar New Year typically takes place _________ late January or early February X. Read the text carefully, then choose the correct answers. Elephant Racing Festival, one of the biggest festivals in Tay Nguyen, is held (1)________ in the third lunar month. As preparation for the festival, villagers (2)________ their elephants with a wide range of food apart from grass, including corns, sugar canes, sweet potatoes, papayas, and bananas. Also, in order to preserve their strength, the elephants take a rest (3)________ hard work. On the day of the event, elephants from several villages (4)________ at Don Village. Each time, ten elephants will run at the same time for about one or two kilometers. The competition is guided by the sound of tu va, a kind of horn. The first elephant (5)________ reaches the appointed destination will receive a laurel wreath as a sign of victory, and it will enjoy the achievement excitedly with sugar canes and bananas from surrounding people. (6)________ finishing the race at Don Village, the elephants move to Serepok River for competition – swimming. They also participate in games (7)________ football and tug of war. At the end of the festive day, all festival goers mass at Don Village’s community house for feasting, drinking stem wine, and dancing in a jubilant (8)________ with the boisterous sound of gongs and drums. 1. a. mostly b. constantly c. monthly d. annually 2. a. poach b. herd c. feed d. train 3. a. without b. with c. of d. from 4. a. come b. drive c. round d. gather 5. a. who b. what c. which d. whose 6. a. Although b. After c. While d. However 7. a. alike b. like c. likely d. liking 8. a. atmosphere b. experience c. tradition d. feature XI. Read the text carefully, then choose the correct answers. Tran Temple Festival, one of the largest annual spring festivals in Vietnam, is held on the 14th night and 15th day of the first lunar month at the national historical complex of the Tran Kings’ shrines and tombs in Tien Duc Commune, Hung Ha District, Nam Dinh City. It usually begins with an incense-offering rite at the kings’ tombs and a ritual for the opening of the gates of Den Thanh (Thanh Temple), Den Mau (Mother Temple) and the Tran Kings’ shrines. They are followed by a ‘water procession’, in which people will carry nine ornate palanquins with memorial plaques of the Kings of the Tran Dynasty and members of their royal families. A series of folk games are also organized during the festival, such as a rice-cooking challenge, clay firecrackers, chung cake wrapping and tug of war, alongside traditional performances and sport games including lion dances, dragon dances, cheo and chau van singing, human chess, wrestling and martial arts. The Tran Temple Festival was recognized as a national intangible heritage in 2014. The historical complex of the Tran Kings’ shrines and tombs received special national relic status last year. - ornate (adj): được sơn son thiếp vàng - palanquin (n): kiệu rước (lễ hội) 1. How often is the Tran Temple Festival held? a. every month b. every year c. every two years d. twice a year 2. The Tran Temple Festival usually begins with ________. a. formal ceremonies b. a water procession c. prayers of thanks d. incense offerings to the gods 3. The word ‘they’ in the passage refers to ________. a. temples b. offerings c. shrines d. rituals 4. What does ‘plaque’ mean? a. a large picture printed on paper b.a wide piece of cloth with a message on it c.a small piece of paper with information on it d.a flat piece of metal, wood or stone with writing on it 5. Which of the followings is not organized in the festival? a. rice cooking b. tug of war c. boat race d. human chess 5. Based on the information in the text, which statement is false? a.The Tran Temple Festival aims to honour the Tran Dynasty. b.The seal opening ceremony takes place on the 14th night.

c.The main rituals are preceded by a water procession. d.Traditional cheo and chau van singing is performed in the festival. 7, Which of the followings is not mentioned in the text? a.The Tran Dynasty is the most brilliant reign in Vietnamese history. b.Tran Temple Festival was recognized as a national intangible heritage. c. Nine ornate palanquins are carried in the water procession. d.There are plenty of activities to keep festival goers entertained. XII. Read the text carefully, then do the tasks. Ok Om Bok is a traditional festival of Khmer people in Mekong Delta. Ok Om Bok Festival takes place on the Full Moon day of the tenth month in Vietnamese Lunar Calendar, aiming at worshipping the Moon. At the night of the Full Moon day, Khmer people set up a table of offerings; new sticky rice, yam, coconuts, bananas, sweeties, etc and bow their head to show their thanks to the Moon. After that, there is a colorful and sparkling lanterns ceremony on Ba Om Lake. Khmer people not only drop these lanterns on the lake but also fly them to the sky. Dozens of great lantern lighten the night sky in bustling music and the joy of Khmer people. Khmer people believe that these lanterns will bring bad luck and risk far away. The most attractive and exciting activity of Ok Om Bok Festival is Ngo race (a special kind of boat of Khmer people in shape of Nagar snake). Ngo race is a traditional sport of Khmer in Ok Om Bok Festival. Ngo is a long boat with 25 - 30 meters in length and 1 - 1.4 meter in width. There are about 40 to 60 boatmen in every “Ngo” with a leader at the top to guide the whole team. Before the race, people gather along the riverbanks making an exciting atmosphere. During the race, the boisterous sound of drum, trumpet, cheers and applause urge boatmen row as fast as possible to the end. Overall, Ok Om Bok is an important festival in Khmer people’s life. Ok Om Bok Festival has sacred meaning in spiritual life of these people, making a cultural characteristic of this ethnic community. A. Decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F). 1. Ok Om Bok Festival is celebrated in October in the Western Calendar. 2. At the night of the festival, Khmer people drop lanterns on the lake and fly lanterns to the sky. 3. Ngo is a snake-shaped boat of Khmer people. 4. Ngo boat race takes place right after Ok Om Bok Festival. 5. The boatmen are encouraged by the people gathering along the riverbanks. 6. Ok Om Bok Festival promote traditional cultural identity of Khmer community. B. Answer the questions. 1. When does Ok Om Bok Festival take place? _____________________________________________________________ 2. What is Ok Om Bok Festival celebrated for? _____________________________________________________________ 3. Where do Khmer people float their lanterns? _____________________________________________________________ 4. How long is a Ngo boat? _____________________________________________________________ 5. How many boatmen are there in every Ngo boat? _____________________________________________________________ 6. Why is Ok Om Bok an important festival in Khmer people’s life? _____________________________________________________________ XIII. Rewrite the sentences without changing their meaning. Use the words in brackets. 1. Although Hue is far from Hanoi, Peter often travels to Hanoi by motorbike. (but) Hue __________________________________________________________________ 2. Christian went to Soc Trang to join Ok Om Bok Festival. (because) Christian ______________________________________________________________ 3. Sebastien is a French, but he plays Vietnamese folk games well. (although) Although ______________________________________________________________ 4. He has to join the festival in order to play Vietnamese folk games. (so) He ___________________________________________________________________ 5. Although the weather was terrible we had a good time. (spite) We __________________________________________________________________ 91

6. So that Susan would be fit for the skiing, she went to the gym three times a week. (order) Susan ________________________________________________________________ 7. My family went to Huong Pagoda Festival two months ago. (since) It ____________________________________________________________________ 8. You won’t get in to see the show if you don’t have reserved seats. (unless) You __________________________________________________________________ 9. Brian was really interested in Vietnamese cultural and spiritual events. (interest) Brian _________________________________________________________________ 10. If you don’t start early, you will get stuck in the traffic. (otherwise) You __________________________________________________________________ XIV. Combine each pair of sentences using the conjunction in brackets. 1. The world is getting warmer. Polar bears are in danger of becoming extinct. (because) ______________________________________________________________________ 2. There weren’t enough students. They closed the village school. (as) ______________________________________________________________________ 3. I really enjoyed the concert. The music was too loud. (although) ______________________________________________________________________ 4. He got a creampie smashed in his face. Everyone laughed. (when) ______________________________________________________________________ 5. Paul was walking to the bus stop. He found somebody’s wallet on the ground. (while) ______________________________________________________________________ 6. Jackie will take out the trash. She is done with her chores. (after) ______________________________________________________________________ 7. You study for the test. You will do much better. (if) ______________________________________________________________________ 8. Rex practiced his guitar. He could play the song perfectly. (until) ______________________________________________________________________ 9. We could get back to shore. It started to rain hard. (before) ______________________________________________________________________ 10. I saw him. He was always carrying a plastic shopping bag. (whenever) ______________________________________________________________________ XV.Make questions for the underlined words. 1. _________________________________________________________________________ The Elephant Race Festival is usually held in Don Village or in forests near the Sevepoi River. 2. _________________________________________________________________________ Thirteen elephants joined the elephant race on March 12 in Lak District. 3. _________________________________________________________________________ The Lim festival takes place on the 13th day of the first lunar month. 4. _________________________________________________________________________ The spring festival of Bai Dinh Pagoda lasts for three months. 5. _________________________________________________________________________ Saint Giong Festival was recognized by UNESCO as world intangible cultural heritage. 6. _________________________________________________________________________ Vu Lan Festival is so-called “Xa toi vong nhan” festival because this is the day for the death’s souls. 7. _________________________________________________________________________ The Kate Festival is celebrated by the Cham ethnic group. 8. _________________________________________________________________________ The Perfume Pagoda is about 70 kilometers away from Hanoi. 9. _________________________________________________________________________ Tran Temple Festival is held to commemorate the Kings of the Tran dynasty. 10. _________________________________________________________________________ To celebrate the Mid-Autumn Festival, children commonly join street parades, carrying lanterns and wearing masks. UNIT 6: FOLK TALES 92

A. VOCABULARY 1. brave (adj) /breɪv/: dũng cảm, gan dạ 2. Buddha (n) /ˈbʊdə/: Bụt, Đức phật 3. cruel (adj) /ˈkruːəl/:độc ác 4. cunning (adj) /ˈkʌnɪŋ/: xảo quyệt, gian xảo 5. dragon (n) /ˈdræɡən/: con rồng 6. emperor (n) /ˈempərə(r)/: hoàng đế 7. evil (adj) /ˈiːvl/: xấu xa về mặt đạo đức 8. fable (n) /ˈfeɪbl/: truyện ngụ ngôn 9. fairy (n) /ˈfeəri/: tiên, nàng tiên 10. fairy tale (n) /ˈfeəri teɪl/: truyện thần tiên, truyện cổ tích 11. folk tale (n) /fəʊk teɪl/: truyện dân gian 12. fox (n) /fɒks/: con cáo 13. generous (adj) /ˈdʒenərəs/: hào phóng, rộng rãi 14. giant (n) /ˈdʒaɪənt/: người khổng lồ 15. glitch (n) /ɡlɪtʃ/: mụ phù thủy 16. hare (n) /heə(r)/: con thỏ 17. knight (n) /naɪt/: hiệp sĩ 18. legend (n)/ ˈledʒənd/: truyền thuyết 19. lion (n) /ˈlaɪən/: con sư tử 20. mean (adj) /miːn/: keo kiệt, bủn xỉn 21. ogre (n) /ˈəʊɡə(r)/: quỷ ăn thịt người, yêu tinh 22. princess (n) /ˌprɪnˈses/: công chúa 23. tortoise (n) /ˈtɔːtəs/: con rùa 24. wicked (adj) /ˈwɪkɪd/: xấu xa, độc ác 25. wolf (n) /wʊlf/: con chó sói 26. woodcutter (n) /ˈwʊdkʌtə(r)/: tiều phu, người đốn củi B. GRAMMAR REVIEW I. Past simple 1. Form: Positive: S + V-ed / 2 Negative: S + didn’t + V (bare-inf) Questions: Did (not) + S + V(bare-inf)...? ̵ > Yes, S +did. / No, S + didn’t. 2. Use: Thì quá khứ thường được dùng để chỉ sự vật, hiện tượng đã xảy ra và đã kết thúc tại một thời điểm cụ thể trong quá khứ. 3. Example: Last year I worked at the cinema, studied for my degree and wrote a column for the local newspaper. II. Past continuous: 1. Form: Positive: S + was / were + V-ing Negative: S + wasn’t / weren’t + V-ing Questions: Was / Were (not) + S + V-ing ...? ̵ > Yes, S +was/ were. / No, S + wasn’t/ weren’t. 2. Use: Thì quá khứ tiếp diễn được dùng để chỉ sự vật, hiện tượng đã xảy ra ở một thời điểm cụ thể trong quá khứ hoặc một khoảng thời gian không xác định trong quá khứ. Example: - It happened at five in the afternoon while he was watching the news on TV. - He was doing his homework in his bedroom when the burglar came into the house 93

TEST 1 UNIT 6 I. Choose the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. B. architect C. change D. chemical 1. A. school 2. A. buffalo B. minority C. gold D. close 3. A. end B. pencil C. open D. bench 4. A. wanted B. washed C. watched D. stopped 5. A. remote B. explore C. relax D. diverse II. Choose the words that have the different stress from the others. 1. A. reflect B. fable C. spindle D. legend 2. A. ancestor B. origin C. stepmother D. continue 3. A. capture B. granny C. command D. swallow 4. A. rescue B. religion C. servant D. tortoise 5. A. emperor B. woodcutter C. announce D. suddenly III. Complete the following sentences with prepositions of time: at, on, in if necessary. 1. I don’t like going out alone night 2. I’m afraid I can’t come to your birthday party Sunday. the weekend? 3. What do you usually do 4. Can you play football with us next Sunday? last night. 5. We went to bed late 6. They are leaving for Hue next Friday. this evening? 7. Will you be at home 8. I always feel relaxed the evening. last summer. 9. We went to Nha Trang 10. I won’t be out so long. I’ll be back ten minutes. IV. Choose the correct answers. 1. Alice saw/ was seeing the accident when she was catching the bus. 2. What were you doing/ did you do when I called? 3. I didn’t visit/ weren’t visiting my friends last summer holiday. 4. It rained/ was raining heavily last July. 5. While people were talking to each other, he read/ was reading his book. 6. My sister was eating/ ate hamburgers every weekend last month. 7. While we were running/ run in the park, Mary fell over. 8. Did you find/ Were you finding your keys yesterday? 9. Who was she dancing/ did she dance with at the party last night? 10. They were watching/ watched football on TV all day. V. Find the mistakes. 1. I was play football when she called me. ................................................................................................. 2. Was you study Math at 5 p.m. yesterday? ................................................................................................. 3. What was she do while her mother was making lunch? ................................................................................................. 4. Where did you went last Sunday? ................................................................................................. 5. They weren’t sleep during the meeting last Monday. ................................................................................................. 6. He got up early and have breakfast with his family yesterday morning. ................................................................................................. 7. She didn’t broke the flower vase. Tom did. ................................................................................................. 8. Last week my friend and I go to the beach by bus. ................................................................................................. 9. While I am listening to music, I heard the doorbell. ................................................................................................. 10. Peter turn on the TV, but nothing happened. 94

................................................................................................. VI. Put the verb in correct tense or form. 1. Trung’s father (teach) him how (ride) a bicycle when he (be) twelve years old. 2. How your brother (go) to work everyday? - He usually (drive). 3. We (go) to Ha Long Bay this weekend. 4. You (use) to play so much when you (live) in the countryside? 5. Yesterday Hoang (spend) two hours (repair) his computer set. VII. Put the correct verb form of the past tenses. In my last holiday, I went to Hawaii. When I (go) 1 ........................ to the beach for the first time, something wonderful happened. I (swim) 2 ........................ in the sea while my mother was sleeping in the sun. My brother was building a castle and my father (drink) 3 ........................ some water. Suddenly I (see) 4 ........................ a boy on the beach. His eyes were blue like the water in the sea and his hair (be) 5 ........................ beautiful black. He was very tall and thin and his face was brown. My heart (beat) 6 ........................ fast. I (ask) 7 ........................ him for his name with a shy voice. He (tell) 8 ........................ me that his name was John. He (stay) 9 ........................ with me the whole afternoon. In the evening, we met again. We ate pizza in a restaurant. The following days we (have) 10 ........................ a lot of fun together. At the end of my holidays when I left Hawaii I said good-bye to John. We had tears in our eyes. He wrote to me a letter very soon and I answered him. VIII. Read the following passage, answer/ complete the questions/ statements below it. Once, there was a boy named Boly. He lived with his aged grandmother in Kanchi Village. His grandmother always woke up very early in the morning and made little buns and cakes. She sold them in the market place. With the money she earned, she sent Boly to school. Boly was a good boy. He was an orphan. He loved his grandmother a lot. After school, he always went home quickly. Then, he would have his lunch and do his homework. In the evenings, Boly would go round the village selling the cakes his grandmother made. Boly and his grandmother lived quite happily. One day, Boly’s grandmother fell ill. She could not make any more cakes. Boly now had to look for work. He went from house to house doing odd jobs. It was in one of these houses that a kind gentleman asked Boly why he was working at such a tender age. After listening to Boly’s story, the man said that he wanted to adopt Boly. He was willing to take care of Boly’s grandmother too. From then on, Boly and his grandmother led a very happy life. 1. The phrases of words “very old” is similar to the word ......................... in the text. 2. Boly was living with his grandmother because ........................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................... 3. Boly’s grandmother could afford to send him to school by ..................................................... 4. After school, Boly would immediately .................................................................................... 5. Boly had to look for work because .......................................................................................... IX. Answer the following questions, using the suggested words or phrases in brackets. Example: Where did the children go after the lesson? (the park) They went to the park after the lessons. 1. When did you begin learning English? (three years ago) => ................................................................................................. 2. How many exercises did you do last night? (four exercises) => ................................................................................................. 3. What time did the man telephone his wife? (at two o’clock) => ................................................................................................. 4. How many years was Mr. Green in Viet Nam? (for ten years) => ................................................................................................. 5. What time did you get up this morning? (half past five) => ................................................................................................. 6. What did you have for breakfast this morning? (bread and omelets) => ................................................................................................. 7. What time did you leave home? (six o’clock) => ................................................................................................. 95

8. How did you go to school this morning? (by bicycle) => ................................................................................................. 9. What did you do after your homework last night? (watch television) => ................................................................................................. 10. What time did you go to bed last night? (at ten o’clock) => ................................................................................................. X. Rewrite the sentences, using “the past continuous” and “while” or “when”. 1. We were having dinner and they were listening to the radio. We were .................................................................................. 2. She was sleeping and the fire started. The fire .................................................................................... 3. It began to rain and what were you doing? What ........................................................................................ 4. The farmer started whistling and he was ploughing the field. When ....................................................................................... 5. You came and what were they doing? What ........................................................................................ 6. She came and what was happening? What was ................................................................................. 7. She was reading a book and the man came in. The man.................................................................................... 8. They were working in the field and the volcano erupted. The volcano ............................................................................. 9. The ship was leaving the harbor and the lava hit the town. The lava ................................................................................... 10. The headmaster was going to his car and someone hit him on the head. Someone hit the headmaster ..................................................... TEST 2 (UNIT 6) I.Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences. 1.The toad was very because he tried to find way to the heaven to sue God.. A.brave B.kind C.generous D.mean 2.The King was very to allow his daughter, Tien Dung, to travel to the many wonderful places of the kingdom. A.wise B.mean C.kind D.wicked 3.The Peacock was well known to be a/an animal, so he just applied black colour to the Crow's feathers. A.hard-working B.lazy C.ugly D.clever 4.The wife of the fisherman was very when she demanded for bigger and bigger things. A.kind B.generous C.greedy D.fierce 5.Ali Baba was very when he also used the words "Open Sesame!" to enter cave of treasures. A.wise B.cunning C.kind D.evil 6.The servant was very to mark other houses with white chalk so that the thieves couldn't find Ali Baba's house. A.mean B.wicked C.kind D.Clever II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D complete the sentences. when he let Ly Thong and his mother go back to their hometown. 1. ThachSanh was very A. selfish B. mean C. generous D. brave 2.The ogre was so , and was a to catch ThachSanh with its sharp claws. A. fierce B. mean C. clever D. ugly 3. ThachSanh was so that he could push back the troops with his magical rice pot. A. kind B. clever C. hard-working D. fast 4. An Tiem was very to move to a deserted island. A. brave B. honest C. kind D. generous 5. Khoai was very , but his landowner was . 96

A. lazy - cunning B. clever - brave C.honest - wise D. honest - cunning 6. Tam was a very girl who had to work all day. A. mean B. generous C. hard-working D. lazy 7.Cam was very when she killed the nightingale, cooked it and threw the feathers in the Imperial Garden. A. wicked B. ugly C. honest D. mean 8. LuuBinh was very to invite Duong Le to come and live with him. A. selfish B. kind C. mean D. brave III.Put the verbs in brackets into the Past Simple or Past Continuous tense. 1. Last night I (read) when suddenly I (hear) a shout. 2. The postman (come) while while I (have) lunch. 3. When we (go) out, it (rain). TV when I (phone) you? 4. (you/ watch) 5. We (meet) Ann at the party yesterday, she (wear) a lovely white dress. 6. The boys (break) the window while they (play) football when I (arrive) . 7. I was home late, but my friends (wait) 8.He said that he (not drive) fast when the accident (happen) . off the ladder while he (paint) the ceiling. 9.Tom (fall) 10.What (you/do) at this time yesterday? IV.Put the verbs into the correct form, the Past Continuous or Simple Past. 1. When I last (see) them, they (try) to find a new flat near the office. along the street when l suddenly (feel) something hit me in the 2. I (walk) back. 3. When we (drive) down the hill, a strange object (appear) in the sky. when the accident (happen) ? 4. How fast (she/drive) 5. My mother (wait) for me when I (come) home. 6.Mrs. Smith (invite) Mrs. Quyen to have dinner while Mrs. Quyen(visit) the USA. 7. I (not want) to go with him because I (wait) for a phone call. while Tom (watch) TV. 8. The doorbell (ring) 9. It suddenly (begin) to rain while Linda (sit) in the garden. 10. The lights (go) out while we (have) dinner. V. Put the verbs in brackets into the Past Simple or Past Progressive tense. ,we (water) the plants and 1. When my uncle (come) flowers in the garden. 2. Thu (talk) to her friend, Hoa, on the phone at 8 o'clock last night. 3. Lan (practise) the piano while her sister (read) comics at 7 o'clock last night. 4.The monkeys (climb) up the trees when we (visit) the zoo yesterday morning. 5. Ba (talk) with his classmate when the principal (enter) their classroom. 6. Last night I (make) a cake when the lights (go) out. 7. While I (cross) the street,I (step) on a banana skin and (fall) heavily. to rain when I (plant) some flowers in the garden. 8.It (begin) 9.When I (arrive) , the teacher (write) on the blackboard. 10. When they (walk) down the stairs, they (hear) a strange noise. VI. Complete the sentences with verbs in brackets in the past continuous. Last Saturday, we were very busy. In the morning, ... my homework 1. I (do) 2. my parents (shop) . 3. my sister (chat) to her friends online. 4. my grandparents (drive) to our house. At two o'clock in the afternoon, ...

5. I (make) tea for everyone. dinner. 6. my sister and my mum (cook) 7. my grandmother (sleep) in front of the TV. At five o'clock in the afternoon, … 8. we (have) a snack. At six o'clock in the evening, … 9. my parents and my grandmother (drink) tea. 10. my grandfather (try) to send an e-mail on my computer. VII. Read this fable, and choose the correct answer A, B, C or D for each gap. Wisdom A farmer was ploughing his field. Sometimes, he shouted at and beat the buffalo that was (1) the plough. A tiger happened to stroll along the edge of the field. do you let this weak man beat you?”, he asked. "Buffalo, you are so big. (2) The buffalo answered, "The man is small (3) his wisdom is big.” The tiger did not understand what wisdom was (4) he shouted at the man. "Hey you, man, what is wisdom? Let me see it." "Wisdom? Oh, my wisdom (5) at home”, replied the man, looking at the tiger's teeth and claws. “Go home (6) get it. Bring it here so that l can see it”, the tiger ordered. "Oh, no! I am afraid that you will eat my buffalo (7) I am gone. (8) youagree to be tied with rope. I will run home and fetch my wisdom.” The tiger agreed. (9) fastening the tiger, the farmed beat its back. “(10) is my wisdom. This is my wisdom", he explained. 1.A.pull B.pulling C.pulled D.to pull 2.A.What B.How C.When D.Why 3.A.and B.but C.so D.or 4.A.and B.but C.although D.so 5.A.is B.are C.was D.were 6.A.but B.and C.so D.yet 7.A.why B.while C.although D.if 8.A.While B.Because C.Although D.If 9.A.Before B.After C.Because D. But 10.A.Here B.There C.She D.That VIII.Read the following passage, and then answer the questions. Once upon a time, there was a girl called Cinderella who did all the work in the kitchen while her lazy sisters did nothing. One night her sisters went to a ball at the palace. Cinderella was left at home, feeling very sad. After a time her fairy godmother appeared and told Cinderella that she could go to the ball, but she had to return home by midnight. So she went to the ball in a beautiful dress and a wonderful coach. She danced with the prince, but at midnight she ran back home, leaving one of her shoes on the dance floor. The prince wanted to see her again and went to every house in the capital until he found that the shoe was the right size for Cinderella. The prince and Cinderella were married and lived happily ever after. 1. Where did Cinderella's sisters go one night? __________________________________________________________________________________ 2. How was Cinderella when she was left at home? __________________________________________________________________________________ 3. Who appeared and helped Cinderella? __________________________________________________________________________________ 4. What did Cinderella do at the ball __________________________________________________________________________________ 5. What was the end of the story? _______________________________________________________ IX. Read this legend, and choose the correct answer A, B, C or D for each gap. Lac Long Quan and Au Co (Origins of the Vietnamese) Once upon (1) ,in the land called Lac Viet, Lac Long Quan, the dragon king of the ocean, lived (2) and sometimes turned to the land to help people fight against demons, (3) them to grow rice and cut wood for building houses.

Lac Long Quan(4)______ Au Co - the daughter of Agriculture Saint. The couple livedin harmony in a palace. Later, Au Co gave birth to a one-hundred-egg bag, hatching to 100 sons. One day, Lac Long Quan (5) that he couldn’t live (6)_______ the land all the time. He took so 50 of their sons settle down into the sea. The rest (7)___--- Au Co to go up to the mountain. Although the separated, they remembered to helpand protect (8) in need. The oldest son, who followed the mother with 49 brother, (9) King Hung. He set up his capital in PhongChau and gave his country the name Van Lang. From the story, the Vietnamese (10) always proud of the noble origin: dragon’s children and fairy’s grandchildren. 1.A.time B.a time C.the time D.times 2.A.on water B.on the water C.under water D.under the water 3.A.teach B.ask C.learn D.make 4.A.got married withB.got married C.married D.married with 5.A.was believed B.was thought C.considering D.felt 6.A.at B.on C.in D.under 7.A.follow B.following C.followed D.were followed 8.A.other B.each other C.another D.others 9.A.become B.becoming C.was becoming D.became 10.A.is B.are C.was D.were TEST 3 UNIT 6 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others. 1. a. fable b. brave c. dragon d. tale 2. a. scream b. read c. reach d. hear 3. a. walked b. filled c. swallowed d. screamed b. witch c. knight d. kind 4. a. giant 5. a. eyes b. ogres c. stories d. cakes II. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence. 1. The tale is about a prince who is turned _________ a frog by his wicked stepmother. a.to b. into c. out d. over 2. The hare always boasted _________ how fast he could run. a. at b. for c. on d. about 3. A _________ is a story from ancient times about famous people and events that may ormay not be true. a. legend b. folktale c. fable d. fairytale 4. In many cultures, a fox is the symbol for a _________ person. a. brave b. fierce c. cunning d. kind 5. Vanessa is interested in reading Vietnamese folktales _________ she can’t readVietnamese well. a.although b.because c.while d.whereas 6. What a _________ man he is! There’s nothing he wouldn’t do for us. a. mean b. generous c. gruel d. greedy 7. Helen and I _________ together when the accident happened. a. talked b. have talked c. was talking d. were talking 8. Tired of hearing the hare’s boast, the tortoise _________ him to a race. a. urged b. pushed c. challenged d. suggested 9. Sleeping Beauty was under a _________ when the prince found her. a. spell b. swear c. cloud d. wave 10. _________ young Ella finds herself at the mercy of her cruel stepmother and stepsisters. a.Despite her father unexpectedly dies, b.After her father unexpectedly dies, c.When her father unexpectedly dies, III. Match each word with its definition. 1. emperor a. a woman who has magic powers, especially to do evil things 2. knight b. a man who rules an empire 3. giant c. a person whose job is cutting down trees 4. fairy d. a man of high social rank who had a duty to fight for his king 99

5. ogre e. a very large strong person 6. servant f. a creature like a small person with wings who has magic powers 7. witch g. a person who works in another person’s house 8. woodcutter h. a large, cruel, and frightening person who eats people IV. Complete the sentences with the correct adjectives from the box. brave

cruel

cunning

evil

fierce

mean

wicked

generous

greedy

cheerful

1. In the story, the ___________ fox outwits the hunters. 2. Kama was a _________ king. Every morning, he gave to the poor a hundredpounds of gold. 3. Heroes are never perfect, but they are ___________. 4. His lively sense of humour helps to keep the meeting very ___________. 5. The elder brother was very _______. He filled a very large bag and all his pocketswith gold. 6. Cinderella’s stepmother is very ___________ to her. 7. The ___________ fairy bewitched the princess and made her fall into a long sleep. 8. The Queen was an ___________ woman. She offered the poisoned apple to Snow White. 9. Everyone in the village was frightened of the ___________ dragon. 10. He was _________ to those who worked for him and generous to those who he hardly knew. V. Put the words into correct columns. dancer, considerate, beast, kind, fairy, brave, greedy, knight, mean, dancer, cheerful, cruel, witch, fierce, dragon, determined, woodcutter, prince, emperor, ogre, clever, wolf, princess, eagle, wise, tortoise, cunning, fox, loyal, thoughtful, honest

Characters ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________

Personality ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________

VI. Complete the sentences with the past simple form of the verbs in the box. turn

travel

tell

enjoy

know

ring

play

cry

teach

visit

study

really __________ the concert last night. It was great! 2. We __________ tennis yesterday because it was raining. 3. Last summer my friend and I __________ around the south of France. 4. __________ you __________ at the end of the film? I thought it was really sad. 5. He __________ hard for the exam, so he failed. 6. Where __________ he __________ before he came here? 7. My PC was making a strange noise so I __________ it off. 8. Our teacher __________ us a very interesting legend two days ago. 9. They __________ each other very well when they were kids. 10. She __________ the job because the salary was too low. 11. __________ your parents __________ the Acropolis when they were in Greece? 12. I was playing a computer game when the doorbell __________. VII. Use the prompts and the past continuous tense to write sentences. 1. I/ play/ computer games/ all day yesterday ___________________________________________________________________ 2. your friends/ wait/ for you/ all that time? ___________________________________________________________________ 3. Sid/ not clean/ his room/ at 8p.m last night ___________________________________________________________________ 4. We/ have/ dinner/ when Tim arrived ___________________________________________________________________ 5. Sarah and Luke / not surf/ the Internet/ at that time 100

___________________________________________________________________ 6. What/ Jack/ do/ while/ you/ cook/ dinner? ___________________________________________________________________ 7. This time last week/ my family/ visit/ my grandmother ___________________________________________________________________ 8. It/ not snow/ when I left ___________________________________________________________________ 9. you/ sleep/ when I phoned you last night? ___________________________________________________________________ 10. While/ the children/ talk/ the teacher came into class ___________________________________________________________________ VIII. Complete the sentences with the past continuous form of the verbs in brackets. 1. Sam _____________(play) his guitar at half past seven last night 2. ________ you ________(drive) to work when the accident happened? 3. It _____________(rain) on Monday so we didn’t play football. 4. At 6 o’clock on Saturday morning we _____________(travel) to the airport. 5. I _____________(not listen) to my teacher when he asked a question. 6. In 1986 my father _____________(live) in Paris. That’s where he met my mother. 7. What _________ they ________(do) when you arrived? 8. Greg _____________(not study) for the test when we went to his place. 9. ______ Caroline _________(ski) when she broke her leg? 10. My parents _____________(not sleep) when I came home last night. IX. Complete these sentences by putting the verbs into the past simple or past continuous. 1. Last week we _____________(drive) through the Alps into Switzerland. 2. At 8p.m yesterday, we _____________(watch) a film. 3. _____________(you/ see) the football match yesterday? 4. James broke his arm when he _____________(play) rugby. 5. Kylie _____________(make) her first film when she was 21. 6. Mrs Jones _____________(not know) how to open the attachment in her email. 7. What _____________(your father/ do) when the alarm sounded? 8. When we _____________(leave) school yesterday, it was pouring with rain. 9. They _____________(walk) through the forest when the storm started. 10. I _____________(not queue) for the bus when the accident happened. X. Choose the correct option. 1. He joined / was joining the company 25 years ago and he still works for us. 2. At this time last week, we lay / were lying on a beach in the sun. 3. What did they do / were they doing at 11pm last night - it was really noisy? 4. When I walked / was walking into the class, the teacher talked / was talking about the new course. 5. My parents lived / were living in Berlin for ten years. They lived / were living that when the Berlin wall came down in 1999. 6. How many pictures didyou take / were you taking while you travelled / were travelling around Ireland? 7. The Titanic crossed / was crossing the Atlantic when it hit / was hitting an iceberg. 8. As soon as I saw / was seeing the accident I called / was calling the police. 9. While Matt did / was doing his homework, his mother made / was making the dinner. 10. When the ambulance came / was coming, we carried / were carrying him into it. 11. We played / were playing a computer game when Mum called / was called for lunch. 12. When the teacher said / was saying “Stop!”, I stilltried / was still trying to finish the last question. XI. Complete the sentences with the past simple or past continuous form of the verbs in brackets. 1. My car _____________(break) down when I _____________(drive) home from work. 2. Alan _____________(look) out of the window when he _____________(see) a UFO. 3. When he _____________(see) me, he _____________(fall) off the wall. 4. We _____________(try)to log on when the Wifi _____________(stop) working. 5 _________ Jim _________(smoke) when he _________(turn) on the gas? 6. She _____________(be) so tired that she _____________(sleep) for twelve hours. 7. The tortoise _____________(run) while the hare _____________(have) a nap.

8. I _____________(phone) you four times last night but you _____________(sleep). 9. The police __________(ask) them lots of questions before they ___________(release) them. 10. While the children __________(surf) the Internet, they __________(find) a really interesting website about music. 11. He _____________(walk) down the road when he _____________(hear) a loud noise. 12. When we _____________(be) in Canana, we _____________(go) skiing almost every day. 13. Where _________ you ________(go) last summer holiday, Jim? ~ Well, I __________(take) a trip to Minneapolis. 14. When I _____________(arrive), they _____________(say) hello but continued working. 15. When you _____________(meet) me yesterday, I _____________(not go) to school, I _____________(go) to the doctor’s - I felt terrible. XII. Complete each sentence with an appropriate preposition. 1. Nick was doing some Internet research _____________ Vietnamese legends. 2. The eagle picked _____________ the tortoise and off they went. 3. The greedy brother filled a very large bag _____________ gold. 4. The elder brother offered to swap his fortune _____________ the starfruit tree. 5. _____________ the way home, the eagle got tired and got him into the sea. 6. The hare always boasted _____________ how fast he could run. 7. When the princess touched the spindle she fell _____________ a deep sleep. 8. The tortoise challenged him _____________ a race. 9. The witch put a magic spell on the prince and turned him _____________ a frog. 10. The princess slept _____________ one hundred years until a prince arrived _____________ the castle and kissed her. XIII. Write the correct tense or form of the verbs in brackets. 1. He _____________(receive) £300 when his uncle died. 2. The day we heard the news we _____________(have) holidays with our family. 3. Why ________________(you/ not answer) my phone call last night? ~ Oh, sorry,I _____________(take) a shower at that time. 4. She _____________(not see) her father since he _____________(start) to work inMarseille two years ago. 5. My mother ____________(fly) home from London today. Her flight _____________(arrive) in an hour. 6. We decided not to go because it _____________(rain) very hard. 7. When I ________(be) a child, my mother __________(read) me bedtime stories every night. 8. ________________(you/ ever/ hear) a Vietnamese folktale before? 9. The hare believed he would win the race, so he stopped _____________(take) a nap. 10. Once upon a time, there was a rich man _____________(live) in a village. XIV. Choose the word which best fits each gap. The story of Chung Cakes and Day Cakes According to legend, King Hung wanted to choose one son as a successor to his throne. He (1)________ all of his sons, and told them that whoever could bring him the most precious offering to the altar of the ancestors, would be awarded the throne. All of the princes traveled throughout the country in search of the tastiest and most exotic foods to offer their father, (2)________ Lang Lieu, the 18th prince. Being the poorest prince, he could not afford such luxurious foods and had no idea where to begin looking. One night, he dreamed of a genie (3)________ told him “There is nothing greater than the sky or the earth. And the rice grain is the most precious thing (4)________ the world. Now, use glutinous rice to make Chung Cake, a green and square cake, (5)________ the earth*. Then use ground glutinous rice to make Day Cake, a white, (6)________ cake, symbolizing the sky.” When he awoke, Lang Lieu was very happy and prepared the two kinds of cakes described by the genie. When the day of the contest came, Hung King was impressed by the favors and the meaning of Lang Lieu’s cakes. (7)________, he chose him as the successor to the throne. Since then, Chung Cake and Day Cake became the (8)________ food for the Tet holidays. (*) Long time ago, people thought the earth was square.

101

102

1. a. summoned

b. invited

c. ordered

d. arranged

2. a. including b. despite c. except d. apart 3. a. he b. it c. which d. who 4. a. over b. in c. on d. of 5. a. considering b. signing c. symbolizing d. presenting 6. a. shape dome b. dome shape c. shaped dome d. dome shaped 7. a. Therefore b. Otherwise c. Moreover d. However 8. a. ceremonial b. traditional c. customary d. social XV. Read the text carefully, then do the tasks. The Legend of Robin Hood Robin Hood was born near the end of the 12th century. His real name was Robert. He was the son of the Earl of Huntingdon. At that time, England had many problems. The King was cruel and greedy. His men were arrogant and brutal. The poor people of England suffered a lot. Many families died of hunger! One day, the cruel Sheriff of Nottingham killed Robin’s father, and took away his lands. Young Robin lost his father, his home, his lands and all his possessions. He escaped to Sherwood Forest with his loyal servants. They decided to live as free men in the forest. They didn’t want to be slaves of King John. However, the King considered them outlaws. Robin and the outlaws lived in caverns in the forest. They all wore green clothes and carried bows and arrows. The outlaws were excellent archers. Robin Hood became the best archer in the region. Some years passed, and there were more than 200 outlaws living in Sherwood Forest. Robin Hood was the hero of the poor. He continued robbing the rich to give to the poor. The Sheriff of Nottingham sent an army of soldiers to Sherwood Forest to capture Robin Hood. But Robin and his outlaws were in the trees. They killed all the soldiers except one. Robin Hood’s fame was everywhere. The people called him Saint Robin, and Robin, Sheriff of Sherwood Forest. A lot of new outlaws joined Robin Hood. They were loyal to him and followed him everywhere. A. Match the words that mean the same. 1. cruel a. wealthy 2. rob b. cave 3. rich c. property 4. outlaw d. steal 5. cavern e. evil 6. possessions f. criminal B. Decide if the statements are true (T) or false (F). 1. Robin Hood was born in Sherwood Forest. 2. Robin Hood was descended from the noble family of the Earl of Huntingdon. 3. King John wasn’t kind to his people. 4. Robin Hood lived with his slaves in the forest. 5. Robin Hood only stole from the rich. 6. Robin and his men used guns as their weapons. 7. The ordinary people of Nottingham hated Robin Hood. C. Answer the questions. 1. When was Robin Hood born? ___________________________________________________________________ 2. What was the England King at the time like? ___________________________________________________________________ 3. Who did Robin live with in Sherwood Forest. ___________________________________________________________________ 4. Why did Robin Hood and his servants decide to live in the forest? ___________________________________________________________________ 5. How many outlaws were there in Sherwood Forest? ___________________________________________________________________ 6. What did the people call Robin Hood? ___________________________________________________________________ XVI.Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first sentence. 1. The fable is very exciting. 103

What ______________________________________________________________ 2. The book was so good that I couldn’t stop reading it. Itwas ______________________________________________________________ 3. The children were doing their homework when I got home. While _____________________________________________________________ 4. She finds it difficult to remember all the story. It’s ________________________________________________________________ 5. Sleeping Beauty is not as interesting as Beauty and the Beast. Beauty and the Beast is ________________________________________________ 6. In spite of having no interest in folklore, Sylvia still enjoyed the story. Although ___________________________________________________________ 7. My mother last told a fairy tale two years ago. It’s ________________________________________________________________ 8. I think it would be a good idea if you joined the beginner’s class. I suggest ___________________________________________________________ 9. Charles Perrault wrote Cinderella in French in 1697. Cinderella __________________________________________________________ 10. I had a shower and the telephone rang. When I _____________________________________________________________ MIDDLE TERM TEST A. PHONETICS Choose the words that have the underlined part pronounced differently from the others. 1. A sound B. cloud C. found D. favourite 2. A. tool B. noon C. door D. school B. show C. now D. low 3. A. know 4. A. crafts B. comics C. streets D. stamps 5. A. mention B. question C. action D. education 6. A. leisure B. pleasure C. ensure D. measure B. ethnic C. tradition D. religion 7. A. minority 8. A. recognised B. designed C. displayed D. entered 9. A. country B. cloud C. loudly D. mouse 10. A. camel B. cattle C. paddy D. buffalo B. loaded C. harvested D. lived 11. A. populated 12. A. normal B. visitor C. transport D. chore 13. A. nomad B. badly C. adore D. language 14. A. behaved B. bored C. hoped D. tried B. cooked C. naked D. booked 15. A. looked B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. Choose A, B, C, D for each gap in the following sentences. 1. My mother enjoys traditional food for our family, especially at Tet holiday. A. cook B. to cook C. cooking D. cooke 2. My father sometimes goes in the forests. He’d like to find some more food for our family. A. hunt B. hunting C. to hunt D. hunted the buffaloes. 3. Look! Some children are A. picking B. herding C. driving D. playing 4. The sky is here in the countryside because there are no buildings to block the view. A. tidy B. close C. dense D. vast than living in the country? 5. Is living in the city A. more convenient B. as convenient C. most convenient D. so convenient 6. He is surprised that there are 54 ethnic groups in our country. A. to understand B. to study C. to know D. find 7. The Viet (or Kinh) have number of people, account for about 86% of the population. 104

A. large 8. A. What

B. the large C. larger D. the largest ethnic group has a larger population, the Tay or the Ede? B. Which C. Why D. Who

II. Use the gerund of the verbs in the box to complete the sentences. play; listen; eat; do; collect; ride; take; wash; watch; write

1. My sister enjoys aerobics in the morning. emails after dinner. 2. Lucia fancies 3. In his free time, Quang likes photographs. 4. Are you interested in handball, Peter? 5. Vinh’s brother loves foreign coins, doesn’t he? 6. David hates a bike to school on rainy days. 7. I prefer DVDs to going to cinema. 8. Nam detests the dishes every day. 9. We don’t mind to classical music. 10. The Robinsons adore Vietnamese food. III. Put the verbs in the brackets into infinitive (V/to V) or gerund (V-ing). 1. John dislikes (work) in front of a computer all day. 2. I’d like (visit) the Viet Nam Museum of Ethnology this weekend 3. I’d rather (make) crafts than listen to music. 4. Minh loves (help) her parents with DIY projects. 5. Quang hates (take) the dog for a walk. 6. We all adored (do) aerobics when we were young. 7. You should (play) sports to keep fit. that programme if they don’t like it. 8. They don’t need (watch) 9. Do you fancy (socialize) with friends? 10. My brother prefers (surf) the Internet. IV. Complete these sentences with “used to” or “didn’t use to”. 1. My father gave up smoking two years ago. He (smoke) a packet of cigarettes a day. 2. There (be) a movie theater here but it closed a long time ago. 3. Mr. An (not/ drink) coffee when he was young but he likes it now. 4. Peter (have) a motorbike, but last month he sold it and bought a car. her but we are best friends now. 5. I (not/ like) 6. They came to live in the city last year. They (live) in a small village in the country. 7. My sister (play) tennis a lot but she doesn’t play very often now. 8. When I was a child I (not/ study) hard. V. Complete these sentences with the correct form of adjectives and adverbs comparison. 1. Mary is (pretty) as her sister. ................................................................................................. 2. A new house is (expensive) than an old one. ................................................................................................. 3. His job is (important) than mine. ................................................................................................. 4. Of the four ties, I like the red one (well). ................................................................................................. 5. Nobody is (happy) than Miss Snow. ................................................................................................. 6. Today English is the (international) of languages. ................................................................................................. 7. John is much (strong) than I thought. ................................................................................................. 8. Benches are (comfortable) than arm- chairs. ................................................................................................. 105

9. Bill is (good) than you thought. ................................................................................................. 10. Mr Bush is the (delightful) person I have ever known. ................................................................................................. 11. Dick is the (careful) of the three workers. ................................................................................................. 12. Is the book (interesting) than the one you read last week? ................................................................................................. 13. Gold is (precious) than iron. ................................................................................................. 14. The weather today is (warm) than the weather yesterday. ................................................................................................. 15. This film is not (good) as the one we saw last week. ................................................................................................. C. READING I. Read the following passage then fill in each blank. Dear Grandma and Grandpa, Hi. I’m on holiday (1) .................. Majorca with my friends, Tracy and Sharon. We arrived last Saturday. The first two days the weather wasn’t very (2) .................., so we did some sightseeing. We (3) .................. lots of photographs. (4) .................. Wednesday we hired a car and (5) .................. out into the country. We (6) .................. for lunch at a lovely little village and then in the (7) .................. we found a beautiful beach. Last night, we went to (8) .................. disco. We didn’t (9) .................. back till about 4 am, so we got up (10) .................. this morning and we decided to have a relaxing day by the hotel swimming pool. So that’s where I am now. II. Read the following passage then answer the questions: Gong culture in the Central Highlands of Viet Nam has been recognized by UNESCO as a Masterpiece of the Intangible Heritage of Humanity. Gong culture covers five provinces of the Central Highlands: Kon Tum, Gia Lai, Dak Lak, Dak Nong and Lam Dong. The masters of gong culture are the ethnic groups of Bahnar, Sedang, Mnong, Coho... The Gong Festival is held annually in the Central Highlands. In the festival, artists from these provinces give gong performances, highlighting the gong culture of their own province. For the ethnic groups of the Central Highlands, gongs are musical instruments of special power. It is believed that every Gong is the symbol of a god who grows more powerful as the Gong gets older. Therefore, gongs are associated with special occasions in people’s lives, such as the building of new houses, funerals, crop praying ceremonies... The Gong sound is a way to communicate with the gods. Answer the questions: 1. Where does Gong culture exist? ........................................................................................................................ 2. How often is the Gong Festival held? ........................................................................................................................ 3. What do artists do in the Gong Festival? ........................................................................................................................ 4. Are Gongs pieces of folk music? ........................................................................................................................ 5. Is the gong sound a way to communicate with the ancestors? ........................................................................................................................ III. Read the passages and write True for (T) of False for (F). His early life George Washington was born in Virginia. His family owned a big farm and had George didn’t have much education. During his life he had three jobs: he was a farmer, a soldier, and a politician. He loved the life of a farmer. He grew tobacco and owned horses. He worked hard but he also liked dancing and going to the theatre. In 1759 he married a widow called Martha Custis. They were happy together, but didn’t have any children. His later life 106

He was Commander-in-Chief of the army and fought the British in the War of Independence. When the war ended in 1781 he was happy to go back to the farm, but his country wanted him to be President. Finally, in 1789, he became President, and gave his name to the new capital city. He started the building of the White House, but he never lived in it. By 1797 he was tired of politics. He went back to his farm and died there two years later. 1. ___________ He came from a rich family. 2. ___________ He loved being a politician. 3. ___________ He worked hard. 4. ___________ He had a lot of other interests. 5. ___________ He had a good education. 6. ___________ He married, but didn’t have any children. 7. ___________ He was in office for eight years. 8. ___________ He was happy to live and work on the farm. 9. ___________ Finally he was tired of politics and resigned. 10. ___________ Americans loved him very much. IV. Read the passage and complete the sentences below. A horse on board the Enterprise was perhaps the first and only horse ever to save the lives of its shipmates. The Enterprise was sailing for North Carolina. She carried a mixed cargo, and there were fifteen passengers on her. She was making good timed until at dawn, she struck something. Water poured into the ship. The holds were soon flooded. Frightened men and women climbed the rigging to save their lives. The crew tried to pump the holds out, but with no luck. Then the cargo caught fire. All those on board thought they would die. The captain knew the coast was near. But how near? Perhaps if the horse could reach land, the people could, too. The horse was led to the side and pushed over. The horse did reach land. In fact, it almost waded ashore! The people soon followed. All were saved, thanks to a nameless horse. 1. There were .......................... people on the Enterprise. 2. The ship was wrecked at .......................... 3. When water poured in, the crew tried to .......................... the holds. 4. The horse was pushed overboard in the hope that it could .......................... 5. The horse got ashore almost by .......................... V. Read the passage then answer the questions. The Youth and Young Pioneers Organization was founded in Vietnam on March 26th, 1931. It builds character, and encourages good citizenship and personal fitness. The Y & Y has many plans to help the community. It encourages all members to take part in different programs. The recycling program can help people save natural resources. The “Rosy Smile" program helps raise fund for the poor children. The “Green Sunday” program makes the city more beautiful with clean streets, plenty of trees and flowers. It gives more green color to the city and it is done on Sunday so it has the name “Green Sunday”. There are some more helpful programs such as “helping the elderly and street children”, “supporting cultural-sport”, “young scientists”, etc.... 1. When was the Y & Y founded? ................................................................................................. 2. What does it build? ................................................................................................. 3. What does it encourage? ................................................................................................. 4. Why is it named “Green Sunday”? ................................................................................................. 5. What does the recycling help? ................................................................................................. D. WRITING 107

I. Complete each sentence so it means the same as the sentence above. 1. Cats cannot swim as well as dogs. Dogs can swim ........................................................................ 2. Minh really loves to hang out with friends. Minh really enjoys ................................................................... 3. Playing beach games is very interesting. It is .......................................................................................... 4. He uses all his free time to look after his garden. He spends ................................................................................. II. Complete each sentence so it means the same as the sentence above. Use “Used to”. 1. They once started these machines by hand. They used to .................................................................................................................... 2. He doesn’t get up late anymore. He .................................................................................................................................... 3. I don’t listen to the radio any more. I used to ........................................................................................................................... 4. They don’t have a dog any more. They used to .................................................................................................................... 5. My brother doesn’t serve in the army any longer. My brother used to ........................................................................................................... 6. Barbara is not as keen on travel as she used to be. Barbara used to ................................................................................................................ 7. When he was young, he usually did morning exercise in the park. He used to ........................................................................................................................ 8. The man often spent his holiday in the mountain when he was young. The man used to ............................................................................................................... 9. Before he had the car, he went to work by bike. Before he had the car, he used to ...................................................................................... 10. When I was young, I usually get up early. I used to ...........................................................................................................................

TEST YOURSELF 2 I. Choose the word that has underlined part pronounced differently from the test. 1. a. sticky b. fairy c. story d. reply 2. a. honest b. human c. hero d. historian 3. a. looked b. stopped c. screamed d. missed 4. a. character b. church c. choose d. cheerful 5. a. procession b. confusion c. production d. tradition II. Choose the word that has different stress pattern. 1. a. anniversary b. celebration c. ceremony d. politician 2. a. lantern b. princess c. emperor d. incense 3. a. reunite b. defeat c. command d. swallow 4. a. preservation b. communicate c. commemorate d. participate 5. a. cunning b. unkind c. greedy d. generous III. Filling each blank with a suitable word. The first letter of the word has been provided. 1. Tet, or Lunar New Year, is the most important f___________ in Vietnam. 2. In the UK, there are a lot of c___________ for table manners. 3. Most Vietnamese people have family altars to w___________ their ancestors. 4. Saint Giong is a mythical h___________ who helped King Hung to defeat the An. 5. It’s important to p___________ our culture for future generations. 6. Xoan singing is traditional f___________ singing originating from the northernprovince of Phu Tho. 7. The Fox and the Grapes is one of the most popular f___________. 8. At the beginning of the festival, they p___________ a ritual of offering incense. 9. Millions of Japanese visit homtowns for family r___________ during theObon Festival. 108

10. The o_______ demanded the annual sacrifice of a young village girl to satisfy hisblood lust. IV. Choose the best answer a, b, c or d to complete the sentence. 1. The Giong festival is held _______ the 9th day of the 4th lunar month. a. at b. in c. on d. from 2. Last year, my family _______ tradition and travelled abroad during Tet holiday. a. broke with b. passed down c. kept on d. handed up 3. The Mid-Autumn Festival is also known as Moon Festival _______ Harvest Moon Festival. a. but b. or c. so d. and 4. You _______ eat squid, duck, or shrimp during Tet because they are seen as bad symbols. a. have to b. should c.don’t have to d. shouldn’t 5. A _______ is a traditional story, usually about animals, that teaches a moral lesson. a. legend b. fable c. folktale d. fairy tale 6. _______ bad luck he had! a. How b. How a c. What d. What a 7. My salary is really low; _______ I find the work incredibly rewarding. a. therefore b. moreover c. otherwise d. nevertheless 8. She tried to remain cheerful _______ she had failed the test. a. even though b. because c. even if d. despite 9. While Amber _______ the tale, her friends were talking about another story. a. narrated b.was narrated c. was narrating d. has narrated 10. ‘The film was very exciting, but the ending was unexpected.’ ‘_______ I didn’t like its ending.’ a. It’s great! b.Spot on! c. Sounds bad! d. Hold on! V. Choose the underlined word or phrase, A, B, C or D that needs correcting. 1. The custom to carve jack-o’-lanterns can betraced backto an old Irish folk tale. A B C D 2. One day a dragon flew over the tower when he heard the princess cry for help. A B C D 3. Legends relate to history because they are based on history events and heroes. A B C D 4. Itis considered impolite to not take off your shoes before entering a house in Japan. A B C D 5. Erin had a three-weeks vacation; therefore he went to Vietnam and took part in some spring B C D festivals. 6. When we arrived at home last night, the children were doing their homework. A B C D 7. Because breathing is something we do automatically, so we rarely think about it. A B C D 8. Thanks formoderntechnology, we can now preserve our culture for future generations. A B C D 9. Tree Planting Day is very important in Singapore because the country needs to protect B C it’s natural parks and green spaces. D 10. The Hung King Temple Festival is annual held in honourof the Hung Kings who are the B C foundersof the nation. D VI. Writethe correct tense or form of the verbs in brackets. 1. Do Son Buffalo Fighting Festival ____________(hold) every year on the 9th day of the eighth month. 2. Everything is going well. We ____________(not have) any problems so far. 3. Perfume Festival ____________(take) place at the Perfume Pagoda on the 15th day of the 1st

lunar

month. 4. Little Red Riding Hood___________(walk) through the forest when she met a wicked wolf. 5. ____________(you/ watch) this programme or can I turn the TV off? 6. My friends and I ____________(not play) football at 3p.m yesterday because it was raining hard at that time. 7. The Hung King Temple Festival ____________(recognise) as a national holiday in 2007. 8. When I shouted, they ____________(jump) off the roof and ____________(run) away. 9. What ____________(you/do) when you’ve spent all your money? 10. The Chinese custom of binding feet to make them smaller ____________(cease) in the twentieth century. VII. Supply the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. He calls people sir and madam and he is very ____________. (respect) 2. In Japan, up until recently, marriages were ____________ arranged by a special matchmaker. (custom) 3. There is the Poh Bang ____________ by a magician in the temple. (perform) 4. A fairy tale usually involves ____________ creatures and magic. (image) 5. In the story, a ____________ rescues Red Riding Hood with his axe. (woodcut) 6. When Alice heard footsteps, she was ____________ and started to run. (fright) 7. Cinderella’s stepmothers was ____________ and treated her ____________. (kind - bad) 8. Jack is very bright, but he’s also ____________ of his accomplishments at school. (boast) 9. When Jack was going to the market, he met a ____________. (magic) 10. She smiled ____________, waved, and vanished into thin air. (wicked) IX. Choose the word which best tits each gap. My friends and I are having a (1)_________ time at this year’s Roswell UFO Festival in New Mexico, USA. It’s a four-day event that takes (2)_________ every year in early July. Some people believe that an alien (3)_________ – aUFO – crashedin a field near Roswellin 1947 and the festival (4)_________ that event. Not everyone believes this story, of course, but the festival is still a lot of fun. Everyone dresses up (5)_________ aliens for the Alien Costume Competition. The costumes are fabulous and even family pets take part. There are dogs dyed blue and tortoises (6)_________ in aluminium foil! Today we’re watching the (7)_________ down Main Street and tomorrow the firework display starts at 9 pm. They say it’s really amazing. (8)_________ are some of the aliens you meet. 1. a. terrible b. fantastic c. leisure d. difficult 2. a. break b. part c. place d. time 3. a. spaceship b. race c. custom d. planet 4. a. symbolizes b. performs c. organizes d. celebrates 5. a. of b. as c. with d. by 6. a. covered b. filled c. included d. carved 7. a. companion b. scenery c. parade d. heritage 8. a. Such b. Much c. Neither d. So X. Read the text carefully, then do the tasks. People visiting Spain for the first time can find it difficult to get used to the eating customs of the Spanish. It’s not so much the food itself, but the timing of the meals that visitors aren’t used to. I used to live in Cadiz myself for a few years and I actually quite like the way they do things. Breakfast is a light continental affair – justa roll and some coffee usually – eatenbetween 8 and 9.30 a.m. The main meal of the day is lunch, which people usually eat sometime between 1.30 p.m. and 3.30 p.m. Quite a few of the shops, museums and galleries close around this time, because the locals like to take time over lunch. They will rest for a short time afterwards, although the traditional afternoon siesta is not as common as it used to be. People eat late in the evening – rarelybefore 9 p.m. and at the weekend the locals often won’t eat before 11 p.m. or even midnight. This is a much lighter meal than lunch – oftenjust a few tapas taken with a drink. A. Decide whether the following sentences are true or false. 1. Mealtimes in Spain can be confusing for visitors. 2. In Spain, breakfast is the largest meal of the day. 3. Spaniards like to have a long lunch. 4. The entire country closes up shop from about 1:30 to 3:30 p.m. 5. Most Spaniards still enjoy taking a siesta after lunch. 6. Dinner is generally eaten between 9 p.m. and midnight.

109

110

lunar

B. Choose the correct answers. 1. What is the passage mainly about? a. Spanish culture b. Spanish eating customs c.Spanish table manners d. Spanish mealtimes 2. What does the word “siesta” mean? a. a light meal b. a short nap c. an afternoon snack d. a deep sleep 3. Which is the most important meal of the day in Spain? a. breakfast b. lunch c. snack d. dinner 4. What is a continental breakfast? a. a full breakfast of cereal, bacon and eggs and toast b. a traditional breakfast consisting of rice, soup, fish c.a simple breakfast consisting of coffee and bread d.a healthy breakfast of fruits, veggies and milk 5. According to the passage, _________. a.Spaniards don’t often eat their evening meal anytime before 9 pm b.Dinner is always served with tapas and wine c.The locals usually eat dinner after 11pm d.Dinner is also as large as lunch XI. Make sentences, using the words or phrases provided. You can add some words or make changes. 1. Pingxi Lantern Festival/ celebrate/ the fifteenth day/ the first lunar month ______________________________________________________________________ 2. Today’s children/ hardly/ listen/ stories/ their elder/ because/ they/ live/ the digital era ______________________________________________________________________ 3. LittleRed Riding Hood/ have/ important lessons/ the dangers/ talk/ strangers ______________________________________________________________________ 4. Once/ time/ there/ beautiful princess/ who/ not live/ castle ______________________________________________________________________ 5. When/ Cinderella/ enter/ the palace/ everybody/ dance/ happily ______________________________________________________________________ 6. My family/ have/ custom/ visit/ pagodas/ the first day/ lunar New Year ______________________________________________________________________ 7. Visitors/ make offerings/ incense, flowers and fruits/ worship Buddha/ the pagoda. ______________________________________________________________________ 8. Most of the children/ like/ imagine/ visualize/ the stories/ while/ listen/ the folktales/ especially/ the fairy tales ___________________________________________________________________ ANSWER KEYS UNIT 1 LEISURE ACTIVITIES TEST 1 UNIT 1 I. 1. D 2. D 3. A 4. B 5. B 6. C 7. D 8. A 9. C 10. C 11. A 12. C 13. B 14. D II. 1. C 2. A 3. B 4. D 5. C III. 1. C 2. A 3. A 4. C 5. B 6. A 7. C 8. C 9. B 10. B 11. C 12. D 13. B 14. B 15. A 16. A 17. C IV. 1. making 2. Have – ridden 3. go 4. seeing/ tosee 5. skateboarding V. 1. doing 2. swimming 3. going 4. playing 5. watching 6. skiing VI. 1. f 2. e 3. g 4. b 5. h 6. i 7. j 8. d 9. c 10. a VII. 1. friendly 2. orphan 3. humorous 4. extremely 5. beautiful 6. lucky 7. peaceful 8. lovely 9. generous 10. helpful VIII. 1. at 2. out of 3. between 4. in – beside 111

IX. X.

5. after 6. under 7. beneath 8. on - above 1. T 2. T 3. F 4. F 5. T 1. Yes, he does. 2. On starry nights, they lie on the grass, looking at the sky and daring each other to find the Milky

Way.

3. I like to live in the countryside because it is quiet and peaceful. 1. C 2. B 3. A 4. B 5. C 6. B 7. C 8. A 9. C 10. B XII. 1. What does she look like? 2. She is not as easy-going as Mai. 3. They prefer the outside to the classroom. 4. I spend most of my time with Hoa. 5. The sun rises in the East. 6. Lan received a letter from her friend yesterday. 7. She is not old enough to get married. 8. She is a nice girl with long hair. TEST 2 UNIT 1 I. 1. B 2. C 3.D 4. A II. 1. read: a newspaper, a magazine, an e-mail 2. go: swimming, shopping, hiking 3. play : football, the guitar, computer games 4. write : a letter, an e-mail, something interesting 5. listen to : the radio, music, CDs 6. watch : television, a video, a game show, a quiz show 7. go to: school, the cinema, a restaurant, the library 8. visit: friends, cousins 9. do : nothing, something interesting 10. have : a meal, leisure activities, an outdoor activity III. 1. playing 2. watching 3. skiing 4. doing 5. swimming 6. going IV. 1. don’t like watching 2. hate standing 3. getting 4. prefer to be 5. don’t mind playing 6. Does he like playing 7. prefers to play 8. likes scoring 9. doesn't mind watching V. 1. He goes to the cinema. 2. He plays football on Saturday morning. 3. He watches TV (usually a football match). 4. He does his homework. 5. He surfs the Net on Friday afternoon and Sunday evening. VI. 1. Skateboarding became very popular in the 1970s. 2. They are ‘freestyle’ skateboarding, ‘ramp’ skateboarding, and ‘street-style’ skateboarding. 3. It is a combination of freestyle and ramp skateboarding. 4. Because this allowed them to skateboard safely. 5. Yes, I do. Because there are lots of competitions now. VII. 1.In the UK they play football, rugby, tennis and basketball, while in the USA they play American football, athletics, basketball and baseball. 2.They spend over 25 hours a week online. 3.The average teenager in the UK gets about £7 a week pocket money. In the USA it is about $10. 4. They spend their money on clothes and going out, but magazines, presents and snacks arealso important. ________________________________________________________________________________ 5. He o she has sixteen online friends on social network websites. XI.

112

VIII. 1. First 2. Second 3. In my opinion 4. Also 5. Beside 6.In addition 7. Finally 8. In short TEST 3 UINT 1 I.

1. d

2. c

3. a

4. d

5. b

II.

1. a

2. d

3. b

4. c

5. a

6. d

7. b

8. c

9. b

10. a

III.

1.c

2.b

3.c

4.a

5.d

6.c

7.a

8.c

9. b

10. c

IV.

VI.

VII.

1. watching/ to watch 2. travelling/ to travel 3. cycling

4. staying

5. to read/ reading

6. doing

8. making

9. eating

10. hanging out

7. getting/ to get

1. meeting - to see

2. to drink/ drinking 3. waiting

4. playing/ to play

5.staying - playing

6. to go

8. spending

7. making/to make

9.to surf/ surfing – surfing

10. to concentrate - wandering 3. didn’t like

1. are becoming

2. haven’t listened

5. spend

6. Have you ever made7. will listen

9. to arrive

10. watching - reading

1. addictive

2. socialising

3. obesity

4. excited

5. relaxation

6. considerably

7. dissatisfied

8. communication

7. f

VIII. 1. h

2. g

3. a

4. b

5. c

IX.

1.b

2.c

3.d

4. a

5. c

1. Mai usually listens to K-pop music in her free time.

6. e

4. was founded 8. lying

Adjective

Comparative

Superlative

expensive thick friendly fine thin difficult warm wise easy wonderful sunny fat long

more expensive thicker more friendly finer thinner more difficult warmer wiser easier more wonderful sunnier fatter longer

the most expensive the thickest the most friendly the finest the thinnest the most difficult the warmest the wisest the easiest the most wonderful the sunniest the fattest the longest

8.d

VI. VII.

2. When I was a child I enjoyed playing computer games. 3. My father spends most of his spare time looking after the garden. 4. Is watching TV the most popular leisure activity in Britain?

1. cheaper than 4. more powerful than 7. longer than 10. more interesting than 1. best 2. happiest 6. good 7. least

6. She got hooked on the medical drama after watching the first episode.

3.faster 8. prettier

1. playing 2. hunting 5. playing / to play 6. to spend 9. underline - to learn 10. move/ to move

VIII. 1. collection 4. unsafe

5. Many teenagers are addicted to the Internet and computer games.

2. more effective than 5. taller than 8. easier than

3. more beautiful than 6. heavier than 9. more comfortable than

4. more colourful 9. the better

5. better 10. the sicker

3. picked 7. will try 11. gets – got

4. collected - was 8. to improve 12. being

2. inconvenient 5. friendly

3. skillful 6. healthily

7. Most of my friends prefer playing sports to surfing the net. IX.

8. In today’s world, teenagers rely on technology more than the past UNIT 2: LIFE IN THE COUNTRYSIDE TEST 1 UNIT 2 I. II. III.

1. B 6. B 1. A

2. C 7. C 2. D

1. more beautifully 5. more 9. more attractively

3. B 8. C 3. B 2. hotter 6. less 10. bigger

4. D 9. A 4. D 3. crazier 7. worse

5. A 10. B 5. C 4. more slowly 8. better

IV.

113

1. peaceful 5. unsafe 9. generously

2. nomadic 6. friendly 10. soundly

3. collector 7. healthily

4. inconvenient 8. traditional

1. D 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. B 6. B 7. C 8. D 9. A 10. D 11. C 12. C 13. D 14. A 15. A 16. C 17. A 18. C 19. B 20. C XI. 1. D 2. D 3. A 4. B 5. C XII. 1. A 2. C 3. B 4. A 5. D XIII. 1. mountain 2. stories 3. with 4. life 5. any 6. riding 7. to 8. visitors XIV. 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. F 6.T XV.1. Sarah is younger than Tim. 2. Your house is smaller than mine. 3. Bill is shorter than David. 4. My marks are better than Jack’s. 5. That book is as expensive as this one. 6. My bike is faster than yours. XVI. 1. Her new house isn’t so/ as big as her old one. 2. Peter is the tallest in my class. 3. The white dress isn’t so/ as expensive as the black one. /The white dress is cheaper than the black one. 114

4. According to me, Maths isn’t so/ as easy as English/ Maths is more difficult than English. 5. Mary is the most intelligent in my group. 6. The Nile is the longest river in the world. 7. No mountain in the world is higher than Mount Everest. 8. She is the prettiest girl I have ever met. 9. The more he works, the more tired he feels. 10. That computer doesn’t work so/ as well as that one. TEST 2 UNIT 2

-herd: sheep, cattle, buffaloes, cows, goats -collect: hay, rice straw, grass, rainwater, stamps -pick: strawberries, flowers, grapes, roses, lettuces -put up: a fence, a tent, a building, a memorial, a poster

I. 2. collect: food, water, data, information, dolls, postcards 3. pick: grapes, blackberry, strawberry, tea buds, 4. herd: buffaloes, cattle, goats, sheep 5. put up: a flag, a fence, a memorial, a notice III. 1. kites 2. vast 3. ride 4. dry 5. loaded 6. harvest 7. grassland 8. beehive 9. convenient 10. cattle IV. 1. colourful 2. Inconvenient 3. peaceful 4. brave 5. vast 6. nomadic 7. slow 8. safe 9. quiet 10. hard V. 1. bigger than 2. hotter than 3. more expensive than 4. bigger than 5. more intelligent than 6. more important than 7. cheaper than 8. harder than 9. better than 10. worse than VI. 1. cheaper than 2. more effective than 3. more beautiful than 4. taller than 5. heavier than 6. longer than 7. easier than 8. easier than 9. more comfortable than 10. more interesting than VIII. 1. more soundly 2. more healthily 3. more traditionally 4. better 5. more generously 6. more quickly 7. more optimistically 8. more badly IX. 1. Nick writes essays more carefully than Phuc (does). 2.A snail moves more slowly than a crab (does). 3.My father explained the subject more clearly than my brother (did). 4.My cousin sings better than I do/me. 5.Phong swims faster than Phuc (does). X. 1. peaceful 2. nomadic 3. collector 4. inconvenient 5. unsafe 6. friendly 7. healthily 8. traditional 9. generously 10. soundly XI. 1. C 2. B 3. A 4. D 5. C XII. 1. D 2. C 3. B 4. A 5. A 6. C 7. D 8. A 9. D 10. B XIII. 1. D 2. C 3. B 4. D 5. C TEST 3 UNIT 2 I.

1. c

2. c

3. b

4. a

5. d

II.

1. d

2. b

3. b

4. c

5. a

6. d

7. a

8. b

9. c

10. d

III.

1. c

2. h

3. g

4. e

5. b

6. a

7. d

8. f

9. j

10. i

IV.

1. exciting 6. envious

2. quiet3. vast - fresh 4. inconvenient 7. generous

8. brave

1. hard

2. slow

3. angry

4. quietly

6. brave

7. brightly

8. stressful

9. fast

VII.

1. more carefully

2. more boring

3. earlier

4. better

5. more confident

6. deep

7. more soundly

8. healthier

9. fresher

10.more clearly

VIII. 1. more important 5. better

IX.

5. commonly 10. generous

2. worse

3. more clearly

4. well

6. easier

7. more simply

8. later 12. more intelligent

9. narrower

10. earlier

11. more fluently

13. more boring

14. faster

15. happy

1. are playing

2. arrives

3. spent

4. hasn’t ridden

5. are grazing

6. have been

7. lived

8. doesn’t excite

9. to visit

10. driving

1. enjoyment

2. farmers

3. larger

4. peaceful

5. bravery

6. uncomfortable

7. convenience

8. traditionally

9. populated

10. unforgettable

XI.

1. e

2. c

XII.

1. c

2. d

3. a

4. b

XIII. 1. b

2. c

3. a

4. d

3. g

4. f

5. h

6. b

7. a

8. d

5. a

6. d

7. c

8. b

5. c

6. c

XIV. 1. The writer comes from a small village. 2. No, he doesn’t. 3. He prefers village life because it’s very quiet. 4. He thinks the people in his village are friendly. 5. The disadvantage of living in the village is transport. 6. He goes to school by bus. 7. No, he doesn’t. 8. He is interested in wildlife photography.

I. II. III.

5. optimistic 9. skillful

VI.

10. peaceful

- ride: a donkey, a horse, a camel, a bike, a motorcycle 115

1. D 1. B 1. A 8.C 15. D 22. C 29. D

2. C 2. A 2. B 9. A 16.C 23. B 30. A

UNIT 3: PEOPLES OF VIET NAM TEST1 UNIT 3 3. D 4. B 5. B 3. D 4. B 5. A 3. B 4. A 5. B 10. C 11. C 12. B 17.A 18. B 19. B 24. C 25. D 26. A

6. D

7. A

6. D 13. C 20. C 27. C

7. B 14. A 21. D 28. B

8. A

116

IV.

1. the person 4. the British Museum 7. The Prime Minister 10. the a thousand pounds 13. at a profit 16. in pain 19. the cross- channel ferry

1. unhealthily 5. socialise 9. nomads 1. A 1. A 5. A 6. A

V. VI.

2. C 2. D 6. D 7. B

2. the only cinema 5. church 8. Computer 11. under the impression 14. on the whole 17. out of danger 20. the back of my neck

2.They live mostly on the coast between Ninh Thuan and Binh Thuan provinces, or on the Cambodian border around Chau Doc. 3.The Cham have a tradition of wet rice cultivation. 4.Handicrafts are fairly well-developed, especially silkworm textiles and handmade pottery wares. 5.Both men and women wear long one-piece sarongs or cloth wrappers. 6.The main color of their daily dress is cotton white. 7.The chief means of transporting goods and farm produce is the back-basket. 8.The most important festival, called Bon Kate, is held near the Cham towers in the tenth month of the Lunar year. TEST 3 UNIT 3

3. a Thames barge 6. a milk jug 9. an open-air theatre 12. a hurry 15. on the average 18. in the way

2. multicultural 3. mountainous 4. communal 6. addicted 7. trainer 8. envious 10. traditionally 3. C 4. B 5. C 3. B 4. A 7. C 8. C 8. A 9. B 10. A TEST 2 (UNIT 3)

I. 1. D 2. B 3. C 4. A 5. B 6. B 7. C 8. C 9. B 10. D II. 1. cultural heritage 2. Information 3. ethnic groups 4. research 5.a tour 6. display area 7. stilt house 8. little bridges III. 1. mountainous 2. Agricultural 3. traditional 4. diversity 5. peaceful IV. 1. home 2. dress 3. at 4. with 5. ethnic 6.for 7. valleys 8. provide 9. villages 10. Their V. 1. When was the house chosen for the background of the film? 2. Where is the house? 3. 4. 5. VI. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. VII. 1. B

1. c

2. d

3. c

4. b

5. a

II.

1. a

2. b

3. c

4. d

5. c

III.

1. stilt houses

2. speciality

3. diverse

4. unique

5. folk dances

6. costume

7. heritage site

8. ornaments

9. terraced fields

10. Ethnic minorities

4. D

5. C

6. A

7. B

8. d

9. c

10. b

1. Which

2. How many

3. What

4. Whose

5. Where

6.How often

7. Who

8.How far

9. What

10. When

1. Who is the girl with a shawl on her head? 2.How many main festivals do the Khmer have in a year? 3.Which is the smallest ethnic group in Vietnam? 4.What is the biggest festival of Khmer people? 5.Where can we find terraced fields? 6.How far is it from Bom Bo village to Ho Chi Minh city? / How far is Bom Bo village from Ho Chi Minh city? 7.Why did they build their houses on stilts? 8.What is the population of the Tay ethnic group? 9.How long have the Tay lived in Vietnam? 10.Where do the M’nong mainly live?

How many inhabitants does the Ha Nhi group have? Where do they live? Who do they (mainly) worship? What do they live on? What do they use to work in the fields? Where are the gardens? 3. A

7. b

IV.

What is the film about? Why was she raised by her stepmother? When did she begin to look for her birth mother?

2. C

6. a

VI.

1. a

VII.

1. peacefully

2. celebrated

5. Embroidery

6. speciality/ specialty 7. mountainous

2. the 3. a

4. an

10. The - (–) 11. a - the

9. ethnicities

8. D

VIII. 1. about

VIII 1.It is located in Duong Lam commune at a 45 km distance from Hanoi. 2.It is the birthplace of two kings in the history of Vietnam, Phung Hung (or Bo Cai Dai Vuong) and Ngo Quyen. 3.It is typical for villages in the midlands in the North of Vietnam. 4.There are still nearly old 200 houses. 5.Phung Hung Temple, Ngo Quyen Royal Tomb, Mong Phu communal house, Ho Gam Hill, and the temple at which the diplomat Giang Van Minh is worshiped. IX. 1.The Cham ethnic group has a population of about 100,000.

IX.

5. the 6. –

7. a - an

8. an

9. the - the

12. The - (–) - the 3. majority

4. communal 8. Woven

10. culturally 2. for 3. on 4. in - in

5. for 6. at

7. of

8. to

9. for 10. of

1. came

2. belong

3. starts - ends

4. Are... speaking

5. has learnt

6. have been - have never visited

7. will organize

8. were built

9. riding

10. to work/ work X.

1. d

XI.

1. There are 54 ethnic groups in Vietnam.

2. g

3. b

4. f

5. h

6. e

7. a

8. c

2.The Kinh people mostly live in the Red River delta, the central coastal delta, the Mekong delta and major cities. 3.The population of the Tay is about 1 million.

117

118

4.Brau, Roman and Odu have the smallest population. 5.Most ethnic peoples live on wet rice cultivation.

6.Their legends, songs, folklore and proverbs have been passed down from one generation to the next through the spoken word.

6.No, they don’t.

IX.

7.The culture of each ethnic group is diverse and special. XII.

2. diversity

3. including

6. display

7. homes

8. throughout

4.The Museum of Ethnology is visited by millions of tourists every year.

6. T

5.Jane’s sister doesn’t make crafts as well as Jane does.

2. T

3. F

4. F

5. F

4. viewed

3. I spent two hours walking to her village.

1. ethnic

II. A. 1.T

5. which

6.Amy suggested going to her uncle’s farm at the weekend./ Amy suggested we (should)go to her uncle’s farm at the weekend.

B. 1. The population of the Muong is 1.3 million people. 2.The Muong mostly live in Hoa Bỉnh and Thanh Hoa. 3.Wet rice is the main food product of the Muong. 4.They are the gong, the flute, the two-string violin, the drum and the panpipe. XIII. 1. Vietnam is a multiethnic country with 54 ethnic groups. 2.Ethnic minorities make up about 15 percent of the population of Vietnam. 3.Most of the ethnic minorities live in the mountainous areas in the north. 4.The Tay are the second largest ethnic group in Vietnam. 5.The Nung are known for their richness of folk-art traditions including music and poetry. 6.The Dao people speak a language of Hmong-Dao language system. 7.The costume of the Nung is not as colourful as that of other ethnic groups. 8.The Ede live in wooden longhouses built on stilts in villages known as buon.

TEST YOURSELF1 I.

1. d

II.

1. b

2. d

3. d

4. c

5. a

III.

1. c

2. d

3. c

4. d

5. a

IV.

V. VII.

1. It’s very exciting to fly a kite in the countryside. 2. I started to do/ doing voluntary work three years ago.

2. c

3. b

4. d

5. a 6. a

7. b

8. a

9. c

10. d

1. Have you ever taken

2. provide

5. is practising

6. Did your family move 7. are produced 8. are going to visit

3. spent

4. has been

9. coming

10.to herd

1. addiction

2. nomads

3. further/ farther

4. populated

5. traditionally

6. socialise

7. weavers

8. festivities

1. g

VIII. A.

2. h

3. d

4.f

5.e

6. a

7. b

1.F

2. T

3. T

4. F

5. T

6. F

8.c

B. 1. The other name of the Hmong is Meo. 2.The Hmong came to Vietnam at the beginning of the 19th century. 3.The Hmong of Sa Pa are called Black Hmong because of their predominantly black clothing. 4.The Hmong grow rice on terraces. 5.The products of the Hmong people are handwoven indigo-dyed cloth, paper, silver Jewellery, leather goods, baskets and embroidery. 119

UNIT 4: CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS TEST 1 UNIT4 I. 1. B 2. C 3. D 4. C 5. B 6. C 7. A 8. D 9. C 10. B II. 1. D 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. B III. 1. A 2. C 3. C 4. B 5. A 6. A 7. C 8. B 9. D 10. D IV. 1. A 2. A 3. B 4. D 5. C 6. B 7. A 8. C 9. B 10. D 11. D 12. B 13. A 14. C 15. C V. 1. don’t have to 2. should 3. don’t have to 4. shouldn’t 5. should 6. should 7. should 8. have to 9. should 10. have to VI. 1. This switch should not be touched. 2. You shouldn’t put so much salt in the soup. 3. You shouldn’t drink so much alcohol. 4. You shouldn’t trip over the step into the kitchen. 5. You shouldn’t park here because it’s a restricted area. 6. I should have been told about these changes earlier. 7. You shouldn’t lean against the newly-painted wall. 8. You shouldn’t smoke too many cigarettes. 9. Children should go to bed early. 10. You shouldn’t stay up late. VII. 1. D 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. D 6. C 7. B 8. A VIII. 1. His father 2. A Christmas present 3. $20.00 4. A brooch 5. He wraps it in Christmas paper 6. Because she thinks she sees a real spider 7. Spiders are his favourite pets 8. under the Christmas tree IX. 1. You should wear a warm coat. 2. I think you should leave early. 3. You should take more exercise. 4. I think you should read a lot. 5. You should do that. 6. I think you should ride a bike. 7. I think you should buy a dog. X. 1. don’t doesn’t 2. went go 3. lives live 4. hasn’t doesn’t have 5. enough strong strong enough 6. a full of flowers garden a garden full of 7. no aren’t 8. for to 9. greens green 10. is are TEST 2 UNIT 4 I. 1. C 2. A 3. C 4. B 5. D 6. D 7. C 8. B 9. A 10. A II. 1. You shouldn’t drink at a dinner party until everyone is served. 120

2. You should raise your drink and say “kampai!” (cheers) before you drink. 3. You should use a small wet cloth at most Japanese restaurant to wash your hands before eating. 4. You shouldn’t use it as a napkin or to touch any part of your face. 5. You should use chopsticks during the meal 6. You shouldn’t tip in any situation in Japan. III. 31. should 32. should 33. have to 34. should 35. have to 36. don’t have to 37. should 38. don’t have to 39. shouldn’t 40. should IV. 1. don’t have to get up2. have to decide 3. don’t have to take 4. has to open 5. have to talk 6. don’t have to send 7. don’t have to explain 8. have to stop V. 1. should 2. should 3. shouldn’t 4. shouldn’t 5. should 6.shouldn’t 7. should 8. shouldn’t 9. should 10. should VI. 1. You should 2. You should 3. You shouldn’t 4. You shouldn’t 5. You shouldn’t 6. You should 7. You should 8. You shouldn’t VII. 1. In Indonesia. 2. In Samoa. 3. In Muslim countries. 4. In Canada and the US. 5. In Korea. VIII. 1. False 2. True 3. True 4. False 5. True IX. 1. E 2. C 3. B 4. D 5. A 6. T 7. T 8. F 9. T 10. F X. 1. True 2. False 3. True 4. False 5. True XI. 1. tradition 2. festival 3. celebrations 4. fortune 5. presentation 6. activities 7. wishes 8. enjoyment 9. water-throwing 10. heat XII. 1. A 2. C 3. D 4. B 5. D 6. A 7. B 8. C XIII. 1.The xoe dance has already been considered as a cultural and folklore activity of Thai ethnic people in Hoa Binh Province. 2.Ten centuries ago, xoe was performed on the occasion of the establishment of the hamlets and villages or during the festivals of the Thai ethnic people. 3.Now, it has developed into 36 dances and has become the symbol of solidarity among the ethnic groups in the northwest. 4.The xoe dance is performed by the boys and girls in the hamlets. 5.They hold hands to form a circle and dance together. 6.The musical instruments for the dance include lutes, drums, two-chord fiddles, gongs and cymbals. 7.For the Thai natives, they do not need to learn the xoe dance because they can dance automatically when they grow up. 8.Without the xoe dance, Thai boys and girls do not become lovely couples.

VI.

1. e

VII.

1. shouldn’t

2. should

3. shouldn’t

4. shouldn’t

5. should

6. should

7. shouldn’t

8. should

9. should

10. shouldn’t

2. c

3. a

4. h

VIII. 1. have to follow

5. b

6. g

2. has to answer

5. has to recycle

7. f

8. d

3. don’t have to go 4. Do... have to buy

6. doesn’t have to come 7. have to wear

9. don’t have to put 10. have to stop 13. had to leave

8. Does... have to do

11. Do... have to take

14. didn’t have to

12. doesn’t have to take

15. don’t have to do

IX.

1. have to 6. have to

7. mustn’t

8. must

9. don’t have to

10. should

1. about

2. down

3. of

4. on

5. with

6. off

7. on

8 for

9. at

10. in

1. had

2. causes

3. was worn

4. is giving

5.has travelled - started

6.have/ has

7. will have

8. eating

9. go

10. to use

XI. XII.

2. must

3. shouldn’t

4. don’t have to

5. should

1. Traditionally

2. greeting

3. obliged

4. impolite

5. hostess

6. respectful

7. differs

8. serving

9. generations

10. confusing

XIII. 1.g

2. a

3. d

4. h

5. e

6. f

7. b

8. c

XIV. 1. The British call the evening meal, dinner, supper or tea. 2.The British have toast with baked beans. 3.The Cheddar cheese sport event is held once a year. 4.The prize is a big round cheese. 5.Only women can take part in a pancake race. 6.It is dangerous to eat Christmas pudding because British people put a coin in the mixture. XV.

1. d

2. b

3. c

4. a

5. d

XVI. 1. They shouldn’t wear hats in the pagoda. 2. You should ask them about their customs. 3. Do I have to tip in a coffee shop? 4. Staff don’t need to wear vests in their company. 5. We should keep our traditional customs. 6. You must remove your shoes when entering a temple. 7. You mustn’t take photographs at some sacred places. 8. It’s Saturday tomorrow, so Jane doesn’t have to get up early.

TEST 3 UNIT 4 I.

1. a

2. d

3. b

4. a

5. d

II.

1. c

2. d

3. d

4. c

5. d

6. a

7. c

8. a

9. d

10. B

III.

1. a

2. b

3. d

4. c

5. a

6. d

7.a

8.b

9. c

10. b

IV.

1. c

2. f

3. i

4. g

5. b

6. h

7. e

8. a

9. j

10. d

1. wrapped

2. respect

3. reflects

6. to worship

7. to take

8. to reunite

4. to break

5. passed

121

1. B 5. A

2. D 6. C

II. III.

1. C 1. D

2. B 2. D

UNIT 5: FESTIVALS IN VIET NAM TEST 1 UNIT 5 3. D 4. A 7. D 8. D 3. A

3. A 4. C

4. B 5. D

5. D 6. A

7. C 122

8. B 9. C 10. A 11. B 12. B 13. A 14. B 15. B 16. 17.A 18. A 19. A 20. B 21. D 22. A 23. C 24. B 25. A 26. C 27. A IV. 1. be 2.was having 3. take 4. comment 5. lived/ would have 6. have learnt (have been learning) 7. wouldn’t buy 8. did (the children) see 9. playing 10. are waiting V. 1. A 2. B 3. A 4. D 5. D 6. C 7. A 8. C VI. 1. celebrate 2. traditional 3. spring 4. Therefore 5. kept 6. Because 7. However 8. served VII. 1. No, it isn’t. 2. Some weeks before the New Year, they dean their houses and paint the walls. 3. They visit their neighbors, friends and relatives. 4. Many different kinds of dishes are served. VIII. 1. A 2. B 3. C 4. A 5. D IX. 1. A 2. B 3. A 4. D 5. C X. 1. mustn’t to must 2. has to have to 3. is having was having 4. while because XI. 1. Lang Lieu couldn’t buy any special food, because he was very poor. 2. During Tet, Vietnamese people buy all kinds of sweets, so they make Chung cakes as well. 3. The Hung King Temple Festival was a local festival; however, it has become a public holiday in Viet Nam since 2007. 4. At the Mid-Autumn Festival, kids can sing, dance, and enjoy mooncakes; therefore, every child likes it very much. 5. We cannot swim in this part of the river because the water is highly polluted TEST 2 UNIT 5 I. 1. C 2. A 3. C 4. A 5. D 6. D 7. D 8. C II. 1. C 2. B 3. B 4. B 5. A III. 6. B 7. C 8. A 9. D 10. B 11. C 12. C 13. C 14. C 15. A IV. 1. pray 2. celebrate 3. honour/ worship 4. commemorate 5. symbolizes 6. hold 7. perform 8. honour/ worship V. 1. because 2. Moreover 3. Although 4. but 5. When 6. While 7. and 8. so VI. 1. C 2. A 3. D 4. A 5. B 6. C 7. A 8. C B

VII. 1. C 2. E 3. F 4. B 5. D 6. A 7. It is Chol Chnam Thmay Festival. 8. It is held in mid-April, in 3 days (4 days for the leap year). 9. They prepare new clothes, food and drinks for whole festival days, and they also repair, clean and decorate their house. 10. On the altar, they present 5 flower branches, 5 candles, 5 incense, 5 cereal seeds and fruit crops. 11. Major activities are bathing, dressing nice, bringing sacrifice gifts to the temple in good time which has been selected. 12. They cook rice and bring it to the temple on the second New Year day. 13. They do Buddha bathing and monk-bathing ceremony on the third day. 14. They go to the grave to pray for the souls of those who died. VIII. 1. because 2. when 3. and 4. Moreover 5. and 6. Therefore 7. First 8. Then 9. because 10. because/when 11. if 12. if 123

IX. 1. because 2. When 3. Moreover 4. So 5. Because 6. when 7. Therefore 8. although 9. It is held on 15th day of the eighth lunar month to celebrate biggest full moon in the year. 10. They prepare many different foods – moon cakes, candies, biscuits, jellies, and fruit. 11. They are given many nice lanterns and diverse funny masks. 12. They can light the lanterns during the Mid-Autumn night. 13. Because it takes place when people have had good crops. 14. It is a good example of the traditional culture of the Vietnamese X. 1. While the establishment of the club of Xoan singing in Phu Tho has brought new energy and strength, villagers in these communes give great contribution to the development of the clubs. 2. Valentine Day is not very popular in Viet Nam, yet people in big cities send gifts on that day. 3. Flower buds and blossoms are the symbols for new beginning because these two distinctive flowers are widely sold and purchased during Tet. 4. Homes are often cleaned and decorated before New Year’s Eve, and the kitchen needs to be cleaned before the 23rd night of the last month. 5. When street vendors rush into the city center with peach trees on their bicycles, the streets look like moving pink forests. XI. 1. On New Year’s Eve, the Vietnamese put fruits on the altar, and they also arrange watermelon and traditional cakes such as chung cakes. 2. While many people go to pagodas or churches on New Year’s to pray for the coming year, many others remain in their home in front of the altar to welcome the ancestors through prayer. 3. Although people from Western countries do not follow ancestor worship, ancestor worship is considered a type of religious practices in some Asian countries. 4. Because xoan singing is still in the memory of folk artists in Phu Tho province, they always try their best to hand down offspring the old style of singing in the activities of the clubs. (because) XII. King Hung Temple Festival 1. King Hung Temple Festival takes place yearly at King Hung Temple from the 8th to 11th day of the third lunar month. 2. During the festival, Vietnamese people go to King Hung Temple on Nghia Linh Mountain, Phu Tho Province to take part in this festival. 3. The festival features many folk games such as bamboo swings, rice cooking competitions, lion dance, human chess, water puppet performance, wrestling, crossbow shooting, etc. 4. On the 10th day, a national ceremony is held with participation of about 40 villages. 5. Governmental leaders will lead the procession up to Upper Temple. 6. There is a ceremony of offering incense, five-fruit trays, and specialities such as chung cakes and day cakes, which are two traditional foods of Vietnam. XIII. 1. The Giong Festival is held from the 6th to the 12th of the 4th lunar month in several venues around Ha Noi. 2. The festival commemorates Saint Giong who defeated the An. 3. It is also an opportunity to hope for abundant harvests and happy lives, and express patriotism. 4. During the festival, villagers do the statue bathing, processions of bamboo flowers to Soc Temple. 5. The festival also provides many entertaining activities, including folk games and traditional singing performances. 6. The festival has been recognized by UNESCO as an intangible cultural heritage of mankind. TEST 3 UNIT 5 I.

1. a

2. c

3. b

4. b

5. d

II.

1. d

2. b

3. a

4. c

5. B

III.

1. b

2. d

3. a

4.d

5.c

6.b

7. a

8. c

9. b

10. d

IV.

1.b

2. a

3. c

4. d

5.b

6. a

7.d

8.c

9. b

10. a 124

V. VI.

VI. VII.

1. performed

2. offer

3. worshipping

4. commemorate

6.After Jackie is done with her chores, she will take out the trash.

5.cheering

6. preserve

7. floating

8. to pray

7.If you study for the test, you will do much better.

1. simple

2. compound

3. complex

4. complex

5. compound

8.Rex practiced his guitar until he could play the song perfectly.

6.simple

7. complex

8. complex

9. compound

10. compound

9.Before we could get back to shore, it started to rain hard.

11. complex

12. compound

13. simple XV.

1. Where is the Elephant Race Festival usually held?

1. otherwise

2. but

3. therefore

4. or

5. Moreover

6. however

7. so

8. and

9. However

10. but

2. How many elephants joined the elephant race on March 12 in Lak District?

1. decorate

2. fortune

3. incense

4. ceremony

5. crowded

3. When does the Lim festival take place?

6. pray

7. offerings

8. defeated

VIII. 1. has become 5. has taken 9. to attend IX.

10.Whenever I saw him, he was always carrying a plastic shopping bag.

4. How long does the spring festival of Bai Dinh Pagoda last?

2. was held - became 3. are waiting

4. arranged

5. What was Saint Giong Festival recognized as by UNESCO?

6. were playing

8. are performed

6. Why is Vu Lan Festival so-called “Xa toi vong nhan” festival?

7. come

7. By whom is the Kate Festival celebrated?

10. preparing

1. on

2. in

3. for

4. At

5. with

8. How far is the Perfume Pagoda from Hanoi?

6. since

7. for

8. on - for

9. in

10. in

9. Which festival is held to commemorate the Kings of the Tran dynasty?

1. d

2. c

3. a

4. d

5. c

6. b

7. b

XI.

1.b

2.a

3. d

4. d

5. c

6. c

7. a

XII.

1. F

2. T

3. T

4. F

5. T

6. T

8. a

B. 1. Ok Om Bok Festival takes place on the Full Moon day of the tenth month in Vietnamese Lunar Calendar. 2.Ok Om Bok Festival is celebrated for worshipping the Moon. 3.Khmer people float their lanterns on Ba Om Lake. 4.A Ngo boat is 25 - 30 meters long. 5.There are about 40 to 60 boatmen in every “Ngo” boat. 6.Ok Om Bok is an important festival in Khmer people’s life because it has sacred meaning in spiritual life of these people. XIII. 1. Hue is far from Hanoi, but Peter often travels to Hanoi by motorbike. 2.Christian went to Soc Trang because he wanted to join Ok Om Bok Festival. 3.Although Sebastien is a French, he plays Vietnamese folk games well. 4.He has to join the festival, so that he can play Vietnamese folk games. 5.We had a good time in spite of the terrible weather. 6.Susan went to the gym three times a week in order to be fit for the skiing. 7.It is two months since my family went to Huong Pagoda Festival. 8.You won’t get in to see the show unless you have reserved seats. 9.Brian had an interest in Vietnamese cultural and spiritual events. 10.You should / have to start early; otherwise, you will get stuck in the traffic. XIV. 1. Because the world is getting warmer, polar bears are in danger of becoming extinct. 2.As there weren’t enough students, they closed the village school. 3.I really enjoyed the concert although the music was too loud. 4.When he got a creampie smashed in his face, everyone laughed. 5.Paul found somebody’s wallet on the ground while he was walking to the bus stop. / While Paul was walking to the bus stop, he found somebody’s wallet on the ground. 125

10. What do children commonly do to celebrate the Mid-Autumn Festival? UNIT 6: FOLK TALES TEST 1 UNIT 6 I. 1. C 2. B 3. C 4. A 5. D II. 1. A 2. D 3. C 4. B 5. C III. 1. at 2. on 3. at 4. (X) 5. (X) 6. (X) 7. (X) 8. in 9. (X) 10. in IV. 1. saw 2. were you doing 3. didn’t visit 4. rained 5. was reading 6. ate 7. were running 8. Did you find 9. did she dance 10. were watching V. 1. playing 2.Were you studying 3. doing 4. go 5. sleeping 6. had 7. break 8. went 9. was 10. turned VI. 1. taught/ to ride/ was 2. do - go/ drives 3. are going to 4. Did you use to play/ lived 5. spent/ repairing VII. 1. went 2. swam 3. was drinking 4. saw 5. was 6. beat 7. asked 8. told 9. stayed 10. had VIII. 1. “aged” 2. he did not have anyone else to look after him.(/ he was an orphan) 3. making and selling buns and cakes 4. go round the village to sell cakes 5. his grandmother was not strong enough to work/ his grandmother fell ill. IX. 1. I began learning English three years ago. 2. I did four exercises last night. 3. He telephoned his wife at two o’clock. 4. Mr. Green was in Viet Nam for ten years. 5. I got up this morning at half past five. 6. I had bread and omelets had for breakfast this morning. 7. I left home at six o’clock. 8. I went to school this morning by bicycle. 9. I watched television after my homework last night. 10. I went to bed at ten o’clock last night. X. 1. We were having dinner while they were listening to the radio. 2. The fire started when she was sleeping. 3. What were you doing when it began to rain? 126

Personality: considerate, brave, greedy, mean, cheerful, cruel, fierce, determined, clever, wise, cunning, loyal, thoughtful, kind, honest

4. When the farmer started whistling, he was ploughing the field. 5. What were they doing when you came? 6. What was happening when she came? 7. The man came in when she was reading a book. 8. The volcano erupted when they were working in the field. 9. The lava hit the town when the ship was leaving the harbor. 10. Someone hit the headmaster on the head when he was going to his car. TEST 2 UNIT 6 I. 1. A 2. C

3. B

4. C

5. A

6. D

II. 1. C 2. A

3. B

4. A

5. D

6. C

III.

1. was reading – heard

4. Were you watching – phoned 7. were waiting – arrived

VI.

VII.

7. A

12. rang

6.What was Jack doing while you were cooking dinner? 7.This time last week my family was/ were visiting my grandmother. 8.It wasn’t snowing when I left. 9.Were you sleeping when I phoned you last night? 10.While the children were talking, the teacher came into class. VIII. 1. was playing

5. was waiting – came 6. invited – was visiting

IX.

2. was talking 3. was practicing – was reading

VI.1. was doing

2. were shopping 3. was chatting 4. were driving 5. was making

6. were cooking

7. was sleeping

8. were having 9. were drinking 10. was trying 6. B

4. D

11. Did... visit

5. met – was wearing 6. broke – were playing

4. were climbing – visited 5. was talking – entered 6. was making – went7. was crossing – stepped – fel8. began – was planting 9. arrived – was writing 10. were walking – heard

2. D 3. B

10. didn’t accept

5.Sarah and Luke weren’t surfing the Internet at that time.

9. began – was sitting 10. went – were having

VII. 1. B

9.knew

1. I was playing computer games all day yesterday.

4.We were having dinner when Tim arrived.

1. saw – were trying 2. was walking – felt 3. were driving – appeared

1. came – were watering

4. Did ... cry 8. told

2. came – was having 3. went – was raining

7. didn’t want – was waiting 8. rang – was watching

3. travelled 7. turned

3.Sid wasn’t cleaning his room at 8p.m last night.

8. B

8. was not driving – happened

4. was she driving – happened

2. didn’t play 6. did ... teach

2.Were your friends waiting for you all that time?

9. fell – was painting 10. were you doing IV.

1. enjoyed 5. didn’t study

5. A

7. B

8. D 9. B

10. A

2. Were... driving

3. was raining

4. were travelling

5. wasn’t listening

6. was living

7. were... doing

8. wasn’t studying

9. Was... skiing

10. weren’t sleeping

1. drove

2. were watching

3. Did you see

4. was playing

5. made

6. didn’t know

7. was your father doing

8. left

9. were walking

10. wasn’t queuing

X. 1. joined

2. were lying

3. were they doing

4. walked - was talking

5. lived - were living

6. did you take - were travelling

7. was crossing - hit

8. saw - called

9. was doing - was making

10. came - carried

11. were playing - called

12. said - still tried

2. was looking - saw

3. saw - fell

XI. 1. broke - was driving

VIII. 1. One night her sisters went to a ball at the palace.

4. were trying - stopped

2. She felt very sad.

5. Was... smoking - turned 6. was - slept

7. was running - was having 8. phoned - were sleeping 9. asked - released

3. Her/The fairy godmother appeared and helped her.

10. were surfing - found

11. was walking - heard

12. were - went

4. She danced with the prince.

13. did... go - took

14. arrived - said

15. met - wasn’t going - was going

XII.

5. The prince and Cinderella were married and lived happily ever after.

1. on

2. up

6. about

7. into

3. with

4. for

5. On

8. to

9. into

10. for - at

IX. 1. B 2. C 3. A

4. C

5. D

6. B

1. c

2. d

3. a

4. b

5. d

II.

1. b

2. d

3. a

4. c

5. a

6. b

7. d

8.c

III.

1. b

2. d

3. e

4. f

5. h

6. g

7. a

8. c

VIII. 1.g

2. e

3. d

4. h

5. b

6. f

7. a

8. c

IV.

1. cunning

2. generous

3. brave

4. cheerful

5. greedy

XIV. 1. a

2. c

3. d

4. b

5. c

6. d

7. a

8. b

6. cruel

7. wicked

8. evil

9. fierce

10. mean

XV.

1. e

2. d

3. a

4. f

5. b

6. c

1.F

2. T

3. T

4. F

5. T

6. F

7. F

7. C

8. B

9. D 10. B

XIII. 1. received

TEST 3 UNIT 6 9.a

10. b

2. were having

3. didn’t you answer - was taking

4. hasn’t seen – started

5. is flying - will arrive

6. was raining

7. was - read

8. Have you ever heard

9. to take

10. living

V. Characters: dancer, beast, fairy, knight, dancer, witch, dragon, woodcutter, prince, emperor, ogre, wolf, princess, eagle, tortoise, fox 127

128

6.Although Sylvia has no interest in folklore, she enjoyed the story.

5. The recycling helps people save natural resources. D. WRITING I. 1. Dogs can swim better than cats. 2. Minh really enjoys hanging out with friends. 3. It is very interesting to play beach games. 4. He spends all his free time looking after his garden. II. 1. They used to start these machines by hand. 2. He used to get up late. 3. I used to listen to the radio. 4. They used to have a dog. 5. My brother used to serve in the army. 6. Barbara used to be keen on travel. 7. He used to do morning exercise in the park when he was young. 8. The man used to spend his holiday in the mountain when he was young. 9. Before he had the car, he used to go to work by bike. 10. I used to get up early when I was young. TEST YOURSELF2

7.It’s two years since my mother last told a fairy tale.

1.d

2. a

3. c

4. a

5. b

8. I suggest you should join the beginner’s class.

II.

1. c

2. b

3. d

4. a

5. b

9.Cinderella was written in French by Charles Perrault in 1697.

III.

1. festival

2. customs

3. worship

4. hero

6. folk

7. fables

8. perform

9. reunion

1. Robin Hood was born near the end of the 12th century.

2.The England King at the time was cruel and greedy. 3.Robin lived with his loyal servants in Sherwood Forest. 4.Robin Hood and his servants decided to live in the forest because they didn’t want to be slaves of King John. 5.There were more than 200 outlaws in Sherwood Forest. 6.The people called Robin Hood Saint Robin, and Robin, Sheriff of Sherwood Forest. XVI. 1. What an exciting fable! 2.It was such a good book that I couldn’t stop reading it. 3.While the children were doing their homework, I got home. 4.It’s difficult for her to remember all the story. 5.Beauty and the Beast is more interesting than SleepingBeauty.

10.When I was having a shower, the telephone rang. MIDDLE TERM TEST

IV.

A. PHONETICS I. 1. D 2. C 3. C 4. B 5. B 6. C 7. A 8. A 9. A 10. D 11. D 12. B 13. C 14. C 15. C B. VOCABULARY AND GRAMMAR I. 1. C 2. B 3. B 4. D 5. A 6. C 7. D 8. B II. 1. doing 2. writing 3. taking 4. playing 5. collecting 6. riding 7. watching 8. washing 9. listening 10. eating III. 1. working 2. to visit 3. make 4. helping 5. taking 6. doing 7. play 8. to watch 9. socializing 10. surfing IV. 1. used to smoke 2. used to 3. didn’t use to drink 4. used to have 5. didn’t use to like 6. used to live 7. used to play 8. didn’t use to study V. 1. as pretty 2. more expensive 3. more important 4. best 5. happier 6. most international 7. stronger 8. more comfortable 9. better 10. most delightful 11. most careful 12. more interesting 13. more precious 14. warmer 15. so good C. READING I. 1. in 2. nice 3.took 4. on 5. drove 6. stopped 7. afternoon 8. a 9. get 10. late II. 1. It exists in the Central Highlands of Viet Nam. 2. It is held once a year / annually. 3. They give gong performances, highlighting the gong culture of their own province. 4. No, they aren’t. 5. No. it isn’t. III. 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F 6. T 7. F 8. T 9. T 10. T IV. 1. fifteen 2. dawn 3. pump out 4. find the shore 5. wading V. 1. It was founded on March 26th, 1931. 2. It builds characters. 3. It encourages good citizenship and personal fitness. 4. It is named “Green Sunday” because it gives more green colors to the city and is done on Sunday.

1. c

1. A (of carving)

129

VI.

2. a

3. b

4. d

5. b

6. c

8. a

10. orge 10.b

3. D (historical)

4. B (not to take off)

5. A (three-week)

6. B (arrived)

7. C (Ø)

8. A (Thanks to)

9. D (its natural)

10. A (annually)

1. is held

2. haven’t had

3. takes

4. was walking

7. was recognised

8. jumped - ran

9. will you do

10. ceased

1. respectful

2. customarily

6. frightened

3. performance

7. unkind - badly 8. boastful

VIII. 1.h

2. a

3. d

4. b

5. k

6. g

7. f

8. e

VIII. 1.b

2. c

3. a

4. d

5. b

6. a

7. c

8.d

X. A. 1. T

2. F

3. T

4.F

5. F

6. T

B. 1. d

2. b

3. b

4. c

5. a

XI.

9.c

2. A (was flying)

5. Are you watching 6. weren’t playing VII.

7. d

5. preserve

4. imaginary

5. woodcutter

9. magician

10. wickedly

9. i

10. c

1. Pingxi Lantern Festival is celebrated on the fifteenth day of the first lunar month. 2.Today’s children hardly listen to stories from their elder because they are living in the digital era. 3.Little Red Riding Hood has important lessons about the dangers of talking to strangers. 4.Once upon a time, there was a beautiful princess who didn’t live in a castle. 5.When Cinderella entered the palace, everybody was dancing happily. 6.My family have the custom of visiting pagodas on the first day of the lunar New Year. 7.Visitors make offerings of incense, flowers and fruits to worship Buddha at the pagoda.

8.Most of the children like to imagine and visualize the stories while listening to the folktales, especially the fairy tales. KEY GRAMMAR 130

UNIT 1

7. Ann/ fancy/ do /DIY/ in her free time. WHICH KIND OF JUICE DO YOU DISLIKE DRINKING THE MOST? 8. My father/ prefer/ not eat/ out. MY FATEHR PREFERS NOT EATING / NOT TO EAT OUT 9.Mr.Smith/ love/ go/ shopping/ at weekend. MS.SMITH LOVES GOING/TO GO SHOPPING AT WEEKENDS 10.Everyone/ adore/ receive/ presents/ on their birthday. EVERYONE ADORES RECEIVING PRESENTS ON THEIR BIRTHDAYS. Giải thích: Viết câu ở thì hiện tại đơn để diễn tả sự yên thích, dung danh động từ(V-ing)sau những động từ chỉ sự yêu thích như: adore, enjoy, fancy, don’t mind, dislike, detest” dùng danh động từ(hoặc động từ nguyên thể có “to: sau các động từ :like, love, hate, prefer” BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG NÂNG CAO Bài 5: Đánh dấu(V) trước câu đúng, đánh dấu(X) trước câu sai và sửa lại cho đúng: 1. X My sister doesn’t mind to look after my cat.--> LOOKING(MIND-V-ING) 2. X Jim dislikes going to the library because he likes reading books. ->LIKES(SAI VỀ LOGIC) 3.X I prefer to not go out today. NOT TO GO(PHỦ ĐỊNH NOT ĐỨNG TRƯỚC TO) 4.I used to like watching cartoons on TV. 5X.Does Mrs.Smith enjoy to cook? COOKING( ENJOY-V-ING) 6.XMary hates doing the housework and take after her baby sister.--> TAKING(SAU HATE LÀ DOING RỒI NÊN PHẢI ĐỂ DOING SONG SONG CẤU TRÚC 7. In my freetime, I love to do DIY with my sister. 8.XJosh detests to socialise with his co-workers. SOCIALISING(DETEST+VING) 9.XWhich movie does he fancy to watch? WATCHING (FANCY+V-ING) 10.I prefer hanging out with friends to playing computer games. Bài 6: Điền dạng đúng của các động từ chcho sẵn vào chỗ trống sao cho hợp lý: socialize detest surf write rely read adore Hang out 1.My brother likes____TO SURF/ SURFING______the Internet looking for new music. 2.I dislike____RELYING_____too much on other people. I want to be independent. 3.Josh enjoys____HANING OUT______with his classmates after school. 4.My sister and I fancy___READING____novels when we have free time. 5.He’s very artitic. He enjoys____WRITTING____poems in his free time. 6.James____DETESTS_____talking with his neighbors because he finds them annoying. 7.My uncles loves____TO SOCIALIZE/SOCIALIZING______with other people . he has many friends. 8.Ann______ADORES____working with children. She’s a teacher. Bài 7: Khoanh tròn vào đáp án đúng: Nowadays, leisure activities are totally different from the past. Many people no longer enjoy(1) in outdoor activities after school. In stead, they(2)playing computer games or (3) the web in their free time. Some people (4)too much on computer and the Internet. For example, they prefer(5) messages to having a face-toface conversation with friends. Even when people (6)out with their friends, they rarely talk but they use their phones to surf web. However, many people dislike the Internet and the(7)world. They hate to waste time on the computer and(8)other activities such as reading, shopping or sporting. 1.A.participate B.to participate C. participating D. participates 2.A.fancy B.don’t mind C.dislike D.hate 3.A.sailing B. surfing C.swimming D.diving 4.A.play B.rely C.addict D.use 5.A.send B.to send C.to sending D. sends 6.A.play B.rely C.meet D.hang 7.A.virtual B.real C.fake D.new 8.A.dislike B.detest C.enjoy D.mind Bài 8: Đọc doạn văn sau và điền (T-true)trước câu đúng với nội dung bài đọc , điền (F-false) trước câu không đúng với nội dung bài đọc: ___T____1.People enjoy various indoor activities Britain. ____F___2.British people spend more than half of their free time watching television.

BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN: Bài 1: Hoàn thành những câu sau, sử dụng dạng nguyên thể có (to)(toV) của động từ trong ngoặc: 1.Everyone likes (eat)__TO EAT_______ice cream. 2.Do you prefer (read)____TO READ____books in your freetime? 3.I hate(watch)____TO WATCH____horror movies? 4.Many people prefer(go)__TO GO____travelling on holidays. 5.My father loves(play)____TO PLAY______golf with his friends. 6.I prefer (not stay)____NOT TO STAY______up too late. 7. What does your sister love(do)__TO DO_______in her spare time? 8.I used to prefer(hang out)___TO HANG OUT______with my friends at weekend. 9. I think not many people like(listen)__TO LISTEN______to her music. 10. Teenagers love (surf)___TO SURF______the web to while away their freetime. Bài 2: Hoàn thành những câu sau, sử dụng dạng danh động từ (V-ing) của động từ trong ngoặc: 1.My mother dislikes(prepare)__PREPARING_____the meals. 2.Do you enjoy(do)__DOING______DIY in your freetime? 3. I detest (have) _____HAVING_____a conversation with John. 4.Do you think Jane prefers(not socialise)__NOT SOCIALISING_________with other students? 5.I don’t mind(explain)__EXPLAINING_____the problem again. 6.Ann fancies(listen)____LISTENING_______to songs of her favourite singer. 7.My friend adores(spend)___SPENDING____time with her cats. 8.I always love(try)___TRYING_____new things when I go travelling. 9.Mr.Smith hates(drive)___DRIVING______his old car. 10.Anne prefers(not go)___NOT GOING______out too late. Bài 3:Điền dạng thích hợp của động từ trong ngoặc để hoàn thành các câu sau: 1.Did you enjoy(watch)__WATCHING____the comedy last night? 2.Many people prefer(do)_DOING/TO DO_____gardening after their retirement. 3.My cat dislikes(sleep)___SLEEPING_____on the floor. 4.My father doesn’t mind(work)___WORKING___hard. 5.My cousin doesn’t like(study)___STUDYING/ TO STUDY______Math and Chemistry. 6.They dislike(talk)____TALKING______with each other. 7.Jim and Jane don’t fancy(go)___GOING_______out tomorrow. 8.Did you hate(eat)__EATING/TO EAT____vegetables when you was small? 9.she didn’t prefer(tell)___TELLING/ TO TELL_____him about her plan. 10.James enjoys(have)_HAVING______dinner in a luxury restaurant. 11.I hope my mother will enjoy(spend)___SPENDING____time with her grandchildren. 12.Some people enjoy(take)___TAKING___a shower in the morning. 13.I think your brother won’t mind(lend)_LENDING_______you a helping hand. 14.My boyfriend dislike(wait)_____WAITING______. 15.What do you detest(do)___DOING_______the most? Giaỉ thích: Bài 4: Dựa vào các từ cho sẵn, viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh: 1.Peter / prefer/ play/ computer games/ in his free time. PETER PREFERS PLAYING / TO PLAY COMPUTER GAMES IN HIS FREE TIME. 2.You/ hate/ do/ the washing? DO YOU HATE DOING/ TO DO THE WASHING? 3.My father/ enjoy/ play/ sports/ and/ read/ books. MY FATHER ENJOYS PLAYING SPORTS AND READING BOOKS 4.The teacher/ not mind/ help/ you/ with difficult exercises. THE TEACHER DOESN’T MIND HELPING YOU WITH DIFFICULT EXERCISES. 5.Jane/ not fancy/ read/ science books. JANE DOESN’T FANCY READING SCIENCE BOOKS. 6.Which kind of juice/ you/ dislike/ drink/ the most? 131

132

_______3.The most common leisure activity in the UK is visiting or entertaining friends or relations. ___F____4. All house holds have at least one television set. ___F____5.British people are all gardeners. ____T___6. All towns in Britain have one or more DIY centers and garden centres. UNIT 2 BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN: Bài 1: Cho dạng so sánh hơn của các tính từ trong bảng sau: Tính từ So sánh hơn Tính từ So sánh hơn Bad WORSE Modern MORE WONDERFUL Clever CLEVERER Old OLDER Convenient MORE CONVENIENT Peaceful MORE PEACEFUL Far FURTHER/ FARTHER pretty PRETTIER Fresh FRESHER Quiet QUIETER Friendly FRIENDLIER Smart SMARTER Generous MORE GENEROUS Soon SOONER Good BETTER Strong STRONGER Happy HAPPIER Ugly UGLIER High HIGHER Warm WARMER Little LESS Wonderful MORE WONDERFUL Long LONGER Young YOUNGER

15.Which dress is_______MORE SUITABLE___for me?(suitable) 16.You should be_____MORE CONFIDENT_____and show your best.(confident). 17.They said that the conference was_____MORE INTERESTING___than usual(interesting). 18.Jane is so pretty but her sister is even______PRETTIER____(pretty). 19.They work hard to have____BETTER____life(good). 20.John is____MORE INTELLIGENT______than the rest of the class.(intelligent) Bài 4: Biết câu so sánh hơn dùng từ gợi ý: 0.Bob / strong /Jim. Bob is stronger than Jim. 1.My current job / demanding/ my last one. MY CURRENT JOB IS MORE DEMANDING THAN MY LAST ONE 2.Today/ Jane/ beautiful/ usual. TODAY JANE IS MORE BEAUTIFUL THAN USUAL 3.Yesterday / it/ cold/ today. YESTERDAY IT WAS COLDER THAN TODAY 4.Fruits and vegetables / healthy / fast food. FRUITS AND VEGETABLEA ARE HEALTHIER THAN FASTFOOD 5. Life in the countryside / peaceful/ life in the city. LIFE IN THE COUNTRYSIDE IS MORE PEACEFUL THAN LIFE IN THE CITY. 6.Your sister/ good/ you think. YOUR SISTER IS BETTER THAN YOU THINK 7.Who / intelligent/ you/ in your class? WHO IS MORE INTELLIGENT THAN YOU IN YOUR CLASS? 8. Ann/ short / you? IS ANN SHORTER THAN YOU? 9. Last year/ his salary / low/ this year. LAST YEAR HIS SALARY WAS LOWER THAN THIS YEAR 10. Bob/ look / strong/ his brother. BOB LOOKS STRONGER THAN HIS BROTHER

Bài 2:Khoanh tròn vào đáp án đúng: 1.Living in this small town is (more peaceful/ peaceful more) than I expected. 2.Nowadays people are (more anxious/ anxious more) about pollution than before. 3.Today you look ( happier/ more happy) than usual. 4.This year I will move to a (bigger/ biggest) city. 5.This experience is (more exciting/ most exciting) than I expected. 6. Who is (more intelligent/ most intelligent) between two of them. 7. This song is (catchier/ more catchy) than that song. 8. The new sofa is (costlier/ more costly) than the old one 9.Our family will move to a (more comfortable/ more comfortable than) place next year. 10. I hope you will get (best/ better) the next time I see you. 11.James has (many/ more) books than Paul. 12.She is (more independent/ most independent) than the last time I saw her. 13. Today my sister (is more quiet/ quieter) than usual. 14.Jane is(more pretty/ prettier) than Ann. 15.The weather is (hotter/ hottest) than yesterday.

Bài 5: Sắp xếp các từ sau thành câu hoan chỉnh: 1.London /think/ is/ than/ more/ I/ New York/ expensive. I THINK LONDON IS MORE EXPENSIVE THAN NEW YORK 2.Important/ is/ Health/ than/ money/ more. HEALTH IS MORE IMPORTANT THAN MONEY 3.in / in/ city/ better/ the / is/ in /than / country/ convenient / than / is. TRAVELLING IN THE CITY IS MORE CONVENIENT THAN IN THE COUNTRYSIDE 4.in / health care/ city/ better/ the / is/ in / than / countryside/ the service/ the. THE HEALTH CARE SERVICE IN THE CITY IS BETTER THAN IN THE COUNTRYSIDE 5.living/ is/ than / in /rural/ more/ areas / living/ urban /in / comfortable/ LIVING IN RURAL AREAS IS MORE COMFORTABLE THAN LIVING IN URBAN AREAS 6.in/ pasture / this/ that/ area / richer / is / area. PASTURE IN THIS AREAS IS RICHER THAN THAT AREA 7. Peter/ better / Math/ than / at/ is / Tom. PETER IS BETTER AT MATH THAN JOHN 8.crowded/ cities/ often / than / more/ are/ the / countryside. CITIES ARE OFTEN MORE CROWDED THAN THE COUNTRYSIDE 9.this /cake/ is /that/ more/ one/ delicious/ than? IS THIS CAKE MORE DELICOUS THAN THAT ONE? 10.Who/ more/ than / Tom / can /in / intelligent / class/ his? WHO CAN BE MORE INTELLIGENT THAN TOME IN HIS CLASS? Bài 6: Cho dạng so sánh hơn của các trạng từ trong bảng sau:

Bài 3 :Hoàn thành các câu sau với dạng so sánh hơn của tính từ trong ngoặc: 1.Living in the city is______MORE CONVENIENT__than living in the country(convenient). 2.Mrs.Smith is____YOUNGER_____than I thought.(young). 3.Houses in big cities are much_________than those in my hometown(tall). 4.No one in my class is_________TALLER __than Jim (smart). 5. The senior prom would be_____MORE EXCITING____than any other proms(exciting). 6. I have______LESS____courage than my brother(little). 7. His health condition is getting____WORSE______(bad). 8.You are_____CLEVERER____than you think(clever). 9.This computer is much___MORE EXPENSIVE______than mine(expensive) 10.I always dream of a____MORE MODERN______house to live in(modern). 11.They are______MORE SKILLFUL____than they used to be(skillful). 12.Life in this village is__ MORE PEACEFUL __than anywhere else.(peaceful). 13.I think people in the countryside are_____FRIENDLIER___than city dwellers.(friendly) 14.This year, the prize for the winner is__MORE VALUABLE____than last year.(valuable)

Trạng từ 133

So sánh hơn

Trạng từ

So sánh hơn 134

Badly Conveniently Early Far Fast Fluently Happily Hard Slowly well

WORSE MORE CONVENIENTLY EARLIER FARTHER/FURTHER FASTER MORE FLUENTLY MORE HAPPILY HADRER SLOWER BETTER

Late Smartly responsibly Patiently Generously Cleverly Quickly Suitable Beautifully Strongly

2.The Australian athlete/run/ slowly/ the Korean athlete. THE AUSTRALIAN ATHELETIC RUNS MORE SLOWLY THAN THE KOREAN 3.Cats/ walk/ quiet/ dogs. CATS WALK MORE QUIETLY THAN DOGS 4.James/ reply/ swiftly/ Peter. JAMES REPLIED MORE SWIFTLY THAN PETER 5. The tiger/ hunt/ ferociously/ the wolf. THE TIGER HUNTS MORE FEROCIOUSLY THAN THE WOLF 6.Your idea/ work/ well/ mine. YOUR IDEA WORKS BETTER THAN MINE 7.I/ eat/ vegetables/ often/ I used / to. I EAT VEGETABLES MORE OFTEN THAN I USED TO 8.Today/ you/ perform/ badly/ yesterday. TODAY YOU PERFORM WORSE THAN YESTERDAY Bài 10:Viết lại câu sau cho nghĩa không đổi, sử dụng cấu trúc so sánh hơn “more /less” 0.Ann speaks French more fluently than James. James speaks French less fluently than Ann. 1.Today the sun shines more brightly than yesterday. YETSERDAY THE SUN SHONE LESS BRIGHTLY THAN TODAY 2.This cake is more freshlt made than that one. THAT CAKE IS LESS FRESHLY MADE THAN THIS ONE 3.Jim behaves more politely than his younger brother. JIM’S YOUNGER BROTHER BEHAVES LESS POLITELY THAN JIM 4.Teenagers act more violently these days than in the past. TEENAGERS ACTED MORE VIOLENTLY IN THE PAST THAN THESE DAYS 5.The doctor treats his patiently than he should. THE DOCTOR SHOULD TREAT HIS PATIENTS MORE PATIENTLY THAN HE DOES 6.My sister speaks more quickly than I. I SPEAK LESS QUICKLY THAN MY SISTER. 7.Now Mary drives more carefully than she used to. MARY USED TO DRIVE LESS CAREFULLY THAN SHE DRIVES NOW 8.This summer I go to the beach more often than the last summer. THE LAST SUMMER I WENT TO THE BEACH LESS OFTEN THAN THIS SUMMER BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO Bài 11:Hoàn thành câu, sử dụng dạng so sánh hơn của các tính từ hoặc trạng từ cho sẵn Angrily large soft Cleverly Warm comfortably hard rich costly beautifully

LATER SMARTLY MORE RESPONSIBLY MORE PATIENTLY MORE GENEROUSLY MORE CLEVERLY MORE QUICKLY MORE SUITABLY MORE BEAUTIFULLY MORE STRONGLY

Bài 7: Khoanh tròn vào đáp án đúng: 1.The teacher asked me to speak___________. A.loud B.louder C.more loud 2.Today you looks________than usual. A.more confident B.more confidently C. confidently 3.Your house is_______decorated than me. A.more beautiful B.more beautifully C.beautifully. 4.No one in my class runs__________than Peter. A.more fastly B.more better C.faster. 5.This time you did much________! A.better B.more better C.more well 6.You have to work_________If you want to succeed. A.more hardly B.hardlier C.harder 7.Today I come to class_________than usual A.more early B.earlier C. early 8.You need to work___________, or you will make a lot of mistakes. A.more careful B. more carefully C. carefully 9.She walks__________than other people. A.slower B.slowlier C.more slowier 10.The blue skirt suits you_______than the black one. B.more better C.more well A.better Bài 8: Hoàn thành các câu sau với dạng so sánh hơn của các trạng từ trong ngoặc: 1.I speak English____ MORE FLUENTLY______now than last year.(fluently). 2.They smiled____ MORE HAPPILY____than before(happily). 3.Tom arrived___ EARLIER______than I expected(early). 4.We will meet __LATER______in the afternoon(late). 5.Mary dances____ MORE GRACEFULLY______than anyone else(gracefully) 6.Could you speak_____LOUDER____?(loud) 7.Jim could do the tast___BETTER___Jane(well). 8.We walked____ MORE SLOWLLY___than other people(slowly). 9.Planes can fly____HIGHER______than birds(high). 10.I can throw the ball______FARTHER____than anyone else in my team(far). 11.James drives___ MORE CAREFULLY____than his wife(carefully). 12.I visit my grandmother___ MORE OFTEN____than my brother.(often) 13.No one can run___FASTER____than John(fast). 14.My sister cooks____WORSE____than I(badly). 15. Everyone in the company is working____WORSE____than ever before(hard).

1.Her voice is_____SOFTER____than mine. 2.James can sing____MORE BEAUTIFULLY____than many singer. 3.We can live____MORE COMFORTABLY_____in the countryside than in the city. 4.We hoped we would own a _____LARGER____apartment. 5.This mordern computer is_____COSTLIER____than that old-fashioned one. 6.My new house is_____MORE CLEVERLY____designed than my old one. 7.My father reacted____MORE ANGRILY_____to my misbehaviors than my mother. 8.John studies_____HARDER_____than anyone else in the class. 9.It is getting____WARMER_____today so we can go out. 10. People in the city are___RICHER____than people in the countryside. Bài 12; Gạch chân lỗi sai trong mỗi câu sau và sửa lại cho đúng: 1.Their life has been more comfortably since they moved to the city.--> COMFORTABLE 2.She looks more pretty in this white dress. PRETTIER 3.The manager wants us to work more hardly. HARDER 4.This week you looks more healthily than last week. HEALTHIER 5.Everyone in my town is looking for more better crop this year. BETTER

Bài 9:Hoàn thành các Câu sau với dạng so sánh hơn của các trang từ trong ngoặc: 1.I/ play/ tennis/ badly/ Tom. I PLAY TENNIS WORSE THAN TOM 135

136

6.Jim runs more fastly than his friends. FASTER 7.I think a settle life is more better than a nomadic life. BETTER 8.Today Jim performs less confident than usual. CONFIDENTLY 9.The heavy rain makes it more difficultly to drive. DIFFICULT 10.Their team preformed much more well than our team. BETER Bài 13; Viết lại câu bằng từ đã cho sao cho nghĩa câu không thay đổi theo mẫu: 0.This exercise is easier than that one. That exercise is more difficult than that one. 1.Mr Smith is wealthier than Mr.Brown. Mr Brown_IS POORER THAN MR.SMITH 2.My house is smaller than my parent’s house. My parent’s house__IS BIGGER THAN MY HOUSE 3.The black dress is more expensive than the red one. The red dress _IS CHEAPER THAN THE BLACK ONE 4.Today it is colder than yesterday. Yesterday__IT WAS WARMER THAN TODAY 5.I don’t think you are taller than me. I don’t think I___AM SHORTER THAN YOU 6.Is Jim worse at Math than John? Is John____BETTER AT MATH THAN JIM? 7. Jim looks much younger than his classmates. Jim’s classmates__LOOK MUCH OLDER THAN HIM 8.Your hair is longer than mine. My hair__IS SHORTER THAN YOURS Bài 14: Khoanh tròng vào đáp án đúng: Benefit of living in the countryside. While many people prefer city life, a lot of people want to send their life in a rural area. The countryside are often(1)_________than the city because there are not as many factories and traffic as in big cities. The country folk can be (2) _________and they often live(3) _________than city dwellers. Besides, life in the countryside is(4) _________and peaceful because the crime rate is much(5) _________. The rural areas are(6) _________populated than the urban area but the neighbors are(7) _________and more helpful. Life in the countryside is(8) _________for old people than the energetic youngsters. 1.A.less polluted B.more polluted C.less pollutedly D.more pollutedly 2.A.more healthy B.healthier C.more healthily D.helthily. 3.A.longly B.longer C.shortly D.shorter 4.A.more simple B.simpler C.simply D.more simply 5.A.higher B.highly C.lower D.lowly 6.A.more densely B.more dense C.less D.less dense 7.A.more friendly B.friendlier C.friendly D.less friendly 8.A.more suitable B.more suitbly C.less suitably D.suitably. Bai15: Đọc đoạn văn sau và trả lời câu hỏi: The nomadic life of Mongolian 1.Is it true that about 50% of Mongolian population still lead a nomadic life? YES IT IS 2.What are the most valuable possessions of Mongolian nomads? TENTS AND CATTLE 3.Why do Mongolian have to move location throughout the year? BECAUSE MONGOLIAN HAS SEVERE WEATHER AND THERE ARE DRAMATIC CHANGED IN WEATHER CONDITIONS BETWEEN SEASONS 4.Where do Mongolian nomads often move to in fall? THEY MOVE UP A HILL 5.How often most nomads move their locations? AT LEAST FOUR TIMES A YEAR 6.Why more and more Mongolian move to Ulaanbaatar? 137

MORE AND MORE OF ITS CITIZENS MOVE TO ULAANBAATAR BECAUSE THEY WANT TO LOOK FOR AN EDUCATION AND A PROFESSIONAL JOB. UNIT3. PEOPLES IN VIETNAM B. BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN. Bài 1: Khoanh tròn vào đáp án đúng 1. How old _________ is your cat? It is two months old. A. How old B. When C. How much 2. ______ did you begin working part-time here? A. How long B. When C. How much 3. _____ people are there in the conference room? A. How B. How many C. How much 4. ______time will you spend on your new carpet? A. How long B.How many C. How much 5. _______do these shoes cost? A. How long B. Howmany C. How much 6. _______do you go to the gym? A. How B. How often C. How long 7. _____ did you get to work yesterday? I took a taxi because my car was broken. A. How B. Why C. When 8. ______were you late for work yesterday? - Because of the traffic jam. A. How B. Why C. When 9. _____does this laptop belong to? It belongs to Jim. A. Who B. Whose C. Which 10. ______ bag was stolen yesterday? A. Who B. Whose C. Which 11. ______will you travel to this summer? I haven’t decided yet. A. Where B. What C. Who 12. _____did you sell yesterday?- Bread and cup cakes. A. What B.Who C. Which 13. ______dress did she buy? -The red or the blue one? A. What B.Whose C. Which 14. ______is playing the piano upstairs? A. Who B. Whose C. Whom 15. To ______should I address the letter? A. Who B. Whose C. Whom Lưu ý: Từ để hỏi “whom” không thường được sử dụng nhiều trong văn nói, thay vào đó người ta thường dùng “who” để thay thế. Việc dùng “whom” trong câu hỏi sau một giới từ là văn phong rất quan trọng, như trường hợp câu thứ 15 Bài 2: Điền từ thích hợp để hoàn thành các câu sau. 1. How long have you give up smoking? - For abou two years. 2. Which place is more densely populated – Ha noi or Ho Chi Minh City? 3. Who broken Jane’s favorite vase? Her brother did it. 4. What does Mr. Brown do? He’s a reseacher. 5. How many ethnic groups are there in your country? 6. How old is your grandmother? She’s ninety years old. 7. What does your English teacher look like? She’s young and pretty. 8. How much water should we drink every day? 9. How did you use to go to school? I used to go on foot. 10. How far is it from here to the nearest police station? 11. Whose songs is this singer performing? He is performing Trinh Cong Son’s songs. `12. Where was Ms Ann born? She was born in a small village. 13. What did you have for breakfast?- Bread and eggs. 14. Why didn’t you invite Jim to the senior prom? 138

15. How often do they meet each other? Almost every day Note: Câu 7: Giải thích. Cấu trúc câu hỏi về ngoại hình “What do/does+ S + look like?” Bài 3. Nối câu hỏi ở cột A với câu trả lời ở cột B sao cho thích hợp. 1-e 2-a 3-g 4-b 5-c 6-h 7-d 8-f 1. Bạn đã trả bao nhiêu cho chiếc đài đó? (e) 10 đô - la. 2. Bạn đã làm việc ở đây với tư cách kĩ sư được bao lâu rồi? (a) 6 năm. 3. Bạn đã bắt đầu sự nghiệp ca sĩ từ khi nào? (g) 6 năm trước. 4. Từ đây đến nhà Tom là bao xa? (b) Khoảng 6 ki-lô-mét. 5. Phòng khám thú y được đặt ở đâu? (c) Nó ở gần công viên địa phương. 6. Bạn có thường đi du lịch không? (h) Một hoặc hai lần mỗi năm. 7. Bạn thích cái gì hơn: trà hay cà phê? (d) Tôi thích trà hơn. 8. Hành lý này là của ai? (f)Nó là của tôi. Bài4. Điền một từ thích hợp vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành những câu hỏi dưới đây 1. Do 2. did 3. did 4. is 5. have 6. will 7. did 8. are 9. are 10. is 11. Have 12. Did 13. does 14. Did 15. is Note: Câu 14. Giải thích: Cấu trúc “used to V”: đã từng làm gì trong quá khứ. Bài 5: 1. How many groups of people are there in your country? 2. How was your party last week? 3. How did you go to school yesterday? 4. Whose car is it? 5. Is Jim learning Geography at the moment? 6. Have you ever seen terraced fields? 7. What kind of animals do the farmers raise in your country? 8. What time does the concert start? 9. How far is it from your house to the local school? 10. Will you come to my birthday party tomorrow? 11. Where did you go last summer? 12. How much money did you spend on clothes last month? 13. How do ethnic people dress in special occasions? 14. Who is swimming in the swimming pool now? 15. How often does Mr.Smith mow the lawn? Giải thích: Dựa vào thì của động từ trong từng câu để thêm trợ động từ cho phù hợp vào sau từ để hỏi. BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài6. Điền mạo từ ‘a” hoặc “an” trước những danh từ sau: Giải thích: - Mạo từ “a” đứng trước danh từ bắt đầu bằng một phụ âm (consonant) hoặc một nguyên âm (vowel) nhưng được phát âm như phụ âm (ví dụ như university, uniform….) 139

- Mạo từ “an” đứng trước danh từ bắt đầu bằng một nguyên âm (u, e, o, a, i) BÀI 7: Điền mạo từ ‘a’, ‘an’ hoặc 0 vào chỗ trống sao cho thích hợp. 16. She asked me for 0 information about the meeting. 17. They will move to a mansion next month. 18. I’d like _a__ grapefruit and _0__ orange juice. 19. _an__award was given to Jim yesterday. 20. We read _0__ books and play _0__ games when we have free time. 21. Jim doesn’t want to borrow _0__ money from anyone. 22. My friend and I threw _a__ party last week. 23. It was an honor to be invited here today. 24. I’ve bought _an__ umbrella for my sister. 25. My family often have_0___ eggs for breakfast. 26. Would you like_a_____cup of tea? 27. My brother doesn’t like _0_____ cats. 28. Is there __a________post office here? 29. I spend __0_______hours on my DIY project. 30. Mr. Peter used to be ___a________famous vet. Giải thích: - Mạo từ “a/an” chỉ đứng trước danh từ đếm được số ít. BÀI 8: Điền mạo từ “a”, “an” hoặc “the” vào chỗ trống sao cho phù hợp. 1. a - a- the-the. Giải thích: “a” đứng trước danh từ không xác định đếm được số ít. “The” đứng trước danh từ đã xác định “cat” và ‘dog” đã được nhắc đến trước đó. 2. the Giải thích: “the” đứng trước một danh từ chỉ vật độc nhất. 3. a 4. the Giải thích: “the” đứng trước danh từ đã xác định “present” mà người nói và người nghe đều biết đến. 5. the 6. an 7. the 8. the 9. a 10. the 11. the Giải thích ‘the” trong dạng so sánh nhất với tính từ dài “hard-working” 12. the 13. a 14. The-the 15. a-an-the 16. the 17. a-a-the 18. the-the 19. a 20. a-a-The BÀI 9: Đánh dấu (V) trước câu đúng, đánh dấu (X) trước câu sai và sửa lại cho đúng. 1. [X] Lỗi sai: an sửa: a Giải thích: Trước danh từ ‘apple’ là tính từ “big” bắt đầu bằng một phụ âm nên dùng “a”. 2. [x] Lỗi sai: the sửa: an Giải thích: Dùng “an’trước danh từ đếm được số ít không xác định. 3. [x] Lỗi sai: a sửa: ‘the” đứng trước danh từ đã xác định “full name of ….) mà người nói và người nghe đều biết đến. 4. [x] Lỗi sai: most beautiful sửa: the most beautiful Giải thích: trong dạng so sánh nhất với tính từ “beautiful” 5. [v] Câu đúng 6. [x] Lỗi sai: a sửa: an Giải thích: Trước danh từ “costume “ là tính từ ‘unique‘ bắt đầu bằng phụ âm /j / nên dùng “a” 140

7. [x] Lỗi sai: a sửa: the Giải thích: “the’ đứng trước danh từ đã xác định ‘p” mà người nói và người nghe đều biết đến. 8. [v] Câu đúng 9. [x] Lỗi sai: a sửa: 0 Giải thích: “beer“là danh từ không đếm được nên không dùng “a’ trước nó. 10. [v] Câu đúng Bài10. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân trong những câu trả lời sau 1. What has Jim recently experienced in Vietnam? 2. Where do the ethnic minorities in Vietnam often live? 3. How are their costumes? 4. Where do they often gather together in special occasions? 5. What does the chief of the community often do at the communal house? 6. When do ethnic people often hold festivals? 7. Why is life in the mountainous areas quite difficult? 8. How long may it take people to travel from their house to the market? 9. What makes life in remote areas so difficult? 10. How do the local authorities try to help the ethnic minorities? BÀI 11: Điền mạo từ “a”, “an”, “the” hoặc 0 vào chỗ trống sao cho phù hợp. 0 giải thích: danh từ ‘poultry” là danh từ dạng số nhiều và không xác định trong trường hợp này. 1. the giải thích: động từ “play” đi với các danh từ chỉ nhạc cụ (piano, guitar, flute…) thì trước các danh từ phải có ‘the” 2. a giải thích: danh từ “festival” là danh từ đếm được số ít và chưa xác định. 3. the - the giải thích: “the” đứng trước danh từ đã xác định mà người nói và người nghe đều biết đến. 4. 0 giải thích: Danh từ “cattle’ là danh từ số nhiều và không xác định trong trường hợp này. 5. a - 0 giải thích: ‘a’ đứng trước danh từ không xác định đếm được số ít – ‘local specialities” là danh từ số nhiều chưa xác định. 6. a giải thích: “a” đứng trước danh từ không xác định đếm được số ít. 7. the giải thích: “the” đứng trước danh từ đã xác định mà người nói và người nghe đều biết đến. 8. 0 giải thích: Danh từ ‘elephants’ là danh từ số nhiều và không xác định trong trường hợp này. 9. The – the giải thích: ‘the’ đứng trước danh từ đã xác định mà người nói và người nghe đều biết đến. Bài 12: Dựa vào những từ cho sẵn, viết câu hoàn chỉnh. 1. When does the bank open every day? 2. Did you have bread and a boiled egg for breakfast? 3. Did everyone enjoy the concert last night? 4. When did you start working as an officer in this company? 5. How much money did you spend on your last holiday? 6. What time does the sun often rise in summer? 7. Do you like a cup of tea? 8. Did the train leave early this morning? 9. Who is playing the guitar upstairs? 10. Who is the tallest person in your class? Giải thích: Dựa vào thì của động từ để hoàn thành các câu hỏi với trợ động từ thích hợp. Lưu ý thêm các mạo từ ‘a/ an/ the” một cách thích hợp trước danh từ. Bài 13: Khoanh vào đáp án đúng. 1. C. the 2. D. 0 3. C: herds bầy, đàn (vật nuôi) Giải thích : A. shoal: đàn (cá) B. school: đàn (cá) C. flock: đàn (chim) 4. C. the Giải thích : the locals: chỉ người dân địa phương 5. C. dancer: nguy hiểm A. safe: an toàn B. guard: canh gác D. protect: bảo vệ 141

6. C. the Giải thích: ‘the” đứng trước danh từ đã xác định mà người nói và người nghe đều biết đến. animals ở đây có ý chỉ những con voi “elephants” 7. A. How - Giải thích: Câu hỏi về cách thức 8. A. extinction: sự tuyệt chủng C. destruction: sự phá hủy D. conservation: sự bảo tồn Bài 14: Đọc bài đọc dưới đây và trả lời câu hỏi. 1. Its cultural value Dẫn chứng: Dong Son bronze drums are very famous for its cultural value. 2. Ngoc Lu bronze drum Dẫn chứng: Of about 200 drums discovered, Ngoc Lu bronze drum l is considered the most beautiful drum of the Dong Son culture ever found in Vietnam. 3. at the National Museum of Vietnam History in Hanoi Dẫn chứng: it is now preserved at the National Museum of Vietnam History in Hanoi. 4. designs of stylized peacock feathers Dẫn chứng: These patterns include a multi-ray star (symbolizing the shining sun) and in between the star rays are designs of stylized peacock feathers. 5. Short-bill birds, the long-bill birds and deer Dẫn chứng: The bands of animal figures include short-bill birds, the long-bill birds and deer 6. the brilliant peak of the Dong Son culture Dẫn chứng: The Ngoc Lu bronze drum is the most typica; one in the bronze drum system of Vietnam and at the same time it symbolizes the brilliant peak of the Dong Son culture. UNIT 4. OUR CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS (PHONG TỤC VÀ TRUYỀN THỐNG CỦA CHÚNG TÔI) BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài 1: Hoàn thành những câu sau với động từ khuyết thiếu “should” hoặc “shouldn’t”. 1. shouldn’t. Bạn không nên thức quá khuya vì nó không tốt cho sứckhỏe. 2. should. Không ai nên đi học muộn ngày mai vì sẽ có một bài kiểm tra. 3. shouldn’t Tôi nghĩ rằng không nên có một đống rác trước cửa nhà hàng. 4. should Bạn nên đi khám tổng quát thường xuyên. 5. Should Tôi nghĩ bạn nên cẩn trọng hơn 6. Should Nếu bạn có câu hỏi nào, vui lòng viết cho tôi một lá thư. Lưu ý: Câu này là cấu trúc đảo ngữ của câu điều kiện loại 1. “Should” thay thế cho “if” 7. should Tôi nên làm gì để học tốt hơn 8. shouldn’t Bố tôi nghĩ rằng tôi không nên quá đam mê trò chơi điện tử 9. should Những ứng viên nên có mặt ở đây trước 10 giờ sáng, không thì họ sẽ bị loại 10. should Bạn nên học về một số nét văn hóa của quốc gia mà bạn chuẩn bị ghé thăm 11. shouldn’t Mary không nên uống thuốc trước khi cô ấy gặp bác sĩ 12. Should James có nên xin việc ở công ty này không? Có, anh ấy nên 13. should Tôi nên làm bao nhiêu thời gian cho nhiệm vụ này? 14. shouldn’t Người già không nên làm việc quá vất vả. Họ cần rất nhiều thời gian để nghỉ ngơi 15. shouldn’t Bố mẹ không nên để con tiếp xúc với điện thoại từ nhỏ Bài 2: Dựa vào những từ cho sẵn, viết câu hoàn chỉnh với “should” hoặc “shouldn’t”. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

You should see the doctor regularly Which dress should I wear today? The teacher thinks that Jim should study harder. The boy shouldn’t clim up the wall. Should I watch TV or go out with friends now? If Jim is sick, he should stay at home. How much water should we drink every day? What shouldn’t I do at Chinese restaurant? You should inform your parents before you go Josh shouldn’t devote all his free time to play games. 142

2. mustn’t Nhìn tấm biển! Bạn không được bước trên cỏ 3. mustn’t Bạn không được đổ lỗi cho ai đó về lỗi lầm của mình. Bạn phải có trách nhiệm với bản thân 4. mustn’t Bạn không được vắng mặt ở lớp vào ngày mai vì cô giáo sẽ kiểm tra sự có mặt của bạn 5. don’t have to Tôi không phải chuẩn bị bữa tối vì chúng tôi sẽ đi ăn bên ngoài tối nay. 6. mustn’t Bạn không được để rác ở đây. Nó bị cấm 7. mustn’t Bạn không được để ai biết về nó. Đó là một bí mật lớn 8. don’t have to Bạn không phải đến sớm ngày mai vì sự kiện sẽ bắt đầu muộn 9. mustn’t Bạn không được đỗ xe ở đây. Có một cái biển “Không đỗ xe” 10. mustn’t Chúng ta không còn nhiều tiền. Chúng ta không được lãng phí chút nào nữa. 11. mustn’t Họ không được quên bài tập về nhà ở nhà. 12. don’t have to Tôi không phải làm việc nhà vì tôi có một người giúp việc để làm nó cho tôi. 13. mustn’t Họ không được phá vỡ luật lệ với cách đó. Như vậy không chấp nhận được. 14. mustn’t Tôi không được sử dụng máy tính sau 11 giờ đêm vì mẹ tôi không cho phép. 15. don’t have to Bạn không phải mua cuốn sách đó. Tôi sẽ cho bạn mượn.

Bài 3: Chuyển những câu sau thành câu đưa ra lời khuyên với “should” hoặc “shouldn’t”. 1. Parents should instill in their children a respect for their country’s tradition and culture. 2. Everyone should go home for a family reunion regularly. 3. You should travel more to broaden your horizon. 4. What should Jim do to study better? 5. We shouldn’t go to on our vacation because it’s very far from our location. 6. They should pay more attention to what your parents say. 7. Wherever you go, you should pay close attention to the manner and etiquetters there. BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài 4: Điền động từ khuyết thiếu “must” hoặc ‘mustn’t” vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành các câu sau. 1. must Tôi phải làm công việc giặt giũ hai ngày một lần. 2. mustn’t Bạn không được ở bên ngoài quá muộn. 3. mustn’t Bạn không được phá vỡ luật lệ của lớp. 4. must Mẹ tôi không muốn tôi về nhà quá muộn, vậy nên tôi phải rời đi bây giờ. 5. must Những cậu bé đó phải hoàn thành bài tập về nhà trước khi ra ngoài. 6. must Jim phải hoàn thành bài luận văn hôm nay bởi vì anh ấy sẽ rất bận ngày mai. 7. mustn’t Hành khách không được sử dụng điện thoại trên máy bay. 8. mustn’t Bạn không được đi học muộn ngày mai. 9. must Trẻ em phải được đi kèm bởi người lớn khi đi thăm những nơi nguy hiểm. 10. must Tôi phải về nhà trước bữa tối. 11. mustn’t Học sinh không được nói chuyện trong giờ kiểm tra. 12. mustn’t Bạn không được gian lận trong bài kiểm tra. 13. must Phải có ai đó ở trên tầng. Tôi có thể nghe thấy tiếng ồn. 14. mustn’t Chúng ta không được từ bỏ thứ chúng ta đang làm. 15. mustn’t Bạn không được để kẻ lạ mặt vào nhà khi tôi không có ở nhà. Bài 5: Hoàn thành các câu sau bằng động từ khuyết thiếu “must“hoặc “have to” và động từ trong ngoặc. 16. I have to learn Japanese. I need it my job. 17. I must learn Japanese. I love it. 18. I must wake up early tomorrow.I want to watch the sunrise. 19. I have to wake up early tomorrow. I have a meeting early in the morning 20. I must wear a black dress because I want to look good. 21. I have to wear a black dress because that is the requirement of my company. 22. I have to go home now because it’s too late. 23. I must go home now because I have a lot to do. 24. I must go to see my friend because I miss her. 25. I have to go to see my classmate because we work on the same project. 26. You have to wear a tie in the company. It‘s one of their rules. 27. I have to go abroad next week. My boss wants me to sign a contract with our foreign customers. 28. I must work harder. I want to be successful. 29. This room is mess, I must find time to clean it! 30. You really have to stop driving so fast or you’ll have an accident!

Giải thích: mustn’t: dùng với nghĩa cấm đoán, không được làm gì. “don’t have to”: dùng với nghĩa không bắt buộc làm gì Bài7. Đánh dấu (V) trước câu đúng, đánh dấu (x) trước câu sai và sửa lại cho đúng 1. (v) câu đúng 2. Lỗi sai: “mustn’t” sửa “don’t have to”, giải thích: dùng với nghĩa không bắt buộc làm gì: “Tôi có thể giúp bạn một tay. Bạn không cần phải làm việc một mình” 3. Lỗi sai: “mustn’t” sửa “don’t have to”, giải thích : “Họ không cần phải vội vã vì bộ phim bắt đầu muộn” 4. Lỗi sai: “must” sửa “have to”, giải thích: “have to“ cũng mang nghĩa bắt buộc nhưng mang tính khách quan, do luật lệ hay các yếu tố khách quan quy định. 5. Lỗi sai: “mustn’t” sửa “don’t have to”, giải thích: “Mai là thứ Hai nhưng tôi không phải đi học” 6. Lỗi sai: “must” sửa ‘have to” 7. (v) câu đúng 8. Lỗi sai: “have to” sửa “has to”, giải thích: Chủ ngữ trong câu là đại từ bất định “everyone “ nên động từ chia số ít, “have to“ phải chia thành “has to“. 9. Lỗi sai: “mustn’t” sửa “don’t have to”, giải thích: “Trời hôm nay ấm nên chúng tôi không cần phải mặc áo khoác dày. 10. (v) câu đúng BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO. Bài 8: Hoàn thành các câu sau bằng động từ khuyêt thiếu “should” hoặc “shouldn’t” và những động từ cho sẵn. should thank. Bạn nên cảm ơn chủ nhà vì đã chăm sóc bạn lúc bạn ở đó. shouldn’t talk. Bạn không nên nói chuyện khi miệng còn đồ ăn. should be. Giáo viên của chúng tôi luôn nhắc nhở rằng chúng tôi nên đúng giờ should try. Bạn nên thử những đặc sản địa phương khi bạn thăm quan một nơi nào đó. should discuss. Đây là một câu hỏi khó. Tôi nghĩ chúng ta nên thảo luận và tìm ra cách giải quyết cùng nhau. 6. Should- break. Năm nay chúng ta có nên phá vỡ truyền thống và đi du lịch trong dịpTết không? 7. shouldn’t wear. Khách du lịch không nên mặc quần áo ngắn khi tham quan những nơi như đền hay lăng. 8. shouldn’t be. Tôi chuẩn bị đi du lịch bằng máy bay tuần sau. Mẹ tôi bảo rằng hành lý của tôi không nên quá nặng.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Giải thích: -“must”: dùng với nghĩa bắt buộc mang tính chủ quan, từ phía người nói -“have to”: cũng mang nghĩa bắt buộc nhưng mang tính khách quan, do luật lệ hay các yếu tố bên ngoài quyết định Bài 6: Điền động từ khuyết thiếu “mustn’t” hoặc “don’t have to“ vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành các câu sau. 1. don’t have to

Bạn không phải đón tôi vào ngày mai. Tôi sẽ bắt taxi 143

144

5.T. Dẫn chứng: These customs and habits are associated with community of villages. 6.T. Dẫn chứng: Vienam is a country of festivals, especially in spring. 7. F. Dẫn chứng: Yet, customs and habits of Vietnamese people vary from region to region, and ethnic group to ethnic group.

Bài 9: Dựa vào thông tin cho sẵn trong bảng, viết câu với động từ khuyết thiếu “should” hoặc “shouldn’t” để diễn tả những điều nên/ không nên làm gì khi sống ở Nhật Bản. When you are in Japan 1. You should be on time 2. You shouldn’t pass food from one pair of chopsticks to the other. 3. You should bring your business card. 4. You shouldn’t bring outside food into restaurants. 5. You should say “Itadikimasu” before eating ,especially if you’re being treated. 6. You shouldn’t use the phone in trains and elevators. 7. You should make loud gulping noises when drinking 8. You shouldn’t drink or eat while walking 9. You should cover your mouth with your other hand when using toothpick. 10. You shouldn’t use your chopsticks to point at somebody. Bài 10: Hoàn thành các câu dưới đây với thể khẳng định hoặc phủ định của “must, have to, has to" 1. mustn’t. Học sinh không được nhìn vào những ghi chép của họ khi học đang làm bài kiểm tra. 2. has to Mẹ tôi bị đau đầu nặng , vậy nên bà phải ngừng làm việc hôm nay. 3. have to Có một vụ tai nạn nên giao thông bị chặn lại. Chúng tôi phải ở đây một lúc. 4. don’t have to Bạn không cần phải làm điều đó. Tôi sẽ làm sau. 5. has to Anh ấy phải đợi trong hàng như những người khác. 6. mustn’t Bạn không được châm lửa gần một trạm xăng. 7. mustn’t Khi đang chạy một phương tiện giao thông, bạn không được uống rượu rồi lái xe. 8. mustn’t Bạn không được bỏ học quá nhiều, nếu không thì bạn sẽ không qua kỳ thi cuối. 9. must Họ phải làm việc chăm chỉ và kiếm nhiều tiền. Họ muốn chuyển tới một căn hộ lớn hơn. 10. doesn’t have to Ông Smith không cần phải lái xe đi làm vì công ty của ông ấy gần nhà. Giải thích - “ must” dùng với nghĩa bắt buộc mang tính chủ quan, từ phía người nói - “have to” cũng mang nghĩa bắt buộc nhưng mang tính khách quan, do luật lệ hay các yếu tố bên ngoài quy định. - “ mustn’t” dùng với nghĩa cấm đoán, không được làm gì. - “don’t have to” dùng với nghĩa không bắt buộc làm gì. Bài 11: Khoanh tròn vào đáp án đúng 1. B. honored: tôn kính 2. D. However. Giải thích: Dùng liên từ ‘however’ để nối 2 câu có ý nghĩa đối lập. 3. B. mats: cái chiếu, A. curtain: rèm, C. sofa: ghế sô pha , D. carpet: thảm 4. A. respect (n) sự tôn trọng 5. A. tradition: truyền thống, B. văn hóa, C. phong tục, D phong cách sống 6. A. longevity: sự trường tồn, trường thọ Bài12. Đọc đoạn văn dưới đây và điền T(True) trước câu có nội dung đúng với nội dung bài đọc, điền F(False) trước câu có nội dung sai với nội dung bài đọc. 1. T. Dẫn chứng: traditional Vietnamese customs and habits have been formed time to time for thousands of years. This creates a long –lasting culture. 2. F. Dẫn chứng: However, with a firm native culture, Vietnamese people keep their culture away from being assimilation…. 3. T. Dẫn chứng: In the entire history of Vietnam, Vietnamese culture is the combination of native culture, cultural exchange with China, Asia region and western countries. 4.T. Dẫn chứng: ….. Vietnamese people keep their culture away from being assimilation, and “Vietnamizing” those cultureal features instead. 145

UNIT 5 Bài 1: Điền S (Simple) trước những câu đơn, điền C (compound) trước những câu ghép và CC (Complex) trước những câu phức. ___C__ 1. My bike is broken, so I have to walk to school. __S__2. My mother bought me a new pair of shoes and made me a cake on my birthday. __S___ 3. I didn’t expect Jim to come to the meeting yesterday. ___C__ 4. Peter had an accident last week but now he is fine. ____CC_ 5. When I came home, my sister was watching TV. ____CC_ 6. If you want to succeed in life, you have to work harder. ___C__ 7. My sister fancies rock music and she always wants to go to a rock concert. CC 8. My grandfather and my grandmother first met each other when they were very young. __CC___ 9. I didn’t know his address until Mary told me. __CC___ 10. Although she tried her best, she didn’t get the job. __S___ 11. In spring, there are various festival throughout country. __CC___ 12. Jame never eats junk food because it’s bad for his healthy. _S_ 13. There are several parks around the city. __CC___ 14. You may have a sore throat if you drink cold water. __S___ 15. They are going to hold a party to celebrate their wedding anniversary. Bài 2: Khonh tròn vào liên từ thích hợp để hoàn thành những câu ghép dưới đây.(and,or,but,so) 1. My father is an engineer,_____ he often has to work away from home. A.and B. or C.but D.so 2.This year the Mid-Autumn Festival falls on the next Sunday,_____ I can go home and reunite with my family. A.and B. or C.but D.so 3.I have never joined in a carnival,_____ I am very curious about it. A.and B. or C.but D.so 4.My mother is occupied in her job,_____ she tries to make time for me. A.and B. or C.but D.so 5.Do you wwant to join us_____ do you want to leave now? A.and B. or C.but D.so 6.I loves cats,_____ my mother doesn’t allow me to have one. A.and B.or C.but D.so 7.Mary wants to go abroad,_____ she saves money from now. A.and B.or C.but D.so 8.They used to be friends,_____ now they are not. A.and B.or C.but D.so 9.This event is help to commemorate the national heroes,_____ it teacher children to respect and be grateful to the heroes. A.and B.or C.but D.so 10.You can take a seat,_____ you can go around and take a look.It’s up to you. A.and B.or C.but D.so Bài 3: Điền một liên từ thích hợp để hoàn thành những câu ghép sau. 1. My father wants me to become a doctor,_BUT__ I want to become a designer. 2. It is a challenging task,_SO__ it takes me a lot of time to do it. 3. Should I stay in and watch TV__OR___ should I hang out with friends today? 4. There are many festival in Vietnam_AND__ many of them are held in the spring. 5. Did you stay at home last night_OR____ did you go out with your friends? 6. I broke my glasses yesterday,_SO____ I didn’t see things clearly. 7. My brother doesn’t socialize much,_SO____ he has very few friends. 146

8. A new camera is all I want now,__BUT___ I don’t have enough money. 9. Mary looks small and thin,_BUT____ she owns great strength. 10. I have many things to do tonight,_SO____ I reject my friend’s invitation to her party. 11. My computer is brand new,__BUT___ I en counter some problems when I use it. 12. This is a complex problem,_SO____ we need to work together to find the solution. 13. Peter doesn’t feel today,__SO___ he is absent from school. 14. They thought they won the match,_BUT__ it turned out that they were losers. 15. My siblings and I don’t share many similarities,_BUT_ we are in harmony with each other. Bài 4: Nối hai câu đơn sau thành câu ghép. 1. My best friend is studying abroad, so it is impossible for us to meet each other now. 2. They are going to build a new bridge across this river, so traveling will be much more convenient. 3. It has been ages since our last encounter but I still remember him clearly. 4. I went down with flu last week so I had to postpone my work. 5. I think the festival will be full of fun and many people will enjoy it. 6. Students can choose to carry out a project on environmental issues or they can conduct research on the topic of renewable energy. 7. My mother started a business trip last week but she hasn’t returned home yet. 8. My brother has grown up into an adult but he still enjoys playing with Lego. Bài 5: Khoanh tròn vào liên từ thích hợp để hoàn thành những câu phức dưới đây. 1.It will be a great fortune (if/unless) I can join upcoming carnival. 2.I will lend you my book (as long as/as soon as) you promise to keep it clean. 3.I will call you (as long as/as soon as) I arrive there. 4.(When/While) I came, Jim was having dinner. 5. Catherine was shocked (when/until) she found out the truth. 6. They have worked at this company (when/since) they graduated. 7. At 8 pm last night, I was doing my homework (when/while) my sister was playing with her toys. 8. (Before/After) I had eaten my breakfast , I went to school by bus. 9. (Although/Despite) Mary looks thinner than me, she is much stronger than me. 10. They didn’t come to the party (since/as soon as) they were too busy. 11. You should bring your raincoat (unless/in case) it rains. 12.I didn’t realize her new hair (when/until) she told me. 13.I won’t accept this job (even if/if) the offer me high salary. 14.My father will buy me a book (even though/as long as) I pass the exam. 15.I like her (when/even though) she’s annoying sometimes. Bài 6: Nối những mệnh đề ở cột A với cột B để tạo thành một câu ghép hoàn chỉnh. 1-_d____ 2-__e___ 3-_a__ 4-_c____ 5-__h___ 6-__g___ 7-_b__ 8-_f___ Bài 7: Điền những liên từ cho sẵn vào chỗ trống để hoàn thành những câu phức dưới đây. 1.__EVEN THOUGH___ Jame is my friend, I can’t accept his arrogance. 2. My brother is a bookworm,_WHEREAS____ I don’t like reading books. 3. At midnight, my parents were sleeping_WHILE____ I was cramming for exams. 4._IF____ you have any questions, you ask me after the lesson. 5. We won’t go camping_UNLESS____ the weather is fine. 6. You shouldn’t skip classes_UNLESS____ you really have to. 7. What did you do_BEFORE____ you went to bed last night? 8. In some cultures, you have to pray_BEFORE____ you eat. 9. We are very familiar with this areas__SINCE___ we moved here 15 years ago. 10._IF____ you travel from the North to the South of Vietnam, you will experience many interesting customs. Bài 8: Viết lại hai câu đơn thành một câu phức. 1. Dog is my favorite animal BECAUSE they are good companions of people. 2. I don’t like jazz, WHEREAS a friend of mine is a fan of it. 3. ALTHOUGH they were stuck in the traffic for hours, they managed to get there on time. 4. WHEN I came to the party, everyone was leaving.

5. This time Jane works very hard BECAUSE she doesn’t want to fail the exam again. 6. I seldom do exercises ALTHOUGH doing exercises is good for health. 7. ALTHOUGH my computer is old-fashioned, it functions very smoothly. 8. I didn’t known her real name BECAUSE people always called her by her nickname. ■ BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO Bài 9: Đánh dấu [V] trước câu đúng.Đánh dấu [X] trước câu trả lời sai và sửa lại cho đúng. _X_ 1.I love the Mid-Autumn festival. Since there are a variety of interesting activities during the festival. Sửa festival since: mệnh đề phụ thuộc đứng sau since không thể tách riêng thành 1 câu. _X_ 2.While the Mid-Autumn festival is also called “Children’s festival” in Vietnam, it is ẹnjoyed by people of all ages. Sửa although: lien từ while k phù hợp trong trường hợp này. __V___ 3.On this special occasion, family members often reunite and celebrate the festival. __X___ 4.Many people choose to go out and enjoy the exciting atmosphere, however others want to stay in and have time with their family. Sai: However Sửa: whereas __X_ 5.The festival is help on the 15th day of the 8th month of the lunar calendar when the full moon. Sai: the full moon Sửa: the moon is full __X_ 6.Moon cakes are very important as if making and sharing moon cakes is the hallmark tradition of this festival. Sai: as if vì as if k phù hợp để diễn tả quan hệ nguyên nhân kết quả Sửa: because __X___ 7.In Chinese culture, a round shape symbolizes completeness and reunion so the eating of round moon cakes among family members signifies the unity of families. Sai: so Sửa: , so phải có dấu , trước so ___X__ 8.Unless you visit Vietnam in autumn, you should join in this special festival. Sai; unless Sửa: if Bài 10: Dựa vào những từ cho sẵn, viết câu ghép hoàn chỉnh với các liên từ and, so, but”. 1. I/visit/my neighbors/yesterday/no one/be/home. I visited my neighbors yesterday but no one was at home 2. They/recently/buy/new/house/they/throw/party/tomorrow. They have recently bought a new house, so they will throw a party tomorrow. 3. You/face/a lot of/difficulties/in the future/career/you/should/never/give/up. You will face a lot of difficulties in the future career but you should never give up. 4. You/like/cup/of/coffee/you/like/glass/of/water? Do you like a cup of coffee or do you like a glass of water? 5. Mr. Smith/seem/nice/man/he/be/selfish. Mr Smith seems nice but he is selfish. 6. Mr. Brown /be/dedicated/teacher/many people/respect/him. Mr Brown is a dedicated teacher, so many people respect him. 7.My students/be/hard-working/and/well-behaved/I not/have to/worry/much/about/them. My students are hard-working and well-behaved, so I don’t have to worry much about them. 8.Ann/want/lose/weight/she/go/the gym/regularly. Ann wants to lose weight, so she goes to the gym regular. 9.The new radio/cost/me/a lot of/money/its/quality/br/poor. The new radio costs me a lot of money but its quality is poor. 10. This movie/be/praised/by/critics/I/not/really/like/it. This movie is praised by critics but I don’t really like it. Bài 11: Điền liên từ thích hợp vào ô trống để hoàn thành những câu sau: 1. They haven’t eaten anything since the morning BECAUSE/SINCE/AS they were too busy to eat. 147

148

2. James is very excited now BECAUSE/SINCE/AS he is going abroad next month. 3. ALTHOUGH/THOUGH/ EVEN THOUGH it may be very challenging for you to do it, you can give it a try. 4. I was going home yesterday WHEN I came across my old friend. 5. UNLESS you often an apology to Jane, she won’t forgive you. 6. BECAUSE/ SINCE/AS Mr. Smith doesn’t like traditional folk songs, he rarely listen to them. 7. Will you hang out with your friends OR will you reunite with your family on the Mid-Autumn festival? 8. IF you want to visit a foreign country, you have to apply for a visa first. 9. Tony has lived in Vietnam for 2years, BUT he doesn’t know much about the countries festival. 10. Normally our family prefers staying at home and having dinner together on weekends, BUT this week we want to do something else. Bài 12: Khoanh tròn đáp án đúng. 1. A. honor B. show C. comemorate D. celebrate 2. A. When B. because C. if D. in case 3. A. cultural B. customary C. traditional D. historical 4. A. helps B. contributes C. makes D. continues 5. A. or B. and C. but D. so 6. A. while B. when C. although D. but Bài 13: Đọc đoạn văn sau và trả lời câu hỏi. 1. Where is Huong Pagoda located? IN MY DUC DISTRICT 2. How long does Huong Pagoda festival last? THREE MONTHS 3. What happens during the Zen ceremony? MONKS AND BUDDHISTS OFFER INCENCE, FLOWERS, CANDLES AND FRIUTS; TWO MONKS PERFORM BEAUTIFUL AND FLEXIBLE DANCES. 4. What are some entertaining activities in Huong Pagoda Festival? BOAT CRUISE, MOUNTAIN CLIMBING AND CAVE EXPLORING. 5. What is believed to bring you fulfillment and great success in life? CLIMBINGUP THE TOP OF HUONG TICH MUONTAIN 6. When will tourists have chance to taste the fresh flavor of apricot juice? AT THE END OF FESTIVAL UNIT 6 BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN : Bài 1: Chia động từ trong ngoặc ở thì quá khứ đơn để hoàn thành câu chuyện ngụ ngôn: THE FOX AND THE GRAPES Long, long year ago there (1. Live) _LIVED___ a fox who loved to eat. He lived close to a vineyard and he used to stare at the lovely grapes that hung there. “ How juice they look. Oh I am sure these are stuff that metl in the mouth when you have them. If only I could reach them.” On sunny day, the fox (2. Wake)_WOKE_ up and (3.see)_SAW______ the grapes glistening by the sunlight. The vineyard (4.look)__LOOKED____ heavenly and the grapes looked so luscious that the famished fox could no longer control itself. He (5.jump)_JUMPLED____ to reach them but fell down. He jumped again. No, they (6.be)_WERE___ much higher. He jumped even more. But they were still out of reach. He jumped and (7.stretch) STRETCHED and (8.hop) HOPPED but no avail. Those yummy grapes (9.hang) HUNG/HANGGED higher than the fox could reach. No matter hard he (10.try) TRIED, the fox could not reach the grapes. He (11.pant) PAINTED and (12.begin) BEGAN to sweat out of exhaustion. Giving up finally, he looked up in contempt and (13.say) SAID as he (14.walk) WALED away, “those grapes surely must be sour. I wouldn’t eat them even if they were served to me on a golden dish.” 149

It’s easy to despise what you cannot have. Baì 2: sắp xếp từ cho trước thành câu hoàn chỉnh: 1. year/ did/ you/ Where/ travel/ last/ to ? Where did you travel to last year? 2. me/ difficult/ for/ it/ learn/ to/ was/ English. It was difficult for me to learn English. 3. small/ When/ I/ ,/ mother/ me/ was/ reads/ often/ to/ my. When I was small, my mother often reads to me. 4. well-behaved/ be/ He/ to/ used/ a/ child. He used to be a well-behaved child. 5. local/ at/ school/ the/ they/ Were/ students/ secondary? Were they students at the local secondary school? 6. age/ Daisy/ to/ the/ an/ piano/ early/ at/ learnt. Daisy learnt to play the piano at an early age. 7. cars/ streets/ 10/ ago/ There/ not/ year/ were/ so/ many/ in. There were not many cars in the street 10 years ago. 8. friends/ ,/ Last/ my/ and/ to/ cinema/ the/ went/ week. Last week, my friends and I went to the cinema. 9. didn’t /me/ use/ allow/ knife/ My/ to/ father. My father didn’t allow me to use knife. 10. Did/ leave/ you/ party/ the/ early/ night/ last? Did you leave the party early last night? 3.Đánh dấu [V] trước câu đúng, đánh dấu [X] trước câu sai và viết lại câu đúng. 1. Was you give me a ring yesterday? X -> DID YOU GIVE ME A RING YESTERDAY? 2. Who did the first person to come to the class? X -> WHO WAS THE FIRST PERSON COME TO THE CLASS? 3. Jim hurted himself when he prepared the dinner. X -> HURT 4. Last week, there was a folk music concert at the lock park. V 5. When I was small, I am the naughtiest child in my village. X -> WHEN I WAS SMALL, I WAS THE NAUGHTIEST CHILD IN MY VILLAGE. 6. Did he used to be a renowned author? X -> USE 7. I didn’t know who broke the vase. V 8. Did you were born in Japan? X -> WERE YOU BORN IN JAPAN? 9. The first time I met him were 2 years ago. X -> THE FIRST TIME I MET HIM WAS 2 YEARS AGO. 10. They didn’t came to class yesterday. V 4. Chia động từ trong ngoặc ở thì quá khứ tiếp diễn để hoàn thành câu sau. 1. When I called my mother, she (drive) WAS DRIVING . 2. Yesterday at six I (prepare) WAS PREPARING dinner. 3. The Smiths (eat) WERE EATING dinner in the restaurant when I saw them. 4. Nina (look) WAS LOOKING for a job at this time last year 5. My friends (wait) WERE WAITING for the bus I saw them. 6. WAS TIM WRITING (Tim /write) a letter when you came in his room? 7. What WERE MARY AND PETER MAKING (Mary and peter)? 8. The children (play) WERE PLAYING in the playground when it suddenly began to rain. 9. What WERE YOU DOING (you/do) at this time yesterday? 10. I (play) WAS PLAYING video game when my father came home. 11. We (sleep) WERE SLEEPING all day. 12. While Aaron (work) WAS WORKING in his room, his friends (play) PLAYED in the garden. 150

13. I tried to tell them the truth but they (not listen) WERE NOT LISTENING . 14. Where WERE THEY GOING (they/go) at 5pm yesterday? 15. Most of the time we (sit) WERE SITTING in the room and (talk) WERE TALKING with others.

5.Dựa vào các từ cho sẵn, viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh. 1. They/ work/ their/ project/ at 2pm/ yesterday. They were working their project at 2 pm yesterday. 2. We/ study/ English/ at this time/ last week. We were studying English at this time last week. 3. Which/ dress/ she/ wear/ at the party/ last night? Which dress was she wearing at the party last night? 4. No one/ sleep/ at/ this time/ yesterday. No one was sleeping at this time yesterday. 5. Some girls/ argue/ outside/ the shop/ yesterday. Some girls were arguing outside at the shop yesterday. 6. Jim/ read/ book/ or/ he/ watch/ TV/ at 4pm yesterday? Was Jim reading bookor he was watching TV at 4 pm yesterday? 7. My parents / look/ forward/ to/ a vacation/ at this time/ last year. My parents were looking forward to a vacation at thiss time last year. 8. My bother/ and/ I/ build/ tree house/ this time/ last year. My brother and I were building a tree house at this time last year.

Who was singing a folk song at this time yesterday? 8. Josh was walking slowly when he was hit by a motorbike. What was Josh doing when he was hit by a motorbike? BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO.

8.Gạch chân lỗi sai và sửa lại cho đúng. An ant and the grasshopper In a field one summer’s day a Grasshopper was hopping about, chirping and sang to its heart’s. An Ant was passing by and he bearing along with toil an ear of corn he was taking to the nest. “Why not come and chat with me,” saying the Grasshopper, “instead of toiling and moiling in that way?” “I am helping to lay up food for the winner,” said the Ant, “and the recommend you to do the same.” “Why bother about winner?” said the Grasshopper; “We have got plenty of food at present.” But the Ant went on its way and was continuing its toil. When the winner was coming the Grasshopper was having no found itself dying of hunger- while it was seeing the ants distributing every day corn and grain from the stores they had collected in the summer. Then the Grasshopper was knowing : It is best to prepare for days of need. Lỗi sai

6.Hoàn thành câu, sử dụng quá khứ tiếp diễn của các động từ cho sẵn. Enjoy

Paint

rest

Read

study

Play

Walk

speak

Take

vacuum

1. We saw a lot of rubbish when we were walking along that street. 2. I was enjoying the meal when I spotted a fly in my shop. 3. Jim was taking a shower when his brother came home. 4. They were playing badminton from 4pm till 6pm yesterday. 5. Mrs. Brown was resting the stairs when her husband came home. 6. My neighbors were painting the windows when I visited them. 7. Was he studying all day yesterday? I didn’t see him anything. 8. My father was reading a newspaper when I entered 9. Jane was speaking to her classmates but they didn’t listen. 10. The student was vacuuming very hard when the teacher entered. 7.Viết câu hỏi cho phần gạch chân trong các câu dưới đây. 1. Mary was making a birthday cake for her grandmother. What was Mary making for her grandmother? 2. He found a silver coin when he was digging his garden. When did he find a silver coin? 3. When you telephoned, I was looking after my sister. What were you doing when I telephoned? 4. They were talking with Josh’s wife. Whom they were talking with? 5. The kids were listening to the radio when I saw them. What were the kids doing when you saw them? 6. Peter was mowing the lawn while his wife was watering the trees. What was Peter doing whiel his wife was watering the trees? 7. Jane was singing a folk song at this time yesterday.

Sửa

Lỗi sai

Sửa

Sang

Singing

come

came

Was passing

Passed

have

had

Corn

The corn

seeing

saw

Saying

Said

knowing

Knew

continuing

Continued

9.Chia động từ trong ngoặc ở thì quá khứ đơn hoặc thì quá khứ tiếp diễn sao 1. I got to the supermarket just before it closed and (buy) BOUGHT milk. 2. We invited Sarah to the party, but she (not come) DIDN’T COME 3. Jack lost his job because he (be) WAS too irresponsible for his work. 4. Ted (listen) WERE LISTENING to music at half past seven yesterday night. 5. Everyone (know) KNEW that it was Bill’s fault, but nobody said anything. 6. Karen (take) TOOK the key from the coffee table and stormed out of the door. 7. At midnight, I (sleep) WAS SLEEPNG, but Jane (do) WAS DOING her assignment. 8. Luke (stand) WAS STANDING outside the bank when suddenly two robbers (run) RAN him. 9. I was bored, so Mum (take) TOOK me to a drama workshop with her. 10. Do you remember the time we (go) WENT to England on holiday? 11. When we (be) WERE in Canada, we (go) WERE GOING skiing almost every day. 12. About four years ago, I (decide) DECIDED to become a chef. BÀI 10: Dựa vào những từ cho sẵn, viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh. 1. We/ have/ breakfast/ when/ the mailman/ arrive. WE WERE HAVING BREAKFAST WHEN THE MAILMAN ARRIVED. 2. While/ everyone/ sleep/ Paul/ watch/TV. 151

past

152

WHILE EVERYONE WAS SLEEPNG, PAUL WATCHED TV. 3. I/ dream/ about/ long/ vacation/ when/ the alarm clock/ go/ off. I WAS DREAMING ABOUT A LONG VACATION WHEN THE ALARM CLOCK WENT OFF. 4. While/ I/ practice/ the piano/ late/ last night,i/ hear/ strange/ noise. WHILE I WAS PRACTICING THE PIANO LASST NIGHT, I HEARD STRANGE NOISE. 5. The sheep/ graze/ in/ the/ filed/ when/ they/ be/ scared/ by/ the/ noise. THE SHEEP WERE GRAZING IN THE FIEL WHEN THEY WERE SCARED BY THE NOISE. 6. What/ you/ do/ when/ the earthquake/ happen/ yesterday? WHAT DID YOU DO WHEN THE EARTHQUAKE WAS HAPPENING YESTERDAY? 7. I/ run/ to/ catch/ the bus/ when/ I/ see/ Jim. I WAS RUNNING TO CATCH THE BUS WHEN I SAW JIM. 8. When/ you/ meet/ James/ last night/ ,/ what/ he/ wear? WHEN YOU MET JAMES LAST NIGHT, WHAT WAS HE WEARING? 9. Some people/ chat/ while/ others/ play/ games/ at/ the party/ last/ night. SOME PEOPLE WERE CHATTING WHILE OTHERS WERE PLAYING GAMES AT THE PARTY LAST NIGHT. 10. It/ rain/ at this time/ yesterday/ so/ we/ cancel/ the barbecue IT WAS RAINING AT THIS TIME YESTERDAY SO WE CANCELED THE BARCUE.

concocted author a campfire by a whole group of people. It is quite normal to discover that are many version of the tale, some very similar but others may have only one or two characters in common and take place in totally different settings. __T___ 1.In legends, heroes are set in fantastic places. _F____ 2.Amongst legends, myths and folktales, only legends are based on true event in the past. __F___ 3.Myths are created only for entertainment. _T____ 4.Earthquakes, floods and volcanic eruptions are explained in myths. _T____ 5.Folktales may be invented around a campfire by a whole group of people. _F____ 6.Folk tales have only one version. __F___ 7.Folktales are usually passed in written form.

11. Khoanh tròn đáp án đúng. A beautiful day Yesterday was so nice a day. Jane (1)_________ up so early. The sun (2) _______ brightly and the bids (3) ___________ on the tree. Jane was so happy because today she went to meet her old friend. Jane’s friend invited her to his new apartment with some other friends. When Jane came, everyone was sitting in the living room and (4)_________ passionately with each other. As she walked in, she (5) ________by her friend. They had a lot to tell the other (6)________they had not met for ages. Jane came home with a smile on her face since her friend (7)_________ to contact regularly. 1. A. woke B. was waking C. stayed D. was staying 2.A. shone B. was shining C. was shone D. shined 3. A. twitters B. twittered C. was twittering D. were twittering 4. A. talked B. talking C. talks D. was talked 5. A. welcomed B. was welcoming C. welcomes D. was welcomed 6. A. although B. because C. however D. so 7.A. promised B. was promising C. promise D. was promised 12. Đọc bài đọc dưới đây và điền T (True) trước câu trả lời đúng với nội dung bài đọc, điền F (False) trước câu trả lời không đúng với nội dung bài đọc. What are myths, legends and folk tales Once upon a time, long, long ago, there lived some really great storytellers. Their stories have been passed down, retold, translated, adapted and, more recently, written down, because everyone loves good stories. These stories probably include, myths and folktales. A legend is usually based on a true event in the past. Legend usually have a real hero at the centre of the story and they are often set in fantastic place. The story will have been passed on from person to person, sometimes over a very long period of time. A myth is not quite the same as a legend. Sometimes a myth is loosely based on a real event but, more often than not, it is a story that has been created to teach people about something very important and meaningful. Myths are often used to explain the world and major events, which, at the time, people were not able to understand- earthquakes, floods, volcanic, eruptions, the rising and setting of the sun, illness and death. Folktales are usually stories that have been passed down from generation to generation in spoken from. Often we do not know who was the original author and it is possible that some stories might have been 153

154

UNIT 7. PULLUTION A. VOCABULARY 1. affect (v) /əˈfekt/: 2. algea (n) /ˈældʒiː/: 3. aquatic (adj) /əˈkwætɪk/: 4. billboard (n) /ˈbɪlbɔːd/: 5. blood pressure (n) /blʌd ˈpreʃə/: 6. cause (n,v) /kɔːz/: 7. cholera (n) /ˈkɒlərə/: 8. come up with (v) /kʌm ʌp wɪð/: 9. contaminate (v) /kənˈtæmɪneɪt/: 10. contaminant (n) /kənˈtæmɪnənt/: 11. dump (v) /dʌmp/: 12. earplug (n) /ˈɪəplʌɡ/: 13. effect (n) /ɪˈfekt/: 14. fine (v) /faɪn/: 15. float (v) /f əʊt/: 16. groundwater (n) /ˈɡraʊndwɔːtə/: 17. hearing loss (n) /ˈhɪərɪŋ lɒs/: 18. illustrate (v) /ˈɪləstreɪt/: 19. litter (n, v) /ˈlɪtə/: 20. measure (v) /ˈmeʒə/: 21. non-point source pollution (n) 22. permanent (adj) /ˈpɜːmənənt/: 23. point source pollution (n) 24. poison (n, v) /ˈpɔɪzn/: 25. pollutant (n) /pəˈluːtənt/: 26. radioactive (adj) /ˌreɪdiəʊˈæktɪv/: 27. radiation (n) /ˌreɪdiˈeɪʃn/: 28. thermal (adj) /ˈθɜːml/: 29. untreated (adj) /ˌʌnˈtriːtɪd/: 30. visual (adj) /ˈvɪʒuəl/:

Ví dụ làm ảnh hưởng tảo dưới nước biển quảng cáo ngoài trời huyết áp nguyên nhân, gây ra bệnh tả nghĩ ra làm bẩn chất gây bẩn vứt, bỏ cái nút tai kết quả phạt tiền nổi nước ngầm mất thính lực minh họa rác vụn (mẩu giấy, vỏ lon…), vứt rác đo /nɒn-pɔɪnt sɔːs pəˈluːʃn/: ô nhiễm không nguồn (nguồn phân tán) vĩnh viễn /pɔɪnt sɔːs pəˈluːʃn/: ô nhiễm có nguồn chất độc, làm nhiễm độc chất gây ô nhiễm thuộc về phóng xạ phóng xạ thuộc về nhiệt không được xử lý thuộc về thị giác

B. GRAMMAR 1. ĐỊNH NGHĨA CÂU ĐIỀU KIỆN. Định nghĩa Ví dụ Câu điều kiện gồm có hai phần: mệnh đề chỉ điều If the weather is fine, I will go campingwith my kiện (if-clause) và mệnh đề chỉ kết quả (result friends tomorrow. clause) (Nếu thời tiết đẹp thì ngày mai tôi đi sẽ đi cắm trại với bạn của tôi.) -> “If the weather is fine” là mệnh đề chỉ điều kiện: “I will go camping with my friends tomorrow” là mệnh đề chỉ kết quả (mệnh đề chính) Mệnh đề IF và mệnh đề chính có thể đứng trước hay I will go camping with my friends tomorrow if the sau đều được. weather is fine. II. ÔN TẬP CÂU ĐIỀU KIỆN LOẠI 1 (CONDITIONAL SENENCES TYPE 1) Chức năng Dùng để diễn tả điều kiện có thể xảy ra ở hiện tại hoặc tương lai. Cấu trúc If + S+ V (s/es) + (bổ ngữ) S will +Vnguyên mẫu + (bổ ngữ) (thì hiện tại đơn) (thì tương mai đơn) 1

Lưu ý

-> Mệnh đề IF dùng thì hiện tại đơn, mệnh đề chính dùng thì tương lai. If I have enough money, I will buy a new computer. (Nếu tôi có đủ tiền thì tôi sẽ mua một chiếc máy tính mới.) - If you work hard, you will make a lot of money. (Nếu bạn làm việc chăm chỉ thì bạn sẽ kiếm được nhiều tiền.) Unless= If not If= Unless + not Ví dụ: - If he doesn’t do his homework, his mother will complain. -> Unless he does homework, his mother will complain. - If you don’t send to the hospital, she will die. -> Unless you send her to the hospital, she will die. Có thể dùng các động từ must, have to, can, may, should thay cho will trong mệnh đề chính. Ví dụ: Is It rains heavily, you can stay here. (Nếu trời mưa bạn có thể ở lại đây.) - If you want to see that film, you must buy a ticket. (Nếu bạn muốn xem bộ phim đó thì bạn phải mua vé.)

BÀI TẬP VẬN DUNG CƠ BẢN Bài 1. Khoanh tròn phương án đúng để hoàn thành các câu sau. 1. If the weather is fine, we (goes/ will go) camping tomorrow. 2. My parents will give me a gift if I (will pass/ pass) the final exam. 3. If you are polite to others, they (will be/ are nice to you). 4. Unless James (studies/ will study) hard, he will fail the exam. 5. My parents won’t allow me to go out if I (don’t finish/ won’t finish) my homework. 6. If the cable TV (doesn’t/ won’t) work, we will rent a DVD. 7. If you don’t want to stay at home, you (go/ can go) with me to the supermarket. 8. If you (will be/ are) a good listener, you will gain many friends. 9. James won’t attend the meeting if he (won’t/doesn’t) want to. 10. You can’t have this job unless you (have/will have) long working experience. 11. What (you will do/ will you do) if it snows tomorrow? 12. You (will be/ are) able to understand it you practice every day. 13. We will eat out today if there (will be/ is) nothing left in the fridge. 14. If it (will be/ is) too cold outside, we will stay home. 15. If she (isn’t/ won’t) careful, she will make many mistakes. Bài 2. Hoàn thành các câu sau sử dụng dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc. 1. The manager (be) ________________ very angry if I am late for work. 2. You will have to work very hard if you (take)______ this course. 3. I (go) ________ to see the doctor if I don’t feel well tomorrow. 4. They can’t hear you unless you (speak) ______ louder. 5. If Peter (forget) _____________ to write his essay, the teacher (give) _____________ him a low mark. 6. If they (win) ___________ this match, they will ne the champions. 7. We (have) _________ plenty of time if we (arrive) ______ there early. 8. The zookeeper (punish) ____________ you if you (feed) ___________ the animal. 9. What ________ (Jane/ say) if Jim (tell0 _______ her the truth. 10. The boys (shiver) _____________ with cold if they (swim) ________ in this lake. 11. The door (not lock) ____________- unless you (press) ____ the green button. 12. Jim won’t be late if he (take) _______________ the bus at 6 o’clock . 13. Mary isn’t home, but if you (want) _____ to leave her a message, I (give) ________ it to her. 14. If jack (clean) ________ the floor, I (do) __________ the washing. 2

15. the children (be) _____ happy if you (give) _______ them some sweets. Bài 3.Nối cột A với cột B để tạo thành câu hoàn chỉnh. A B 1. If people keep dumping rubbish into the lake, a. the groundwater will be poisoned. 2. If the farmers overuse pesticide, b. if our surrounding environment is polluted 3. Soil erosion won’t happen in an area, c. they will disappear in the future. 4. if we don’t converse the rainforests, d. unless we join hands to protect it. 5. Our health will be badly affected e. the aquatic life will be afflicted. 6. Our environment will be damaged f. floods will be more and more severe. 7. Is we don’t protect the frontier forests, g. if people use more public transportation. 8. The amount of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere h. if people practice sustainable agricultural mad will be reduced use. 1. ____ 2. __________ 3. _______ 4. ____________ 5. ____ 6. __________ 7. _______ 8. ____________ Bài 4. Dựa vào từ cho sẵn, viết câu hoàn chỉnh. 1. If/people/ not/ stop/ dumping/ waste/ into/ rivers/,/pollution/ increase/. _____________________________________________________________________________ 2. If/ polar/ ice caps/ melt/ ,/huge landmasses/ be/ under/ water. _____________________________________________________________________________ 3. If the air/ in/ city/ be/polluted/ ,it/can/ cause/ people’s/ respiratory/ problems. _____________________________________________________________________________ 4. If/smog/ be/ frequently/ formed/ in/ city/,/it/ cause/ difficulty/ in/ breathing/ headache/ even/ lung cancer. _____________________________________________________________________________ 5. If/ carbon monoxide/ concentrate/ in/ great/ amounts/, /it/ be/ harmful/. _____________________________________________________________________________ 6. The climate/ change/ if/ more trees/ be/ cut/ down/ for/ hardwood/. _____________________________________________________________________________ 7. If/ we/ not/ control/ pollution/ soon/,/it/ be/ too/ late/. _____________________________________________________________________________ 8. If/we/ not/ protect/ frontier/,/we/ suffer/ many/ from/ natural/ disasters. _____________________________________________________________________________ Bài 5. Viết lại câu với “” if/unless” sao cho nghĩa của câu không thay đổi. 1. I can’t finish this task you don’t give me a hand. -> _____________________________________________________________________________ 2. You will run out of money if you don’t stop wasting it. -> _____________________________________________________________________________ 3. Don’t call me unless it is an emergency. -> _____________________________________________________________________________ 4. James will not pass the test unless he studies harder. -> _____________________________________________________________________________ 5. If Jane finishes her work before 6 pm, she will dine out with her friends. -> _____________________________________________________________________________ 6. My brother won’t go travelling this summer if he doesn’t find a companion. -> _____________________________________________________________________________ 7. It is not easy to do these exercises unless you listen attentively to the teacher. -> _____________________________________________________________________________ 8. If Jim doesn’t submit his essay before Tuesday, he will be punished by the teacher. -> _____________________________________________________________________________ III. CÂU ĐIỀU KIỆN LOẠI 2 (CONDITIONAL SENTENCES TYPE 2) Chức năng - Dùng để diễn tả điều kiện không thể xảy ra ở hiện tại hoặc tương lai, điều kiện chỉ 3

Cấu trúc

Ví dụ

Lưu ý

là một giả thiết, mọt ước muốn trái ngược với thực trạng hiện tại. - Dùng để đưa ra lời khuyên. If+ S+ V-ed + (bổ ngữ), S+ would + V nguyên mẫu + (bổ ngữ). (thì quá khứ đơn) -> Mệnh đề IF dùng thì quá khứ đơn, mệnh đề chính dùng động từ khuyết thiếu “would +V” If we were a bird, I wou;d be very happy. (Nếu tôi là một con chim tôi sẽ rất hạnh phúc) -> Tôi không thể là chim được. If I had a million USD, I would buy that cả. (Nếu tôi có một triệu đo la, tôi sẽ mua chiếc xe đó.) -> hiện tại không có. - Trong câu điều kiện loại 2, ở mệnh đề ‘IF’, với chủ ngữ “ I/he/she/it” ta có thể dùng “were ” hoặc “was” đều được. - Ta cũng có thể dùng “could” hoặc “might” trong mệnh đề chính. WOULD= sẽ (dạng quá khứ của WILL) COULD = có thể (dạng quá khứ của CAN) MIGHT = có thể (dạng quá khứ của MAY)

BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài 6. Khoanh tròn vảo phương án đúng. 1. I (would buy/ bought) a new house if I had enough money. 2. If he (would try/ tried) his best, he might be successful. 3. If I (lived/ would live) in Japan, I could speak Japanese well. 4. If someone gave you a dress, which color (would you want/ you would want) it to be? 5. I would repaired the roof myself if I (would have/ had) a longer ladder. 6. You would be more comfortable now if you (didn’t/ wouldn’t) wear high heels. 7. I (wouldn’t/didn’t) buy things on the Internet if I were you. 8. If you (met/ would meet) your favorite author Mark Twain, what wouldn’t you ask him? 9. His parents would be very proud if he (wouldn’t be/ weren’t) so naughty. 10. If Jane had more money, she (would treat/ treated) herself to a decent meal. 11. If you were a billionaire, what (would you do/ did you do)/ 12. If Kate owned a computer, she (would spend/ spent) most of her free time on it. 13. If I (would know/ knew) his address, I would give it to you. 14. She would look much better if her hair (didn’t look/ wouldn’t look) so unkempt. 15. If I were in your situation, I (would/ will) let the nature take its course. Bài 7. Hoàn thành các câu sau, sử dụng dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc. 1. More tourists would come to our country if we (provide) ______________ better services. 2. If I studies abroad, _____________ (we/keep) in touch with each other? 3. If someone (give) ______________ you a camera, what would you do with it? 4. If I (win) _________________ a big prize in a lottery, I (donate) _______________ apart of it and (spend) _______________ the rest for myself. 5. What ___________ (you/do) if you found a wallet in the street? 6. I could watch foreign TV program without subtitles if I (know) _________ English. 7. He might be obese if he (not stop) __________________ taking in fat and sugar. 8. If he knew that it was dangerous, he (not do) _______________ it. 9. If you (see) ________________ someone drowning, ________________ (you/save) him? 10. She (be) __________________ happier if her parents (not get) ________________ divorced. 11. If you (sleep) _____________ under a mosquito net you (not be) _______________ bitten so often. 12. I (get) _________________ a job easily if I (have) ______________________ a degree. 4

13. If whe (have) _________ another hair style, she (look) ___________ younger. 14. if the weather (not be) _______________________ severe, out crops (grow) _______________ faster. 15. I (keep) _____________ a horse if I could afford it. Bài 8. Viết câu điều kiện loại 2 cho các trường hợp sau. 0/ They don’t have enough money. They cannot buy a new car. ->If they had enough money, they could buy a new car. 1. There isn’t a library in my neighborhood. I cannot borrow books. __________________________________________________________________________________ 2. My health is not good. I don’t play extreme sports. __________________________________________________________________________________ 3. We cannot go for a picnic because it is pouring with rain. __________________________________________________________________________________ 4. I don’t have much free time. I cannot come to your party. __________________________________________________________________________________ 5. Jim doesn’t have any siblings. He feels lonely sometimes. __________________________________________________________________________________ 6. My father is very busy at work. He rarely has time for me. __________________________________________________________________________________ 7. This camera is expensive. I can’t buy it. __________________________________________________________________________________ 8. You don’t try your best. Your result will not be good. __________________________________________________________________________________ BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO. Bài 9. Hoàn thành các câu sau, cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc. 1. We (be) ____________ happy if air pollution were the only problem. 2. They would be disappointed if you (not go) _____________ to their party. 3. If we (use) _______ this kind of light bulb, we can save energy. 4. Peter should go to sleep early if he (not want) ____________ to be tired the next morning. 5. If you (take) _______________ more exercises, you would be more resistant to diseases. 6. You may have car accident unless you (drive) ________________ more carefully. 7. If I travel to London, I (visit) ____________ its museum. 8. If they offer me the job, I think I (accept) _________________ it. 9. Many people (be) ____________ out of work if the local factory closed down. 10. What (happen) _________________ if that red button was pressed? 11. I’d be absolutely astonished if Mary and James (get) _____________ married. 12. They won’t let you in unless you (show) _____________them your identity card. 13. My best friend gave me this book. She (be) ________________ very upset if I lost it. 14. Would you mind if I (turn) ________________ up the radio. 15. I’m sure she (forgive) ______________ you if you sincerely apologize to her. Bài 10. Đánh dấu trước câu đúng, đánh dấu x trước câu sai và viết lại cho đúng. ______ 1. Pollution can be reduced if we joined hands to prevent it. _________________________________________________________________ ______ 2. If farmers would make use of pesticide more wisely, the soil would not be poisoned. _________________________________________________________________ ______ 3. I won’t believe it unless you showed me the evidence. _________________________________________________________________ _____ 4. Unless you don’t tell me the truth, I won’t help you. _________________________________________________________________ _____ 5. If James is more outgoing, he would have more friends. _________________________________________________________________ _____ 6. I think the show would be successful if he were one of the organizers. 5

_________________________________________________________________ ______ 7. If you paid more attention to what I said, you didn’t make so many mistakes. _________________________________________________________________ ______ 8. If children are taught about environmental issues, they might change their attitudes towards pollution. _________________________________________________________________ ______ 9. You would be punished if you park your car here. _________________________________________________________________ _____ 10. If you could win the competition, we will have a celebration. _________________________________________________________________ Bài 11. Hoàn thành các câu sau, chọn và cho dạng đúng của các độn từ cho sẵn. happen Reduce Save suffer Cause throw Take Be change See 1. If we use less vehicles, we _________ the amount of carbon dioxide into the air. 2. If you __________ the president, what you do to prevent air pollution. 3. If there were no fresh water left, what ____? 4. If people (not) ________________ rubbish in the street, it would look better. 5. if there wasn’t so much light in the cities at night, we __________ the starts more clearly. 6. If the water is contaminated, people ________ from many diseases. 7. If chemicals from factories are dumped into rivers and lakes, they ______ water pollution. 8. If people want to protect their planet, they should ________ their habit of using plastic bag for convenience. 9. If we recycle paper, we ________ 1000 trees a day. 10. If people were more aware of the negative consequences of pollution, they might ______ actions to prevent it. C.EXERCISES TEST 1 UNIT 7 I. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others. B. sand C. travel D. tribal 1. A. paddy 2. A. buffalo B. photo C. limestone D. botanical B. luggage C. sunbathe D. sugar 3. A. jungle 4. A. around B. various C. sound D. mountains 5. A. heritage B. giant C. garden D. village II. Choose the words that have the different stress from the others. 1. A. definition B. electricity C. contaminate D. radiation 2. A. dramatic B. overhead C. century D. groundwater 3. A. thermal B. beneath C. rubbish D. earplug 4. A. affect B. billboard C. visual D. substance 5. A. aquatic B. behavior C. pollution D. permanent III. Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others. 1. A. linguistic B. classical C. phonetic D. romantic 2. A. fantastic B. historic C. comic D. symbolic 3. A. oceanic B. specific C. ceramic D. aquatic 4. A. terrific B. Arabic C. statistic D. cosmetic 5. A. arithmetic B. geographic C. energetic D. economic IV. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D. 1. If I the same problem you had as a child, I might not have succeed in life as well as you have. A. have B. would have C. had had D. should have 2. I you sooner had someone told me you were in the hospital. A. would have visited B. visited C. had visited D. visit 6

3. A. Needed

more help, I would call my neighbor. B. Should I need C. I have needed D. I should need then what I know yesterday, I would have saved myself a lot of time and trouble over the

4. years. A. Had I known B. Did I know C. If I know D. If I would know 5. Do you think there would be less conflict in the world if all people the same language? A. spoke B. speak C. had spoken D. will speak 6. If you can give me one good reason for your acting like this, this incident again. A. I will never mention B. I never mention C. will I never mention D. I don’t mention so much noise when I came in. 7. If I had known you were asleep, I A. didn’t make B. wouldn’t have made C. won’t make D. don’t make 8. Unless you all of my questions, I can’t do anything to help you. A. answered B. answer C. would answer D. are answering 9. Had you told me that this was going to happen, I it. A. would have never believed B. don’t believe C. hadn’t believed D. can’t believe 10. If Jake to go on the trip, would you have gone? A. doesn’t agree B. didn’t agree C. hadn’t agreed D. wouldn’t agree 11. Jane: “John went to the hospital alone”, , I would have gone with him”. Katy: “If A. had he told me B. he had told me C. he has told me D. he would tell me 12. If you , I would have brought my friends over to your house yesterday to watch T.V, but I didn’t want to bother you. A. had studied B. studied C. hadn’t studied D. didn’t study

13. Peter: “Did you need help with your Math last night?” Mary: “If I had needed, I you". A. would call B. called C. would have called D. will call 14. If someone into the store, smile and say, “May I help you?” A. comes B. came C. come D. should come 15. “Here’s my phone number”. “Thanks. I’ll give you a call if I some help tomorrow” A. will need B. need C. would need D. needed 16. If I didn’t work for an accounting firm, I in a bank now. A. work B. will work C. have worked D. would work improved. 17. The death rate would decrease if hygienic conditions A. was B. is C. were D. had been 18. The education in Japan if the basic principles of education had not been taken into consideration. A. would go down B. would have gone down C. went down D. had gone down , the rice fields could have been more productive. 19. If there A. had been enough water B. were enough water C. would be enough water D. are enough water 20. The patient will not recover unless he an operation. A. had undergone B. would undergo C. undergoes D. was undergoing 21. If she him, she would be very happy. 7

A. would meet B. will meet C. met D. should meet 22. If he a thorough knowledge of English, he could have applied for this post. A. had had B. had C. has D. has had 23. If I had enough money, I abroad to improve my English. A. will go B. would go C. went D. should have go to 24. The bench would collapse if they on it. A. stood B. stand C. standing D. stands 25. If it convenient, let’s go out for a drink tonight. A. be B. is C. was D. were V.Complete the sentences with the correct verb form in the bracket. plenty of time. 1. If we meet at 9:30, we (have) 2. If you (find) a pen in the cellar, don’t mention it to anyone. 3. The zookeeper would have punished her with a fine if she (feed) the animals. 4. If you pass your examination, we (have) a celebration. 5. Lisa would find the milk if she (look) for it in the fridge. 6. What (happen) if I press this button? the green button. 7. The door will be unlocked if you (press) 8. I should have voted for her if I (have) a vote then. 9. If you go to Paris, where you (stay) ? in this lake, you’ll shiver from cold. 10. If you (swim) 11. Unless you (tell) the truth, I won’t help you. 12. You’ll get pneumonia if you (not change) your wet clothes. 13. If I had known that you couldn’t eat octopus, I (not buy) it. that picture lower, people would be able to see it. 14. If they (hang) 15. She (be) able to walk faster if she didn’t have such high-heel shoes. 16. I (bring) you some beer if I had known that you were thirsty. electrocuted. 17. If you had touched that electric cable, you (be) 18. If the story hadn’t been true, the newspaper (not print) it. 19. I (not buy) things on the installment system if I were you. 20. Dan (arrive) safe if he drove slowly. VI. Correct the verbs form to complete the sentences. 1. If you (go) away, please write to me. 2. If he (eat) another cake, he will be sick. 3. I (not do) that if I (be) you. 4. If he (take) my advice, everything can go well. 5. He never does homework. If he (do) his homework, he (not worry) about his exam. 6. What you (do) if she refuses your invitation? Sunday, we (go) to the beach. 7. If today (be) 8. Unless they (pass) their examinations, they would join the army. 9. You (be) ill if you drink that water. to bed earlier, he would not be so tired. 10. If Tom (go) 11. If it’s raining heavily, we (not go) for a donkey ride. 12. If he (try) hard, he’ll pass the examination. 13. I could understand the French teacher if she (speak) more slowly. 14. If I (finish) the work in time, I (go) to the football game. 15. If you (see) Mary today, please (ask) her to call me. VII. Complete the sentences with the correct verb form in the bracket. ? 1. If someone offered to buy you one of those rings, which you (choose) 2. The flight may be cancelled if the fog (get) thick. 3. If the milkman (come) , tell him to leave two pints. 8

4. I (call) the office if I were you. 5. Someone (sit) on your glasses if you leave them there. so much. 6. You would hear my explanation if you (not talk) 7. What you (do) if you hear the burglar alarm? 8. If you (read) the instructions carefully, you wouldn’t have answered the wrong question. her teacher, he’d have answered her questions. 9. If Mel (ask) 10. I would repair the roof myself if I (have) a long ladder. 11. Unless they turn that radio off, I (go) mad. 12. If you were made redundant, what you (do) ? out of petrol here. 13. We’ll have a long way to walk if we (run) 14. If you shake that bottle of port, it (not be) fit to drink. 15. If you spoke louder, your classmates (understand) you. 16. I’ll probably get lost unless he (come) with me. 17. You (not have) so many accidents if you drove more slowly. 18. If you (wear) a false beard, nobody would have recognized you. the fish here, the cat will eat it 19. If she (leave) 20. You (have) no trouble at school if you had done your homework. VIII. Fill in each blank with the correct preposition. natural habitat of animals. 1. Land pollution is responsible for damage done 2. Americans throw twenty-eight and a half million tons of plastic in landfills every year. 3. Scientists have come up new ways of saving energy. 4. Thousands of people were exposed radiation when the nuclear plant exploded. water bodies directly causes water 5. Waste water from many factories which is dumped pollution. IX. Read the passage and complete the sentences. True (T) or false (F). Air pollution is a serious problem in many cities. Motor vehicles, factories and other sources create so much air pollution that it may hang in the air like dirty fog. Air pollution threatens the health of the people who live in cities. City wastes cause water pollution when they are poured into the waterways. These wastes kill fish and make some areas unfit for swimming. In addition, many large cities have difficulties in disposing of their garbage. The amount of garbage grows each year, but places to put it are quickly filling up. Citizens, governments, industries, scientists, and business people must work together in different ways to gradually reduce pollution. For example, most cities have introduced recycling programmes. 1. Motor vehicles and factories are among some sources of air pollution. 2. Air pollution doesn’t endanger people’s health in some cities. 3. Air pollution is the only problem of the environment mentioned in this passage. 4. Garbage disposal is a problem in many large cities. 5. Everyone must cooperate to reduce pollution. 6. We can reduce pollution by recycling programmes only. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. Light pollution is not (1) serious as water or air pollution. (2) , it is the type of pollution that (3) more in cities than in rural areas. In the past, we could sit out at night and (4) at glittering stars in the sky and light from objects in the outer space. Nowadays, cities are covered with lights from buildings, streets, advertising displays, many of which direct the lights up into the sky and into many unwanted places. The real problem is that it is very (5) to apply light to almost everything at night. Millions of tons of oil and coal (6) to produce the power to light the sky. Eye strain, (7) of vision and stress are what people may get from light pollution. (8) light at night can harm our eyes and also harm the hormones that help us to see things properly. 1. A. as B. more C. much D. only

2. A. Moreover B. However C. Therefore D. Nevertheless 3. A. happen B. occur C. occurs D. is occurred 4. A. watch B. see C. spend D. gaze 5. A. waste B. wasteful C. wasting D. wastes 6. A. used B. using C. is used D. are used 7. A. lose B. lost C. loss D. losing 8. A. Very much B. Too much C. Too many D. So many XI. Read the following passage and then answer the questions below it. Air pollution is a cause of ill-health in human beings. In a lot of countries there are laws limiting the amount of smoke which factories can produce. Although there isn’t enough information on the effects of smoke in the atmosphere, doctors have proved that air pollution causes lung diseases. The gases from the exhausts of cars have also increased air pollution in most cities. The lead in petrol produces a poisonous gas which often collects in busy streets surrounded by high buildings. Children who live in areas where there is a lot of lead in the atmosphere cannot think as quickly as other children and they are clumsy when they use their hands. There are other long-term effects of pollution. If the gases in the atmosphere continue to increase, the earth’s climate may become warmer. A lot of the ice near the Poles may melt and may cause serious floods. 1. What can make people sick? _________________________________________________ 2. Where does smoke come from? _________________________________________________ 3. Can air pollution cause lung diseases? _________________________________________________ 4. What else can cause air pollution in cities? _________________________________________________ 5. Why does the earth’s climate become warmer? _________________________________________________ XII. Read the passage, and choose the correct answer A, B, C or D for each question. Saving the Environment: One Home at a Time Pollution can be seen not only throughout the world, but also in our own homes. It comes from household chemicals, the amount of water people use and the waste people produce and throw away. What can be done to stop this pollution? Surprisingly, a person can help save the environment by doing simple things. First, we need to recycle, which allows products to be used over and over again. Recycling can also reduce the number of trees cut down to produce paper products. It takes very little effort. It is not hard to place plastic and glass bottles, aluminum cans and paper in a bin. Anyone can do it. Second, we need to watch the amount of water used at home. It can be conserved by taking short showers instead of baths, repairing leaky faucets, using the dishwasher or washing machine only when fully loaded, or simply turning the faucet off while brushing your teeth. Third, we need to reduce waste. We need to recycle whenever possible, but should also try to use this waste effectively. For example, grass clippings and food scraps can be made into compost for plants. The average person produces 4.3 pounds of waste every day, but we can reduce that amount by recycling and reusing. If we do our part in our own homes, we can help keep the planet from becoming more polluted. 1. Pollution is caused from the following sources except . A. water in rivers B. water from households C. wastes D. house chemicals 2. Recycling can help us . A. never cut down trees B. produce more paper products C. place garbage bins easily D. use products again and again 3. In order to save water, we can do all of the following things except .

A. fully use the washing machine B. repair leaky faucets C. take short showers instead of baths D. turn the faucet off while brushing your teeth 4. Recycling helps to reduce waste because . A. plants need to develop B. waste can be recycled and reused C. a person can do it in his home D. an average man produces compost for plants 5. The word â&#x20AC;&#x153;Itâ&#x20AC;? in paragraph 2 refers to . A. cutting down B. the number C. recycling D. effort TEST 2 UNIT 7 I. Write the words from the box in the correct part of the table, according to the stress pattern. scenic sonic fantastic historic republic arithmetic energetic political

economic supersonic systematic comic romantic traffic botanical tropical

terrific statistic phonetic heroic microscopic elastic classical vertical

Arabic cosmetic emphatic specific magic ceramic typical practical

kinetic aerobic sympathetic scientific fabric aquatic logical critical

linguistic symbolic automatic mechanic oceanic geographic numerical mythical

1. The soil becomes because of the use of so many pesticides and fertilizers. (contaminate) 2. waste spills can contaminate groundwater.(industry) 3. In many developing countries, water pollution is usually a leading causeof . (die) 4. elements have been found in both ground and underground water sources.(pollute) 5. Fish and many other animals are killed by in their habitat.(pollute) 6. Astronomers are concerned about light pollution because they have in viewing activities in the sky and outer space. (difficult) V. Combine each pair of sentences, using conditional sentences type 1. 1. A person looks at the sky at night. He is not able to see the Milky Way by naked eye. 2. Noise pollution happen regularly. It causes stressor nuisance. 3. Water pollution gets more serious in the future. It affects the development of economy the pollution and society.

4. Australia has invested in water in Viet Nam with good results. Haft of the population in the rural areas has access to fresh water. 5. You use compact light bulbs. You save a lot of energy. 6. We have more space. We plant more trees.

Ooo

oOo

II. Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others. 1. A.terrific B.Arabic C.statistic D.cosmetic 2. A.arithmetic B.geographic C.energetic D.economic 3. A.linguistic B.classical C.phonetic D.romantic 4. A.fantastic B.historic C.comic D.symbolic 5. A.oceanic B.specific C.ceramic D.aquatic III. Complete the sentences, using the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. habitats have been destroyed in recent years. (nature) 2. A number of cleaning products contain chemicals. (harm) 3. Water samples collected at these villages were seriously with bacteria. (contaminate) 4. People believe that the water has brought cancer to the local residents. (pollution) 5. Light pollution make us to see the stars in the sky. (able) 6. Noise is considered as pollution. (environment) IV. Complete the sentences, using the correct form ofthe words in brackets.

VI. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. Light pollution is not (1) serious as water or air pollution. (2) , it is the type of pollution that (3) more in cities than in rural area. In the past, we could sit out at night and (4) at glittering stars in the sky and light from objects in the outer space. Nowadays, cities are covered with lights from buildings,streets, advertising displays, many of which direct the lights up into the sky and into many unwanted places. The real problem is that it is very (5) to apply light to almost everything at night. Millions of tons of oil and coal (6) to produce the power to light the sky. Eye strain, (7) of vision and stress are what people may get from light pollution. (8) light at night can harm our eyes and also harm hormones that help us to see things properly. 1. A. more B. as C. much D. only 2. A.Moreover B. However C. Therefore D. Nevertheless 3. A. happen B. occur C. occurs D. is occurred 4. A.watch B. see C. spend D. spend 5. A. waste B. wastes C. wasting D. wasteful 6. A. used B. using C. is used D. are used 7. A. lose B. lost C. loss D. losing 8. A. Very much B. Too much C.Too many D.So many VII. Read the passage, and do the tasks that follow. There are many causes that lead to water pollution. One man cause of this issue is waste water coming from many factories and then being directly pulled out into water bodies, especially into rivers or seas without any treatmentbecause this is the most convenient way of disposing waste water. Industrial waste consists of some kind of chemical substance such as sulphur, which is harmful for marine life. Lead is known as the main reason for cancer disease. Cancer has become a popular disease in several communes which are called "cancer villages". Another cause is the awareness of citizens, people always use water for many purposes and then they dump waste water or garbage directly into rivers, canal, and ponds and 12

son on. In 2004, because of bird flu outbreak in Vietnam, people threw poultry to water body that made water highly polluted. Task 1: Match a word in column A with its definition in column B, writing the answer in each blank. Answer

A B 1. convenient A. birds, like hens ducks, geeseâ&#x20AC;Ś that are kept for eggs and (adj) meat 2. marine (adj) B. knowledge 3. awareness (n) C. connected with the sea D. suitable or practical for a particular purpose 4. outbreak (n) E. the sudden beginning of something unpleasant 5. poultry (n) Task 2: Read the passages again, and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). T F 6. Waste water from many factories which is dumped into water bodies directly causes water pollution. 7. Dumping waste directly into water is the most convenient way of disposing waste water. 8. Sulphur is believed the main reason for cancer. 9. Cancer villages occurred in 2004. 10. Due to lack of awareness, people poisoned water with dead poultry when there was bird flu outbreak in 2004. VIII. Read the passage, and do the tasks that follow. Space Pollution The launch of Sputnik I and Yuri Gagarin, the first human being in space, marked the beginning of space exploration and the beginning of a new and unfamiliar type of pollution. Satellites, solar panels, rocket bodies and fragment from space shuttles that are floating in space and are no longerfunctional are considered space debris. This pollution of man-made objects in space affects us here on Earth as well and will continue to affect us in future travel. In 1978, the Soviet Union Kosmos 954, which contained a nuclear power source, reentered over Canada and left debris over an area the size of Austria. In 1969, five Japanese sailors were injured by pieces of space debris that hit their ship. The largest piece, weighing one thousand pounds, in Australia in 1979. Many solutions are being considered by scientists and engineers. However, the challenge to finding a solution lies within all of the nations which take part in the space exploration. Task 1: Match a word in column A with its definition in column B, writing the answer in each blank. Answer

A B 1. shuttle A.broken pieces of something larger 2. functional B. made by people 3. debris C. a vehicle in which people travel into space and back again 4. man-made D. a way of finding an answer to a problem 5. solution E. working; being used Task 2: Read the passage again, and then answer the following questions. 6. What are some examples of space pollution? 7.

What are the effects of space pollution?

What did Kosmos 954 cause to Canada?

Why were Japanese sailor injured in 1969?

10. Is it easy for all the nations taking part in the space exploration to find solutions? IX. Choose the word or phrase among A B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. 13

Have a walk (1) a beach, listen to the sound of the sea waves, and suddenly you see a lot of rubbish on the beach. Pollution takes away all the (2) of out beaches. I feel reallyvery annoyed (3)I see plastic lying on the sand, cigarette ends buried in the sand, and soda cans floating in the sea. There are a lot of things that we can do. (4) we see rubbish, we should do our part in the protecting the land (5) picking it up and throwing it in dust bins. (6) , we can form some kind of organization that helps (7) the beaches. If everyone does their part, the beach will be a wonderful and beautiful place. We need to start now (8) the beaches are damaged beyond repair. 1. A. at B.in C.on D.over 2. A. beauty B.beautiful C.beautifully D.being beautiful 3. A.before B.after C.When D.While 4. A.While B.If C.Unless D.Soon 5. A.by B.with C.of D.in 6. A.Nevertheless B.Therefore C.However D.Moreover 7. A.cleaning up B.clean up C.cleaning up D.clean off 8. A.before B.after C.until D.when X. Read the passage, and choose the correct answer A, B, C or D for each question. Saving the Environment: One Home at a Time Pollution can be seen not only throughout the world, but also in our own homes. It comes from household chemicals, the amount of water people use and the waste people produce and throw away. What can be done to stop this pollution? Surprisingly, a person can help save the environment by doing simple things. First, we need to recycle, which allows products to be used over and over again. Recycling can also reduce the number of trees cut down to produce paper products. It takes very little effort. It is not hard to place plastic and glass bottles, aluminum cans and paper in a bin. Anyone can do it. Second, we need to watch the amount of water used in the home. It can be conserved by taking short showers instead of baths, repairing leaky faucets, using the dishwasher or washing machine only when fully loaded, or simply turning the faucet off while brushing your teeth. Third, we need to reduce waste. We need to recycle whenever possible, but should also try to use this waste effectively. For example, grass clippings and food scraps can be made into compost for plants. The average person produces 4.3 pounds of waste every day, but we can reduce that amount by recycling and reusing. If we do our part in our own homes, we can help keep the planet from becoming more polluted. 1. Pollution can be caused from the following sources except . A. house chemicals B. water from households C. wastes D. water in rivers 2. Recycling can help us . A. never cut down trees B. use products again and again. C. place garbage bins easily D. produce more paper products 3. In order to save water, we can do all of the following things except . A. take short showers instead of baths B. repair leaky faucets C. fully use the washing machine D. turn the faucet off while brushing your teeth 4. Recycling helps to reduce waste because . A. plants need to develop B. a person can do it in his home C. waste can be recycled and reused D. an average man produces compost for plants 5. The word "It" in paragraph 2 refers to . A. recycling B. the number C. cutting down D. effort XI. Write a paragraph about noise pollution (definition, causes, effects and solutions), using the cues given. 14

1. Noise pollution/ any loud sounds/ either harmful or annoying/ humans and animals. 2. Generally/ noise/ produced/ household appliances/ big trucks/ vehicles and motorbikes/ on the road/ planes and helicopters flying over cities/ loud speakers, etc. 3. Noise solution/ cause/ stress/ illnesses/ hearing loss/ sleep loss/ lost productivity.

6. Noise pollution is one of the major causes of stress and anxiety. People suffer from stress and anxiety. (because of) XIV. Based on the context, make conditional sentences type 2 from the clues. 1. My home hasn't installed a solar water heater. If/ my home/ install/ a solar water heater/ we/ save a lot of energy.

4. Health effects/ noise/include/ anxiety/ stress/ headaches/ irritability/ nervousness. 2. Not all households in Viet Nam turn off lights during the Earth Hour. If/ all households/ Viet Nam/ turn offlights/ the Earth Hour/ we/ save enough electricity/ develop our rural areas. 5. Noise-producing industries/ airports/ bus terminals/ should/ located/ far/ living places.

6. The officials/ check/ misuse/ loudspeakers/ outdoor parties and discos/ as well as/ public announcement systems. XII. Rewrite the sentences, using the words in brackets. You can make some changes. 1. There are asthma, allergies and other respiratory illnesses when air pollution happens.(leads to) 2. Aquatic life suffers or dies because there is thermal pollution.(because of) 3. Water in the Cau River becomes brown and has terrible smell because the waste water is released from the paper mill in Thai Nguyen City.(so) 4. People use much herbicide to treat weeds, so waterin rivers, canals, lakes are extremely polluted and has bad effects on peopleâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; health. (because) 5. May fish in the river die due the increased temperature of water.(because) 6. Because plastic bags take so long to decompose, nearly all of them still exist in the environment today. (so) XIII. Combine each pair of sentences, using the words/ phrases in brackets. You can make some changes. 1. We are unable to see the stars in the sky.Light pollution occurs.(makes) 2. Glass panels, windows, lawns and roofs make light pollution worse. They reflect artificial and sun light. (because)

3. All sound are not noise. Noise is any sound that is unwanted and goes beyond its certain limit, for example, above 80 decibels. (because)

4. More and more noise is created by modern civilization. It has now become a major environmental pollutant, especially in urban areas. (so)

5. Contamination in the air happens. There is acid rain which damages soil, vegetation and aquatic life of the region. (causes) 15

3. Some students in our school still throw litter on the school ground. If/ students/ our school/ not throw litter/ the school ground/ our campus/ look/ greener fresher. 4. People use aluminum cans instead of glass bottles. If/ people use/ glass bottles/ they/ use/ again and again. 5. Our school ground is large but we don't have a wind turbine. If/ we/ install/ a wind turbine/ our school/ become/ more eco-friendly. 6.

People donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t use organic fertilizers. If/ people/ use/ organic fertilizers/ they/ prevent/ land pollution.

7. A large number of people ride their motorbikes to work. If/ people/ ride/ bikes/ they/ keep/ air/ less polluted. 8. That factory doesnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t have a wastewater treatment system. If/ that factory/ have/ waste water treatment system/ river/ not become/ so polluted.

TEST 3 UNIT 7 I. Find the words that has different stress pattern in each line. 1. A. dramatic B. rhythmic C. angelic 2. A. affect B. algae C. billboard 3. A. political B. electrical C. identical 4. A. aquatic B. radiation C. pollution 5. A. industry B. industrial C. poison II. Find the words that has different stress pattern in each line. 1. A. domestic B. possible C. physical 2. A. mineral B. national C. economic 3. A. photograph B. organism C. organic 4. A. historical B. industry C. political 5. A. popular B. romantic C. financial III. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete these sentences. 1. Air pollution is severe in . A. cities B. densely populated areas C. industrialised areas D. all of these 2. Main sources of noise pollution are . A. transportation equipment B. musical instruments 16

D. romantic D. cholera D. politic D. logical D. poisonous\ D. musical D. politic D. atmosphere D. humidity D. adverbial

C. heavy machinery D. both A and C One of the best solutions to get rid of non-biodegradable wastes is . A. burning B. dumping C. recycling D. buying 4. Which of the following is not as a consequence of global warming? A. increased agricultural productivity worldwide B. rising sea level C. worsening health effects D. increased storm frequency and intensity 5. The water temperature in streams, rivers, oceans change is the effect of . A. radioactive pollution B. thermal pollution C. light pollution D. visual pollution 6. Which sentences are not the causes of water pollution? A. Factories dump industrial waste into lakes and rivers. B. Sewage from households. C. People burn fossil fuels. D. Farmers use pesticides to kill insects and herbicides to kill weeks. 7. When does thermal pollution take place? A. Sun heats up the lakes and ponds. B. Hot water from factories drains into rivers and ponds. C. When hot oil drains into rivers and lakes. D. None of these 8. Nuclear waste is the pollutant of . A. air pollution B. water pollution C. radioactive pollution D. soil pollution 9. Which of the following is how to control air pollution? A. Maintaining a healthy distance between the industrial and residential areas. B. Minimum use of loudspeakers and amplifiers especially near silence zones. C. Don't throw chemicals, oils, paints and medicines into the river. D. planting trees 10. Thousands of deer and animals are killed on the road by vehicles in the evening because the glare of cars blinds them is the effect of . A. air pollution B. visual pollution C. thermal pollution D. light pollution 3.

IV. Choose the correct answers. 1. Many species of wildlife are becoming extinct, the rainforests are being destroyed. A.therefore B. since C.consequently D. so 2. Hemp can be used to make paper, it could reduce the need for logging. A.consequently B.due to C. so D. since 3. logging provides jobs and profits, the government is reluctant to control it. A. so B.Consequently C. Since D. Due to 4. Hemp was grown throughout history its versatility; it can be used to make many different things. A. due to B. because C. since D. as a result 5. Hempis related to the marijuana plant; it is illegal in many countries. A. so B. due to C. as a result D. because 6. The polluted chemical waste was dumped into the ocean; , the mass of fish died. A. because B. as C. because of D. consequently 7. It was guessed that the fish died a powerful toxin in the sea water. A. because of B. because C. since D. as a result 8. Many species in BC are threatened logging. A. so B. because C. since D. due to 9. Smoking can heart disease. A. lead to B. create C. causes D. due to 17

10. Radioactive pollution is increasing A. as B. since

the increased use of radioactivity. C. because of D. because

V. Complete the table with appropriate verbs, nouns and adjectives. Verb Noun Adjective 1. Danger Dangerous to edit 2. editing/ edited to annoy 3. annoying/annoyed to instruct Instruction 4. 5. Drama Dramatic to interest Interest 6. to choose 7. Choosing to heat Heat 8. 9. Low Low

VI. Complete the sentences, using the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. Walking alone late at night can be (danger) . 2. The latest (edit) of this book contains many illustrative pictures. 3. Her younger sister can be (annoy) when she behaves haughtily. 4. You must read the (instruct) carefully before you use the new oven. 5. We were taken aback at the (drama) changes in our village; each home owns a computer now. 6. It is always (interest) to watch the cubs at play. 7. My mother advised me to be careful in my (choose) of friends. 8. The (hot) makes everybody very drowsy during the lesson in class. 9. The couple came here at the special (invite) of the prime minister. 10. Please (low) the volume of your voice. I can even hear you from next door. VII. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form of conditional sentence type 1. 1. If people (pollute) the environment, a lot of animals (die) . 2. If water (consist) germs, people (get) ill. 3. If the poles (melt) , huge landmasses (be) under water. 4. Many precious animals (disappear) , if people (cut down) trees. 5. If nuclear waste (throw) away, it (be) very dangerous. 6. If the emission of CO2 (continue) at high rate, the climate (destroy) . 7. We (save) the trees If we (save) paper. 8. If schools (teach) about environmental problems, All students (know) h to protect the environment. 9. If more people (travel) by bike or bus, we (not have) traffic jam. 10. If the government (fine) heavily to the factories, they (not dump) sewage into the ocean. VIII. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form of conditional sentence type 2. 1. If I (be) the president, I (pass) harder regulations for using fertilizers in agriculture. 2. If I (be) you, I (not eat) that genetically modified potatoes. 3. If big corporations (care) more about the environment and less about their own pockets, the pollution from factories (not increase) so fast. 4. He (sort) his trash, if he (be) smart. 5. If the seas (pollute) , maybe the population of whales (recover) . 18

6. If I (not throw) this can of Coke into the bushes, I (not know) that Coke is poison for wild animals. 7. If the factories (not dump) untreated waste into the ocean, fish (die) 8. What (do) you if you (be) President. 9. If the air (not be) dirty, the breathing problems (reduce) . 10. If I (own) a lonely island, I (build) a huge house by the beach.

massively.

IX. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form. 1. If you (send) this letter now, she (receive) it tomorrow. 2. Kate (go) shopping if she (have) time in the afternoon. 3. She (spend) a year in the USA if it (be) easier to get a green card. 4. If her boyfriend (phone/ not) today, she (leave) him. 5. If you (go) by bike more often, you (be/ not) so flabby. 6. If he (have) more time, he (earn) karate. 7. He (not buy) so much clothes if he (not have) . 8. If I (play) the lottery yesterday, I (have) a chance to hit the jackpot. 9. If I (be) ) rich, my life (change) completely. 10. I (invite) ) all my friends if I (have) ) a house by the beach. X. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets. 1. If you come with me, I (do) the shopping with you. 2. Wilson (help) his mother in the garden if she shows him how to do. 3 . If it (rain) , I will stay at home. 4. Our teacher will be happy if we (learn) the poem by heart. 5. If they had enough money, they (buy) a new car. 6. We (pass) the exam if we studied harder. 7. If Pat (repair) his bike, he could go on a bicycle tour with us. 8. She would get 100 pounds if she (sell) this old shelf. 9. If I were you, I (invite) Jack to the party. 10. If the weather (be) fine, the children can walk to school. XI. Pollution and its Negative Effects Pollution is the degradation of natural environment by external substances introduced directly or indirectly. Human health, ecosystem quality and aquatic and terrestrial biodiversity may be affected and altered permanently by pollution. Pollution occurs when ecosystems can not get rid of substances introduced into the environment. The critical threshold of its ability to naturally eliminate substances is compromised and the balance of the ecosystem is broken. The sources of pollution are numerous. The identification of these different pollutants and their effects on ecosystems is complex. They can come from natural disasters or the result of human activity, such as oil spills, chemical spills nuclear accidents... These can have terrible consequences on people and the planet where they live: destruction of the biodiversity, increased mortality of human and animal species, destruction of natural habitat, damage caused to the quality of soil, water and air .. Preventing pollution and protecting the environment necessitate application of the principles of sustainable development. We have to consider satisfy the needs of today without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their needs. This means that we should remedy existing pollution, but also anticipate and prevent future pollution sources in order to protect the environment and public health. Any environmental damage must be punishable by law, and polluters should pay compensation for the damage caused to the environment. 1. Now match the words with their correct descriptions. 19

1. remedy 2. compromise 3. terrestrial 4. biodiversity

A. The condition or process of degrading or being degraded B. On or relating to the earth C. The variety of plant and animal life in the world D. An agreement or settlement of a dispute that is reached by each side making concessions. E. The state of being subject to death F. Eliminate a disease or condition with medical treatment.

5. degradation 6. mortality Your answers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2. Read the text again then answer the questions below. 1. What is the pollution? ____________________________________________________________________________ 2. When does pollution occur? ____________________________________________________________________________ 3. How is the sources of pollution? ____________________________________________________________________________ 4. What can the pollutants of pollution be? ____________________________________________________________________________ 5. List three effects of pollution. ____________________________________________________________________________ 6. Should polluters pay compensation for the damage caused to the environment? ____________________________________________________________________________

XII. Read the text then choose the best answer. ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION In recent years the problem of environmental pollution has become a serious problem in big cities in our country. So, what are reasons and possible measures for this problem? Nowadays, we are living in a city with high population density, so domestic waste is the first reason. Then many people's social consciousness is not high. In several areas, they throw rubbish on streets, canals and rivers. It is easy for us to see rubbish of all kinds floating on the water. Moreover, uncultured people even pee in the public place. Now, let's come to other reasons. Our city is overloaded with vehicles that expel a lot of smoke and dust. This contributes to the heat of the air, and causes pollution. Besides that, in several places, trees have been cut down to have room for buildings, hotels, or supermarkets. This makes the atmosphere in our city mug and stuffy. New words: muggy (adi) nồm ẩm, oi bức stuffy (adi) ngột ngạt 1. What is not the reasons of environmental pollution? A. high population density B. smoke and dust from vehicles C. domestic waste D. the new drainage system 2. What is the first reason of environmental pollution? A. domestic waste B. smoke and dust from vehicles C. population density D. rubbish on streets 3. What is the synonym of the word "consciousness"? A. awareness B. unculture C. unconsciousness D. awakeness 4. Why vehicles cause air pollution? A. Vehicles make the atmosphere in our city muggy and stuffy. B. Because they expel a lot of smoke and dust. C. Because they consume too much gasoline. D. Because many people use motorbikes and cars nowadays. 20

How is the drain system in our city? A. It’s very modern. C. It is new.

B. It's downgrade. _______ D. It is very old and downgrade

XIII. Combine the sentences in each pair into a new sentence that shows a cause/ effect relationship. Use cause and effect signal word or phrase given in brackets. 1. One effect of global warming is that sea levels are rising. The polar icecaps are melting. (because) ____________________________________________________________________________ 2. The global population has increased. There are much better levels of nutrition. (because of) ____________________________________________________________________________ 3. Nuclear explosions and detonations of nuclear weapons cause radioactive pollution. (lead to) ____________________________________________________________________________ 4. In the last ten years, many BC valleys have been clearcut. 142 species of salmon have become extinct. (so) ____________________________________________________________________________ 5. The fish and other aquatic animals have died. The water is polluted. (due to) ____________________________________________________________________________ XIV. Write conditional sentences type I or II for these situation. l. People eat dirty food. They can be cancer. ____________________________________________________________________________ 2. A factory directly discharges a large volume of waste water into the Thi Vai River. The river is polluted. ____________________________________________________________________________ 3. Farmers use polluted water to water their plants. People eat these plants, they become sick with diseases such as diarrhea, bacterial inflections even cancer. ____________________________________________________________________________ 4. Thermal pollution takes place. The water temperature in streams, rivers, lakes and oceans will increase or decrease suddenly. ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ 5. People live in radioactive pollution area. They can be skin cancer. ____________________________________________________________________________ XV. Complete the sentence by filling in a cause or an effect as required. 1. Melanie did not go to school yesterday because . 2. Due to , Jason was late for work again. 3. If , there won't be enough space in the car for each. 4. Mai works late every Friday so that . 5 Owing to , the tickets were all sold out. 6. Global warming leads to . 7. I woke up late this morning because . 8. A big ships spill oil in Pacific ocean which causes

UNIT 8. ENGLISH-SPEAKING COUNTRIES CÁC QUỐC GIA NÓI TIẾNG ANH A. VOCABULARY 1. Aborigines (n) /ˌæbəˈrɪdʒəniz/ 2. absolutely (adv) /ˈæbsəluːtli / 3. accent (n) /ˈæksent/ 5. cattle station (n) / ˈkætl ˈsteɪʃn/ 6. ghost (n) /ɡəʊst/

thổ dân châu Úc tuyệt đối, chắc chắn giọng điệu4. awesome (adj) /ˈɔːsəm/ tuyệt vời trại gia súc ma 21

7. haunt (v) /hɔːnt/ 8. icon (n) /ˈaɪkɒn/ 9. kangaroo (n) /ˌkæŋɡəˈruː/ 10. koala (n) /kəʊˈɑːlə/ 11. kilt (n) /kɪlt/ 12. legend (n) /ˈledʒənd/ 13. loch (n) /lɒk/ 14. official (adj) /əˈfɪʃl/ 15. parade (n) /pəˈreɪd/ 16. puzzle (n) /ˈpʌzl/ 17. schedule (n) /ˈʃedjuːl/ 18. Scots/ Scottish (n) /skɒts/ ˈskɒtɪʃ/ 19. state (n) /steɪt/ 20. unique (adj) /juˈniːk/

ám ảnh, ma ám biểu tượng chuột túi gấu túi váy ca-rô của đàn ông Scotland huyền thoại hồ (phương ngữ ở Scotland) chính thống/ chính thức cuộc diễu hành trò chơi đố lịch trình, thời gian biểu người Scotland bang độc đáo, riêng biệt

B. GRAMMAR I. CÁC THÌ HIỆN TẠI (PRESENT TENSES) Thì Cấu trúc Dấu hiệu nhận biết Hiện tại đơn * Động từ thường Everyday/week/month/year…, in (+) S + V_s/es + O the morning/ afternoon/ evening/ (-) S + don’t/ doesn’t + V + O always; usually; often; sometimes; (?) Do/Does + S + V + O? seldom; rarely; frequently; … * Động từ Tobe (+) S + am/is/are +O (-) S + am/ is/ are not + O (?) Am/ Is/ Are + S + O? Hiện tại tiếp diễn (+) S + am/ is/ are + V_ing + O. Now, at the moment, at the present, (-)S + am/ is/ are + not V_ing + O Look! Listen! At this time, right (?) Am/ Is/ Are + S + V_ing + O? now, now,… Hiện tại hoàn thành (+) S+ have/ has + VpII +O. Just, yet, never, ever, already, so (-)S+ have/ has + not VpII +O. far, up to now, since, for, recently, (?) Have/ Has + S + VpII +O? lately, until now, up to present, … BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài 1: Khoanh tròn đáp án đúng 1. The Smith (is having/ are having) a barbecue in the backyard right now. 2. The train (just leaves/ has just left) for 10 minutes. 3. The police (haven’t caught/ hasn’t caught) the burglars yet. 4. Jim (is still reading/ has still read) the book he borrowed from the local library last week. 5. (Have you ever tried/ Are you ever trying) Indian cuisine before? No, this is my first time. 6. At present, my father (is having/ has) a car and a motorbike. 7. You should arrive at the airport before &:30 because the plane (takes off/ are taking off) at sharp 8. 8. Who (is/are) James talking to? 9. I (have read/read) five science books so far. 10. Coffee (has always been/ is always) my favorite drink since I was 20. 11. Why (are you always talking/ do you always talk) with your mouth full? 12. What (are you doing/ do you do) now? I am a linguist. 13. Look! It (is pouring/ pours) with rain. 14. Have you finished your homework yet? No, actually I (am working/ work) on it. 15. Mr. Brown (is sleeping/ has slept). I can hear his loud snoring. Bài 2. Điền các trạng từ cho sẵn vào chỗ trống sao cho thích hợp Always rarely yet for 22

Since often never now 1. James has ______ tried Japanese food before. This is the first time. 2. My brother is _________ waking up late in the morning. 3. They haven’t seen each other _____________ the last winter. 4. To be honest, I ___________ do morning exercises because I hate getting up early. 5. Have you ever been to a foreign country __________? 6. The Smith have lived in this neighborhood ________ 5 years. 7. My mother _____________ goes shopping with friends when she has free time. 8. _________ Jim is playing the piano while his sister is singing along. Bài 3. Chia động từ trong ngoặc sao cho thích hợp. 1. Where’s Mary? She (listen) __________________ to a new CD in her room. 2. Don’t forget to take your umbrella with you today. You know it (be) _____________ the raining season now. 3. Jean always (learn) __________ English at this time every day but today she (not study) _______ at the moment. 4. What time _____________ (the meeting/ happen) tomorrow? I (not know) ___________________ it yet. I (wait) _________________ for the announcement. 5. Where _______ (you/live) since you moved from your old house? 6. Look! The sun (rise) __________ over the ocean. This is the most amazing scene I (ever/ see) ______________. 7. He (speak) _________ Japanese so well because He (come) ___________ from Japan. 8. ________ (you/ usually/ go) for Christmas or _________ (you/stay) at home? 9. Look! Your friend (hold) ___________ some roses. They (look) ____________ lovely. 10. _____________ (you/ finish) your assignment yet? No, I ________________. 11. My father usually (walk) __________ to work but now hw (drive) __________________ his car. 12. I (not think) _________ Mary (sleep) __________ because I can hear some noise from her room. 13. My grandparents (bring) ____________ me up since I was very small. 14. How long ____________ (Peter/ work) in his firm? 15. James (always/ complain) __________. It (be) ________ hard to please him. 16. I (just/ realize) _______ that there are only four weeks to the end of them. 17. This is the second time I (be) _____ to London. 18. Now the children (not want) _______ to go to sleep. They (prefer) ___________ their mother to tell them bedtime stories. 19. _____ (they. Want) a horror movie before? Yes, they (watch) __________ a plenty of such movies before. 20. Jim (cook) __________ so tired now. He (work) ______________________ non-stop since the morning. Bài 4. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch châ của những câu dưới đây. 1. Mary has moved to her new house for 4 months. ________________________________________________________________________________ 2. The airplane takes off at 6pm tomorrow. ________________________________________________________________________________ 3. James and Jane are helping an old man cross the road. ________________________________________________________________________________ 4. The children visit their grandparents every two months. ________________________________________________________________________________ 5. This dress costs me $100 to buy. ________________________________________________________________________________ 6. The couple has sent a letter to their daughter. ________________________________________________________________________________ 7. Many people are queuing in front of the shop because a hot item is on sale. ________________________________________________________________________________

8. They have watched this movie three times. ________________________________________________________________________________ 9. My mother is always complaining about my untidiness. ________________________________________________________________________________ 10. I often learn a new word by making sentences with it. ________________________________________________________________________________ B. THÌ HIỆN TẠI ĐƠN VÀ HIỆN TẠI TIẾP DIỄN DIỄN TẢ TƯƠNG LAI (PRESENT SIPLE AND PRESENT CONTINUOUS FOR FUTURE) Cách dùng Ví dụ Thì hiện tại đơn diễn tả tương lai khi nói về lịch làm - The train leaves Plymouth at 11:30 and arrives in việc, thời gian biểu, lịch trình tàu xe… (như giao London at 14:45 (Đoàn tàu sẽ rời Plymouth lúc thông công cộng, lịch chiếu phim, lịch phát sóng 11h30 và sẽ đến Luân Đôn lúc 14h45.) chương trình truyền hình…) - It’s Friday tomorrow. (Ngày mai là thứ 6) - The final exam is in May. (Bài kiểm tra cuối cùng diễn ra vào tháng 5.) Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn được sử dụng với nghĩa tương - What are you doing on Saturday evening?(Bạn sẽ lai khi diễn tả một kế hoạch trong tương lai gần (có làm gì vào tối thứ 7?) dự định trước) - I’m not working tomorrow, so we can go out somewhere.(Ngày mai tôi sẽ không làm việc vì vậy chúng ta có thể đi chơi đâu đó.) BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài 5. Khoanh tròn vào phương án đúng, thì hiện tại đơn hoặc thì hiện tại tiếp diễn. 1. Tomorrow the sun (rises/is rising) at 6.44 and it (sets/ is setting) at 18.33. 2. I (don’t do anything/ am not doing anything) tonight. I want to relax. 3. What time (do you meet/ are you meeting) John on Sunday? 4. This year the school (ends/ is ending) on 28 June. 5. After the reconstruction the supermarket (opens/ is opening) on Monday again. 6. I can’t help you. I (see/ am seeing) the doctor this afternoon. 7. We’ve already booked our holiday. We (go/ are going) to Rome in May. 8. Could you meet us at the airport tomorrow morning? The plane (lands/ is landing) at 10.15. 9. The piano concert (doesn’t start/ is not starting) at 8 o’clock. It’s cancelled. 10. (Do you have/ Are you having) your birthday party this week or next week? I forgot. Bài 6. Sửa lại lỗi sai được gạch chân trong mỗi câu sau. 1. Mike and Fred is leaving tomorrow morning. Mike and Fred ________________ tomorrow morning. 2. Look, the concert is beginning at 6 o’clock. Look, the concert __________________ at 6 o’clock. 3. Do you do anything tonight? ___________________ anything tonight? 4. Excuse me, what time the ship lands? Excuse me, what time ________________________ ? 5. I see my doctor this afternoon. I ______________________ my doctor this afternoon. 6. Where do you go on your holiday next summer? Where ______________________ on your holiday next summer? 7. The train is not leaving at 10.15. it is arriving at 10.15. . The train _________________ at 10.15. It __________________ at 10.15. 8. Do you give Jill anything for her birthday this year? _____________________ Jill anything for her birthday this year? 9. This winter term classes are ending on 8 March. This winter term classes ________________________ on 8 March.

Bài 7. Gạch chân dưới các cum từ chỉ thời gian. Sau đó cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc ở thì Hiện tại đơn hoặc Hiền tại tiếp diễn. 1. I __________________ Peter tonight. He __________________ us to a restaurant. (meet/ take) 2. The ferry ________________ at 9.00 from Dover and _______________ at 10.45 in Calais. (leave, land) 3. My parents _______________ their wedding anniversary next Sunday. They _____________ to Paris (celebrate, go) 4. I ________________________ a lecture this afternoon. And I _________ tomorrow either. (not give, not teach) 5. Why ______ the exhibition ___________ tomorrow? When _____ it _____________ place instead? (not open, take) 6. How _________ you ____________to the party tonight? _____________ you _____________ a bus? (get, catch) Bài 8. Dựa vào từ cho sẵn, sắp xếp lại các từ và viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh ở thì Hiện tại đơn hoặc thì Hiện tại tiếp diễn sao cho phù hợp. 1. to the dentist/ go/ I/ tomorrow. __________________________________________________________________________________ 2. tonight/ with/ have/ our business partner/ we/ dinner. __________________________________________________________________________________ 3. on/ my holiday/ July/ begin/ 10th __________________________________________________________________________________ 4. depart/ the train/ at 11.30/ platform 5/ from/. __________________________________________________________________________________ 5. to Africa/ you. When exactly/ fly/. __________________________________________________________________________________ 6. end/ when/ the art exhibition/. __________________________________________________________________________________ 7. go/ to the garden/ Miss Pitt/ on Sunday/. __________________________________________________________________________________ 8. at 9.45/as usual/ the plane/ take off/. __________________________________________________________________________________ BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO Bài 9. Chia động từ trong ngoặc sao cho thích hợp Jim: Hello there, Daisy! Long time no see! It (1. Be) _____________________ great to see you again. Daisy: Oh, Jim! Hello! What a coincidence! (2. Not see) _________________ you for ages! It is great to see you. What (3. You do) _____________ in London now or (4. You/ just visit) __________________ ? Jim: Well, an engineering company (5.just offer) ______________ me a job, so I decided to rent a small apartment near my company. Now I (6.look) ___________________ for one with high standard but reasonable price. Daisy: Oh, I think it (7.be) ________________________ very difficult to find that perfect apartment. You should lower your standard if you (8.want) ______________ to find a cheap place to live. Jim: Yeah, you (9.be) ___________ right. Hey, Daisy, let’s talk about you recently. (10.You still/work) ___________ at the restaurant near your house? Daisy: No, Jim. I quitted it three months ago. I couldn’t get on well with my manager. He (11.always shout) ___________ even when my co-workers and I (12.make) ______________ just a small mistakes. Now I am employed by a restaurant in the city center. Jim: (13. It/be) _____________________ very far from your house? Daisy: It is. Every day I (14.have) ________________ to take the earliest train to commute to work. It (15.set) ________________ off at 5am and it (16.often take) __________________ me half an hour to travel to work. Jim: You must wake up early in the morning.

Daisy: It was hard for me in the first few weeks but things (17.get) _________________ better and better now. I (18.be) _______________ quite satisfied with my job now. Bài 10. Dựa vào các từ cho sẵn, viết câu hoàn chỉnh. 1. They/not/want/ to/ buy/ new/ car/ now/ because/ they/not/ have/ enough/ money/ yet/. ________________________________________________________________________________ 2. You/ever/ speak/ to/ foreigner/ before? __________________________________________________________________________________ 3. I/ not/ know/ when/ the/ train/ leave/. __________________________________________________________________________________ 4. Rose/ often/ walk/ school/ but/ today/ she/ ride/ new/ bike/ at/ present/. __________________________________________________________________________________ 5. How much/ time/ you/ often/ spend/ on/ self-studying? __________________________________________________________________________________ 6. Who/ Jane/ talk/ to over/ there? __________________________________________________________________________________ 7. I/ not/ find/ my car key/ yet/. I/ call/ my husband/ to/ ask/ him/ about/ it/. __________________________________________________________________________________ 8. No one/ heard/ news/ about/ accident/ this morning/. __________________________________________________________________________________ 9. Everyone/ sleep/ now/ but/ I/ be/ awake. __________________________________________________________________________________ 10. How long/ it/ usually/ take/ you/ to/ finish/ your breakfast? __________________________________________________________________________________ Bài 11. Hoàn thành đoạn hội thoại với những động từ cho sẵn dưới đây ở thì Hiện tại đơn hoặc thì Hiện tại tiếp diễn sao cho phù hợp. Take (x2) start (x2) leave go do depart get come The big day A: Have you heard of Brad and Mimi? B: Brad and Mimi? What’s happened? A: They (1) ______________ married on Saturday? B: You’re joking. I didn’t know that Mimi fancied Brad. When (2) _________________ the wedding __________ place? A: It (3) ___________ place on Saturday. Didn’t you listen to me? B: Of course I did. But what time (4) ____ it __________? A: The wedding ceremony (5) ___________ at 11 o’clock in the All Saints church. B: (6) _______ you ____________? A: Yes, I am. They’ve invited me. B: Do you think I could join you? A: Why not? I’m sure the church is going to be full. But I (7) ______________ early in the morning because my dad (8) ___________________ to work by car on Saturday and he can take me to the All Saints. B: If your dad doesn’t mind _________________ A: No problem. The more, the merrier, he always says. By the ways, (9) ______ you _________- anything tomorrow morning? We could buy some present for them. B: Good idea. We can get the bus to the Macy’s shopping Gallery. It (10) ____________________ at 9.35. A: All right. See you at the bus stop. Bye. A: Bye-bye. Bài 12. Cho dạng đúng của độngt từ trong ngoặc ở thì hiện tại đơn hoặc thì Hiện tại tiếp diễn để diễn tả tương lại. 1. The train ____________ at 9 at night. (arrive) 2. Giovanni ___________ to spend the weekend with us. (come) 3. What time _______ you _______ to the doctor’s on Wednesday? (go)

4. What time __________________ the film _________________ ? (start) 5. ____________ the concert _______________ at 7 or 8? (begin) 6. We _______________ a dinner party on Friday and you’re invited. (have) 7. Most shops in Spain __________ until 10 am. (not open) 8. What time ______________ the corner shop ________________? (shut) 9. Where ________________ you ____________________ in Bangkok? (stay) 10. My tai chi classes __________________ next week? (start) 11. Out flight ____________ in London at4 o’clock in the afternoon. (land) 12. Everything’s arranged. We ______________ house this Saturday. (move) 13. We _____________ at Litith’s Café this afternoon at four. (meet) 14. I’m sorry. I can’t meet up this weekend. We _________ to Wales. (go) 15. Our ferry ___________ for lbiza at 6 tomorrow morning. (depart). C.EXERCISES TEST 1 UNIT 8 I. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others. B. vacuum C. add D. facsimile 1. A. vanilla 2. A. whiten B. fiber C. zipper D. conveyor 3. A. remove B. wrote C. mold D. cocoa B. powder C. show D. borrow 4. A. follow 5. A. wood B. thousand C. procedure D. hairdryer II. Choose the words that have the different stress from the others. 1. A. iconic B. monument C. territory D. difficulty 2. A. Singapore B. Philippines C. Canada D. India 3. A. native B. perhaps C. whisky D. accent 4. A. official B. excursion C. Thanksgiving D. spectacle 5. A. festive B. Arctic C. unique D. speaker III. Complete the sentences, using the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. Charlie Chaplin was born in London, England. (legend) 2. In Canada, there are a lot of from various countries. (refuge) 3. Lake Wanaka is a scenery in New Zealand. (spectacle) 4. The Sydney Opera House is an monument of Australia. (icon) 5. The originates in Ireland and its associated islands. (Ireland) 6. The Canadians are native of English. (speak) 7. English is an language of France. (official) 8. Thuy loves the koala in Australia. (absolute) 9. The violation of that company was yesterday. (exposure) 10. Do storm water and the atmosphere bring non- point source ? (pollution) IV. Complete the sentences with the appropriate present tense of the verbs in brackets. one of the most 1. Since its beginning more than a century ago, the slouch hat distinctive items of Australian clothing. (become) 2. For over 130 years, Akubra hats its legendary stories in Australia. (make) 3. Aberdeen in Scotland an important centre for the oil industry since the finding of oil in the North Sea. (become) 4. Canada the longest land border in the world with the United States. (share) 5. Ireland the Eurovision Song Contest seven times. (win) 6. In Canada you should maintain eye contact while you hands. (shake) 7. In Canada, New Year’s Day a long tradition of celebration. (have) 8. First names used more frequently in Australia than in other countries. (be) 9. Recently, many places in New Zealand called with two names – one English, and one Maori. (be) 27

10. Maori people the hongi – touching noses – to greet people they safe and familiar with. (use - feel) V. Complete the sentences with the appropriate present tense of the verbs in brackets. 1. Each of the 50 states an official state flower so far. (adopt) 2. Since 1965, the maples tree with the leaves the most well-known Canadian symbol. (become) 3. At present, the National Cherry Blossom Festival in Washington, D.C. to celebrate spring’s arrival. (occur) 4. Maori recognized as an official language of New Zealand since the Maori Language Act of 1987. (be) made up of 10 provinces and 3 territories. (be) 5. Canada 6. Australia a range of different landscapes, including urban areas, mountain ranges, desert and rain forests. (have) 7. Annually, the National Eisteddfod festival of Wales place for eight days at the start of August. (take) 8. The Statue of Liberty over 12 million immigrants entering the USA through New York Harbor since 1900. (welcome) VI. Read the passage and then answer the questions. THE CAMEL The camel can go without water for a long time. Some people think it stores water in its hump. This is not true. It stores food in its hump. The camel’s body changes the food into fat. Then it stores the fat in its hump. It cannot store the fat all over its body. Fat all over an animal’s body keeps the animal warm. Camels live in the desert. They do not want to be warm during the day. The desert is very hot. The camel gets hotter and hotter during the day. It stores this heat in its body because the nights are cool. The Arabian camel has one hump. The Bactrian camel of Central Asia has two humps. It also has long, thick hair because the winters are cold in Central Asia. There is a lot of sand in the dessert. The camel has long eyelashes. Then sand cannot go into the camel’s eyes. Arabic has about 150 words to describe a camel. Arabs need all these words because the camel is very important to them. Questions 1. Where do camels live? ................................................................................................................. 2. What does a camel store in its hump? ................................................................................................................. 3. The camel doesn’t store fat all over its body. Why? ................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................. 4. Why does it store heat during the day? ................................................................................................................. 5. Why does a Bactrian camel have long thick hair? ................................................................................................................. VII. Read the following passage and then answer the questions below it. In the world today there are 5,000 to 6,000 living languages, of which English is the most widely used. As a mother tongue, it ranks second only to Chinese, which is little used outside China. English is the most international of languages. It is used as the language of aviation, international sport and pop music. Sixty percent of the world’s radio stations broadcast in English, and more than half of the world’s scientific papers are printed in English. It is true that a great number of people are involved in the use of English. To people in Africa, Asia, and South America, English is an important foreign language to master. In most countries in the world, the 28

English language is used as the language of business, commerce, and technology. English is now an effective medium of international communication. However, it is the written English which is not systematically phonetic, that causes difficulties to non-native speakers. 1. Which language is used as the language of aviation, international sport and pop music? _____________________________________________________________ 2. Why is English an important foreign language used in many countries? _____________________________________________________________ 3. What difficulties may learners of English be confronted with? Why? _____________________________________________________________ 4. Name three countries in which English is spoken as a first language. _____________________________________________________________ 5. As a mother tongue, why does English rank second only to Chinese? _____________________________________________________________ VIII. Fill in the blank in the following passage with ONE suitable word. ability began in official written students population Therefore language of the Philippines. English- medium education (2) English is the (1) in the Philippines in 1901 after the arrival of some 540 US teachers. English was also chosen for newspapers and magazines, the media, and literary writing. of the Philippines The latest results from a rent survey suggest that about 65 percent of the (3) has the (4) to understand spoken and (5) English, with 48 percent stating that they can write standard English. The economy is based on English, and successful workers and managers are fluent (6) English. (7) , many schools know that their (8) must be fluent in English to be successful. Read the passage and answer the questions below. ENGLISH IS CONFUSING “Good evening, everybody!” said the teacher, Donna. “Where is everybody?” That was sort of a daily joke by Donna. Usually the class started with only two or three students present, and then filled up as the minutes went by. It was summertime. Summer school was only eight weeks long. Class attendance was always smaller than during fall and spring semesters. “I don’t know, teacher. Maybe they late or no come,” said one student. “Maybe watching TV football tonight.” “Is there a soccer game tonight? It seems like there’s a soccer game every night. Oh, well. Let’s get started, okay? We’re on page 36 in the workbook. Tonight we’re studying participles as adjectives. Students are always confused when they learn about the present and past participles, so we will practice this a lot. Tonight, we’re just going to practice the present participle. “The present participle tells us what emotion or feeling the subject is causing. For example, ‘Grammar is boring’ means that the subject – grammar – causes an emotion of boredom. If we say, ‘The movie is interesting,’ we are saying that the movie causes a feeling of interest. If we say, ‘The roller coaster is exciting,’ we are saying that the roller coaster causes a feeling of excitement. Any questions so far? Am I confusing you? Is everyone confused?” The classroom was quiet. Donna looked at blank faces. They were confused. She knew this would take a while. But eventually, the faster students would grasp it, and then they would help the slower students. By the end of the evening, most of the class would feel comfortable using the present participle. Donna erased the board and put some new examples on it. She loved guiding her students through difficult topics like this one. She always felt a little bit thrilled when the look of understanding came to their faces. 1. What was Donna’s daily joke?

..................................................................................................... 2. How many students were usually present when class started? ..................................................................................................... 3. Which season was it? ..................................................................................................... 4. How long did summer school last? ..................................................................................................... 5. What was always smaller in the summer? ..................................................................................................... 6. What were some absent students doing, perhaps? ..................................................................................................... 7. What was tonight’s subject? ..................................................................................................... X. Reorder the words to make the sentences. 1. is/ but/ not/ Canberra/ the/, / is/ Australia/ capital/ of/ Sydney. ............................................................................................................................. 2. Maori/ native/ of/ New Zealand/ people/ the/ are/ the/ Island/ in/ North. ............................................................................................................................. 3. Washington D.C/ opens/ Museum/ a.m./ at Children’s/ in/ 10.00/ National/ The. ............................................................................................................................. 4. monument/ San Francisco/ Bridge/ of/ The/ an/ iconic/ Gate/ is/ Golden. ............................................................................................................................. 5. its/ years/ language/ for/ considered/ Malaysia/ as/ has/ official/ English. TEST 2 UNIT 8 I. Write the words from the box in the correct part of the table, according to the stress pattern. examinee committee refugee divorcee Maltese Chinese

IX.

interviewee coffee expellee payee Nepalese Senegalese

trainee nominee addressee Sudanese Congolese Togolese

absentee referee jubilee Burmese Japanese Viennese

devotee trustee guarantee Lebanese Vietnamese Annamese

Oo Ooo oOo oOoo ooOo

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

II. Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others. A. coffee B. Chinese C. payee D. trainee A. referee B. guarantee C. Japanese D.jubilee A. refugee B. committee C. absentee D. Taiwanese A.Viennese B. Chinese C. Burmese D. Maltese A. engineer B. volunteer C. mountaineer D. reindeer III. Fill in each blank with the correct word from the box. 30

quality wealthy

sincere resources

diverse accents

native official

unique symbol

1. English and Welsh are the two languages of Wales. 2. Canada is rich in such as zinc, nickel, lead and gold. 3. Australia is home to a variety of animals, including the koala, kangaroo, emu, kookaburra and platypus. 4. Australia is a relatively country with a high life expectancy. 5. The US is a country with a multicultural society. 6. In Canada, the handshake should be firm and accompanied by direct eye contact and a smile. 7. In Quebec, if you give wine, make sure it is of the highest you can afford. 8. The American bald eagle was chosen as the national bird of the United States in 1782. 9. Australian do not vary from area to area like in many other countries. 10. In Singapore, the number of speakers of English is still rising. IV. Complete the sentences with the appropriate present tense of the verbs in brackets. made up of 10 provinces and 3 territories. (be) 1. Canada 2. Australia a range of different landscapes, including urban areas, mountain ranges, deserts and rain forests. (have) 3. Annually, the National Eisteddfod festival of Wales place for eight days at the start of August. (take) over 12 million immigrants entering the USA through 4. The Statue of Liberty New York Harbor since 1900. (welcome) 5. Each of the 50 states an official state flower so far. (adopt) 6. Since 1965, the maple tree with the leaves the most well - known Canadian symbol. (become) the most well7. At present, the National Cherry Blossom Festival in Washington, D.C. to celebrate spring's arrival. (occur) recognized as an official language of New Zealand since the Maori Language 8. Maori Act of 1987. (be) V. Complete the sentences with the appropriate present tense of the verbs in brackets. 1. In Canada, New Year's Day a long tradition of celebration. (have) 2. First names used more frequently in Australia than in other countries. (be) 3. Recently, many places in New Zealand called with two names - one English, and one Maori (be) 4. Maori people the hongi- touching noses - to greet people they safe and familiar with. (use - feel) 5. Since its beginning more than a century ago, the slouch hat one of the most distinctive items of Australian clothing. (become) 6. For over 130 years, Akubra hats its legendary stories in Australia. (make) 7. Aberdeen in Scotland an important centre for the oil industry since the finding of oil in the North Sea. (become) 8. Canada the longest land border in the world with the United States.(share) 9. Ireland the Eurovision Song Contest seven times. (win) 10. In Canada you should maintain eye contact while you hands. (shake) VI. Fill in each blank of the passage with the words in the box. allows gives takes wheel icomic close high symbol The London Eye At 135 metres, the London Eye is the worldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s tallest observation (1) modern (2) representing the capital of England and a global icon. 31

. It has become the

The gradual rotation in one of the 32 high-tech glass capsules (3) about 30 minutes and (4) you a view of London. Within each capsule, the interactive guide (5) you to explore the capital's (6) landmarks in several languages. An experience on the London Eye will lift you (7) enough to see up to 40 kilometres on a clear day and keep you (8) enough to see the spectacular details of the city beneath you. VII. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or Dthat best fits the blank space in the following passage. Maple Tree Trees have (1) a meaningful role in the (2) development of Canada and continue to be of commercial, environmental and aesthetic importanceto all Canadians. Maples contribute alive and help to beautify the landscape. valuable wood products, keep the maple sugar (3) Since 1965 the maple leaf (4) the most important feature of the Nation Flag of Canada and the maple tree with the leaves has become the most well-known Canadian (5) , nationally and internationally. Maple leaf and badges are proudly (6) by Canadians abroad, and are recognized around are the world. (7) the maple leaf is closely associated with Canada, the maple tree was Canada's emblem until 1996. never officially recognized (8) 1. A. taken B. given C. done D. played 2. A. history B. historical C. historic D. historian 3. A. industry B. industries C. industrial D. industrially 4. A. was B. have been C. has been D. is 5. A. sign B. symbol C. tree D. leaf 6. A. wear B. wore C. worn D. to be worn 7. A. Because B. So C. But D. Although 8. A. of B. with C. as D. for VIII. Read the passage and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F) The Kiwi The kiwi lives only in New Zealand. It is a very strange bird because it cannot fly. The kiwi the same size as a chicken. It has no wings or tail. It does not have any fathers like other birds. A kiwi likes a lot of trees around it. It sleeps during the day because the sunlight hurts its eyes. It can smell things with its noise. It is the only bird in the world that can smell things. The kiwi's eggs are very big. There are only a few kiwis in New Zealand now. New Zealanders want their kiwis to live. There is a picture of a kiwi on New Zealand money. People from New Zealand are sometimes called kiwis. T F 1. Kiwis live in Australia and New Zealand. 2. A kiwi has a tail but no wings. 3. It sleeps during the day because light hurts its eyes. 4. People in New Zealand do not want all the kiwis to die. 5. The kiwi is a strange New Zealand bird. IX. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that best answers the question about the passage. The Hopi of Arizona The Hopi live in the northwestern part of Arizona inthe United States. With modern things all around them, the Hopi keep their traditions. There are about ten thousand Hopi and they live in twelve villages in the desert. The weather is very hot in summer, but in winter it freezes. The wind blows hard. Farming is difficult. Corn is the Hopi's main food, but they plant vegetables, too. They raise sheep, goats, and cattle. They also eat hamburgers, ice cream and drink soft drinks. They live in traditional stone houses, but many of them have telephones, radios. and television. They have horses, but they have trucks too.

Kachinasare an important part of the Hopi religion.Kachinasare spirits of dead people, of rocks, plants, and animals, and of the stars. Men dress as kachinas and do religious dance. People also make wooden kachinas. No two wooden kachinasare ever alike. The children attend school, and they also learn the Hopi language, dances, stories. The Hopi want a comfortable, modern life, but they don't want to lose their traditions. . 1. The Hop A.want modern things instead of traditional ones B.want traditional things instead of modern ones C.don't want to remember their traditions D. want both modern and traditional things 2. Winters in this part of Arizona are . A. hot B. warm C. cool D. cold 3. The main Hopi food is . A. corn B. hamburgers C. beef D. vegetables 4. Kachinas are . A. men B. something to eat C. animals D. spirits their traditions. 5. The Hopi don't want to A. lose B. hit C. remember D. learn 6. The main idea of the passage is . A.the Hopi raise crops and animals in the Arizona desert B.kachinas are spirits of the things around the Hopi C. the Hopi keep their traditions even with modern life all around them D. the Hopi want a comfortable, modern life X. Read the passage carefully, and then answer the questions below. Easy English? English is an important global language, but thatdoesn't mean it is easy. Many experts have tried to make English easier to learn, but they weren't always successful. In 1930, Professor CK Ogden of Cambridge University invented Basic English. It had only 850 words (and just eighteen verbs) and Ogden said most people could learn it in just thirty hours. The problem was that people who learned Basic English could write and say simple messages, but they couldn't understand the answers in ‘real’ English! It was also impossible to explain a word if it wasn't in the Basic English word list. RE Zachrisson, a university professor in Sweden, decided that the biggest problem for learners of English was spelling, so he invented a language called Anglic. Anglic was similar to English, but with much simpler spelling. ‘Father’ became ‘faadher’,‘new’ became ‘nue’ and ‘years’ became ‘yeerz’. Unfortunately, for some students of English, Anglic never became popular. Even easier is the language which ships’ captains use: it is called ‘Seaspeak’. Seaspeak uses a few simple phrases for every possible situation. In Seaspeak, for example, you don't say,‘I didn't understand, can you repeat that?" it is just, "Say again." No more grammar! In the age of international communication through the Internet, a new form of English might appear. A large number of the world's e-mails are in English and include examples of ‘NetLingo’ like OIC (Oh, I see) and TTYL (Talk to you later) l. What is the role of English? 2.

When did Professor Ogden invent Basic English? How many words did it have?

3. Why did Professor Zachrisson invent Anglic? What happened to it? 4.

What is the feature of Seaspeak?

What has appeared in the age of international communication through the Internet? 33

XI. Read the passage carefully, and then answer the questions below. The Maori of New Zealand The Maori arrived in New Zealand from other Polynesian islands over a thousand years ago. They were the first people to live there. They made beautiful wooden buildings with pictures cut into the wood. There are about 280,000 Maori today. Maori have brown skin, dark brown eyes, and wavy black hair. In 1840, they agreed to become a British colony, and they learned European ways quickly.Today there are Maori in all kinds of jobs. They attend schools anduniversities and become lawyers and scientists. There are Maori in the government. Most of them live like the white New Zealanders. However, the Maori do not forgot their traditions. Children learn the language, music and old stories. They have yearly competitions in speaking, dancing, and singing. The Maori live a comfortable, modern life, but they keep their traditions by passing them to their children. Task 1: Read the passage, and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). T F 1. The Maori are Polynesians. 2. New Zealand is an island country. 3. The Maori look like the Chinese. 4. The Maori live only by hunting and fishing. 5. The Maori like music. Task 2: Read the passage again, and write short answers to the questions. 6. Where did the Maori come from? 7.

How many Maori are there?

What do the Maori look like?

How do most Maori live today?

10. What do they do at their yearly competitions? XII. Read the passage and do the tasks that follow. The Sydney Opera House The Sydney Opera House is built on Bennelong Point, in Sydney Harbour, close to the Sydney Harbour Bridge. The first known concert on Bennelong Point was held in March 1791. Public pressure to build a suitable concert facility in Sydney became greater in the 1940s. In 1955, the New South Wales government announced an international competition for the design of "an opera house". Danish architectJornUtzon’sentry was selected as the winning design. His design was for a complex with two theatresside by side on a large podium. This was covered by interlocking concrete shells, which acted as both wall and roof. A third smaller shell set apart from the others was to cover the restaurant. The construction of the Opera was sometimes difficult andcontroversial withJornUtzonresigning from the project in 1966. However, the OperaHouse was officially opened by Queen Elizabeth II on 20 October 1973. The Sydney Opera House became a UNESCOWorld Heritage Site in 2007. Task 1: Match the underlined words in the text with their meanings, and write each answer in the blank. 1. entry (n) A. joined together, especially by one part fitting into other 2. podium (n) B. causing public discussion and disagreement 3.interlocking (adi) C. a thing that is entered for a competition 4.controversial (adj) D. a platform Task 2: Read the passage, and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). T F 34

It is a short distance between the Sydney Opera House and the Sydney HarbourBridge.

6. The site for the Sydney Opera House had never been used for concert before the modern construction. 7. The New South Wales government had the plan to build the Sydney Opera House because of public pressure. 8. Architects from any countries in the world could send their entries to the competition. 9. Interlocking concrete shells have acted as the walls and roofs of the two theaters. 10. The third shell was built for a restaurant. 11. JornUtzon had no difficulty in directing the construction. 12. The Sydney opera House became a UNESCO World Heritage site when the Opera had been in operation for 20 years. XIII. Write full sentences about Junior Summer Camp in San Francisco, using the words and phrases given. Put the verbs in the present simple for future meaning. Junior Summer Camp in San Francisco, California 1. Our junior summer camp/ offer/ learners aged 10 17/all over the world/ opportunity/ improve/ their English language skills. 2. We/ offer/ a full afternoon and evening social programme/ include/ a variety of sports activities/ visits/ local sites of interest. 3. On their first day/ students/ take/ a test/ ensure/ they/ placed/ at an appropriate level. 4. On arrival/ students/ also receive/ a welcome pack/include/ information/ the course/ a free student bag. 5. Students/ have/ progress test/ in class/ every two weeks/ meet individually/ their teacher/ review/ their progress. 6. At the end/ the course/ students/ receive/ certificate/as a record/ their English language studies. TEST 3 UNIT 8 I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. A. Taiwanese B. employee C. monument D. volunteer 2. A. parade B. attraction C. adoptee D. iconic 3. A. referee B. obese C. disagree D. nationality 4. A. accent B. awesome C. cattle D. koala 5. A. official B. aquatic C. Chinese D. politic II. Circle the word with a different stress pattern from the others. 1. A.degree B. affect C. obese 2. A. billboard B. awesome C. examinee 3. A. legend B. addressee C. cantonese 4. A. refugee B. trainee C. Japanese

D. algea D. accent D. employee D. engineer

6. She (take) a salsa dancing class every Tuesday. 7. Take your umbrella, it (rain) 8. (you/like) spicy food? 9. (she/ often/ go) to Scotland? 10. We (not/drink) much wine. IV. Complete each sentence with the suitable form of word provided. 1. Scotland is for its rich culture and its amazing natural beauty. (FAME) 2. The council has promised to deal with the problem of among young people. (EMPLOY) 3. The between Vietnam and America is good. (FRIEND) 4. The anthem of Viet Nam is sung. (NATION) 5. The Glastonbury Festival in England is a of music and it attracts thousands people. (CELEBRATE) 6. California is home to the most theme park in the world. (ICON) 7. They enjoy the atmosphere here. PEACE 8. The founder of the city was Helenus, son of Priam, and Virgil. (LEGEND) V. Give the correct form of the verb in brackets. 1. The Little Saigon Tet Parade (be) to celebrate the Lunar New Year and to preserve and promote Vietnamese culture. 2. This is the first time I (visit) Sydney Opera House in Australia. 3. We (organize) successfully 3 events so far this semester. 4. Mount Rushmore (become) an iconic symbol of the United States, and has appeared in works of fiction. It (attract) over two million people annually. 5. Stonehenge (be) a legally protected Scheduled Ancient Monument since 1882. 6. The Sydney Opera House (include) a number of performance venues such as: Concert Hall, Joan Sutherland Theatre, Drama Theatre and Playhouse. 7. America's National Independence Day parade (take place) annually on July 4th at 11:45 am in Washington, D.C. 8. At the moment, Anna (take part in) the cooking contest at summer camp in New York. 9. England (be) one part of the United Kingdom. 10. Hundreds of people (parade) to celebrate Vietnamese Independence Day. VI. Read the text and choose the best answer for each sentence. The United States The United States is a large country. It is the third largest in the whole world! It is located in a continent called North America. Parts of the United States touch three different oceans. The United States has tall mountains, wide plains, deserts, hills, rivers, lakes, volcanoes, and even rainforests! People from all over the world have come to live the United States. There are 50 states in the United States. The newest states, Alaska and Hawaii, are not connected to the other states. Alaska is the largest state and Hawaii is a chain of islands in the Pacific Ocean. 1. 2.

III. Give the correct form of verb in brackets. 1. Julie (read) in the garden. 2. What (we/have) for dinner tonight? 3. Jannet often (come) over for dinner. 4. She (not study) now, she 5. How often (you/go) to restaurants? 35

(watch) TV.

The United States is the country in the world. A. second largest B. largest Alaska is and Hawaii is . A. a chain of islands, the largest state B. the largest state: a chain of islands C. a chain of islands; the largest state D. not connected to the other states, the largest state. The United States does not have . A. 50 states B. volcanoes C. mountains 36

C. smallest

D. continents

D. third largest

B.Columbus received three ships and a crew from the King and Queen of Spain. C.Columbus found a shortcut to the Indies. D.The journey across the Atlantic took two months. 3. Which of the following was NOT one of his ships? A.Nina B.Isabella C.Pinta D.Santa Maria 4. Why was Christopher Columbus very important? A.He believed he found a shortcut to the Indies. B.He first used the word "Indians". C.He discovered a whole new continent. D.He was one of the bravest explorers of all time. IX. Read the text again then fill in the blank with a suitable word or phrase from the text. 1. Columbus believed he could find a shortcut to the . 2. The King of refused to finance his trip. 3. In the year , Columbus set sail. 4. What did Columbus name the native people he saw? .

Parts of the United States touch different oceans. A. 1 B. 2 C. 4 D. 3 5. What continent is the United States in? A. North America B. Australia C. Africa D. Europe VII. Read the text and choose the best answer for each sentence. BALD EAGLE The Bald Eagle is a majestic bird. The adult bird has a brown body, brown wings, white head, and large, hooked yellow bill. Younger birds appear all brown. Bald Eagles almost always live near water because their main food source is fish. Sometimes, however, Bald Eagles will eat dead animals. They will even steal food from other birds such as ospreys and gulls! It was for this reason that the famous Patriot Benjamin Franklin preferred the Wild Turkey as America's National symbol. Nevertheless, the Bald Eagle remains America's symbol. 1.

How are younger Bald Eagles different from adult Bald Eagles? A. They are smaller. B. They have lighter bodies. C. They have black bills. D. They are totally brown. 2. The author seemed surprised that… A. bald eagles eat fish. B. the bald eagle is America's symbol. C. bald eagles steal food from other birds. D. bald eagles have white heads. 3. What color is the Bald Eagle's bill? A. yellow B. black C. white D. brown 4. Why do Bald Eagles usually live near water? A. Bald Eagles eat fish. B. It protects the nest from predators. C. Bald Eagles like to swim. D. Because they steal food. 5. Benjamin Franklin thought . A. the Bald Eagle was a fine choice as America's symbol. B. The Bald Eagle was a better choice as America's symbol than the Wild Turkey. C. Neither the Wild Turkey or Bald Eagle were good choices as America's symbol. D. The Wild Turkey was a better choice as America's symbol than the Bald Eagle. VIII. Read the text then choose the best answer. CHRISTOPHER COLUMBUS Christopher Columbus was born in Genoa, Italy in 1451. While spending most of his early years at sea, Columbus began to believe that he could find a shortcut to the Indies by sailing west across the Atlantic Ocean. Unfortunately, the King of Portugal refused to finance such a trip, and Columbus was forced to present his idea to the King and Queen of Spain. In 1492, King Ferdinand and Queen Isabella agreed to pay for his trip. They gave him a crew and three ships, the Nina, Pinta and Santa Maria. Columbus sailed aboard the Santa Maria. The trip was long and hard. Many sailors grew restless and wanted to turn around. After two months at sea, land was finally sighted. The ships docked was on the island of Hispaniola. Columbus named the native people he saw "Indians”, because he believed he had found the shortcut he was looking for. In actuality, Columbus found North America, a brand new continent at that time. Columbus, however, couldn't be convinced. He died with the belief he had shortcut to Indies. Soon, however, other explorers and nations understood the importance of his discoveries. Columbus' discoveries set the stage for the Age of Exploration, one of the most fascinating and exciting times in world history. 1. Where was A Christopher Columbus born? A.The New World B.Portugal C.Spain D.Italy 2 Which is NOT true? A.Columbus was born in Italy. 37

X. Reorder the words to make meaningful sentence. 1. California/ most/ home/ is/ to/ the/ theme/ in/ iconic/ the/ park/ world. ______________________________________________________________________________ 2. The Golden Gate Bridge/ in/ is / icon/ an/ of/ this/ city./ San Francisco/ famous.. ______________________________________________________________________________ 3. Australia/ home/ is/ to/ animals/ like/ unique/ the/ and/ koala./ kangaroo// ______________________________________________________________________________ 4. Scotland/ for/ is/ its/ castles/ historic/ famous/ centuries-old//. ______________________________________________________________________________ 5. Australia/ the/ biggest/ has/ cattle/ in/ the/ station/ world. ______________________________________________________________________________ 6. The/ garment/ of/ traditional/ men/ is/ Scottish/ kit. ______________________________________________________________________________

XI. What is your favourite vacation spot? write a paragraph from 100 words to tell about this place. You should write: What's the name of this spot? Where is it? How often do you come here? Who do you often go with? What do you often do here and why do you like it? UNIT 9 :NATURAL DISASTERS (THẢM HỌA THIÊN NHIÊN) A- VOCABULARY 1. accommodation (n) /əˌkɒməˈdeɪʃn/: chỗ ở 2. bury (v) /ˈberi/: chôn vùi, vùi lấp 3. collapse (v) /kəˈlæps/: đổ, sập, sụp, đổ sập 4. damage (n) /ˈdæmɪdʒ/: sự thiệt hại, sự hư hại 5. disaster (n) /dɪˈzɑːstə/: tai họa, thảm họa 6. drought (n) /draʊt/: hạn hán 7. earthquake (n) /ˈɜːθkweɪk/: trận động đất 8. erupt (v) /ɪˈrʌpt/: phun (núi lửa) 9. eruption (n) ɪˈrʌpʃn/: sự phun (núi lửa) 10. evacuate (v) /ɪˈvækjueɪt/: sơ tán 11. forest fire (n) /ˈfɒrɪst faɪər/: cháy rừng 38

12. homeless (adj) /ˈhəʊmləs/: 13. mudslide (n) /ˈmʌdslaɪd/: 14. put out (v) /pʊt aʊt/: 15. rage (v) /reɪdʒ/: 16. rescue worker (n) /ˈreskjuː ˈwɜːkə/: 17. scatter (v) /ˈskætə/: 18. shake (v) /ʃeɪk/: 19. tornado (n) /tɔːˈneɪdəʊ/: 20. trap (v) /træp/: 21. tsunami (n) /tsuːˈnɑːmi/: 22. typhoon (n) /taɪˈfuːn/: 23. victim (n) /ˈvɪktɪm/: 24. volcanic (adj) /vɒlˈkænɪk/: 25. volcano (n) /vɒlˈkeɪnəʊ/:

không có nhà cửa, vô gia cư lũ bùn dập tắt (lửa..) diễn ra ác liệt, hung dữ nhân viên cứu hộ tung, rải, rắc rung, lắc, làm rung, lúc lắc lốc xoáy làm cho mắc kẹt sóng thần bão nhiệt đới nạn nhân thuộc núi lửa núi lửa

B-GRAMMAR I-ÔN TẬP CÂU BỊ ĐỘNG (PASSIVE VOICE) Thì Cấu trúc câu chủ động Cấu trúc câu bị động Hiện tại đơn S + V (s/es) S + am/is/are + VpII People speak English here. English is spoken here. S + am/is/are + V-ing S + am/is/are + being + VpII Hiện tại tiếp diễn They are building a new house. A new house is being built Hiện tại hoàn thành S + have/has + VpII S + have/has been + VpII We have cleaned our car. Our car has been cleaned. S + Ved/V2 S + was/were + VpII Quá khứ đơn Someone cleaned the room yesterday. The room was cleaned yesterday. Quá khứ tiếp diễn S + was/were + V-ing S + was/were being + VpII They were making a cake when I A cake was being made when I arrived. arrived. S + will + V-inf S + will be + VpII Tương lai đơn The government will pass the new law The new law will be passed next next month. month. S + will be + V-ing S + will be being + VpII Tương lai tiếp diễn She will be singing a song when the The song will be being sung when the prime minister comes in. prime minister comes in. BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài 1: Khoanh tròn vào đáp án đúng. 1. Yesterday my brother (bought/was bought me) a new T-shirt. 2. Who (was broken/broke) the vase? 3. Yesterday I was having dinner when my door (was knocked/was knocking). 4. At the moment my car (is polishing/is being polished) by my brother. 5. This car (has been used/has used) by Mr. Smith for 5 years. 6. The early train to Manchester city (leaves/is left) at 6 am tomorrow. 7. No one (has heard/has been heard) about the accident last night. 8. If you work hard, you (will reward/will be rewarded). 9. (Have the police caught/Have the poloce been caught) the thieves yet? 10. Which dress (chose/was chosen) to wear by Jane last night? 11. At this time next month, I (will be visiting/will be visited) London with my family. 12. The children (are looking/are being looked) after by a babysister. 13. You (will be receive/ will receive) a lot of compliments if you win the contest. 14. Jim didn’t realize that his wallet (stole/was stolen) until he came home.

15. (Was you brought/Was you bringing) by your grandparents when you were small? Bài 2: Hoàn thành các câu sau với thể bị động của động từ trong ngoặc ở thì thích hợp. 1. I (usually take) ______________to the cinema by my parents every month. 2. _____________(Jim/inform) of the exact date of the conference? No, he wasn’t. 3. The concert (broadcast)_____________live tomorrow. 4. Yesterday, temparature (forecast) _____________to reach 400C. 5. At this time tomorrow, a birthday cake (make)________ for our best friend Jessy. 6. Who___________(rob) of all the properties last week? 7. All the members ___________(treat) equally in our organization. 8. Nothing (do)_________so far to prepare for the coming storm. 9. When I was small, I often (call) __________by my nickname. 10. Yesterday, Jim was playing with his dog when the doorbell (ring)_____________. 11. What______________(do) so far to lessen the impact of natural disasters? 12. At 8 o’clock yesterday, my brother (feed) __________by my mother while I (look) ____________after by my father. 13. This film (never show) _______________on television before. 14. If you submit your assignment late, you (punish)___________by your teacher. 15. I think more attempts (make) ____________in the future to protect people from natura catastrophes. 16. No feasible solutions to this problem (put)______________forward yet. 17. I don’t think that black café (prefer)_____________by many people. 18. Last week, everyone in my class (snow) _____________under. 19. _______________(these sheep raise) by the local people? 20. Every student (anticipate)______________to finish their essay before the deadline. Bài 3: Chuyển những câu chủ động sau đây thành câu bị động. 1. Jim will pick me to the airport tomorrow. _____________________________________________________________________ 2. Peter wrote his report last week. _____________________________________________________________________ 3. They will replace the old equipment with new one. _____________________________________________________________________ 4. What will they do to prevent natural disasters? _____________________________________________________________________ 5. I think we will soon use up the natural resourses. _____________________________________________________________________ 6. The children water the trees every two days. _____________________________________________________________________ 7. They never mentioned Jim in their conversation. _____________________________________________________________________ 8. At this time next month I will be sitting an English text. _____________________________________________________________________ 9. When will they sell their new products? _____________________________________________________________________ 10. At midnight, my brother and I was making a wish list. _____________________________________________________________________ 11. My mother is preparing dinner at the moment. _____________________________________________________________________ 12. No one will buy products with poor quality. _____________________________________________________________________ 13. They will not allow your dog to enter the museum. _____________________________________________________________________ 14. Have anyone heard of Jim and Jane’s luxury wedding?

_____________________________________________________________________ 15. The boys are using the computer to look up information. _____________________________________________________________________ Bài 4: Chuyển những câu bị động dưới đây thành câu chủ động. 1. A gift was sent to me by my old students. _____________________________________________________________________ 2. You are not allow by the teacher to cheat in the exam. _____________________________________________________________________ 3. My table is being fixed by my father. _____________________________________________________________________ 4. How long has this fax machine been used by Mr. Green? _____________________________________________________________________ 5. The singer was not recognized by his fan when he was at the restaurant. _____________________________________________________________________ 6. He will be disqualified from the competition by the judges if he uses drugs. _____________________________________________________________________ 7. All the unnecessary lights will be turned off to save energy. _____________________________________________________________________ 8. Jane was prevented from staying up too late by her mother. _____________________________________________________________________ 9. Was this document typed by Mr. Brown? _____________________________________________________________________ 10. Many dead people were found by the recuers after the earthquake. _____________________________________________________________________ Bài 5: Sắp xếp các từ đã cho thành câu hoàn chỉnh. 1. Jim/one/preferred/Which/ - /tea/is/coffee/by/or? _____________________________________________________________________ 2. been/Many/caused/problems/that/storm/fierce/have/by. _____________________________________________________________________ 3. Many/tornado/were/buildings/by/the/destroyed/last/night. _____________________________________________________________________ 4. caused/Numerous/diseases/are/lack/by/of/water/fresh/the. _____________________________________________________________________ 5. At/extra/the/moment/atentions/,/paid/to/are/storm/upcoming/the. _____________________________________________________________________ 6. person/a/was/left/Not/behind/single/the/flood/in. _____________________________________________________________________ 7. are/All/victims/flood/the/helped/local/the/by authorities/being. _____________________________________________________________________ 8. Shelters/be/to/provided/will/homeless/in/next/few/people/months/the. _____________________________________________________________________ 9. No/severely/was/one/tornado/yesterday/injured/in/the. _____________________________________________________________________ 10. a/scientists/now/A/is/speech/delivered/being/by/renowed. _____________________________________________________________________ II- THÌ QUÁ KHỨ HOÀN THÀNH (PAST PERFECT) (+) S + had + VpII (past participle) Cấu trúc (-) S + had not/hadn’t + VpII. (?) Had+ S + VpII? Yes, S + had./No, S + hadn’t. (+) I had left when they came. (Khi họ đến thì tôi đã rời đi rồi). Ví dụ 41

(-) I hadn’t left when they came. (Khi họ đến thì tôi đã không rời đi). (?) Had you left when they came? (Khi họ đến, bạn đã rời đi rồi à?) Had you not left when they came? (Khi họ đến, bạn đã không rời đi à?) Hadn’t you left when they came? (Khi họ đến, bạn đã không rời đi à?) - Diễn tả một hành động đã được hoàn tất trước một hành động khác trong quá khứ. Cách dùng Ví dụ: He had left the house before she came. - Diễn tả một hành động đã được hoàn tất trước một thời điểm xác định trong quá khứ. Ví dụ: We had had lunch by two o’clock yesterday. By the age of 25, he had written two famous novels. Dấu hiệu by + thời gian trong quá khứ nhận biết before, after, when, by the time, as soon as, as……. BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài 6: Hoàn thành những câu sau, sử dụng thì quá khứ hoàn thành của động từ. 1. When I arrived at the station, the train (leave)_________________. 2. My friend (live)___________in China before she moved to American. 3. They (never been) _______________ here before. 4. After I (finish) __________ my breakfast, I went to work. 5. The student (not finish) __________their assignments so they were in great troubles. 6. After the couple (eat) ____________seafood at a seaside restauran, they felt sick. 7. If you (listen) __________to my advice, you wouldn’t have made that silly mistake. 8. What did Jim do after he (finish)__________his homework? 9. The trees were dead because it (be)_____________dry all the summer. 10. _____________(you/meet) Jane anywhere before? 11. Yesterday I was late for the train becase I (forget) _____________my ticket home. 12. Peter told me that he (prepare) __________every thing for his party. 13. The grass was yellow as it (not rain) _________all summer. 14. The electricity was cut off because we (not pay)___________our hydro bill on time. 15. We (not eat) ___________all the morning sowe felt very hungry. Bài 7: Khoanh tròn vào đáp án đúng. 1. My co-worker (had not used/didn’t use) email before, so I showed him how to use it. 2. Because I (hadn’t studied/didn’t study) for the test, I was very nervous. 3. The wave (had destroyed/ destroyed) the sandcastle that we had built yesterday. 4. When shewent out to meet her friends, she (had already done/ already did) all the chores. 5. The waitress brought a drink that I (didn’t order/ hadn’t ordered) before. 6. (Had you given/ did you give) James a ring before you dropped by his apartment? 7. Susan (took/had taken) a rest after she had washed all the dishes. 8. When Jim came to the meeting, everyone (had left/left). 9. Before she had dinner, she (had washed/washed) her hands carefully. 10. Before I (had gone/went) out, I asked my parents for permissions. 11. I could not remember the name of the man we (met/had met) the week before. 12. We (ate/had eaten) all the cakes mymom had made. 13. Before she (came/had come) home, she had met some of her old friends. 14. Before Jane (started/ had started) to make the cake, she had prepared all the ingredients. 15. I (had fed/fed) my cat before I left home. Bài 8: Dựa vào những từ cho trước, viết câu hoàn chỉnh. 1. By/age/of/twelve/Jim/be/able/to/speak/English/fluently. _____________________________________________________________________ 2. She/gain/a lot of/working/experience/before/she/apply/for/that/job. _____________________________________________________________________ 3. We/be/great/troubles/because/we/spend/all/the/money. _____________________________________________________________________ 42

4. My father/know/well/about/London/because/he/be/there/many/times. _____________________________________________________________________ 5. My friend/study/Japanese/before/she/move/to/Japan. _____________________________________________________________________ 6. Peter/own/a/big/house/for/10 years/before/he/move/to/countryside. _____________________________________________________________________ 7. Where/you/live/before/1954? _____________________________________________________________________ 8. Our team/encounter/many/obstacles/before/we/succeed. _____________________________________________________________________ 9. Cindy/be/sick/until/she/stop/eating/junk food. _____________________________________________________________________ 10. I/be/in/Canada/for/7 years/before/I/move/to/America. _____________________________________________________________________ BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO Bài 9: Đánh dấu [ ] trước câu đúng, đánh dấu [x] trước câu có lỗi sai và sửa lại cho đúng. ______ 1. The tallest building in our city was collapsed last week. _______________________________________________________________ ______ 2. All the people in my village have already evacuated before the food. _______________________________________________________________ ______ 3. How many people were the rescuers found yesterday? _______________________________________________________________ ______ 4. Temporary shelters will be providing to the food victims. _______________________________________________________________ ______ 5. Their houses swept away in the storm. _______________________________________________________________ ______ 6. Were anyone injured by the flying debris in the storm. _______________________________________________________________ ______ 7. Natural disasters are wreaked havoc on human and the environment. _______________________________________________________________ ______ 8.What has done to support the people in the flooded area? _______________________________________________________________ ______ 9. Many people havedonated money to build houses for poor people. _______________________________________________________________ ______ 10. They were informed about upcoming storm by the local authorities. _______________________________________________________________ Bài 10: Dựa vào những từ cho trước, viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh. 1. After/the storm/pass/people/come/back/to/their/ normal/ life. _____________________________________________________________________ 2. A decent meal/prepare/by/my mother/after/ she/ come/ home/ after/ work. _____________________________________________________________________ 3. By 1990, my family/ settle down/ in New Jersey/ for 10 years. _____________________________________________________________________ 4. Jim/ have/ a/ shower/ when/ doorbell/ ring/ by/ his wife. _____________________________________________________________________ 5. At this time last year/ a project/ on/ environmental/ issues/ carry/ by Dr.Brown. _____________________________________________________________________ 6. They/ prepare/ carefully/ for/ the hurricane/ before/ it/ arrive. _____________________________________________________________________ 7. Many people/ live/ in temporary shelters/ until/ the/ storm/ pass. 43

_____________________________________________________________________ 8. Earthquakes/ in Japan/ cause/ devastating/ effects/ on/ human/ and/ environment/ recently. _____________________________________________________________________ Bài 11: Cho dạng đúng của từ trong ngoặc để hoàn thành các câu dưới đây. 1. I (tell) __________by Jim that he (paint) __________the entire house. 2. Japanese children (teach) _________how to escape an earthquake at an early age. 3. When we (arrive)___________, we (find)________that the bus (leave)__________. 4. The police (evacuate) _______the building before it (collapse)_____________. 5. When she (call) _________me last night, I (go) _________to sleep, so I could’t answer her. 6. I (never meet)________________Peter before the party last night. 7. Food and shelters (provide)_________________to the local people at the moment. 8. What (do)____________so far to minimize the impacts of natural disasters in our country. 9. I (prepare) __________carefully before I (give) the _____________the presentation about the impacts of natural disasters. 10. My friend (save)________ a lot of money before he (decide) ______to buy a new house. 11. I hope that financial aids (offer)__________to the poor people in the drought area. 12. Peter and Jane (eat)__________before they (come) _________to see me. 13. So far, hundreds of the temporary shelters (provide)__________to the earthquake victims. 14. A relief agency (just found)____________to lessen the effects of the flood on human’s property. 15. Survivors of the earthquake (receive)_____________help from the authorities before they could get back to their normal life. Bài 12: Hoàn thành những câu sau với dạng đúng của những động từ cho sẳn. evacuate injure rescue provide forecast destroy suffer cause 1. Many people_____________from waterborne diseases after the severe flood last year. 2. The locals_____________from their village to escape the earthquake already. 3. Free food and fresh water ___________to the victims of natural disaster every year. 4. Five people_____________from drowning in the rushing stream so far. 5. The tornado _____________many houses before it stopped. 6. Some people _____________after the earthquake. 7. A hurricane_____________by the meteorologists to reach our area next week. 8. Every year, natural disasters_____________loss of human life, damage to property and deterioration of the environment. C.EXERCISES TEST 1 UNIT 9 I. Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others. B. flight C. piece D. mind 1. A. twice 2. A. about B. around C. sound D. young 3. A. cover B. oven C. coffee D. company 4. A. plates B. cakes C. mates D. places B. learned C. changed D. arrived 5. A. laughed II. Choose the words that have the different stress from the others. 1. A. relief B. debris C. typhoon D. severe 2. A. erupt B. victim C. forest D. message 3. A. volcano B. tropical C. government D. property 4. A. geography B. evacuate C. emergency D. temporary 5. A. scatter B. earthquake C. collapse D. mudslide III. Circle the word marked A, B, C or D with a different stress pattern from the others. 1. A. damage B. collapse C. erupt D. affect 2. A. permanent B. eruption C. pollution D. disaster 44

3. A. station B. temperature C. illustrate D. volcano 4. A. tsunami B. thunderstorm C. typhoon D. tornado 5. A. accommodation B. evacuation C. contribution D. contamination IV. Find the one choice that best completes the sentence: 1. A table with four chairs is .................. of the dining room. A. in B. the middle C. in the middle D. about 2. You .................. brush your teeth twice a day. A. should B. can C. will D. have 3. Tim is a good student. He did very well in the first semester. His mother is .................. him. A. sorry for B. sad C. proud of D. displeased 4. The new hotel .................. next year. A. is opened B. will be opened C. is opening D. opens 5. Would you mind .................. on the light? A. turn B. to turn C. turned D. turning 6. - Where is the fridge? - It’s .................. the corner of the kitchen. A. in B. at C. to D. above 7. Did the children enjoy .................. when they were on holiday? A. themselves B. themself C. himself D. itself 8. Carmen didn’t use to eat fish, but now she .................. A. used to B. do C. does D. doesn’t 9. I never go to Australia. I .................. to Australia yet. A. went B. have been C. will go D. haven’t been 10. I’m .................. Let’s do something. How about going to a movie? A. boring B. bore C. bored D. being bored 11. I’m hungry. .................. is for dinner this evening? A. Why B. When C. How D. What 12. The old lady sat in a corner talking to .................. A. himself B. itself C. herself D. themselves 13. I .................. swimming very much. A. wait B. try C. enjoy D. finish 14. The teacher said, “Come at 8 o’clock”. The teacher told the students .................. at 8 o’clock. A. not to come B. to come C. coming D. came 15. Mary is watching a film. She really likes it. Mary is really .................. A. to interest B. interest C. interested D. interesting 16. .................. to do homework today? A. Have you B. Do you have C. Must you D. You must 17. She knows that he worked really .................. this semester. A. good B. hardly C. better D. hard 18. Stop, boys! It’s .................. near the streets. A. dangerous for playing B. dangerously to play C. dangerous to playing D. dangerous to play 19. It’s possible to supplement one’s .................. by taking a part-time job. A. income B. earning C. gaining D. attainment 20. Do you mind if I switch on the radio? - .................. A. No, thank B. Yes, go ahead C. No, not at all D. Yes, you can V. Choose the word or phrase that best completes each unfinished sentence below. by Alexander Bain in 1843. 1. The facsimile A. is invented B. was invented C. invented D. has been invented 2. First, fry the onions add the potatoes. 45

A. than B. then C. after 3. He a prize in the competition last week. A. win B. won C. was won 4. Who the company? A. goes B. walks C. jogs 5. is an instrument for making sounds louder. A. Loudspeaker B. Recorder C. Facsimile 6. The doctor told me more fresh fruit. A. eat B. to eat C. eating 7. Can you repair my bike? A. adjust B. use C. fix “Arabian wine”. 8. Coffee was known in Europe A. as B. like C. the same 9. The information for future use. A. stores B. stored C. is stored 10. I saw a flying overhead. A. train B. helicopter C. conveyor belt 11. This beautiful picture by Mary. A. is drawn B. is drew C. is draw 12. Don’t touch the paint! - It’s still wet. A. put paint on something to change the color B. take something C. do a job with something D. put your hand or finger on something 13. I warned him too close to the fire. A. didn’t go B. not going C. no going 14. is a pen that has a very small ball at the end. A. Bail-point pen B. Fountain pen C. Pencil 15. Tobacco is taxed in most countries, along with alcohol. A. in the same way as something B. but not something C. for example D. including 16. James picked up the and said “Hello!” A. vacuum B. printer C. telephone 17. Children, please behave! A. do and say the right things B. do something C. do what somebody tells you to do D. move on your legs, but not run a toaster on the table. 18. We now toast bread A. by B. with C. from 19. Which shall I press to turn the radio on? A. plug B. roll C. roller the sun too long. 20. Don’t sit A. in B. on C. over

D. before D. has win D. runs D. Radio D. ate D. A & B D. unlike D. are stored D. coach D. is drawing

D. not to go D. Crayon

D. fax machine

D. in D. button D. among

VI. Fill in the correct verb form. 1. They (come) .......................... back home after they (finish) .......................... their work. 2. She said that she (meet) .......................... Mr. Bean before. 3. Before he (go) .......................... to bed, he (read) .......................... a novel. 4. He told me he (not/wear) ...................................... such kind of clothes before. 5. When I came to the stadium, the match (start) ...................................... 46

6. After Nick (do) ............................ his homework, he (go) ............................ to bed last night. 7. Mai (live) ............................ in Hai Phong for five years before she (move) ............................ to Ha Noi three years ago. 8. Phong (tell) .......................... me yesterday that he (learn) .......................... French for a year. 9. Ms. Hong (work) ............................ at our school for twenty years before she (retire) ............................ last June. 10. By the time I (get) ....................................... to Nick’s house, his party (already/ start) ................................................ 11. When we (come) ..................................... back to our home village last month, it (change) ............................ so much. 12. I couldn’t recognize my cousin because he (grow) ............................ a lot. 13. By the time the bus (come) ............................ this morning, Duong (wait) ............................ for it for half an hour. 14. Before she (listen) ............................ to music, she (do) ............................ homework. 15. Last night, Peter (go) ...................... to the supermarket before he (go) ........................ home. VII. Correct the verb form of the sentences. 1. When I (come) ............................. there, they (leave) ............................. 2. When I (get up) ............................. this morning, my father (leave) ............................. 3. After the children (finish) ........................... their homework, they (go) .......................... to bed. 4. I (do) ............................. it before he (come) ............................. 5. I (meet) ............................. them after they (divorce) ............................. each other. 6. If I (not buy) ............................. this dress, I (have) ............................. money. VIII. Choose the correct word A, B, C or D for each gap to complete the following passage. the threat of desert expansion, but few of More than a billion people all over the world are (1) them are aware that they themselves cause it and are also its (2) . People cut (3) trees for fuel and farmland. Their herd eat (4) the grass covering valley floors and hillsides. The climate and soil quality, therefore, are affected and forests are turned into (5) . In some places, many people had to leave their homes when their wells became dry and sand buried their houses and crops. Therefore, government in nearby areashave had local people (6) trees and banned burning firewood for fuel.Many techniques have been (7) . For example, in Iran, a thin covering of oil was poured on sandy areas to retain (8) for planting trees, butthis method may harm the environment. Other countries built long canals or pipelines (9) water to desert areas. Unless people find more (10) methods, their homes and land willbe lost. The last against the desert is continuing. 1. A. of B. in C. on D. under 2. A. victims B. enemies C. friends D. effects 3. A. off B. back C. down D. in 4. A. up B. away C. into D. out 5. A. blanks B. deserts C. spaces D. bareness 6. A. planting B. plant C. to plant D. planted 7. A. using B. use C. used D. uses 8. A. fertilizer B. soil C. earth D. water 9. A. to carry B. take C. fetch D. bring 10. A. great B. effective C. major D. useful IX. Read the following passage, choose the best answer for each question followed. Since the world has become industrialized, there has been an increase in the number of animal species that have either become extinct or have neared extinction. Bengal tiger, for instance, which once roamed the jungles in vast number, now only about 2,300 and by the year 2025, their population is estimated to be down to zero. What is alarming about the case of the Bengal tiger is that this extinction will have been caused 47

almost entirely by poachers who according to some sources, are not interested in material gain but in personal gratification. This is an example of the callousness that is part of what is causing the problem of extinction. Animals like Bengal tigers as well as other endangered species are a valuable part of the world’s ecosystem. International laws protecting these animals must be enacted to ensure their survival and the survival of our planet. Countries around the world have begun to deal with the problem in various ways. Some countries, in order to circumvent the problem, have allocated large amounts of land to animal reserves. They then charge admission to help defray the costs of maintaining the parks and they often must also depend on world organizations for support. With the money they get, they can invest in equipment, and patrols to protect the animals. Another solution that is an attempt to stem the tide of animal extinction is an international boycott of products made from endangered species. This seems fairly effective but it will not, by itself, prevent animals from being hunted and killed. 1. What is the main topic of the passage? A. the Bengal tiger B. international boycotts C. endangered species D. problems with industrialization 2. Which of the following is closest in meaning to the word “alarming” in paragraph 1? A. dangerous B. serious C. gripping D. distressing 3. Which of the following could best replace the word “case” as used in paragraph 1? A. act B. situation C. contrast D. trade 4. The word “poachers” as used in paragraph 1 could be best replaced by which of the following? A. illegal hunters B. enterprising researchers C. concerned scientists D. trained hunters 5. The word “callousness” in paragraph 1 could best be replaced by which of the following? A. indirectness B. independence C. incompetence D. insensitivity 6. The above passage is divided into two paragraphs in order to contrast A. a problem and a solution B. a statement and an illustration C. a comparison and a contrast D. specific and general information 7. What does the word “this” refer to in paragraph 1? A. endangered species that are increasing B. Bengal tigers that are decreasing C. poachers who seek personal gratification D. sources that may not be accurate 8. Which of the following could best replace the word “allocated’’ in paragraph 2? A. set aside B. combined C. organized D. taken off 9. The word “defray” in paragraph 2 is closest in meaning to which of the following? A. lower B. raise C. make a payment on D. make an investment toward 10. The author uses the phrase “stem the tide” in paragraph 2 to mean A. touch B. stop C. tax D. save 11. Which of the following best describes the author’s attitude? A. forgiving B. concerned C. vindictive D. surprised X. Read the text and then choose the best answer A, B, C or D. Two of the most dangerous storms which affect America are hurricanes and tornadoes. They are very much feared by anyone who may live in the path of their destruction. Every year homes are destroyed by their fury and often lives are lost. Most people who live near the coast are forced to evacuate their homes and to move to safer areas until the storm passes. Floods are caused along the coasts by both the heavy rain and a storm tide that is considerably above normal water level. The high winds, coastal flooding and heavy rains associated with a hurricane cause enormous damage. Hurricanes usually develop between July and October. Once they hit land they carry tremendous power with driving rain and wind. 48

Tornadoes are violent low - pressured storms. These storms occur most often during the summer months and are noticeable by their strong wind and lack of rain. The sky turns black as dust is sucked up into the air. Tornadoes are capable of lifting quite heavy objects from the ground. They can pick up trees and cars right into the air and even uplift heavier objects such as homes and railway cars. Both hurricanes and tornadoes cause millions of dollars worth of damage to life and property every year. Today they can be predicted more easily than in the past, but they cannot be stopped or ignored. 1. What are two of the most dangerous storms which affect America? A. Hurricanes and tornadoes. B. Typhoons and thunderstorms. C. Thunderstorms and hurricanes. D. Hurricanes and typhoons. 2. At which part of the year do hurricanes usually develop? A. July and August only. B. All the year round. C. From the seventh to the ninth month. D. Between July and October. 3. What is the major similarity of both a hurricane and a tornado? A. They cover only a small area. B. They can cause great damage. C. They are not accompanied by rain. D. They have either wind or speed. 4. Which of the following is true of tornadoes and hurricanes? A. They cannot be predicted with accuracy. B. They are easier to control today than in the part. C. They can be predicted today with greater accuracy. D. They cannot be predicted today with greater accuracy. 5. Which of the following was not mentioned in the article? A. The number of people killed each year by these storms. B. The tremendous power killed each year by these storms. C. The damage caused by hurricanes and tornadoes. D. The time of year when they are most likely to strike. XI. Read the following passage and choose the best answers each of the questions. Nylon was invented in the early 1930s by an American chemist, Julian Hill. Other scientists worked with his invention and finally on 27 October 1938, Nylon was introduced to the world. It was cheap and strong and immediately became successful, especially in the making of ladies’ stocking. Today, nylon is found in many things: carpets, ropes, seat belts, furniture, computers, and even spare parts of the human body. It has played an important part : in our lives for over 50 years. . 1. Julian Hill was a/ an A. chemist B. American C. inventor D. all are correct . 2. Nylon can be found in A. many things B. spare parts of the human body C. furniture D. all are correct 3. What does the word “introduce” in line 3 mean? A. tell somebody your name B. tell somebody the name of a person C. bring something new into use for the 1st time D. bring something somewhere 4. Nylon . A. was invented by Julian Hill B. was strong but expensive C. was not very popular D. all are correct 5. Which of the following is not true? 49

A. Nylon was used to make ladies’ stocking. B. At first, people didn’t want to use Nylon. C. Today, Nylon still plays an important part in our lives. D. We can found Nylon in computers. XII. Rewrite the sentences 1. David had gone home before we arrived. After ............................................................................................................................................ 2. We had lunch then we took a look around the shops. Before ......................................................................................................................................... 3. The light had gone out before we got out of the office. When ........................................................................................................................................... 4. After she had explained everything dearly, we started our work. By the time .................................................................................................................................. 5. My father had watered all the plants in the garden by the time my mother came home. Before ......................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................... XIII. Change the following sentences into passive voice. 1. They can’t make tea with cold water. ..................................................................................................................................................... 2. The chief engineer was instructing all the workers of the plant. ..................................................................................................................................................... 3. Somebody has taken some of my books away. ..................................................................................................................................................... 4. They will hold the meeting before May Day. ..................................................................................................................................................... 5. They have to repair the engine of the car. ..................................................................................................................................................... 6. The boys broke the window and took away some pictures. ..................................................................................................................................................... 7. People spend a lot of money on advertising everyday. ..................................................................................................................................................... 8. They may use this room for the classroom. ..................................................................................................................................................... 9. The teacher is going to tell a story. ..................................................................................................................................................... 10. Mary is cutting the cake with a sharp knife. ..................................................................................................................................................... 11. The children looked at the women with a red hat. ..................................................................................................................................................... 12. They have provided the victims with food and clothing. ..................................................................................................................................................... 13. The teacher explains the lesson. ..................................................................................................................................................... 14. Mrs Green is cooking the food in the kitchen. ..................................................................................................................................................... 15. The doctor examined the patients. ..................................................................................................................................................... 16. These boys made that noise. ..................................................................................................................................................... 17. People speak English all over the world. ..................................................................................................................................................... 50

18. He gave him back the money last Sunday. ..................................................................................................................................................... 19. I canâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t do these exercises quickly. ..................................................................................................................................................... 20. She had finished the report by noon. TEST 2 UNIT 9 I. Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others. 1. A.rescue B. supply C.erupt D. damage 2. A. mudslide B. earthquake C.typhoon D. debris 3. A. hurricane B. tornado C. volcano D. eruption 4. A. disaster B. injury C. tsunami D. provision 5. A. tropical B. natural C. terrible D. destructive II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences. 6. is sudden flooding that occurs when water rises quickly within several hours of a heavy rain. A.quick flood B.rapid flood C.flash flood D.hot flood millions of people in 61 of its provinces. 7. Monsoon rains across Thailand A.has affected B.have affected C.have effect D.have influenced 8. Typhoon Haiyan made the damage, and of life became great in the Philippines. B.loses C.losing D.loss A.lose 9. Thanks to the extensive measures taken, the loss of life in Typhoon Xangsane in Da Nang and other provinces seemed to be relatively low. A.prevent B.preventive C.prevention D.preventing in the coming weeks. 10. A number of other provinces will declare drought A.accident B.emergency C.event D.situation 11. In some areas, human can be a contributing factor in causing landslide. B.actions C.acting D.activities A.acts 12. ThePacific Ring of Fire is an area of frequent and volcanic ,encircling the basin of the Pacific Ocean. A.floods - eruptions B.earthquake - flood C.flood - eruption D.earthquakes - eruptions 13. Magmais the liquid rock inside a volcano, but lava is magma that a volcano. A.flows B.flows into C.flows out D.flows out of 14. A soft, loose soil may more intensely than hard rock at the same distance from the same earthquake. A.erupt B.rage C.shake D.collapse 15. During the next 24 hours, the storm will be moving north, around 10 km per hour and is expected to the southeastern part of China's Guangdong Province. A.strike B.scatter C.bury D.struck III. Complete each sentences with the correct word from the box. drought

flood

hurricane

landslide

tornado

1. When there is a , a lot of water covers an area where there usually isn't water. 2. A refers to a long time without rain. 3. When there is a , a lot of rocks and earth fall down a hill. 4. A is a storm with a lot of wind that moves over water. 5. A is a storm in which the air moves very quickly in a circle. IV. Use the verbs in the correct form to complete the sentences. bury recover 1. The government

evacuate rage take scatter provide suffer health and other services to the affected regions. 51

2. Actions were to limitthe effects of the floods in QuangNinh. 3. The Red Cross helped homeless families to from the disaster through the project. 4. The majority of concerned areas have from cholera epidemics after the floods and landslides in Central America. 5. Early September,mudslides caused by heavy rains an entire villageof 480 inhabitants. 6. Thousands of villagers from flood-prone areas after the warnings from the weather bureau. 7. Tiny articles of dust, smoke, salt or pollution droplets that through the air to cause haze. 8. The fires for more than a week in the southern region of Chile, which has been hit by a severe drought. V. Circle the correct verbs in the brackets in this story. My Great Grandmother Meets Hurricane Cleo Hurricane Cleo struck the United States in August, 1964. My great grandmother, Ana, was traveling in Miami when the hurricane struck. She (1.said/told) me that she still remembers how scared everyone was. She (2. said/told) me that the hotel (3. has called/had called) her room one morning and (4. had said/had told) her that a big storm (5. is/was) on its way. They said that all hotel guests (6. have to/ had to) stay in the hotel until the weather forecast (7. tell/said) that it (8. is/was) safe to leave. storm was over She stayed in her room and she didn't know what happened until the storm was over. When she turned on the TV, the reports said that a lot of people (9. have been/had been) injured and that all the roads (10. are/were) flooded. She always (11. says/said) that she still (12. feels/felt) lucky to have survived Hurricane Cleo. VI. Complete the sentences with the past perfect form of the verbs in brackets. l. Anita said she was very sorry for what she (do) . 2. When Sam (pay) the bill, we left the restaurant and went home. 3. It wasnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t surprising that she was tired - she (not sleep) for two days. 4. The road was blocked because a lorry (break down) . 5. My mother felt very nervous on the plane because she (not fly) before. 6. (they/go) home when you arrived? 7. I (hear) the story before, so I didn't find it very interesting. 8. After she (try on) all the dresses in the shop, she bought the most expensive one. 9. They (not have) breakfast when I got up. 10. The children were very excited because they (not see) a tiger before. VII. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets. 1. After Nick (do) his homework, he (go) to bed last night. 2. Mai (live) in HaiPhong for five years before she (move) to Ha Noi three years ago. 3. Phong (tell) me yesterday that he (learn) French for a year. 4. Ms Hong (work) at our school for twenty years before she (retire) last June. 5. By the time I (get) to Nick's house, his party (already/start) . 6. When we (come) back to our home village last month, it (change) so much. 7. I couldn't recognize my cousin because he (grow) a lot. 8. By the time the bus (come) this morning, Duong (wait) for it for half an hour. VIII. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets. 52

1. Thousands of homes were flooded after Cyclone Komen (hit) Bangladesh. 2. By the time the storm hit the fishing village, all the boats (return) to the port. 3. After several weeks without any drops of rain, the region (suffer) from a severe shortage of water for people and animals. 4. Last week the landslide (occur) after it (rain) heavily for three days in several villages in the mountainous district of Xin Man, Ha Giang Province. 5. Earlier on August 2, the officials (say) seven people were killed in the northern provinces of Dien Bien, Lai Chau, and Son La after rain (cause) extensive floods across the region. 6. Mount Fuji in Japan last (erupt) in 1708, and its eruption (cover) the surrounding villages with ash. IX. Complete the sentences, using the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. Tsunami is a Japanese term for an unusually large ocean wave caused by undersea earthquake, landslide, or volcanic . (erupt) 2. During a volcano, you should follow the order issued by authorities. (evacuate) 3. Thunderstorms can be ,while tornadoes, and lightning can be life threatening. (destroy) 4. of the deadly Nepal earthquake have told the horror of the moment when it struck, leaving more than 3,000 dead. (survive) 5. The tents will be used for medical camps and temporary after the earthquake in Nepal. (accommodate) 6. A website in Pakistan is helping coordinate the of aid in the flood disaster. (provide) X. Complete the sentences, using the correct passive form of the verbs in brackets. 1. Severe damage to environment by prolonged droughts in Central Viet Nam last July. (cause) 2. Tomorrow the dam to prevent salt water from entering the fields in TienGiang Province. (close) 3. The hot weather to continue while there were longer hours of sunshine. (expect) 4. Two naval ships to the island to rescue fishermen. (send) 5. Oil rigs throughout the Gulf of Mexico during Hurricane Katrina. (hit) 6. Roofs of thousands of houses across the road during the cyclone. (blow) 7. Villages along the river about a high risk of landslide every year. (warn) 8. Fires in the wild by Forest Fire Fighters who use different techniques before the fires can destroy too much land or property. (put out) 9. More than 20 streets in Bien Hoa to a depth of up to 80 centimeters last Friday. (flood) 10. After Typhoon Linda, over 2,200 school rooms , and 4,000 school rooms . (destroy - damage) XI. Fill each of the numbered blanks in the following passage, using the appropriate words or phrases given in the box. a dry

because of suffer

blown irrigated

causes wells

normal drops

Drought is a condition that results when the average rainfall for a fertile area (1) far below the normal amount for (2) long period of time. In areas that are not (3) , the lack of rain (4) farm crops to wither and die. Higher than (5) temperatures usually accompany periods of droughts. The soil of a drought area becomes (6) and crumbles. Often the rich topsoil is (7) away by the hot, dry winds. 53

Streams, ponds, and (8) and may even die (10)

often dry up during a drought, and animals (9) the lack ofwater.

XII. Choose the item among A, B, Cor D that best answers the question about the passage. The large movement of the earth under the water causes a very large and powerful tsunami. That tsunami was called the Asian Tsunami in most of the world. It was called the Boxing Day Tsunami in England, Australia, South Africa and Canada because it happened on the holiday which they call Boxing Day. The tsunami caused a lot of damage to countries such as the Philippines, Thailand, Indonesia and Sri Lanka. Waves as high as 30 meters killed many people and damaged or destroyed a lot of buildings and other property. Over 225,000 people died or they were not found after thetsunami. The waves traveled as far away as South Africa (8,000 kilometers) where as many us 8 people died because of high water caused by the waves. Because of how much damage was caused and the number of people the earthquake affected, over $7 billion was donated to help the survivors and rebuild the areas damaged. 1. Why was the tsunami called the Boxing Day Tsunami in England? A. Because it happened when people were boxing. B. Because it happened when people were collecting boxes. C. Because it happened on Boxing Day. D. Because it destroyed a lot of boxes. 2. How high were the waves? A. thirteen meters B. eighteen meters C. thirty meters D. two hundred meters 3. What were some people in South Africa killed by? A. earthquake B. high water C. high wind D. volcano 4. Which of the following sentences is NOT true? A. Only in Asia the tsunami was called Asian Tsunami. B. The tsunami caused a lot of damage to Indonesia. C. Many people died because of the high waves. D. A lot of money was raised to help people. 5. What does the word "survivors" in the last sentence mean? A. Houses that aren't destroyed. B. Offices are being rebuilt C. People who were dead. D. People who are left alive. XIII. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. El Nino is a weather phenomenon of the Pacific Ocean which is (1) by an abnormal (2) of water on the surface of the ocean. It has the (3) to influence global weather patterns as it brings drought to some continents and (4) rain to others.It was first (5) by fishermen coming from Spanish ports in the Pacific in the 17thcentury. It got its name (Spanish for â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;boy child') because it usually takes (6) near Christmas time. It can cause catastrophic (7) . The 1982 El Nino (8) in 1.500deaths, but it can be lot worse than that. Sea animals, (9) fish and birds, also die in large numbers. It is (10) that sailors in the Pacific can smell the dead sea-life during El Nino. 1. A. happened B. caused C. origin D. done 2. A. increase B. extra C. heater D. warming 3. A. proficiency B. power C. practice D.performance 4. A. wet B. shower C. plenty D. heavy 5. A. saw B. noticed C. caught D. time 6. A. away B. care C. part D. place 7. A. damage B. difficulty C. hurt D. problem 8. A. resulted B. led C. caused D. gave 9. A. containing B. holding C.including D. involving 10. A. said B. felt C. told D. mistaken XIV. Read Mary Annâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s story, and answer the questions. 54

In 1969, Hurricane Camille hit my three-storey blocks of flats near the Gulf of Mexico. First, the sea hit the building and all the windows broke. Then the rooms flooded. Five minutes later, my bed was floating near the ceiling. Then it floated out of the window. It was dark and the wind was howling. I was terrified. The building was falling down all around me. The wind was awful. It reached a speed of 234 miles per hour. I was cut and bleeding from head to toe. Finally, someone found me 8 km from my house and they took me to hospital. 1. When did Hurricane Camille hit the Gulf of Mexico? 2.

What happened after the rooms flooded? .

What happened to the building?

How fast was the wind?

How far did the water carry Mary Ann?

XV. Read the following passage carefully, then writeTrue (T) or False (F) for each statement. The people of Kiribati are afraid that one day their country in the not-too-distant future will disappear from the surface of the earth.Several times this year, the Pacific island nation has been flooded by a sudden high tide. These tides, which swept across the island and destroyed houses, came when there was neither wind nor rain. This never happened before. What is causing these mysterious high tides? The answer may be global warming. When fuels like oil and coal are being burned, pollutants are released; these pollutants hold heat in the earth's atmosphere. Warmer temperatures cause water to expand and also create more water by melting glaciers and polar ice caps. If the situation continues, scientists say that many countries will suffer, Bangladesh, for example, might lose one-fifth of its land. The coral island nations of the Pacific like Kiribsti and the Marshall Islands, however, would face an even worse fate - they would be swallowed by the sea. The loss of these coral islands would be everyone's loss. Coral formations are home to more species than any other place on the earth. T F 1. In Kiribati there were sudden high tides coming when there was no wind or rain. 2. High tides without wind or rain often happen in Kiribati. 3. Global warming is definitely the cause of those mysterious high tides. 4. The loss of coral islands doesn't affect people on the earth. 5. Coral reefs play an essential role in marine life. XVI. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that best answers the question about the story. I often hear or read about ‘natural disasters’ - the eruption of Mount St. Helen, a volcano in the state of Washington, Hurricane Andrew in Florida, the floods in the American Midwest, terrible earthquakes all over the world, huge fires, and so on. But I'll never forget my first personal experience with the strangeness of nature - "the London Killer Fog” of 1952. It began on Thursday, December 4, when a high-pressure system of warm air covered southern England. With the freezing-cold air below, heavy fog formed. Pollution from factories, cars and coal stoves mixed with the fog. The humidity was terribly high, there was no breeze at all. Traffic such as cars, trains, boats stopped. People couldn't see, and some walked onto the railroad tracks or into the river. It was hard to breathe, and many people got sick. Finally, on Tuesday, December 9, the wind came and the fog went away. But after that, even more people got sick. Many of them died. 1. Which "natural disaster' isn't mentioned in the passage? A. a volcano B. a tornado C. a flood D. a hurricane 2. What is the writer's unforgettable personal experience? A. the London killer B. the heavy fog in London in 1952 55

C. a high-pressure system D. the strangeness of nature 3. How long did the ‘London Killer Fog' last? A. For four days B. For five days C.For six days D. For a week 4. What didn't happen during the time of the ‘London Killer Fog'? A. Pollution B. Heavy rain C. Humidity D. Heavy fog 5. Why did the traffic stop? A. Because of the rain B. Because of the windy weather C. Because of the humid weather D. Because of the heavy fog. XVII. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that best answers the question about the passage. How can scientists predict earthquakes? Earthquakes are not scattered anywhere but happen in certain areas. They happen in places where pieces of the earth's surface meet. For example, earthquakes often occur on the west-coast of North and South America, around the Mediterranean Sea, and along the Pacific coast of Asia. Another way to predict earthquakes is to look for changes in the earth's surface, like asudden drop of water level in the ground. Some people say animals can predict earthquakes. Before earthquakes people have seen chickens sitting in trees, fish jumping out of the water, snakes leaving their holes and other animals acting strangely. After an earthquake happens, people can die from lack of food, water, and medical supplies. The amount of destruction caused by an earthquake depends on where it happens, what time it happens, and how strong it is. It also depends on types of building, soil conditions and population. Of the 6000 earthquakes on the earth each year, only about fifteen cause great damage and many deaths. 1. Earthquakes happen in certain areas where . A. the population is large B. pieces of the earth's surface meet C. the soil conditions are stable D. many buildings are built 2. Earthquakes often happen along . A. the east-coast of North America B. the east-coast of South America C. the Pacific coast of Asia D. the coast of Australia 3. Looking for can help predict earthquakes. A. changes in the earth's surface B. water beneath the earth's surface C. drops of water D. water currents 4. After an earthquake, as a result of people may die. A. lack of food B. lack of friendship C. lack of information D. lack of knowledge 5. The passage mainly discusses . A. the damage caused by earthquakes B. how strong earthquakes are C. strange animal behaviors D. how to predict earthquakes XVIII. Write sentences about a drought in Central Viet Nam, using the words and full phrases given. Drought in Central Viet Nam 1. A drought emergency/ declare/ last month/ after five months without rain/NinhThuan/ other provinces/ Central Viet Nam.

2. A drought/ a long period/ when/ there/ little or no rain. 3. Hot weather/ the highest temperature/ 42 degree Celsius/ hit/ Central Viet Nam. 4. In particular/ rainfall/ be/ lower/ the average/ the past few years. 5. In NinhThuan/ about 50,000 local people/ suffer/ drinking water shortage. 56

A.Prescription B.Medicine

6. Hundreds/ hectares/ rice and vegetables/ destroy/ and/ 500 cattle/die/prolonged drought.

8. The provinces/ receive/ financial supports/ worth VND 172 billion/ the government. TEST 3 UNIT 9 I. Circle the word with a different stress pattern from the others. 1. A. industry B. nature C. injure D. climate 2. A. typhoon B. tropical C. debris D. document 3. A. animal B. destroy C. erupt D. exploit 4. A. documentaryB. preparation C. scientific D. photography 5. A. eruption B. science C. destroy D. volcano II. Circle the words with the underlined parts pronounced differently from the others. 1. A.prepares B.erupts C.stops D.photographs 2. A.typhoon B.goose C.food D.flood B.suggested C.minded D.decided 3. A.looked 4. A.bought B.drought C.brought D.ought 5. A.ache B.charity C.archaeology D.chaos B.beard C.wear D.prepare 6. A.bear 7. A.geology B.psychology C.classify D.photography 8. A.physical B.mythology C.rhythmic D.psychology

D.tornado D.situation D.industry D. happen D. arrive

IV. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete each sentence. 1. When a volcano , hot gases and lava run down. A.blows B. erupts C. throws D.escapes 2. Penicillin was by Alexander Fleming. A.discovered B. invented C.created D.explored 3. After an earthquake, many people and to hospital. A.was injured/ taken B.injured/ took C.were injured/ taken D.injured/ taken 4. is a storm in a desert during which strong winds blow sand blow into the air. A. sandstorm B.thunderstorm C.cyclone D.hurricane 5. After a mudslide, authorities have confirmed five dead and a hundred of people still A. miss B. missed C. misses D. missing 6. A forest fire quickly and many trees. A.raged/ killed B.burst/ harmed C.spread/ destroyed D.occurred/ cooked 7. The tornado caused a massive to the town. A.destruction B.extension C.danger D. mishap 8. The flood victims are being sent by the government. A.food B. shelter C. aid D.water 9. After the earthquake struck the city, rescuers searched for . A.survivors B.survivals C.surviving D.survived 10. is better than treatment. 57

D.Preparation

V. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete each sentence. 1. She is good meteorology . A. on B. in C. at D. for 2. Last night volcano Maui and the large areas of land were affected. A. erupts B. erupted C. erupting D. erupt 3. When a volcanic eruption occurs, the hot pours downhill. A. ash B. smoke C. dirt D. lava 4. Since there are two villages located at the foot of the volcano, the local population was . A. evacuated B. killed. C. died D. injured have been sent humanitarian aid by many countries. 5. The earthquake A. victim's B. elders C. rescuers D. soldiers 6. When there is a plane crash, a lot of is left. A. dust B. debris C. waste D. piece 7. A powerful off the coast of Indonesia sparked a three-metre-high and killed at least 113 people. A. earthquake B. tornado C. tsunami D. landslide 8. A often occurs in the mountainous areas because many trees have been cut down. A. forest fire B. flood C. tornado D. landslide often happen in rainy season especially in the center of Vietnam. 9. A. droughts B. storms C. floods D. sandstorms 10. Deforestation leads to which can be defined as the changes in the average temperature. A. flood B. climate change C. sandstorm D. erosion

7. In Gia Lai/ other provinces/ water/ many reservoirs/ drop/ the "dead" level/ several months.

III. Circle the word with a different stress pattern from the others. 1. A. erosion B.destruction C.environment 2. A.environment B.preparation C.information 3. A.biology B. zoology C. geography 4. A.victim B.protect C.safety 5. A. typhoon B.survivor C. rescuer

C.Practice

VI. Match the words in column A to their definition in column B. A B 1. volcanic a. a mass of earth, rock, etc. that falls down the slope of a mountain or a cliff eruption 2. earthquake b. a long period without rain 3. thunderstorm c. an extremely large wave in the sea caused, for example, by an earthquake 4. landslide d. a large amount of water spread from a river, sea etc. that covers an area that is normally dry 5. sandstorm e. a disaster that a volcano explodes and throws out fire, lava, smoke etc. 6. tornado f. a fire in the forest caused by high temperature 7. flood g. a sudden violent of the ground 8. drought h. a storm in a desert in which sand is blown into the air by strong winds 9. tsunami i. a storm with thunder and lightning and usually very heavy rain 10. wildfire j. a strong wind that blows in a circle .

VII. Give the correct form of the verbs in the brackets. 1. The flood victims (feel) a little better after they (eat) some food and (drink) some water. 2. (you/hear) the earthquake which struck Japan last night? 3. I was late. The other journalists (already/arrive) the city where the earthquake (strike) . 4. By the time the volcano (erupt) , people living around the root of the volcano (evacuate) . 5. We were going on a picnic in forest when we (see) a wildfire. 6. When I (see) that someone was stuck into a collapse of a building after an earthquake, I (help) them. He (be) very appreciative. 58

7. 8.

Yesterday my parents (take) me to the zoo. Afterward I (learn) I (have) a cup of tea before I (leave) for my office.

a lot about nature.

VIII. Complete the sentences, using the correct passive forms of the verbs in brackets. 1. More trees (plant) every year to minimize the adverse impacts or environmental disaster to human beings and other animals. 2. The debris from the plane crash (clear) by emergency teams at the moment. 3. Aids (send) to the flood victims by the government tomorrow. 4. The town (rebuilt) after massive destruction of the earthquake in 2015. 5. People living around the volcano (evacuate) for one hour before the eruption happened. 6. Earthquake victims (already send) humanitarian aid by many countries. 7. Thousands of buildings in Japan (destroy) when the earthquake (happen) in 2014. 8. All of the animals (kill) by a forest fire in dry seasons. 9. Water (pollute) during a flood. 10. A mudslide (cause) by heavy rainfall last year. IX. Complete the sentences, using the correct form of the words from the box. the America and found the Indian. (exploration) 1. Columbus 2. Many tourists are by the mystery of Amazon rainforest. (attractive) 3. Mount Phu Si is an volcano in Japan. (activity) 4. Many people because of the Black Death in Europe in the past. (death) after the flood. (contamination) 5. Water is 6. People trees in the forest, which causes many impacts to the environment. (destruction) 7. Some plants are to human and animals, but others can be used to prevent some common illness. (poison) 8. team is trying to rescue some people stuck into the collapse of a house after an earthquake. (emergent) X. Complete each sentence with the correct form of the verbs in brackets. 1. She (not drink) coffee last night. She (drink) Coca Cola. 2. He (send) you a check last Sunday. you (receive) it yet? 3. She (make) herself a cup of coffee before (sit down) on her chair and (finish) her works. 4. It looked like someone (break) the window with a hammer some time before. 5. After Dr. Johnson (examine) her, he (give) her a prescription. 6. My family (built) a basement to shelter when I (be) young because at that time, hurricanes (happen) commonly. 7. We (go) to the doctor yesterday because we (be) sick. 8. It was the first time I (see) a tornado in my country. 9. Her grandfather (die) 20 years ago. She (never meet) him before. 10. The storm (become) stronger after the plane (take off) for several minutes XI. Give the correct forms of the words in brackets to complete the sentences. 1. This beach is very for swimmers because tornadoes often start there. (danger) 2. Her family live near an active volcano, so she's always worried about the of her (safe) 59

family.

3. Don't leave the light on. It wastes . (electric) 4. Mount. Phu Si in Japan some years ago. (eruption) 5. We need some to cope with natural disasters before they happen. (prepare) 6. Protecting our resources especially rainforests is very important to prevent some natural disasters such as landslides, floods, so on. (nature) 7. A flood causes the of food and water because it destroys crops and pollutes the fresh water. (short) 8. In tropical region, it is very in summer. (storm) 9. Deforestation can cause soil . (erode) 10. Crops are severely by a drought. (destruction) 11. A lot of about people and assets were left after a hurricane. (damage) 12. Food and drink are usually after a natural disaster occurs. (scarcity)

XII. Read the paragraph below and fill in each blank with a suitable word from the boxes. Erosion in America Erosion of America's farmland by wind and water has been a problem since settlers first put the prairies and grasslands under the plow in the nineteenth century. By the 1930s, (1) 282 million acres of farmland (2) by erosion. After 40 years of (3) efforts, soil erosion has accelerated due to new demands (4) on the land by heavy crop pollution. In the years ahead, soil erosion and the pollution problems it causes are likely to replace petroleum scarcity as the nation's most critical (5) resource problem. 1. A. more than 2. A. damaged 3. A. conserve 4. A. were placed 5. A. nature XIII. Text 1:

B. more B. was damaged B. conservation B. was placed B. natural

C. less C. were damaged C. conserving C. which placed C. nation

D. than D. damages D. conservations D. placed D. national

Red Alert: Volcanoes

Volcanoes can be fun to learn about. It can be neat to watch them erupt. But if you live near a volcano, you know that they are dangerous! An eruption can like an explosion. Rock and lava can throw up into the air. Streams of red hot lava quickly run down from the peak of the volcano. The air is filled with deadly gases. These things can put many lives in danger. Scientists have learned that there are many things that they can study to help them tell when an eruption might happen. They can study the movements of the ground. When a volcano is about to erupt, the ground will often move just like it does during an earthquake. Scientists can also measure the gases that come out of a volcano. Most volcanoes emit gases all of the time. More gases are let out as the volcano gets closer to erupting. They can also study the way the land and water around the volcano. Scientists can read these signs and warn people of danger. They may not realize it, but their work helps to keep people safe! 1. Read the passage and choose the best answer A, B, C or D to each question below. 1. In the passage, a volcanic eruption is compared as . A.an explosion B.an exploration C.a bomb D.a danger 2. can come out from a volcanic eruption. A. Rock B.Lava C.Gases D All above. 60

can study many things to predict when an eruption might happen. A.Economists B.Scientists C People. D.Biologists 4. There are ways for studying to estimate the time an eruption might happen. A. 1 B. 2 C. 3 D. 4 5. When an eruption is going to happen, . A.the ground moves as it does during an earthquake. B.the gases don't come out of it more than usual. C.only the water around it changes. D.the ground moves slowly and weakly. 2. Read the passage again. Decide these sentences TRUE (T) or FALSE (F) 1. Living near a volcano is not dangerous. 2. Lava, rock and gases running down from a volcano put many lives in danger. 3. Scientists cannot predict when an eruption might happen. 4. Less gases are let out as the volcano gets closer to erupting. 5. The movements of the ground can help scientists forecast a volcanic eruption. 6. Scientists can study a volcano through the changes of land and water around it. XIV. Choose the correct answer A, B, or C to complete the passage below. A (1) is defined as being an uncontrolled fire that occurs in the wilderness. They can be massive in size and have the ability (2) across vast distances, jumping rivers, roads and fire breaks in the process. Usually, wildfires occur in hot and (3) climates during the (4) months of spring and summer. (5) average, there are a reported 60,000 to 80,000 wildfires each year, and 3 million to 10 millions acres of green land are (6) in their wake. Wildfires can have different effects l on the environment depending on their size and frequency.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

A.wildfire A.spread A.wet A.the hottest A.At A.destroyed

B. fire B.to spread B. dry B.hotter B. On B.destroying

C.heat wave C.spreading C.sunny C.hottest C. In C.destructive

XV. Text 1 Hurricanes A hurricane is a huge storm that forms over warm ocean water. Bands of thunderstorms form and swirl around and around because the rotation of the earth. As more and more thunderstorms form, the hurricane gets bigger and bigger. A hurricane is one of the world's worst storms because it can last for days or weeks. Hurricanes can also be very large. They may cover hundreds of miles and affect large areas of land. For a storm to be classified as a hurricane, wind speeds within the storm have to reach at least 74 per hour. But hurricane winds can reach speeds of over 155 miles per hour! A large amount of destruction may occur with winds that strong. Roofs may be torn off homes. Buildings may be flattened. Trees topple over. Hurricanes are deadly, but not just because of their winds. They can also produce very heavy rains and huge waves that slam into the coastline. Hurricanes are very common along the east coast of the United States. Here, wind, waves, and rain do the most damage. Luckily, meteorologists (people who study weather) can forecast hurricanes days in advance by using radar technology. Radar is a little bit like a moving picture. It shows how big storms are and which way they are moving. Radar images people time to prepare for a coming storm. If the storm is very strong, home and business owners will put up plywood to protect their glass windows and doors. People who live along the 61

coast will evacuate. They'll go to a hurricane shelter or stay with friends and relatives who live in safer places farther inland. Many lives are saved every year by people who take the necessary precautions. Questions: 1. What is a hurricane? A.a tidal wave B.a huge storm C.a thunderstorm D.a tsunami 2. What makes a hurricane? A.thunderstorms B.strong winds C.seawater D.the earth rotation 3. What of the following is not correct? A.A hurricane is very dangerous because it lasts for days and weeks. B.The hurricane wind speeds per hour can be nearly twice as fast as the wind speeds. C.A hurricane can reach speeds of at least 74 km per hour. D.Hurricanes often appear along the east coast of the United States. 4. Who is meteorologist? A. People study weather. B. People do businesses in the meteorological field. C. People live along the coast. D. People are evacuated from the regions affected by hurricanes. 5. What is radar used for? A. making moving pictures B. showing the size of hurricanes and their movements C. giving people time to prepare for a coming storm D. All above XVI. Read the text. Then answer the questions. The first people who gave names to hurricanes were those who knew them the people in Puerto Rico. The small island of Puerto is in the west India, off the coast of Florida. This is where all the hurricanes begin that strike the east of the United States. The people of Puerto Rico expect some of these unwelcome visitors every year. Each one is named after the Saint's Day on which it arrives. Two of most serious storms were the San Carioca in 1899 and the Santa Aha in 1925. Giving girl's names to hurricanes is a fairly new idea. It all began with the story called "storm" written by George Steward in 1941. In it weatherman enjoyed himself by naming storms after girls he knew. He named one Maria. The story described how Maria grew and developed, and how she changed the lives of people when she struck the United States. Weathermen of the U.S Army and Navy used the system during World War II. One of their duties was to warn American ships and planes when a storm was coming. Whenever they stopped one, they gave it a girl's name. The first one was given a nature beginning with A. The second, one got a name beginning with B. They used all the letters from A to W. This was the first of hurricane names that followed the alphabet.

Questions: 1. Who is the first to give names to hurricanes? ____________________________________________________________________________ 2. Where do all the hurricanes begin that strike the east of the United States? ____________________________________________________________________________ 3. Why is a hurricane named after the Saint's Day? ____________________________________________________________________________ 4. Who began the idea of giving girls' name to hurricanes? ____________________________________________________________________________ 5. What did the story "storm" describe? ____________________________________________________________________________ 62

What was one of the duties of the weathermen? ____________________________________________________________________________ XVII. Change these sentences into passive voice. 1. Vietnam sent some aid to earthquake Japanese victims in 2014. _____________________________________________________________________________ 2. Heinrich Hertz discovered radio waves. _____________________________________________________________________________ 3. People prepared enough food and wafer for a disaster. _____________________________________________________________________________ 4. A tornado hit many houses and buildings. _____________________________________________________________________________ 5. We had bought some raincoats before we heard the weather forecast. _____________________________________________________________________________ 6. My father is going to repair our windows tomorrow. _____________________________________________________________________________ 7. The earthquake damaged almost my entire house. _____________________________________________________________________________ 8. We should plant more trees to prevent some natural disasters. _____________________________________________________________________________ 9. My e-pal had told me a story about a tsunami occurring in his country. _____________________________________________________________________________ 10. A mechanic is going to service my car tomorrow because yesterday's storm damaged it severely. _____________________________________________________________________________ XVIII. Complete the table below. Think of a natural disaster and make a list of preparation for the disaster. Name of a natural disaster Preparation …………………………………………. Before ……………………………………….. - ……………………………………………… - ……………………………………………… - ……………………………………………… During ……………………………………..... - ……………………………………………… - ……………………………………………… - ……………………………………………… After ………………………………………… - ……………………………………………… - ……………………………………………… - ………………………………………………

XIX. Use the information from the table in Ex 2 and write about how to prepare when a natural disaster happens. (80-100 words) Your writing: ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ 63

________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ TEST 1FOR UNIT 7,8,9 I.Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others. 1. A.emergency B.astrology C.scientific D.environment 2. A.survivor B.property C.resident D.government 3. A.historic B. iconic C.spectacle D.attraction 4. A.official B.together C.koala D.popular B.pollutant C.artistic D.aquatic 5. A.poisonous II.Fill in each blank with the correct word from the box. landscapes

while

but

area

capital

variety

development

popular

mountainous

diverse

1. Cardiff is the largest city and also the of Wales 2. The most sport in Canada is ice hockey. 3. The capital city of New Zealand is Wellington the largest city is Auckland. 4. The Scottish Highlands are a region of Scotland. 5. A of wildlife can be found in Scotland, including seals, mountain hare and the golden eagle. 6. Rugby is the most popular spectator sport in New Zealand football, cricket, netball, golf are popular among participants. 7. Australia is the world's sixth largest country by while Canada is the second. 8. Australia has a range of different , including urban areas, mountain ranges, deserts and rain forests. 9. The United States is a country with a multicultural society. 10. The US was the leading force behind the of the Internet. III. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets. 1. Would you go to his party if he (invite) you? 2. I (can/help) you translate this text into French if we had a dictionary. 3. We (email) her if we had her address. 4. If I (know) the answer, I wouldn't need to ask. 5. I'd probably buy a laptop if it (be) cheaper. 6. Where would you live if you (have) the choice? 7. If you (have) 20 brothers and sisters, think how many birthday presents you (get) 8. If everyone (speak) the same language, do you think life (be) better? 9. I'm sorry, I don't know. IfI(know) the answer, I (tell) you. 10. I don't know what I (do) if you (not be) here to help me. IV. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. Water Pollution in India Contamination of water from any external source that makes it (1) to life is known as water pollution. (2) the fast industrial development and modem civilization, the problem of water pollution is (3) day by day. The (4) sources of water pollution are domestic wastes, agricultural wastes, sewage disposal, industrial wastes, radioactive wastes and oil leakages.

All the Indian rivers. including the holy river Ganga, have become highly polluted today. However, the Ganga Action Plan to control its water from pollution has not been proved (5) . The (6) of water pollution is widespread. It causes many severe waterborne diseases. According to WHO, 21 per cent of all (7) diseases in India are water-borne diseases. Oil is the main pollutant of the sea water. Huge tankers often dump oil into the sea. This act of dumping (8) kills sea plants and animals. 1. A. harm B. harmful C. harmless D. unharmed 2.A. At B. Of C. In D. With 3. A. increase B. increasing C. increased D. to increase 4. A. most B. more C. major D. hard 5. A.success B. successful C. unsuccessful D. succeeded 6. A. effect B. effects C. affect D. affects 7. A. communicate B. communicative C. communicable D. communication 8. A. poisons B.poisonous C. poisoning D. poisoned V. Fill in each blank in the following passage with ONE suitable word. first children English use main native increasing speak In the first years of the 20th century, English medium education became popular for all groups in Singapore. By the 1950s nearly all children went to school, and the majority were educated in (1) . Since Singapore became an independent Republic in 1965, the (2) of English has increased still further. For many Singaporeans, English is the (3) language. Many families (4) English at home and it is one of the (5) languages learnt by about haft of the current pre-school (6) . Over half of the population born since 1965 is (7) speakers of English, and the proportion of this group is still (8) . VI. Read the text, and do the tasks that follow. Earthquakes Earthquakes are among the deadliest natural disasters, causing the largest numbers ofcasualties, the highest death tolls, and the greatest destruction. In 1556 in China, the deadliest earthquakes in history killed 830,000 people. But many other earthquakes have caused the deaths of more than 100,000 people, and it is not unusual, even in modern times, for an earthquake death toll to reach 20,000 to 30,000 people with hundreds of thousands left homeless and with countless injured. The floodwaters of the 2004 tsunami in Sumatra, which killed over 200,000 people, were caused by a catastrophic earthquake. Task 2: Decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). T F 1. Earthquakes are one of the deadliest natural disasters. 2. In modern times, the number of deaths caused by an earthquake is limited. 3. China is the country with the deadliest earthquake in history. 4. Earthquakes cause lots of death toll, homelessness and injuries. 5. . Earthquakes do not cause tsunamis at all. VII. Read the passage carefully, and then answer the questions below. Super Typhoon Haiyan Super Typhoon Haiyan is one of the strongest tropical cyclones ever observed. It ripped through the Philippines, and the destruction across the islands was disastrous and widespread. Houses and buildings were leveled by the storm's powerful winds. Trees fell down and neighborhoods were under flood water. One CNN reporter, upon seeing the hard-hit city of Tacloban, said: â&#x20AC;&#x153;It is like a tsunami has hit here." About 9.5 million people have been affected by the typhoon Haiyan weakened to a tropical storm, but at least five people died in Vietnam when Haiyan hit the country. Recovery from the monster typhoon, locally known as Yolanda, would be long and difficult. 65

What is super Typhoon Haiyan considered?

What is another name for Typhoon Haiyan?

How was the destruction in the Philippines caused by Typhoon Haiyan?

How many people have been affected by Typhoon Haiyan?

How many people in Viet Nam died when the typhoon hit the country?

How was the recovery from the typhoon?

TEST 2 FOR UNIT 7,8,9 I. Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others. 1. A.hurricane B.tornado C.volcano D.eruption 2. A.terrific B.arabic C.statistic D.cosmetic B.guarantee C.Japanese D.jubilee 3. A.referee 4. A.classical B.electronic C.logical D.politic 5. A.nationality B.mobility C.equality D.majority II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D for each sentence. 1. We from different kinds of pollution: water air, soil and noise. A.is suffering B.suffer C.are suffering D.had suffered 2. The babies when Alice came. A.has slept B.have slept C.is sleeping D.were sleeping 3. America Thanksgiving Day on the fourth Thursday of November since 1864. A.celebrates B.has celebrated C.is celebrating D.celebrated 4. The fish died massively because the water is . A.damaged B.hotter C.contaminated D.poison 5. A natural disaster can cause loss of life or damage. A.property B.house C.home D.money 6. are severe winter storms characterized by heavy snow and strong winds. A.Droughts B.Blizzards C. Hailstorms D.Volcanic eruptions 7. The can be controlled by the stoppage of leakage from the radioactive materials including the nuclear reactors, industries and laboratories. A.light pollution B.visual pollution C.air pollution D.radioactive pollution 8. English is of Australia and Singapore. A.native language B.both A and C C.official language D.second language 9. Australia has the biggest in the world. A.natural beauty B.puzzling games C.cattle station D.tallest building 10. could possibly be avoided by better construction, safety systems, early warning and planning. A.Earthquakes B.mudslide C.droughts D.forest fire III. Complete the sentence with correct form of the verb. 1. We (save) thousands of trees if we (not waste) paper. 2. The storm destroyed the sandcastle that we (build) . 3. Thousands of house (damage) by the storm last night. 4. Jim crashed into another car because he (not/ realise) the red traffic light. 5. If we (have) a yacht, we would sail the seven seas. 66

If I lived on a lonely island, I (run)

around naked all day.

IV. Read the text then answer the questions below. ALES

Men will also shake hands with other men there. In some Eastern countries, including Korea and Japan, bowing is the traditional greeting. In Japan, the deeper the bow, the deeper the respect shown. The strangest custom, though, is likely in Tibet. People there opt to stick out their tongue to greet others. 1.

Language Wales is a country with two languages: Welsh and English. Welsh is spoken by around 20% of the population. Although the north west the highest ratio of Welsh to English speakers, a greater number of Welsh speakers live in the more populous south. Most areas are far from completely Anglicised, and the language is strong across Wales. There are several dialects of Welsh, most audibly north and south. The road signs are bilingual, giving both the Welsh and English versions of the text and place names. The Welsh language continues to flourish within Wales thanks to Welsh - medium education, a lively media industry and the enthusiasm of people living i in Wales. The rights of the language have also been helped by bilingual and language policies made law by the Government. Symbols The daffodil and the leek are national flowers of Wales. One species of daffodil is found only in a small area around Tenby. According to legend, Saint David ordered his Welsh soldiers to identify themselves by wearing leeks on their helmets in an ancient battle against the Saxons that took place in a leek field. This may be a myth, but the vegetable certainly has enjoyed a lengthy association with the country. In Henry V, Shakespeare refers to wearing one as an "ancient tradition", and in the same play Henry tells Fluellen he is wearing a leek, "for I am Welsh, you know, good countryman”. New words Anglicise (v): Anh hóa Dialect (n): tiếng địa phương, thổ ngữ Audibly (adv): rõ ràng Bilingual (adj): thông thạo 2 thứ tiếng 1. How many languages are spoken in Wales? What are they? ____________________________________________________________________________ 2. Which areas in Wales have the highest ratio of Welsh to English speak? ____________________________________________________________________________ 3. What language is used in the road signs? ____________________________________________________________________________ 4. What are national flowers of Wales? ____________________________________________________________________________ 5. Why leek is the symbol of Wales? ____________________________________________________________________________ V. Read the text and choose the correct answers. In the United States and Canada, for example, a simple handshake or nod is the norm. The handshake has an interesting origin: it started long ago as a way of showing people that you weren't carrying a weapon. Shaking the person’s right hand while looking him or her in the eye is the usual method. Handshakes are also common in other parts of the world, including Britain and Russia. In Russia, males grasp other men’s hands very strongly during the handshake. Handshakes are also how most people in New Zealand greet each other. However, the native Maori people of that country display more physical contact: they press their noes together in a sign of trust and closeness. In other countries, such as France and Belgium, hugging and kissing are more common when two people meet. In those cultures, people kiss each other on the cheeks. The number of times varies depending on the particular country. In Saudi Arabia, men might hug and kiss each other (but not a woman) on the cheek. 67

4. 5.

What is this reading mainly about? A. The importance of handshakes all around the world. B. The origins and histories of various greetings. C. The strangest types of greetings on Earth. D. The wide range of greeting customs in the world. Which of the following is true? A. People in Russia, but not England, shake hands. B. The number of times people kiss on the cheek varies. C. In the past, people nodded if they weren't carrying a weapon. D. You shouldn't look at people when shaking their hands in the United States. How do most people in New Zealand greet each other? A. With a handshake. B. By pressing noses together C. With a kiss on the cheek. D. By sticking out their tongues. Which country is NOT mentioned in the reading? A. America. B. New Zealand C. France D. Malaysia What can be inferred about greeting customs in Saudi Arabia? A. Men shake hands with women when meeting them for the first time. B. It's not proper for men to kiss women when they meet. C. Women do not kiss other women when they meet. D. Women can kiss men, but men can't kiss women when they meet.

VI. Reorder the words to make meaningful sentence. 1. the/ temperature/ is/ one/ degree/ today/ higher/ yesterday/ than/. ____________________________________________________________________________ 2. English/ an/ in/ official/ is/ language/ Singapore/. ____________________________________________________________________________ 3. The USA,/ the/ Kingdom/ and/ United/ New Zealand/ are/ English/ all/ countries/ speaking/. ____________________________________________________________________________ 4. What/ you/ do/ about/ like/ Scotland? ____________________________________________________________________________ 5. Aquatic/ may/ also/ plants/ die/ of/ the/ polluted/ because/ water/. ____________________________________________________________________________ VII. Rewrite the sentences using the word given in brackets 1. I can't understand him because he speaks so quickly. (if) ____________________________________________________________________________ 2. Smoke from mills, factories and industry can cause health problems like asthma and lung diseases. (lead) ____________________________________________________________________________ 3. We don't trust Lan because she behaves badly. (because of) ____________________________________________________________________________ 4. Although he took a taxi, he still arrived late for school. (in spite of) ____________________________________________________________________________ UNIT 10 COMMUNICATION (GIAO TIẾP) A- VOCABULARY 1. body language (n) /ˈbɒdi ˈlæŋɡwɪdʒ/: ngôn ngữ cơ thể, cử chỉ 2. communicate (v) /kəˈmjuːnɪkeɪt/: giao tiếp 68

3. communication breakdown (n) /kəˌmjuːnɪˈkeɪʃn ˈbreɪkdaʊn/: giao tiếp không thành công, không hiểu nhau, ngưng trệ giao tiếp 4. communication channel (n) /kəˌmjuːnɪˈkeɪʃn ˈtʃænl/: kênh giao tiếp 5. cultural difference (n) /ˈkʌltʃərəl ˈdɪfrəns/: khác biệt văn hoá 6. cyber world (n) /ˈsaɪbə wɜːld/: thế giới ảo, thế giới mạng 7. chat room (n) /tʃæt ruːm/: phòng chat (trên mạng) 8. face-to-face (adj, ad) /feɪs tʊ feɪs/: trực diện (trái nghĩa với trên mạng) 9. interact (v) /ˌɪntərˈækt/: tương tác 10. landline phone (n) /ˈlændlaɪn fəʊn/ điện thoại bàn 11. language barrier (n) /ˈlæŋɡwɪdʒ ˈbæriə/: rào cản ngôn ngữ 12. message board (n) /ˈmesɪdʒ bɔːd/: diễn đàn trên mạng 13. multimedia (n) /ˌmʌltiˈmiːdiə/: đa phương tiện 14. netiquette (n) /ˈnetɪket/: phép lịch sự khi giao tiếp trên mạng 15. non-verbal language (n) /nɒn-vɜːbl ˈlæŋɡwɪdʒ/: ngôn ngữ không dùng lời nó 16. smart phone (n) /smɑːt fəʊn/: điện thoại thông minh 17. snail mail (n) /sneɪl meɪl/: thư gửi qua đường bưu điện, thư chậm 18. social media (n) /ˈsəʊʃl ˈmiːdiə: mạng xã hội 19. telepathy (n) /təˈlepəθi/: thần giao cách cảm 20. text (n, v) /tekst/: văn bản, tin nhắn văn bản 21. verbal language (n) /ˈvɜːbl ˈlæŋɡwɪdʒ/: ngôn ngữ dùng lời nói 22. video conference (n, v) /ˈvɪdiəʊ ˈkɒnfərəns/: hội thảo, hội họp qua mạng có hình ảnh B GRAMMAR I-ÔN TẬP THÌ TƯƠNG LAI TIẾP DIỄN (FUTURE CONTINUOUS) 1. Cách dùng Cách dùng Ví dụ Diễn tả hành động sẽ đang diễn ra tại một thời Tonight at 11pm, we will be dancing at the party. điểm cụ thể trong tương lai. (Tối nay lúc 11 giờ, chúng tôi sẽ đang nhảy múa tại bữa tiệc.) Để hoạch định cho những việc được trông thấy You’ll recognize me when you get there. I’ll be wearing đang xảy ra trong tương lai. jeans and a white T-shirt. I’ll besitting at a table at the corner and reading a newspaper. Hành động có dự định trước trong tương lai He will be leaving in a few days. gần. Will you be going away this summer? 2. Dạng thức của thì tương lai tiếp diễn Thể khẳng định Thể phủ định I I He/She/It/Danh từ số ít/ He/She/It/Danh từ số ít/ will be + V-ing will not/won’t be + Danh từ không đếm được Danh từ không đếm được You/We/They/Danh từ số You/We/They/Danh từ số V-ing nhiều nhiều Ví dụ: Ví dụ: At this time tomorrow, he will be doing his At 9pm tomorrow, they won’t be cleaning thei house. homework. (Giờ này ngày mai, anh ấy sẽ đang làm (Lúc 9 giờ tối mai, họ sẽ không đang lau dọn nhà bài tập về nhà.) đâu.) At this time next week, I will be going to France. At this time next month, she won’t be working for (Giờ này tuần sau, tôi sẽ đang đi Pháp) this company. (Giờ này tháng sau, cô ấy sẽ không đang làm việc cho công ty này nữa.)

Will

Thể nghi vấn I He/She/It/Danh từ số ít/ Danh từ không đếm được You/We/They/Danh từ số nhiều

Yes, be + V-ing No,

Câu trả lời ngắn I He/She/It/Danh từ số ít/ Danh từ không đếm được You/We/They/Danh từ số nhiều

will. won’t

Ví dụ: * Will she be singing at this time tomorrow? (Cô ấy sẽ đang hát vào giờ này ngày mai chứ?) Yes, she will./No, she won’t. * Will you be having dinner at 6pm tomorrow? (Bạn sẽ đang ăn tối lúc 6 giờ tối mai à?) Yes, I will./No, I won’t. Dấu hiệu nhận biết Trong câu có các trạng từ chỉ thời gian như: An hour from now (1 tiếng nữa), tonight at … (tối nay lúc…giờ), at this time tomorrow (giờ này ngày mai), at this time next week/month/year (giờ này tuần/tháng/năm sau)… BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài 1: Viết các câu dưới đây theo cấu trúc thì Tương lai tiếp diễn. 1. I’m going to watch television from 9 until 10 o’clock this evening. So at 9.30 I ___________________________________________________ 2. Tomorrow afternoon I’m going to play tennis from 3 o’clock until 4.30. So at 4 o’clock tomorrow I _______________________________________ 3. Jim is going to study from 7 o’clock until 10 o’clock this evening. So at 8.30 this evening he ________________________________________ 4. We are going to clean the flat tomorrow. It will take from 9 until 11 o’clock. So at 10 o’clock tomorrow morning _________________________________ 5. Tom is a football fan and there is a football match on television this evening. The match begins at 7.30 and ends at 9.15. So at 8.30 this evening __________________________________________ 6. Don’t phone me between 7 and 8 ________________(we/have) dinner. 7. A: Can we meet tomorrow afternoon? B: Not in the afternoon______________________________( I/work). 8. Do you think _________________________________(you/still/do) the same job in ten years’ time? 9. If you need to contact me, ____________________________(I/stay) at the Hilton Hotel until Friday. 10. _____________________________(I/meet) Laura at 9 tomorrow. Bài 2: Đặt câu hỏi dưới đây theo cấu trúc thì Tương lai tiếp diễn. 1. You want to borrow your friend’s bicycle this evening. (you/ use/ your bicycle this evening?) _____________________________________________________________ 2. You want your friend to give Tom a message this afternoon. (you/ see/ Tom this afternoon?) _____________________________________________________________ 3. You want to use your friend’s typewriter tomorrow evening. (you/ use/ your typewriter tomorrow evening?) _____________________________________________________________ 4. Your friend is going shopping. You want him/her to buy some stampsfor you at the post office. (you/ pass/ the post office when you’re in town?) _____________________________________________________________ Bài 3: Dùng cấu trúc thì tương lai tiếp diễn, hoàn thành những câu sau. 1. This time next week Helen_____________(travel) to Brazil with her husband. 2. My aunt _____________(open) her new restaurant in town. 70

3. They _________________(swim) in the sea before the end of the month. 4. _________________your friend ______________(wait) for you at the airport? 5. My grandmother_________________(have) an operation very soon. 6. Jackeline_____________(interview) the candidates for the post. 7. I know you won’t be asleep at 12.00. You______________(play) computer games. 8. Next Saturday night Sonia ______________(have) dinner with some friends. 9. The mechanic_________________(repair) my car in the garage. 10. Joana ______________(live) in Greece happily with her family. 11. My mom_______________(decorate) our new flat. 12. The tennis player _____________(compete) for the World Cup. 13. The police______________(investigate) the kipnapping of the kid. 14. We__________________(celebrate) Christmas in a month’s time. 15. Why_____________you____________(write) these novels in a short period of time? 16. By half past seven your father__________________(arrive) in Berlin. 17. I ______________(not wash) all my summer clothes by ten o’clock. 18. You__________________(answer) all my questions for the survey. 19. My grandparents ____________________(spend) next month in Spain. 20. The gardener_______________(cut) the old trees in aweek. 21. Barbara____________________(do) the shopping in two hours. 22. Your teacher__________________(correct) the final exams right now. 23. The woman ___________________(talk) with her friend on the phone. 24. My alarm clock_______________(ring) tomorrow morning at 7.15. II- VERBS + TO-INFINITIVES -Nếu muốn theo sau một động từ là một hành động khác, ta phải dùng danh động từ (V-ing) hoặc động từ nguyên thể có “to” (to V). -Một số động từ thường được theo sau bởi động từ nguyên thể có TO: want (muốn) try (cố gắng) need (cần) plan (dự định) hope (hi vọng) promise (hứa) decide (quyết định) expect (mongmỏi) learn (học) choose (chọn) forget (quên) refuse (từchối) agree (đồng ý) seem (dườngnhư) deserve (xứngđáng) help (giúp đỡ) manage (xoaysởđược) afford (cóđủkhảnăng) appear (tỏ ra) arrange (thuxếp) pretend (giả vờ) fail (thất bại) hesitate (lưỡnglự) prepare (chuẩnbị) Ví dụ: - What do you want to do this evening? (Tối nay bạn muốn làm gì?) - Mai has decided to sell her car. (Mai đã quyết định bán xe hơi của cô ấy.) - I can’t affordto buy it. (Tôi không đủ khả năng để mua nó.) - They agreed to help us. (Họ đồng ý giúp đỡ chúng tôi.) - She appeared to be tired. (Cô ấy xem ra trông mệt mỏi.) - We arranged tomeet atten. (Chúng tôi thu xếp gặp nhau lúc 10 giờ.) * LƯU Ý - Một vài động từ như love, hate, prefer có thể theo sau bởi cả V-ing và to V mà không có sự thay đổi về nghĩa. BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài 4: Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc, gerund (V-ing) hoặc to-infinitive (to V) 1. Jim loves__________________in Thailand. (to work) 2. I hate __________________the shopping on Saturday. (to do) 3. Blast! I forgot ________________milk. (to buy) 4. In the end we decided_______________in. (to stay) 5. I need __________________some information about Portugal. (to find)

6. My parents like________________ for long walks at the weekend. (to go) 7. Tony gave up______________years ago. (to smoke) 8. I wanted__________________and see Troy but no one else was interested. (to go) 9. Mrs. Leith offered________________us to the airport. (to take) 10. Clare refused______________clean up after the party. (to help) 11. I tried_______________him to come but it was no use. (to persuade) 12. Do you mind not_______________? (to smoke) 13. Everybody really enjoys ______________the cha-cha-cha. (to dance) 14. Lionel admitted_____________my chocolate mousse. (to eat) 15. We arranged_______________under the station clock at half nine. (to meet) 16. The firemen managed_________________the fire pretty quickly. (to put out) 17. I always try to avoid _______________him whenever I can. (to see) 18. My brother denied______________my chocolate mousse. Maybe his hamster ate it. (to eat) Bài 5: Dựa vào đáp án của Bài 4, đặt động từ in đậm vào cáccột bên trái sao cho thích hợp. Sau đó dịch nghĩa của động từ sang tiếng Việt. VERB + GERUND VERB + TO + INFINITIVE Translation Translation 1. _____________ ………………… 1. _____________ ………………… 2. _____________ ………………… 2. _____________ ………………… 3. _____________ ………………… 3. _____________ ………………… 4. _____________ ………………… 4. _____________ ………………… 5. _____________ ………………… 5. _____________ ………………… 6. _____________ ………………… 6. _____________ ………………… 7. _____________ ………………… 7. _____________ ………………… 8. _____________ ………………… 8. _____________ ………………… 9. _____________ ………………… 9. _____________ ………………… Bài 6: Đọc đoạn văn dưới đây. Hoàn thành các câu bằng cách cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc ở dạng V-ing hoặc to V. Minutes of the English Club Meeting End of term gathering Eric said that we should begin (1)______________(plan) the End of Term Gathering of the English Club as he had promised (2)______________________(give) the details to Mrs. Clean by next week. Mark suggested (3)_______________(book) a room at the Golden Dragon Restaurant. However, Susan felt that most members could’t afford (4)______________(pay) for an expensive dinner. Ellen offered (5)________________(let) us use her parens’home in Kowloon Tong on Saturday afternoon. She said that she liked (6)________________(have) big parties and she didn’t mind (7)_________________(organize) it by herself. However, Donald hated (8)_______________ (make) one person do all the work. He wanted (9)________________ (get)more members involved. Simon considered (10)_______________(hold) the gathering at the Beachside Café in Sai Kung. He thought most members would enjoy (11)_______________(go) to Sai Kung. Maggie said a lot of members would hesitate (12)_______________(travel) all the way to Sai Kung because of the distance. The members continue (13)________________(discuss) the suggestions for time but no decision was reached. BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO Bài 7: Dựa vào các từ cho sẳn, viết câu ở thì Tương lai tiếp diễn. 1. (I/not travel/next week) ____________________________________________ 2. (Sam/study/at two o’clock) __________________________________________ 3. (you/work/tonight) ________________________________________________ 4. A: (she/study) ______________________________? B: No,she_____________ 5. (they/not drive/tomorrow) __________________________________________ 6. A: (you/sleep?) ______________________________B: Yes, I _____________

7. we/watch/TV/tonight) ______________________________________________ 8. (Mr.Smith/fly to Italy/soon) _________________________________________ 9. (the sun/set/at seven o’clock) _________________________________________ 10. A: (we/eat/soon?) ______________________________B: Yes, we __________ 11. (where/you/stay?) _______________________________________________ 12. (I/do/my homework/tonight) _______________________________________ 13. (how/they/get to work?) ___________________________________________ 14. A: (she/play?) ______________________________B: No, she ____________ 15. (I/get a haircut/this afternoon) _______________________________________ Bài 8: Khoanh tròn vào phương án đúng. 1. We don’t want coming/to come last in the league. 2. It’s best to avoid eating/to eat too much sugar. 3. You have to practice to kick/kicking the ball. 4. You might choose not coming/to come. 5. She’s learning to play/playing the guitar. 6. He refused to listen/listening to them. 7. We agreed being/to be there at six. 8. I can’t imagine not living/to live in Spain. 9. They expect being/to be about half an hour late. 10. It seems to be/being working well. 11. You promised to come/coming to the match. 12. They’ve decided to cooperate/ coorperating with us. 13. He denies planning/to plan the robbery. 14. They deserve being/to be proud. 15. When will you finish to cook/cooking? 16. Can you help me to write/writing this essay? 17. They admitted to steal/stealing the car. 18. I’ll consider giving/to give up next year. 19. Eveyone enjoys relaxing/to relax on the beach. 20. I hope to stay/staying for at least a week. 21. We like swimming/to swim in the sea. 22. They prefer to dance/dancing to singing. 23. I think I’ll manage to do/doing it by myself. 24. I’ll try to finish/finishing this before Monday. C.EXERCISES TEST 1 UNIT 10 I. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others. B. scatter C. package D. math 1. A. metal 2. A. smell B. press C. melt D. refill 3. A. those B. clothes C. shopping D. envelope B. throw C. nowadays D. how 4. A. down 5. A. plants B. fields C. trees D. newspapers II. Choose the words that have the different stress from the others. 1. A. polite B. penfriend C. shorthand D. breakdown 2. A. multimedia B. possibility C. telepathy D. interactive 3. A. battery B. conference C. oversleep D. barrier 4. A. landline B. touchscreen C. cyber D. replace 5. A. visible B. discussion C. digital D. separate III. Choose the word or phrase that best completes each unfinished sentence below. 73

1. Every few weeks new satellites into orbit. A. are put B. is put C. are putted D. is putted 2. You ought to give up smoking because it is harmful to your health. A. should B. could C. may D. am going to 3. Try to the amount of fat in your diet. A. reuse B. refill C. reduce D. recycle to park in the center of Newtown. 4. It is A. impossible B. impossibility C. impossibilities D. impossibly 5. I am delighted you passed your exam. A. that B. to C. in order to D. so that a brief discussion of the problems. 6. We will begin A. from B. with C. at D. on 7. Tree leaves to wrap things. A. should used B. should been used C. should be used D. should be use 8. is a wonderful natural fertilizer. A. Compost B. Plastic C. Envelope D. Garbage 9. Glass is broken up, melted and made into new . A. silverware B. hardware C. ironware D. glassware every day? 10. Is the rubbish A. collect B. collecting C. collected D. be collected 11. In 1876, the telephone first introduced by Bell and Watson. A. was B. is C. has been D. had been 12. It’s important wildlife in the area. A. to conserve B. conserving C. conservation D. conserve 13. Japan 40% of its waste every year. A. reuses B. recycles C. refill D. broken your letter yesterday. 14. We were delighted A. to get B. got C. getting D. get 15. Sooner or later a satellite by a large piece of rubbish. A. will destroy B. will destroyed C. will be destroyed D. will been destroyed 16. Let’s play tennis instead of television. A. watch B. watching C. watches D. to watch 17. Everything depends on what you mean the word “free”. A. about B. for C. of D. by 18. We should use bags instead of plastic bags. A. cloth B. clothe C. clothed D. clothing for breakfast in England years ago. 19. Beer A. used be drunk B. used to be drunk C. used to drunk D. used to be drank 20. I some rice on the floor of the chicken coop. A. raised B. grew C. threw away D. scattered IV. Complete the sentences, using the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. Helen cannot talk to John because his nickname is . (visible) 2. High- speed Internet provides me with videos. (interact) 3. With telegraphy, the information will be sent . (immediate) 4. She used signs to tell me that we were late. (direct) 5. Paul and missed some phone calls yesterday morning. (sleep) 6. The secretary put Thomas through the manager’s landline . (instant) 7. The mute usually communicate with each other. (non- verbal) 74

8. I think Janet is not because of her unfriendliness. (communicate) V. Read the passage and complete the sentences. One of the main sources for the spreading of news and events through out the world is the newspaper. The purpose of newspaper is to inform the public of political, social, economic and entertainment happenings, among other things. Generally, there are three types of newspapers. Daily newspapers publish at least one edition every weekday. Most dailies also have a weekend edition. Daily newspapers often have sections for news, sports, arts, and entertainment, business, and classified advertising. Weekly newspapers print once a week and cover news of interest to readers in a smaller area than that of a daily paper. They focus on local happenings rather than national or international events. Special-interest newspapers may publish daily, weekly, monthly, or even less frequently. They generally disseminate news of interest to a particular group of readers of feature news about a specific topic. Thanks to the development of Internet, we can now get access to electronic newspapers. To some extent, e-newspapers are cheap, up-to-date, and convenient for most readers in the world. 1. The purpose of newspapers is to .................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................................... 2. There are three types of newspaper. They are ............................................................................ ..................................................................................................................................................... 3. Daily newspapers often have sections for .................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................................... 4. Weekly newspapers focus on ...................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................... 5. Special-interest newspapers cover news of interest to ............................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................... 6. Electronic newspapers are .......................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................... VI. Read the passage and answer the questions. THE POSTAGE STAMP Before the invention of the postage stamp, it was difficult to send a letter to another country. The sender paid for the letter to travel in his or her own country. Then the person in the other country paid for that part of the trip. If a letter crossed several countries, the problem was worse. Rowland Hill, a British teacher, had the idea of the postage stamp with gum on the back. The British post office made the first stamps in 1840. They were the Penny Black and the Twopence Blue. A person bought a stamp and put it on a letter, the post office delivered the letter. When people received letters, they didn’t have to pay anything. The letters was prepaid. Postage stamps became popular in Great Britain immediately. Other countries started making their own postage stamps very quickly. There were still problems with international mail. Some countries did not want accept letter with stamps from another countries. Finally, in 1874, a German organized the Universal Postal System. Each country in the UPS agreed to accept letter with prepaid postage from the other members. Today the offices of the U PS are in Switzerland. Almost every country in the world is a member of this organization. It takes care of any international mail problems. Today post offices in every country sell beautiful stamps. Collecting stamps is one of the most popular hobbies in the world, and every stamp collector knows about the Penny Black and the Twopence Blue. Questions 1. Why was it difficult to send a letter to another country before the invention of the postage stamp? ..................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................... 2. Why were the postage stamps popular? ..................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................... 75

3. How did other countries react with the postage stamps? ..................................................................................................................................................... 4. What does the Universal Postal System do today? ..................................................................................................................................................... 5. Why do stamp collectors know about the Penny Black? ..................................................................................................................................................... VII. Choose the word (A, B, C, or D) that best fits each of the blank spaces. Dear Sir or Madam, We are in Class B, Year 8 at Stonehouse School. Every year our class goes (1) an adventure holiday. This year we would like (2) your center. We are planning (3) away for the first week in May, arriving on Friday 2 May. There will be 15 boys and 15 girls in our party, in sailing, rock climbing, canoeing, and map-reading. Can you send us and two teachers. We are (4) information about your center? We look forward (5) from you. Yours faithfully, Class B 1. A. in B. at C. aver D. on 2. A. attend B. attending C. to attend D. to attending 3. A. go B. to go C. going D. to going 4. A. interested B. interesting C. bored D. boring 5. A. hear B. to hear C. hearing D. to hearing VIII. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. TELEPATHY: MIND TO MIND COMMUNICATION “telepathy” has been derived from the words “tele” meaning “distance” and “pathy” The (1) meaning “feeling”. So telepathy actually means (2) feelings through a distance. Telepathy is the two minds, (4) over a distance, without the (5) of communication (3) the five known senses. At some point of time or the other, we all have (6) telepathy. Maybe you were thinking of someone you haven’t talked to for months and you suddenly get a call from them. Or (7) two people are together, they might say the same thing at the same time. These are spontaneous mind-tomind (8) that tend to occur frequently between closely related individuals. 1. A. word B. phrase C. letter D. signal 2. A. holding B. getting C. bringing D. carrying 3 A. through B. among C. between D. across 4. A. separate B. be separated C. separating D. separated 5. A. using B. use c. take D. taking 6. A. experienced B. brought C. made D. taken 7. A. where B. during C. when D. since 8. A. ways B. methods C. techniques D. communications IX. Complete each sentence so it means the same as the sentence above. 1. The traffic was bad. However, I arrived on time. Though ........................................................................................ 2. I don’t know many English words I wish .......................................................................................... 3. “Do you have many friends?” She asked me .............................................................................. 4. We don’t have a lot of money, so we don’t buy a lot of new books. If we ............................................................................................ 5. Learning English is not easy. It is .............................................................................................. 76

X.Complete the sentences, using the given words in the brackets. 1. Mr. Brown wants to use solar energy. Mr. Brown does not have enough money to buy necessary equipment. (but) ..................................................................................................................................................... 2. Shakespeare died in 1616. He had written more than 37 plays before then. (by the time) ..................................................................................................................................................... 3. Douglas fell off his bicycle last week. He has had to use crutches to walk. (since) ..................................................................................................................................................... 4. I turned off the lights. After that, I left the room. (before) ..................................................................................................................................................... 5. The frying pan caught on fire. I was making dinner at that time. (while) ..................................................................................................................................................... 6. I won’t return my book to the library. I’ll finish my research project first. (until) ..................................................................................................................................................... XI. Use the words or phrases to complete the letter. Dear Mary, 1. I / have / great time / here in England. ..................................................................................................................................................... 2. I / be / here / three months / my university term / start / two months ago. ..................................................................................................................................................... 3. I / live / dormitory / some foreign students. ..................................................................................................................................................... 4. They / come / different parts / the world. ..................................................................................................................................................... 5. They / be / very friendly and pleasant, / and / their English / much better / mine. ..................................................................................................................................................... 6. I practice / speak English / them / every day. ..................................................................................................................................................... 7. Now / make /good progress. ..................................................................................................................................................... 8. My pronunciation / much better / and / I / understand / almost everything. ..................................................................................................................................................... 9. I / hope / my English / considerably / improve / the end / course. ..................................................................................................................................................... 10. Write / me / soon. ..................................................................................................................................................... Yours truly, Mai Lan XII. Reorder the words to make the sentences. 1. her/ is/ phone/ choosing/ tone/ for/ ringback/ a/ to/ Lan / set/ song. ................................................................................................................. 2. her/ She/ in/ kept/ order/ watch/ at/ late/ on/ to/ avoid/ being/ glancing. ................................................................................................................. 3. reading/ board/ at/ Nga/ be/ the/ 8.00/ will/ tomorrow/ message/ a.m. ................................................................................................................. 4. ages/ , / hasn’t/ their/ has/ replied/ Peter/ yet/ received/ he/ but/ email/ for/ it. ................................................................................................................. 5. than/ Snail/ is/ much/ it/ mail/ email/ is / slower/ not/ because/ favoured. 77

................................................................................................................. TEST 2 UNIT 10 I.Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others. 1. A.charity B.reality C.quality D.density 2. A.curiosity B.personality C.community D.university B.positive C.primitive D.possessive 3. A.additive 4. A.nationality B.mobility C.. equality D.majority 5. A.transitive B.effective C.positive D.sensitive II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences. 6. A study shows that teenagers use text messaging to communicate with their friends more than . B.to write letters C.emailing D.texting A.to send email 7. The communication services, along with chat rooms, continue to be an important part of children's online interactions. A.online B.offline C.direct D.phone 8. Email are often necessary to join social networking sites, online, and virtual worlds. B.information C.senders D.accounts A.address 9. Email, and chat rooms let children with friends and family members. A.talk B.say C.speak D.communicate 10. Skype is a voice allowing users to talk to others across the world. A.hardware B.software application C.Internet access D.web browser 11. Luckily, there are many communication techniques to help overcome . A.foreign languages B.culture shocks C.language barriers D.sound barriers 12. A non-native speaker most likely can recognise the - the non-verbal communication. A.second language B.official language C.sign language D.body language 13. The facial expressions for happiness, sadness, anger, surprise, fear, and disgust are the same across A.languages B.cultures C.habits D.people 14. Seven of 10 people prefer face-to-face when having a date. A.code B.sign C.language D.contact 15. We should not passwords with anyone. A.share B.send C.bring D.lend III. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences with the correct verb form. 16. I with my aunt when I go to Ha Noi next summer. A.stay B.staying C.stayed D.will be staying 17. "When is your math exam?" - "Well, at this time tomorrow, I for it.” A.will sit B.Will be sitting C.sit D.is sitting 18. You'll recognize Jenny when you see her. She a red hat. A.wears B.is wearing C.will wear D.will be wearing 19. Do you spend a lot of time to music? A.listen B.to listen C.listening D.to be listening 20. How many times have I told you football in the street? A.not to play B.do not play C.not playing D.will not play 21. I don't mind up early in the morning. A.get B.to get C.getting D.to getting 22. It was nice of her to let me her laptop. A.borrow B.to borrow C.borrowing D.to borrowing 23. She is looking forward her grandparents again soon. A.see B.to see C.seeing D.to seeing IV. Complete the sentences with the verbs given in the table. 78

leave

make

post

send

take

1. Just a minute I need to a quick phone call. 2. If I'm not home, you can a message with my dad. 3. You look very funny. Just a minute, I’m going to a photo of you. 4. I'm just going out to an important letter. 5. It's Mai's birthday on Sunday. Don't to forget to her a card. V. Match the verbs in column A with the nouns in column B to make meaningful phrases, and write the answer in each blank. Answer A B 1. express A. eye contact 2. achieve B. a message 3. hold C. your head 4. impress D. a question 5. make E. an opinion 6. nod F. a rule 7. send G. a result 8. ask H. ananswer 9. follow I. a conversation 10. give J. other people VI. Complete the sentences in as many ways as you can, using the phrases in section A. 1. If you need to contact someone urgently, you can _____________________________________ 2. The cheapest way to keep in touch is to ____________________________________________ 3. If you need to find some information quickly, you can _________________________________ . 4. If the person you call doesn't answer, you can _______________________________________ . 5. 100 years ago if people wanted to communicate with each other, they _____________________ . 6. If you want to wish someone happy birthday, you can __________________________________ . 7. If you're on holiday and want to contact your friends, you can ___________________________ . 8. If you go out and you want to leave a message for a member of your family, you can _________ 9. If you want to say thank you for a meal or present, you can ______________________________ . 10. If you're bored and can't think of anything to do, you can ________________________________ . VII. Put the verbs in brackets in the future continuous tense to show what will be happening in the year of 2100. In the year of 2100, … 1. We information with the help of hybrid languages, using visuals rather than letters. (share) 2. We a universal translator to deal with any foreign language. (use) 3. Scientists man-made meat because there will be no land for farming. (develop) 4. Advanced technology people to avoid the feeling of pain. (help) 5. Doctors the Vscan - a simple handheld device to see what is going on inside the patient's body. (use) 6. Scientists the deserts to farming lands. (change) 7. We the scanning technology to create the metal products. (use) 8. Scientists the technology of organs regrowth so that there will not be any disabled people. (develop) 9. Scientists the DNA banks to save endangered species. (use) 10. "Information lens” our eyes to get details of what is seeing. (make) VIII. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets. 1. My mother wants me (post) this letter before afternoon. 2. He prefers (have) chicken soup rather than (drink) milk. 79

3. My mother made my brother (tidy) 4. The teacher told his students (stop) 5. My father doesn't mind (do) cooking. 6. Mai suggested (go)

his room. making noise. the housework, but he hates (do)

the

for a drink

IX. Complete the text with the words/phrases below. cyber-bullying online

homepage posted

keep in touch with view

I’ve stopped going on social networks now because I was suffering from (1) . Somebody was posting aggressive comments on my homepage. I've never (2) a nasty comment on anybody’s (3) , and I don't have any enemies so I think it was a stranger. I don’t like the idea that a stranger can (4) my photos or my personal information. Now, I prefer to (5) my friends by phone. If I want my friends to see photos or videos, I don’t need to post them (6) . I can send them on my phone by using the mobile application - Viber. X. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. E-mail, and chat rooms let children communicate (1) friends and family members. They can also allow children to connect with people that they have never (2) in person. Knowing a little about each of these communication services can help parents (3) children safer while online. Through e-mail, (4) can easily send and receive messages. These messages may also have text, audio, and picture files attached. Signing up for an e-mail account is simple (5) most services offer them for free. Sometimes these messages contain viruses, or her inappropriate content, so parents should warn children to be wary of e-mails from (6) people. Chat rooms are online hang-out spots where anyone can talk about (7) - current events, books, and other common interests. Users often do not know each other in real life, so it is important that parents keep a close eye on the content of any (8) . 1. A. to B. with C.for D.through 2. A. met B. gone C.asked D.called 3. A. save B. protect C.surround D.keep 4. A. receivers B. messengers C.users D.partners 5. A. due to B. because C.because of D.so 6. A. known B. well-known C.unknown D.unpopular 7. A. every B. something C.nothing D.anything 8. A. conversations B.meetings C.letter D.users XI. Read the article and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). Telepathy is the ability to communicate information using your mind. Information is transmitted from one minds to another using means other than your well-known perceptual senses. Telepathy ranges from the basic reading of minds to more intense power, such as implanting or disrupting thoughts in other people's minds. There are a few common reasons why someone become telepathic. For example, there are those who are simply born with a sense of knowing. These people talk about seeing spirits. But they tend to suppress abilities as children and often lose it as adults. Alternatively, a life-changing event may open them up to being telepathic and exploring their gift even further. Also, there are times when a near-death experience or serious accident can also open someone up and cause a telepathic awakening. And in some cases, hypnosis or healing sessions can help a sixth sense to awaken. Such sessionshelp with getting energy flowing and causing a shift in awareness and consciousness. T F 80

1. Telepathy is the ability to communicate information using normal senses. 2. Telepathy can be found in several forms. 3. People who often talk about seeing spirits may be telepathic. 4. Some people may not recognize and develop their telepathic abilities, so they lose these skills. 5. A near-death experience or serious accident can make a person become telepathic. 6. We can awaken telepathy by making energy flowing and causing a shift between awareness and sleep.

How many hours has Nick spent on the Internet this week?

When does Nick often go to bed after going on the Net?

Why does Mi hate television?

How can Phong communicate with others?

XII. Read about Michelle and Kenji and choose the correct answer. Linking the World Because of the Internet, people from all over the world can now be friends even if they never meet. Michelle and Kenji are online friends. They tell us how they use their computers. Michelle, 15, New York, USA "When I'm doing a school project, I use my computer to go online and search the Internet for information. Then I write the project on the computer. Right now I'm doing one on the Brazilian rainforest. If I find some good photos, I'll include them. And, of course, I use my computer to stay in touch with friends like Kenji" Kenji, 14, Manchester, UK â&#x20AC;&#x153;I'm on my computer from eight until ten o'clock every evening. I use it to chat to Michelle, play games, to check the latest football news and to chat about my favourite team, Manchester City. If they win the match this Saturday, I'll be really happy. Unfortunately, Michelle is a Manchester United supporter!" 1. Michelle and Kenji are . A. brother and sister B. friends 2. They . A. meet once or twice a week B. have never met 3. Michelle talks to Kenji . A. online B. on her mobile phone 4. When she does school projects, Michelle usually . A. takes her own photos B. finds photos on the Internet 5. Kenji goes online . A.every morning B. every evening. 6. Michelle and Kenji often chat about . A. football B. their school projects 7. Kenji supports . A. Manchester United B. Manchester City 8. Both of them use the Internet . A.to keep in touch with their friends B. for their study XIII. Four people have talked about what they have done in their free time so far this week. Answer the questions below. Nick: I've spent about thirty hours on the Internet so far this week. I'm really into it. I usually go on about 9.00 in the evening after dinner and homework. I maybe stay on until half past eleven in the evening when the rest of my family are all in bed. Mi: Mi haven't watched any TV so far this week. 1 don't have a television. I hate television - it's really bad for you. Phong:I haven't written any letters so far this year. Nobody writes letters these days, do they? I always send e-mails, or cards if it's a birthday or something personal. Mai: I don't know how many books I've read so far this year â&#x20AC;Ś too many to count. I've read five books this week. I usually read about four or five in a week. I love reading. If I really like a book, I might read it five or six times 81

5. How many books does Mai read in a week? XIV. Write an email to your teacher about missing assignment, using the clues given. Dear Teacher, 1. My name/ Hoang Diem Mi/ I/ your student/ class 8A. 2.

I/ would like/ express my appreciation/ all your efforts/ teaching chemistry/ our class.

I/ write/ this letter/ apologize/ not submit/ my lab report/ on time. ____________________________________________________________________________ 4. I/ sorry about/ forget/ the deadline/ the report/ due last week. 5. I/ promised/ this thing/ not happen again. 6. I/ hope for/ kind understanding/ and accept/ late submission. Best regards, Hoang Diem Mi X. Write an email to your teacher after you miss the lesson and ask to meet the teacher, using the clues given. Dear Ms. Huong, 1. I/ sorry/I/ absent/ your Biology class/ yesterday/ because/ I/ have a high temperature. ____________________________________________________________________________ 2. A classmate/ tell me that/ handouts/ the next lab assignment/ give. ____________________________________________________________________________ 3. We/ submit/ our assignments/ next Friday. 4. Can I meet/ you tomorrow's recess/ ask some questions/ the correct way to write it?

5. I/ look forward/ speak/ you soon. Thank you very much. Best regards, Pham Van Phong TEST 3 UNIT 10 I. Circle the word with a different stress pattern from the others. 1. A.sensitive B.active C.attractive D.talkative 2. A.community B.activity C.quality D.character 3. A.nationality B.opportunity C.creativity D.communication 4. A.express B.practice C.describe D.decide 5. A.language B.conference C.understand D.message II. Choose the word marked A, B, C, or D that the underlined part is pronounced differently from the others. 82

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

A.community A.connect A.verbal A.connection A.table

B.sensitive B.perfect B.customer B.creation B.climb

C.variety C.select C.generous C.information C.cube

D.interactive D.correct D.afternoon D.suggestion D.stab

III. Choose the answer that has a different stress pattern from the others. 1. A. situation B. environment C. community D. immediate 2. A. intrusive B. connection C. customer D. dramatic 3. A. implementation B. generosity C. possibility D. automatically 4. A. entertainment B. population C. innovative D. temporary 5. A. numerous B. industry C. portable D. variety 6. A. economy B. economic C. industrial D. committee IV. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D to complete the sentences. 1. I don't know how we can with her. She's too far away. A. keep in touch B. cope C. catch up D. keep pace 2. He don’t understand the instruction on this website, so he have to use messages. A. instant B. online C. non-verbal D. verbal 3. She don't have the doctor's telephone number to book a(n) with him. A. ticket B. appointment C. lunch set D. seat 4. Sending letters by post office has become today, in comparison to email. A. more popular B. popular C. much popularer D. less popular 5. , dancing and painting are examples of non-verbal communication. A. chatting B. smiling C. singing D. emailing 6. Using in presentation is very important to make your speech more attractive. A. body language B. poems C. sign language D. music V. Choose the best answer A, B, C, or D to complete these sentences below. 1. We took part in a lot of interesting to make acquaintance with each other in the chat room. A.communities B.activities C.conferences D.contests 2. The sign language provides the deaf more to communicate with those who are deaf or hard of hearing. A.options B.opportunities C.situations D.activities 3. In presentation, presenters should use their body language such as hand gesture, eye contact to communicate with the audience . A.effective B.effectively C.more effective D.more effectively 4. Nowadays, our country creates more products to persuade customers from other countries to buy. A.competitive B.expensive C.luxurious D.beautiful 5. Try to think about troubles that you may get into in your life. A.negative B.positive C.negatively D.positively 6. The portable wireless devices or Readers will be paper thin, flexible and have wireless in the future. A.usages B.connections C.Wi Fi D.techniques 7. Recent advancements in 3D virtual imaging and scanning technologies are making your “virtual presence” a real . A. possibility B.creativity C. quality D. identify 8. The future will bring a slew of new products that will change the way we with each other and with machines. 83

A.communicated B.communicating C.communication D.communicate 9. Which one is not correct to fill in the blank? Hand gestures is a type of which make people listen to you. A.verbal communication B.body language C. sign language D.non-verbal communication 10. With mobile , devices with solar power can be put in relatively remote locations, or can be free to roam. A. phones B.connectivity C.vehicles D.equipment VI. Fill in the blank with the words from the box to complete the sentences. facial expression Emails face-to-face meeting letters body language Texting video chat signs 1. Teenagers often use abbreviations when to save time. 2. People who cannot hear or speak often communicate with each other by using . 3. In a , people communicate directly to each other. 4. Using during your talk is an effective way to attract more people’s attention. 5. In the past, people who live far away used to write to keep touch with their relatives or their family. 6. helps people connect to each other in such a quick and cheap way. 7. Smiling and blinking your eyes are examples of . 8. Since the appearance of the Internet, people have been able to send to contact with people from any countries in the world. VII. Complete the sentences with the correct forms of the verb in the brackets. 1. Do you enjoy (write) letters to your friends? 2. He has decided (install) the Internet to look for information more easily. 3. She intends (participate) in the program called "The survivor” to experience the life in an isolated island. 4. We’ll need (bring) more food and drinks for the trip. 5. You should avoid (spend) much time (play) computer games because you can lose your skills to communicate with people face to face. 6. He plans (book) an appointment with the doctor. He needs (examine) his health. 7. Our teacher didn't mind (explain) the exercise until we understood it yesterday. 8. Peter denied (steal) that mobile phone. VIII. Complete the text with the past simple, present continuous or future continuous. 1. It (be) expensive to make a phone call in a long distance 10 year ago. 2. Nowadays, emails and video chat (help) people to contact to each other easily and inexpensively. 3. By this time tomorrow, I (learn) Japanese at Language Center. 4. When I (be) young, I and my friend (write) letters to each other so that we could keep in touch. 5. In 20 years I think I (talk) to my children by telegraph and holograph when they live far away from home. 6. Last night I (make) several phone calls to her, but she (not answer) . Now I (be) worried about her. 7. In the year 2020, they (invent) some devices to help people who cannot hear or speak to communicate through their mind. 8. She (plan) to have an outing with her family this Sunday. 84

IX. Complete the following sentences with the correct form of the words in the to the brackets. 1. Our coffee is a very products in the international market due to the high quality and the reasonable price. (competition) 2. We both admired his in helping other people. (generous) 3. The dress was , so I did not have a look on it. (attract) 4. He with most of the people in last night's face-to-face meeting. He was so talkative. (communication) 5. They were very surprised when they knew his . (nation) 6. He is so to his community because he never misses an opportunity to help people. (activity) I 7. In addition to hand gestures, facial also belongs to non-verbal communication. (express) 8. Despite the of chatting online, we will still be using face-to-face meetings to communicate with each other in the year 2050. (popular) X. Choose the correct answer to each blank to complete the passage. Today, computer companies sell many (1) programs for computers. First, there are programs (2) math problems. Second, there are (3) for scientific studies. Third, some programs are (4) fancy typewriters. They are often (5) by writers and business people. Other programs are made for courses in schools and universities. And (6) there are programs for fun. These (7) word games and puzzles (8) children and adults.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

A.differ A.do A.companies A. like A. use A.next A.include A. of

B.different B.doing B.programs B. as B. used B.after that B.connect B. for

C.differently C.for doing C.computers C. so C. using C.however C.restrict C. about

D.difference D.to doing D.problems D.same D. used to D.finally D.concern D. to

XI. Read the following passage and choose the item (a, b, c, or d) that best answers each of the questions about it. Is computer shopping the way of the future? About 37% of American households now have personal computers. And shopping by computer (or â&#x20AC;&#x153;shopping on-line) is interesting to more people every day. Already, shoppers I can use their computers to order many different products, such as computer products, flowers, food, T-shirts, and posters. And new online shopping services appear every day. Soon people may be able to shop for anything, anytime, anywhere in the world.

Questions: 1. What is the passage written about? A. Computer shopping B. Personal computer C. The future in America D. Shopping 2. What does the word "their" in line 4 refer to? A. people B. shoppers C. households D. personal computers 3. Shoppers can buy by computer. A. many different products B. anything C. food D. A&C 4. What does the word "appear" in the sentence â&#x20AC;&#x153;new online shopping services appear every day" mean? 85

A. become available for the first time B. be bought C. be sold D. arrive somewhere Which of the following is not true? A. About 63% of American households don't have personal computers now. B. Now many people find it interesting to shop by computer C. "Shopping by computer" is also called as "shopping on-line". D. Nowadays, it is certain that people can buy anything, anytime, anywhere by computer.

XII. Choose the word (A, B, C, or D) that best fits each of the blank spaces. Not so long ago, people only used the (l) to make phone calls. Now, thanks to computers, people use their phones (2) much more. They can bank by phone, rent videos (3) phone, and even shop by phone. It is also possible (4) letters and reports by faxing them over telephone lines. People can even use their phone lines to (5) messages from one computer to another computer by (6) mail, or e-mail. 1. A. fax machine. B. telephone C. computer D. dishwasher 2. A. do B. doing C. to do D. to doing 3. A. with B. by C. in D. at 4. A. send B. sending C. to send D. to sending 5. A. take B. leave C. send D. write 6. A. electricity B. electrical C. electric D. electronic XIII. Choose the correct answer to complete the passage. Telephone, television, radio, and the Internet help people (1) with each other. (2) these devices, ideas and news of events spread (3) all over the world. For example, within seconds, people can know the results of an (4) in another country. An (5) football match comes into the homes of everyone with a television set. News of a disaster, such as a flood, can bring help from (6) countries. Within hours, help is on the way. This is because modern (7) information travels fast. 1. A. communicate B. communicating C. to communicate D. A&C 2. A. Although B. Because of C. Despite D. Because 3. A. quickly B. quick C. slowly D. slow 4. A. electing B. elective C. election D. elected 5. A. rural B. international C. nation D. urban 6. A. close B. space C. distant D. rich 7. A. technology B. technological C. technique D. technical XIV. Read the following passage and choose the item (a, B, C or D) that best answers each of the questions about it.

The first computers were very large machines. Now computers come in all shapes and sizes. There were still big computers for companies or universities. There are other special computers for factories. These large computers tell the factory machines what to do. But there are also small personal computers to use at home or in an office. There are even computers in telephones, television sets, and cars. These computers have to be very small. They are so small you cannot even see all their parts. 1. 2.

The first computers were . A. tiny B. huge C. in all shapes and sizes D. all are correct There are computers . A. for companies and universities B. to use at home C. in telephones, television sets, and cars D. all are correct 86

What does the word "they" in line 7 refer to? A. telephones B. television sets C. cars D. computers 4. What is the passage written about? A. old computers B. modern computers C. computer’s shapes D. computers's sizes 5. Which of the following is true? A. The first computers were very large B. Nowadays, there are only small computers C. All modern computers are so small that you cannot see all their parts D. Modern computers have the same size. XV. Read the text below then choose the correct answer A, B, C or D for each question below. Why do birds sing? People usually sing because they like music or because they feel happy. They express their happiness by singing. When a bird sings, however, its song usually means much more than that the bird is happy. Birds have many reasons for singing. They sing to give information. Their songs are their language. The most beautiful songs are sung by male (cock) birds. They sing when they want to attract a female (hen) bird. It is their way of saying that they are looking for a wife. Birds also sing to tell other birds to keep away. To a bird, his tree or even a branch of tree is his home. He does not want strangers coming near him, so he sings to warn them. If a bird cannot sing well, he usually has some other means of giving important information. Some birds dance, spread out their tails or make other signs. One bird has a most unusual way of finding a wife. It builds a small garden of shells and flowers. People usually sing because . A. They want birds to sing after them. B. They feel happy. C. They want to tell a story about their life. D. They like studying music. 2 2. One of the main reasons why birds singing is that . A. They are happy. B. They want to show off their voice. C. They want to give information. D. They can sing beautiful songs. 3. sing the most beautiful songs. A. Happy birds B. Cock birds C. Hen birds D. Female birds 4. Male birds sing beautifully to . A. express their happiness B. show they are hungry C. say something is dangerous D. attract a female bird 5. A bird sometimes sing to give . A. A warning to keep away B. A warning to come near him quickly C. A warning about the approach of people D. A warning to stop singing 6. Most birds usually to give important information if they cannot sing well. A. dance B. spread out their tails C. make other signs D. All above is correct 7. One bird’s most unusual way of attracting a hen bird is that . A. it dances then sings B. it screeches and flies around C. it spreads out its tail D. it uses shells and flowers to build a small garden

All of us communicate with one another nonverbally, as well as with words. Most of the time we’re not aware that we're doing it. We gesture with eyebrows or a hand, meet someone else's eyes and look away, change positions in a chair. These actions we assume are occasional. However in recent years researchers have discovered that there is a system to them almost as consistent and understandable as language. One important kind of body language is eye behavior. Americans are careful about how and when they meet one another's eyes. In our normal conversation, each eye contact lasts only about a second before one or both of us look away. When two Americans look searchingly into each other’s eyes, they become more intimate. Therefore, we carefully avoid this, except in suitable situations. Researchers who are engaged in the study of communication through body movement are not prepared to spell out a precise vocabulary of gestures. When an American rubs his nose, it may mean he is disagreeing with someone or refusing something. But there are other possible interpretations, too. Another example: when a student in conversation with a professor holds the older man's eyes a little longer than is usual, it can be a sign of respect; it can be something else entirely. The researchers look for patterns in the situation, not for a separate meaningful gesture. Communication between human beings would be with just dull if it were all done with words. 1.

XVI. Read the passage then answer the questions.

3. 4.

This article is about . A. Study of communication through body movement have recently been conducted. B. Communication through body movement is as important as communication through words. C. All communication between human beings is only with words. D. Eye behavior is the most king of body movement. Researchers think that . A. people can use and understand body language in communication. B. body language is considered more important than spoken language in communication. C. body language have recently been discovered. D. body language has just been studied through body movement. interesting The word "intimate" in paragraph 2 means: A. wonderful B. close C. important D. interesting According to the passage, an American person feel uncomfortable when you . A. look into his/her eyes for a long time B. avoid looking into his/her eyes C. look into the ground D. stare at his eyes for a second When an American rubs his nose, it can mean . A. he or she is disapproving with someone B. he or she is refusing something C. he or she is expressing other possible meanings D. All above is correct

XVII. Rewrite the sentences as long as keep the similar meaning to the original one. 1. People spent more time communicating with each other in the past. It took ______________________________________________________________________ 2. He used to write letters to keep in touch with her when he lived far from her. Letters used to_________________________________________________________________ 3. How long has that phone been used by our teacher? When _______________________________________________________________________ 4. How about going on a picnic this weekend? Why don't we _________________________________________________________________ 5. He suggested watching a comedy. “Let’s ______________________________________” he said. 6. His friend suggested he should go to bed after taking some medicine. 88

. . ? ?

7. 8.

"Why don't __________________________________?” said his friend. Let's eat out and go to the amusement park. What about __________________________________________________________________ ? Although the weather was bad, the football match was not cancelled. Despite ______________________________________________________________________ .

XVIII. Choose one of these topics below: a. Write a mobile phone text message to invite him/her to your birthday weekend. b. Write an email to introduce yourself and make friends with a foreigner. c. Write a short online post about best food to eat when visiting Vietnam to introduce for foreigners. Your writing: ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ UNIT 11: SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY (KHOA HỌC VÀ CÔNG NGHỆ) A. VOCABULARY 1. archaeology (n) /ˌɑːkiˈɒlədʒi/: 2. become a reality (v) /bɪˈkʌm ə riˈæliti/: 3. benefit (n, v) /ˈbenɪfɪt/: 4. cure (v) /kjʊə/: 5. discover (v) /dɪˈskʌvə/: 6. enormous (adj) /ɪˈnɔːməs/: 7. explore (v) /ɪkˈsplɔː/: 8. field (n) /fiːld/: 9. improve (v) /ɪmˈpruːv/: 10. invent (v) /ɪnˈvent/: 11. light bulb (n) /laɪt bʌlb/: 12. oversleep (v) /ˌəʊvəˈsliːp/: 13. patent (n, v) /ˈpætnt/: 14. precise (adj) /prɪˈsaɪs/: 15. quality (n) /ˈkwɒləti/: 16. role (n) /rəʊl/: 17. science (n) /ˈsaɪəns/: 18. scientific (adj) /ˌsaɪənˈtɪfɪk/: 19. solve (v) /sɒlv/: 20. steam engine (n) /stiːm ˈendʒɪn/: 21. support (n, v) /səˈpɔːt/: 22. technique (n) /tekˈniːk/: 23. technical (adj) /ˈteknɪkl/ 24. technology (n) /tekˈnɒlədʒi/: 25. technological (adj) /ˌteknəˈlɒdʒɪkəl/: 26. transform (v) /trænsˈfɔːm/:

khảo cổ học trở thành hiện thực lợi ích, hưởng lợi chữa khỏi phát hiện ra to lớn khám phá, nghiên cứu lĩnh vực nâng cao, cải thiện phát minh ra bóng đèn ngủ quên bằng sáng chế, được cấp bằng sáng chế chính xác chất lượng vai trò khoa học thuộc khoa học giải quyết đầu máy hơi nước ủng hộ thủ thuật, kĩ thuật kĩ thuật, công nghệ thuộc công nghệ, kĩ thuật thay đổi, biến đổi 89

27. underground (adj, adv) /ʌndəˈɡraʊnd/: dưới lòng đất, ngầm 28. yield (n) /jiːld/: sản lượng B. GRAMMAR. I. ÔN TẬP CÁC THÌ TƯƠNG LAI (FUTURE TESES) Thì Cấu trúc Tương lai đơn (+) S + will + V(infinitve) + O (-) S + won’t+ V(infinitve) + O (?) Will + S + V(infinitve) + O ? Tương lai tiếp diễn

(+) S + will + be + V-ing + O (-) S + won’t + be + V-ing + O (+) Will + S +be + V-ing + O ?

Dấu hiệu nhận biết tomorrow next week/month/year in the future in + thời gian trong tương lai At this time tomorrow/next week At 10 o’clock tomorrow Thời gian xác định tại một thời điểm trong tương lai

Bài 1: Viết lại cụm từ gạch chân trong mỗi câu dưới đây ở dạng thì tương lai đơn (will + V) hoặc thì tương lai tiếp diễn (will be + V-ing) sao cho phù hợp. 1. Don’t call me at 10 o’clock. I am going to fly to Spain. 2. I suppose we are going to stay at a hotel next summer. 3. Come to see me in the afternoon. I work in the garden. 4. Do you think it is snowing at the weekend? 5. Is the coat O.K ?- Yes, I am taking it. 6. This time on Sunday we are going to ski in France. 7. I don’t know if I will stay here. Perhaps I move to a big city one day. 8. Every student is using a computer in the future. Bài 2: Chia động từ trong ngoặc ở thì tương lai đơn hoặc thì tương lai tiếp diễn sao cho phù hợp. 1. I can buy it for you. I (shop)__________________ in the afternoon anyway. 2. Is Bill at school? – No, he isn’t. I suppose he (come) __________________ 3. I hope Simon (be) __________________there. 4. Did you remember to invite Mrs. Oates? – Oh, no! I forgot. But I (call) __________________ her now. 5. I’ll have a holiday next week. I (not get up) __________________ at 6 o’clock as usual. 6. You are so late! Everybody (work) __________________ when you arrive at the office. 7. Be careful or the cars (knock) __________________ you down. 8. We (move) __________________ our house this time tomorrow. 9. He (play) __________________ tennis at 7.30. He usually starts at 7 o’clock. Could you come before that? 10. Your suitcase is so big. I (take) __________________ it for you. Bài 3: Dựa vào gợi ý, dùng thì tương lai đơn hoặc tương lai tiếp diễn để viết các câu hỏi dưới đây. 1. I am not sure if I can offer this room. ________________________________? (our guest /like/it) 2. Can I borrow your laptop tonight? ________________________________ ? (you/use/it/about 9 o’clock) 3. We arrive in Aberdeen at 1 o’clock. ________________________________ ? (we/have/time/for lunch) 4. The show starts at 8. Please, ________________________________ ? (you/drive me/there) 5. Your journey will be so long. How ________________________________ while you are on the train? (you/spend/your time). 6. I’ve just missed the train. How ________________________________? (I/ get/to school) 7. I’d like to see your project. If I come at 4.30, ________________________________ ? (you/work/on it) 8. If your teacher ask you, ________________________________ ? (you/translate/the text) 90

9. What ________________________________ while I am cleaning the windows? (you/do) 10. ________________________________ if the coach is booked? (you/take/a taxi) II. CÂU GIÁN TIẾP (REPORTED SPEECH) 1. Định nghĩa. Định nghĩa Ví dụ - Câu trực tiếp (Direct Speech) là chính xác lời - They said, “We will visit her”. (Direct Speech) của ai đó. Chúng ta thường dùng dấu “ ” để trích →They said (that) they would visit her. dẫn lời nói trực tiếp. (Reported Speech/ Indirect Speech) - Câu tường thuật (hay còn gọi là câu gián tiếp) là câu thuật lại lời nói trực tiếp do một người khác phát biểu. 2. Câu trần thuật gián tiếp (Reported Statement) Khi muốn thay đổi một câu trần thuật trực tiếp sang 1 câu trần thuật gián tiếp, chúng ta dùng động từ ‘say/tell’ để giới thiệu. Đồng thời cần áp dụng các quy tắc sau: a. Thay đổi thì của động từ. * Nếu động từ giới thiệu ở thì hiện tại (say/tell) thì động từ trong câu gián tiếp giữ nguyên thì trong câu trực tiếp. Ví dụ: “ I always drink coffee in the morning”, she says → She says that she always drinks coffee in the morning. * Nếu động từ giới thiệu ở thì quá khứ (said/told) thì động từ trong câu gián tiếp cần thay đổi như sau: Thì trong lời nói trực tiếp Thì trong lời nói gián tiếp Hiện tại đơn → Quá khứ đơn. “I like sciences” He said (that) he liked sciences Hiện tại tiếp diễn →Quá khứ tiếp diễn “I am staying for a few days” She said (that) she was staying for a few days. Hiện tại hoàn thành → Quá khứ hoàn thành “Nick has left” She said (that) Nick had left Quá khứ đơn → Quá khứ hoàn thành “Nick left this morning” She told me (that) Nick had left that morning Quá khứ tiếp diễn → Quá khứ tiếp diễn/ Quá khứ hoàn thành tiếp diễn “I was doing my homework” She said (that) she was doing her homework /She had been doing her homework Will →Would “Man will travel to Mars” He said (that) man would travel to Mars. Can → Could “We can swim” They told us (that) they could swim. May →Might “We may live on the moon” He said (that) they might live on the moon. b. Đổi ngôi của đại từ nhân xưng, tính từ và đại từ sở hữu. Trong lời nói trực tiếp Trong lời nói gián tiếp I → he/she We → they You → I/he/she My → his/her Our → their Your → my/his/her Mine → his/hers Ours → theirs c. Thay đổi các trạng từ chỉ thời gian nơi chốn. 91

Trạng từ trong câu trực tiếp Trạng từ trong câu gián tiếp Now →then Today →that day Here →there this week →that week tomorrow →the following day/the next day yesterday →the day before/the previous day last month →the month before/the previous month Tonight →that night Ago →before next week →the following week/the week after These →those Ví dụ: He said to me, “I and you will go with her father next week” He told me (that) he and I would go with her father the following week. BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài 4: Chọn từ thích hợp trong hộp dưới đây rồi điền vào chỗ trống. There the following day two hours before my the previous week then the day before that evening that night that Her 1. “I like this pair of shoes”. →She said (that) she liked____________ pair of shoes. 2. “Our plane lands tonight”→ They said their plane landed ____________ 3. “I saw Jane yesterday”→ He told me that she had seen Jane____________ 4. “I have met your father”→ Dan told me that he had met ____________ father 5. “I am going to the cinema this evening”→ Sara told me that she was going to the cinema ____________ 6. “Paul took his driving licence last week”→ Paul told me he had taken his driving licence ____________ 7. “This girl is my sister”→ She said to me that that girl was ____________sister. 8. “I like the way they cook here”→ Tina said that she liked the way they cooked____________ 9. “She won’t arrive tomorrow”→ Sandra said that she wouldn’t arrive ____________ 10. “Henry phoned Lara two hours ago”→ Henry told me that Lara had phoned ____________ 11. “I am watching TV now”→ Mum said that she was watching TV ____________ Bài 5: Điền vào chỗ trống từ phù hợp “said” hoặc “told” 1. He _______ me a nice story. 2. Sarah _______ to her mum that she was sick. 3. We _______ that we were going to leave that night. 4. Paul _______ his books were missing. 5. She _______ that she would take the dog out that night. 6. Brian _______ that he had moved to Canada the week before. 7. Dan _______ Lara to stop spending so much money. 8. Our teacher _______ us that Christopher Columbus had discovered had discovered America. 9. He _______ they would arrive the following day. 10. They _______her to come early. 11. Fiona _______ to Kate that she had bought a nice skirt the day before. 12. I was sure that he _______ the truth. Bài 6: Đọc ví dụ và viết các câu gián tiếp ở thì hiện tại cho các câu dưới đây. Ví dụ: “I am waiting for you”→ Mary says to Peter she is waiting for him. ‘I am asking your help’. 1. Mary says to Peter ________________________________ 2. Paul says to Jenny ________________________________ 3. I say to you ________________________________ 4. You say to me ________________________________ 5. Jane says to the boys ________________________________ 92

‘We bought you some books yesterday’ 6. They say to us ________________________________ 7. Sarah says to the children ________________________________ 8. Mary says to Peter ________________________________ 9. You say to me ________________________________ 10. I say to you ________________________________ Bài 7: Các câu trực tiếp dưới đây đã được chuyển thành câu gián tiếp. Hãy đọc, gạch chân và sửa lỗi sai có trong mỗi câu. 1. “I am not going to tolerate this anymore ”, said Sarah. Sarah said she was not going to tolerate this anymore. 2. “You have always been my friend”, said Joe. Joe said I was always his friend. 3. “We never eat meat”, claimed Bill Bill claimed that they had never eaten meat 4. “I will talk to Sam soon,” she told me on Sunday. She told me on Sunday she will talk to Sam sonn. 5. “Mary used to exercise everyday,” he said. He said Mary had used to exercise every day. 6. “I wish I was twenty years younger,”said Linda. Linda said she wished she had been twenty years younger. 7. “Answer the phone!”he told me. He told me I answered the phone 8. “Where is Alex?” she asked me. She asked me where was Alex. Bài 8: Hoàn thành các câu gián tiếp dưới đây. 1. Mr. Miller said, ‘I can’t come to the meeting on Sunday’ Mr. Miller said (that) ________________________________________________________ 2. Mary said, ‘I’m feeling ill’ Mary said (that) ____________________________________________________________ 3. Your brother said, ‘I like chocolate’ Your brother said (that) ______________________________________________________ 4. My brother said, ‘I’m going to learn to cook’ My brother said (that) ________________________________________________________ 5. He said, ‘I’ll learn English online tomorrow’ He said (that) ______________________________________________________________ 6. My cousin said, ‘I’m not enjoying my job very much recently’ My cousin said (that) ________________________________________________________ 7. My parents said, ‘We’ll phone you when we get back’ My parents said (that) ________________________________________________________ 8. Susan said, ‘You don’t know what Bob is doing’ Susan said (that) ____________________________________________________________ 9. She said, ‘I’ll tell dad I saw you’ She said (that) ______________________________________________________________ 10. He said, ‘I have got a toothache’ He said (that) ______________________________________________________________ 11. He said, ‘I have passed the physical test’ He said (that) ______________________________________________________________ 12. Safia said, ‘I went to Italy last year’ Safia said (that) ____________________________________________________________ 13. Kevin said, ‘I had a great weekend’ Kevin said (that) ____________________________________________________________

14. Mehrzad said, “I’m going to start my own photography business next month.” Mehrzad said (that) _________________________________________________________ 15. Alex said, “I finished university in June” Alex said (that) _____________________________________________________________ 16. Safia said, “I have studied photography” Safia said (that) ____________________________________________________________ 17. Maria said, “I will bring you a scarf from India” Maria said (that) ___________________________________________________________ BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO Bài 9: Chia động từ trong ngoặc ở thì tương lai đơn hoặc thì tương lai tiếp diễn để hoàn thành các câu sau. 1. I’m that next year this city (look)_________________ much better. 2. They (have to) _________________ change their diet if they want to keep fit. 3. I (not do) _________________that if he doesn’t apologize to me. 4. I can’t go out with you, but I (make) _________________ it up to you. 5. At 10 p.m I (go) _________________ to bed to get some rest. 6. I (not do) _________________anything till Monday. 7. You can visit me tomorrow. I (not do) _________________ anything important. 8. Can I borrow your car? Sure, I (not use) _________________ it until Friday. 9. At 11 p.m I (sleep) _________________ . 10. You should recognize her easily. She (wear) _________________ a red skirt. 11. I wish I could visit you, but I (manage) _________________ a very important project. 12. She (not come) _________________ with us, I’m sure. 13. I (help) _________________ you as soon as I finish this project. 14. He (not be able) _________________ to carry such a heavy bag. 15. I think he (find) _________________ this work more interesting when he grows up. 16. This time next month I (enjoy) _________________ the holidays. 17. Hold on, I (give) _________________ you a gift. 18. He (give) _________________ me 20$ a day during my stay. 19. I suppose the weather (be) _________________ good. 20. We (leave) _________________ this house as soon as possible. Bài 10: Khoanh tròn vào phương án đúng. 1. Customer in restaurant: Waiter, this place is dirty. Waiter: I’m sorry, sir, I _________________ (bring) you another. A. will bring B. will be bringing C. A &B 2. It’s beginning to get dark; the street lights ________ (go) on in a few minutes. A. will go B. will be going C. A & B 3. Let’s wait here; the swing bridge __________(open) in a minute to let that ship through. A. will open B. will be opening C. A & B 4. Guest: May I use your phone to ring for a taxi? Hostess: Oh, there’s no need for that; my son __________(drive) you home. A.will drive B. will be driving C. A & B 5. A: Before you leave the office you _________ (hand) the keys of the safe to Mr Pitt. Do you understand? B: Yes, sir. A. will hand B. will be handing C. A & B 6. Are you nearly ready? Our guests __________ (arrive) any minute. A. will arrive B. will be arriving C. A & B 7. Loudspeaker announcement: The ship __________ (leave) in a few minutes and all persons not travelling are asked to go ashore. A. will leave B. will be leaving C. A & B

8. You ought to try to get a ticket for the Spectators’ Gallery next week; they _______ (debate) international fishing rights. A. will debate B. will be debating C. A & B 9. A: You’ve left the light o. B: Oh, so I have. I _______ (go) and turn it off. A. will go B. will be going C. A & B 10. I’ve been appointed assistant at the local library. The you ___________ (work) under my sister. She is head librarian there. A. will work B. will be working C. A& B C.EXERCISES TEST 1 UNIT 11 I. Choose the word which has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others. B. gained C. prepared D. proved 1. A. ranked 2. A. host B. honor C. hockey D. horror B. swallow C. challenge D. ballet 3. A. badminton 4. A. teammate B. reading C. creating D. seaside 5. A. athlete B. author C. length D. southern B. foul C. account D. mount 6. A. touch 7. A. lose B. vote C. control D. social 8. A. rear B. bear C. gear D. year 9. A. please B. peace C. seat D. spread B. beliefs C. towards D. rights 10. A. overlooks II. Choose the words that have the different stress from the others. 1. A. chemist B. browser C. technique D. programme 2. A. aspect B. advance C. spaceship D. progress (n) 3. A. reality B. unable C. enormous D. benefit 4. A. explorer B. physicist C. scientist D. telephone 5. A. experiment B. biologist C. ordinary D. development III. Which word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others? 1. A. wharf B. place C. volcano D. plane 2. A. fisherman B. ticket C. prisoner D. over 3. A. hotel B. postcard C. shore D. cold 4. A. included B. called C. phoned D. arrived 5. A. much B. teacher C. beach D. brochure IV. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences. 1. An astronaut has to wear a spacesuit it may be very cold in space. A. so B. but C. because D. because of area. 2. The UFO landed on a A. grass B. grassy C. grassed D. grassing 3. Scientists have been trying to find of aliens. A. amounts B. records C. traces D. sights 4. There have been many UFO reported. A. sights B. signs C. signals D. sightings 5. Mars is called the Red Planet due to its surface. A. red B. redder C. reddest D. reddish 6. In the mid-19th century, scientists discovered that Mars had some similarities Earth. A. to B. with C. of D. from 7. Neptune is bright blue it is named after the Roman God of the sea. A. because B. but C. so D. or 95

8. There is a lot of interest in doing experiments in the conditions. A. weigh B. weighing C. weight D. weightless 9. Titan, one of Saturn’s , has a thick atmosphere. A. satellite B. spaceships C. moons D. comets 10. Scientists believe that Mars also seasons just as the Earth does. A. spends B. experiences C. experiments D. takes V. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct future tense. 1. We (implant) chips in the brain to control devices by the year 2050. 2. With commercial space travel, we (take) minerals from the moon at this time in 2030. common in mobile devices. 3. Universal translation (become) 4. We (create) a synthetic brain that functions like the real one in the year 2050. 5. Japan (build) a robotic moon base by 2020, built by robots, and for robots. 6. China (connect) Beijing to London with a high-speed railway soon. 7. Car-makers (design) self-driving cars to offer extreme safety and ease of transport. 8. The US military officials say that navy ships (run) on 50 percent of biofuels by 2020. (help) you choose the best course for your aims and goals. 9. Your movies 10. What (I/ do) after the course? VI. Use the correct form of the words given to complete the sentences. tasks. (danger) 1. Robots save workers from performing 2. One disadvantage of robots is its high cost of the . (produce) 3. Robots are being used in both manufacturing and the field. (industry medicine) 4. There is no reason why Japan will not be able to make progress in robotics. (technology) 5. The key to YouTube’s success is the for anyone from anywhere in the world to broadcast themselves for free. (able) in the science and technology, impossible things have become 6. Due to the possible. 7. Robots increase worker by preventing accidents since humans are not performing jobs. (safe - risk) 8. As a (science), Professor Tran Dai Nghia set an example as a true (research) who devoted himself to the (science) career. 9. Hellen isn’t a great of biotechnology. (admire) 10. Paul’s uncle has worked as a for twelve years. (conservation) VII. Read, then choose the best answer (A, B, c or D) to complete the gap. The next generation of telephone users will probably laugh (1) we explain how we used to stand next to a wall in the kitchen to (2) a phone call. Mobile communications, already highly advanced compared with a decade ago, will completely change communications in the next few years. (3) there are millions of people using mobile phones, most people know (4) about the mobile telecommunications industry and its technology. There are three types of mobile phone. These are hand portables, pocket-sized hand portables and transportables. The smallest and most popular are the pocket-sized hand portables. These work on rechargeable batteries, which allow an (5) of up to 80 minutes’ conversation. Mobiles that are fitted permanently in a vehicle do not (6) on separate batteries. They require an external aerial on the vehicle. This can mean a stronger signal with clearer (7) . Transportables have a high power capability and can be used (8) anywhere. They come with powerful battery packs for longer, continuous use and may also be put (9) a vehicle, using its electrics. They ( 10) to be bulkier than hand portables. 1. A. unless

B. when

C. while 96

D. whether

2. A. make B. give C. take D. do 3. A. In addition B. Because C. As a result D. Although 4. A. little B. some C. few D. lots 5. A. amount B. account C. activity D. average 6. A. rely B. create C. carry D. insist 7. A. wave B. letter C. speech D. speed 8. A. mostly B. hardly C. most D. almost 9. A. on with B. into C. up with D. in to 10. A. used B. have C. tend D. are VIII. Read the text below and choose the best answer for each question after the text. SOME ANIMALS CAN PREDICT FUTURE EARTHQUAKES A recent investigation by scientists at the U.S. Geological Survey shows that strange animal behavior might help predict future earthquakes. Investigators found such occurrences in a ten-kilometer radius of the epicenter of a fairly recent quake. Some birds screeched and flew about wildly: dogs yelped and ran around uncontrollably. Scientists believe that animals can perceive these environmental changes as early as several days before the mishap. In 1976, after observing animal behavior, the Chinese were able to predict a devastating quake. Although hundreds of thousands of people were killed, the government was able to evacuate millions of other people and thus keep the death toll at a lower level. 1. What prediction may be made by observing animal behavior? A. An impending earthquake B. The number of people who will die C. The ten-kilometer radius of the epicenter D. Environmental changes 2. Why can animals perceive these changes when humans cannot? A. Animals are smarter than humans. B. Animals have certain instincts that humans don’t possess. C. By running around the house, they can feel the vibrations. D. Humans don’t know where to look. 3. Which of the following is NOT true? A. Some animals may be able to sense an approaching earthquake B. By observing animal behavior scientists perhaps can predict earthquakes. C. The Chinese have successfully predicted an earthquake and saved many lives D. All birds and dogs in a ten-kilometer radius of the epicenter went wild before the earthquake. 4. In this passage the word “evacuate” most nearly means A. remove B. destroy C. exile D. emaciate 5. If scientists can accurately predict earthquakes, there will be A. fewer animals going crazy B. a lower death rate C. fewer people evacuated D. fewer environmental changes

hours of practice, you can (9) with computers. You may not be an expert, but you can have (10) . 1. A. at B. on C. in D. over 2. A. more B. rather C. much D. less 3. A. hold B. keep C. stay D. carry 4. A. Moreover B. However C. Therefore D. Nevertheless 5. A. do B. make C. have D. take 6. A. know B. knowing C. to know D. knew 7. A. discussions B. meetings C. schools D. classes 8. A. send B. spend C. bring D. offer 9. A. work B. make C. use D. take 10. A. for fun B. funny C. enjoy D. fun X. Read the passage and use the words in the box to fill in the space. which, smaller, ago, which, make, where, much, many, what, sold

Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. many ways. First, they are fast. They can work with Computers are helpful (1) information even (2) quickly than a person. Second, computers can work with a lot of information at the same time. Third, they can (3) information for a long time. They do not forget things that the common people do. (4) , computers are almost always correct. They are not perfect, but they usually do not (5) mistakes. Recently, it is important (6) about computers. There are a number of things to learn. Some companies have (7) at work. In addition, most diversities (8) day and night courses in Computer Science. Another way to learn is from a book, or from a friend. After a few

The first worlds computer was built at University of Pennsylvania in 1946, although computer-like machines were built in the 19th century. Computers were ........................... (1) commercially for the first time in the 1950s, and a lot of progress has been made then. Computers are now much ........................... (2) and more powerful. Computers are used in ........................... (3) fields – in business, science, medicine, and education. They can be used to forecast the weather or to control robots ........................... (4) make cars. The computer’s memory is the place .......................... (5) information is kept and calculations are done. A computer cannot think for itself. It must be told exactly ....................... (6) to do. A lot of difficult calculations can be done very quickly on a computer. Computers don’t ........................... (7) mistakes. Stories are heard sometimes about computers paying people too........................... (8) money or sending them bills for things they didn’t buy. These mistakes are made by programmers. Some years ........................... (9), an American computercontrolled rocket went out of control and had to be destroyed. The accident was caused by a small mistake in one line of the program, ........................... (10) cost the USA 18 million dollars. Criminals have found that computer crimes are a lot easier than robbing banks. Hundreds of millions of dollars are stolen from business every year by people changing the information in computers. XI. Put into the reported speech. 1. Tom said: “I want to buy a pocket calculator for my father.” ................................................................................................................. 2. She said; “I once spent a summer in this village.” ................................................................................................................. 3. The nurse said: “The patient in this room didn’t obey your orders, doctor.” ................................................................................................................. 4. They said to me : “You taught us English last year.” ................................................................................................................. 5. Mr. Brown said : “Our trip cost us two thousand dollars.” ................................................................................................................. 6. He said to her : “ I can’t find my hat anywhere in this room.” ................................................................................................................. 7. My father said to them : “My secretary is going to finish this job.” ................................................................................................................. 8. They said : “We can’t meet you here either today or tomorrow.” ................................................................................................................. 9. My mother said : “I think it won’t rain tomorrow.” ................................................................................................................. 10. He said: “Your car has been stolen, John.” .................................................................................................................

IX.

11. They said : “The river is rising early this year.” ................................................................................................................. 12. He said : “I’ll expect her to come soon.” ................................................................................................................. 13. Our teacher said : “World War II broke out in 1939.” ... 14. The students said : “We’ll be sitting for our next exam next Monday.” ................................................................................................................. 15. He said : “I’m going to finish this work.” ................................................................................................................. TEST 2 UNIT 11 I. Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others. 1. A.unaffected B.undrinkable C. uncountable D.unsuitable 2. A.unpopular B.unorganized C. unfortunate D.unambitious 3. A.imperfect B.immature C.immobile D.immoral 4. A.translator B.director C.editor D.spectator 5. A.consumer B. performer C.shopkeeper D.believer II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences. 11. Facebook was built on the of earlier social network sites like MySpace successful and Bebo. A.succeed B.successful C.successfully D.success 12. It is thought that driverless cars will transform the way we move cities in the future. A.around B.away C.along D.ahead 13. Little Pascal a mechanical calculator which could do additions or subtractions very quick. A.discovered B.found C.found out D.invented 14. Robots save workers from dangerous tasks. A.making B.having C.performing D.carrying that is not necessarily true. 15. Many people believe that robots have made workers jobless, A.but B.and C.so D.or 16. Recent developments have made robots more user-friendly, and intelligent. A.science B.scientist C.scientific D.scientifically 17. Teenagers spend most of their time playing computer games; ,they lose their interests in daily. A.moreover B.so C.however D.as a result 18. Science and technology have the life safe, secure and comfortable. A.transformed B.made C.done D.changed 19. Terrorists are using modern technology their destructive work. A.about B.at C.for D.with . 20. With the advance of the science and technology, our life changes greatly in various A.scenes B.fields C.sights D.regions III. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct future tense. 1. Japan (build) a robotic moon base by 2020, built by robots, and for robots. 2. China (connect) Beijing to London with a high-speed railway soon. 3. Car-makers (design) self-driving cars to offer extreme safety and ease of transport. 4. The US military officials say that navy ships (run) on 50 percent of biofuels by 2020. 5. We (implant) chips in the brain to control devices by the year 2050. 6. With commercial space travel, we (take) minerals from the moon at this time in 2030. 7. Universal translation (become) common in mobile devices. 99

8. We (create) a synthetic brain that functions like the real one in the year 2050. IV. Use the correct form of the words given to complete the sentences. 1. Due to the in the science and technology, impossible things have become possible. (develop) 2. Robots increase worker by preventing accidents since humans are not jobs. (safe - risk) performing 3. As a (science), Professor Tran Dai Nghia set an example as a true (research) who devoted himself to the (science) career. 4. Robots save workers from performing tasks. (danger) 5. One disadvantage of robots is its high cost for the . (produce) manufacturing and the 6. Robots are being used in both field. (industry -medicine) 7. There is no reason why Japan will not be able to make progress in robotics. (technology) 8. The key to YouTube's success is the for anyone from anywhere in the world to broadcast themselves for free. (able) V. Use the correct form of the words given to complete the sentences. 1. Some types of computer games can be .(educate) 2. Smartphones can vary from day to day due to new by different companies in the world. (invent) 3. The of a nuclear power plant costs a lot of money. (construct) 4. Space brings about many benefits to science. (explore) 5. Life is become easy and through science and technology. (comfort) 6. Nuclear waste is for both humans and the environment (harm VI. Read the article about Tim Berners-Lee, the inventor of the World Wide Web, give the answers to the questions in the conversation, and practise it in pairs. ordinary life … an amazing idea Tim Berners-Lee looks very ordinary. He is about sixty years old and has brown hair. He was born in England but now lives in Massachusetts in the USA. But in 1989 Tim had a very important idea. He invented the World Wide Web (www). Tim went to school in London. Both his parents worked with computers so it isn'tsuprising that he loved computers from an early age. When he was eighteen, he left school and went to Oxford University where he studied physics. At Oxford, he became more and more interested in computers, and he made his first computer from an old television. He graduated in 1976 and got a job with a computer company in Dorset, England. In 1989, he went to work in Switzerland where he first had the idea of an international information network linked by computer. He decided to call it the World Wide Web, and he also decided to make his ideas free to everyone – that is why we do not pay to use the Internet. In 1994, he went to live in the United States where he now works. In 1995, he wrote an article in the New York Times in which he said, "The web is a universe of information and it is for everyone.” Today his idea of a web, where people from all over the world can exchange information, is real. A: Where was Tim Berners-Lee born? B: (1) _________________________________________________________________________ A: Where does he live now? B: (2) _________________________________________________________________________ A: What does he look like? B: (3) _________________________________________________________________________ A: Did he go to school in England? B: (4) _________________________________________________________________________ A: Why did he love computers from an early age? B: (5) _________________________________________________________________________ A: Which university did he go to? What did he study there? B: (6) _________________________________________________________________________ 100

A: What did he become more interested in while he was at Oxford? B: (7) _________________________________________________________________________ A: When and where did he have the amazing idea of the World Wide Web? B: (8) _________________________________________________________________________ A: Why don't we have to pay to use the Internet? B: (9) _________________________________________________________________________ A: What is his idea about the web? B: (10)_________________________________________________________________________ VII. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or Dthat best fits the blank space in the following passage. Computers are helpful (1) many ways. First, they are fast. They can work with information even (2) quickly than a person. Second, computers can work with a lot of information at the same time. Third, they can (3) information for a long time. They do not forget things that the common people do. (4) , computers are almost always correct. They are not perfect, but they usually do not (5) mistakes. Recently, it is important (6) about computers. There are a number of things to learn. Some companies have (7) at work. In addition, most universities (8) day and night courses in Computer Science. Another way to learn is from a book,or from a friend. After a few hours of practice, you can (9) withcomputers. You may not be an expert, but you can have (10) . 1. A.in B.on C.at D.over 2. A.much B.rather C.more D.less 3. A.hold B.carry C.stay D.keep 4. A.However B.Moreover C.Therefore D.Nevertheless 5. A.do B.make C.have D.take 6. A.know B.knowing C.to know D.knew 7. A.classes B.meetings C.schools D.discussion 8. A. send B. offer C.bring D.spend 9. A. use B. make C.work D.take 10. A.fun B.funny C.enjoy D.for fun VIII. Read the passage carefully, and then answer the questions below. Becky Schroeder, Glo-sheet Becky was only 10 years old when she was attempting to do homework in her mom’s car. As it got darker outside, she had the idea that there should be a way to make her paper easier to see in the dark. Becky took matters into her own hands and paper playing around with phosphorescent materials, which emitted light but without heat. She then used phosphorescent paint to cover an acrylic board and the Glow-sheet was created. In 1974, at the age of 12, Becky became the youngest women to be granted a U.S. patent for her GloSheet invention. 1. What happened while she was doing homework in her mom's car?

If you've ever said, "I wish I knew where I was going" or "If only there were some ways to find this address,” then it may be time to consider buying yourself a Global Positioning Systems, or GPs. Let’s look at some of the uses of GPs device. Maybe you travel a lot by car and cannot look at a paper map to find your way around. There is a GPS for cars that speaks to you and tell you exactly how to get to your destination. Maybe you're a golfer who has lost his golf ball and you need to find it on the field. There's a GPS for this. You're a runner and want totrack your speed, distance, and the courses you run. Well, there's a GPS for this, too. What kinds of GPS devices are there? Well, GPS devices come in all kinds of shapes and sizes, and are available in a variety of prices. Some are small and can fit into a pocket, and others are waterproof. And for people who don't like to carry anything extra with them, GPS systems are also available on smart phone. T F 1. GPS is used to find out where you are going. 2. GPS cannot replace a paper map. 3. GPS can tell you how to get to a place while you are driving. 4. A GPS device can look for a small moving item. 5. A GPS device can track your speed, distance but not the directions you run. 6. GPS devices can be in all kinds of shapes and sizes. 7. You cannot use a GPS device in water. 8. There are also GPS devices for smart phones. X. Read the passage carefully, and then answer the questions below. Tran Dai Nghia (1913-1997) -The Buddha of Guns Professor, Academician Tran DaiNghia is a heroic scientist of Vietnamese intellectuals. In 1935, the young man Pham Quang Le, his real name, had a scholarship to study in France. He tried to take 6 college degrees and certificates of the most famous universities of France. Unlike the others, Pham Quang Le had a clear purpose when studying abroad. He studied the science of making weapons to serve the country's independence. The meeting between him and President Ho Chi Minh in Paris in 1946 changed the life of Pham Quang Le. In 1946, under the requirements of the French war, he was assigned as Head of Military Department by Uncle Ho with the responsibility of researching, manufacturing weapons soldiers to fight the enemy. Uncle Ho said, "This is the good thing. So from now on your name is Tran Dai Nghia…” In difficult conditions, Professor Tran Dai Nghia and his comrades made successfully bazookas, recoilless canons (SKZ), and flying bombs. In praise of the success of bazookas, when General Vo Nguyen Giap saw Mr. Tran Dai Nghia as a gentle and quiet engineer, General called him "The Buddha of guns”. In short, Professor Tran Dai Nghia contributed his entire life for the country, for the people. 1. What was the purpose of his study when studying abroad? 2.

What did Pham Quang Le try to study when was in France?

Why did Becky have the idea of the Glo-Sheet?

Why did Uncle Ho change his name?

What did she do to make the first Glo-Sheet?

Why did General Vo Nguyen Giap call him "The Buddha of guns”?

What is one advantage of her invention?

What was one of his great achievements?

How old was Becky when she became the youngest women to be granted a U.S. patent?

XI. Change the sentences into reported speech. 1. The scientist: "Cloning will become more popular in the next century.” The scientist said that _____________________________________________________________ . 2. Dr. Nelson: "Every home will have at least one robot to perform any boring task.” Dr. Nelson said that ______________________________________________________________ .

IX. Read the article and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). Global Positioning Systems 101

102

3. Our teacher: "Parents do not allow children to play computer games for a long period of time.” Our teacher told us that ___________________________________________________________ . 4. The doctor: "Nutrition pills can cause serious side effects.” The doctor told his patient that _____________________________________________________ . 5. The physicist: "Nuclear power plants don't require a lot of space.” The physicist said that ____________________________________________________________ . 6. The politician: "Wrong decisions in Chernobyl caused a big nuclear explosion.” The politician told the audience that _________________________________________________ XII. Change the following sentences into reported speech, using the words given in brackets. 1. "We are learning more about our universe." (Our teacher said) 2. "Scientists have made various applicationsin long distance communication.” (Dr. Nelson said) 3. "Science is a good and useful servant but it is a bad destructive master." (Our Chemistry teacher told us) 4.

"Space tourism will broaden our knowledge of space.” (Our headmaster said)

5. “During the time in Paris in 1946, Uncle Ho attracted several Vietnamese scientists to return to the country.” (Our History teacher told us) __________________________________________________________________________ 6. “Professor Le Van Thiem believed in the importance of education and science, so he founded a teacher training college and a college of fundamental science.” (Our Math teacher said) XIII. Write a paragraph about the topic: “Advantages and disadvantages of smartphones”, using the cues given. There are several advantages of smartphones. 1. Smartphone/ give/ users/ ability/ surfwebsites/ instead of/ use a desktop or a laptop. ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ 2. They/also have applications/ help us/ create/ edit Microsoft office documents.

Smartphones/ have GPS/ helps/ us/ find/ the place/ we/ look for.

4. With a smartphone/ we/ have access/ any email accounts/ Outlook or Gmail/ social networks/ Facebook and Twitter.

However, smartphones have some disadvantages. 5. Smartphones/ not durable/ especially/ when/they/ not taken/ good care of. 6.

It/ very expensive/ buy smartphones/ compared/ other phones.

Smartphones/ only work efficiently/ when/ there/ Internet connection.

You/ not depend/ smartphones/ for all your work/ but/ you/ a computer/ do some tasks.

TEST 3 UNIT 11 103

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. A. tool B. moon C. soon D. cool A. crossed B. followed C. fluttered D. happened A. tear B. bear C. hear D. fear B.through C.thing D.thumb A.think A. sew B. few C. drew D. news

II. Mark the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the word whose main stress is places differently from the rest. 1. A.unpolluted B.unbalanced C.unreasonable D.unlawful 2. A.imbalance B.immortal C.impolite D.important 3. A.imbecile B.impossible C.uncommon D.unhappy 4. A. adorable B.ability C.impossible D.entertainment 5. A.engineer B.corporate C.difficult D.different III. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D in each line. 1. That's what they always say, but they about it by next year. A. will surely have forgotten B. are forgetting C. will surely forget D. forget 2. Some customers have agreed that they up their cars tomorrow. A. are picking B. will pick C. pick D. picks 3. Look! They our trees. A. cut B. cuts C. are cutting D. will cut 4. It’s a lot of work for one day, but his customers promise that next year they their tyres changed earlier. A. has B. are having C. have D. will have 5. He tired after that. A. is probably B. will probably be C. is probably being D. are probably 6. By the end of the day, Aaron about 8 tyres. A. has mounted B. will have mounted C. will mount D. is mounting 7. Next week is the beginning of winter and the weather forecast says that there snow tomorrow. A. are B. is C. will being D. will be 8. Aaron is carrying two tyres - he the tyres on a car. A. is going to change B. change C. will change D. are going to change IV. Choose the correct tense of verb in each line. 1. The train at 11:45. A. will leave B. will have left C. leaves 2. We dinner at a nice restaurant on Saturday. A. are going to have B. will have had C. will have been having 3. It in the mountains tomorrow evening. A. will snow B. will have snowed C. is snowing 4. On Sunday at 8 o'clock I my friend. A. will meet B. am meeting C. will have been meeting 5. They to London on Friday evening. A. are flying B. will fly C. will have been flied 6. Wait! I you to the station. A. will be driving B. have drove C. will drive 7. The English lesson at 8:45. 104

A. will start B. starts C. would have seen I my sister in April. A. am going to see B. will see 9. Look at the clouds - it in a few minutes. A. will rain B. is going to rain C. is raining 10. Listen! There's someone at the door. I the door for you. A. will be opening B. will open

- John wantedmeto help her. A. wanted B. me C. to 8. "Do you play chess?" - He asked me ifheplayed chess. A. asked B. if C. he 9. "What's she doing?" - I wonderedwhatwasshe doing A. I B. wondered C. what 10. "Ill drive you to the airport.” - She offered that hewould drive us to the airport. A. he B. would C. us

C. is starting

C. am opening

V. Choose the correct answer A, B or C in each line. 1. Mary wants to speak with you. - Please tell her that I her as soon as I'm free. A. will call B. will have called C. will have been calling 2. Let's meet at eleven o'clock tomorrow. - Sorry, I at eleven o'clock. A. will be working B. will have worked C. will have been working 3. Say goodbye to Ann now. By the time you return, she for New York. A. will be leaving B. will have left C. will have been leaving 4. By 2020, he as the director of this company for thirty years. A. will work B. will be working C. will have been working 5. Why don't you ask Jim for help? I'm sure that he you. A. will help B B. will have helped C. will have been helping 6. Please don't ring the doorbell when you get here. My baby . A. will be sleeping B. will have slept C. will have been sleeping 7. Where are you going to spend your vacation? - I don't know yet. Maybe we to Italy summer. A. will go B. will have gone C. will have been going 8. She promised that she him about it. A. won't tell B. wouldn't tell C. wouldn't have told 9. Oh, you'll recognize him. He a brown leather jacket and a red scarf. A. will be wearing B. will have worn C. will have been wearing 10. She buys too many things. She all her money long before her next pay. A. will be spending B. will have spent C. will have been spending VI. Each the sentences below has at least one mistake. Identify the mistakes. 1. "Be quiet!" - I told her tobeingquiet. A. told B. to C. being D. quite told 2. “Do you borrow my novel?” - Katarina askedme if you borrowed her quiet A. asked B. me C. you D. her asked 3. “Why do you choose this dress?" - Hewondered why youchose the dress. A. he B. wondered C. you D. chose 4. "Can I borrow your computer?" - Nick asked Jack toborrowinghis computer. A. asked B. to C. borrowing D. his 5. "Close the door!” - My teacher tellsmetoclose the door. A. tells B. me C. to D. close 6. "Do not tell her what I said." - Ann begged me not to tell her what he had said A. begged B. not C. her D. he 7. "Can you help me, please?" 105

D. her.

D. played

D. was she

D. to

VII. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D in each line. 1. “Where do you live? A. Miho asked me where do I live. B. Miho asked me where I lived. C. Miho asked me where did I live. D. Miho asked me where I did live. 2. "What is the time?" A. Can you tell me what is the time? B. Can you tell me what was the time C. Can you tell me what the time is? D. Can you tell me what the time was? 3. "Why did he say that?” A. I would like to know why he said that. B. I would like to know why did he say that. C. I would like to know why he did say that. D. I would like to know why did he said that. 4. "Do we have a test tomorrow?" A. I've forgotten do we have a test tomorrow? B. I've forgotten if we have a test tomorrow. C. I've forgotten have we a test tomorrow? D. I've forgotten we have a test tomorrow? 5. "Don't talk!" A. The teacher told us not to talk. B. The teacher told us to not talk. C. The teacher said not talk. D. The teacher told us to not talking. 6. "Have you finished with the computer?" A. She asked if had I finished with the computer. B. She asked if I had finished with the computer. C. She asked if have I finished with the computer. D. She asked if I finished with the computer. 7. "I'll give you your money back tomorrow.” A. She promised me to give the money back the next day. B. She promised to give me back the money the next day. C. She promised to give me back your money the next day. D. She promised to give you back your money the next day. 8. "Can I use your phone?" A. I asked her I could use her phone. B. I asked her could I use her phone C. I asked her if can I use her phone. D. I asked her if can use her phone. 9. “When are you going back to Japan? A. He asked when I was going back to Japan. B. He asked when was I going back to Japan. C. He asked when are you going back to Japan. D. He asked when I am going back to Japan. 10. “Why did you have wait so long?” A. She wanted to know why we had to wait so long. B. She wanted to know why did we have to wait so long. 106

C. She wanted to know why did you have to wait so long. D. She wanted to know why we have to wait so long. VIII. Fill the gaps with suitable adjective from the box. Knowledge careful painful dangerous foggy famous 1. You must be very when you drive in wet weather. 2. It was so this morning that I couldn't see more than twenty meters in front of one. 3. Everyone in my country has heard of her; she's very . 4. The people in the tourist information office were very . And answer all our questions without any problems. 5. This is a very road; there were at least three serious accidents on it last years. 6. It was very when I hit my leg against the corner of table. IX. Put the verbs into the correct form. 1. I have bought two tickets. My wife and I (see) a movie tonight. 2. Mary thinks Peter (get) the job. 3. A: “I (move) from my house tomorrow. I have packed everything”. B: “I (come) and help you.” 4. If I have enough money, I (buy) a new car. 5. I (be) there at four o'clock, I promise. 6. The meeting (take) place at 4 p.m. 7. If you eat all of that cake, you (feel) sick. 8. They (be) at home at 10 o'clock because their son is staying alone at home. 9. Perhaps she (not/ be) able to come tomorrow. 10. Because of the train delay, the meeting (not/ take) place at 10 o'clock.

The invention of the telephone has made our lives much easier. Before the telephone was invented people use to communicate by fire or a light from a torch. Native Americans actually developed a more complex system of signaling with fire by controlling the release of the smoke, but such smoke signals also had their limitations. Another way to send a message between places that weren't too far apart was to use sounds better than the human voice. African tribes used drums to communicate. The way they used to get messages across from place to place was by foot, but once they learned how to use horses the messengers could get the message much faster. In the nineteenth-century the message delivery system was called Pony Express. It took about ten days for the message to get the destination. Within no time the telegraph was introduced in the 1800's. The first message was send on May 24, to the Supreme Court. The inventor of the telephone was Alexander Graham Bell. He was born in Edinburgh, Scotland, on March 3, 1847. His father and grandfather were both elocutionists. His mother Eliza was a portrait painter and a talented pianist. Alex was his family name. Alex was taught at home, so he was not especially gifted at anything expect the piano. Alex gave himself a prize on the eleventh birthday, adding "Graham to his middle name. Alex became a teacher himself, since he liked teaching other people. Alex hobbies were to collect bugs and butterflies, the skeletons of animals, birds eggs, shells, and plants. Alex's grandfather died in 1865. His brother Ted died in 1867 of tuberculosis, a disease for which there was no cure in the nineteenth century. The way Alex was introduced to telegraph was by his father, when he took him to Charles Wheatstone one of the most famous scientists in England at that time. He had developed a telegraph before Morse. Wheatstone had made a machine.

1. 2.

X. Put the words in the correct form. 1. Global communication was changed by the of the Internet. (invent) 2. The paper is both and . (inform/entertain) 3. What makes this magazine so . (popularize) 4. The program is fully . (interact) 5. Annually the competition attracts millions of worldwide. (view) 6. We apologize for the caused to the passengers. (convenient) 7. Using the Internet in daily life can be . (cost) 8. The Internet is a very useful means of . (communicate)

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

XI. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D in each line. Computer (1) the significant role in our society. Computer (2) our lives completely different. Our current significant development is (3) computer in many areas. Examples of these areas are business, medicine, environment, technology, education and also our daily lives. It can be said that our modern lives cannot exist without computer (4) participates actively and plays more and more important roles in our world, it is still one of the useful (5) for human being so far. However, computer is developing right now and in the future, to be sure, it will be difficult to imagine the performance of computer in the future. 1. A. plays B. play C. is playing D. will play 2. A. creates B. makes C. forms D. leads 3. A. why B. due for C. due to D. because 4. A. despite B. because C. due to D. even though 5. A. thing B. things C. tool D. tools XII. Read the text and choose the correct answer A, B or C in each line. 107

Before the telephone was invented, people use to communicate by . A. a light from a torch B. fire from a torch C. A & B are correct A more complex system of signaling with fire is developed by controlling the release of A. the smoke B. the fire C. A & B are wrong Using sounds is to send a message between places that weren’t too . A. near B. far C. not given in the text In the nineteen century, how many days did it spend for the message to get to the destination? A. ten B. nine C. eight Who was the inventor of the telephone? A. Ted Graham Bell B. Eliza Graham Bell C. Alexander Graham Bell Alex was taught . A. at home B. at school C. at center His mother Eliza was . A. a portrait painter B. a talented pianist C. A&B are correct. Alex hobbies were to collect . A. bugs and butterflies B. the skeletons of small animals, birds' eggs, shells, and plants C. A&B are correct.

XIII. Read the text again and answer the questions. 1. What did African tribes use to communicate? ____________________________________________________________________________ 2. How could the messengers get the message much faster that by foot? ____________________________________________________________________________ 3. What was the message delivery system named in the nineteen century? ____________________________________________________________________________ 4. When did Alex's grandfather die? ____________________________________________________________________________ 108

Whom did Alex's father take him to? ____________________________________________________________________________

XIV. Read the text again and choose the correct answers. Beer and Cheese When you are drinking a cold beer on a hot day, or eating a delicious cheese sandwich, you can thank biotechnology for the pleasure you are experiencing. That's right! Beer, bread and cheese are all produced using biotechnology. Perhaps a definition will be useful to understand how. A standard definition is that biotechnology (or biotech for short) is the application of science and engineering to the direct or indirect use of living organisms. And as you know, the food and drink above are all produced by the fermentation of micro-organisms. In beer, the yeast multiplies as it eats the sugars in the mixture and turns them into alcohol and CO2. This ancient technique was first used in Egypt to make bread and wine around 4000BC! Questions 1. What is the main topic of the article? A. Brief history and modern developments of biotechnology B. Benefit of biotechnology C. Modern research in biotechnology D. Origin of biotechnology 2. What is not a product of biotechnology? A. bread B. beer C. cheese D. fish 3. Biotechnology (or biotech for short) is the application of science and engineering to the direct or indirect use of . A. short organisms B. lifing organisms C. living organisms D. indirect and direct organisms 4. What was the ancient technique to make first used around 4000BC? A. bread B. wine C. both bread and wine D. Not given 5. Where was the ancient technique to make bread and wine first used? A. Egypt B. Europe C. Russia D. America XV. Put the verbs into the correct form (will, going to, simple present or present progressive). 1. If it rains, they (not/ go) to the seaside. 2. In my opinion, she (fail) the exam. 3. He (sell) the car if he doesn't have enough money to build a new house. 4. She is very tired, she (take) a rest. 5. According to the weather forecast, it (not/ rain) this weekend. 6. If you lose your job, what (you/ do) ? 7. In your opinion, (she/ be) a good teacher? 8. What time (the sun/ set) today? 9. Do you think she (get) money from her boss? 10. (you/ take) the children to the cinema this weekend? I have seen some tickets on the table. XVI. Complete the following sentences. 1. “I'll send you a postcard." He told us that he 2. "We've bought a new car." They told me they 3. "I don't speak German." She said that she 4. "You failed your art exam." You said that we 5. "I can't drive." He said drive. 6. "You look nice." He told me that I 7. "We're going ice-skating." They said they

us a postcard. a new car. German. our art exam. nice. ice-skating. 109

"The students aren't listening to me." The teacher said the students

to her

XVII. Complete the following sentences. 1. John: "Mandy is at home." John said that _________________________________________________________________ 2. Max: "Frank often reads a book." Max told me that _______________________________________________________________ 3. Susan: “I’m watching TV” Susan said to me that ___________________________________________________________ 4. Simon: “David was ill.” Simon said that ________________________________________________________________ 5. Peggy: “The girls helped in the house.” Peggy told me that _____________________________________________________________ 6. Richard: "I am going to ride a skateboard.” Richard said to me that _________________________________________________________ 7. Stephen and Claire: "We have cleaned the windows.” Stephen and Claire told me that ___________________________________________________ 8. Charles: "I didn't have time to do my homework.” Charles remarked that __________________________________________________________ 9. Mrs. Jones: "My mother will be 50 years old.” Mrs. Jones told me that _________________________________________________________ 10. Jean: "The boss must sign the letter." Jean said that UNIT 12: LIFE ON OTHER PLANETS (CUỘC SỐNG TRÊN CÁC HÀNH TINH KHÁC) A. VOCABULARY 1. accommodate (v) /əˈkɒmədeɪt/: 2. adventure (n) /ədˈventʃə/: 3. alien (n) /ˈeɪliən/: 4. experience (n) /ɪkˈspɪəriəns/: 5. danger (n) /ˈdeɪndʒə/: 6. flying saucer (n) /ˈﬂaɪɪŋ ˈsɔːsə/: 7. galaxy (n) /ˈɡæləksi/: 8. Jupiter (n) /ˈdʒuːpɪtə/: 9. Mars (n) /mɑːz/: 10. messenger (n) /ˈmesɪndʒə/: 11. Mercury (n) /ˈmɜːkjəri/: 12. NASA (n) /ˈnæsə/: 13. Neptune (n) /ˈneptjuːn/: 14. outer space (n) /ˈaʊtə speɪs/: 15. planet (n) /ˈplænɪt/: 16. poisonous (adj) /ˈpɔɪzənəs/: 17. Saturn (n) /ˈsætɜːn/: 18. solar system (n) /ˈsəʊlə ˈsɪstəm/: 19. space buggy (n) /speɪs ˈbʌɡi/: 20. stand (v) /stænd/: 21. surface (n) /ˈsɜːfɪs/: 22. trace (n, v) /treɪs/: 23. terrorist (n) /ˈterərɪst/: 24. trek (n, v) /trek/:

cung cấp nơi ăn, chốn ở; dung chứa cuộc phiêu lưu người ngoài hành tinh trải nghiệm hiểm họa, mối đe dọa đĩa bay dải ngân hà sao Mộc sao Hỏa người đưa tin sao Thủy cơ quan Hàng không và Vũ trụ Mỹ sao Hải Vương ngoài vũ trụ hành tinh độc, có độc sao Thổ hệ mặt trời xe vũ trụ chịu đựng, chịu được, nhịn được bề mặt dấu vết, lần theo dấu vết kẻ khủng bố hành trình, du hành 110

. . . . . . . . .

25. UFO (n) /ˌjuː ef ˈəʊ/: đĩa bay, vật thể bay không xác định 26. uncontrollably (adv) /ˌʌnkənˈtrəʊləbli/: không khống chế được 27. Venus (n) /ˈviːnəs/: sao Kim 28. weightless (adj) /ˈweɪtləs/: không trọng lượng B. GRAMMAR. I. ÔN TẬP MAY VÀ MIGHT Cách dùng - “May” và “might” được dùng để diễn đạt điều gì có khả năng xảy ra ở hiện tại hoặc tương lai. - “might” diễn tả sự việc có khả năng xảy ra thấp hơn “may”.

Ví dụ - It may/might be a bomb. (Có thể đó là 1 quả bom) - Where is Emma? I don’t know. She may/might be out shopping. (Có lẽ cô ấy đi mua sắm) - I may go to London next month. (khả năng xảy ra 50%) - I might go to London next month. (khả năng xảy ra 30%) - May I borrow your car? (xin phép lịch sự) - Yes, of course you may./No, I’m afraid you may not. (từ chối lời xin phép) - Students may not use the teachers’ car park. (cấm đoán) May the New Year bring you all your heart desires. (Chúc bạn 1 năm mới vạn sự như ý!)

- “May” và “might” được dùng để xin phép, cho phép (có tính chất lễ phép, trang trọng hơn “can” và “could”). - “May not” được dùng để từ chối lời xin phép hoặc chỉ sự cấm đoán. - May được dùng trong những lời chúc mừng trang trọng (không dùng might). BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài 1: Hãy chỉ ra chức năng của hai động từ khuyết thiếu may và might trong những câu dưới đây. Viết Po vào ô trống bên cạnh nếu nó chỉ khả năng (Possibility), viết AP nếu nó chỉ lời xin phép (Asking for Permission), và viết PE nếu nó chỉ sự cho phép (Permission) 1. I may have lunch early I’m hungry. 2. May I come in now? 3. He might go abroad next month. 4. I may not have time to go out today. 5. May I borrow your book tomorrow? 6. You may not borrow the car until you can be more careful with it. 7. You may go camping with your friends if you get high marks in the next tests. 8. It’s quite bright. It might not rain today. 9. Might we just interrupt for a moment? 10. Jay may be coming to see us tomorrow. Bài 2: Sắp xếp các từ đã cho thành câu đúng. 1. airport/He/be/the/waiting/us/may/at/for. 2. might/John/your/come/party/to. 3. room/I/the/May/leave? 4. your/I/May/eraser/use/,/please/?/Yes/,you/course/of/may. 5. that/touch/Don’t/ write/it/be/because/dangerous/might. 6. is/No One/to/go/allowed/into/building/that/,/may/go/you/not/inside/. 7. applying/is/for/the/a/He/job/at/university/,/get/he/it/might 8. yesterday/Sheila/go/sick/work/didn’t/,/to/she/be/might/. 9. bomb/may/it/a/be 10. put/I/the/May/on/TV? Bài 3: Dựa vào những từ gợi ý, dùng might/might not(mighn’t) để viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh. 1. I/go to the party. .................................................................................................................................................... 111

2. She/not talk to him. .................................................................................................................................................... 3. They/lose the game. .................................................................................................................................................... 4. Everybody/come to my concert .................................................................................................................................................... 5. The government/not win the election .................................................................................................................................................... 6. The school/not win the competition. .................................................................................................................................................... 7. The singer/become famous. .................................................................................................................................................... 8. He/not break a world record .................................................................................................................................................... 9. My father/work in a different country .................................................................................................................................................... 10. I /not become president of a country .................................................................................................................................................... II.CÂU HỎI GIÁN TIẾP (REPORTED QUESTIONS) 1. Các quy tắc khi chuyển câu hỏi trực tiếp sang câu hỏi gián tiếp - Động từ tường thuật được sử dụng trong câu hỏi gián tiếp thường là: asked, required, wondered, wanted to know. - Áp dụng qui tắc đổi đại từ nhân xưng, tính từ sở hữu, đại từ sở hữu giống câu trần thuật gián tiếp. - Áp dụng qui tắc đổi thì của động từ giống câu trần thuật gián tiếp. - Áp dụng qui tắc đổi các trạng từ chỉ thời gian, nơi chốn giống câu trần thuật gián tiếp. - Câu hỏi chuyển sang câu gián tiếp phải được chuyển về dạng khẳng định và lược bỏ dấu hỏi chấm. 2. Các dạng câu hỏi gián tiếp. Dạng Cấu trúc Câu hỏi Wh-Questions (Câu hỏi bắt đầu bằng S + asked/wondered/wanted to know + O + Wh các từ để hỏi như: What, Where, When, Why, + S + V... How...) He said to me, “Why did you go with her father last week?” →He asked me why I had gone with her father the week before. Câu hỏi Yes/No Questions: Dùng “If hoặc S + asked/wondered/wanted to know + O + whether” để bắt đầu câu hỏi Yes/No gián tiếp. if/whether + S + V Ví dụ: He said to me, “Will you go with her father next week?” → He asked me if/whether I would go with her father the following week.

BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN. Bài 4: Sắp xếp các từ sau để tạo thành câu hỏi gián tiếp hoàn chỉnh. 1. asked/was/how much/that/Tom/computer Tom ........................................................................................................................................... 2. had/to know/the officer/if/wanted/the keys/I The officer ................................................................................................................................. 3. Ann/hadn’t come/why/to her party/asked/Sam/he 112

Ann ............................................................................................................................................ 4. asked/Jane/for her holidays/she/was going/he/where He............................................................................................................................................... 5. me/English/asked/I/spoke/He/if He .............................................................................................................................................. 6. old/asked/He/her/how/was/mother He .............................................................................................................................................. 7. British/was/asked/whether/He/I/me/American/or He .............................................................................................................................................. 8. Boy/The asked/the/where/lived/policeman/be The policeman ........................................................................................................................... 9. Had/Bristol/She/I/been/asked/to/before/if She..............................................................................................................................................10. The/asked/time/train/She/what/arrived. She ............................................................................................................................................. Bài 5: Khoanh tròn vào phương án đúng. 1. Tourist: “Where is the post office?” A tourist asked me where ............................... A. the post office has B. the post office was C. is the post office D. was the post office 2. Mom: “It’s 2 a.m; what are you doing in the kitchen?” Mom wanted to know what ...................... in. A. was I doing B. I do C. I was doing D. am I doing 3. Dad: “Why did you come home so late last night?” Dad wanted to know ................ home very late the night before. A.why did I come B. if I come C. if I came D. why I had come 4. Jane: “Have you ever been to Australia?” Jane asked me .......................to Australia A. if I’m ever going B. if I’d ever been C. have I ever been D. had I ever been 5. Joe: “Could you sing when you were five?” He asked me.................when I was five A. can I sing B. if I can sing C. could I sing D. if I could sing 6. Mother: “When are you going to do your homework?” Mother asked me when ...........to do my homework. A. was I going B. I was going C. am I going D. I’ll be going 7. Allen: “How many songs had John Lennon written before he died?” Allen wanted to know how many songs .................. before his death. A. John Lennon had written B. John Lennon was writing C. was John Lennon writing D. had John Lennon written 8. Janet: “Were you working at 8p.m last night?” Janet asked me ................... at 8p.m the other night. A. if I’m working B. if I’d been working C. was I working D. had I been working 9. Dad: “Have you been attending classes regularly?” Dad asked me ...................attending classes regularly. A. if I’d be B. had I been C. if I’d been D. have I ben 10. Mario: “What should I do to improve my English?” Mario asked his teacher what ........... to improve his English. A. he should do B. he would do C. shall he do D. should he do 11. Jim: “How much does your sister earn?” Jim wanted to know how much................. A. my sister has earned B. did my sister earn C. does my sister earn D. my sister earned 12. Joe: “Could you sing when you were five?” He asked me ....................when I was five. A. can I sing B. if I can sing C. could I sing D. if I could sing 13. Mary: “Are you able to swim?” Mary asked me ........................to swim. A. if I have been able B. am I able C. if I was able D. will be able 14. Tourist: “When was that castle built?” The tourist asked the guide when ...................

A. had the castle been built B. the castle had been built C. the castle was being built D. was the castle built 15. Sue: “May I sleep at Lee’s house overnight?” Sue asked her mother ........................ at her friend’s house overnight A. if she might sleep B. could she sleep C. can she sleep D. if she had to sleep Bài 6: Chuyển các câu hỏi trực tiếp dạng Yes-No questions dưới đây thành câu hỏi gián tiếp. Ví dụ: “Is this my birthday cake?” →Peter asked Mary if that was his birthday cake. 1. “Will you send me an e-mail?” Marty to Kim .................................................................................................................................................... 2. “Were you driving your car when you had an accident?” The police to Mr Lloyd .................................................................................................................................................... 3. “Did you give up smoking last month?” The doctor to Mrs Smith .................................................................................................................................................... 4. “Have you done the washing up?” Mum to me .................................................................................................................................................... 5. “Can’t you phone your mother at home?” The teacher to him .................................................................................................................................................... 6. “Do you like sleeping? ” I to Greg .................................................................................................................................................... 7. “Has your house been redecorated? ” My neighbor to me .................................................................................................................................................... 8. “Were you punished for being late? ” Mum to Ben .................................................................................................................................................... 9. “Do I have to move the lawn in our garden today? ” Tom to his wife .................................................................................................................................................... 10. “Are they taking the dog for a walk now? ” Kate to me .................................................................................................................................................... Bài 7: Chuyển các câu hỏi trực tiếp dạng Wh-questions dưới đây thành câu hỏi gián tiếp. Ví dụ: Who is this flower for? →Mary asks Peter who that flower is for. 1. “What’s your name? ” The officer to Sam .................................................................................................................................................... 2. “How could you drive here in this storm?” Linda to the writer .................................................................................................................................................... 3. “Why are you wearing this awful shirt?” The boss to Mr Grey .................................................................................................................................................... 4. “When will the lunch be ready?” Tina to her mum .................................................................................................................................................... 5. “How did you try to cope with this problem? ” The psychologist to Sylvie. .................................................................................................................................................... 6. “When did you find this great book? ” The teacher to Jack .................................................................................................................................................... 7. “Where are you from? ” Mike to Sam .................................................................................................................................................... 8. “How many apples have you eaten today?” Mum to Paul .................................................................................................................................................... 9. “What can I do for you? ” The greengrocer to Mrs Hill .................................................................................................................................................... 10. “Where is my tie? ” Dad to the children. .................................................................................................................................................... Bài 8: Chuyển các câu hỏi trực tiếp dưới đây thành câu hỏi gián tiếp.

113

114

1. “Have you done your homework yet, Peter?” Mum wanted to know if ............................................................................................................ 2. “Where are you going to spend your holiday this summer, Sue?” Mary asked Sue ......................................................................................................................... 3. “Do you know how long it is from London to Cambridge?” Tom asked me if......................................................................................................................... 4. “Will you phone me as soon as you arrive in Oxford, Carol?” Cindy asked Carol if .................................................................................................................. 5. “Did the children play football in the park yesterday? ” Grandma was interested in knowing if ...................................................................................... 6. “How much does the ticket for the concert cost? ” Father wanted to know .............................................................................................................. 7. “Can you help me with the housework tomorrow, Linda?” He asked Linda if ...................................................................................................................... 8. “What time does the new TV series begin tonight?” Terry asked ................................................................................................................................ 9. “Are you going to buy a new computer next month, Lewis?” I wanted to know if ................................................................................................................... 10. “When has Tim started working this morning?” Mr. Smith asked his secretary ................................................................................................... 11. “Is Sue coming to the library with you, Paul?” Tina asked Paul if ...................................................................................................................... 12. “Why haven’t you sent me an email while you were in London?” Dave wanted to know ................................................................................................................ 13. “Could you swim when you were six, Tony? ” The P.E teacher asked Tony if .................................................................................................. 14. “What have you been doing at school this morning, Charles ?” Dad was interested in knowing ................................................................................................. 15. “Are you revising for tomorrow exam?” The teacher asked the students if .............................................................................................. 16. “How often do you play chess with your brother, Alice?” Sam wanted to know ................................................................................................................. BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO. Bài 9: Chọn phương án đúng nhất. 1. “What has Daddy made for dinner ? ” asked Simon. A. Simon asked what Daddy had made for dinner. B. Simon asked what Daddy have made for dinner. C. Simon asked what Daddy has made for dinner. 2. “Who won the match? ” asked Monica. A. Monica asked who had won the match. B. Monica asked who have won the match. C. Monica asked who has won the match. 3. “Has Sarah ever been to Siena ? ” he asked. A. He asked whether Sarah had never been to Siena. B. He asked whether Sarah had ever been to Siena. C. He asked whether Sarah has never been to Siena. 4. “Do you like fried eggs?”Anne asked David A. Anne asked David whether he like fried eggs. B. Anne asked David if he like fried eggs. C. Anne asked David if he liked fried eggs. 5. “Can they play the piano?” she asked 115

A. She asked if they could play the piano. B. She asked if they can play the piano. C. She asked whether they can play the piano. 6. “Have you ever been to Lisbon? ”Luis asked Paul. A. Luis asked Paul whether he has ever been to Lisbon. B. Luis asked Paul whether he had ever been to Lisbon. C. Luis asked Paul whether he had never been to Lisbon. 7. “Can I use your mobile, John? ” asked Sarah. A. Sarah asked John if she can use his mobile. B. Sarah asked John if she could use her mobile. C. Sarah asked John if she could use his mobile. 8. “Are we going out tonight?” asked Bob. A. Bob asked if/whether they were going out this night. B. Bob asked whether they were going out that night. C. Bob asked whether they are going out that night. 9. “Is the Pope a Catholic?” asked JK A.JK asked whether the Pope be a Catholic B. JK asked if the Pope be a Catholic C. JK asked if the Pope was a Catholic 10. “Where do bears live?” asked George. A. George asked where bears lived. B. George asked where bears lives. C. George asked where lived bears. Bài 10. Đọc đoạn hội thoại dưới đây và tường thuật lại dưới dạng câu gián tiếp. Mike: “What are you doing here, Liz? I haven’t seen you since June.” Liz: “I’ve just come back from my holiday in Ireland” Mike: “Did you enjoy it?” Liz: “I love Ireland. And the Irish people were so friendly” Mike: “Did you go to the Wicklow Mountains?” Liz: “It was my first trip. I can show you some pictures. Are you doing anything tomorrow?” Mike: “I must arrange a couple of things. But I am free tonight.” Liz: “You might come to my place. What time shall we meet?” Mike: “I’ll be there at eight. Is it all right?” 1. Mike asked Liz ................................................ And he said ................................................. 2. Liz explained that ............................................................... 3. Mike wondered ............................................................... 4. Liz told him that .................................................... and that ................................................. 5. Mike wanted to know............................................................... 6. Liz said that ............................................... and that she ....................................................... 7. And then she asked him if ............................................................... 8. Mike explained that ............................................................... 9. But he added that ............................................................... 10. Liz suggested that .............................................. and asked him ......................................... 11. Mike said ............................................................... 12. And then he asked ............................................................... Bài 11: Chọn dạng động từ đúng trong những câu trực tiếp dưới đây. 1. Helen asked me if I liked visiting old buildings. ‘Do you like/Did you like visiting old buildings?’ asked Helen. 2. Bill asked Mary if she had done anything the previous weekend. ‘Have you done anything/Did you do anything last weekend?’ 3. The policeman asked me if the car belong to you me. 116

‘Does this car belong/Did this car belong to you?’asked the policeman. 4. Fiona asked me if I had seen her umbrella anywhere. ‘Did you see/Have you seen my umbrella anywhere ?’ asked Fiona. 5. Joe asked Tina when she would get back. ‘When will you get /have you got back?’asked Joe. 6. Eddie asked Steve who he had been to the cinema with. ‘Who did you go/had you been to the cinema with?’ asked Eddie. 7. My parents asked me what time I had got home the night before. ‘What time did you get/have you got home last night?’ my parents asked. 8. David asked a passer-by f it was the right road for Hastings. Is this/Was this the right road for Hastings? Asked David. TEST 1 UNIT 12 I. Which word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others? 1. A. plates B. cakes C. mates D. places 2. A. changed B. learned C. laughed D. arrived B. resident C. deposit D. prefer 3. A. emergency 4. A. wanted B. decided C. visited D. looked 5. A. prison B. limestone C. kind D. tribe B. who C. when D. where 6. A. which 7. A. carry B. hard C. card D. yard 8. A. twice B. flight C. piece D. mind 9. A. about B. around C. sound D. young B. oven C. coffee D. company 10. A. cover II. Choose the words that have the different stress from the others. 1. A. underground B. poisonous C. oxygen D. Jupiter 2. A. airless B. Saturn C. daytime D. transform 3. A. terrorist B. adventure C. Mercury D. galaxy 4. A. captain B. series C. precise D. weightless 5. A. environment B. inhabitant C. accommodate D. temperature III. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences. 1. People will take of robots to do household chores. A. chance B. condition C. success D. advantage 2. Many people think that robots will make workers . A. employed B. unemployed C. no job D. the jobless 3. It is certain that robots will the quality of our lives. A. improve B. rise C. lift D. develop and better medical , people will have a longer life expectancy. 4. With healthier A. ways – care B. lifestyles – care C. life – cares D. lifestyles – medicine 5. Many people think the cyberworld will the real world. A. take B. provide C. take place D. replace lots of lives. 6. The invention of penicillin is very useful because it has A. lost B. brought C. saved D. solved 7. It is said that in a couple of decades, we telepathy and holography. A. use B. will be used C. have used D. will be using 8. Mars is named the Roman God of war. A. to B. about C. after D. under in smart homes. 9. By 2050 we A. will have lived B. will be lived C. will live D. are living 117

10. The Earth seems too small to the increasing population. A. provide B. accommodate C. supply D. stand IV. Choose the word or phrase that best completes each unfinished sentence below. 1. The facsimile by Alexander Bain in 1843. A. is invented B. was invented C. invented D. has been invented 2. First, fry the onions , add the potatoes. A. than B. then C. after D. before 3. He a prize in the competition last week. A. win B. won C. was won D. has win 4. Who the company? A. goes B. walks C. jogs D. runs is an instrument for making sounds louder. 5. A. Loudspeaker B. Recorder C. Facsimile D. Radio 6. The doctor told me more fresh fruit. A. eat B. to eat C. eating D. ate 7. Can you repair my bike? A. use B. fix C. adjust D. A&B 8. Coffee was known in Europe ‘Arabian wine’. A. as B. like C. the same D. unlike for future use. 9. The information A. stores B. stored C. is stored D. are stored 10. I saw a flying overhead. A. train B. helicopter C. conveyor belt D. coach 11. This beautiful picture by Mary. A. is drawn B. is drew C. is draw D. is drawing 12. Don’t touch the paint! It’s still wet. A. do a job with something B. take something C. put your hand or finger on something D. put paint on something to change the color too close to the fire. 13. I warned him A. not to go B. not going C. no going D. didn’t go 14. is a pen that has a very small ball at the end. A. Crayon B. Fountain pen C. Pencil D. Ball-point pen 15. Tobacco is taxed in most countries, along with alcohol. A. in the same way as something B. but not something C. for example D. including 16. James picked up the and said “Hello”. A. vacuum B. printer C. telephone D. fax machine 17. Children, please behave! A. do and say the right things B. do something C. do what somebody tells you to do D. more on your legs, but not run a toaster on the table. 18. We now toast bread A. by B. with C. from 19. Which shall I press to turn the radio on? A. button B. roll C. roller 20. Don’t sit the sun too long. A. among B. on C. over 118

D. in D. plug D. in

Choose the words given to fill in the blanks correctly. light

between

becomes

month

around

seems

see

earth

the earth. As it moves in its circle, it (2) Once a month, the moon travels in a complete circle (1) to change shape. This is because we, on Earth, (3) only that section of the moon that catches the sun’s light. When the sun, the moon and the earth are in a straight line with the moon in the middle, it is impossible for us to see the moon. At this point, the moon is said to be new. We are unable to see it in this position because the side facing the (4) is in shadow. As the new moon begins to circle the earth, however, we begin to see that part of its surface that catches the sun’s (5) . After some days, when it reaches the position where the earth is (6) the sun and the moon, we see the full moon. Later, it again (7) half moon, becoming smaller and smaller until it disappears again to become the new moon. This cycle takes 28 days or a lunar (8) . VI. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. the solar system? Just for adventure? True, (2) Why does Man want to go to other planets (1) is adventure in space travel. But a (3) to other planets would also be (4) . For example, space stations could be built that would give us (5) information about the weather. In space stations (6) around the earth, Man could live and study the cloud formation on (7) surface. These formations could tell us what weather to (8) in any part of the world at any time. (9) information would be useful to pilots, to ship captains, and even to farmers (10) must set dates for planting and harvesting. 1. A. in B. on C. at D. of 2. A. this B. there C. that D. it 3. A. travel B. fly C. trip D. drive 4. A. practice B. practiced C. practicing D. practical 5. A. valuable B. wealthy C. expensive D. amused 6. A. moves B. moving C. moved D. moveable 7. A. his B. her C. its D. their 8. A. hope B. believe C. consider D. expect 9. A. Such B. Those C. So D. These 10. A. which B. who C. whom D. whose VII. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. the moon was a god. Other people thought it was just a light in Long ago a lot of people (1) the sky. And others thought it was a big (2) of cheese! The telescopes were made, and men saw that the moon was really another world. They wondered (3) it was like. They dreamed of going there. On July 20, 1969, that dream came (4) . Two American astronauts landed on the moon. (5) names were Neil Armstrong and Edwin Aldrin. The first thing the men found was that the moon is covered (6) dust. The dust is so thick that the men left (7) where they walked. Those were the first marks a living thing had ever made on the moon. And they could (8) there for years and years. There is no wind or rain to wipe them off. rocks to bring back to Earth for study. They dug up dirt to bring back. The two men (9) They set up machines to find out things people wanted to know. Then they were off on their long trip (10) the earth. 1. A. told B. guessed C. thought D. said 2. A. form B. ball C. stone D. round 3. A. what B. which C. that D. how 4. A. real B. true C. unreal D. untrue 5. A. Theirs B. His C. Its D. Their 119

6. A. with B. for C. to D. by 7. A. fingerprints B. handprints C. footprints D. prints 8. A. go B. remain C. put D. run 9. A. got up B. gave up C. picked up D. set up 10. A. onto B. from to C. into D. back to VIII.Rewrite the following sentences using questions words + to-infinitives. 1. We don’t know where we should put the sofa. _________________________________________________________________________ 2. The rules didn’t specify who I should speak to in case of an emergency. _________________________________________________________________________ 3. Mai wondered how she could ride the scooter. _________________________________________________________________________ 4. Let us decide when we should start the project. _________________________________________________________________________ 5. Could you tell me where I can find a good hotel? _________________________________________________________________________ 6. We must find out what we are to do next. _________________________________________________________________________ 7. A good dictionary tells you how you should pronounce the words. _________________________________________________________________________ 8. We are not sure who we will meet at the entrance. _________________________________________________________________________ 9. I cant remember when I have to turn off the oven. _________________________________________________________________________ 10. Do you know what you should look for? _________________________________________________________________________ IX. Complete the directed speech sentences. 1. Mr. Smith said: “Where are you going on your vacation this year? Mr. Smith asked ..................................................................................................................... 2. She said: “Did the mechanics finish repairing your car?” She asked ................................................................................................................................ 3. She said: “Why has David been looking so miserable lately?” She asked ................................................................................................................................ 4. I asked my friend: “Was anyone hurt in the car accident last month?” He asked my friend ................................................................................................................ 5. She asked me: “How old are you now ?” She asked me .......................................................................................................................... 6. He said to her: “Have you been to town today ?” She asked her .......................................................................................................................... 7. John said: “How long does it take you to get to London, Mary?” John asked Mary .................................................................................................................... 8. The policeman asked the little girl: “What’s your name?” The policeman asked the little girl ......................................................................................... 9. Mr. Green said to his secretary: “Who did you talk to a few minutes ago?” Mr. Green asked his secretary ................................................................................................ 10. Paul said: “Can you swim, Mary?” Paul asked Mary ..................................................................................................................... 11. He said: “Where can I find her in this town?” He asked ................................................................................................................................. 120

12. She asked her son: “Do you know which is the cup you used ?” She asked her son ................................................................................................................... 13. Helen said: “What did you say, Jack ?” Helen asked Jack .................................................................................................................... 14. She said to him: “Why didn’t you get up early this morning ?” She asked him ........................................................................................................................ 15. He said: “Will it rain tonight ?” He asked ................................................................................................................................. 16. “Every weekend, the astronauts can have private video-conferences with their families on the Earth,” Dr. Nelson said. Dr. Nelson said ........................................................................................................................ ..................................................................................................................................................... 17. “Have the astronauts ever forgotten anything from the Earth?” Nick asked his teacher. Nick asked his teacher ............................................................................................................. 18. “The astronauts on the ISS use a 3-D printer on board to print certain objects,” the teacher answered Nick. The teacher told Nick ............................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................................... 19. “Where can we look for life?” Nga asked Dr. Nelson . Nga asked Dr. Nelson ............................................................................................................ 20. “Ganymede, the largest moon of Jupiter, has a large salt water ocean,” the teacher said. The teacher said ...................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................... X. Put these sentences into the reported speech. 1. He said to her, “You are my friend.” ......................................................................................................................................... 2. Johnny said to his mother, “I don’t know how to do this exercise.” ......................................................................................................................................... 3. “Don’t come back before one o’clock”, advised my brother. ......................................................................................................................................... 4. “Cook it in butter”, Mrs Brown said to her daughter. ......................................................................................................................................... 5. The pupils said “Teacher, give us better marks, please.” ......................................................................................................................................... 6. My friend said, “Are you going to leave tomorrow?” ......................................................................................................................................... 7. “Have you done your homework?”, said my mother. ......................................................................................................................................... 8. I asked Bill,” What time did you go to bed last night?” ......................................................................................................................................... 9. Paul said, “I must go home now.” ......................................................................................................................................... 10. “There is an accident”, said the policeman. ......................................................................................................................................... 11. “We are waiting for the school bus”, said the children. ......................................................................................................................................... 12. “Must you go now?” said Mr Brown. ......................................................................................................................................... 13. “Are you going to visit your aunt tomorrow?” asked Tom. ......................................................................................................................................... 14. “Listen to me and don’t make a noise,” said the teacher to his students.

......................................................................................................................................... 15. “Tin tired of eating fish”, said Mary to Helen. ......................................................................................................................................... 16. “The sun always rises in the east,” said Peter. ......................................................................................................................................... 17. “I didn’t steal your fur coat yesterday,” said Samny to Jean. ......................................................................................................................................... 18. “You must do your homework everyday”, said Miss Lan to us. ......................................................................................................................................... 19. “Will we read the story?”, Bill asked his teacher. ......................................................................................................................................... 20. “I don’t know where Alice is,” said Vicky. ......................................................................................................................................... 21. Mary asked me “Can you tell me why you are so sad?” ......................................................................................................................................... 22. “Will you please find out when he last wrote to me?” Jane said to her friend. ......................................................................................................................................... 23. “You must decide what you want to do”, she said to her daughter. ......................................................................................................................................... XI. Write meaningful sentences about the appearance of aliens based on the words or phrases given, using “may/ might”. 1. Aliens/ a hard container/ the brain. ..................................................................................................................................................... 2. They/ two eyes/ a nose/ a mouth/ us. ..................................................................................................................................................... 3. Their eyes/ bug-like/ and/ the nose/ not/ in the middle of the face. ..................................................................................................................................................... 4. Besides teeth/ aliens/ other systems/ eating. ..................................................................................................................................................... 5. They/ two arms/ but/ arms/ suckers/ pick up small objects. ..................................................................................................................................................... 6. Their hand/ only three or four fingers. ..................................................................................................................................................... 7. The number of joints/ greater/ and/ direction of bending/ different. ..................................................................................................................................................... XII. Choose the words or phrases that are not correct in Standard English. 1. James should be tell the news as soon as possible. A B C D 2. The assistant asked Helen whether those shoes was too small for her. A B C D 3. It was late, so we decided taking a taxi home. A B C D 4. I don’t know who wrote the song, but I’ll try and find about. A B C D 5. She showed me where did I left my luggage. A B C D

121

122

TEST 2 UNIT 12 I. Write the words from the box in the correct part of the table, according to the stress pattern.

powerful wonderful bottomless faithful

painful harmful delightful motionless

expressionless thoughtful breathless respectful

skillful directionless successful uneventful

spotless disgraceful tasteless resourceful

Oo Ooo oOo oOoo ooOo

ocean difference

II. Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others. A. alien B. atmosphere C. adventure D. galaxy A. exploration B. accommodate C. environment D. experience A. forgetful B. wonderful C. beautiful D. waterless A. sighting B. climate C. attempt D. system A. astronaut B. Mercury C. Jupiter D. computer III. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences. 6. An astronaut has to wear a spacesuit it may be very cold in space. A. so B. but C. because D. because of 7. The UFO landed on a area. A. grass B. grassy C. grassed D. grassing 8. Scientists have been trying to find of aliens. A. amounts B. records C. traces D. sights reported. 9. There have been many UFO A. sights B. signs C. signals D. sightings 10. Mars is called the Red Planet due to its surface. A. red B. redder C. reddest D. reddish 11. In the mid-19th century, scientists discovered that Mars had some similarities Earth. A. to B. with C. of D. from 12. Neptune is bright blue it is named after the Roman God of the sea. A. because B. but C. so D. or 13. There is a lot of interest in doing experiments in the conditions. A. weigh B. weighing C. weight D. Weightless 14. Titan, one of Saturnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s , has a thick atmosphere. A. satellite B. spaceships C. moons D. comets 15. Scientists believe that Mars also seasons just as the Earth does. A. spends B. experiences C. experiments D. takes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

IV. Match a word/phrase in column A with its definition in column B, and write the answer in each blank. Answer

A. a large body in space that moves around the sun B. Unidentified Flying Object C. having no weight, especially when travelling in space D. a creature that comes from another planet E. a large group of stars and planets in outer space F. a vehicle in which people can travel in space G. a person who travels in a spaceship H. the sun and the planets that move around it I. a man-made object that has been sent into space and that moves around a planet 10.weightless (adj) J. the path taken by something (a planet, a satellite, etc.) going round something else in space V. Fill in each blank of the passage with the correct word from the box. 1. alien (n) 2. spaceship (n) 3. solar system (n) 4. galaxy (n) 5. UFO 6. planet (n) 7. orbit 8. satellite (n) 9. astronaut (n)

123

life conditions

clouds kind

system atmosphere

Can there be Life in the Environment of Titan? Titan is Saturn's largest moon and the second largest in the solar (1) (after Ganymede of Jupiter). It is the only moon in the solar system with clouds and a dense, planet-like (2) . Scientists believe that (3) on Titan are similar to Earth's early years. The main (4) is that, because it is closer to the sun, Earth has always been warmer. Titan's atmosphere is very cold, from -200 degrees to -179 degrees Celsius! In the atmosphere there are layers of (5) composed of complex molecules such as methane. There also may be an (6) of methane, or perhaps a liquid water layer inside the moon. This type of environment, except for the cold, is the (7) of environment in which scientists think (8) began. VI. Fill in each blank in the following passage, using the words given in the box.

believe

nearest

billion

intelligent

Earth

spaceship

numbers

ordinary

universe

Our planet (1) is revolving around the sun, which is a fairly small and (2) star. There are about 250 (3) stars in our galaxy. and billions of galaxies in the (4) In recent years, scientists have wondered about the possibility of (5) life forms on the other planets. Some scientists (6) that there may be large (7) of stars with their own planets. It is almost impossible to reach the stars (8) the Milky Way galaxy. It would about 40,000 years to reach the (10) star. take the fastest Earth (9) all the time. VII. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. Once a month, the moon travels in a complete circle (1) the earth. As it moves in its circle, it (2) to change shape. This is because we, on Earth, (3) only that section of the moon that catches the sun's light. When the sun, the moon and the earth are in a straight line with the moon in the middle, it is impossible for us to see the moon. At this point, the moon is said to be new. We are unable to see it in this position because the side facing the (4) is in shadow. As the new moonbegin to circle the earth, however, we begin to see that part of its surface that catches the sun's (5) . After some days, when it reaches the position where the earth is (6) the sun and the moon, we see the full moon. Later, it again (7) half moon, becoming smaller and smaller until it disappears again to become the new moon. This cycle takes 28 days or a lunar (8) . 1. A.around B.under C.between D.through 124

2. A.looks B.wants C.seems D.takes 3. A.hear B.know C.see D.understand 4. A.sun B.earth C.moon D.sky 5. A.light B.energy C.heat D.movement 6. A.across B.between C.over D.after 7. A.sees B.goes C.gets D.becomes 8. A.week B.month C.fortnight D.year VIII. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in the following passage. Why does Man want to go to other planets (1) the solar system? Just for adventure? True, (2) is adventure in space travel. But a (3) to other planets would also be (4) . For example, space stations could be built that would give us (5) information about the weather. In space stations (6) around the earth, Man could live and study the cloud formations on (7) surface. These formations could tell us what weather to (8) in any part of the world at any time. (9) information would be useful to pilots, to ship captains, and even to farmers (10) must set dates for planting and harvesting. 1. A. on B. in C. at D.of 2. A. there B. this C. that D.it 3. A. travel B. fly C. trip D.drive 4. A.practice B.practised C.practising D.practical 5. A. valuable B. wealthy C. expensive D. amused 6. A. moves B. moving C. moved D. moveable 7. A. his B. her C. its D. their 8. A. hope B. believe C. expect D. consider 9. A. These B. Those C. So D. Such 10. A. which B. who C. whom D. whose IX. Read the passage and then decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F) The International Space Station â&#x20AC;&#x201C; the manned satellite - has constantly circled the Earth in low orbit up to now. Since the first permanent crew moved in on 2 November 2000, 220 people representing 17 countries have come and gone. Most of those astronauts have been Americans on the space shuttle flights to deliver the equipment, food and other supplies. Russia has sent the second largest number of people, with Canada and Japan tied for third. At least one American and one Russian have been on board at all times. The ISS orbits 240 miles above the planet at 17,150 mph and can often be seen by the naked eye. The complex has grown from three to 13 rooms and the current structure has a mass of nearly 450 tons. More than 26,500 meals have been served, 1,760 experiments carried out and 189 spacewalks undertaken, according to NASA. The 189 spacewalkshave been undertaken to build and maintain the space station. The most important experiment, according to Commander Scott Kelly, was about keeping humans alive in space. NASA administrator, Charles Bolden, called the 15-year milestone in 2015 "a remarkable moment". He added, "It has taught us about what's possible when tens of thousands of people across 15 countries work together with the shared goals.â&#x20AC;? T F 1. The International Space Station started working on 2 November 2000. 2. People of different nationalities have worked on the ISS. 3. American astronauts flew on the space shuttles to bring supplies to the ISS. 4. The Iss orbits high above the Earth and can only be seen through telescopes. 5. The space station travels around the Earth at the speed of light. 6. The astronauts have to walk outside space to maintain the space station. 7. The most important experiment done by the ISS was about keeping humans lively in space. 125

8. The achievements of the ISS are to make thousands of people in many countries collaborate with the same purposes. X. Read the passage, and do the tasks that follow. The New Horizons - a NASA probe- went past Pluto in summer 2015. Pluto was discovered by Clyde Tombaugh - an American astronomer- in 1930 as the ninth planet in the solar system. However, in January 19, 2006, Pluto was regarded as a dwarf planet. In the solar system, there are the inner rocky planets, such as the Earth, Mars, Venus and Mercury, and the outer gas giants, like Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune. Pluto and its largest moon, Charon, belong to a third category known as "ice dwarfs". They have solid surfaces but, unlike the other planets, their mass is icy material. The probe traveled more than 3.6 billion miles to take the photos. The new image shows a clear view of Pluto's surface, and it is covered with wide smooth areas, mountains. Huge mountains are made of water ice. Scientists hope that information from the Horizons will prove that there might be a lot of water on Pluto. Finding water on another world is important because water is considered one of the key materials life. Besides Charon, Pluto has four other small moons: Styx, Nix, Kerberos, and Hydra. The New Horizon's mission makes the United States the first nation to send a space to probe every planet from Mercury to Pluto. Task 1: Match a word in column A with its definition in column B, writing the answer in each blank. Answer

1. probe 2. astronomer 3. dwarf 4. category 5. key

A. a scientist who studies universe B.a group of people or things that are similar to each other C. a small spacecraft with no one travelling in it D. very important E. someone or something that is smaller than the usual size

Task 2: Read the passage again, and then answer the following questions. 6. When was Pluto discovered? 7.

Why was Pluto not considered a planet but a dwarf planet?

How far did the New Horizons travel to take the photos of Pluto?

Why do scientists hope that there might be a lot of water on Pluto?

10. Why was the mission to Pluto important to the United States? XI. Choose the word or phrase among A, B, Cor D that best fits the blank space in following passage. Long ago a lot of people (1) the moon was a god. Other people thought it was just a light in the sky. And others thought it was a big (2) of cheese! The telescopes were made, and men saw that the moon was really another world. They wondered (3) it was like. They dreamed of going there. On July 20, 1969, thatdream came (4) . Two American astronauts landed on the moon. (5) names were Neil Armstrong and Edwin Aldrin. The first thing the men found was that the moon is covered (6) dust. The dust isso thick that the men left (7) where they walked. Those were the first marks a living thing had ever made on the moon. And they could (8) there for years and years. There is no wind or rain to wipe them off. The two men (9) rocks to bring back to Earth for study. They dug up dirt to bring back. They set up machines to find out things people wanted to know. Then they were off on their long trip (10) the earth. 1. A.thought B.guessed C.told D.said 2. A.form B.stone C.ball D.round 126

3. A.how B.which C.that D.what 4. A.real B.true C.unreal D.untrue 5. A.Their B.His C.Its D.Their 6. A.by B.for C.to D.with 7. A.fingerprints B.footprints C.handprints D.prints 8. A.go B.remain C.put D.run 9. A.got up B.gave up C.picked up D.set up 10. A.back to B.from to C.into D.onto XII. Read the following passage carefully, then write True (T) or False (F) for each statement. People have been talked about UFOs for ages. Millions of normal people keep saying that they were caught and taken into UFOs. The first case was in the 1950s when George Adamski said a UFO had taken him to the far side of the moon. Another case took place in 1961, when an American couple, Betty and Barley Hill, were chased by a UFO while they were driving home one night in New Hampshire. The couple stopped to observe the UFO through binoculars. To escape from it, they took the back roads and arrived home two hours later. Fourteen years later, in 1975, one of the most shocking events happened in a small town in Arizona, when a woodcutter called Travis Walton disappeared with a blue-green light from a flying saucer under his teammates' eyes. Five days later, the missing woodcutter returned home and said, "I woke up on the UFO and found myself among strangers with no hair and half-formed face The put a mask over my face and asleep again. I remembered nothing else until I awoke in the forest where I had been caught.â&#x20AC;? T F 1. It was first claimed that someone had been taken away in a UFO in the middle of the 20thcentury. 2. Betty and Barley Hill live in the USA. 3. Betty and Barley Hill were also taken away in a UFO. 4. Travis Walton was caught on the road. 5. The aliens wore the masks all the time while Travis was staying with them. XIII. Choose the item among A, B, C or D that best answers the question about the passage. A UFO (Unidentified Flying Object) is any object flying in the sky which cannot be identified by the person who sees it. Sometimes the object is investigated. If people cannot figure out what the object is after an investigation, it is called a UFO. If they figure out what the object is, it can no longer be called a UFO because it has been identified. Even though UFOs can be anything, people can use the word UFO when they are talking about alien spacecraft. Flying saucer is another word that is often used to describe an identified flying object. Studies estimate that 50-90% of all reported sightings are identified later. Usually 10- 20% are never identified. Studies also show that very few UFO sightings are hoaxes (people trying to trick other people). Most UFOs are actually natural or man-made objects that looked strange. 80-90% of UFOs are identified as one of three different things: (a) astronomical causes (for example: planets, stars, or meteors); (b) aircraft; and (c) balloons. 10-20% UFOs are other causes, such as birds, clouds, mirages, searchlights, etc. 1. Another word used to describe a UFO is . A.astronaut B.cooking plane C.spacecraft D.flying saucer 2. How many percent of all reported sights are notidentified? A.10-20% B.20-30% C.30-50% D.80-90% 3. Most of UFOs are identified as one of the following things except . A.balloons B.rains C.stars D.clouds 4. Which of the following sentences is NOT true? A.UFO means Unidentified Flying Object. B.UFO is often used to talk about alien objects. C.Many UFO sightings are hoaxes. D.Over half of all reported UFO sightings are identified. 5. What does the word "figure out" in paragraph 1 mean? A.explain B.observe C.calculate D. require 127

XIV. Read the passage carefully, and then answer the questions below. Neptune, like the other gas giants in our solar system, doesn't have much of a solid surface to live on. However, the planet's moon, Triton, might make an interesting place to set up a space colony. So far, only a spaceship has ever flown past Triton. In the summer of 1989, Voyager 2 flew by Neptune and its system, and was able to photograph the southern hemisphere of the moon. Images show that Triton's surface is mostly made up of rock and nitrogen ice, and there are smooth areas next to volcanos. The smooth areas are formed by clouds of dust and nitrogen gas which erupt from the volcanos. 1. What is Triton? 2.

What is the interesting thing about Triton?

How many spaceships have ever flown past Triton?

What can we see on the surface of the moon?

How are the smooth areas formed?

XV. Rewrite the sentences in reported speech. 1. Nhi: Space offers unique pleasures including the view and zero gravity activities. Nhi said ________________________________________________________________________ . 2. Duong: Space travel is risky and expensive. Duong thought that ________________________________________________________________ . 3. Mai: Will Enceladus provide a habitable environment for life? Mai asked _______________________________________________________________________ . 4. Nick: When did the flyby take place? Nick asked ______________________________________________________________________ . 5. Mi: What do scientists discover from the photos of Saturn's moon -Enceladus? Mi asked ______________________________________________________________________ XVI. Rewrite the sentences in reported speech. 1. Dr. Nelson: The heat from its sun made Kepler-452b lose its oceans. Dr. Nelson said __________________________________________________________________ . 2. Mai: How old is Kepler-452b - the Earth's cousin? Mai asked _____________________________________________________________________ . 3. Nick: The recycling system of the ISS supply 4 liters of water a day. Nick said ______________________________________________________________________ . 4. Duong: How can the astronauts wash their hair, Mi? Duong asked Mi _________________________________________________________________ . 5. Mi: They use no-rinse shampoo and a towel to wash their hair. Mi said ________________________________________________________________________ . 6. Phong: Many thousand people saw a UFO hovering around the International Space Station last year. Phong said _____________________________________________________________________ XVII. Rewrite the sentences in reported speech. 1. â&#x20AC;&#x153;Every weekend, the astronauts can have private video-conferences with their families on the Earth," Dr. Nelson said. Dr. Nelson said ___________________________________________________________________ 2. "Have the astronauts ever forgotten anything from the Earth?" Nick asked his teacher. Nick asked his teacher _____________________________________________________________ 128

3. "The astronauts on the ISS use a 3-D printer on board to print certain object,” the teacher answered Nick. The teacher told Nick ______________________________________________________________ 4. "Where can we look for life?" Mai asked Dr. Nelson. Mai asked Dr. Nelson ______________________________________________________________ 5. "Ganymede, the largest moon of Jupiter, has a large salt water ocean," the teacher said. The teacher said __________________________________________________________________ 6. "Does Mars have ice under its surface?" Mi asked the teacher. Mi asked the teacher ______________________________________________________________ TEST 3 UNIT 12 I. Mark the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the word whose main stress is placed differently from the rest. 1. A. negative B. scholarship C. develop D. purposeful 2. A. ability B. acceptable C. education D. hilarious 3. A. document B. comedian C. perspective D. location 4. A. product B. provide C. promote D. profess 5. A. different B. regular C. achieving D. property II. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others. 1. A. space B. strange C. planet D. play B.alive C.alien D. balloon 2. A.alien 3. A. balloon B. moon C. flood D. proof 4. A. mineral B. pilot C. five D. size 5. A. mineral B. life C. pipe D. sight III. Mark the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the word whose main stress is placed differently from the rest. 1. A. education B. devolvement C. economic D. preparation 2. A. chocolate B. structural C. important D. natural 3. A. attractive B. perception C. cultural D. expensive 4. A. literature B. entertainment C. recreation D. information 5. A. attend B. option C. percent D. become IV. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D in each line. 1. I have to do this job because I have no . A. choose B. choice C. choosing D. chosen 2. English is used by pilots to ask for landing in Cairo. A. instruct B. instructors C. instructions D. instructive 3. He did some odd jobs at home . A. disappointment B. disappointed C. disappoint D. disappointedly . 4. Don't be afraid. This snake is A. harm B. harmful C. harmless D. unharmed 5. During his his family lived in the United State. A. child B. childhood C. childish D. Childlike novels on adventure. 6. Jack London wrote several A. interest B. interestedly C. interesting D. interested 7. He failed the final exam because he didn't make any or it. A. prepare B. preparation C. preparing D. prepared 8. The custom was said to be a matter of . A. convenient B. convenience C. conveniently D. convene in her book. 9. She is A. absorbed B. absorbent C. absorptive D. absorb 10. As she is so with her present job, she has decided to leave. 129

A. satisfy B. satisfied

C. satisfying D. unsatisfied

V. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D in each line. 1. By the end of the month I in this town for ten years. A. will have been living B. have been living C. will live D. am living 2. By the end of this week we on the project for a month. A. have been working B. have worked C. will have been working D. will work 3. By July the fifth they English for 3 year. A. are studying B. will study C. will have studied D. will have been studying TV for 4 hours. 4. By 10 o'clock she (watch) A. will have been watching B. has been watching C. is watching D. will watch 5. She for 10 hours by 11 o'clock. A. will have been sleeping B. has sleeping C. is sleeping D. will sleep 6. We him for 40 days by next Saturday. A. will look for B. are looking for C. will have been looking for D. will have been looking for the president for 5 hours. 7. They (wait) A. will have been waiting B. are waiting C. will wait D. have waited VI. Each of the sentences below has at least one mistake. Identify and correct the mistakes. 1. "I'll finish the work by the end of this week.” John promisedfinishing the work by the end of this week. A. promised B. finishing C. by D. this week 2. "You ought to take a break, Andrew." Sheadvised Andrew to takes a break. A. she B. advised C. to takes D. break 3. "Don't forget to go to the supermarket after work.” They reminded to go to the supermarketafter work. A. they B. to go C. supermarket D. after 4. “Why don't we sing a few songs?" He suggested we sang a fewsongs. A. suggested B. sang C. few D. songs 5. She told me, “I am going to the party with my mother”. She told me she would go to the party with her mother. A. told B. she C. party D. mother 6. They said, "We have plenty of time to do our work”. They said they have plenty of time to do our homework. A. have B. of C. to do D. homework 7. He said, "This is the book you have been looking for”. He said this is the book I have been looking for. A. the B. have C. looking D. for 8. Don't put your elbow on the table. She toldme not to put your elbow on the table. A. told B. me C. your D. the 130

VII. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D in each line. 1. She said to me "I will go to China next week.” A. She said she would go to China the following week. B. She said she will go to China the following week. C. She said I would go to China the following week. D. She said she would go to China next week. 2. She doesn't go to China with us. A. I wish she had went to China with us. B. I wish she went to China with us. C. I wish she had gone to China with us. D. I wish she didn't go to China with us. 3. Someone has stolen my bike. A. My bike have been stolen. B. My bike was been stolen. C. My bike has been stolen. D. My bike is stolen. 4. She is the woman. I met her last week. A. She is the woman who I met last week. B. She is the woman whom I met her last week. C. She is the woman which I met last week. D. She is the woman whom I met last week. 5. Money doesn't grow on trees. We aren't rich. A. If money grow on trees, we will be rich. B. If money grew on trees, we would be rich. C. If money had grown on trees, we would have been rich. D. If money has grown on trees, we would be rich. 6. I last saw her ten years ago. A. I don't have seen her for ten years. B. I hadn't seen her for ten years. C. I haven't seen her for ten years. D. I didn't see her for ten years. 7. Cars cause pollution. However, people still want them. A. Although cars cause pollution, but people still want them. B. Although despite cars cause pollution, people still want them. C. Although cars cause pollution, people still want them. D. Although of cars cause pollution, people still want them. VIII. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D in each line. 1. Write your name clearly on the top. A. He asked to write my name clearly on the top. B. He asked to write your name clearly on the top. C. He asked write my name clearly on the top. D. He asked writing my name clearly on the top. 2. Don't wipe your dirty fingers on my clothes. A. He ordered do not to wipe my dirty fingers on the clothes. B. He ordered not to wipe my dirty fingers on the clothes. C. He ordered not to wipe your dirty fingers on the clothes. D. He ordered don't to wipe your dirty fingers on the clothes. 3. Wait here under the tree until the rain stops. A. He ask me to wait here under the tree until the rain stops. B. He asked me to wait here under the tree until the rain stops. C. He asked me wait here under the tree until the rain stops. D. He said to wait here under the tree until the rain stops. 4. Come and see me whenever you have a few hours to spare. A. She told me to come and see me whenever I have a few hours to spare. 131

B. She told me to come and see her whenever you have a few hours to spare. C. She told me to come and see her whenever I have a few hours to spare D. She told me to come and see me whenever you have a few hours to spare. When did they tell you that? A. They wanted to know when they told you that. B. They wanted to know when did they tell me that. C. They wanted to know when they did tell me that. D. They wanted to know when they told me that. Have you seen the new film? A. They wanted to know if have I watched a new film. B. They wanted to know if had I watched a new film. C. They wanted to know if I had watched a new film. D. They wanted to know if I have watched a new film.

IX. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D. 1. "Jean, have you seen my gloves?" Tom asked. A. Tom asked Jean whether/if she had seen his gloves. B. Tom asked Jean whether/if had you seen his gloves. C. Tom asked Jean whether/if had she seen his gloves. D. Tom asked Jean whether if she had seen her gloves. 2. “Don't leave the window open, Ann", I said. A. I told Ann does not leave the window open. B. I told Ann not to leave the window open. C. I told Ann to leave the window open. D. I told Ann not leave the window open. 3. "I'll have a cup of coffee with you," she said. A. She said that she have a cup of coffee with me. B. She said that she had a cup of coffee with me. C. She said that she would have a cup of coffee with me. D. She said that she would have a cup of coffee with you. 4. “I’ll pay him if can" she said. A. She said that she will pay him if she could. B. She said that I would pay him if I could. C. She said that she would pay him if she could. D. She said that she would pay him if she can. 5. “What are you going to do next summer?" she asked. A. She asked us what we were going to do the following summer. B. She asked us what I was going to do the following summer. C. She asked us what were we going to do the following summer. D. She asked us what we was going to do the following summer. 6. “I’ll phone you tomorrow," he told Jack. A. He told Jack that I would phone him the following day. B. He told Jack that I will phone him the following. C. He told Jack that he would phone him tomorrow. D. He told Jack that he would phone him the following day. 7. "Can I sit beside you, Jean?" Tom asked. A. Tom asked Jean whether/if I could sit beside her. B. Tom asked Jean whether/if could he sit beside her. C. Tom asked Jean whether if he could sit beside her. D. Tom asked Jean whether/if he could sit beside you. 8. "I want a bike for my birthday," he said. 132

A. He said that he wanted a bike for his birthday. B. He said that I wanted a bike for his birthday. C. He said that he wants a bike for his birthday. D. He said that he wanted a bike for my birthday. 9. "Don't keep the door locked," he said to us. A. He told us not to keep the door locked. B. He told us do not keep the door locked. C. He told us not keep the door locked. D. He told us to not keep the door locked. 10. “How long are you going to stay?" I asked him. A. I asked him how long I was going to stay. B. I asked him how long you were going to stay. C. I asked him how long were you going to stay. D. I asked him how long he was going to stay. X. Match the terms with the suitable definitions. A 1. astronomer 2. black hole 3. comet 4. galaxy 5. orbit

B a. the path followed by an object in space as it moves around another object. b. a huge collection of stars, star clusters, and dust and gas that measures many light years across. c. a small frozen mass of gas, dust, and ice. d. a scientist who makes observations and studies planets, stars, galaxies any anything else in space. e. super dense invisible objects in outer space that form when a massive star collapses from its own gravity.

XI. Read the text and answer the questions. How many planets are there in our galaxy? That's a tricky question to answer. Are there other planets that support life? That’s exactly what the Kepler mission hopes to discover. NASA launched the Kepler space telescope, designed to find habitable planets, in 2009. So far it has discovered five new Earth-sized planets beyond our solar system. These planets are hotter than the Earth's sun - much too hot for life as we know it. The Kepler team predicts that they will need at least three years (and possibly longer) to find an Earth-like planet. The simplest requirement for a planet to have life (carbon-based life like on Earth) is for there to be liquid water (not frozen or gas) so the distance from the planet's sun and therefore temperature are important. There also needs to be the correct amount of air. If a planet is as small as Mars (half the size of Earth) its weak gravity means that it can't hold on to air molecules. If a planet is Neptune sized (four times bigger than Earth) it has very strong gravity and too much air. So size matters too.

Questions: 1. What is the mission of the Kepler? ____________________________________________________________________________ 2. When did NASA launch the Kepler space telescope? ____________________________________________________________________________ 3. What was the Kepler designed to do? ____________________________________________________________________________ 4. How many new Earth-sized planets beyond our solar system has the Kepler discovered? ____________________________________________________________________________ 5. Are these planets cooler than the Earth's sun? 133

____________________________________________________________________________ How many years did it take to find an Earth-like planet according to the Kepler team? ____________________________________________________________________________ 7. What conditions are necessary for an area to be considered a habitable zone? ____________________________________________________________________________ 8. Is the Mars bigger than the Earth? ____________________________________________________________________________ 9. Is the Neptune four times bigger than Earth? ____________________________________________________________________________ 10. Does Neptune have very weak gravity? ____________________________________________________________________________ 6.

XII. Read the text and decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F). Many people have seen UFO’s and have taken great pictures of them. There is a mystery though, why haven't they landed and made contact with us? That is a tough question, and remains to be answered. The evidence if unidentified flying objects is overwhelming. With new UFO sightings popping up every week, they just can't be ignored. Take for example the UFO sightings at the Chicago O’Hare airport. Several very creditable people saw the unidentified flying object up close and gave eyewitness testimony as to what they saw. We believe that contact with these aliens is coming soon. We also think that aliens can most probable help us with many of the problems humans faces such as the threat of Global Warming. Alien Technology from certain races is surely far superior to ours.

True False (T) (F)

No.

Sentence

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

There are a lot of pictures of UFO Aliens have landed and made contact with human. Several people saw the UFO at the Chicago O'Hare airport. People believe that contact with these aliens is coming soon. People think that the threat of Global Warming can be solved by aliens.

XIII. Read the following and mark the letter A, B, C or D to indicate correct answer to each of the questions. Are there intelligent beings on the planets in our solar system? Most scientists do not think so. If there are, the only likely place is Mars. It is fun to imagine our kind of humans on other worlds, but they would probably look so different we might not recognize them as people at all. Living things have a wonderful way of adapting themselves to conditions around in order to stay alive. Plants grow in the Arctic. Some simple animals can survive being boiled or frozen. Creatures live in the blackest deeps of the sea under thousands of tons of pressure. We cannot really state that our kind of air is the only kind living things could breathe or that they must have water or certain climate. Creatures that breathed other gases or lived in other temperatures, however, would not look like us. Are there people anywhere else in the universe? Maybe there are. In our own galaxy, there are billions of stars. Some must have planets with conditions like those on earth. Somewhere in space, there could be other thinking beings. If their planets are older, they may know more than we do. They may be a traveling in space. Questions: 1. Scientists think that on other planets in our solar system there are A. probably some other intelligent beings. B. probably no other intelligent beings. 134

C. certainly some other intelligent beings. D. certainly no other intelligent beings. Scientists think that any intelligent beings on other planets in our solar system. A. would live under thousands of tons of pressure. B. would be very different from us. C. would already be traveling in space. D. would have adapted themselves to conditions better than we have done. What do creatures do to stay alive if conditions around them change? A. to travel in space. B. to grow in the Arctic. C. to go to other worlds. D. to adapt themselves. The bolded word "They" in the passage refers to A. planets. B. conditions. C. other thinking beings. D. billions of stars. Other human beings live A. possibly on other planets of stars in our galaxy. B. possibly on other planets in our solar system. C. possibly on other stars in our own galaxy. D. everywhere in the universe.

XIV. Read the text again and decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F). No. Sentence True (T) False (F) 1. Most scientists think that there are intelligent beings on other planets in our solar system. 2. Intelligent beings on other planets are similar to human. 3. Plants in the Arctic can survive being boiled or frozen. 4. Living things can breathe other gases or live in other temperatures, and certainly look like us. 5. Intelligent beings on other planets may be already traveling in space.

XV. Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meaning of the first sentence. 1. "Open your book" he said to them. He told them _________________________________________________________________ 2. "Where are you going?" Jim asked Linda. Jim asked Linda where _________________________________________________________ 3. "Which way did they go?" John asked. John asked ___________________________________________________________________ 4. "Bring it back if it doesn't fit", I said to her. I told _______________________________________________________________________ 5. "Don't try to open it now," she said to us. She told _____________________________________________________________________ 6. "Is it going to be a fine day today?" I asked her. I asked her ___________________________________________________________________ 7. "He's not at home", she said. She said that __________________________________________________________________ 8. "Is the bus station far away?" the girl asked. The girl wanted to know ________________________________________________________ 9. "Don't stay out late, Ann" Tony said. Tony told Ann ________________________________________________________________ 10. "Please let me borrow your bike," he said to her. He asked ____________________________________________________________________ 135

. . . . . .

XVI. Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meaning of the first sentence. 1. "Are you going by train?" she asked me. She wanted to know ____________________________________________________________ 2. "Don't use too much hot water," she said to us. She asked us _________________________________________________________________ 3. "Will you come to my party?” she said to me. She invited me ________________________________________________________________ 4. "Don't do it again," she said to them. She told them _________________________________________________________________ 5. "Did Mr. Brown send the potatoes to you?" she asked. She asked ____________________________________________________________________ 6. "Don't get your shoes dirty, boys," she said. She told _____________________________________________________________________ 7. “What do you want for lunch today, Peter?" Mary asked. Mary asked __________________________________________________________________ 8. “Can I borrow your typewriter, Jean?" asked Peter. Peter asked if _________________________________________________________________ 9. "Why didn't I get a computer before?" thought the office manager. The office manager wondered ____________________________________________________ 10. “You had better not lend him any more money, Amanda" said John. John advised Amanda __________________________________________________________ XVII. Complete the second sentences without changing the meaning of the first sentences. 1. The doctor said to me, "You shouldn't lose weight” The doctor advised me __________________________________________________________ 2. Mary said, "Let's go to the park." Mary suggested _______________________________________________________________ 3. "I didn't break the car", Jack said. Jack denied __________________________________________________________________ 4. "You told a lie, Michael", she said. She accused Michael____________________________________________________________ 5. “I can't go to your birthday party next Sunday evening, Jack", said Jane. Jane apologized for ____________________________________________________________ 6. "I won't help you with your homework. Never!” Katarina said to me. Katarina refused _______________________________________________________________ 7. John said, "Please come to my party.” John invited __________________________________________________________________ 8. Mr. Brown said, "Don't play on the street.” Mr. Brown warned the children not ________________________________________________ 9. "Would you like to come on a picnic with us?” They invited __________________________________________________________________ 10. "Please don't tell anybody what happened.” He asked ____________________________________________________________________

. . . . 136

. . . . . . . . . .

TEST 1 FOR UNIT 10,11,12 I. Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others. 1. A.telepathy B.community C.development D.scientific 2. A.incident B.terrorist C.adventure D.cultural 3. A.disease B.tablet C.buggy D.robot 4. A.unnatural B.impossible C.emotionless D.disrespectful 5. A.multimedia B.communication C.similarity D.possibility II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete the sentences. 6. People will take of robots to do household chores. A.chance B.condition C.advantage D.success 7. Many people think that robots will make workers . A.employed B.unemployed C.no job D.the jobless 8. It is certain that robots will the quality of our lives. A.improve B.rise C.lift D.develop 9. With healthier and better medical , people will have a longer life expectancy. A.ways - care B.lifestyles â&#x20AC;&#x201C; care C.life - cares D.lifestyles - medicine 10. Many people think the cyberworld will the real world. A.take B.provide C.take place D.replace 11. The invention of penicillin is very useful because it has lots of lives. A.lost B.brought C.saved D.solved 12. It is said that in a couple of decades, we telepathy and holography. A.use B.will be used C.have used D.will be using 13. Mars is named the Roman God of war. A.to B.about C.after D.under 14. By 2050 we in smart homes. A.will live B.will be lived C.will have lived D.are living 15. The Earth seems too small to the increasing population. A.provide B.accommodate C.supply D.stand III. Complete the sentences with the words/phrases in the box. Some can be completed with more than one answer. a smartphone

a landline phone

a tablet computer

an Internet connection

a laptop

a social network a Wi-Fi connection

1. You can make a phone call with __________________________________________________ . 2. You can send a text message with _________________________________________________ . 3. You can use the Internet with ____________________________________________________ . 4. You can send an email with _____________________________________________________ . 5. You can send an attachment with _________________________________________________ . 6. You can leave a voice message with _______________________________________________ . 7. You can pick up voicemail with __________________________________________________ . 8. You can use video chat with _____________________________________________________ . 9. You can update your status with __________________________________________________ . 10. You can connect and share your status or photos with your family and friends online with _____ . IV. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tenses. 1. The four planets closest to the sun - Mercury, Venus, Earth, and Mars - (be) called the terrestrial planets because they have solid, rocky surfaces. 2. Our grandparents (come) to stay with us next weekend. 3. People (wonder) for ages whether we are alone in the universe. 4. This time next week, we (take) an English test. 5. By the end of this year, I (learn) English for 6 years 6. By the end of this century, scientists (discover) intelligent life. 137

7. Beagle 2 - the first British spaceship to Mars - (look for) signs of aliens this time next month. 8. Astronauts (travel) to planets outside our solar system by 2050. 9. I expect your English (improve) a lot by the time you get back from England. 10. NASA (develop) new aircraft to replace space shuttles by the end of this decade. V. Choose the word phrase among A, B, C or D that best fits the blank space in or the following passage. Eye Contact Eye contact is an important type of (1) communication. The way you look at someone can (2) many things, including interest, affection, hostility, or attraction. Eye contact is also important in (3) the flow of conversation. Eye contact will be more continuous (4) a person is trying to listen to you. Looking at a person can be an indication of (5) . People who are interested in someoneshow (6) eye contact and lean forward toward the other person in the conversation. (7) eye contact with another person can be (8) to show respect. 1. A.verbal B.non-verbal C.oral D.online 2. A.mean B.bring C.transmit D.communicate 3. A.maintaining B.stopping C.preventing D.increasing 4. A.although B.because C.unless D.if 5. A.attract B.attracted C.attractive D.attraction 6. A.high B.strong C.weak D.deep 7. A.Taking B.Doing C.Making D.Bringing 8. A.use B.used C.using D.to use VI. Read the passage carefully, and then answer the questions below. Netiquette is the etiquette or good manners of using the Internet. Being friendly and polite shows good manners both offline and online. You should ask someone's permission before posting anything about them on the web or sharing their emails, photo, or chat conversations. You need to make sure they know you are sharing it and agree with it. If your friend gives you permission to forward something, be sure to protect them by removing any personal information like their name and email address, and remove any parts that have nothing to do with what you want to share. If someone is rude in cyberspace, you have a choice between joining in and making it worse walking away from it. If their attacks are directed at you, you can block them and talk to a trusted adult about how to best deal with them before responding. 1. What is netiquette? . 2. What are good manners when you are online or offline? . 3. What should you do before posting and sharing something related to other people on the web? . 4. What can you do to protect personal information you post on the Internet? . 5. What will you do if you get cyberbullying? TEST 2 FOR UNIT 10,11,12 I. Mark the letter A, B, C or D to indicate the word whose main stress is placed differently from the rest. 1. A. medium B. computer C. formation D. connection 2. A. national B. cultural C. popular D. musician 138

3. 4.

A. program A. future

B. prefer B. telephone

C. promise C. language

D. practice D. tomorrow

II. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. A. mature B. measure C. pleasure D. adventure B.house C.hour D.honor 2. A.honest 3. A. suggestion B. action C. creation D. invention 4. A. message B. usage C. massage D. marriage III. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D in each line. 1. She often drives very so she rarely causes accidents. A. carefully B. careful C. caring D. careless 2. You are old enough to take for what you have done. A. responsible B. responsibility C. responsibly D. irresponsible 3. The more you think, the better you feel. A. negative B. negatively C. positive D. positively 4. means communicating by expressing thoughts with words. A. Non-verbal communication B. Verbal communication C. Body language D. Sign language 5. He is unhappy because of his . A. deaf B. deafen C. deafness D. deafened 6. Computers are used in schools and universities. A. widely B. wide C. widen D. width 7. She talks too much about something. She is a(n) person. A. sensitive B. active C. talkative D. interactive 8. She is very he always cries when watching sad movies. A. attractive B. creative C. generous D. sensitive IV. Give the correct form of the verbs in the brackets. 1. He (repair) the car when his wife cooks dinner late for today. 2. What you and your brother (do) last night after having dinner? - I (watch) a film while my brother (play) computer games. 3. Watch out! You (cross) the street and there (be) many cars there. 4. At 8.30 a m tomorrow, scientists (do) some experiments to find out the way dolphins communicate with each other. 5. It (take) the Earth 365 days to go around the sun.

3. 4. 5. 6.

A. convenient A. science` A. research A. design

B. convenience B. scientist B. researches B. designs

C. conveniention C. scientific C. researcher C. designed

VI. Read the text again and decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F). True False No. Sentence (T) (F) 1. Human have been interested in creatures from outer space for a long time. 2. Most space creatures in films are based on real form of scientific investigation. 3. Most films use human actors to play "aliens". 4. The alien designed by Dougal Dixon is similar to human. 5. The alien designed by Dougal Dixon has three eyes and three ears. VII. Complete the second sentences without changing the meaning of the first. 1. "Do not draw on the wall," said the teacher to the boys. The teacher told the boys ________________________________________________________ 2. "When was your little boy born?" said the nurse to Mrs. Bingley. The nurse asked Mrs. Bingley ____________________________________________________ 3. "You should take more exercise, Mr. Robert," the doctor said. The doctor advised _____________________________________________________________ 4. "Can I have a new bicycle?" said Anna to her mother. Anna asked __________________________________________________________________ VIII. Change these sentences into passive voice. 1. Dogs usually use body language to communicate with their owners and other dogs. ____________________________________________________________________________ 2. I'll send him an email about next week's work tomorrow. ____________________________________________________________________________ 3. I organized a video conference about environmental protection. ____________________________________________________________________________ 4. Now people are using Skype to call for others without paying money. ____________________________________________________________________________

V. Fill each blank with the correct form of the word given in capital letters. Life on other planets Humans have long been fascinated by (1) space, and have wondered if there are intelligent lifeforms elsewhere, which we might be able to contact. (2) , we've all seen space creatures on our TV and cinema screens, but â&#x20AC;&#x153;aliens" like these owe more to the (3) of using human actors to play the parts than to any real form of (4) investigation. However, many serious space (5) are now beginning to turn their attention to the question of what alien life might actually look like. One early result is Arnold the Alien, (6) by biologist, Dougal Dixon. This strange being, unlike humans, has its eyes, ears and limbs in groups of three instead of pairs but, despite its old appearance, its behavior not very different from our own.

1. 2.

A. out A. nature

B. outer B. natural

C. outside C. naturally 139

D. conveniences D. scientificly D. researchers D. which designed

D. outing D. naturalness 140

ANSWER KEY UNIT 7. PULLUTION Bài 1. Khoanh tròn phương án đúng để hoàn thành các câu sau. 1. If the weather is fine, we (goes/ will go) camping tomorrow. 2. My parents will give me a gift if I (will pass/ pass) the final exam. 3. If you are polite to others, they (will be/ are nice to you). 4. Unless James (studies/ will study) hard, he will fail the exam. 5. My parents won’t allow me to go out if I (don’t finish/ won’t finish) my homework. 6. If the cable TV (doesn’t/ won’t) work, we will rent a DVD. 7. If you don’t want to stay at home, you (go/ can go) with me to the supermarket. 8. If you (will be/ are) a good listener, you will gain many friends. 9. James won’t attend the meeting if he (won’t/doesn’t) want to. 10. You can’t have this job unless you (have/will have) long working experience. 11. What (you will do/ will you do) if it snows tomorrow? 12. You (willbe/ are) able to understand it you practice every day. 13. We will eat out today if there (will be/ is) nothing left in the fridge. 14. If it (will be/ is) too cold outside, we will stay home. 15. If she (isn’t/ won’t) careful, she will make many mistakes. Bài 2. Hoàn thành các câu sau sử dụng dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc. 1. The manager (be) ______will be__________ very angry if I am late for work. 2. You will have to work very hard if you (take)__take ____ this course. 3. I (go) ___willgo_____ to see the doctor if I don’t feel well tomorrow. 4. They can’t hear you unless you (speak) ___speak ___ louder. 5. If Peter (forget) _____forgets________ to write his essay, the teacher (give) ________willgive _____ him a low mark. 6. If they (win) ____win_______ this match, they will ne the champions. 7. We (have) ____willhave_____ plenty of time if we (arrive) ___arrive ___ there early. 8. The zookeeper (punish) _____willpunish_______ you if you (feed) _____feed______ the animal. 9. What ___willJanesay_____ (Jane/ say) if Jim (tell) ___tells____ her the truth. 10. The boys (shiver) _______willshiver______ with cold if they (swim) ____swim____ in this lake. 11. The door (not lock) _____willnotunlock_______- unless you (press) __press__ the green button. 12. Jim won’t be late if he (take) _____takes__________ the bus at 6 o’clock . 13. Mary isn’t home, but if you (want) __want___ to leave her a message, I (give) __willgive_____ it to her. 14. If jack (clean) __cleans______ the floor, I (do) ___willdo_______ the washing. 15. The children (be) _willbe____ happy if you (give) __give_____ them some sweets. Bài 3.Nối cột A với cột B để tạo thành câu hoàn chỉnh. A B 1. If people keep dumping rubbish into the lake, a. the groundwater will be poisoned. 2. If the farmers overuse pesticide, b. if our surrounding environment is polluted 3. Soil erosion won’t happen in an area, c. they will disappear in the future. 4. if we don’t converse the rainforests, d. unless we join hands to protect it. 5. Our health will be badly affected e. the aquatic life will be afflicted. 6. Our environment will be damaged f. floods will be more and more severe. 7. Is we don’t protect the frontier forests, g. if people use more public transportation. 8. The amount of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere h. if people practice sustainable agricultural mad will be reduced use. 141

1. _e___ 2. ____a______ 3. ____h___ 4. ______c______ 5. __b__ 6. ____d______ 7. ___f____ 8. ______g______ Bài 4. Dựa vào từ cho sẵn, viết câu hoàn chỉnh. 1. If/people/ not/ stop/ dumping/ waste/ into/ rivers/,/pollution/ increase/. If people don’t stop dumping waste into rivers, pollution will increase. 2. If/ polar/ ice caps/ melt/ ,/huge landmasses/ be/ under/ water. If the polar ice caps melt, huge landmasses will be under water. 3. If the air/ in/ city/ be/polluted/ ,it/can/ cause/ people’s/ respiratory/ problems. If the air in the city is polluted, it can cause people’s respiratory problems. 4. If/smog/ be/ frequently/ formed/ in/ city/,/it/ cause/ difficulty/ in/ breathing/ headache/ even/ lung cancer. Is smog is frequently formed in the city, it will cause difficulty in breathing, headache and even lung cancer. 5. If/ carbon monoxide/ concentrate/ in/ great/ amounts/, /it/ be/ harmful/. If cartoon monoxide concentrates in great amounts, it will be harmful. 6. The climate/ change/ if/ more trees/ be/ cut/ down/ for/ hardwood/. The climate will change if more trees are cut down for hardwood. 7. If/ we/ not/ control/ pollution/ soon/,/it/ be/ too/ late/. If we do not control pollution soon, it will be too late. 8. If/we/ not/ protect/ frontier/,/we/ suffer/ many/ from/ natural/ disasters. If we do not protect the frontier forests, we will suffer from many natural disasters. Bài 5. Viết lại câu với “” if/unless” sao cho nghĩa của câu không thay đổi. 1. I can’t finish this task you don’t give me a hand. -> I can’t finish this task unless you give me a hand. 2. You will run out of money if you don’t stop wasting it. -> You will run out of money unless you stop wasting it. 3. Don’t call me unless it is an emergency. -> Don’t call me if it is not an emergency. 4. James will not pass the test unless he studies harder. -> James will not pass the test if he doesn’t study harder. 5. If Jane finishes her work before 6 pm, she will dine out with her friends. -> Unless Jane doesn’t finish her work before 6 pm, she will dine out with her friends. 6. My brother won’t go travelling this summer if he doesn’t find a companion. -> . My brother won’t go travelling this summer unless he finds a companion. 7. It is not easy to do these exercises unless you listen attentively to the teacher. -> It is not easy to do these exercises if you don’t listen attentively to the teacher. 8. If Jim doesn’t submit his essay before Tuesday, he will be punished by the teacher. -> Unless Jim submits his essay before Tuesday, he will be punished by the teacher. Bài 6. Khoanh tròn vảo phương án đúng. 1. I (would buy/ bought) a new house if I had enough money. 2. If he (would try/ tried) his best, he might be successful. 3. If I (lived/ would live) in Japan, I could speak Japanese well. 4. If someone gave you a dress, which color (would you want/ you would want) it to be? 5. I would repaired the roof myself if I (would have/ had) a longer ladder. 6. You would be more comfortable now if you (didn’t/ wouldn’t) wear high heels. 7. I (wouldn’t/didn’t) buy things on the Internet if I were you. 8. If you (met/ would meet) your favorite author Mark Twain, what wouldn’t you ask him? 9. His parents would be very proud if he (wouldn’t be/ weren’t) so naughty. 10. If Jane had more money, she (would treat/ treated) herself to a decent meal. 11. If you were a billionaire, what (would you do/ did you do)/ 12. If Kate owned a computer, she (would spend/ spent) most of her free time on it. 13. If I (would know/ knew) his address, I would give it to you. 142

14. She would look much better if her hair (didn’t look/ wouldn’t look) so unkempt. 15. If I were in your situation, I (would/ will) let the nature take its course. Bài 7. Hoàn thành các câu sau, sử dụng dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc. 1. More tourists would come to our country if we (provide) ____provided__________ better services. 2. If I studies abroad, _____would we keep________ (we/keep) in touch with each other? 3. If someone (give) _____gave_________ you a camera, what would you do with it? 4. If I (win) ______won___________ a big prize in a lottery, I (donate) _____woulddonate__________ a part of it and (spend) _______(would) spend________ the rest for myself. 5. What _____would you do______ (you/do) if you found a wallet in the street? 6. I could watch foreign TV program without subtitles if I (know) ____knew_____ English. 7. He might be obese if he (not stop) _________didn’t stop_________ taking in fat and sugar. 8. If he knew that it was dangerous, he (not do) _____wouldn’tdo__________ it. 9. If you (see) ______see__________ someone drowning, ____would you save____________ (you/save) him? 10. She (be) _________would be_________ happier if her parents (not get) ________didn’t get________ divorced. 11. If you (sleep) ____slept_________ under a mosquito net you (not be) ________would not be_______ bitten so often. 12. I (get) _______wouldn’t get__________ a job easily if I (have) ________had______________ a degree. 13. If she (have) __had_______ another hair style, she (look) ___would look________ younger. 14. If the weather (not be) ____wasnot_____________ severe, out crops (grow) _____wouldgrow__________ faster. 15. I (keep) _____wouldkeep________ a horse if I could afford it. Bài 8. Viết câu điều kiện loại 2 cho các trường hợp sau. 0/ They don’t have enough money. They cannot buy a new car. ->If they had enough money, they could buy a new car. 1. There isn’t a library in my neighborhood. I cannot borrow books. If there was a library in my neighborhood, I could borrow books. 2. My health is not good. I don’t play extreme sports. If my health was good, I would play extreme sports. 3. We cannot go for a picnic because it is pouring with rain. We would go for a picnic if it didn’t pour with rain. 4. I don’t have much free time. I cannot come to your party. If I had much free time, I could come to your party. 5. Jim doesn’t have any siblings. He feels lonely sometimes. If Jim had any siblings, he wouldn’t feel lonely sometimes. 6. My father is very busy at work. He rarely has time for me. If my father wasn’t very busy at work, he would have time for me. 7. This camera is expensive. I can’t buy it. If this camera wasn’t expensive, I could buy it. 8. You don’t try your best. Your result will not be good. If you tried your best, your result would be good. BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO. Bài 9. Hoàn thành các câu sau, cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc. 1. We (be) ___would be_________ happy if air pollution were the only problem. 2. They would be disappointed if you (not go) _____didn’t go________ to their party. 3. If we (use) ___use____ this kind of light bulb, we can save energy. 4. Peter should go to sleep early if he (not want) ____doesn’t want________ to be tired the next morning. 5. If you (take) _______took________ more exercises, you would be more resistant to diseases. 6. You may have car accident unless you (drive) _______drive_________ more carefully.

7. If I travel to London, I (visit) ____will visit________ its museum. 8. If they offer me the job, I think I (accept) _______will accept__________ it. 9. Many people (be) ______would be______ out of work if the local factory closed down. 10. What (happen) ______would happen___________ if that red button was pressed? 11. I’d be absolutely astonished if Mary and James (get) _______got______ married. 12. They won’t let you in unless you (show) ______show _______them your identity card. 13. My best friend gave me this book. She (be) ______would be__________ very upset if I lost it. 14. Would you mind if I (turn) ______turned__________ up the radio. 15. I’m sure she (forgive) ________will forgive______ you if you sincerely apologize to her. Bài 10. Đánh dấu trước câu đúng, đánh dấu x trước câu sai và viết lại cho đúng. ___X___ 1. Pollution can be reduced if we joined hands to prevent it. Pollution can be reduced if we join hands to prevent it. ___X___ 2. If farmers would make use of pesticide more wisely, the soil would not be poisoned. If farmers made use of pesticide more wisely, the soil would not be poisoned. ___X___ 3. I won’t believe it unless you showed me the evidence. I won’t believe it unless you show me the evidence. __X___ 4. Unless you don’t tell me the truth, I won’t help you. Unless you tell the truth, I won’t help you. / If you don’t tell the truth, I won’t help you. ___X__ 5. If James is more outgoing, he would have more friends. If James was more outgoing, he would have more friends. __ ___ 6. I think the show would be successful if he were one of the organizers. ___X___ 7. If you paid more attention to what I said, you didn’t make so many mistakes. If you paid more attention to what I said, you wouldn’t make so many mistakes. ___X___ 8. If children are taught about environmental issues, they might change their attitudes towards pollution. If children are taught about environmental issues, they may change their attitudes towards pollution. ___X___ 9. You would be punished if you park your car here. You will be punished if you park your car here. ___X__ 10. If you could win the competition, we will have a celebration. If you win the competition, we will have a celebration. Bài 11. Hoàn thành các câu sau, chọn và cho dạng đúng của các động từ cho sẵn. 1. If we use less vehicles, we ____will reduce_____ the amount of carbon dioxide into the air. 2. If you _____were_____ the president, what you do to prevent air pollution. 3. If there were no fresh water left, what _would happen___? 4. If people (not) _____didn’t know___________ rubbish in the street, it would look better. 5. If there wasn’t so much light in the cities at night, we ___would use_______ the starts more clearly. 6. If the water is contaminated, people ___wouldsuffer_____ from many diseases. 7. If chemicals from factories are dumped into rivers and lakes, they ___willcause___ water pollution. 8. If people want to protect their planet, they should ___change_____ their habit of using plastic bag for convenience. 9. If we recycle paper, we ____wouldsave____ 1000 trees a day. 10. If people were more aware of the negative consequences of pollution, they might __take____ actions to prevent it. TEST 1 UNIT 7 I. 1. D 2. D 3. D 4. B 5. C II. 1. C 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. D III. 1. B 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. A IV. 1. C 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. A 6. A 7. B 8. B 9. A 10. C 11. B 12. C 13. C 14. A 15. B 16. D 17. C 18. B 19. A 20. C

143

144

VI.

VII.

VIII. IX. X. XI.

XII.

21. C 22. A 23. B 24. A 25. B 1. will have 2. find 3. had fed 4. will have 5. looked 6. will happen 7. press 8. had had 9. will you stay 10. swim 11. tell 12. don’t change 13. wouldn’t have bought 14. hung 15. would be 16. would have brought 17. would have been 18. wouldn’t have printed 19. wouldn’t buy 20. would arrive 1. go 2. eats 3. wouldn’t do/ were 4.takes 5. did/ wouldn’t worry 6. will....do 7. were /would go 8. passed 9. will be 10. went 11. won’t go 12. tries 13. spoke 14. finish/ will go 15. see/ ask 1. would you choose 2. gets 3. comes 4. would call 5. will sit 6. don’t talk 7. will you do 8. had read 9. had asked 10. had 11. will go 12. would you do 13. run 14. won’t be 15. would have understand 16. comes 17. wouldn’t have 18. had worn 19. leaves 20. would have had 1. to 2. away 3. with 4. to 5. into 1. T 2. F 3. F 4. T 5. T 6. F 1. A 2. A 3. C 4. D 5. B 6. D 7. C 8. B 1. air pollution 2. factories 3. Yes, it can 4. The gases from the exhausts of cars. 5. Because the gases in the atmosphere continue to increase. 1. A 2. D 3. A 4. B 5. C

TEST 2 UNIT 7 I. Oo: scenic, sonic, comic, magic, fa bric, traffic Ooo: Arabic, classical, typical, logical, tropical, vertical, practical, critical, mythical oOo: terrific, kinetic, linguistic, st phonetic, emphatic, historic, elastic, ceramic, aquatic atistic, cosmetic, aerobic, symbolic, fantastic, heroic, specific, mechanic, republic, romantic, oOoo: arithmet ic, botanical, numerical, political ooOo: economic, supersonic, systematic, sympathetic, automatic, scientific, microscopic, oceanic, geographic, energetic II. 1. B 2. A 3. B 4. C 5. A III. 1. Natural 2. harmful 3. contaminated 4. Polluted 5.unable 6. environmental IV. 1. contaminated 2. Industrial 3. death 4. Polluted 5. Pollutants 6. difficulty V. 1. If a person looks at the sky at night, he won’t be able to see the Milky Way by naked eye. 2. If noise pollution happens regularly, it will cause stress or nuisance. 3. If water pollution gets more serious in the future, it will affect the development of economy and society. 4. If Australia has invested in water in Viet Nam with good results, half of the population in the rural areas will have access to fresh water. 5. If you use compact light bulbs, you will save a lot of energy. 6. If we have more space, we will plant more trees. VI. 1. B 2. A 3. C 4. D 5. D 6. D 7. C 8. B 145

VII. 1. D 2. C 3. B 4. E 5. A 6. T 7. T 8. F 9. F 10. T VIII. 1. C 2. E 3. A 4. B 5. D 6. They are satellites, solar panels, rocket bodies and fragments from space shuttles that are floating in space and are no longer functional. 7. It affects us here on Earth as well and will continue to affect us in future travel. 8. It left debris over an area the size of Austria. 9. They were injured by pieces of space debris that hit their ship. 10. No, it isn’t. (It is very challenging.) IX. 1. C 2. A 3. C 4. B 5. A 6. D 7. B 8. A X. 1. D 2. B 3. C 4. C 5. A XI. 1. Noise pollution is any loud sounds that are either harmful or annoying to humans and animals. 2. Generally, noise is produced by household appliances, big trucks, vehicles and motorbikes on the road, planes and helicopters flying over cities, loud speakers, etc. 3. Noise pollution can cause stress, illnesses, hearing loss, sleep loss, and lost productivity. 4. Health effects of noise include anxiety, stress, headaches, irritability and nervousness. 5. Noise-producing industries, airports, bus terminals should be located far from living places. 6. The officials must check the misuse of loudspeakers, outdoor parties and discos, as well as public announcement systems. XII. 1. Air pollution leads to asthma, allergies and other respiratory illnesses. 2. Aquatic life suffers or dies because of thermal pollution. 3. The waste water is released from the paper mill in Thai Nguyen City, so water in the Cau River becomes brown and has terrible smell. 4. Water in rivers, canals, lakes are extremely polluted and has bad effects on people’s health because people use too much herbicide to treat weeds. 5. Many fish in the river die because the temperature of water increases. 6. Plastic bags take so long to decompose, so nearly all of them still exist in the environment today. XIII. 1. Light pollution makes us unable to see the stars in the sky. 2. Glass panels, windows, lawns and roofs make light pollution worse because they reflect both artificial and sun light. 3. All sounds are not noise because noise is any sound that is unwanted and goes beyond its certain limit, for example, above 80 decibels. 4. More and more noise is created by modern civilization, so it has now become a major environmental pollutant, especially in urban areas. 5. Contamination in the air causes acid rain which damages soil, vegetation and aquatic life of the region. 6. People suffer from stress and anxiety because of noise pollution. XIV. 1. If my home installed a solar water heater, we would save a lot of energy. 2. If all households in Viet Nam turned off lights during the Earth Hour, we would save enough electricity to develop our rural areas. 3. If students in our school didn’t throw litter on the school ground, our campus would look greener and fresher. 4. If people used glass bottles, they would use them again and again. 5. If we installed a wind turbine, our school would become more eco-friendly. 6. If people used organic fertilizers, they would prevent land pollution. 146

7. 8.

If people rode bikes, they would keep the air less polluted. If that factory had a wastewater treatment system, the river wouldn’t become so polluted. TEST 3 UNIT 7

I. Find the words that has different stress pattern in each line. 1. B 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. B II. Find the words that has different stress pattern in each line. 1. A 2. C 3. C 4. B 5. A III. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete these sentences. 1. D 2. D 3. C 4. A 5. B 6. C 7. B 8. C 9. A 10. D IV. Choose the correct answers. 1. B 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. C 6. D 7. A 8. D 9. A 10. C V. Complete the table with appropriate verbs, nouns and adjectives. 1. to endanger 2. edition/ edit 3. annoyance 4. instructible 5. to dramatize 6. interesting/ interested 7. choice 8. hot 9. to low VI. Complete the sentences, using the correct form of the words in brackets. 1. dangerous 2. edition 3. annoying 4. instructions 5. dramatic 6. interesting 7. choice 8. heat 9. invitation 10. lower VII. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form of conditional sentence type 1. 1. Pollute/ will die 2. consists/ will get 3. melt/ will be 4. will disappear/ cut down 5. is thrown/ will be 6. continues/ will be destroyed 7. will save/ save 8. teach/ will know 9. travel/ won't have 10. fines/ won't dump VIII. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form of conditional sentence type 2. 1. were/ would pass 2. were/ would not eat 3. cared/ would not increase 4. would sort/ were 5. weren't polluted/ would recover 6. Didn’t throw/ wouldn’t know 7. didn't dump/ would die 8. would you do/ were 9. wasn't/ would be reduce 10 owned/ would build IX. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct form. 1. send/ will receive 2. will go/ has 3. would spend/ was 4. don't phone/ will leave 5. went/ would not be 6. has/ will learn 7. wouldn't buy/ didn't have 8. played/ would have 9. were/ would change 10. would invited/ had X. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets. 1. will do 2. will help 3. rains 4. learn 5. would buy 6. would pass 7. repaired 8. sold 9. would invite 10. is XI. 1. Now match the words with their correct descriptions. 1. F 2. D 3. B 4. C 5. A 6. E 2. Read the text again then answer the questions below. 1. Pollution is the degradation of natural environment by external substances introduced directly or indirectly. 147

2. Pollution occurs when ecosystems can not get rid of substances introduced into the environment. 3. The sources of pollution are numerous. 4. The pollutants can be natural disasters or the result of human activity, such as oil pills, chemical spills, nuclear accidents. 5. Three effects pollution: destruction of the biodiversity, increased mortality of the human and animal species, destruction of natural habitat. 6. Yes, they should. XII. Read the text then choose the best answer. 1. D 2. A 3. A 4. B 5. D XIII. Combine the sentences. 1. Effect of global warming is that sea levels are rising because the polar icecaps are melting. 2. The global population has increased because of much better levels of nutrition. 3. Nuclear explosions and detonations of nuclear weapons lead to radioactive pollution. 4. In the last ten years, many BC valleys have been clearcut, so 142 species of salmon have become extinct. 5. The fish and other aquatic animals have died due to the polluted water. XIV. Write conditional sentences type I or II for these situation. 1. If people eat dirty food, they can be cancer. 2. If the factory didn't directly discharge a large volume of waste water into the Thi Vai River, the river wouldn't be polluted. 3. If farmers didn't use polluted water to water their plants, people eat these plan wouldn't become sick with diseases such as diarrhea, bacterial inflections even cancer. 4. If thermal pollution takes place, the water temperature in streams, rivers, lakes and oceans will increase or decrease suddenly. 5. If people live in radioactive pollution area, they can be skin cancer. XV. Complete the sentence by filling in a cause or an effect as required. 1. Melanie did not go to school yesterday because she was sick. 2. Due to the traffic jam, Jason was late for work again. 3. If all students in my class come, there won't be enough space in the car for each. 4. Mai works late every Friday so that she can have Saturday and Sunday off. 5 Owing to a good marketing strategy, the tickets were all sold out. 6. Global warming leads to rising sea levels. 7. I woke up late this morning because my alarm clock did not ring. 8. A big ships spill oil in Pacific ocean which causes many aquatic animals and plants die UNIT 8. ENGLISH-SPEAKING COUNTRIES CÁC QUỐC GIA NÓI TIẾNG ANH Bài 1: Khoanh tròn đáp án đúng 1. The Smith (is having/ are having) a barbecue in the backyard right now. 2. The train (just leaves/ has just left) for 10 minutes. 3. The police (haven’t caught/ hasn’t caught) the burglars yet. 4. Jim (is still reading/ has still read) the book he borrowed from the local library last week. 5. (Have you ever tried/ Are you ever trying) Indian cuisine before? No, this is my first time. 6. At present, my father (is having/ has) a car and a motorbike. 7. You should arrive at the airport before &:30 because the plane (takes off/ are taking off) at sharp 8. 8. Who (is/are) James talking to? 9. I (have read/read) five science books so far. 10. Coffee (has always been/ is always) my favorite drink since I was 20. 11. Why (are you always talking/ do you always talk) with your mouth full? 12. What (are you doing/ do you do) now? I am a linguist. 13. Look! It (is pouring/ pours) with rain. 14. Have you finished your homework yet? No, actually I (am working/ work) on it. 148

15. Mr. Brown (is sleeping/ has slept). I can hear his loud snoring. Bài 2. Điền các trạng từ cho sẵn vào chỗ trống sao cho thích hợp 1. James has __never____ tried Japanese food before. This is the first time. 2. My brother is ___always______ waking up late in the morning. 3. They haven’t seen each other _____since________ the last winter. 4. To be honest, I _____rarely______ do morning exercises because I hate getting up early. 5. Have you ever been to a foreign country ______before ____? 6. The Smith have lived in this neighborhood ____for____ 5 years. 7. My mother _______often______ goes shopping with friends when she has free time. 8. ____Now_____ Jim is playing the piano while his sister is singing along. Bài 3. Chia động từ trong ngoặc sao cho thích hợp. 1. Where’s Mary? She (listen) ____is listening______________ to a new CD in her room. 2. Don’t forget to take your umbrella with you today. You know it (be) ______is_______ the raining season now. 3. Jean always (learn) ____learns______ English at this time every day but today she (not study) __isn’t studying_____ at the moment. 4. What time ______does the meeting happen_______ (the meeting/ happen) tomorrow? I (not know) _______haven’t known ____________ it yet. I (wait) _____am waiting____________ for the announcement. 5. Where ___have you lived____ (you/live) since you moved from your old house? 6. Look! The sun (rise) ___is rising_______ over the ocean. This is the most amazing scene I (ever/ see) _____have ever seen_________. 7. He (speak) ___speaks______ Japanese so well because He (come) __comes_________ from Japan. 8. ___Do you usually go away_____ (you/ usually/ go away) for Christmas or __do you stay_______ (you/stay) at home? 9. Look! Your friend (hold) ____is holding_______ some roses. They (look) _____look_______ lovely. 10. ___Have you finished__________ (you/ finish) your assignment yet? No, I ______haven’t__________. 11. My father usually (walk) ___walks_______ to work but now hw (drive) _____isdriving_____________ his car. 12. I (not think) ___don’t think______ Mary (sleep) ___is sleeping_______ because I can hear some noise from her room. 13. My grandparents (bring) ____has bought________ me up since I was very small. 14. How long ____has Peter worked________ (Peter/ work) in his firm? 15. James (always/ complain) ____is always complaining______. It (be) ____is____ hard to please him. 16. I (just/ realize) __have just realized_____ that there are only four weeks to the end of them. 17. This is the second time I (be) _have been____ to London. 18. Now the children (not want) ___don’t want____ to go to sleep. They (prefer) ____prefer_______ their mother to tell them bedtime stories. 19. __have you ever watched___ (they/ want) a horror movie before? Yes, they (watch) __havewatched________ a plenty of such movies before. 20. Jim (cook) _____cooks_____ so tired now. He (work) ________has worked______________ non-stop since the morning. Bài 4. Đặt câu hỏi cho phần gạch châ của những câu dưới đây. 1. Mary has moved to her new house for 4 months. How long has Mary moved to her new house? 2. The airplane takes off at 6pm tomorrow. When does the airplane take off? 3. James and Jane are helping an old man cross the road. Who is helping an old man cross the road? 4. The children visit their grandparents every two months. How often do the children visit their grandparents.

5. This dress costs me $100 to buy. How much does his dress cost to buy? 6. The couple has sent a letter to their daughter. What was the couple sent to their daughter? 7. Many people are queuing in front of the shop because a hot item is on sale. Why are many people queuing in front of the shop? 8. They have watched this movie three times. How many times have they watched this movie? 9. My mother is always complaining about my untidiness. What is your mother always complaining about? 10. I often learn a new word by making sentences with it. How do you often learn a new word? Bài 5. Khoanh tròn vào phương án đúng, thì hiện tại đơn hoặc thì hiện tại tiếp diễn. 1. Tomorrow the sun (rises/is rising) at 6.44 and it (sets/ is setting) at 18.33. 2. I (don’t do anything/ am not doing anything) tonight. I want to relax. 3. What time (do you meet/ are you meeting) John on Sunday? 4. This year the school (ends/ is ending) on 28 June. 5. After the reconstruction the supermarket (opens/ is opening) on Monday again. 6. I can’t help you. I (see/ am seeing) the doctor this afternoon. 7. We’ve already booked our holiday. We (go/ are going) to Rome in May. 8. Could you meet us at the airport tomorrow morning? The plane (lands/ is landing) at 10.15. 9. The piano concert (doesn’t start/ is not starting) at 8 o’clock. It’s cancelled. 10. (Do you have/ Are you having) your birthday party this week or next week? I forgot. Bài 6. Sửa lại lỗi sai được gạch chân trong mỗi câu sau. 1. Mike and Fred is leaving tomorrow morning. Mike and Fred are leaving tomorrow morning. 2. Look, the concert is beginning at 6 o’clock. Look, the concert ____begins______________ at 6 o’clock. 3. Do you do anything tonight? _______Are you doing____________ anything tonight? 4. Excuse me, what time the ship lands? Excuse me, what time _______does the ship land_________________ ? 5. I see my doctor this afternoon. I _____am seeing_________________ my doctor this afternoon. 6. Where do you go on your holiday next summer? Where __________are you going____________ on your holiday next summer? 7. The train is not leaving at 10.15. it is arriving at 10.15. . The train ______does not leave___________ at 10.15. It _____arrive_____________ at 10.15. 8. Do you give Jill anything for her birthday this year? ______Are you giving_______________ Jill anything for her birthday this year? 9. This winter term classes are ending on 8 March. This winter term classes _______end_________________ on 8 March. Bài 7. Gạch chân dưới các cum từ chỉ thời gian. Sau đó cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc ở thì Hiện tại đơn hoặc Hiền tại tiếp diễn. 1. I ______am meeting____________ Peter tonight. He ______is taking____________ us to a restaurant. (meet/ take) 2. The ferry ______leaves__________ at 9.00 from Dover and ____lands___________ at 10.45 in Calais. (leave, land) 3. My parents _____are celebrating__________ their wedding anniversary next Sunday. They ___aregoing__________ to Paris (celebrate, go)

149

150

4. I _______am not giving_________________ a lecture this afternoon. And I ____amnotteaching_____ tomorrow either. (not give, not teach) 5. Why _doesn’t_____ the exhibition _____open______ tomorrow? When __does___ it ____take_________ place instead? (not open, take) 6. How ___are______ you ______going_ _____to the party tonight? ____Are you catching_________ you _____________ a bus? (get, catch) Bài 8. Dựa vào từ cho sẵn, sắp xếp lại các từ và viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh ở thì Hiện tại đơn hoặc thì Hiện tại tiếp diễn sao cho phù hợp. 1. to the dentist/ go/ I/ tomorrow. I am going to the dentist tomorrow. 2. tonight/ with/ have/ our business partner/ we/ dinner. We are having dinner with our business partner tonight. 3. on/ my holiday/ July/ begin/ 10th My holiday begins on 10th July 4. depart/ the train/ at 11.30/ platform 5/ from/. The train departs from platform at 11.30. 5. to Africa/ you/ When exactly/ fly/. When exactly are you flying to Africa. 6. end/ when/ the art exhibition/. When does the art exhibition end? 7. go/ to the garden/ Miss Pitt/ on Sunday/. Is Miss Pit going to the garden party on Sunday? 8. at 9.45/as usual/ the plane/ take off/. Does the plane take off at 9.45 as usual? BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO Bài 9. Chia động từ trong ngoặc sao cho thích hợp Jim: Hello there, Daisy! Long time no see! It (1. Be) _______is______________ great to see you again. Daisy: Oh, Jim! Hello! What a coincidence! (2. Not see) _____haven’t seen____________ you for ages! It is great to see you. What (3. You do) ____are you doing_________ in London now or (4. You/ just visit) _____have you visited_____________ ? Jim: Well, an engineering company (5.just offer) _____has just offered_________ me a job, so I decided to rent a small apartment near my company. Now I (6.look) ________am looking ___________ for one with high standard but reasonable price. Daisy: Oh, I think it (7.be) _______is_________________ very difficult to find that perfect apartment. You should lower your standard if you (8.want) _____want_________ to find a cheap place to live. Jim: Yeah, you (9.be) ____are_______ right. Hey, Daisy, let’s talk about you recently. (10.You still/work) ___are you still working________ at the restaurant near your house? Daisy: No, Jim. I quitted it three months ago. I couldn’t get on well with my manager. He (11.always shout) __is always shouting_________ even when my co-workers and I (12.make) __make____________ just a small mistakes. Now I am employed by a restaurant in the city center. Jim: (13. It/be) _________is it____________ very far from your house? Daisy: It is. Every day I (14.have) _____have___________ to take the earliest train to commute to work. It (15.set) ______sets__________ off at 5am and it (16.often take) _______oftentakes___________ me half an hour to travel to work. Jim: You must wake up early in the morning. Daisy: It was hard for me in the first few weeks but things (17.get) _______are getting__________ better and better now. I (18.be) _____am__________ quite satisfied with my job now. Bài 10. Dựa vào các từ cho sẵn, viết câu hoàn chỉnh. 1. They/not/want/ to/ buy/ new/ car/ now/ because/ they/not/ have/ enough/ money/ yet/. They don’t want to buy a new car because they haven’t had enough money. 2. You/ever/ speak/ to/ foreigner/ before ?

Have you ever spoken to a foreigner before? 3. I/ not/ know/ when/ the/ train/ leave/. I don’t know when the train leaves. 4. Rose/ often/ walk/ school/ but/ today/ she/ ride/ new/ bike/ at/ present/. Rose often walks to school but today she is riding a new bike at the present. 5. How much/ time/ you/ often/ spend/ on/ self-studying? How much time do you often spend on self-studying? 6. Who/ Jane/ talk/ to/ over/ there? Who is Jane talking to over there? 7. I/ not/ find/ my car key/ yet/. I/ call/ my husband/ to/ ask/ him/ about/ it/. I haven’t found my car key yet. I am calling my husband to ask him about it. 8. No one/ heard/ news/ about/ accident/ this morning/. No one has heard the news about the accident this morning. 9. Everyone/ sleep/ now/ but/ I/ be/ awake. Everyone is sleeping now but I am awake. 10. How long/ it/ usually/ take/ you/ to/ finish/ your breakfast? How long does it usually take you to finish your breakfast? Bài 11. Hoàn thành đoạn hội thoại với những động từ cho sắn dưới đây ở thì Hiện tại đơn hoặc thì Hiện tại tiếp diễn sao cho phù hợp. Take (x2) start (x2) leave go do depart get come The big day A: Have you heard of Brad and Mimi? B: Brad and Mimi? What’s happened? A: They (1) ___are getting___________ married on Saturday? B: You’re joking. I didn’t know that Mimi fancied Brad. When (2) _______does the wedding __________ the wedding ____ take ______ place? A: It (3) ____takes_______ place on Saturday. Didn’t you listen to me? B: Of course I did. But what time (4) __does__ it ___start_______? A: The wedding ceremony (5) ____starts_______ at 11 o’clock in the All Saints church. B: (6) ___Are____ you _____coming_______? A: Yes, I am. They’ve invited me. B: Do you think I could join you? A: Why not? I’m sure the church is going to be full. But I (7) _____am leaving_________ early in the morning because my dad (8) _______is going____________ to work by car on Saturday and he can take me to the All Saints. B: If your dad doesn’t mind. A: No problem. The more, the merrier, he always says. By the ways, (9) __are____ you __doing_______ anything tomorrow morning? We could buy some present for them. B: Good idea. We can get the bus to the Macy’s shopping Gallery. It (10) ______departs ______________ at 9.35. A: All right. See you at the bus stop. Bye. A: Bye-bye. Bài 12. Cho dạng đúng của độngt từ trong ngoặc ở thì hiện tại đơn hoặc thì Hiện tại tiếp diễn để diễn tả tương lại. 1. The train _____arrives_______ at 9 at night. (arrive) 2. Giovanni ___is coming________ to spend the weekend with us. (come) 3. What time ___are____ you ___going____ to the doctor’s on Wednesday? (go) 4. What time _______does___________ the film ________start_________ ? (start) 5. ______does______ the concert ______begin_________ at 7 or 8? (begin) 6. We ____are having___________ a dinner party on Friday and you’re invited. (have) 7. Most shops in Spain ___doesn’t open_______ until 10 am. (not open)

151

152

8. What time _____does_________ the corner shop ______shut__________? (shut) 9. Where _______are_________ you ________staying____________ in Bangkok? (stay) 10. My tai chi classes ________start__________ next week? (start) 11. Out flight ____lands________ in London at4 o’clock in the afternoon. (land) 12. Everything’s arranged. We _____are moving_________ house this Saturday. (move) 13. We ____are meeting_________ at Litith’s Café this afternoon at four. (meet) 14. I’m sorry. I can’t meet up this weekend. We ____are going_____ to Wales. (go) 15. Our ferry _____departs______ for lbiza at 6 tomorrow morning. (depart). TEST 1 UNIT 8 I. 1. A 2. D 3. A 4. B II. 1. A 2. A 3. B 4. D III. 1. Legendary 2. refugees 3. spectacular 6. speakers 7. unofficial IV. 1. has become 2. have made 3. has become 6. are shaking 7. has V. 1. has adopted 2. have become 5. is 6. has

5. C 5. C 4. iconic 5. Irish 8. absolutely 9. exposed 10. pollutants 4. shares 5. has won 8. are 9. has been 10 use/ feel 3. is occurring 4. has been 7. takes 8. has welcomed

VI. 1. They live in the desert. 2. It stores the fat in its hump. 3. Because fat all over an animal’s body keeps the animal warm. Camels live in the desert They do not want to be warm during the day. 4. It stores the heat in its body because the nights are cool. 5. Because the winters are cold in Central Asia. VII. 1. English 2. Because it is an effective medium of international communication. 3. The written English, because it’s not phonetically-based./ it is not systematically phonetic 4. The UK, the USA, and Australia 5. Because China has the largest population in the world. VIII. 1. official 2. began/ started 3. population 4. ability 5. written 6. in 7. Therefore 8. students IX. 1. Asking “where is everybody? 2. Two or three 3. Summer 4. eight weeks 5. Class attendance 6. Watching soccer on TV 7. Participles as adjectives. X. 1. Sydney is not the capital of Australia, but Canberra is. 2. The Maori are native people in the North Island of New Zealand. 3. The National Children’s Museum in Washington D.C. opens at 10.00 a.m. 4. The Golden Gate Bridge is an iconic monument of San Francisco. 5. Malaysia has considered English as its official language for years. TEST 2 UNIT 8 I. Oo coffee, Maltese 153

oO trainee, trustee, payee, Burmese, Chinese, Viennese Ooo jubilee oOo committee ooO absentee, devotee, nominee, referee, refugee, expellee, addressee, guarantee, divorcee, Sudanese, Lebanese, Nepalese, Congolese, Japanese, Vietnamese, Togolese, Annamese oooO examinee, interviewee, Senegalese II. 1. A 2. D 3. B 4. D 5. D III. 1. official 2. resources 3. unique 4. wealthy 5. diverse 6. sincere 7. quality 8. symbol 9. accents 10. native IV. 1. is 2. has 3. takes 4. has welcomed 5. has adopted 6. has become 7. is occurring 8. has been V. 1. has 2. are 3. have been 4. use – feel 5. has become 6.have made 7. has become 8. shares 9. has won 10. are shaking VI. 1. wheel 2. symbol 3. takes 4. gives 5.allows 6. iconic 7. high 8. close VII. 1. D 2. B 3. A 4. C 5. B 6. C 7. D 8. C VIII. 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. T IX. 1. D 2. D 3. A 4. D 5. A 6. C X. 1. English is an important global language. 2. He invented Basic English in 1930. It had only 850 words. 3. Because he wanted to invent a language similar to English, but with much simpler spelling. 4. It has no grammar. 5. It was ‘NetLingo’. XI. 1. T 2. T 3. F 4. F 5. T 6. from other Polynesian islands 7. 280,000 8. They have brown skin, dark brown eyes, and wavy black hair. 9. They live a comfortable, modern life. 10. They speak, dance, and sing. XII. 1. C 2. D 3. A 4. B 5. T 6. F 7. T 8. T 9. T 10. T 11. F 12. F XIII. Junior Summer Camp in San Francisco, California 1. Our junior summer camps offer learners aged 10 - 17 from all over the world the opportunity to improve their English language skills 2. We offer a full afternoon and evening social programme, including a variety of sports activities, and visits to local sites of interest. 3. On their first day, students take a test to ensure they are placed in an appropriate level. 4. On arrival, students also receive a welcome pack including information about the course and a free student bag. 5. Students have a progress test in class every two weeks and meet individually with their teacher to review their progress. 154

At the end of the course, students receive a certificate as a record of their English language studies.

TEST 3 UNIT 8 I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. C 2. C 3. B 4. D 5. D II. Circle the word with a different stress pattern from the others. 1. D 2. C 3. A 4. B III. Give the correct form of verb in brackets. 1. is reading 2. are we having 3. comes 4. isn’t studying/ is watching 5. do you go 6. takes 7. is raining 8. Do you like 9. Does she often go 10. don’t drink IV. Complete each sentence with the suitable form of word provided. 1. famous 2. unemployment 3. friendship 4. national 5. celebration 6. iconic 7. peaceful 8. legendary V. Give the correct form of the verb in brackets. 1. is 2. have visited 3. have organized 4. has become/ attracts 5. has been 6. includes 7. takes place 8. is taking part in 9. is 10. are parading VI. Read the text and choose the best answer for each sentence. 1. D 2. B 3. D 4. D 5. A VII. Read the text and choose the best answer for each sentence. 1. D 2. C 3. A 4. A 5. D VIII. Read the text then choose the best answer. 1. d 2. c 3. b 4. c IX. Read the text again then fill in the blank with a suitable word or phrase from the text. 1. Indies 2. Portugal 3. 1492 4. Indians X. Reorder the words to make meaningful sentence. 1. California is home to the most iconic theme park in the world. 2. The Golden Gate Bridge in San Francisco is an icon of this famous city. 3. Australia is home to unique animals like the kangaroo and koala. 4. Scotland is famous for its historic centuries-old castles. 5. Australia has the biggest cattle station in the world. 6. The traditional garment of Scottish men is kilt. XI. Sample answer: There is one magical place where my family vacations to most summers. It is quiet, relaxing, beautiful, magnificent, and inspiring. Located in Saranac Lake, in rural New York, this is where my family has some of the best times. We stay in a calm and serene cabin where my Aunt and Uncle live. During the holiday we do many activities together such as hiking, swimming, fishing, canoeing, and boating on the lake. Also, playing board games and watching movies when it's rainy, having cookies down on the dock, or playing a good game of hide and seek in the woods. Vacations to the lake are like an escape from the outside world, and a chance to see nature and still have fun. Every summer is guaranteed to be a blast, in rain or shine. To conclude, my vacations to the lake will always remain memorable and special. I hope that one day I will be to continue tradition my family. Through the years, I have always been sort of jealous of my friends who told about extravagant vacations to paradise, but I have soon realized that I would never trade my experiences for any of theirs. Why? Because I have something that they will never have. I have a family that 155

loves and cares for each other, and would do anything to make everyone happy. I hope a lifetimes worth of memories from only a few days. Finally, I have joy.

UNIT 9 NATURAL DISASTERS (THẢM HỌA THIÊN NHIÊN) Bài 1: Khoanh tròn vào đáp án đúng. 1. Yesterday my brother (bought/was bought me) a new T-shirt. 2. Who (was broken/broke) the vase? 3. Yesterday I was having dinner when my door (wasknocked/was knocking). 4. At the moment my car (is polishing/isbeingpolished) by my brother. 5. This car (hasbeenused/has used) by Mr. Smith for 5 years. 6. The early train to Manchester city (leaves/is left) at 6 am tomorrow. 7. No one (hasheard/has been heard) about the accident last night. 8. If you work hard, you (will reward/will be rewarded). 9. (Havethepolicecaught/Have the poloce been caught) the thieves yet? 10. Which dress (chose/waschosen) to wear by Jane last night? 11. At this time next month, I (willbevisiting/will be visited) London with my family. 12. The children (are looking/arebeinglooked) after by a babysister. 13. You (will be receive/ willreceive) a lot of compliments if you win the contest. 14. Jim didn’t realize that his wallet (stole/wasstolen) until he came home. 15. (Wasyoubrought/Was you bringing) by your grandparents when you were small? Giải thích: Dựa vào văn cảnh để xác định động từ ở thể bị động hay chủ động. Bài 2: Hoàn thành các câu sau với thể bị động của động từ trong ngoặc ở thì thích hợp. Lưu ý: - Cấu trúc chung nhất của câu bị động các thì tiếp diễn “S+to be+V-ing+VpII” - Cấu trúc chung nhất của câu bị động các thì không tiếp diễn “S+to be+VpII” - Như vậy đối với những thì khác nhau thì động từ “to be” chia theo các cách khác nhau và tùy thuộc vào chủ ngữ. 1. I (usually take) _ amusuallytaken __to the cinema by my parents every month. 2. __ WasJiminformed ___(Jim/inform) of the exact date of the conference? No, he wasn’t. 3. The concert (broadcast)__willbebroadcast ____live tomorrow. 4. Yesterday, temparature (forecast) ____ wasforecast ___to reach 400C. 5. At this time tomorrow, a birthday cake (make)_willbebeingmade_for our best friend Jessy. 6. Who__wasrobbed___(rob) of all the properties last week? 7. All the members (treat) __aretreated____equally in our organization. 8. Nothing (do)__has been done__so far to prepare for the coming storm. 9. When I was small, I often (call) __was often called__by my nickname. 10. Yesterday, Jim was playing with his dog when the doorbell (ring)___was rung____. 11. What__has been done__(do) so far to lessen the impact of natural disasters? 12. At 8 o’clock yesterday, my brother (feed) __was being fed___by my mother while I (look) _was being looked___after by my father. 13. This film (never show) _has never been shown__on television before. 14. If you submit your assignment late, you (punish)_will be punished___by your teacher. 15. I think more attempts (make) _will be made__in the future to protect people from natura catastrophes. 16. No feasible solutions to this problem (put)__have been put____forward yet. 17. I don’t think that black café (prefer)__ispreferred___by many people. 18. Last week, everyone in my class (snow) ____wassnowed__under. Giải thích: be snowed under (dạng bị động): bị phủ kín, bị ngập dưới tuyết. 19. _Arethesesheepraised__(these sheep raise) by the local people? 20. Every student (anticipate)__isanticipated___to finish their essay before the deadline. Bài 3: Chuyển những câu chủ động sau đây thành câu bị động. 1. Jim will pick me to the airport tomorrow. 156

_ I will be picked to the airport by Jim tomorrow___________________________ 2. Peter wrote his report last week. __Peter’s report was written last week_______________________ 3. They will replace the old equipment with new one. __ The old equipment will be replaced with new one____________________________ 4. What will they do to prevent natural disasters? ___ What will be done to prevent natural disasters?_______________________ 5. I think we will soon use up the natural resourses. ___ I think the natural resourses will soon be used up _____________________ 6. The children water the trees every two days. ___ The trees are watered every two days _________________________________ 7. They never mentioned Jim in their conversation. ___ Jim was never mentioned in their conversation _________________________ 8. At this time next month I will be sitting an English text. __ At this time next month an English text will be being sat__________________ 9. When will they sell their new products? ___ When will their new products be sold?_________________________________ 10. At midnight, my brother and I was making a wish list. ___ At midnight, a wish list was being made by my brother and me______________ 11. My mother is preparing dinner at the moment. __ Dinner is being prepared by my mother at the moment ______________________ 12. No one will buy products with poor quality. ____ Products with poor quality won’t be bought______________________________ 13. They will not allow your dog to enter the museum. ____ Your dog won’t be allowed to enter the museum ___________________________ 14. Have anyone heard of Jim and Jane’s luxury wedding? ____Has Jim and Jane’s luxury wedding been heard by anyone?____________________ 15. The boys are using the computer to look up information. ____ The computer is being used by the boys to look up information ________________ Bài 4: Chuyển những câu bị động dưới đây thành câu chủ động. 1. A gift was sent to me by my old students. ___ My old students sent me a gift _______________________________________ 2. You are not allow by the teacher to cheat in the exam. ___ The teacher doesn’t allow you to cheat in the exam ________________________ 3. My table is being fixed by my father. ___ My father is fixing my table____________________________________________ 4. How long has this fax machine been used by Mr. Green? __ How long has Mr. Green used this fax machine _____________________________ 5. The singer was not recognized by his fan when he was at the restaurant. __ His fan didn’t recognize this singer when he was at the restaurant ________________ 6. He will be disqualified from the competition by the judges if he uses drugs. ___ The judges will disqualify him from this competition if he uses drugs ___________ 7. All the unnecessary lights will be turned off to save energy. ___They will turn off all the unnecessary lights to save energy ___________________ 8. Jane was prevented from staying up too late by her mother. ___ Jane’s mother prevented her from staying up too late _______________________ 9. Was this document typed by Mr. Brown? ___ Did Mr. Brown type this document?____________________________________ 10. Many dead people were found by the recuers after the earthquake. __ The recuers found many dead people after the earthquake __________________ Giải thích: Tân ngữ (sau “by”) của câu bị động chuyển lên làm chủ ngữ của câu chủ động. 157

Động từ chuyển từ thể bị động sang chủ động. Chủ ngữ của câu bị động chuyển thành tân ngữ (sau động từ) của câu chủđộng. Bài 5: Sắp xếp các từ đã cho thành câu hoàn chỉnh. 1. Jim/one/preferred/Which/ - /tea/is/coffee/by/or? ___ Which one is preferred by Jim – tea or coffee? __________________ Thứ nào được ưa thích bởi Jim – trà hay cà phê? 2. been/Many/caused/problems/that/storm/fierce/have/by. __ Many problems have been caused by that fierce storm _______________________ 3. Many/tornado/were/buildings/by/the/destroyed/last/night. ___ Many buildings were destroyed by the tornado last night. _______________________ 4. caused/Numerous/diseases/are/lack/by/of/water/fresh/the. __ Numerous diseases are caused by the lack of fresh water ______ 5. At/extra/the/moment/atentions/,/paid/to/are/storm/upcoming/the. __ At the moment, extra atentions are paid to the upcoming storm. __________ 6. person/a/was/left/Not/behind/single/the/flood/in. ___ Not a single person was left behind in the flood. ______________ 7. are/All/victims/flood/the/helped/local/the/by authorities/being. ____ All the flood victims are being helped by the local authorities ______________ 8. Shelters /be/to/provided/will/homeless/in/next/few/people/months/the. ___ Shelters will be provided to homeless people in the next few months. __________ 9. No/severely/was/one/tornado/yesterday/injured/in/the. ____ No one was severely injured in the tornado yesterday ___________ 10. a/scientists/now/A/is/speech/delivered/being/by/renowed. _____ A speech is being delivered by a renowed scientists now________________ Bài 6: Hoàn thành những câu sau, sử dụng thì quá khứ hoàn thành của động từ. 1. When I arrived at the station, the train (leave)___had left____. 2. My friend (live)___had lived____in China before she moved to American. 3. They (never been) ____had never been __ here before. 4. After I (finish) _ had finished ___ my breakfast, I went to work. 5. The student (not finish)_hadn’t finished_their assignments so they were in great troubles. 6. After the couple (eat) _had eaten___seafood at a seaside restauran, they felt sick. 7. If you (listen) __ hadlistened __to my advice, you wouldn’t have made that silly mistake. 8. What did Jim do after he (finish)__ hadfinished __his homework? 9. The trees were dead because it (be)__hadbeen___dry all the summer. 10. _Hadyoumet____(you/meet) Jane anywhere before? 11. Yesterday I was late for the train becase I (forget) _hadforgotten___my ticket home. 12. Peter told me that he (prepare) __ hadprepared__every thing for his party. 13. The grass was yellow as it (not rain) ___hadn’trained__all summer. 14. The electricity was cut off because we (not pay)__hadn’tpaid____our hydro bill on time. 15. We (not eat) _hadn’teaten___all the morning sowe felt very hungry. Bài 7: Khoanh tròn vào đáp án đúng. 1. My co-worker (had not used/didn’t use) email before, so I showed him how to use it. 2. Because I (hadn’t studied/didn’t study) for the test, I was very nervous. 3. The wave (had destroyed/ destroyed) the sandcastle that we had built yesterday. 4. When shewent out to meet her friends, she (had already done/ already did) all the chores. 5. The waitress brought a drink that I (didn’t order/ hadn’t ordered) before. 6. (Had you given/ did you give) James a ring before you dropped by his apartment? 7. Susan (took/had taken) a rest after she had washed all the dishes. 8. When Jim came to the meeting, everyone (had left/left). 9. Before she had dinner, she (hadwashed/washed) her hands carefully. 158

10. Before I (had gone/went) out, I asked my parents for permissions. 11. I could not remember the name of the man we (met/hadmet) the week before. 12. We (ate/had eaten) all the cakes mymom had made. 13. Before she (came/had come) home, she had met some of her old friends. 14. Before Jane (started/ had started) to make the cake, she had prepared all the ingredients. 15. I (hadfed/fed) my cat before I left home. Lưu ý: - Trong câu ở thì quá khứ có liên từ “before” thì mệnh đề ngay sau đó thường chia về thì quá khứ đơn, mệnh đề còn lại thường chia về quá khứ hoàn thành. - Câu có liên từ “after” thì mệnh đề ngay sau đó thường chia về thì quá khứ hoàn thành, mệnh đề còn lại thường chia về thì quá khứ đơn. Bài 8: Dựa vào những từ cho trước, viết câu hoàn chỉnh. 1. By/age/of/twelve/Jim/be/able/to/speak/English/fluently. __ By the age of twelve, Jim had been able to speak English fluently _____________ 2. She/gain/a lot of/working/experience/before/she/apply/for/that/job. ____ She had gained a lot of working experience before she applied for that job. _________ 3. We/be/great/troubles/because/we/spend/all/the/money. ____ We were in great troubles because we had spent all the money _______________ 4. My father/know/well/about/London/because/he/be/there/many/times. ____ My father knew well about London because he had been there many times ______ 5. My friend/study/Japanese/before/she/move/to/Japan. ___ My friend had studied Japanese before she moved to Japan _________________ 6. Peter/own/a/big/house/for/10 years/before/he/move/to/countryside. __Peter had owned a big house for 10 years before he moved to the countryside._______ 7. Where/you/live/before/1954? __ Where had you lived before 1954?_______________________ 8. Our team/encounter/many/obstacles/before/we/succeed. ____ Our team had encountered many obstacles before we succeeded __________ 9. Cindy/be/sick/until/she/stop/eating/junk food. ___ Cindy had been sick until she stopped eating junk food ______________________ 10. I/be/in/Canada/for/7 years/before/I/move/to/America. ______ I had been in Canada for 7 years before I moved to America ________________ Lưu ý: - Trong câu ở thì quá khứ có liên từ “before” thì mệnh đề ngay sau đó thường chia về thì quá khứ đơn, mệnh đề còn lại thường chia về quá khứ hoàn thành. - Câu có liên từ “after” thì mệnh đề ngay sau đó thường chia về thì quá khứ hoàn thành, mệnh đề còn lại thường chia về thì quá khứ đơn. BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO Bài 9: Đánh dấu [ ] trước câu đúng, đánh dấu [x] trước câu có lỗi sai và sửa lại cho đúng. __X___ 1. The tallest building in our city was collapsed last week. Lỗi sai: was collapsed Sửa: collapsed Giải thích: Dựa vào văn cảnh để xác định động từ ở thể chủ động hay bị động. “Ngôi nhà cao nhất thành phố đã sụp đổ tuần trước.” Lưu ý: “collapse” là một nội động từ (intransitive verb) và không bao giờ dùng dạng bị động. __ __ 2. All the people in my village have already evacuated before the food. Câu đúng __ X __ 3. How many people were the rescuers found yesterday? Lỗi sai: were the rescuers found Sửa: did the rescuers find Giải thích: Dựa vào văn cảnh để xác định động từ ở thể chủ động hay bị động. “Những nhân viên cứu hộ đã tìm thấy bao nhiêu người?” __ X ___ 4. Temporary shelters will be providing to the food victims. Lỗi sai: be providing Sửa: be being provided

Giải thích: Dựa vào văn cảnh để xác định động từ ở thể chủ động hay bị động. “Những chỗ ở tạm thời đang được cung cấp cho những nạn nhân của lũ lụt” ___ X _ 5. Their houses swept away in the storm. Lỗi sai: swept Sửa: was swept Giải thích: Dựa vào văn cảnh để xác định động từ ở thể chủ động hay bị động. “Nhà của họ bị cuốn đi trong cơn bão” __X___ 6. Were anyone injured by the flying debris in the storm. Lỗi sai: Were Sửa: was Giải thích: Câu bị động ở thì quá khứ đơn với chũ ngữ “anyone” nên to be chia thành “was”. __X___ 7. Natural disasters are wreaked havoc on human and the environment. Lỗi sai: are wreaked havoc Sửa: wreak havoc Giải thích: Dựa vào văn cảnh để xác định động từ ở thể chủ động hay bị động “Thảm họa thiên nhiên có ảnh hưởng nặng nề tới con người và môi trường”. __X___ 8.What has done to support the people in the flooded area? Lỗi sai: has done Sửa: has been done Giải thích: Dựa vào văn cảnh để xác định động từ ở thể chủ động hay bị động “Điều gì đã được làm để ủng hộ người dân vùng lũ?”. _ ___ 9. Many people havedonated money to build houses for poor people. Câuđúng __ __ 10. They were informed about upcoming storm by the local authorities. Câuđúng Bài 10: Dựa vào những từ cho trước, viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh. 1. After /the storm/pass/people/come/back/to/their/ normal/life. __ After the storm had passed, people came back to their normal life _____ Giải thích: Hành động “pass” xảy ra trước hành động “come” nên “pass” chia về quá khứ hoàn thành, “come” chia về quá khứ đơn. 2. A decent meal/prepare/by/my mother/after/ she/ come/ home/ after/ work. ___ A decent meal was prepared by my mother after she had come home after work ____ Giải thích: Hành động “come” xảy ra trước hành động “prepare” nên “come” chia về quá khứ hoàn thành, “come” chia về quá khứ đơn. Dựa vào văn cảnh để xác định mệnh đề thứ nhất động từ ở thể bị động. 3. By 1990, my family/ settle down/ in New Jersey/ for 10 years. __ By 1990, my family had settled down in New Jersey for 10 years __________ Giải thích: Hành động “settle” xảy ra trước một thời điểm trong quá khứ (by 1990) nên chia về quá khứ hoàn thành. 4. Jim/ have/ a/ shower/ when/ doorbell/ ring/ by/ his wife. ___ Jim was having a shower when the doorbell was rung by his wife _________________ Giải thích: Hành động “have” đang xảy ra thì hành động “ring” chen vào nên “have” chia về thì quá khứ tiếp diễn, “ring” chia về thì quá khứ đơn. Dựa vào văn cảnh để xác định mệnh đề thứ hai động từ ở thể bị động. 5. At this time last year/ a project/ on/ environmental/ issues/ carry/ by Dr.Brown. At this time last year, a project on environmental issues was being carried by Dr.Brown. Giải thích: Câu bị động ở thì quá khứ tiếp diễn. 6. They/ prepare/ carefully/ for/ the hurricane/ before/ it/ arrive. __ They had prepared carefully for the hurricane before it arrived __________ Giải thích: Hành động “prepare” xảy ra trước hành động “arrive” nên “prepare” chia về thì quá khứ hoàn thành, “arrive” chia về thì quá khứ đơn 7. Many people/ live/ in temporary shelters/ until/ the/ storm/ pass. __ Many people had lived in temporary shelters until the storm passed._________ Giải thích: Hành động “live” xảy ra trước hành động “pass” nên “live” chia về thì quá khứ hoàn thành, “pass” chia về thì quá khứ đơn 8. Earthquakes/ in Japan/ cause/ devastating/ effects/ on/ human/ and/ environment/ recently. Earthquakes in Japan have caused devastating effects on human and the environment recently.

159

160

Giải thích: Câu bị động ở thì hiện tại hoàn thành. Bài 11: Cho dạng đúng của từ trong ngoặc để hoàn thành các câu dưới đây. 1. I (tell) _wastold__by Jim that he (paint) _hadpainted__the entire house. 2. Japanese children (teach) _aretaught__how to escape an earthquake at an early age. 3. When we (arrive)_arrived____, we (find)__found__that the bus (leave)__had left__. 4. The police (evacuate)_had evacuated_ the building before it (collapse)__ collapsed__. 5. When she (call) __called_me last night, I (go) _hadgone_to sleep, so I could’t answer her. 6. I (never meet)__hadnevermet ____Peter before the party last night. 7. Food and shelters (provide)__are being provided_to the local people at the moment. 8. What (do)_has been done_so far to minimize the impacts of natural disasters in our country. 9. I (prepare) __has prepared_carefully before I (give) the _gave___the presentationabout the impacts of natural disasters. 10. My friend (save)_ hadsaved_ a lot of money before he (decide) decided_to buy a new house. 11. I hope that financial aids (offer)_ will be offered __to the poor people in the drought area. 12. Peter and Jane (eat)__had eaten____before they (come) __came__to see me. 13. So far, hundreds of the temporary shelters (provide)__have been provided__to the earthquake victims. 14. A relief agency (just found)__has just been founded___to lessen the effects of the flood on human’s property. 15. Survivors of the earthquake (receive)___had received__help from the authorities before they could get back to their normal life. Bài 12: Hoàn thành những câu sau với dạng đúng của những động từ cho sẳn. evacuate injure rescue provide forecast destroy suffer cause 1. Many people__hadsuffered__from waterborne diseases after the severe flood last year. 2. The locals__hadbeenevacuated ___from their village to escape the earthquake already. 3. Free food and fresh water __isprovided___to the victims of natural disaster every year. 4. Five people__havebeenrescued___from drowning in the rushing stream so far. 5. The tornado ___haddestroyed___many houses before it stopped. 6. Some people __wereinjured___after the earthquake. 7. A hurricane___isforecast____by the meteorologists to reach our area next week. 8. Every year, natural disasters____cause___loss of human life, damage to property and deterioration of the environment. TEST 1 UNIT 9 I. 1. C 2. D 3. C 4. D 5. A II. 1. B 2. A 3. A 4. D 5. C III. 1. A 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. C IV. 1. C 2. A 3. C 4. B 5. D 6. B 7. A 8. C 9. D 10. C 11. D 12. C 13. C 14. B 15. C 16. B 17. D 18. D 19. A 20. C V. 1. B 2. B 3. B 4. D 5. A 6. B 7. C 8. A 9. C 10. B 11. A 12. D 13. D 14. A 15. A 16. C 17. A 18. B 19. D 20. A VI. 1. came/had finished 2. had met 3. went/ had read 4. hadn’t worn 5. had started 6. had done/ went 7. had lived/ moved 8. told/ had learned 9. had worked/ retired 10. got/ had already started 11. came/ had changed 12. had grown 13. came/ had waited 14. listened/ had done 15. had gone/ went 161

VII. 1. came - left 4. had done - come

2. got up - had left 5. met - had divorced

3. had finished - went 6. hadn’t bought - would had had

1. D 6. B

2. A 7. C

3. C 8. D

4. A 9. A

5. B 10. B

1. C 6. A

2. D 7. C

3. B 8. A

4. A 9. C

5. D 10. B

1. A

2. D

3. B

4. C

5. A

1. D

2. D

3. C

4. A

5. B

VIII.

IX. 11. B

X. XI. XII. 1. After David had gone home, we arrived. 2. Before we took a look around the shops, we had had lunch. 3. When we got out of the office, the light had gone out. 4. By the time we started our work, she had explain everything clearly. 5. Before my mother came home, my father had watered all the plants in the garden. XIII. 1. Tea can’t be made with cold water. 2. All the workers of the plant were being instructed by the chief. 3. Some of my books have been taken away. 4. The meeting will be held before May Day. 5. The engine of the car has to be repaired. 6. The window was broken and some pictures were taken away by the boy. 7. A lot of money is spent on advertising everyday. 8. This room may be used for the classroom. 9. A story is going to be told by the teacher. 10. The cake is being cut with a sharp knife by Mary. 11. The woman with a red hat was looked at by the children. 12. The victims have been provided with food and clothing. 13. The lesson is explained by the teacher. 14. The food is being cooked in the kitchen by Mrs Green. 15. The patients were examined by the doctor. 16. That noise was made by these boys. 17. English is spoken all over the world. 18. He was given the money back last Sunday. 19. These exercises can’t be done quickly. 20. The report had been finished by noon. TEST 2 UNIT 9 I. 1. D 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. D II. 6. C 7. B 8. D 9. B 10. B 11. D 12. D 13. D 14. C 15. A III. 1. flood 2. drought 3. landslide 4. hurricane 5. tornado IV. 1. provided 2. taken 3. recover 4. suffered 5. buried 6. were evacuated 7. are scattered 8. have raged V. 162

1. told 2. told 3. had called 4. had told 7. said 8. was 9. had been 10. Were VI. 1. had done 2. had paid 3. hadn't slept 6. Had they gone 7. had heard 8. had tried VII. 1. had done – went 2. had lived – moved

5. Was 11. says

6. had to 12. feels

4. had broken down 9. hadn't had

5. hadn’t flown 10. hadn't seen

3. told – had learned 4. had worked – retired

5. got – had already started 6. came – had changed 7. had grown 8. came – had waited VIII. . 1. had hit 2. had returned 3. suffered 4. occurred – had rained 5. said – had caused 6. erupted – covered IX. 1. eruption 2. evacuation 3. destructive 4. Survivors 5. accommodation 6. provision X. 1. was caused 2. will be closed 3. was expected 4. were sent 5. were hit 6. were blown 7. are warned 8. are put out 9. were flooded10. were destroyed – were damaged XI. 1. drops 2. a 3. irrigated 4. causes 5. normal 6. dry 7. blown 8. wells 9. suffer 10. because of XII. 1. C 2. C 3. B 4. A 5. D XIII. 1. B 2. D 3. B 4. D 5. B 6. D 7. A 8. A 9. C 10. A XIV. 1. It hit the Gulf of Mexico in 1969. 2. Her bed was floating near the ceiling, and then it floated out of the window. 3. It was falling down. 4. It reached a speed of 234 m per hour. 5. It carried her 8 km from her house. XV. 1. True 2. False 3. True 4. False 5. True XVI. 1. B 2. B 3. C 4. B 5. D XVII. 1. B 2. C 3. A 4. A 5. D XVIII. Drought in Central Viet Nam 1. A drought emergency was declared last month after five months without rain in Ninh Thuan and other provinces in Central Viet Nam. 2. A drought is a long period when there is little or no rain. 3. Hot weather with the highest temperature of 42 degree Celsius hit Central Viet Nam. 4. In particular, rainfall is lower than the average of the past few years. 5. In Ninh Thuan, about 50,000 local people suffered from drinking water shortage. 6. Hundreds of hectares of rice and vegetables were destroyed and 500 cattle died due to prolonged drought. 7. In Gia Lai and other provinces, water at many reservoirs dropped to the “dead” level for several months. 8. The provinces received financial supports worth VND 172 billion from the government. 9. 163

TEST 3 UNIT 9 I. Circle the word with a different stress pattern from the others. 1. C 2. A 3. A 4. D 5. B II. Circle the words with the underlined parts pronounced differently from the others. 1. A 2. D 3. A 4. B 5. B 6. B 7. C 8. D III. Circle the word with a different stress pattern from the others. 1. D 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. C IV. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to complete each sentence. 1. B 2. A 3. C 4. A 5. D 6. C 7. A 8. C 9. A 10. D V. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D to complete each sentence. 1. C 2. B 3. D 4. A 5. A 6. B 7. C 8. D 9. C 10. B VI. Match the words in column A to their definition in column B. 1. e 2. g 3. i 4. a 5. h 6. j 7. d 8. b 9. c 10. f VII. Give the correct form of the verbs in the brackets. 1. felt/ had eaten/ drunk 2. Did you hear 3. had already arrived/ struck 4. erupted/ had evacuated 5. saw 6. saw/ helped/ was 7. took/ learnt 8. had had/ left VIII. 1. are planted 2. was cleared 3. will be sent 4. was rebuilt 5. had been evacuated 6. had been already sent 7. were destroyed/ happened 8. were killed 9. will be polluted 10. was caused IX. Complete the sentences, using the correct form of the words from the box. 1. explored 2. attracted 3. active 4. died 5. contaminated 6. destroyed 7. poisonous 8. Emergency X. Complete each sentence with the correct form of the verbs in brackets. 1. didn't drink/ drank 2. sent/ had....received 3. had made/ sat down/ finished 4. had broken 5. had examined/ gave 6. built/ was/ happened 7. went/ were 8. had seen 9. died/ had never met 10. became/ had taken off XI. Give the correct forms of the words in brackets to complete the sentences. 1. dangerous 2. safety 3. electricity 4. erupted 5. preparation 6. natural 7. shortage 8. stormy 9. erosion 10. destroyed 11. damage 12. scarce XII. Read the paragraph below and fill in each blank with a suitable word from the boxes. 1. A 2. B 3. B 4. D 5. C XIII. Text 1: 1. Read the passage and choose the best answer A, B, C or D to each question below. 1. A 2. D 3. B 4. C 5. A 2. Read the passage again. Decide these sentences TRUE (T) or FALSE (F) 1. F 2. T 3. F 4. F 5. T 6. T XIV. Choose the correct answer A, B, or C to complete the passage below. 1. A 2. B 3. B 4. C 5. B 6. A 164

XV. Text 1 1. B 2. D

3. C

4. A

5. D

XVI. Text 2 1. The people in Puerto Rico are the first to give names to hurricanes. 2. All the hurricanes that strike the east of the United States begin in the small island of Puerto. 3. Because it is the day on which it arrives. 4. A weatherman began the idea of giving girls' name to hurricanes? 5. The story described how Maria grew and developed, and how she changed the lives of people when she struck the United States. 5. One of their duties was to warn American ships and planes when a storm was coming. XVII. Change these sentences into passive voice. 1. Some aid was sent to earthquake Japanese victims by Viet Nam in 2014. 2. Radio waves were discovered by Heinrich Hertz. 3. Enough food and water were prepared for a disaster. 4. Many houses and buildings were hit by a tornado. 5. Some raincoats had been bought before the weather forecast was heard. 6. Our windows are going to be repaired by my father tomorrow. 7. Almost all of my house was damaged by the earthquake. 8. More trees should be planted to prevent some natural disasters. 9. I been told a story about a tsunami occurring in his country by my e-pal. 10. My car is going to serviced by a mechanic tomorrow because it was damaged severely by yesterday's storm. XVIII. Complete the table below. Think of a natural disaster and make a list of preparation for the disaster. Name of a Preparation natural disaster Eg: A tornado Before a tornado - Learn the signs of a tornado: a dark, greenish sky; large hail: dark, low clouds; and loud roaring sound. During a tornado - Go to the safe place in your home and make sure you stay away from the windows. - Get inside a sturdy building. - Lie down and cover your head with your hands. After a tornado - Stay away from any damage you see. - Listen to the radio or TV

TEST 1 FOR UNIT 7,8,9 I. 1. C 2. A 3. C 4. D 5. A II. 1. capital 2. popular 3. while 4. mountainous 5. variety 6. but 7. area 8. landscapes 9. diverse 10. development III. 1. invited 2. could help 3. would email 4. knew 5. were 6. had 7. had – would get 8. spoke – would be 9. knew – would tell 9. would do – were not IV. 1. B 2. D 3. B 4. C 5. B 6. A 7. C 8. A V. 1. English 2. use 3. main 4. speak 5. first 6. children 7. native 8. increasing VI. 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F VII. 1. It is considered one of the strongest tropical cyclones ever observed. 2.It is Yolanda. 3.It was disastrous and widespread. 4.About 9.5 million people have been affected by the typhoon. 5.At least five people died in Vietnam when Haiyan hit the country. 6.It would be long and difficult. TEST 2 FOR UNIT 7,8,9 I. Choose the word which has a different stress pattern from the others. 1. A 2. B 3. D 4. B 5. A II. Choose the best answer A, B, C or D for each sentence. 1. C 2. D 3. B 4. C 5. A 6. B 7. D 8. B 9. C 10. A III. Complete the sentence with correct form of the verb.

XIX.

Use the information from the table in Ex 2 and write about how to prepare when a natural disaster happens. (80-100 words) Your writing: Preparation can protect us from being victims of a natural disaster. To prepare for a tornado, firstly we have to learn the signs of a tornado so that we can know that there will be a tornado. The signs include a dark, greenish sky; large hail; dark, low clouds; and loud roaring sounds. During the tornado, we should go to the safe places in our house and get away from the window because the windows can be broken into pieces by the tornado and people can get injured if they are close to them. More importantly, we should lie down and cover our heads with our hands to avoid being hit into our heads. After the tornado, we should get away from any damage and listen to the news. 165

166

1. will save/ don't waste 2. had built 3. were damaged 4. didn't realise 5. Had 6. would run IV. Read the text then answer the questions below. 1. Wales is a country with two languages: Welsh and English. 2. The north west has the highest ratio of Welsh to English speakers. 3. The road signs are bilingual. 4. The daffodil and the leek are national flowers of Wale. 5. According to legend, Saint David ordered his Welsh soldiers to identify themselves by wearing leeks on their helmets in an ancient battle against the Saxons that took place in a leek field. V. Read the text and choose the correct answers. 1. D2. B3. A4. D5. B VI. Reorder the words to make meaningful sentence. 1. The temperature today is one degree higher than yesterday. 2. English is an official language in Singapore. 3. The USA, the United Kingdom and New Zealand are all English speaking countries. 4. What do you like about Scotland? 5. Aquatic plants may also die because of the polluted water. VII. Rewrite the sentences using the word given in brackets 1. I can understand him if he doesn't speak so quickly. 2. Smoke from mills, factories and industry can lead to health problems like asthma and lung diseases. 3. We don't trust Lan because of her bad behaviours. 4. In spite of taking a taxi, he still arrived late for school.

UNIT 10 – COMMUNICATION (GIAO TIẾP) Bài 1: Viết các câu dưới đây theo cấu trúc thì Tương lai tiếp diễn. 1. I’m going to watch television from 9 until 10 o’clock this evening. So at 9.30 I __ will be watching television _______ 2. Tomorrow afternoon I’m going to play tennis from 3 o’clock until 4.30. So at 4 o’clock tomorrow I ____ will be playing tennis _________ 3. Jim is going to study from 7 o’clock until 10 o’clock this evening. So at 8.30 this evening he ___will be studying___________ 4. We are going to clean the flat tomorrow. It will take from 9 until 11 o’clock. So at 10 o’clock tomorrow morning ____ we will be cleaning the flat ____ 5. Tom is a football fan and there is a football match on television this evening. The match begins at 7.30 and ends at 9.15. So at 8.30 this evening _Tom will be watching a football match on television __ 6. Don’t phone me between 7 and 8 __we will be having___(we/have) dinner. 7. A: Can we meet tomorrow afternoon? B: Not in the afternoon__I will be working_____( I/work). 8. Do you think ____you will still be doing________(you/still/do) the same job in ten years’ time? 9. If you need to contact me, ___I will be staying___(I/stay) at the Hilton Hotel until Friday. 10. __ I will be meeting_________(I/meet) Laura at 9 tomorrow. Bài 2: Đặt câu hỏi dưới đây theo cấu trúc thì Tương lai tiếp diễn. 1. You want to borrow your friend’s bicycle this evening. (you/ use/ your bicycle this evening?) ___ Will you be using your bicycle this evening? _____________________ 2. You want your friend to give Tom a message this afternoon. (you/ see/ Tom this afternoon?) ___ Will you be seeing Tom this afternoon?_______________ 3. You want to use your friend’s typewriter tomorrow evening. (you/ use/ your typewriter tomorrow evening?) ___ Will you be using your typewriter tomorrow evening?_______________ 4. Your friend is going shopping. You want him/her to buy some stampsfor you at the post office. (you/ pass/ the post office when you’re in town?) ____ Will you be passing the post office when you’re in town?____________________ Bài 3: Dùng cấu trúc thì tương lai tiếp diễn, hoàn thành những câu sau. 1. This time next week Helen__will be travelling____(travel) to Brazil with her husband. 2. My aunt _will be opening____(open) her new restaurant in town. 3. They ___will be swimming____(swim) in the sea before the end of the month. 4. _____ Will ___your friend ___bewaiting_____(wait) for you at the airport? 5. My grandmother___ will be having_____(have) an operation very soon. 6. Jackeline__ will be interviewing______(interview) the candidates for the post. 7. I know you won’t be asleep at 12.00. You__will be playing____(play) computer games. 8. Next Saturday night Sonia ___willbe having___(have) dinner with some friends. 9. The mechanic__will be repairing_____(repair) my car in the garage. 10. Joana __will be living_____(live) in Greece happily with her family. 11. My mom__will be decorating_____(decorate) our new flat. 12. The tennis player __will be competing___(compete) for the World Cup. 13. The police__will be investigating _____(investigate) the kipnapping of the kid. 14. We____will be celebrating ___(celebrate) Christmas in a month’s time. 15. Why____will_____you_bewriting____(write) these novels in a short period of time? 16. By half past seven your father__willbearriving____(arrive) in Berlin. 168 167

17. I __won’t bewashing______(not wash) all my summer clothes by ten o’clock. 18. You___will be answering____(answer) all my questions for the survey. 19. My grandparents ___will be spending____(spend) next month in Spain. 20. The gardener__will be cutting__(cut) the old trees in aweek. 21. Barbara__will be doing______(do) the shopping in two hours. 22. Your teacher__will be correcting___(correct) the final exams right now. 23. The woman __will be talking___(talk) with her friend on the phone. 24. My alarm clock__will be ringing___(ring) tomorrow morning at 7.15. Bài 4: Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc, gerund (V-ing) hoặc to-infinitive (to V) 1. Jim loves___working_______in Thailand. (to work) 2. I hate ___doing_____the shopping on Saturday. (to do) 3. Blast! I forgot ___ to buy _____milk. (to buy) 4. In the end we decided___ to stay ______in. (to stay) 5. I need _____ to find _____some information about Portugal. (to find) 6. My parents like____going_____ for long walks at the weekend. (to go) 7. Tony gave up_smoking______years ago. (to smoke) 8. I wanted____ to go _______and see Troy but no one else was interested. (to go) 9. Mrs. Leith offered____ to take ______us to the airport. (to take) 10. Clare refused___ to help _____clean up after the party. (to help) 11. I tried____ to persuade ______him to come but it was no use. (to persuade) 12. Do you mind not___smoking______? (to smoke) 13. Everybody really enjoys __dancing___the cha-cha-cha. (to dance) 14. Lionel admitted___eating_____my chocolate mousse. (to eat) 15. We arranged___ to meet _____under the station clock at half nine. (to meet) 16. The firemen managed____ to put out _____the fire pretty quickly. (to put out) 17. I always try to avoid ___seeing______him whenever I can. (to see) 18. My brother denied___eating____my chocolate mousse. Maybe his hamster ate it. (to eat) Bài 5: Dựa vào đáp án của Bài 4, đặt động từ in đậm vào các cột bên trái sao cho thích hợp. Sau đó dịch nghĩa của động từ sang tiếng Việt. VERB + GERUND VERB + TO + INFINITIVE Translation Translation 1. _admit__ ……thừa nhận… 1. ___decide____ …quyết định……… 2. __mind____ …thấy phiền lòng…… 2. ___forget_____ …quên……… 3. ___enjoy____ …thích……… 3. ___need_____ ……cần…… 4. ___give up______ …từ bỏ……… 4. __offer_____ ……đề nghị…… 5. ___hate______ ……ghét…… 5. ___refuse_____ ……từ chối……… 6. ___like______ ……thích…… 6. ___try______ ……cố gắng…… 7. ___love______ ……yêu thích…… 7. ___want_____ ……muốn……… 8. ___avoid______ ……tránh…… 8. ___arrange_____ ……sắp xếp……… 9. ___deny______ ……phủ nhận…… 9. ___manage____ …xoay sở được…… Bài 6: Đọc đoạn văn dưới đây. Hoàn thành các câu bằng cách cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc ở dạng V-ing hoặc to V. Minutes of the English Club Meeting End of term gathering Eric said that we should begin (1)___ planning_____(plan) the End of Term Gathering of the English Club as he had promised (2)___togive_________(give) the details to Mrs. Clean by next week. Mark suggested (3)___booking_______(book) a room at the Golden Dragon Restaurant. However, Susan felt that most members could’t afford (4)____topay___(pay) for an expensive dinner. Ellen offered (5)__tolet_______(let) us use her parens’home in Kowloon Tong on Saturday afternoon. She said that she liked (6)____having____(have) big parties and she didn’t mind (7)_____ organizing____(organize) it by

herself. However, Donald hated (8)__making_______ (make) one person do all the work. He wanted (9)_____toget__ (get) more members involved. Simon considered (10)__holding____(hold) the gathering at the Beachside Café in Sai Kung. He thought most members would enjoy (11)_____going____(go) to Sai Kung. Maggie said a lot of members would hesitate (12)__totravel_______(travel) all the way to Sai Kung because of the distance. The members continue (13)__discussing___(discuss) the suggestions for time but no decision was reached. BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO Bài 7: Dựa vào các từ cho sẳn, viết câu ở thì Tương lai tiếp diễn. 1. (I/not travel/next week) ___ I won’t be travelling next week _______ 2. (Sam/study/at two o’clock) ____ Sam will be studying at two o’clock ___________ 3. (you/work/tonight) _____ Will you be working tonight? ______________ 4. A: (she/study) ___Will she be studying?___________? B: No,she___won’t_______ 5. (they/not drive/tomorrow) _____ They won’t be driving tomorrow _____________ 6. A: (you/sleep?) ___Will you be sleeping?__________B: Yes, I __will_____ 7. we/watch/TV/tonight) ____We will be watching TV tonight____________ 8. (Mr.Smith/fly to Italy/soon) _____ Mr.Smith will be flying to Italy soon _____________ 9. (the sun/set/at seven o’clock) _____ The sun will be setting at seven o’clock ______ 10. A: (we/eat/soon?) ___Will we be eating soon?___________B: Yes, we __will___ 11. (where/you/stay?) ____Where will you be staying?_____________________ 12. (I/do/my homework/tonight) _____ I will be doing my homework tonight ________ 13. (how/they/get to work?) ____ How will they be getting to work? _______________ 14. A: (she/play?) ____Will she be playing?________B: No, she _won’t____ 15. (I/get a haircut/this afternoon) _____ I will be getting a haircut this afternoon _____ Bài 8: Khoanh tròn vào phương án đúng. 1. We don’t want coming/tocome last in the league. 2. It’s best to avoid eating/to eat too much sugar. 3. You have to practice to kick/kicking the ball. 4. You might choose not coming/tocome. 5. She’s learning toplay/playing the guitar. 6. He refused tolisten/listening to them. 7. We agreed being/to be there at six. 8. I can’t imagine not living/to live in Spain. 9. They expect being/tobe about half an hour late. 10. It seems tobe/being working well. 11. You promised tocome/coming to the match. 12. They’ve decided to cooperate/ coorperating with us. 13. He denies planning/to plan the robbery. 14. They deserve being/tobe proud. 15. When will you finish to cook/cooking? 16. Can you help me towrite/writing this essay? 17. They admitted to steal/stealing the car. 18. I’ll consider giving/to give up next year. 19. Eveyone enjoys relaxing/to relax on the beach. 20. I hope tostay/staying for at least a week. 21. We like swimming/to swim in the sea. 22. They prefer to dance/dancing to singing. 23. I think I’ll manage todo/doing it by myself. 24. I’ll try tofinish/finishing this before Monday. Giải thích:

169

170

Động từ + to V: want, choose,learn, refuse,agree, expect, seem,promise, decide, deserve, help, hope, manage, try…. Động từ + V-ing: avoid, practice, imagine, finish, hate, admit, consider, enjoy,like…. TEST 1 UNIT 10 I. 1. A 2. D 3. C 4. B 5. A II. 1. A 2. C 3. C 4. D 5. B III. 1. A 2. A 3. C 4. A 5. A 6. B 7. C 8. A 9. D 10. C 11. A 12. A 13. B 14. A 15. C 16. B 17. D 18. A 19. B 20. D IV. 1. invisible 2. interactive 3. immediately 4. indirectly 5. overslept 6. instantly 7. non-verbally 8. communicative V. 1. The purpose of newspapers to inform the public of political, social, economic and entertainment happenings, among other things. 2. There are 3 types of newspapers. They are daily newspapers, weekly newspapers and specialinterest newspapers. 3. Daily newspapers of often have sections for news, sports, arts, and entertainment, business, and classified advertising. 4. Weekly newspapers focus on news of interest to readers in a smaller area than that of a daily paper. 5. Special-interest newspapers cover news of interest to a particular group of readers. 6. Electronic newspapers are cheap up-to-date, and convenient for most readers in the world VI. 1. Because the sender paid for the letter to travel in his or her own country, then the person in the other country paid for that part of the trip. If a letter crossed several countries, the problem was worse. 2. Because it makes the process of delivering letter simple. Only the senders have to pay for the letters. 3. Other countries started making their own postage stamps very quickly. 4. It takes care of any international mail problems. 5. Because they were the first stamps in the world. VII. 1. D 2. C 3. B 4. A 5. D VIII. 1. A 2. B 3. C 4. D 5. B 6. A 7. C 8. D IX. 1. Though the traffic was bad, I arrived on time. 2. I wish I knew more English words. 3. She asked me if/whether I had many friends. 4. If we had a lot of money, we would buy a lot of new books. 5. It is not easy to learn English X. 1. Mr. Brown wants to use solar energy but he does not have enough money to buy necessary equipment. 2. By the time Shakespeare died in 1616, he had written more than 37 plays. 3. Since Douglas fell off his bicycle last week, he has had to use crutches to walk. 4. I (had) turned off the lights before I left the room. 5. The frying pan caught on fire while I was making dinner. 6. I wont return my book to the library until I have finished my research project. XI. 1. I am having a great time here in England. 171

2. I have been here for three months and my university term started two months ago. 3. I live in a dormitory with some foreign students. 4. They come from the different parts in the world. 5. They are very friendly and pleasant and their English is much better than mine. 6. I practice speaking English with them every day. 7. Now I am making a good progress. 8. My pronunciation is much better and I understand almost everything. 9. I hope my English will considerately improve at the end of the course. 10. Write to me soon. XII. 1. Lan is choosing a song to set ringback tone for her phone. 2. She kept on glancing at her watch in order to avoid being late. 3. Nga will be reading the message board at 8.00 a.m tomorrow. 4. Peter has received their mail for ages, but he hasn’t replied it yet. 5. Snail mail is not favoured much because it is slower than email. TEST 2 UNIT 10 I. 1. B 2. C 3. D 4. A 5. B II. 6. C 7. A 8. D 9. D 10. B 11. C 12. D 13. B 14. D 15. A III. 16. D 17. B 18. D 19. C 20. A 21. C 22. A 23. D IV. 1. make 2. leave 3. take 4. post 5. send V. 1. E 2. G 3. I 4. J 5. A 6. C 7. B 8. D 9. F 10. H VI. 1. send an e-mail or call someone 2. send an e-mail or send a text message 3. go on the Internet 4. leave a message 5. wrote a letter 6. send a card 7. make a phone call or send an e-mail 8. leave a message 9. send a card or send an e-mail 10. go on the Internet VII. 1. will be sharing 2. will be using 3. will be developing 4. will be helping 5. will be using 6. will be changing 7. will be using 8. will be developing 9. will be using 10. will be making VIII. 1. to post 2. to have – (to) drink 3. tidy 4. to stop 5. doing – to do 6. going IX. 1cyber-bullying 2. posted 3. homepage 4. View 5. keep in touch with 6. online X. 1. B 2. A 3. D 4. C 5. B 6. C 7. D 8. A XI. 1. F 2. T 3. T 4. T 5. F 6. F XII. 1. B 2. B 3. A 4. B 5. B 6. A 7. B 8. A XIII. 1. He has spent about thirty hours on the Internet this week. 2. He goes to bed at half past eleven in the evening. 3. Because she thinks it’s really bad for you. 172

4. By sending and receiving e-mails. 5. She usually reads about four or five books in a week. XIV. Dear Teacher, My name is Hoang Diem Mi, and I am your student from class 8A. I would like to express my appreciation for all your efforts in teaching chemistry to our class. I write/ am writing this letter to apologize for not submitting my lab report on time. I am sorry for forgetting the deadline of the report, due last week. I promise that this thing does not happen again. I hope for your kind understanding, and accept my late submission. Best regards, Hoang Diem Mi XV. Dear Ms. Huong, I am sorry that I was absent from your Biology class yesterday. A classmate told me that handouts for the next lab assignment were given. We have to submit our assignments next Friday. Can I meet you during tomorrow’s recess to ask some questions about the correct way to write it? I look forward to speaking to you soon. Thank you very much. Best regards, Pham Van Phong TEST 3 UNIT 10 I. Circle the word with a different stress pattern from the others. 1. C 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. C II. Choose the word marked A, B, C, or D that the underlined part is pronounced differently from the others. 1. C 2. B 3. A 4. D 5. B III. Choose the answer that has a different stress pattern from the others. 1. A 2. C 3. A 4. D 5. D 6. B IV. Choose the correct answer A, B, C, or D to complete the sentences. 1. D 2. C 3. B 4. D 5. B 6. A V. Choose the best answer A, B, C, or D to complete these sentences below. 1. B 2. B 3. D 4. A 5. D 6. B 7. A 8. D 9. A 10. B VI. Fill in the blank with the words from the box to complete the sentences. 1. texting 2. signs 3. face-to-face meeting 4. body language 5. letters 6. video chat 7. facial expression 8. emails VII. Complete the sentences with the correct forms of the verb in the brackets. 1. writing 2. to install 3. to participate 4. to bring 5. spending/ playing 6. to cook/ to examine 7. explaining 8. stealing VIII. Complete the text with the past simple, present continuous or future continuous. 1. was 2. are helping 3. will be learning 4. was/ wrote 5. will be talking 6. made/ didn’t answer/ am 7. will be inventing 8. are planning IX. Choose the correct answer to each blank to complete the passage. 1. B 2. C 3. B 4. A 5. B 6. D 7. A 8. B X. Complete the following sentences with the correct form of the words in the to the brackets. 173

1. competitive 2. generosity 3. unattractive 4. communicated 5. nationality 6. active 7. expression 8. popularity XI. Read the following passage and choose the item (a, b, c, or d) that best answers each of the questions about it. 1. A 2. B 3. D 4. A 5. D XII. Choose the word (A, B, C, or D) that best fits each of the blank spaces. 1. B 2. C 3. B 4. C 5. C 6. C XIII. Choose the correct answer to complete the passage. 1. D 2. B3. A 4. C 5. B 6. C 7. A XIV. Read the following passage and choose the item (a, B, C or D) that best answers each of the questions about it. 1. B 2. D 3. D 4. B 5. A XV. Read the text below then choose the correct answer A, B, C or D for each question below. 1. B 2. C 3. B 4. D 5. A 6. D 7. D XVI. Read the passage then answer the questions. 1. B 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. D XVII. Rewrite the sentences as long as keep the similar meaning to the original one. 1. It took people more time to communicate with each other in the past. 2. Letters used to be written to keep in touch with her when he lived far from her. 3. When was that phone used by our teacher? 4. Why don’t we go on a picnic this weekend? 5. He suggested watching a comedy. “Let’s watch a comedy” he said. 6. “Why don’t you go to bed after taking some medicines?” said his friend. 7. What about eating out and then going to the amusement park? 8. Despite the bad weather, the football match was not cancelled. XVIII. Choose one of these topics below: a. A mobile phone text message. Hello, Mary. How r u 2day? Would u like 2 come 2 my birthday party this weekend? I’m happy 2 hear from u s. CUL. Yours. b. An email. Dear my new friend, My name is Lien, I am 4 years old. I study at a secondary school in my hometown. I have to study many subjects at school. My favourite subjects are Maths, Literature and English. On the weekend, I usually visit my grandparents. I love them so much. My family has 5 people: parents, brother and sister. My parents are farmers who work very hard on the field under the sun. My brother and sister are students. I love my family a lot. I love travelling around the world to exchange the culture and customs. In my free time I like reading books and listen to music. These activities help me relax and feel comfortable after studying hard or working under pressure. What about you? What do you do in your free time? Please share with me. I’m looking forward form you soon. Best regards, Lien UNIT 11: SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY (KHOA HỌC VÀ CÔNG NGHỆ) Bài 1: Viết lại cụm từ gạch chân trong mỗi câu dưới đây ở dạng thì tương lai đơn (will + V) hoặc thì tương lai tiếp diễn (will be + V-ing) sao cho phù hợp. 174

1. Don’t call me at 10 o’clock. I will be flying to Spain. 2. I suppose we will stayat a hotel next summer. 3. Come to see me in the afternoon. Iwill be working in the garden. 4. Do you think itwill snow at the weekend? 5. Is the coat O.K ?- Yes, Iwill take it 6. This time on Sunday we will be skiing in France. 7. I don’t know if I will stay here. Perhaps I will move to a big city one day. 8. Every studentwill be using/will use a computer in the future. Bài 2: Chia động từ trong ngoặc ở thì tương lai đơn hoặc thì tương lai tiếp diễn sao cho phù hợp. 1. I can buy it for you. I (shop)will be shoppingin the afternoon anyway. 2. Is Bill at school? – No, he isn’t. I suppose he (come) will come 3. I hope Simon (be) will bethere. 4. Did you remember to invite Mrs. Oates? – Oh, no! I forgot. But I (call) will callher now. 5. I’ll have a holiday next week. I (not get up) will not be getting up/will not get upat 6 o’clock as usual. 6. You are so late! Everybody (work) will be working when you arrive at the office. 7. Be careful or the cars (knock) will knockyou down. 8. We (move) will be movingour house this time tomorrow. 9. He (play) will be playingtennis at 7.30. He usually starts at 7 o’clock. Could you come before that? 10. Your suitcase is so big. I (take) will takeit for you. Bài 3: Dựa vào gợi ý, dùng thì tương lai đơn hoặc tương lai tiếp diễn để viết các câu hỏi dưới đây. 1. I am not sure if I can offer this room. Will our guest like it? 2. Can I borrow your laptop tonight? Will you be using it at about 9 o’clock? 3. We arrive in Aberdeen at 1 o’clock. Will we have time for lunch? 4. The show starts at 8. Please, will you drive me there? 5. Your journey will be so long. How will you be spending your timewhile you are on the train? 6. I’ve just missed the train. How will I get to school? 7. I’d like to see your project. If I come at 4.30, will you be working on it ? 8. If your teacher ask you, will you translate the text? 9. What will you be doingwhile I am cleaning the windows? 10. Will you take a taxi if the coach is booked? BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài 4: Chọn từ thích hợp trong hộp dưới đây rồi điền vào chỗ trống. There the following day two hours before my the previous week then the day before that evening that night that her 1. “I like this pair of shoes”. →She said (that) she liked that pair of shoes. 2. “Our plane lands tonight”→ They said their plane landed that night 3. “I saw Jane yesterday”→ He told me that she had seen Jane the day before 4. “I have met your father”→ Dan told me that he had met my father 5. “I am going to the cinema this evening”→ Sara told me that she was going to the cinema that evening 6. “Paul took his driving licence last week”→ Paul told me he had taken his driving licence the previous week. 7. “This girl is my sister”→ She said to me that that girl was her sister. 8. “I like the way they cook here”→ Tina said that she liked the way they cooked there 9. “She won’t arrive tomorrow”→ Sandra said that she wouldn’t arrive the following day 10. “Henry phoned Lara two hours ago”→ Henry told me that Lara had phoned before 11. “I am watching TV now”→ Mum said that she was watching TV then Bài 5: Điền vào chỗ trống từ phù hợp “said” hoặc “told” 1. He toldme a nice story. 2. Sarah said to her mum that she was sick. 3. Wesaid that we were going to leave that night.

4. Paul said his books were missing. 5. She said that she would take the dog out that night. 6. Brian said that he had moved to Canada the week before. 7. Dan told Lara to stop spending so much money. 8. Our teacher told us that Christopher Columbus had discovered had discovered America. 9. He said they would arrive the following day. 10. They told her to come early. 11. Fiona said to Kate that she had bought a nice skirt the day before. 12. I was sure that he told the truth. Bài 6: Đọc ví dụ và viết các câu gián tiếp ở thì hiện tại cho các câu dưới đây. Ví dụ: “I am waiting for you”→ Mary says to Peter she is waiting for him. ‘I am asking your help’. 1. Mary says to Peter she is asking his help 2. Paul says to Jenny he is asking her help 3. I say to you I am asking your help 4. You say to me you are asking my help 5. Jane says to the boys she is asking their help ‘We bought you some books yesterday’ 6. They say to us they bought us some books the day before/the previous day. 7. Sarah says to the children they bought them some books the day before/the previous day. 8. Mary says to Peter they bought him some books the day before/the previous day. 9. You say to me you bought me some books the day before/the previous day. 10. I say to you we bought you some books he day before/the previous day. Bài 7: Các câu trực tiếp dưới đây đã được chuyển thành câu gián tiếp. Hãy đọc, gạch chân và sửa lỗi sai có trong mỗi câu. 1. “I am not going to tolerate this anymore ”, said Sarah. Sarah said she was not going to tolerate that anymore. 2. “You have always been my friend”, said Joe. Joe said I had always beenhis friend. 3. “We never eat meat”, claimed Bill Bill claimed that they never atemeat 4. “I will talk to Sam soon,” she told me on Sunday. She told me on Sunday she would talk to Sam sonn. 5. “Mary used to exercise every day,” he said. He said Mary used to exercise every day. 6. “I wish I was twenty years younger,”said Linda. Linda said she wished she was twenty years younger. 7. “Answer the phone!”he told me. He told me to answerthe phone 8. “Where is Alex?” she asked me. She asked me where Alex was Bài 8: Hoàn thành các câu gián tiếp dưới đây. 1. Mr. Miller said, ‘I can’t come to the meeting on Sunday’ Mr. Miller said (that) he couldn’t come to the meeting on Sunday. 2. Mary said, ‘I’m feeling ill’ Mary said (that) she was feeling ill. 3. Your brother said, ‘I like chocolate’ Your brother said (that) he liked chocolate. 4. My brother said, ‘I’m going to learn to cook’ My brother said (that) he was going to learn to cook.

175

176

5. He said, ‘I’ll learn English online tomorrow’ He said (that) he would learn English online the next day. 6. My cousin said, ‘I’m not enjoying my job very much recently’ My cousin said (that) he wasn’t enjoying his job very much recently. 7. My parents said, ‘We’ll phone you when we get back’ My parents said (that) they would phone me when they got back. 8. Susan said, ‘You don’t know what Bob is doing’ Susan said (that) you/I didn’t know what Bob was doing. 9. She said, ‘I’ll tell dad I saw you’ She said (that) she would tell dad she had seen you/me. 10. He said, ‘I have got a toothache’ He said (that) he had got a toothache. 11. He said, ‘I have passed the physical test’ He said (that) he had passed the physical test. 12. Safia said, ‘I went to Italy last year’ Safia said (that) she had gone to Italy the previous year. 13. Kevin said, ‘I had a great weekend’ Kevin said (that) he had had a great weekend. 14. Mehrzad said, “I’m going to start my own photography business next month.” Mehrzad said (that) she was going to start her own photography business the following month. 15. Alex said, “I finished university in June” Alex said (that) he had finished university in June. 16. Safia said, “I have studied photography” Safia said (that) she had studied photography. 17. Maria said, “I will bring you a scarf from India” Maria said (that) she would bring me a scarf from India. BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO Bài 9: Chia động từ trong ngoặc ở thì tương lai đơn hoặc thì tương lai tiếp diễn để hoàn thành các câu sau. 1. I’m that next year this city (look) will be lookingmuch better. 2. They (have to) will have tochange their diet if they want to keep fit. 3. I (not do) won’t dothat if he doesn’t apologize to me. 4. I can’t go out with you, but I (make) will makeit up to you. 5. At 10 p.m I (go) will goto bed to get some rest. 6. I (not do) won’t be doinganything till Monday. 7. You can visit me tomorrow. I (not do) won’t be doinganything important. 8. Can I borrow your car? Sure, I (not use) won’t be usingit until Friday. 9. At 11 p.m I (sleep) will be sleeping. 10. You should recognize her easily. She (wear) will be wearing a red skirt. 11. I wish I could visit you, but I (manage) will be managinga very important project. 12. She (not come) won’t comewith us, I’m sure. 13. I (help) will helpyou as soon as I finish this project. 14. He (not be able) won’t be ableto carry such a heavy bag. 15. I think he (find) will findthis work more interesting when he grows up. 16. This time next month I (enjoy) will be enjoyingthe holidays. 17. Hold on, I (give) will giveyou a gift. 18. He (give) will be givingme 20$ a day during my stay. 19. I suppose the weather (be) will begood. 20. We (leave) will leavethis house as soon as possible. Bài 10: Khoanh tròn vào phương án đúng.

1. Customer in restaurant: Waiter, this place is dirty. Waiter: I’m sorry, sir, I _________________ (bring) you another. A. will bring B. will be bringing C. A &B 2. It’s beginning to get dark; the street lights ________ (go) on in a few minutes. A. will go B. will be going C. A & B 3. Let’s wait here; the swing bridge __________(open) in a minute to let that ship through. A. will open B. will be opening C. A & B 4. Guest: May I use your phone to ring for a taxi? Hostess: Oh, there’s no need for that; my son __________(drive) you home. B. will be driving C. A & B A.will drive 5. A: Before you leave the office you _________ (hand) the keys of the safe to Mr Pitt. Do you understand? B: Yes, sir. B. will be handing C. A & B A. will hand 6. Are you nearly ready? Our guests __________ (arrive) any minute. A. will arrive B. will be arriving C. A & B 7. Loudspeaker announcement: The ship __________ (leave) in a few minutes and all persons not travelling are asked to go ashore. A. will leave B. will be leaving C. A & B 8. You ought to try to get a ticket for the Spectators’ Gallery next week; they _______ (debate) international fishing rights. B. will be debating C. A & B A. will debate 9. A: You’ve left the light o. B: Oh, so I have. I _______ (go) and turn it off. A. will go B. will be going C. A & B 10. I’ve been appointed assistant at the local library. The you ___________ (work) under my sister. She is head librarian there. A. will work B. will be working C. A& B TEST 1 UNIT 11 I. 1. A 2. B 3. B 4. C 5. D 6. A 7. A 8. B 9. D 10. C II. 1. C 2. B 3. D 4. A 5. C III. 1. A 2. B 3. C 4. A 5. D IV. 1. C 2. B 3. C 4. D 5. D 6. A 7. C 8. D 9. C 10. B V. 1. will have implanted 2. will be taking 3. will become 4. will create 5. will have built 6. will connect 7. will design 8. will have run 9. will help 10. am I going to do VI. 1. dangerous 2. production 3. industrial/ medical 4. technological 5. ability 6. development 7. safety/ risky 8. scientist/ researcher/ scientific 9. admirer 10. conservationist VII. 1. B 2. A 3. D 4. A 5. D

177

178

6. A 7. C 8. D 9. B 10. C VIII. 1. A 2. B 3. D 4. A 5. B IX. 1. C 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. B 6. C 7. D 8. D 9. A 10. D X. 1. sold 2. smaller 3. many 4. which 5. where 6. what 7. make 8. much 9. ago 10. which XI. 1. Tom said that he wanted to buy a pocket calculator for his father. 2. She said that she had once spent a summer in that village. 3. The nurse told doctor that the patient in that room hadn’t obeyed his orders. 4. They told me that I had taught them English the previous year. 5. Mr. Brown said that their trip had cost them two thousand dollars. 6. He told her that she couldn’t find his hat anywhere in that room. 7. My father told them that his secretary was going to finish that job. 8. They said that they couldn’t meet her there either that day or the next day. 9. My mother said that she thought it wouldn’t rain the following day. 10. He told John that his car had been stolen. 11. They said that the river was rising early that year. 12. He said that he would expect her to come soon. 13. Our teacher said that World War II had broken out in 1939. 14. The students said that they would be sitting for their next exam the next Monday. 15. He said that he was going to finish that work. TEST 2 UNIT 11 I. 1. A 2. D 3. B 4. C 5. C II. 11. D 12. A 13. D 14. C 15. A 16. C 17. D 18. B 19. C 20. B III. 1.will have built 2. will connect 3. will design 4. will have run 5. will have implanted 6. will be taking 7. will become 8. will create IV. 1. development 2. safety – risky 3. scientist – researcher – scientific 4. dangerous 5. production 6. industrial – medical 7. technological 8. ability V. 1. educational 2. inventions 3. construction 4. Exploration 5. comfortable 6. harmful VI. 1. He was born in England. 2. He now lives in Massachusetts in the USA. 3. He looks very ordinary (about sixty years old and with brown hair). 4. Yes, he did. He went to school in London. 5. Because both his parents worked with computers. 6. He went to Oxford University, and studied physics. 7. He became more and more interested in computers. 8. In 1989 while he was working in Switzerland. 9. Because Tim Berners-Lee decided to make his ideas free to everyone. 10. He thinks that the web is a universe of information and it is for everyone. 179

VII. 1. A 2. C 3. D 4. B 5. B 6. C 7. A 8. B 9. C 10. A VIII. 1. B 2. D 3. F 4. C 5. E 6. A IX. 1. It got darker outside. 2. She thought that there should be a way to make her paper easier to see in the dark. 3. She used phosphorescent paint to cover an acrylic board. 4. The Glo-Sheet/ It can emit light but without heat. 5. She was 12 years old then. X. 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F 6. T 7. F 8. T XI. 1. He studied to serve the country’s independence. 2. He tried to study the science of making weapons. 3. It was the good thing to research and manufacture weapons for our soldiers to fight the enemy, so Uncle Ho changed his name – Tran Dai Nghia. 4. Because he was a gentle and quiet engineer, but his weapons were so successful. 5. It was bazookas/ recoilless canon (SKZ)/ flying bombs. XII. 1. The scientist said that cloning would become more popular in the next century. 2. Dr. Nelson said that every home would have at least one robot to perform any boring task. 3. Our teacher told us that parents did not allow children to play computer games for a long period of time. 4. The doctor told his patient that nutrition pills could cause serious side effects. 5. The physicist said that nuclear power plants didn’t require a lot of space. 6. The politician told the audience that wrong decisions in Chernobyl had caused a big nuclear explosion. XIII. 1. Our teacher said that we were learning more about our universe. 2.Dr. Nelson said that scientists had made various applications in long distance communication. 3.Our Chemistry teacher told us that science was a good and useful servant but it was a bad destructive master. 4.Our headmaster said that space tourism would broaden our knowledge of space. 5.Our History teacher told us that during the time in Paris in 1946 Uncle Ho had attracted several Vietnamese scientists to return to the country. 6.Our Math teacher said that Professor Le Van Thiem had believed in the importance of education and science, so he had founded a teacher training college and a college of fundamental science. XIV. There are several advantages of smartphone. Smartphones give users the ability to surf websites instead of using a desktop or a laptop. They also have applications which help us to create and edit Microsoft office documents. Smartphones have GPS which helps us to find the place we are looking for. With a smartphone, we can have access to any email accounts, like Outlook or Gmail, social networking sites, such as Facebook and Twitter. However, smartphones have some disadvantages. Smartphones are not durable, especially when they are not taken good care of. It is very expensive to buy smartphones compared to other phones. Smartphones can only work efficiently when there is an Internet connection. You cannot depend on smartphones for all your work but you need a computer to do some tasks. (131 words) TEST 3 UNIT 11 I. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. C 2. A 3. B 4. B 5. A 180

II.

Mark the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the word whose main stress is places differently from the rest. 1. A 2. C 3. A 4. D 5. A III. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D in each line. 1. A 2. A 3. C 4. D 5. B 6. B 7. D 8. A IV. Choose the correct tense of verb in each line. 1. C 2. A 3. A 4. B 5. A 6. C 7. B 8. A 9. B 10. B V. Choose the correct answer A, B or C in each line. 1. A 2. A 3. B 4. C 5. A 6. A 7. A 8. B 9. C 10. B VI. Each the sentences below has at least one mistake. Identify the mistakes. 1. C 2. C 3. C 4. C 5. A 6. D 7. D 8. C 9. D 10. A VII. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D in each line. 1. B 2. B 3. A 4. B 5. A 6. B 7. B 8. A 9. A 10. A VIII. Fill the gaps with suitable adjective from the box. 1. careful 2. foggy 3. famous 4. knowledge 5. dangerous 6. painful IX. Put the verbs into the correct form. 1. I have bought two tickets. My wife and I are going to see a movie tonight. 2. Mary thinks Peter will get the job. 3. A: “I am going to move from my house tomorrow. I have packed everything.” B: “I will come and help you.” 4. If I have enough money, I will buy a new car. 5. I will be there at four o’clock, I promise. 6. The meeting is going to take place at 4 p.m. 7. If you eat all of that cake, you will feel sick. 8. They are going to be at home at 10 o’clock because their son is staying alone at home. 9. Perhaps she won’t be able to come tomorrow. 10. Because of the train delay, the meeting isn’t going to take place at 10 o’clock X. Put the words in the correct form. 1. invention 2. information/ entertainment 3. popular 4. interactive 5. viewers 6. convenience 7. costly 8. communication XI. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D in each line. 1. A 2. B 3. C 4. D 5. D XII. Read the text and choose the correct answer A, B or C in each line. 1. C 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. C 6. A 7. C 8. C XIII. Read the text again and answer the questions. 1. They used drums. 2. They used horses. 3. It’s Pony Express. 4. It’s in 1865. 5. It’s Charles Wheatstone one of the most famous scientists in England at that time. XIV. Read the text again and choose the correct answers. 1. A 2. D 3. C 4. C 5. A XV.

1. won’t go rain 6. will you do

2. will fail

3. will sell

7. will she be 8. will the sun set

9. will get

XVI. Complete the following sentences. 1. ‘d send 2. ‘d bought 3. didn’t speak 4. ‘d failed 5. he couldn’t 6. looked 7. were going XVII. Complete the following sentences. 1. John said that Mandy was at home. 2. Max told me that Frank often read a book. 3. Susan said to me that she was watching TV. 4. Simon said that David had been ill. 5. Peggy told me that the girls had helped in the house. 6. Richard said to me that he was going to ride a skateboard. 7. Stephen and Claire told me that they had cleaned the windows. 8. Charles remarked that he hadn’t had time to do his homework. 9. Mrs. Jones told me that her mother would be 50 years old. 10.Jean said that the boss had to sign the letter.

4. is going to take 5. isn’t going to 10. are you going to take

8. weren’t listening

UNIT 12: LIFE ON OTHER PLANETS (CUỘC SỐNG TRÊN CÁC HÀNH TINH KHÁC)

Put the verbs into the correct form (will, going to, simple present or present progressive).

A. VOCABULARY BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN Bài 1: Hãy chỉ ra chức năng của hai động từ khuyết thiếu may và might trong những câu dưới đây. Viết Po vào ô trống bên cạnh nếu nó chỉ khả năng (Possibility), viết AP nếu nó chỉ lời xin phép (Asking for Permission), và viết PE nếu nó chỉ sự cho phép (Permission) 1. PO I may have lunch early I’m hungry. 2. AP May I come in now? 3. PO He might go abroad next month. 4. PO I may not have time to go out today. 5. AP May I borrow your book tomorrow? 6. PE You may not borrow the car until you can be more careful with it. 7. PE You may go camping with your friends if you get high marks in the next tests. 8. PO It’s quite bright. It might not rain today. 9. AP Might we just interrupt for a moment? 10. POJay may be coming to see us tomorrow. Bài 2: Sắp xếp các từ đã cho thành câu đúng. 1. airport/He/be/the/waiting/us/may/at/for. He may be waiting for us at the airport. 2. might/John/your/come/party/to. John might come to your party. 3. room/I/the/May/leave? May I leave the room. 4. your/I/May/eraser/use/,/please/?/Yes/,you/course/of/may. May I use your eraser, please? Yes, of course you may. 5. that/touch/Don’t/ write/it/be/because/dangerous/might. Don’t touch that wire because it might be dangerous. 6. is/No One/to/go/allowed/into/building/that/,/may/go/you/not/inside/. No one is allowed to go into that building, you may not go inside. 7. applying/is/for/the/a/He/job/at/university/,/get/he/it/might

181

182

He is applying for a job at the university, he might get it. 8. yesterday/Sheila/go/sick/work/didn’t/,/to/she/be/might/. Sheila didn’t go to work yesterday, she might be sick. 9. bomb/may/it/a/be It may be a bomb. 10. put/I/the/May/on/TV? May I put the TV on? Bài 3: Dựa vào những từ gợi ý, dùng might/might not(mighn’t) để viết thành câu hoàn chỉnh. 1. I/go to the party. I might go to the party. 2. She/not talk to him. She might not talk to him. 3. They/lose the game. They might lose the game. 4. Everybody/come to my concert. Everybody might come to my concert. 5. The government/not win the election. The government might not win the election. 6. The school/not win the competition. The school might not win the competition. 7. The singer/become famous. The singer might become famous. 8. He/not break a world record. He might not break a world record. 9. My father/work in a different country My father might work in a different country. 10. I /not become president of a country. I might not become president of a country BÀI TẬP VẬN DỤNG CƠ BẢN. Bài 4: Sắp xếp các từ sau để tạo thành câu hỏi gián tiếp hoàn chỉnh. 1. asked/was/how much/that/Tom/computer Tom asked how much that computer was. 2. had/to know/the officer/if/wanted/the keys/I The officer wanted to know if I had the keys. 3. Ann/hadn’t come/why/to her party/asked/Sam/he Annasked Sam why he hadn’t come to the party. 4. asked/Jane/for her holidays/she/was going/he/where He asked Jane where she was going for her holidays. 5. me/English/asked/I/spoke/He/if He asked me if I spoke English. 6. old/asked/He/her/how/was/mother He asked how old her mother was. 7. British/was/asked/whether/He/I/me/American/or He asked me whether I was British or American. 8. Boy/The asked/the/where/lived/policeman/be The policeman asked the boy where he lived. 9. Had/Bristol/She/I/been/asked/to/before/if She asked if I had been to Bristol before. 10. The/asked/time/train/She/what/arrived. She asked what time the train arrived. 183

Bài 5: Khoanh tròn vào phương án đúng. 1. Tourist: “Where is the post office?” A tourist asked me where ............................... A. the post office has B. the post office was C. is the post office D. was the post office 2. Mom: “It’s 2 a.m; what are you doing in the kitchen?” Mom wanted to know what ...................... in. C. I was doing D. am I doing A. was I doing B. I do 3. Dad: “Why did you come home so late last night?” Dad wanted to know ................ home very late the night before. A.why did I come B. if I come C. if I came D. why I had come 4. Jane: “Have you ever been to Australia?” Jane asked me .......................to Australia A. if I’m ever going C. have I ever been D. had I ever been B. if I’d ever been 5. Joe: “Could you sing when you were five?” He asked me.................when I was five A. can I sing B. if I can sing C. could I sing D. if I could sing 6. Mother: “When are you going to do your homework?” Mother asked me when ...........to do my homework. C. am I going D. I’ll be going A. was I going B. I was going 7. Allen: “How many songs had John Lennon written before he died?” Allen wanted to know how many songs .................. before his death. B. John Lennon was writing A. John Lennon had written C. was John Lennon writing D. had John Lennon written 8. Janet: “Were you working at 8p.m last night?” Janet asked me ................... at 8p.m the other night. A. if I’m working B. if I’d been working C. was I working D. had I been working 9. Dad: “Have you been attending classes regularly?” Dad asked me ...................attending classes regularly. A. if I’d be B. had I been D. have I ben C. if I’d been 10. Mario: “What should I do to improve my English?” Mario asked his teacher what ........... to improve his English. B. he would do C. shall he do D. should he do A. he should do 11. Jim: “How much does your sister earn?” Jim wanted to know how much................. A. my sister has earned B. did my sister earn C. does my sister earn D. my sister earned 12. Joe: “Could you sing when you were five?” He asked me ....................when I was five. A. can I sing B. if I can sing C. could I sing D. if I could sing 13. Mary: “Are you able to swim?” Mary asked me ........................to swim. A. if I have been able B. am I able D. will be able C. if I was able 14. Tourist: “When was that castle built?” The tourist asked the guide when ................... A. had the castle been built B. the castle had been built C. the castle was being built D. was the castle built 15. Sue: “May I sleep at Lee’s house overnight?” Sue asked her mother ........................ at her friend’s house overnight B. could she sleep A. if she might sleep C. can she sleep D. if she had to sleep Bài 6: Chuyển các câu hỏi trực tiếp dạng Yes-No questions dưới đây thành câu hỏi gián tiếp. Ví dụ: “Is this my birthday cake?” →Peter asked Mary if that was his birthday cake. 1. “Will you send me an e-mail?” Marty to Kim Marty asked Kim if she would send him an e-mail. 2. “Were you driving your car when you had an accident?” The police to Mr Lloyd The police asked Mr. Lloyd if he was driving /had been driving his car when he had an accident 3. “Did you give up smoking last month?” The doctor to Mrs Smith The doctor asked Mrs. Smith if she had given up smoking the previous month. 184

4. “Have you done the washing up?” Mum to me Mum asked me if I had done the washing up. 5. “Can’t you phone your mother at home?” The teacher to him The teacher asked Tim If he couldn’t phone his mother at home. 6. “Do you like sleeping? ” I to Greg I asked Greg if he liked sleeping. 7. “Has your house been redecorated? ” My neighbour to me My neighbour asked me if my house had been redecorated. 8. “Were you punished for being late? ” Mum to Ben Mum asked Ben if he had been punished for being late. 9. “Do I have to move the lawn in our garden today? ” Tom to his wife Tom asked his wife if he had to move the lawn in our garden that day. 10. “Are they taking the dog for a walk now? ” Kate to me Kate asked me if they were taking the dog for a walk then. Bài 7: Chuyển các câu hỏi trực tiếp dạng Wh-questions dưới đây thành câu hỏi gián tiếp. Ví dụ: Who is this flower for? →Mary asks Peter who that flower is for. 1. “What’s your name? ” The officer to Sam The officer asked Sam what his name was. 2. “How could you drive here in this storm?” Linda to the writer Linda asked the writer how he could drive there in that storm. 3. “Why are you wearing this awful shirt?” The boss to Mr Grey The boss asked Mr. Grey why he was wearing that awful shirt. 4. “When will the lunch be ready?” Tina to her mum Tina asked her mum when the lunch would be ready. 5. “How did you try to cope with this problem? ” The psychologist to Sylvie. The psychologist asked Sylvie how she had tried to cope with that problem. 6. “When did you find this great book? ” The teacher to Jack The teacher asked Jack when he had found that great book. 7. “Where are you from? ” Mike to Sam Mike asked Sam where he was from. 8. “How many apples have you eaten today?” Mum to Paul Mum asked Paul how many apples he had eaten that day. 9. “What can I do for you? ” The greengrocer to Mrs Hill The greengrocer asked Mrs Hill what she/he could do for her. 10. “Where is my tie? ” Dad to the children. Dad asked the children where his tie was. Bài 8: Chuyển các câu hỏi trực tiếp dưới đây thành câu hỏi gián tiếp. 1. “Have you done your homework yet, Peter?” Mum wanted to know if Peter had already done his homework . 2. “Where are you going to spend your holiday this summer, Sue?” Mary asked Sue where she was going to spend her holiday that summer 3. “Do you know how long it is from London to Cambridge?” Tom asked me if I knew how long it was from London to Cambridge. 4. “Will you phone me as soon as you arrive in Oxford, Carol?” Cindy asked Carol if she would phone her as soon as she arrived in Oxford 5. “Did the children play football in the park yesterday? ” Grandma was interested in knowing if the children had played football in the park the previous day/the day before. 6. “How much does the ticket for the concert cost? ” Father wanted to know how much the ticket for the concert cost. 185

7. “Can you help me with the housework tomorrow, Linda?” He asked Linda if she could help him with the housework the next/following day. 8. “What time does the new TV series begin tonight?” Terry asked what time the new TV series began that night. 9. “Are you going to buy a new computer next month, Lewis?” I wanted to know if Lewis was going to buy a new computer the next/following month 10. “When has Tim started working this morning?” Mr. Smith asked his secretary when Tim had started working that morning 11. “Is Sue coming to the library with you, Paul?” Tina asked Paul if Sue was coming to the library with him. 12. “Why haven’t you sent me an email while you were in London?” Dave wanted to know why I hadn’t sent him an email while I had been in London 13. “Could you swim when you were six, Tony? ” The P.E teacher asked Tony if he was able to swim when he was six. 14. “What have you been doing at school this morning, Charles ?” Dad was interested in knowing what Charles had been doing at school that morning 15. “Are you revising for tomorrow exam?” The teacher asked the students if they were revising for the next/following day’s exam. 16. “How often do you play chess with your brother, Alice?” Sam wanted to know how often Alice played chess with her brother. BÀI TẬP TỔNG HỢP NÂNG CAO. Bài 9: Chọn phương án đúng nhất. 1. “What has Daddy made for dinner ? ” asked Simon. A. Simon asked what Daddy had made for dinner. B. Simon asked what Daddy have made for dinner. C. Simon asked what Daddy has made for dinner. 2. “Who won the match? ” asked Monica. A. Monica asked who had won the match. B. Monica asked who have won the match. C. Monica asked who has won the match. 3. “Has Sarah ever been to Siena ? ” he asked. A. He asked whether Sarah had never been to Siena. B. He asked whether Sarah had ever been to Siena. C. He asked whether Sarah has never been to Siena. 4. “Do you like fried eggs?”Anne asked David A. Anne asked David whether he like fried eggs. B. Anne asked David if he like fried eggs. C. Anne asked David if he liked fried eggs. 5. “Can they play the piano?” she asked A. She asked if they could play the piano. B. She asked if they can play the piano. C. She asked whether they can play the piano. 6. “Have you ever been to Lisbon? ”Luis asked Paul. A. Luis asked Paul whether he has ever been to Lisbon. B. Luis asked Paul whether he had ever been to Lisbon. C. Luis asked Paul whether he had never been to Lisbon. 7. “Can I use your mobile, John? ” asked Sarah. A. Sarah asked John if she can use his mobile. B. Sarah asked John if she could use her mobile. C. Sarah asked John if she could use his mobile. 186

8. “Are we going out tonight?” asked Bob. A. Bob asked if/whether they were going out this night. B. Bob asked whether they were going out that night. C. Bob asked whether they are going out that night. 9. “Is the Pope a Catholic?” asked JK A.JK asked whether the Pope be a Catholic B. JK asked if the Pope be a Catholic C. JK asked if the Pope was a Catholic 10. “Where do bears live?” asked George. A. George asked where bears lived. B. George asked where bears lives. C. George asked where lived bears. Bài 10. Đọc đoạn hội thoại dưới đây và tường thuật lại dưới dạng câu gián tiếp. Mike: “What are you doing here, Liz? I haven’t seen you since June.” Liz: “I’ve just come back from my holiday in Ireland” Mike: “Did you enjoy it?” Liz: “I love Ireland. And the Irish people were so friendly” Mike: “Did you go to the Wicklow Mountains?” Liz: “It was my first trip. I can show you some pictures. Are you doing anything tomorrow?” Mike: “I must arrange a couple of things. But I am free tonight.” Liz: “You might come to my place. What time shall we meet?” Mike: “I’ll be there at eight. Is it all right?” 1. Mike asked Liz what she was doing there. And he said he had not seen her since June. 2. Liz explained that she had just come back from her holiday in Ireland. 3. Mike wondered if /whether she had enjoyed it 4. Liz told him that she loved Irelandand that the Irish people had been so friendly. 5. Mike wanted to know if/whether she had gone to Wicklow Mountains. 6. Liz said that it had been her first trip and that she could show him some pictures. 7. And then she asked him if he was doing something the next day/the following day. 8. Mike explained that he must/had to arrange a couple of things 9. But he added that he was free at night. 10. Liz suggested that he might come to her placeand asked him what time they would meet. 11. Mike said he would be there at eight. 12. And then he asked if/whether it was all right. Bài 11: Chọn dạng động từ đúng trong những câu trực tiếp dưới đây. 1. Helen asked me if I liked visiting old buildings. ‘Do you like/Did you like visiting old buildings?’ asked Helen. 2. Bill asked Mary if she had done anything the previous weekend. ‘Have you done anything/Did you do anythinglast weekend?’ 3. The policeman asked me if the car belong to you me. ‘Does this car belong/Did this car belong to you?’asked the policeman. 4. Fiona asked me if I had seen her umbrella anywhere. ‘Did you see/Have you seenmy umbrella anywhere ?’ asked Fiona. 5. Joe asked Tina when she would get back. ‘When will you get/have you got back?’asked Joe. 6. Eddie asked Steve who he had been to the cinema with. ‘Who did you go/had you beento the cinema with?’ asked Eddie. 7. My parents asked me what time I had got home the night before. ‘What time did you get/have you got home last night?’ my parents asked. 8. David asked a passer-by f it was the right road for Hastings. 187

Is this/Was this the right road for Hastings? Asked David. TEST 1 UNNIT 12 I. 1. D 6. B

2. C 7. A

3. B 8. C

4. D 9. D

5. A 10. C

1. A

2. D

3. B

4. C

5. D

1. D 6. C

2. B 7. D

3. A 8. C

4. B 9. A

5. D 10. B

1. B 6. B 11. A 16. C

2. B 7. B 12. C 17. A

3. B 8. A 13. A 18. B

4. D 9. C 14. D 19. A

5. A 10. B 15. A 20. D

II. III.

IV.

V. 1. around 5. light

2. seems 6. between

3. see 7. becomes

4. earth 8. month

VI. 1. A

2. B

3. C

4. D

5. A

1. C 6. A 6. B

2. B 7. C 7. C

3. A 8. B 8. D

4. B 9. C 9. D

5. D 10. D 10. B

VII.

VIII. 1. We don’t know where to put the sofa. 2. The rules didn’t specify who to speak in case of an emergency. 3. Mai wondered how to ride the scooter. 4. Let us decide when to start the project. 5. Could you tell me where to find a good hotel? 6. We must find out what to do next. 7. A good dictionary tells you how to pronounce the words. 8. We are not sure who to meet at the entrance. 9. I can’t remember when to turn off the oven. 10. Do you know what to look for? IX. 1. Mr. Smith asked where I was going on my vacation that year. 2. She asked if the mechanics had finished repairing his car. 3. She asked why David had been looking so miserable lately. 4. I asked my friend if anyone had been hurt in the car accident the previous month. 5. She asked me how old I was then. 6. She asked her if she had been to town that day 7. John asked Mary how long it took her to get to London. 8. The policeman asked the little girl what her name was. 9. Mr. Green asked his secretary who she had talked to a few minutes before. 10. Paul asked Mary if she could swim. 11. He asked where he could find her in that town. 12. She asked her son if he knew which the cup was he had used. 13. Helen asked Jack what he had said. 188

14. She asked him why he hadn’t got up early this morning. 15. He asked if it would rain that night. 16. Dr. Nelson said that every weekend, the astronauts could have private video- conferences with their families on the Earth. 17. Nick asked his teacher if/ whether the astronauts had ever forgotten anything from the Earth. 18. The teacher told Nick that the astronauts on the ISS used a 3-D printer on board to print certain objects. 19. Nga asked Dr. Nelson where we/ they could look for life. 20. The teacher said that Ganymede, the largest moon of Jupiter, had a large salt water ocean. X. 1. He said to her she was his friend. 2. Johnny said to his mother he didn’t know how to do that exercise. 3. My brother advised me not to come back before one o’clock. 4. Mrs Brown told her daughter to cook it in butter. 5. The pupils asked their teacher to give them better marks. 6. My friend asked me if I was going to leave the day after. 7. My mother asked me if I had done my homework. 8. I asked Bill what time he had gone to bed the night before. 9. Paul said that he had to go home then. 10. The policeman said that there was an accident. 11. The children said that they were waiting for the school bus. 12. Mr Brown asked me if I had to go then. 13. Tom asked if I was going to visit my aunt the next day. 14. The teacher asked his students to listen to him and not to make any noise. 15. Mary told Helen she was tired of eating fish. 16. Peter told the sun always rises/rose in the east. 17. Sammy told Jean that he didn’t steal/hadn’t stolen her coat the day before. 18. Miss Lan asked us to do our homework every day. 19. Billy asked his teacher if they would read the story. 20. Vicky said she didn’t know where Alice was. 21. Mary asked me if I could tell her why I was so sad. 22. Jane asked her friend to find out when he last wrote to her. 23. She urged her daughter to decide what she wanted to do. XI. 1. Aliens may have a hard container for the brain. 2. They may have two eyes, a nose and a mouth like us. 3. Their eyes might be bug-like, and the nose might not be in the middle of the face. 4. Besides teeth, aliens might have other systems of eating. 5. They may have two arms, but the arms may have suckers to pick up small objects. 6. Their hand might have only three or four fingers. 7. The number of joints might be greater, and the direction of bending might be different. XII. 1. A 2. D 3. C 4. D 5. B

TEST 2 UNIT 12 I. Oo painful, skillful, fearless, spotless, harmful, thoughtful, cloudless, breathless, tasteless, faithful Ooo powerful, wonderful, bottomless, leaderless, effortless, motionless oOo disgraceful, delightful, successful, respectful, resourceful 189

oOoo expressionless, directionless ooOo uneventful, disrespectful II. 1. C 2. A 3. A 4. C 5. D III. 6. C 7. B 8. C 9. D 10. D 11. A 12. C 13. D 14. C 15. B IV. 1. D 2. F 3. H 4. E 5. B 6. A 7. J 8. I 9. G 10. C V. 1. system 2. atmosphere 3. conditions 4. difference 5. clouds 6. ocean 7. kind 8. life VI. 1. Earth 2. ordinary 3. billion 4. universe 5. intelligent 6. believe 7. numbers 8. in 9. spaceship 10. nearest VII. 1. A 2. C 3. C 4. B 5. A 6. B 7. D 8. B VIII. 1. B 2. A 3. C 4. D 5. A 6. B 7. C 8. C 9. D 10. B IX. 1. T 2. T 3. T 4. F 5. F 6. T 7. F 8. T X. 1. C 2. A 3. E 4. B 5. D 6. Pluto was discovered by Clyde Tombaugh in 1930. 7. Because it has solid surfaces but its mass is icy material. 8. It traveled more than 3.6 billion miles to take the photos. 9. Because huge mountains on Pluto are made of water ice. 10.The New Horizon’s mission makes the United States the first nation to send a space probe to every planet from Mercury to Pluto. XI. 1. A 2. C 3. D 4. B 5. A 6. D 7. B 8. B 9. C 10. A XII. 1. True 2. True 3. False 4. False 5. False XIII. 1. D 2. A 3. B 4. C 5. A XIV. 1. It is Neptune’s largest moon. 2. It might make an interesting place to set up a space colony. 3. There has been only one. 4. We can see smooth areas next to volcanos. 5. They are formed by clouds of dust and nitrogen gas which erupt from the volcanos. XV. 1. Nhi said space offered unique pleasures including the view and zero gravity activities. 2. Duong thought that space travel was risky and expensive. 3. Mai asked if/ whether Enceladus would provide a habitable environment for life. 4. Nick asked when the flyby took place. 5. Mi asked what scientists discovered from the photos of Saturn’s moon – Enceladus. XVI. 1. Dr. Nelson said the heat from its sun had made Kepler-452b lose its oceans. 2. Mai asked how old was Kepler-452b – the Earth’s cousin. 3. Nick said that the recycling system of the ISS supplied 4 liters of water a day. 190

4. Duong asked Mi how the astronauts could wash their hair. 5. Mi said that they used no-rinse shampoo and a towel to wash their hair. 6. Phong said that many thousand people had seen a UFO hovering around the International Space Station the previous year/ the year before. XVII. 1. Dr. Nelson said that every weekend the astronauts could have private video-conferences with their families on the Earth. 2. Nick asked his teacher if/ whether the astronauts had ever forgotten anything from the Earth. 3. The teacher told Nick that the astronauts on the ISS used a 3-D printer on board to print certain objects. 4. Mai asked Dr. Nelson where we/they could look for life. 5. The teacher said that Ganymede, the largest moon of Jupiter, had a large salt water ocean. 6. Mi asked the teacher if/ whether Mars had ice under its surface. TEST 3 UNIT 12 I. Mark the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the word whose main stress is placed differently from the rest. 1. C 2. C 3. A 4. A 5. C II. Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others. 1. C 2. A 3. C 4. A 5. A III. Mark the letter A, B, C, or D to indicate the word whose main stress is placed differently from the rest. 1. B 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. B IV. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D in each line. 1. B 2. C 3. D 4. C 5. B 6. C 7. B 8. B 9. A 10. D V. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D in each line. 1. A 2. C 3. D 4. A 5. A 6. C 7. A VI. Each of the sentences below has at least one mistake. Identify and correct the mistakes. 1. B- to finish 2. B- to take 3. B- of going 4. B- sing 5. D- mother 6. A- had 7. B- had 8. C- my VII. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D in each line. 1. A 2. B 3. C 4. D 5. B 6. C 7. C VIII. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D in each line. 1. A 2. B 3. B 4. C 5. D 6. C IX. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D. 1. A 2. B 3. C 4. C 5. D 6. D 7. C 8. A 9. A 10. D X. Match the terms with the suitable definitions. 1. d 2. e 3. c 4. b 5. a XI. Read the text and answer the questions. 1. It’s to discover whether/if other planets support life or not. 2. In 2009. 3. It’s to find habitable planets. 4. It has discovered five new Earth-sized planets. 5. No, they aren’t. 6. At least three years (and possibly longer). 7. They are there to be liquid water (not frozen or gas) so the distance from the planet’s sun and suitable temperature, the correct amount of air. 8. No, it’s half the size of earth. 191

9. Yes, it is. 10.No, it isn’t. XII. Read the text and decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F). 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. T XIII. Read the following and mark the letter A, B, C or D to indicate correct answer to each of the questions. 1. B 2. B 3. D 4. C 5. B XIV. Read the text again and decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F). 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T XV. Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meaning of the first sentence. 1. He told them to open their books. 2. Jim asked Linda where she was going. 3. John asked me which way they had gone. 4. I told her to bring it back if it didn’t fit. 5. She told us not to try to open it then. 6. I asked her whether/ if it was going to be a fine day that day. 7. She said that he was not at home. 8. The girl wanted to know whether/ if the bus station was far away. 9. Tony told Ann not to stay out late. 10.He asked her to let him borrow her bike. XVI. Rewrite the following sentences without changing the meaning of the first sentence. 1. She wanted to know whether I was going by train. 2. She asked us not to use too much hot water. 3. She invited me to come to her party. 4. She told them not to do it again. 5. She asked whether/ if Mr. Brown sent the potatoes to me. 6. She told the boys not to get their shoes dirty. 7. Mary asked what Peter wanted for lunch that day. 8. Peter asked Jean whether/ if he could borrow her typewriter. 9. The office manager wondered why he hadn’t got a XVII. Complete the second sentences without changing the meaning of the first sentences. 1. The doctor advised me not to lose weight. 2. Mary suggested going to the park. 3. Jack denied having broken the car. 4. She accused Michael of telling a lie. 5. Jane apologized for not going to Jack’s birthday party next Sunday evening. 6. Katarina refused to help me with my homework. 7. John invited me to come to his party. 8. Mr. Brown warned the children not playing on the street. 9. They invited me to come on a picnic with them. 10.He asked me not to tell anybody what happened. TEST 1 FOR UNIT 10,11,12 I. 1. D 2. C 3. A 4. D 5. B II. 6. C 7. B 8. A 9. B 10. D 11. C 12. D 13. C 14. C 15. B III. 1. a smartphone and a landline phone 2.a smartphone, a laptop, and a tablet computer 192

3. a smartphone, a laptop, and a tablet computer 4. a smartphone, a laptop, and a tablet computer 5 a smartphone, a laptop, and a tablet computer 6. an internet connection, and a Wi-Fi connection 7. a smartphone, a laptop, and a tablet computer 8. an internet connection, and a Wi-Fi connection 9. an internet connection, and a Wi-Fi connection 10. a social network IV. 1. are 2. will come 3 have wondered 4. will be taking 5. will have learned 6. will have discovered 7. will be looking for 8. will have travelled 9. will have improved 10. will have developed V. 1.B 2. D 3. A 4. D 5. D 6. B 7. C 8. B VI. 1. Netiquette is the etiquette or good manners of using the Internet. 2. Being friendly and polite. 3. We should ask someoneâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s permission before posting anything about them on the web. 4. We should remove any personal information like their name and email address. 5. We can block that person who is rude in cyberspace, or talk to a trusted adult about the matter.

4. Now Skype is being used to call for others without paying money.

TEST 2 FOR UNIT 10,11,12 Mark the letter A, B, C or D to indicate the word whose main stress is placed differently from the rest. 1. A 2. D 3. B 4. D II. Find the word which has a different sound in the underlined part. 1. A 2. B 3. A 4. C III. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D in each line. 1. A 2. B 3. D 4. B 5. C 6. A 7. C 8. D IV. Give the correct form of the verbs in the brackets. 1. is repairing 2. did â&#x20AC;Ś do/ was watching/ was playing 3. are crossing/ are 4. will be doing 5. takes V. Fill each blank with the correct form of the word given in capital letters. 1. B 2. C 3. B 4. C 5. D 6. A VI. Read the text again and decide whether the following statements are true (T) or false (F). 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T VII. Complete the second sentences without changing the meaning of the first. 1. The teacher told the boys not to draw on the wall. 2. The nurse asked Mrs. Bingley when her little boy had been born. 3. The doctor advised Mr. Robert to take more exercise. 4. Anna asked her mother if she could have a new bicycle. VIII. Change these sentences into passive voice. 1. Body language is usually used by dogs to communicate with their owners and other dogs. 2. - He will be sent an email about next week's work tomorrow. - An email about next week's work will be sent to him tomorrow. 3. A video conference about environmental protection was organized. I.

193

194